Safety Products Presence Sensing Safety Devices Interlock Switches Safety Relays Trapped Key Interlock Switches Emergency Stop Devices Position (Limit) Switches Safety PLCs Contactors & Control Relays IEC Load Switches Two-Hand Control Devices Safety Isolation Systems Applied Safety Solutions Connection Systems Hazardous Location Switches MobileView™ Guard Terminal
New in this Catalogue
Atlas™ 5 Interlock Switches Page 3-32
Ensign™ 3 Interlock Switches Page 3-74
Minotaur MSR132E Safety Relays Minotaur MSR30RT/RTP Page 4-60 Safety Relays Page 4-26
440G-MT Interlock Switches Page 3-36 Safety Wired T-Port & Distribution Box Connection Systems 15-4, 15-5, 15-8
Minotaur MSR238 Safety Relays Page 4-82
Slamlock™ Electrical Prosafe™ Trapped Interlock Switches Page 5-26
SafeZone™ Presence Sensing Safety Devices Page 2-68
Small Plastic Senator™ Position (Limit) Switches Page 7-2
ElectroGuard™ Safety Isolation System Page 12-2 Large Metal Senator™ Position (Limit) Switches Page 7-8 Lifeline™ 4 Emergency Stop Devices Page 6-8
SafeEdge™ Presence Sensing Safety Devices Page 2-94
STFPro™ Applied Safety Solutions 13-7 Machine Safety Services Applied Safety Solutions 13-2
Compact PressMaster™ Applied Safety Solutions 13-8
StamPro™ Applied Safety Solutions 13-5
GuardShield™ Presence Sensing Safety Devices Page 2-8
FeederPro™ Applied Safety Solutions 13-6
PlusProducts included in the Safety Products Catalog Supplement (S114-CA002A-EN-P) and IEC Load Switches also published in the Industrial Control catalogue (A113 – March 2000).
General
General Safety Guidelines and Metric Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Terms and Conditions of Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Maintenance of Industrial Control Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 IEC Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 NEMA Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Safety Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Presence Sensing Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Emergency Stop Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Position (Limit) Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Safety PLCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Contactors & Control Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 IEC Load Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Two-Hand Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Safety Isolation Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Applied Safety Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Connection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 MobileView Guard Terminal Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Safeguarding Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Catalogue Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Comprehensive Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Sales Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Important User Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards. The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this supplement are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability including intellectual property liability, for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication. Related Safety Information
The installer is responsible for the safety of the entire installed control system and for meeting all applicable laws, codes, and safety requirements. ATTENTION: As the installer of this control system, you must be knowledgeable of other applicable standards pertaining to safety recommendations related to: • Machine Construction • General Electrical • Machine Guarding • Point of Operation guards, safety light curtains, mechanical guards, two-hand controls, and safety monitoring relays In addition to local laws and codes, you are responsible for the safety recommendations detailed in all applicable codes and standards including: • National Electric Code • OSHA Regulations • ANSI Standards
Terms and Conditions
For applicable "Terms and Conditions of Sale" please refer to page General-4.
IMPORTANT
Rockwell Automation reserves the right to make revisions to the material contained in this catalogue and specifically disclaims all liability for any incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnishing, performance or use of this material.
General
Safety Guidelines and Warranties/Metric Conversions Application Considerations Selection of Equipment — Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this catalogue, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards. The illustrations, charts and layout examples shown in this catalogue are intended solely for purposes of example. Because there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication. Allen-Bradley Publication SGI-1.1, “Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-state Control” (available from your local Allen-Bradley Sales Office) describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices which should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this catalogue. Service and Installation Conditions — Unless otherwise noted, the products described in this catalogue are designed to meet “usual service and installation conditions” as defined in NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) Standards Publication — Part ICS 1-108. Open style devices must be provided with environmental protection by proper mounting in enclosures designed for specific application conditions. See pages 1-7 and 1-9 of this catalogue for information on enclosures and an explanation of the degrees of protection provided by the different types, based on NEMA Standards Publication 250 and IEC Publication 529, as applicable. Performance Data — Performance data given in this catalogue is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of accelerated testing at elevated stress levels, and the user should correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to Allen-Bradley WARRANTY and LIMIT OF LIABILITY (see Allen-Bradley Terms and Conditions of Sale on page 1-4).
From Inches (in.) Inches (in.) Feet (ft) Yards (yd.) Millimetres (mm) Centimetres (cm) Meters (m) Meters (m)
Metric Conversion Factors To Length Millimetres (mm) Centimetres (cm) Meters (m) Meters (m) Inches (in.) Inches (in.) Feet (ft.) Yards (yd.) Area
Square inches (in.2) 2
Multiply by 25.4 2.54 0.305 0.914 0.0394 0.394 3.28 1.09
Square millimetres (mm2) 2
645.0
Square inches (in. )
Square centimetres (cm )
6.45
Square feet (ft.2)
Square meters (m2)
0.0929
2
2
Square yards (yd. )
Square meters (m )
0.836
Square millimetres (mm2)
Square inches (in.2)
0.00155
Square centimetres (cm2)
Square inches (in.2)
0.155
Square meters (m2)
Square feet (ft.2)
10.8
Square meters (m2)
Square yards (yd.2) Weight Grams (g) Kilograms (kg) Ounces (oz.) Pounds (lb) Volume
1.20
Ounces (oz.) Pounds (lb) Grams (g) Kilograms (kg)
28.3 0.454 0.0353 2.20
Cubic inches (in.3)
Cubic centimetres (cm3)
16.4
Cubic feet (ft.3) Cubic inches (in.3)
Cubic meters (m3) Litres (L)
0.0164
Cubic feet (ft.3) Gallons (Imp) Gallons (US)
Litres (L) Litres (L) Litres (L)
Cubic centimetres (cm3) 3
Cubic inches (in.3)
0.0283 28.3 4.55 3.79 0.061
Cubic meters (m ) Litres (L)
Cubic feet (ft.3)
35.3
Cubic inches (in.3)
61.0
Litres (L) Litres (L) Litres (L)
Cubic feet (ft.3) Gallons (Imp) Gallons (US) Pressure Kilopascals (kPa) Bars (Bar) Pounds/square inch (psi) Pounds/square inch (psi) Torque Newton meters (Nm) Pound inch (lb in.) Temperature Degrees Celsius (°C) Degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
0.0353 0.220 0.264
Pounds/square inch (psi) Pounds/square inch (psi) Kilopascals (kPa) Bars (Bar) Pound inch (lb in.) Newton meters (Nm) Degrees Fahrenheit (°F) Degrees Celsius (°C)
6.89 0.0689 0.145 14.5 0.113 8.85 ! "
! Conversion Formula: 5/9 (°F – 32°F) = °C " Conversion Formula: 9/5 (°C) + 32°F = °F
General-3
General
Terms and Conditions of Sale These general terms and conditions of sale only apply to direct sales by the manufacturer or its affiliates. Sales by appointed distributors and other independent authorized resellers will be subject to terms and conditions of sale as may be separately established by each such distributor or reseller. Sales outside of North America, as well as sales of other Rockwell Automation products and services, also may be subject to separate or supplemental terms and conditions of sale. For further information, please consult Rockwell Automation/AllenBradley Sales Office.
C.
Factory Repair and Field Exchange: Seller warrants for a period of six (6) months from the date of invoice from Seller or its appointed distributor, as the case may be, that billable or nonwarranty factory-repaired or field-exchanged hardware Products furnished hereunder will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Products furnished on an exchange basis may be new or reconditioned.
D.
General — These general terms and conditions of sale (along with any directly associated written Seller specification or quotation) exclusively will govern the sale or licensing by Seller of all goods and services (including without limitation, hardware, firmware and software products, training, programming, maintenance, engineering, parts and repair services — collectively, the “Products”) furnished hereunder. No addition or modification to these terms and conditions will be binding on Seller unless agreed to in writing signed by an authorized representative at Seller’s headquarters. Seller objects to other terms and conditions that may be proposed by the customer not otherwise consistent with these or other terms and conditions set forth in Seller’s written specification, quotation or order acknowledgment.
Service: Seller warrants that Products comprised of services, including engineering and custom application programming services, whether provided on a fixed cost or time and material basis, will be performed in accordance with generally accepted industry practices to the extent such services are subject to written acceptance criteria agreed to in advance by Seller. All other warranties relative to provided services are disclaimed.
E.
Payment Terms — Net thirty (30) days from date of invoice with ongoing approved credit as determined by Seller. Seller reserves the right to suspend any further performance under this agreement or otherwise in the event payment is not made when due. No payment by offset is permitted unless approved by Seller.
Customer Specifications: Seller does not warrant and will not be liable for any design, materials or construction criteria furnished or specified by Customer and incorporated into the Products or for Products made by or source from other manufacturers or vendors specified by Customer. Any warranty applicable to such Customer-specified Products will be limited solely to the warranty, if any, extended by the original manufacturer or vendor other than Seller to the extent permissible thereunder.
F.
Remedies: Satisfaction of the above warranties will be limited, at Seller’s option, to the replacement, repair, re-performance or modification of, or issuance of a credit for the purchase price of the Products involved, and where applicable, only after the return of such Products with Seller's consent. Replacement Products may be new or reconditioned. Any warranty service (consisting of time, travel and expenses related to such services) performed other than at Seller's factory, will be at Customer's expense.
G.
General: Warranty satisfaction is available only if (a) Seller is promptly notified in writing and (b) Seller's examination discloses, to its satisfaction, that any alleged defect has not been caused by misuse; neglect; improper installation, operation, maintenance, repair, alteration or modification; accident; or unusual deterioration or degradation of the Products or parts thereof due to physical environment or electrical or electromagnetic noise environment.
H.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE, OR PERFORMANCE OR APPLICATION WARRANTIES, AND EXTEND ONLY TO CUSTOMERS PURCHASING FROM SELLER OR ITS APPOINTED DISTRIBUTOR.
Delivery Terms — Delivery terms are Ex Works with respect to shipping costs, risk of loss and title transfer, except that title to all intellectual property rights associated with the Products (e.g., software and firmware) remains with Seller (or its suppliers and licensors), and such Products are made available or licensed only for use by the customer pursuant to this agreement or other Seller license agreement. Acknowledged shipping dates are approximate only and based on prompt receipt of all necessary information from the customer. Warranty — A.
B.
Hardware: Seller warrants for a period of one (1) year from the date of invoice from Seller or its appointed distributor, as the case may be, that hardware Products furnished hereunder will be of merchantable quality, free from defects in material, workmanship and design. Repaired or replacement Products provided under warranty are similarly warranted for a period of six (6) months from the date of shipment to Customer or the remainder of the original warranty term, whichever is longer. Software and Firmware: Unless otherwise provided in a Seller or third party license agreement, Seller warrants for a period of one (1) year from the date of invoice from Seller or its appointed distributor, as the case may be, that standard software or firmware Products furnished hereunder, when used with Sellerspecified hardware, will perform in accordance with published specifications prepared, approved, and issued by Seller’s headquarters. Seller makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, that the operation of the software or firmware Products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that the functions contained therein will meet or satisfy the Customer's intended use or requirements. Software and firmware corrections are warranted for a period of three (3) months from the date of shipment to Customer or the remainder of the original warranty term, whichever is longer.
General-4
Limit of Liability — IN NO EVENT WILL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. SELLER’S MAXIMUM CUMULATIVE LIABILITY RELATIVE TO ALL OTHER CLAIMS AND LIABILITIES, INCLUDING THAT WITH RESPECT TO
General
Terms and Conditions of Sale DIRECT DAMAGES AND OBLIGATIONS UNDER ANY INDEMNITY, WHETHER OR NOT INSURED, WILL NOT EXCEED THE COST OF THE PRODUCTS GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM OR LIABILITY. ANY ACTION AGAINST SELLER MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN EIGHTEEN (18) MONTHS AFTER THE CAUSE OF ACTION ACCRUES. THESE DISCLAIMERS AND LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF ANY OTHER CONTRARY PROVISION OF THE AGREEMENT AND REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, AND FURTHER WILL EXTEND TO THE BENEFIT OF SELLER’S VENDORS, APPOINTED DISTRIBUTORS AND OTHER AUTHORIZED RESELLERS AS THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES. EACH PROVISION IN THE AGREEMENT WHICH PROVIDES FOR A LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY OR CONDITION OR EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS SEVERABLE AND INDEPENDENT OF ANY OTHER PROVISION AND IS TO BE ENFORCED AS SUCH.
Quotations — Written quotations are valid for 30 days from issue unless otherwise stated. Verbal quotations expire the same day they are made. All typographical and clerical errors are subject to correction.
Intellectual Property — Seller will defend any suit or proceeding brought against the customer based on a claim that the design or construction of the Products sold or licensed hereunder by Seller infringe any United States or Canadian Patent, Copyright or Mask Work Registration, provided that the customer promptly notifies Seller of any such claim and resulting suit or proceeding in writing and further provided that, at Seller's expense, (a) the customer gives Seller the sole right to defend or control the defence of the suit or proceeding, including settlement, and (b) the customer provides all necessary information and assistance for that defence. Except for any consequential damages, Seller will pay all costs and damages finally awarded or agreed upon by Seller that are directly related to any such claim. In the event of a charge of infringement Seller’s obligation under the Agreement will be fulfilled if Seller, at its option and expense, either (i) procures for the customer the right to continue using such Products; (ii) replaces the same with noninfringing Products; (iii) modifies the same so as to make them noninfringing; or (iv) accepts the return of any infringing Products and refunds their purchase price. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Seller will have no liability with respect to any claim of infringement to the extent based on a configuration or modification incorporated in the Products at the request of the customer, on any process application into which the Products are integrated by the customer, or on use of the Products in combination with other equipment or products not supplied by Seller. THIS PARAGRAPH SETS FORTH SELLER’S ENTIRE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND INFRINGEMENT OF PATENTS BY ANY PRODUCTS (INCLUDING SOFTWARE PROGRAMS, EQUIPMENT OR PRODUCTS THEREOF) OR BY THEIR OPERATION, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS RELATING TO INFRINGEMENT OR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
Changes — Customer-requested order changes, including those affecting the identity, scope and delivery of the Products, must be documented in writing and are subject to Seller’s prior approval and adjustments in price, scheduling and other affected terms and conditions. In any event, Seller reserves the right to reject any change that it deems unsafe, technically inadvisable or inconsistent with established engineering or quality guidelines and standards, or incompatible with Seller's design or manufacturing capabilities.
Licensed Software and Firmware — Products comprised of software or firmware may be subject to additional terms and conditions set forth in separate Seller’s license agreements that will control to the extent necessary to resolve any conflict with the terms and conditions stated herein. Such Products will not be delivered or made available until the customer also agrees to the terms and conditions of such separate license agreements. Packing & Marking — Customer-specified packing or marking may be subject to additional charges not otherwise included in the price of the Products. Weights and Dimensions — Published weights and dimensions are estimates or approximate only and are not warranted.
Prices — Prices and other information shown in any Seller publication (including product catalogues and brochures) are subject to change without notice and confirmation by specific quotation. Such publications are not offers to sell and are maintained only as a source of general information. The customer will pay or reimburse Seller for all sales, use, excise or similar taxes. Products comprised of time and material services will be provided in accordance with Seller’s published service rates (including applicable overtime and travel expenses) in effect as of the date such services are provided, unless otherwise confirmed by Seller’s written quotation or order acknowledgment. Billable service time includes travel time to and from the job site and all time Seller’s representatives are available for work and waiting (whether on or off the job site) to perform the services.
Returns — All returns of Products will be subject to prior Seller approval. Non-warranty returns of unused and salable Products for credit will be subject to Seller’s return policies in effect at the time, including applicable restocking charges and other conditions of return. Products returned under warranty must be properly packed and shipped to Seller-specified locations. Shipping containers must be clearly marked per Seller’s instruction and shipped freight prepaid by the customer. Order Cancellation — An order may be cancelled by the customer prior to shipment only by written notice and upon payment to Seller of reasonable cancellation and restocking charges, including reimbursement for direct costs, plus allowances for disruption. Cancellation charges associated with orders for custom Products or Products specifically manufactured to the customer’s specification may equal the actual selling price of the Products. Seller has the right to cancel an order for cause at any time by written notice, and Seller will be entitled to cancellation and restocking charges as identified above. No termination by the customer for cause will be effective unless and until Seller has failed to correct such alleged cause within forty-five (45) days after receipt of the customer’s written notice specifying such cause. Force Majeure — Seller will not be liable for any loss, damage or delay arising out of its failure to perform hereunder due to causes beyond its reasonable control, including without limitation, acts of God or the customer, acts of civil or military authority, fires, strikes, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, war, riots, delays in transportation, or transportation embargoes. In the event of any such delay, Seller’s performance date(s) will be extended for that length of time as may be reasonably necessary to compensate for the delay. Government Clauses and Contracts — No government contract regulations or clauses will apply to the Products or this agreement or act to bind Seller unless specifically agreed to by Seller in writing at Seller’s headquarters. Products sold or licensed hereunder are not intended to be used, nor should they be used, in any nuclear-related application either as a “Basic Component” under 10 CFR 21 (United States NRC) or otherwise under similar nuclear laws and regulations of this or any other country.
General-5
General
Terms and Conditions of Sale Export Control — Products and associated materials supplied or licensed under this agreement may be subject to various export laws and regulations. It is the responsibility of the exporter to comply with all such laws and regulations. Disputes — The parties will attempt in good faith promptly to resolve any dispute arising out of this agreement by negotiations between representatives who have authority to settle the controversy. If unsuccessful, the parties further will attempt in good faith to settle the dispute by non-binding third-party mediation, with fees and expenses of such mediation apportioned equally to each side. Any dispute not so resolved by negotiation or mediation may then be submitted to a court of competent jurisdiction in accordance with the terms of this agreement. These procedures are the exclusive procedures for the resolution of all such disputes between the parties. Governing Law — This agreement and all disputes arising thereunder will be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the internal laws of the state, province or other governmental jurisdiction in which Seller’s principal place of business resides, but specifically excluding the provisions of the 1980 UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sales of Goods.
General-6
Assignment — This agreement may not be assigned by either party without the written consent of the other, however, consent will not be required for internal transfers and assignments as between Seller and its parent corporations, subsidiaries or affiliates as part of a consolidation, merger or other form of corporate reorganization. Language — The parties acknowledge that they have required that this agreement be drawn up in English. Les parties reconnaissent avoir exigé la rédaction en anglais du Contrat. In the event of a conflict between the English and other language versions of this agreement, the English version will prevail.
General
Maintenance of Industrial Control Equipment ATTENTION: Servicing energized Industrial Control Equipment can be hazardous. Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock, burn, or unintended actuation of controlled equipment. Recommended practice is to disconnect and lockout control equipment from power sources, and release stored energy, if present. Refer to National Fire Protection Association Standard No. NFPA70E, Part II and (as applicable) OSHA rules for Control of Hazardous Energy Sources (Lockout/Tagout) and OSHA Electrical Safety Related Work Practices for safety related work practices, including procedural requirements for lockout/tagout, and appropriate work practices, personnel qualifications and training requirements where it is not feasible to de-energize and lockout or tagout electric circuits and equipment before working on or near exposed circuit parts. Periodic Inspection — Industrial control equipment should be inspected periodically. Inspection intervals should be based on environmental and operating conditions and adjusted as indicated by experience. An initial inspection within 3 to 4 months after installation is suggested. See National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standard No. ICS 1.3, Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Systems Equipment, for general guidelines for setting-up a periodic maintenance program. We suggest that a periodic maintenance program is set up. Some specific guidelines for Allen-Bradley products are listed below. Contamination — If inspection reveals that dust, dirt, moisture or other contamination has reached the control equipment, the cause must be eliminated. This could indicate an incorrectly selected or ineffective enclosure, unsealed enclosure openings (conduit or other) or incorrect operating procedures. Replace any improperly selected enclosure with one that is suitable for the environmental conditions — refer to NEMA Standard No. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment for enclosure type descriptions and test criteria. Replace any damaged or embrittled elastomer seals and repair or replace any other damaged or malfunctioning parts (e.g., hinges, fasteners, etc.). Dirty, wet or contaminated control devices must be replaced unless they can be cleaned effectively by vacuuming or wiping. Compressed air is not recommended for cleaning because it may displace dirt, dust, or debris into other parts or equipment, or damage delicate parts. Cooling Devices — Inspect blowers and fans used for forced air cooling. Replace any that have bent, chipped, or missing blades, or if the shaft does not turn freely. Apply power momentarily to check operation. If unit does not operate, check and replace wiring, fuse, or blower or fan motor as appropriate. Clean or change air filters as recommended in the product manual. Also, clean fins of heat exchangers so convection cooling is not impaired.
Hazardous Location Enclosures —
ATTENTION: Explosion hazard. Always disconnect power before opening enclosures in hazardous locations. Close and secure such enclosures before reapplying power. Location Enclosures —NEMA Types 7 & 9 enclosures require careful handling so machined flanges do not get damaged. For removable covers, remove the cover and set aside with machined surface up. For hinged covers, open the cover fully and restrain in the full open position if necessary. Clean and examine the flanges on both the body and cover before re-assemble. If there are scratches, nicks, grooves or rust on the mating surfaces, replace the body or cover as necessary. Examine all bolts and replace any that have damaged threads. Also check mating threads for damage and replace enclosure if necessary. Covers and bodies of some enclosures are manufactured as matched sets (not interchangeable). The manufacturer should be consulted before replacing a cover or body unless it is specified by the manufacturer as interchangeable.
Operating Mechanisms — Check for proper functioning and freedom from sticking or binding. Replace any broken, deformed or badly worn parts or assemblies according to individual product renewal parts lists. Check for, and re tighten securely, any loose fasteners. Lubricate if specified in individual product instructions. Note: Allen-Bradley magnetic starters, contactors and relays are designed to operate without lubrication — do not lubricate these devices because oil or grease on the pole faces (mating surfaces) of the operating magnet may cause the device to stick in the “ON” mode. Some parts of other devices are factory-lubricated — if lubrication during use or maintenance of these devices is needed, it will be specified in their individual instructions. If in doubt, consult your local Allen-Bradley Sales Office for information. Contacts — Check contacts for excessive wear and dirt accumulations. Vacuum or wipe contacts with a soft cloth if necessary to remove dirt. Contacts are not harmed by discoloration and slight pitting. Contacts should never be filed, as dressing only shortens contact life. Contact spray cleaners should not be used as their residue on magnet pole faces or in operating mechanisms may cause sticking, and on contacts can interfere with electrical continuity. Contacts should only be replaced after silver has become badly worn. Always replace contacts in complete sets to avoid misalignment and uneven contact pressure. Vacuum Contactors — Contacts of vacuum contactors are not visible, so contact wear must be checked indirectly. Vacuum bottles should be replaced when: The estimated number of operations equals one million, or The contact life line indicator shows need for replacement, or The vacuum bottle integrity tests show need for replacement. Replace all vacuum bottles in the contactor at the same time to avoid misalignment and uneven contact wear. If the vacuum bottles do not require replacement, check and adjust overtravel to the value listed on the maintenance instructions. Terminals — Loose connections in power circuits can cause overheating that can lead to equipment malfunction or failure. Loose connections in control circuits can cause control malfunctions. Loose bonding or grounding connections can increase hazards of electrical shock and contribute to electromagnetic interference (EMI). Check the tightness of all terminals and bus bar connections and tighten securely any loose connections. Replace any parts or wiring damaged by overheating, and any broken wires or bonding straps. Arc Hoods — Check for cracks, breaks, or deep erosion. Arc hoods and arc chutes should be replaced if damaged or deeply eroded.
General-7
General
Maintenance of Industrial Control Equipment Coils — If a coil exhibits evidence of overheating (cracked, melted or burned insulation), it must be replaced. In that event, check for and correct overvoltage or undervoltage conditions, which can cause coil failure. Be sure to clean any residue of melted coil insulation from other parts of the device or replace such parts. Batteries — Replace batteries periodically as specified in product manual or if a battery shows signs of electrolyte leakage. Use tools to handle batteries that have leaked electrolyte; most electrolytes are corrosive and can cause burns. Dispose of the old battery in accordance with instructions supplied with the new battery or as specified in the manual for the product. Pilot Lights — Replace any burned out lamps or damaged lenses. Photoelectric Switches — The lenses of photoelectric switches require periodic cleaning with a soft dry cloth. Reflective devices used in conjunction with photoelectric switches also require periodic cleaning. Do not use solvents or cleaning agents on the lenses or reflectors. Replace any damaged lenses and reflectors.
Solid State Devices —
ATTENTION: Use of other than factoryrecommended test equipment for solid-state controls may result in damage to the control or test equipment or unintended actuation of the controlled equipment. Refer to paragraph titled HIGH VOLTAGE TESTING. Solid-state devices require little more than a periodic visual inspection. Discoloured, charred or burned components may indicate the need to replace the component or circuit board. Necessary replacements should be made only at the PC board or plug-in component level. Printed circuit boards should be inspected to determine whether they are properly seated in the edge board connectors. Board locking tabs should also be in place. Solid-state devices must also be protected from contamination, and cooling provisions must be maintained — refer to paragraphs titled CONTAMINATION and COOLING DEVICES on previous page. Solvents should not be used on printed circuit boards.
General-8
High Voltage Testing — High voltage insulation resistance (IR) and dielectric withstanding voltage (DWV) tests should not be used to check solid-state control equipment. When measuring IR or DWV of electrical equipment such as transformers or motors, a solid-state device used for control or monitoring must be disconnected before performing the test. Even though no damage is readily apparent after an IR or DWV test, the solid-state devices are degraded and repeated application of high voltage can lead to failure. Locking and Interlocking Devices — Check these devices for proper working condition and capability of performing their intended functions. Make any necessary replacements only with Allen-Bradley renewal parts or kits. Adjust or repair only in accordance with Allen-Bradley instructions. Maintenance After a Fault Condition — Opening of the short circuit protective device (such as fuses or circuit breakers) in a properly coordinated motor branch circuit is an indication of a fault condition in excess of operating overload. Such conditions can cause damage to control equipment. Before restoring power, the fault condition must be corrected and any necessary repairs or replacements must be made to restore the control equipment to good working order. Refer to NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS-2, Part ICS2-302 for procedures. Replacements — Use only replacement parts and devices recommended by Allen-Bradley to maintain the integrity of the equipment. Make sure the parts are properly matched to the model, series and revision level of the equipment. Final Check Out — After maintenance or repair of industrial controls, always test the control system for proper functioning under controlled conditions that avoid hazards in the event of a control malfunction. For additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.3, PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE OF INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT, published by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, and NFPA70B, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE, published by the National Fire Protection Association.
General
IEC Enclosures Degree of Protection IEC Publication 529 describes standard Degrees of Protection that enclosures of a product are designed to provide when properly installed.
Summary The publication defines degrees of protection with respect to: • Persons • Equipment within the enclosure • Ingress of water It does not define: • Protection against risk of explosion • Environmental protection (e.g. against humidity, corrosive atmospheres or fluids, fungus or the ingress of vermin) Note: The IEC test requirements for Degrees of Protection against liquid
ingress refer only to water. Those products in this catalogue, which have a high degree of protection against ingress of liquid, in most cases include Nitrile seals. These have good resistance to a wide range of oils, coolants and cutting fluids. However, some of the available lubricants, hydraulic fluids and solvents can cause severe deterioration of Nitrile and other polymers. Some of the products listed are available with seals of Viton or other materials for improved resistance to such liquids. For specific advice on this subject refer to your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office see Section 21of this catalogue.
First Numeral !
Protection against ingress of water under test conditions specified in IEC 529.
0 Non-protected
0 Non-protected
1 Back of hand; objects greater
2 Vertically falling drops of
than 50 mm in diameter
3 Finger; objects greater than 12.5 mm in diameter
5 Tools or objects greater than
Abridged Descriptions of IEC Enclosure Test Requirements (Refer to IEC 529 for complete test specifications — e.g., test apparatus configuration; tolerances; etc. For Metric Conversion factors — see page 1-3.) Tests for Protection Against Access to Hazardous Parts (first characteristic numeral) The first characteristic numeral of the IP number indicates compliance with the following tests for the degree of protection against access to hazardous parts. It also indicates compliance with tests as shown in the next section for the degree of protection against solid foreign objects. The protection against access to hazardous parts is satisfactory if adequate clearance is kept between the specified access probe and hazardous parts. For voltage less than 1000V AC and 1500V DC, the access probe must not touch the hazardous live parts. For voltage exceeding 1000V AC and 1500V DC, the equipment must be capable of withstanding specified dielectric tests with the access probe in the most unfavourable position.
water
4 Vertically falling drops of water with enclosure tilted 15°
6 Spraying water
2.5 mm in diameter
7 Tools or objects greater than
8 Splashing water
1.0 mm in diameter
9 Dust-protected (dust may enter
10 Water jets
during specified test but must not interfere with operation of the equipment or impair safety)
11 Dusttight (no dust observable inside enclosure at end of test)
12 Powerful water jets 13 Temporary submersion 14 Continuous submersion
IEC Enclosure Classification The degree of protection is indicated by two letters (IP) and two numerals. International Standard IEC 529 contains descriptions and associated test requirements that define the degree of protection each numeral specifies. The table on the right indicates the general degree of protection — refer to the Abridged Descriptions of IEC Enclosure Test Requirements starting below. For complete test requirements refer to IEC 529.
Second Numeral !
Protection of persons against access to hazardous parts and protection against penetration of solid foreign objects.
Example: IP41 describes an enclosure that is designed to protect against the entry of tools or objects greater than 1 mm in diameter and to protect against vertically dripping water under specified test conditions.
Note: All first numerals and second numerals up to and including characteristic numeral 6, imply compliance also with the requirements for all lower characteristic numerals in their respective series (first or second). Second numerals 7 and 8 do not imply suitability for exposure to water jets (second characteristic numeral 5 or 6) unless dual coded; e.g., IP_5/ IP_7. ! The IEC standard permits use of certain supplementary letters with the characteristic numerals. If such letters are used, refer to IEC 529 for the explanation.
IP0_ — No test required. IP1_ — A rigid sphere 50 mm in diameter shall not completely pass through any opening. Force = 50 N. IP2_ — A jointed test finger 80 mm long and 12 mm in diameter may penetrate to its 80 mm length, but shall have adequate clearance as specified above, from hazardous live parts, in every possible position of the test finger as both joints are bent through an angle up to 90°. Force = 10 N. IP3_ — A test rod 2.5 mm in diameter shall not penetrate and adequate clearance shall be kept from hazardous live parts (as specified in table above). Force = 3 N. IP4_ — A test wire 1 mm in diameter shall not penetrate and adequate clearance shall be kept from hazardous live parts (as specified in table above). Force = 1 N.
General-9
General
IEC Enclosures IP5_ — A test wire 1 mm in diameter shall not penetrate and adequate clearance shall be kept from hazardous live parts (as specified in table above). Force = 1 N. IP6_ — A test wire 1 mm in diameter shall not penetrate and adequate clearance shall be kept from hazardous live parts (as specified in table on page 1-9). Force = 1 N. Tests for Protection Against Solid Foreign Objects (first characteristic numeral) For first numerals 1, 2, 3, and 4 the protection against solid foreign objects is satisfactory if the full diameter of the specified probe does not pass through any opening. Note that for first numerals 3 and 4 the probes are intended to simulate foreign objects which may be spherical. Where shape of the entry path leaves any doubt about ingress or a spherical object capable of motion, it may be necessary to examine drawings or to provide special access for the object probe. For first numerals 5 and 6 see test descriptions below for acceptance criteria. IP0_ — No test required. IP1_ — The full diameter of a rigid sphere 50 mm in diameter must not pass through any opening at a test force of 50 N. IP2_ — The full diameter of a rigid sphere 12.5 mm in diameter must not pass through any opening at a test force of 30 N. IP3_ — A rigid steel rod 2.5 mm in diameter must not pass through any opening at a test force of 3 N. IP4_ — A rigid steel wire 1 mm in diameter must not pass through any opening at a test force of 1 N. IP5_ — The test specimen is supported inside a specified dust chamber where talcum powder, able to pass through a square-meshed sieve with wire diameter 50 mm and width between wires 75 mm, is kept in suspension. Enclosures for equipment subject to thermal cycling effects (category 1) are vacuum pumped to a reduced internal pressure relative to the surrounding atmosphere: maximum depression = 2 kPa; maximum extraction rate = 60 volumes per hour. If extraction rate of 40 to 60 volumes/hr. is obtained, test is continued until 80 volumes have been drawn through or 8 hr. has elapsed. If extraction rate is less than 40 volumes/hr. at 20 kPa depression, test time = 8 hr. Enclosures for equipment not subject to thermal cycling effects and designated category 2 in the relevant product standard are tested for 8 hr. without vacuum pumping. Protection is satisfactory if talcum powder has not accumulated in a quantity or location such that, as with any other kind of dust, it could interfere with the correct operation of the equipment or impair safety; and no dust has been deposited where it could lead to tracking along creepage distances. IP6_ — All enclosures are tested as category 1, as specified above for IP5_. The protection is satisfactory if no deposit of
General-10
dust is observable inside the enclosure at the end of the test. Tests for Protection Against Water (second characteristic numeral) The second characteristic numeral of the IP number indicates compliance with the following tests for the degree of protection against water. For numerals 1 through 7, the protection is satisfactory if any water that has entered does not interfere with satisfactory operation, does not reach live parts not designed to operate when wet, and does not accumulate near a cable entry or enter the cable. For second numeral 8 the protection is satisfactory if no water has entered the enclosure. IP_0 — No test required. IP_1 — Water is dripped onto the enclosure from a “drip box” having spouts spaced on a 20 mm square pattern, at a “rainfall” rate of 1 mm/min. The enclosure is placed in its normal operating position under the drip box. Test time = 10 min. IP_2 — Water is dripped onto the enclosure from a “drip box” having spouts spaced on a 20 mm square pattern, at a “rainfall” rate of 3 mm/min. The enclosure is placed in 4 fixed positions tilted 15° from its normal operating position, under the drip box. Test time = 2.5 min. for each position of tilt. IP_3 — Water is sprayed onto all sides of the enclosure over an arc of 60° from vertical, using an oscillating tube device with spray holes 50 mm apart (or a hand-held nozzle for larger enclosures). Flow rate, oscillating tube device = 0.07 l/ min. per hole x number of holes; for hand-held nozzle = 10 l/min. Test time, oscillating tube = 10 min.; for hand-held nozzle = 1 min./m2 of enclosure surface area, 5 min. minimum. IP_4 — Same as test for IP_3 except spray covers an arc of 180° from vertical. IP_5 — Enclosure is sprayed from all practicable directions with a stream of water at 12.5 l/min. from a 6.3 mm nozzle from a distance of 2.5 to 3 m. Test time = 1 min./m2 of enclosure surface area to be sprayed, 3 min. minimum. IP_6 — Enclosure is sprayed from all practicable directions with a stream of water at 100 l/min. from a 12.5 mm nozzle from a distance of 2.5 to 3 m. Test time = 1 min./m2 of enclosure surface area to be sprayed, 3 min. minimum. IP_7 — Enclosure is immersed in water in its service position for 30 min. Lowest point of enclosures less than 850 mm tall = 1000 mm below surface of water. Highest point of enclosures more than 850 mm tall = 150 mm below surface of water. IP_8 — Test conditions are subject to agreement between manufacturer and user, but shall be at least as severe as those for IP_7
General
NEMA Enclosures Specify the Correct Enclosure for Your Motor Controls Type 1 General Purpose Surface Mounting Type 1 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against contact with the enclosed equipment in locations where unusual service conditions do not exist. The enclosures are designed to meet the rod entry and rust-resistance design tests. Enclosure is sheet steel, treated to resist corrosion. Type 1 Flush Mounting Type 1 Flush mounting enclosures for installation in machine frames and plaster wall. These enclosures are for similar applications and are designed to meet the same tests as Type 1 surface mounting. Type 3 Rainproof Dusttight Type 3 enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust, rain and sleet; and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet rain !, external icing ", dust, and rustresistance design tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation or internal icing. Type 3R Rainproof Type 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain, and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet rod entry, rain # external icing ", and rustresistance design tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as dust, internal condensation, or internal icing. Type 4 Watertight Type 4 enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet hosedown, dust, and external icing tests ". They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation or internal icing. Type 4X Non-Metallic, Corrosion-Resistant Type 4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet the hosedown, dust, external icing ", and corrosion-resistance design tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation or internal icing.
! " #
Type 6P For Prolonged Submersion at a Limited Depth Type 6P enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against the entry of water during prolonged submersion at a limited depth; and to be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet air pressure, external icing !, hosedown and corrosion-resistance design tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation or internal icing. Type 7 For Hazardous Gas Locations Type 7 enclosures are for indoor use in locations classified as Class I, Groups C or D, as defined in the U.S. National Electrical Code. Type 7 enclosures are designed to be capable of withstanding the pressures resulting from an internal explosion of specified gases, and contain such an explosion sufficiently that an explosive gas-air mixture existing in the atmosphere surrounding the enclosure will not be ignited. Enclosed heat generating devices are designed not to cause external surfaces to reach temperatures capable of igniting explosive gas-air mixtures in the surrounding atmosphere. Enclosures are designed to meet explosion, hydrostatic, and temperature design tests. Finish is a special corrosion-resistant, gray enamel. Type 9 For Hazardous Dust Locations Type 9 enclosures are intended for indoor use in locations classified as Class II, Groups E, F, or G, as defined in the U.S. National Electrical Code. Type 9 enclosures are designed to be capable of preventing the entrance of dust. Enclosed heat generating devices are designed not to cause external surfaces to reach temperatures capable of igniting or discolouring dust on the enclosure or igniting dust-air mixtures in the surrounding atmosphere. Enclosures are designed to meet dust penetration and temperature design tests, and aging of gaskets. The outside finish is a special corrosion-resistant gray enamel. Type 12 Dusttight Industrial Use Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping non-corrosive liquids. They are designed to meet drip ", dust, and rust-resistance tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation. Type 13 Oiltight Type 13 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, spraying of water, oil, and non corrosive coolant. They are designed to meet oil exclusion and rust-resistance design tests. They are not intended to provide protection against conditions such as internal condensation.
Evaluation criteria: No water has entered enclosure during specified test. Evaluation criteria: Undamaged after ice buildup during specified test has melted (Note: Not required to be operable while ice-laden. Evaluation criteria: No water shall have reached live parts, insulation or mechanisms.
General-11
General
NEMA Enclosures ENCLOSURES Refer to the brief descriptions below for the various types of enclosures offered by Allen-Bradley. See page 1-13 for selection criteria. For definitions, descriptions and test criteria, see National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. 250. Also see individual product listings within the AllenBradley catalogue for available enclosure types and for any additional information relating to these descriptions.
NOTE: Enclosures do not normally protect devices against conditions such as condensation, icing, corrosion or contamination that may occur within the enclosure or enter via the conduit or unsealed openings. Users must make adequate provisions to safe-guard against such conditions and satisfy themselves that the equipment is properly protected.
Selection Criteria Enclosures for Non hazardous Locations
For a Degree of Protection Against: Incidental contact with enclosed equipment Falling dirt Rust Circulating dust, lint, fibres and flyings " Windblown dust Falling liquids and light splashing Rain (Test evaluated per 6.4.2.1) Rain (Test evaluated per 6.4.2.2) Snow and sleet Hosedown and splashing water Occasional prolonged submersion Oil and coolant seepage Oil or coolant spraying and splashing Corrosive agents
! "
Type Outdoor Use 3R 3
For Indoor Use 1 12 13
Designed to Meet Tests No.! 6.2 6.2 6.8 6.5.1.2 (2) 6.5.1.1 (2) 6.3.2.2 6.4.2.1 6.4.2.2 6.6.2.2 6.7 6.11 (2) 6.3.2.2 6.12 6.9
% % %
% % % %
% % % %
%
%
% % %
%
% % % % % % % % %
% % % % % % % % % %
% % % % % % % % % %
% % % % % % % % % % %
%
%
%
%
%
%
%
Indoor or Outdoor 4 4X 6P
% %
See page 1-13 for abridged description of NEMA enclosure test requirements. Refer to NEMA Standards Publication No. 250 for complete test specifications. Non hazardous materials, not Class III ignitable or combustible.
Enclosures for Hazardous Locations (Division 1 or 2) ! For a Degree of Protection Against Atmospheres Typically Containing: # Acetylene
Designed to Meet Tests "
Class (National Electrical Code)
A
Explosion Test
I
%
I
%
Hydrogen, Manufactured Gas
7, Class I Group B
C
9, Class II Group D
E
F
G
%
Hydrostatic Test Diethyl Ether, Ethylene, Hydrogen Sulfide Acetone, Butane, Gasoline, Propane, Toluene
Temperature Test
Metal dusts and other combustible dusts with resistivity of less than 105 Ω-cm. Dust Penetration Test Carbon black, charcoal, coal or coke dusts Temperature Test with with resistivity between 102…108 Ω-cm Dust Blanket 5 Combustible dusts with resistivity of 10 Ωcm or greater Fibres, flyings
$
I
%
I
%
II II
% % %
II
%
III
%
! For indoor locations only, unless catalogued with additional NEMA Type enclosure number(s) suitable for outdoor use as shown in the table on this page. Some control devices (if so listed in the catalogue) are suitable for Division 2 hazardous location use in enclosures for non-hazardous locations. For explanation of CLASSES, DIVISIONS and GROUPS, refer to the National Electrical Code. Note: Classifications of hazardous locations are subject to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Refer to the National Electrical Code. " See abridged description of test requirements on page 1-13. For complete requirements, refer to UL Standard 698, compliance with which is required by NEMA enclosure standards. # For listing of additional materials and information noting the properties of liquids, gases and solids, refer to NFPA 497M-1991, Classification of Gases, Vapours, and Dusts for Electrical Equipment in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. $ UL 698 does not include test requirements for Class III. Products that meet Class II, Group G requirements are acceptable for Class III.
General-12
General
NEMA Enclosures Selection Criteria
shall be no rust except where protection is impractical (e.g., machined mating surfaces, sliding surfaces of hinges, shafts, etc.).
Abridged Description of NEMA Enclosure Test Requirements
6.9 Corrosion Protection — Sheet steel enclosures are evaluated per Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) 50, Part 13 (test for equivalent protection as G-90 commercial zinc coated sheet steel). Other materials per Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) 508, 6.9 or 6.10.
6.2 Rod Entry Test — A 3.18 mm (.125 in.) diameter rod must not be able to enter enclosure except at locations where nearest live part is more than 102 mm (4 in.) from an opening — such opening shall not permit a 13 mm (.5 in.) diameter rod to enter. 6.3 Drip Test — Water is dripped onto enclosure for 30 minutes from an overhead pan having uniformly spaced spouts, one every 12,900 mm2 (20 sq. in.) of pan area, each spout having a drip rate of 20 drops per minute. Evaluation 6.3.2.2: No water shall have entered enclosure. 6.4 Rain Test — Entire top and all exposed sides are sprayed with water at a pressure of 0.35 kg/cm2 (5 psi) from nozzles for one hour at a rate to cause water to rise 457 mm (18 in.) in a straight-sided pan beneath the enclosure. Evaluation 6.4.2.1: No water shall have reached live parts, insulation or mechanisms. Evaluation 6.4.2.2: No water shall have entered enclosure.
6.11 (2) Air Pressure Test (Alternate Method) — Enclosure is sub-merged in water at a pressure equal to water depth of 2 meters (6 ft), for 24 hours. No water shall enter enclosure. 6.12 Oil Exclusion Test — Enclosure is subjected to a stream of test liquid for 30 minutes from a 9.5 mm (.375 in) diameter nozzle at 7.57 litres (2 gallons) a minute. Water with 0.1% wetting agent is directed from all angles from a distance of 305 to 457 mm (12 to 18 in.), while any externally operated device is operated at 30 operations per minute. No test liquid shall enter the enclosure. Abridged Description of UL Standard 698 Test Requirements Explosion Test — During a series of tests in which gas-air mixtures of the specific gas, over its range of explosive concentrations, are ignited inside the enclosure, the enclosure shall prevent the passage of flame and sparks capable of igniting a similar gas-air mixture surrounding the enclosure. In addition, there shall be no mechanical damage to enclosed electrical mechanisms or the enclosure.
6.5.1.1 (2) Outdoor Dust Test (Alternate Method) — Enclosure and external mechanisms are subjected to a stream of water at 170.5 litres (45 gallons) per minute from a 25.4 mm (1 in.) diameter nozzle, directed at all joints from all angles from a distance of 3 to 3.7 meters (10 to 12 feet). Test time is 48 seconds times the test length (height + width + depth of enclosure in feet), or a minimum of 5 minutes. No water shall enter enclosure.
Hydrostatic Test — The enclosure shall withstand for 1 minute a hydrostatic test based on the maximum internal explosion pressure developed during the explosion tests, as follows: cast metal, four times the explosion pressure without rupture or permanent deformation; fabricated steel, twice the explosion pressure without permanent deformation and three times the explosion pressure without rupture. Exception: Hydrostatic tests may be omitted if calculations show safety factor of 5:1 for cast metal and 4:1 for fabricated steel.
6.5.1.2 (2) Indoor Dust Test (Alternate Method) — Atomized water at a pressure of 2.11 kg/cm2 (30 psi) is sprayed on all seams, joints and external operating mechanisms from a distance of 305 to 381mm (12 to 15 in.) at a rate of 11 litres (3 gallons) per hour. No less than 142 gms (5 oz) of water per linear foot of test length (height + length + depth of enclosure) is applied. No water shall enter enclosure.
Temperature Test — The enclosed device is subjected to a temperature test to determine maximum temperature at any point on the external surface. The device must be marked with a temperature code based on the result only if the temperature exceeds +100°C (+212°F).
6.6 External Icing Test — Water is sprayed on enclosure for one hour in a cold room +2°C (36°F); then room temperature is lowered to approximately –5°C (–23°F) and water spray is controlled so as to cause ice to build up at a rate of 6.4 mm (.25 in.) per hour until 19 mm (.75 in.) thick ice has formed on top surface of a 25.4 mm (1 in.) diameter metal test bar, then temperature is maintained at –5°C (–23°F) for 3 hours. Evaluation 6.6.2.2: Equipment shall be undamaged after ice has melted (external mechanisms not required to be operable while iceladen). 6.7 Hosedown Test — Enclosure and external mechanisms are subjected to a stream of water at 246 litres (65 gallons) per minute from a 25.4 mm (1 in.) diameter nozzle, directed at all joints from all angles from a distance of 3 to 3.7 meters (10 to 12 ft). Test time is 48 seconds times the test length [height + width + depth] of enclosure in meters (ft.), or a minimum of 5 seconds. No water shall enter enclosure.
Dust Penetration Test — The device is operated at full rated load until equilibrium temperatures are attained, then allowed to cool to ambient (room) temperature, through six heating and cooling cycles covering at least 30 hours, while continuously exposed to circulating dust of specified properties in a test chamber. No dust shall enter the enclosure. Temperature Test with Dust Blanket — This test is conducted as described for the Dust Penetration test except that the re circulating dust nozzles are positioned so that the dust is not blown directly on the device under test. The device is operated at full rated load (and under abnormal conditions for equipment subject to overloading) until equilibrium temperatures are attained. Dust in contact with the enclosure shall not ignite or discolour from heat, and the exterior temperatures based on +40°C (+104°F) ambient shall not exceed: Group E F G
Normal Operation +200°C (+392°F) +150°C (+302°F) +120°C (+248°F)
Abnormal Operation +200°C (+392°F) +200°C (+392°F) +165°C (+329°F)
6.8 Rust Resistance Test (Applicable Only to Enclosures Incorporating External Ferrous Parts) — Enclosure is subjected to a salt spray (fog) for 24 hours, using water with five parts by weight of salt (NaCI), at 35°C (95°F), then rinsed and dried. There
General-13
General
Notes
General-14
Safety Principles
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 EU Directives and Legislation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 EU Harmonized European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Choice of Protective Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Safety Strategy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Safety Related Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Further Considerations and Examples . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Reset Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Control Guards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Safety Light Curtains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 U.S. Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49 Australian Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Safety Principles
Important User Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards. The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this catalogue are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability including intellectual property liability, for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication.
Related Safety Information
You are responsible for the safety of the entire installed control system and for meeting all applicable laws, codes, and safety requirements. ATTENTION: As the installer of this control system, you must be knowledgeable of other applicable standards pertaining to safety recommendations related to: • • • •
Machine Construction General Electrical Machine Guarding Point of Operation guards, safety light curtains, mechanical guards, and two-hand controls, and safety monitoring relays
In addition to local laws and codes, you are responsible for the safety recommendations detailed in all applicable codes and standards including: • • • • •
Terms and Conditions
National Electric Code OSHA Regulations ANSI Standards NFPA CSA
For applicable “Terms and Conditions of Sale” please refer to page 1-4 in this catalogue.
IMPORTANT
Rockwell Automation reserves the right to make revisions to the material contained in this catalogue and specifically disclaims all liability for any incidental or consequential damages resulting from the furnishing, performance or use of this material.
1-2
Safety Principles
Overview A FAST TRACK GUIDE TO CONTENTS IN RELATION TO MACHINERY SAFETY LEGISLATION IN EU THE MACHINERY DIRECTIVE New machinery supplied within the EC must satisfy the Essential Health and Safety Requirements. See: Directives & Legislation and Harmonized European Standards.
THE USE OF WORK EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE Employers must ensure that all work equipment provided is suitable and safe. See: Directives & Legislation and Harmonized European Standards.
RISK ASSESSMENT • Determine the machine’s operating characteristics and limits. • Identify the hazards. • Estimate the risk. See: Safety Strategy.
RISK REDUCTION • Take any measures required to eliminate the hazards or reduct the risk to an acceptable level. See: Choice of Protective Measures. Safety Related Control Systems. Further Considerations and Examples. Interlocking Devices.
TECHNICAL FILE • Ensure the availability of information required to check the conformity of the machine. See: Directives & Legislation.
APPROVED BODIES • Where necessary (Annex IV machines) take appropriate action with an Approved Body. See: Directives & Legislation.
DECLARATION • Prepare a Declaration of Conformity or a Declaration of Incorporation. • Where appropriate affix the CE mark. See: Directives & Legislation.
• Employers must ensure that all work equipment is safe, maintained in efficient working order and in good repair.
• Employers must ensure that suitable instruction and training is available together with adequate health and safety information.
Manufacturers and employers may need to satisfy other EC Directives in addition to those discussed in this book. Affixation of the CE mark is intended to indicate compliance with all relevant EC Directives.
1-3
Safety Principles
EU Directives and Legislation The purpose of this section is to act as a guide for anyone concerned with machine safety, especially guarding and interlocking protective systems. It is intended for designers and users of industrial equipment. In order to promote the concept of an open market within the EC and EFTA all member countries are obliged to enact legislation that defines essential safety requirements for machinery and its use. Machinery that does not meet these requirements cannot be sold into or within EC and EFTA countries.
EU Directives and Legislation There are two European Directives that are of direct relevance to the safety of industrial machinery and equipment. These are:
Annex I of the Directive, a correct conformity assessment must be carried out and a “Declaration of Conformity” must be given. The Directive came into full force for machinery on January 1st, 1995 and for Safety Components on January 1st, 1997. A two year transition period was allowed whereby either existing national regulations could be used or the new Directive regime could be followed. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer, importer or end supplier of the equipment to ensure that equipment supplied is in conformity with the Directive.
Essential Health & Safety Requirements (referred to as EHSRs)
1. The Machinery Directive 2. The Use of Work Equipment by Workers at Work Directive These two Directives are directly related as the Essential Health and Safety Requirements (EHSRs) from the Machinery Directive can be used to confirm the safety of equipment in the Use of Work Equipment Directive. This section deals with aspects of both directives and it is strongly recommended that anyone concerned with the design, supply, purchase or use of industrial equipment within the EC and EFTA countries familiarize themselves with their requirements. Most suppliers and users of machinery will simply not be allowed to operate in the EC unless they conform to these directives. There are several other European Directives, either active or in preparation, with relevance to industrial safety. Most of them are fairly specialized in their application and are therefore left outside the scope of this section but it is important to note that, where relevant, their requirements must be met. Examples are: The Low Voltage Directive—The EMC Directive—The Prevention of explosion due to hazardous atmospheres Directive.
The Machinery Directive (see Figure 9) 89/392/EEC as amended by 91/368/EEC and 93/44/EEC has been consolidated in a new directive 98/37/EC. This Directive covers the supply of new machinery and other equipment including safety components. In most cases it is an offense to supply
Figure 1 machinery unless it complies with the Directive. This means that it must satisfy wide ranging essential safety requirements contained in
1-4
Figure 2 The Directive gives a list of EHSRs to which machinery must comply where relevant. The purpose of this list is to ensure that the machinery is safe and is designed and constructed so that it can be used, adjusted and maintained throughout all phases of its life without putting persons at risk. The directive also provides a hierarchy of measures for eliminating the risk: (1) Inherently Safe Design—Where possible the design itself will prevent any hazards. Where this is not possible (2) Additional Protection Devices, e.g., Guards with interlocked access points, non-material barriers such as light curtains, sensing mats etc., should be used. Any residual risk which cannot be dealt with by the above methods must be contained by (3) Personal Protective Equipment and/or Training. The machine supplier must specify what is appropriate. Suitable materials should be used for construction and operation. Adequate lighting and handling facilities should be provided. Controls and control systems must be safe and reliable. Machines must not be capable of starting up unexpectedly and should have one or more emergency stop devices fitted. Consideration must be given to complex installations where processes upstream or downstream can effect the safety of a machine. Failure of a power supply or control circuit must not lead to a dangerous situation. Machines must be stable and capable of withstanding foreseeable stresses. They must have no exposed edges or surfaces likely to cause injury. Guards or protection devices must be used to protect risks such as moving parts. These must be of robust construction and difficult to
Safety Principles
EU Directives and Legislation bypass. Fixed guards must be mounted by methods that can only be undone with tools. Movable guards should be interlocked. Adjustable guards should be readily adjustable without the use of tools. Electrical and other energy supply hazards must be prevented. There must be minimal risk of injury from temperature, explosion, noise, vibration, dust, gases or radiation. There must be proper provisions for maintenance and servicing. Sufficient indication and warning devices must be provided. Machinery shall be provided with instructions for safe installation, use, adjustment etc.
Conformity Assessment TEST RESULTS ---------------------------STANDARDS ------------------------------
Figure 3 The designer or other responsible body must be able to show evidence that proves conformity with the EHSRs. This file should include all relevant information such as test results, drawings, specifications, etc., as shown below.
• A list of: 1. The EHSRs relevant to the equipment. 2. Applicable Harmonized European Standards. 3. Other applicable standards. 4. Technical design specifications. • A description of methods adopted to eliminate hazards presented by the machinery. • If desired, any technical report or certificate obtained from an approved body (test house) or laboratory. • If conformity is declared with a Harmonized European Standard, any technical report giving test results for it. • A copy of instructions for the machinery. B For series manufacture, details of internal measures (quality systems, for example) to ensure that all machinery produced remains in conformity: • The manufacturer must carry out necessary research or tests on components, fittings or the completed machinery to determine whether by its design and construction it is capable of being erected and put into service safely. • The technical file need not exist as a permanent single file but it must be possible to assemble it to make it available in a reasonable time. It must be available for ten years following production of the last unit. Failure to make it available in response to a substantiated request by an enforcement authority may constitute grounds for doubting the conformity. The technical file does not need to include detailed plans or any other specific information regarding sub-assemblies used for the manufacture of the machinery unless they are essential to verify conformity with the EHSRs.
Where equipment is designed to specific harmonized European standards, it simplifies the task of showing conformity. These standards are not legally required, however, their use is strongly recommended since proving conformity by alternative methods can be an extremely complex issue. The structure of these standards, which are produced by CEN (the European Committee for Standardization) and CENELEC (the European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization) support the Machinery Directive. Together CEN and CENELEC form the Joint Institute for Standardization in Europe. A thorough, documented risk assessment must be conducted to ensure that all potential machine hazards are addressed.
Technical File The person responsible for a declaration of conformity must ensure that the following documentation will be available on the premises for inspection purposes. A A technical file including: • Overall drawings of the equipment including control circuit drawings. • Detailed drawings, calculation notes, etc. required for checking the conformity of the machinery with the EHSRs.
Figure 4 Conformity Assessment for Annex IV Machines Certain types of equipment are subject to special measures. This equipment is listed in Annex IV of the Directive and includes dangerous machines such as some woodworking machines, presses, injection moulding machines, underground equipment, vehicle servicing lifts, etc. Annex IV also includes certain safety components such as light curtains and two-hand control units.
1-5
Safety Principles
EU Directives and Legislation EC Type Examination
T R ES T -- ESU ------ ----------- LSTS --------- RD TAND S A
Te
a nic ch le Fi
l
For an EC type examination the approved body will require a technical file and access to the machine to be examined. They will check that the machine is manufactured in accordance with its technical file and that it satisfies the applicable EHSRs. If the examination is successful an EC type examination certificate will be issued. A body that refuses to issue a certificate must inform the other approved bodies.
Figure 7 Figure 5 For Annex IV machines in conformity with Harmonized European Standards there are three procedures to choose from: 1. Send the technical file to an approved body who will acknowledge receipt of the file and keep it. Note: NOTE: With this option there is no assessment of the file. It may be used as reference at a later date in the event of a problem or a claim of noncompliance. 2. Send the technical file to an approved body who will verify that the Harmonized Standards have been correctly applied and will issue a certificate of adequacy for the file. 3. Submit an example of the machinery to an approved body (test house) for EC type examination. If it passes, the machine will be given a EC type examination certificate. For Annex IV machines not in conformity with a standard or where no relevant Harmonized European Standard exists, an example of the machinery must be submitted to an approved body (test facility) for EC type examination.
Approved Bodies A network of approved bodies who will communicate with each other and work to common criteria is being set up throughout the EC and EFTA countries. Details of test houses and laboratories with approved body status can be obtained from the United Kingdom Accreditation Service, Audley House, 13 Palace Street, London SW1E 5HS.
Figure 6
1-6
Declaration of Conformity Procedure The responsible person must draw up an EC Declaration of Conformity and affix the CE (see Figure 7) mark to all machines supplied. The machines should also be supplied with the Declaration of Conformity. Note: NOTE: Safety components should have a Declaration of Conformity but not a CE mark with respect to the Machinery Directive (although they may be CE marked with respect of the EMC or Low Voltage Directives). The CE mark represents self-certification but it is an offense to apply the CE mark unless the machine satisfies the EHSRs and it is, in fact, safe. It is also an offense to apply a mark that may be confused with the CE mark to machinery. Note: NOTE: The use of the CE mark also indicates compliance with any other European directives to which the machinery may be subject.
EC Declaration of Conformity The certificate forming the declaration of conformity must include details of the manufacturer and responsible person, machine details (make, serial number, etc.), details of the approved body, (if appropriate), details of any standards used and the details of the person empowered to sign the declaration certificate. It must state conformity with the EHSRs or with the example of the machinery that underwent EC type examination (see Figure 8).
Safety Principles
EU Directives and Legislation Maykit Wright Ltd.
Declaration of Conformity In respect of the following Directives: European Machinery Directive (89/392 EEC as amended by 91/368 EEC and 93/44 EEC). Any other Directives relevant to the machine (e.g., the EMC Directive) should also be included. Company: Maykit Wright Ltd. Main Street Anytown Industrial Estate Anytown, England AB1 2DC Tel: 00034 000890. Fax: 00034 000567 Machine: Meat Packaging Machine. Type: Vacustarwrap 7D Serial Number: 00516 Conforming to standards: All relevant Harmonized European Standards used and, where appropriate, any national standards and specifications. If the machine is covered by Annex IV (Schedule 4) it would be necessary at this point to include either: – The name and address of the Approved Body and the number of the Type Examination Certificate. or – The name and address of the Approved Body which has drawn up a Certificate of Adequacy for the technical file. or – The name and address of the Approved Body to which the technical file has been forwarded. This is to declare that the above machine conforms with the relevant Essential Health and Safety Requirements of the European Machinery Directive (89/392 EEC as amended by 91/368 EEC and 93/44 EEC). Signed for Maykit Wright Ltd.
G.V. Wright G.V. Wright Managing Director
Issued 18th January 1996
Figure 8 EC Declaration of Incorporation Where the equipment is supplied for assembly with other items to form a complete machine at a later date, the responsible person may issue a DECLARATION OF INCORPORATION with it (instead of a declaration of conformity). The CE mark should NOT be applied. The declaration should state that the equipment must not be put into service until the machine into which it has been incorporated has been declared in conformity (see Figure 9). This option is not available for equipment which can function independently or which modifies the function of a machine.
The Use of Work Equipment by Workers at Work (Directive 89/655/EEC) Whereas the Machinery Directive is aimed at suppliers, this Directive is aimed at users of machinery. It covers all industrial sectors and it places general duties on employers together with minimum requirements for the safety of work equipment. All EU countries are enacting their own forms of legislation to implement this Directive.
1-7
Safety Principles
EU Directives and Legislation All machinery must satisfy the Essential Health and Safety Requirements Most machines & safety components (other than those listed in Annex IV)
Must conform with relevant Harmonised European standards
Must conform directly with the EHSRs
OR
Send the TECHNICAL FILE to an approved body which will acknowledge its RECEIPT
OR
Machines & safety components listed in Annex IV
If it DOES CONFORM with relevant Harmonised European standards
If it DOES NOT CONFORM with relevant Harmonised European standards
Send the Send equipment to TECHNICAL FILE an approved body to an approved for EC TYPE body which will EXAMINATION examine it and issue a OR CERTIFICATE OF ADEQUACY for the file
It MUST be submitted to an Approved Body for EC Type Examination
You must be able to assemble the TECHNICAL FILE on request
FOR MACHINERY—You must issue a Declaration of Conformity and affix the CE mark or issue a Declaration of Incorporation. FOR SAFETY COMPONENTS—You must issue a Declaration of Conformity.
Figure 9: Overview of procedures for the Machinery Directive In the U.K., it has been implemented in the form of a collection of numbered regulations entitled The Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations 1992 (often abbreviated to P.U.W.E.R.). The form of implementation may vary between countries but the effect of the Directive is retained (see Figure 11). The Directive was implemented on January 1st, 1993 and all new machines provided for use from that date must satisfy all the regulations.
1-8
For existing machines in use before this date regulations 1 to 10 must be satisfied but regulations 11 to 24 were not fully implemented until January 1, 1997. Regulations 1 to 10 These regulations give details of which types of equipment and workplaces are covered by the Directive.
Safety Principles
EU Harmonized European Standards They also place general duties on employers such as instituting safe systems of working and providing suitable and safe equipment that must be properly maintained. Machine operators must be given proper information and training for the safe use of the machine. New machinery (and second hand machinery from outside the EC or EFTA) provided after January 1st, 1993 should satisfy any relevant product directives, e.g., The Machinery Directive (subject to transitional arrangements). Second hand equipment from within the EC or EFTA provided for the first time in the workplace must immediately satisfy regulations 11 to 24.
A. Fixed enclosing guards. B. Other guards or protection devices. C. Protection appliances (jigs, holders, push sticks, etc.). D. The provision of information, instruction, supervision and training. These measures should be applied from the top (a) as far as practical and usually a combination of two or more will be required (see Figure 11).
EU Harmonized European Standards These standards are common to all EC and EFTA countries and are produced by the European Standardization bodies CEN and CENELEC. Their use is voluntary but designing and manufacturing equipment to them is the most direct way of demonstrating compliance with the EHSRs. At the time of publication of this section some of the standards are not yet complete but, as they become available, their titles will be published in the Official Journal of the European Communities. Details will also be given in publications such as BSI News. They will have a common prefix of EN and in the UK they are prefixed BS EN. When they are published, existing national standards which have the same scope will be withdrawn.
Figure 10 Note: NOTE: Existing or second hand machinery which is significantly overhauled or modified will be classified as new equipment so the work carried out on it must ensure compliance with the Machinery Directive (even if it is for a company’s own use).
Regulation 5 “Suitability of work equipment” lies at the heart of the directive and it highlights the employers responsibility (under the Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1992) to carry out a proper process of risk assessment. Regulation 6 “Maintenance” requires machinery to be properly maintained. This will normally mean that there must be a routine and planned preventive maintenance schedule. It is recommended that a log is compiled and kept up to date. This is especially important in cases where the maintenance and inspection of equipment contributes to the continuing safety integrity of a protective device or system. Regulations 11 to 24 These regulations cover specific hazards and protective arrangements on machines.
They are divided into 3 groups: A, B and C standards. A. STANDARDS: Cover aspects applicable to all types of machines. B. STANDARDS: Subdivided into 2 groups. B1 STANDARDS: Cover particular safety and ergonomic aspects of machinery. B2 STANDARDS: Cover safety components and devices. C. STANDARDS: Cover specific types or groups of machines. It is important to note that complying with a C Standard gives automatic presumption of conformity with the EHSRs. In the absence of a suitable C Standard, A and B Standards can be used as part or full proof of EHSR conformity by pointing to compliance with relevant sections. The solar system (see Figure 12) can be used to model the relationship of the machinery directive to the European standards. The planets represent the standards, which revolve around the sun, which represents the machinery directive. The inner orbits are the “A” and “B” standards. The outer orbits represent the “C” standards.
They were not fully implemented until January 1st, 1997 for existing unmodified machines in use before January 1st, 1993. They applied immediately to other equipment. However, if the equipment conforms with relevant product directives, e.g., The Machinery Directive, they will automatically comply with the corresponding requirements of regulations 11 to 24 as they are similar in nature to the EHSRs of that Directive. Of particular interest is Regulation 11, which gives a hierarchy of protection measures. These are:
1-9
Safety Principles
EU Harmonized European Standards
Provision and Use of Work Equipment Regulations FOR MACHINE PROVIDED FOR USE ON YOUR PREMISES
ALL MACHINES MUST COMPLY WITH REGS 1-10 IMMEDIATELY
MACHINE INSTALLED AFTER 1/1/93
MACHINE INSTALLED BEFORE 1/1/93 (and not modified since)
IS IT NEW?
IT MUST ALSO COMPLY WITH REGS 11-24 BY 1/ 1/97
IT SHOULD COMPLY WITH THE MACHINERY DIRECTIVE and therefore it should comply with PUWER Regs 11-24
IS IT SECOND HAND, HIRED OR LEASED?
IT MUST ALSO COMPLY WITH PUWER REGS 11-24 IMMEDIATELY
Figure 11: Overview of procedures for the use of Work Equipment Directive as enacted in the UK by Provision A and use of work equipment regulations Agreements have been reached with other worldwide Standardization Bodies for cooperation between CEN/CENELEC and bodies such as IEC and ISO. This should ultimately result in common worldwide standards. The following pages list some of the A and B Standards relevant to this section. Where they are prefixed EN they are published
1-10
standards. Where they are prefixed prEN they have not yet reached the final publication stage at the time of printing of this section.
Safety Principles
EU Harmonized European Standards Machinery Standards Rubber and Plastic
Machinery Directive
EN1114 Thermoprocessing
EN746
EN418
Footwear
B2 E-Stop
EN954 B1 Control
EN931
EN1050 EN1760 Risk B2 Mats/Edges
Tannery
EN972
Machinery Standards Directive
B1 Speeds
EN292
“B”
B2 Two-hand
EN60204 EN574
“C” Packaging
EN1037 B1 Start-up
EN999
“A”
EN1088 B2 Interlocks
EN414
EN415
B2 Equipment
EN693 Hydraulic Presses
EN692 Mechanical Presses
Figure 12 EN 292 (ISO 12100 pts 1&2): Safety of machinery Basic concepts, general principles for design. It is an A standard which outlines all the basic principles including risk assessment, guarding, interlocking, emergency stops, trip devices, safety distances, etc. It references other standards and includes the essential safety requirements from the Machinery Directive.
EN 294 (ISO 13852): Safety of machinery Safety distances to prevent danger zones being reached by the upper limbs. Provides data for calculation of safe aperture sizes and positioning for guards, etc.
EN 811 (ISO 13853): Safety of machinery Safety distances to prevent danger zones being reached by the lower limbs.
EN 60204-1 (IEC 60204-1): Safety of machinery
Provides data for calculation of safe aperture sizes and positioning for guards, etc.
Electrical equipment of machines—Pt 1 General requirements.
EN 349 (ISO 13854): Safety of machinery
This is a very important standard that outlines recommendations for safety related aspects of wiring and electrical equipment on machines.
Minimum distances to avoid crushing parts of the human body. Provides data for calculation of safe gaps between moving parts, etc.
1-11
Safety Principles
EU Harmonized European Standards EN 1088 (ISO 14119): Safety of machinery
EN 418 (ISO 13850): Safety of machinery
Interlocking devices associated with guards— Principles for design and selection.
Emergency Stop devices, functional aspects— Principles for design.
Provides principles for the design and selection of interlocking devices associated with guards. In order to verify mechanical switches it refers to IEC 60947-5-1— Low voltage switch gear—Pt 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements—Section 1: Electromechanical control circuit devices.
Provides design principles and requirements.
In order to verify non-mechanical switches it refers to IEC 60947-53—Particular requirements for proximity devices with fault prevention measures or defined behaviour under fault conditions. (Provisional number and title only).
EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1): Safety of machinery Safety related parts of control systems—Pt 1: General principles for design. This standard outlines requirements for safety critical parts of machine control systems and describes 5 categories of performance “B, 1, 2, 3 and 4.” It is not certain which number it will eventually carry. In whichever form it is published, however, it is important to gather a working knowledge of this document as its categories are becoming accepted as the common “language” for describing the performance of safety related control systems.
EN 1050 (ISO 14121): Safety of machinery Principles for risk assessment. Outlines the fundamentals of assessing the risks during the life of the machinery. It summarizes methods for hazard analysis and risk estimation.
EN 999 (ISO 13855): Safety of machinery The positioning of protective equipment in respect to approach speeds of parts of the human body. Provides methods for designers to calculate the minimum safety distances from a hazard for specific safety devices, in particular for electrosensitive devices (e.g., light curtains), pressure sensitive mats/ floors and two-hand controls. It contains a principle for the positioning of safety devices based on approach speed and machine stopping time that can reasonably be extrapolated to cover interlocked guard doors without guard locking.
EN 574—Safety of machinery Two-hand control devices—Functional aspects— Principles for design. Provides requirements and guidance on the design and selection of two-hand control devices, including the prevention of defeat and the avoidance of faults.
1-12
ISO 11161 (currently under revision for ISO and EN: Industrial Automation Systems Safety of Integrated Manufacturing Systems—Basic Requirements. This standard specifies safety requirements where two or more machines are interconnected and operated by a controller capable of being reprogrammed for the manufacture of discrete parts or assemblies.
IEC/EN 61496-1: Safety of machinery Electro-sensitive protective equipment Pt 1: General requirements and tests. (EN version not published.)
IEC 61496-2: General requirements and tests. Pt 2: Particular requirements for equipment using active opto-electronic protective devices. Part 1 gives requirements and test procedures for the control and monitoring aspects for electrosensitive protective equipment. Subsequent parts deal with aspects particular to the sensing side of the system. Part 2 gives particular requirements for safety light curtains.
EN 1760-1: Safety of machinery Pressure Sensitive Safety Devices—Pt 1: Mats & Floors. Provides requirements and test procedures.
EN 1760-2: Safety of machinery Pressure Sensitive Safety Devices—Pt 2: Edges & Bars. Provides requirements and test procedures.
EN 1037 (ISO 14118): Safety of machinery General Requirements for the Design and Construction of Guards. Provides definitions, descriptions and design requirements for fixed and movable guards.
IEC 1038—Safety of machinery Isolation and energy dissipation—Prevention of unexpected start-up. Defines measures aimed at isolating machines from power supplies and dissipating stored energy to prevent unexpected machine startup and allow safe intervention in danger zones.
Safety Principles
Choice of Protective Measures Choice of Protective Measures When the risk assessment shows that a machine or process carries a risk of injury the hazard must be eliminated or contained. The manner in which this is achieved will depend on the nature of the machine and the hazard. In basic terms this means preventing any access to the relevant parts while they are in a dangerous condition. The best choice of protective measure is a device or system that provides the maximum protection with the minimum hindrance to normal machine operation. It is important that all aspects of machine use are considered, as experience shows that a system which is difficult to use is more liable to be removed or by-passed. To achieve this there is a choice of either: 1. Preventing access during dangerous motion or 2. Preventing dangerous motion during access. The following pages give a brief overview of the characteristics of the most commonly used devices.
Preventing Access Fixed Enclosing Guards If the hazard is on a part of the machinery which does not require access it should be permanently guarded with fixed enclosing guards.
Figure 13 Movable Guards with Interlocking Switches If access is required there must be a movable (openable) guard which is interlocked with the power source of the hazard in a manner which ensures that whenever the guard door is not closed the hazard power will be switched off. This approach involves the use of an interlocking switch fitted to the guard door. The control of the power source of the hazard is routed through the switch section of the unit. The power source is usually electrical but it could also be pneumatic or hydraulic. When guard door movement (opening) is detected the interlocking switch will isolate the hazard power supply either directly or via a power contactor (or valve). Some interlocking switches also incorporate a locking device that locks the guard door closed and will not release it until the machine is in a safe condition. For the majority of applications the combination of a movable guard and an interlock switch with or without guard locking is the most reliable and cost effective solution.
Figure 14 Two-Hand Controls The use of two-hand controls (also referred to as bi-manual controls) is a common method of preventing access while a machine is in a dangerous condition. Two start buttons must be operated at the same time to run the machine. This ensures that both hands of the operator are occupied in a safe position (i.e., at the controls) and therefore cannot be in the hazard area.
Figure 15 Note: This type of measure only protects the operator and does not give protection to other personnel. A two-hand control system depends heavily on the integrity of its control and monitoring system to detect any faults, so it is important that this aspect is designed to the correct specification. The physical design should prevent improper operation (e.g., by hand and elbow). The machine should not go from one cycle to another without the releasing and pressing of both buttons. This prevents the possibility of both buttons being blocked, leaving the machine running continuously. Releasing of either button must cause the machine to stop. The use of two-hand control should be considered with caution as it usually leaves some form of risk exposed.
1-13
Safety Principles
Choice of Protective Measures It is very useful, however, on applications such as teach mode pendants and inching controls because it can give enhanced levels of protection when used in conjunction with other protective devices. Preventing Dangerous Motion When frequent access is required physical guarding at the hazard is sometimes too restrictive for part loading or adjustment. In this situation a device is required to prevent dangerous motion while allowing unrestricted access by sensing the presence of the operator and isolating the power source. Photoelectric Light Curtains These devices emit a “curtain” of harmless infrared light beams in front of the hazard area. When any of the beams are blocked by intrusion towards the hazard area the light curtain control circuit switches off the hazard power source. There are many factors that dictate the type and positioning of a light curtain and these are addressed in EN 999 “The positioning of protective equipment in respect of approach speeds of parts of the human body.”
Figure 17 Pressure sensitive mats are often used within an enclosed area containing several machines—flexible manufacturing or robotics cells, for example. When cell access is required (for setting or robot “teaching,” for example), they prevent dangerous motion if the operator strays from the safe area. The size and positioning of the mats should be calculated using the formulas from EN 999 “The positioning of protective equipment in respect of approach speeds of parts of the human body.” Pressure Sensitive Edges These devices are flexible edging strips that can be mounted to the edge of a moving part, such as a machine table or powered door, that poses a risk of a crushing or shearing.
Figure 16 Light curtains are extremely versatile and can guard areas many meters wide. Through the use of mirrors the light beams can be diverted around corners to enclose a machine. They are available with different light beam spacings making them suitable for applications ranging from perimeter guarding for industrial robots to point of access guarding on presses and shears. Pressure Sensitive Safety Mats These devices are used to provide guarding of a floor area around a machine. A matrix of interconnected mats is laid around the hazard area and any pressure (e.g., an operator’s footstep) will cause the mat controller unit to switch off power to the hazard.
Figure 18 If the moving part strikes the operator (or vice versa), the flexible sensitive edge is depressed and will switch off the hazard power source. Sensitive edges can also be used to guard machinery where there is a risk of operator entanglement. If an operator becomes caught in the machine, contact with the sensitive edge will shut down machine power. Light curtains, floormats and sensitive edges can all be classified as “trip devices.” They do not actually restrict access but only “sense” it. They rely entirely on their ability to both sense and switch for the provision of safety: it is important that their control circuit incorporates self-monitoring and fail-safe measures. In general they are only suitable on machinery which stops reasonably quickly after switching off the power source. Because an operator can walk or
1-14
Safety Principles
Choice of Protective Measures reach directly into the hazard area it is obviously necessary that the time taken for the motion to stop is less than that required for the operator to reach the hazard after tripping the device. Stops In the U.S., Europe and at the international level, there is agreement on the descriptions of stop categories for machines or manufacturing systems NOTE: these categories are different to the categories from EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1). See standards NFPA79 and IEC/EN60204-1 for further details. Stops fall into three categories: • Category 0 is stopping by immediate removal of power to the machine actuators. This is considered an uncontrolled stop. With power removed, braking action requiring power will not be effective. This will allow motors to free spin and coast to a stop over an extended period of time. In other cases, material may be dropped by machine holding fixtures, which require power to hold the material. Mechanical stopping means, not requiring power, may also be a used with a category 0 stop. The category 0 stop takes priority over category 1 or category 2 stops. • Category 1 is a controlled stop with power available to the machine actuators to achieve the stop. Power is then removed from the actuators when the stop is achieved. This category of stop allows powered braking to quickly stop hazardous motion, and then power can be removed from the actuators. • Category 2 is a controlled stop with power left available to the machine actuators. A normal production stop is considered a category 2 stop. These stop categories must be applied to each stop function, where the stop function is the action taken by the safety related parts of the control system in response to an input category 0 or 1 should be used. Stop functions must override related start functions. The selection of the stop category for each stop function must be determined by a risk assessment Emergency Stop Function The emergency stop function must operate as either a category 0 or category 1 stop, as determined by a risk assessment. It must be initiated by a single human action. When executed, it must override all other functions and machine operating modes. The objective is to remove power as quickly as possible without creating additional hazards.
Emergency Stop Devices Wherever there is a danger of an operator getting into trouble on a machine there must be a facility for fast access to an emergency stop device. The e-stop device must be continuously operable and readily available. Each operator panel must contain at least one e-stop device. Additional e-stop devices may be used at other locations as needed. E-Stop devices come in various forms. Pushbutton switches and cable pull switches are examples of the more popular type devices. When the e-stop device is actuated, it must latch in and it must not be possible to generate the stop command without latching in. The resetting of the emergency stop device must not cause a hazardous situation. A separate and deliberate action must be used to re-start the machine. For further information on e-stop devices, read EN418 (ISO13850), IEC 60947-5-5, NFPA79 and IEC60204-1, AS4024.1, Z432-94. Emergency Stop Buttons The usual way of providing this is in the form of a red-colored mushroom-headed push button on a yellow background which the operator strikes in the event of an emergency (see Figure 19). They must be strategically placed in sufficient quantity around the machine to ensure that there is always one in reach at a hazard point.
Figure 19
Until recently, hardwired electro-mechanical components were required for category e-stop circuits. With the advent of safety PLCs, electronic logic, meeting the requirements of standards like IEC61508, can be used in the e-stop circuit. The current published version of IEC 60204-1 requires electro-mechanical components. Removal of this constraint from IEC 60204-1 is being considered for future editions of this standard. The final removal of power in a category 0 or category 1 e-stop circuit must be an electro-mechanical component.
1-15
Safety Principles
Safety Strategy Cable Pull Switches For machinery such as conveyors, it is often more convenient and effective to use a cable pull device along the hazard area (As shown in Figure 20.) as the emergency stop device. These devices use a steel wire rope connected to latching pull switches so that pulling on the rope in any direction at any point along its length will trip the switch and cut off the machine power.
Safety Strategy Including Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction From a purely functional point of view the more efficiently a machine performs its task of processing material then the better it is. But, in order for a machine to be viable it must also be safe. Indeed safety must be regarded as a prime consideration; this includes safety of personnel and the environment. (Although the environment is outside the scope of this section the two safety categories are often the same thing.) In order to devise a proper safety strategy there must be a:
Figure 20 Gate Interlock Switches Gate interlock switches are used to send stop commands to the safety related parts of the control system. Gate interlocks can, but do not necessarily have to, perform are same function as an e-stop device. The stop category 0 or 1 must be determined by a risk assessment. Closing the gate must not start the machine. A separate and deliberate action must be used to re-start the machine. Telescopic Trip Switches Other variations include telescopic antenna switches where deflection of the antenna causes the switch to cut off the machine power. These devices are more commonly used as trip devices on machinery such as pillar drills. The switch is mounted on the drill and the antenna is extended down next to the drill bit. In the event of becoming entangled with the drill the operator will deflect the antenna that operates the switch (usually connected to a d.c. injection braking unit as shown in Figure 21.)
1. RISK ASSESSMENT based on a clear understanding of the machine limits and functions which must then be analysed to identify those that pose a potential hazard. The degree of risk due to the hazard is then estimated in order to provide a basis for judgement at later stages. A risk evaluation is then required to determine if existing safety measures are satisfactory or whether additional measures are required to reduce the risk. 2. RISK REDUCTION is then performed if necessary and safety measures are selected based on the information derived from the risk assessment stage. After the implementation of these measures the process is repeated to determine whether safety has in fact been achieved. The manner in which this is done is the basis of the SAFETY STRATEGY for the machine. We need a checklist to follow and ensure that all aspects are considered and that the overriding principle does not become lost in the detail. The first step is to ensure that the whole process is documented. Not only will this ensure a more thorough job but it will also make the results available for checking by other parties. It can also be included in the technical file that supports the Declaration of Conformity for the Machinery Directive. Because the process is likely to be repeated, the documenting of the results means that needless repetition can be avoided. It should be noted here that if a machine is designed in conformity with a “C” type standard specific to that machine it should already incorporate all the measures necessary for its safety. It is strongly recommended that this process is still carried out to ensure that everything is considered. Although this section may only seem to apply to machine manufacturers it is also relevant to machine users as machines are often used in circumstances unforeseen by the manufacturer. The user (or employer) must provide a safe working environment. The P.U.W.E.R. regulation 5 (guidance paragraph 60) makes it clear that the safety of work equipment is addressed from three aspects: A. Its initial integrity
Figure 21
1-16
B. The place where it is used C. The purpose for which it is used.
Safety Principles
Safety Strategy For example, a milling machine used in a school workshop will need additional considerations to one that is used in an industrial tool room. It should also be remembered that if a user company acquires two or more independent machines and integrates them into one process they are, technically speaking, the manufacturer of the resulting combined machine. So now let us consider the essential steps on the route to a proper safety strategy. The following can be applied to an existing factory installation or a single new machine.
Risk Assessment
Risk Estimation This is one of the most fundamental aspects of the safety of machinery. There are many ways of tackling this subject and the following pages (see Figure 22), give a simple but effective approach and serve to illustrate the basic principles. The method should be amended as necessary to suit the requirements of individual situations. An understanding of both its importance and method is absolutely essential. All machinery that contains hazards presents risk. It is important to be able to describe at which point the risk lies on a relative scale from minimum to maximum. The following pages provide a practical method for achieving this. It has been shown to be both simple to use and reliable as a guideline to a logical approach. First, let us look at some of the fundamental points.
Why Is a Risk Assessment Necessary? One reason is obvious, it is a legal requirement in the European Union. Most of the directives and regulations regarding machinery safety state that a formal risk assessment should be carried out. Most of the Harmonized European A & B type standards refer to it and the subject itself has a standard—EN 1050 “Principles for Risk Assessment.” There can be few people concerned with the safety of machinery who do not realize the importance of risk assessment and as we have established it is an integral part of a safety strategy. It is wrong to regard risk assessment as a burden. It is a helpful process that provides vital information and empowers the user or designer to take logical decisions about ways of achieving safety. Machine Limit Determination and Hazard Identification A complete list of all machines should be made. Where separate machines are linked together, either mechanically or by control systems, they should be considered as a single machine. Each machine is then considered in turn to see if it presents any sort of hazard and the list marked accordingly. It is important to consider all limits and stages of the life of a machine including installation, commissioning, maintenance, decommissioning, correct use and operation as well as the consequences of reasonably foreseeable misuse or malfunction.
1. The risk estimation must always be documented. It is tempting to make a purely intuitive judgement. While this may often be based on experience it almost certainly will not take into account all the necessary considerations and cannot be easily checked or passed on to others. You must follow a logical work pattern, write down the results and get other parties to check it. 2. What is risk? The term risk is often confused with the severity of an accident. Both the severity of potential harm AND the probability of its occurrence have to be taken into account in order to estimate the amount of risk present. 3. It must take into account all foreseeable factors. As with the Hazard Identification stage it is important to consider all stages of the life of a machine including installation, commissioning, maintenance, de-commissioning, correct use and operation as well as the consequences of reasonably foreseeable misuse or malfunction.
All types of hazard must be considered including crushing, shearing, entanglement, part ejection, fumes, radiation, toxic substances, heat, noise, etc. Note: If a machine relies on anything other than its intrinsic nature for its safety it should be indicated as a hazard source. A machine with exposed gears has an obvious and direct hazard. But if the gears are protected by an interlocked access panel they are a potential hazard that may become an actual hazard in the event of failure of the interlocking system. Each machine with a hazard should be identified and marked on the list with the types of hazard present. At this stage it is only the identity and type of hazard that concerns us. It is tempting to start estimating the degree of risk posed by the hazard but this should be dealt with as a separate process of risk estimation.
1-17
Safety Principles
Safety Strategy RISK ASSESSMENT
The following factors are taken into account:
Identify all machines within the workplace—Then for each machine Consult relevant information and expertise MACHINE LIMITS Can you foresee all possible operation and use of the machine
NO
YES
RISK ESTIMATION Estimate the level of risk due to the hazard
Have any safety measures been analyzed and proven adequate?
1. THE SEVERITY OF POTENTIAL INJURY. 2. THE PROBABILITY OF ITS OCCURRENCE. The probability of occurrence includes two factors: a - FREQUENCY OF EXPOSURE. b - PROBABILITY OF INJURY. Dealing with each factor independently we will assign values to these factors. Make use of any data and expertise available to you. You are dealing with all stages of machine life so base your decisions on the worst case.
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION Identify each hazard situation— The for each hazard
RISK EVALUATION Is the level of risk acceptable
straightforward, reliable and specifically intended for assisting in the selection of protective systems.
RISK REDUCTION NO
NO
Address the hazard by a process of re-design or additional measures Determine whether the performance and functional characteristics of the safety measure are suitable for the machine and its type of use
Remember, for the purposes of this exercise you should assume that a protective system has not been applied or has failed to danger. Therefore, for example, the machine power may not be isolated when a guard is opened or may even start up unexpectedly while the guard is open. 1. The severity of potential injury For this consideration we are presuming that the accident or incident has occurred. Careful study of the hazard will reveal what is the most severe injury possible.
YES END OF PROCESS
HOW BAD
SAFETY STRATEGY
Figure 22 4. It is an iterative process but don’t needlessly repeat work. For example: A machine has a guard door with an interlocking system which, during an earlier risk evaluation, has been shown to be satisfactory. Provided that there are no changes which affect it, during subsequent risk assessments no further measures will be required as the risk has been satisfactorily reduced (or eliminated). But if the machine has never been subjected to a formal risk assessment or its usage circumstances have altered then it cannot be automatically assumed that the interlocking system is satisfactory and the risk estimation should be repeated to verify its suitability. The suggestion for risk estimation given on the following pages is not advocated as the definitive method as individual circumstances may dictate a different approach. IT IS INTENDED ONLY AS A GENERAL GUIDELINE TO ENCOURAGE A METHODICAL AND DOCUMENTED STRUCTURE. It is intended to explain and complement the risk estimation section in standard EN 1050 “Principles for Risk Assessment.” It uses the same well established principles as the standard but has a few minor variations in the detailed approach. This reflects the fact that it has been strongly influenced by the need to develop a method that is
1-18
In this example most severe injury would be “fatal.”
In this example the probable most severe injury would be “serious.” With the possibility of bruising, breakage, finger amputation or injury from ejected chuck key, etc.
Figure 23 Remember: For this consideration we are presuming that an injury is inevitable and we are only concerned with its severity. The severity of injury should be assessed as: • FATAL • MAJOR: (Normally irreversible) Permanent disability, loss of sight, limb amputation, respiratory damage, etc. • SERIOUS: (Normally reversible) Loss of consciousness, burns, breakages, etc. • MINOR: Bruising, cuts, light abrasions, etc.
Safety Principles
Safety Strategy 2b. Probability of injury You should assume that the operator is exposed to the hazardous motion or process.
1MINOR
10
6
3
HOW LIKELY
FATAL
MAJOR
SERIOUS In this example the probability of injury could be rated as “certain” because of the amount of body in the hazard area and the speed of machine operation.
Figure 24 2a. Frequency of exposure
In this example the probability of injury may be rated as “possible” as there is minimal contact between the hazard and the operator. There may be tin to withdraw from the danger.
Figure 27
HOW BAD
By considering the manner in which the operator is involved with the machine and other factors (speed of start up, for example) the probability of injury can be classified as: • Unlikely • Possible
• Probable • Certain
Figure 25 The frequency of exposure to hazard can be classed as: • FREQUENT: Several times per day. • OCCASIONAL: Daily. • SELDOM: Weekly or less.
1
2 OCCASIONAL
SELDOM
Figure 26: Values are assigned as above
4
FREQUENT
1
2
4
6
CERTAIN
PROBABLE
POSSIBLE
UNLIKELY
Figure 28: Values are assigned as above. All headings are assigned a value and they are now added together to give an initial estimate. The next step is to adjust the initial estimate by considering additional factors such as those shown below. Often they can only be properly considered when the machine is installed in its permanent location.
1-19
Safety Principles
Safety Strategy Risk Reduction and Evaluation Now we must consider each machine and its respective risks in turn and take measures to address all of its hazards. Section 1.2.2(b) from ANNEX I of the Machinery Directive explains that there are three basic methods to be considered and used in the following order:
1
• Eliminate or reduce risks as far as possible (inherently safe machinery design and construction), • Take the necessary protection measures in relation to risks that cannot be eliminated, • Inform users of the residual risks due to any shortcomings of the protection measures adopted, indicate whether any particular training is required and specify any need to provide personal protection equipment.
6 6 Figure 29 (Note: This is not based on the previous example pictures.) Depending on the type and usage of the machinery there may be other relevant factors that should be listed and considered at this stage as shown in Table 1.
If the machine is still at the design stage it may be possible to eliminate the hazard by a change of approach. If design methods cannot provide the answer other action must be taken. The types of measures to be considered are given in greater detail in Regulation 11 (2) HIERARCHY OF MEASURES from P.U.W.E.R. (Provision & use of work equipment regulations 1992): A. Fixed enclosing guards.
Typical Factor
Suggested Action
More than one person exposed to the hazard
Multiply the severity factor by the number of people.
Protracted time in the danger zone without complete power isolation.
If time spent per access is more than 15 minutes add 1 point to the frequency factor.
C. Protection appliances (jigs, holders, push sticks, etc.): Used to feed a work piece while keeping the operator’s body clear of the danger zone. Often used in conjunction with guards.
Operator is unskilled or untrained.
Add 2 points to the total.
D. Provision of information, instruction, training and supervision.
Very long intervals (e.g., 1 year) between access. (There may be progressive and undetected failures particularly in monitoring systems.)
Add points equivalent to the maximum frequency factor.
Table 1 The results of any additional factors are then added to the previous total as shown (see Figure 30).
HIGH
1
6 6 Figure 30
1-20
IUM
MED
W LO
B. Movable (interlocked) guards or protection devices (light curtains, footmats, etc.).
It is important that operators have the necessary training in the safe working methods for a machine. This does not mean that measures (a), (b) or (c) can be omitted. It is not acceptable to merely tell an operator that he must not go near dangerous areas (as an alternative to guarding them). Personal Protection Equipment — In addition to the above measures it may also be necessary for the operator to use equipment such as special gloves, goggles, respirators, etc. The machinery designer should specify what sort of equipment is required. The use of personal protective equipment will not usually form the primary safeguarding method but will complement the measures shown above. Each measure from the hierarchy should be considered starting from the top and used where possible. This may result in the use of a combination of measures. If access is not required to dangerous areas, the solution is to protect them by some type of fixed enclosing guard. If access is required, then life becomes a little more difficult. It will be necessary to ensure that access can only be gained while the machine is safe. Protective measures such as interlocked guard doors and/or trip systems will be required. The choice of protective device or system should be heavily influenced by the operating characteristics of the machine. This is extremely important as a
Safety Principles
Safety Strategy system that impairs machine efficiency will render itself liable to unauthorized removal or bypassing. The safety of the machine in this case will depend on the proper application and correct operation of the protective system even under fault conditions. The application has now been addressed by the appropriate protective system. The correct operation of the system must now be considered. Within each type there is likely to be a choice of technologies with varying degrees of performance of fault monitoring, detection or prevention. In an ideal world every protective system would be perfect with absolutely no possibility of failing to a dangerous condition. In the real world, however, we are constrained by the current limits of knowledge and materials. Another very real constraint is, of course, cost. Based on these factors it becomes obvious that a sense of proportion is required. Common sense tells us that it would be ridiculous to insist that the integrity of a safety system on a machine that may, at the worst case, cause mild bruising to be the same as that required to keep a jumbo jet in the air. The consequences of failure are drastically different and therefore we need to have some way of relating the extent of the protective measures to the level of risk obtained at the risk estimation stage.
Whichever type of protective device is chosen it must be remembered that a “safety related system” may contain many elements including the protective device, wiring, power switching device and sometimes parts of the machine’s operational control system. All these elements of the system (including guards, mounting, wiring etc.) should have suitable performance characteristics relevant to their design principle and technology. Standard ISO 13849-1 outlines various categories for safety related parts of control systems. The next section has more information on this subject. One of the most commonly encountered errors is the belief that a high risk level always equates directly to a high category level. As we will see in the next chapter this is not always the case. The chart shown in Figure 31 is a suggestion for part of a documented process of accounting for all safety aspects of the machinery being used. It acts as a guide for machinery users but machine manufacturers or suppliers can also use the same principle to confirm that all equipment has been evaluated and it will act as an index to more detailed reports on risk assessment. It shows that where a machine carries the CE mark it simplifies the process as the machine hazards have already been evaluated by the manufacturer and that all the necessary measures have been taken. Even with CE marked equipment there may still be hazards due to the nature of its application or material being processed which the manufacturer did not foresee.
1-21
Safety Principles
Safety Related Control Systems Company - MAYKIT WRIGHT LTD Facility - Tool room - East Factory. Date - 8/29/95 Operator profile - Apprentice/Fully skilled. Risk Accident Notes Directive Equipment Identity & Date Conformity Assessment History Report Number Bloggs center lathe. None Serial no. 8390726 claimed Installed 1978
Bloggs turret head M/c Dir. milling m/c EMC Dir Serial no 17304294 Manuf 1995 Installed May 95
RA302
RA416
None
Electrical equipment complies with BS EN 60204 E-Stops fitted (replaced 1989)
None
Figure 31
Safety Related Control Systems What is a safety related control system? (often abbreviated SRCS). It is that part of the control system of a machine that prevents a hazardous condition from occurring. It can be a separate dedicated system or it may be integrated with the normal machine control system. Its complexity will vary from a typical simple system, such as a guard door interlock switch and emergency stop switch connected in series to the control coil of power contactor, to a compound system comprising both simple and complex devices communicating through software and hardware. In order to provide the safety function the system must continue to operate correctly under all foreseeable conditions. So how do we design a system to achieve this, and when we have done that, how do we show it? The standard ISO 13849-1 “Safety related parts of control systems” deals with these aspects. It lays down a “language” of five categories for benchmarking and describing the performance of SRCSs (see Figure 32 for a summary of these categories). Note: Note 1: Category B in itself has no special measures for safety but it forms the base for the other categories.
Note: Note 2: Multiple faults caused by a common cause or as inevitable consequences of the first fault shall be counted as a single fault.
1-22
Hazard Identity
Hazard Type
Action Required
Implemented and Inspected Reference
Chuck rotation with guard open
Mechanical Entanglement Cutting
Fit guard interlock switch
11/25/94 J Kershaw Report no 9567
Cutting fluid
Toxic
Change to non toxic type
11/30/94 J Kershaw Report no 9714
Swarf cleaning
Cutting
Supply gloves
11/30/94 J Kershaw Report no 9715
Movement of bed (towards wall)
Crushing
Move machine to give enough clearance
4/13/95 J Kershaw Report no 10064
Note: Note 3: The fault review may be limited to two faults in combination if it can be justified but complex circuits (e.g. microprocessor circuits) may require more faults in combination to be considered. So how do you decide on which category you need? In order to translate these requirements into a system design specification there has to be an interpretation of the basic requirements. It is a common misconception that category 1 provides the least protection and category 4 gives the best. This is not the reasoning behind the categories. They are intended as reference points that describe the functional performance of different methods of safety related control and the constituent parts. Category 1 is aimed at the PREVENTION of faults. It is achieved through the use of suitable design principles, components and materials. Simplicity of principle and design together with stable and predictable material characteristics are the keys to this category. Categories 2, 3 and 4 require that if faults cannot be prevented they must be DETECTED (and appropriate action taken). Monitoring and checking are the keys to these categories. The usual (but not the only) method of monitoring is to duplicate the safety critical functions (i.e. redundancy) and compare operation.
Safety Principles
Safety Related Control Systems
When a fault occurs it can lead to a loss of the safety function.
CATEGORY 1 - The requirements of category B apply together with the use of well tried safety components and safety principles.
As described for category B but with higher safety related reliability of the safety related function. (The higher the reliability, the less the likelihood of a fault
CATEGORY 2 - The requirements of category B and the use of well tried safety principles apply. - The safety function(s) shall be checked at machine start-up and periodically by the machine control system. If a fault is detected a safe state shall be initiated or if this is not possible a warning shall be given.
CATEGORY 3 (see notes 2 & 3) - The requirements of category B and the use of well tried safety principles apply. - The system shall be designed so that a single fault in any of its parts does not lead to the loss of safety function.
CATEGORY 4 (see notes 2 & 3) - The requirements of category B and the use of well tried safety principles apply. - The system shall be designed so that a single fault in any of its parts does not lead to the loss of safety function. -The single fault is detected at or before the next demand on the safety function. If this detection is not possible then an accumulation of faults shall not lead to a loss of safety function.
Principle By selection of components (Towards PREVENTION By faults)
System Behaviour
The loss of safety function is detected by the check. The occurrence of a fault can lead to the loss of safety function between the checking intervals. When the single fault occurs the safety function is always performed. Some but not all faults will be detected. An accumulation of undetected faults can lead to the loss of safety function.
By structure (Towards DETECTION of faults)
Summary of Requirements CATEGORY B (see note 1) - Safety related parts of machine control systems and/or their protective equipment, as well as their components, shall be designed, constructed, selected, assembled and combined in accordance with relevant standards so that they can withstand the expected influence.
When the faults occur the safety function is always performed. The faults will be detected in time to prevent the loss of safety functions.
Figure 32 Interlock Switch Power Contactor
Machine Controls
Short circuit or ground
Contactor sticking fault
If we consider that the goal is complete reliability with no possibility of a failure to a dangerous condition, which of the categories is most appropriate?
Figure 33
If we refer to Figure 32, which type of category is the most appropriate? The prevention of faults or the detection of faults?
The example in Figure 33 is a simple system consisting of a guard door interlock switch connected in series to the control coil of a power contactor.
The first step is to separate the system into its major components and consider their modes of potential failure.
1-23
Safety Principles
Safety Related Control Systems In this example the components are: 1. Interlock switch. 2. Contactor. 3. Wiring. The interlock switch is a mechanical device. The task that it performs is a simple one—opening the contacts when a guard door is opened. It fulfils the requirements of category 1 and by the use of correct design principles and materials it can be proved that, when used within its stated operating parameters, it will have no failures to a dangerous condition. This is made feasible by the fact that the device is relatively simple and has predictable and provable characteristics.
Interlock Switch
Power Contactors
Minotaur MSR6RT Safety Relay Monitoring Unit
Machine Controls
Figure 34
The contactor is a slightly more complex device and may have some theoretical possibilities for failure. Contactors from reputable manufacturers are extremely reliable devices. Statistics show that failures are rare and can usually be attributed to poor installation or maintenance.
Figure 34 shows a system that fulfils the requirements of category 3. A Guardmaster MINOTAUR MSR6RT safety monitoring relay unit is used to monitor a two-channel control circuit. Any single fault on the wiring or contactors will be detected by the Minotaur at the next demand on the safety function. NOTE: Although the interlock switch now has double pole contacts it is still a device that fulfils the requirements of category 1—forming part of a system which fulfils the requirements of category 3.
Contactors should always have their power contacts protected by an overcurrent cut-out device to prevent welding.
The next question is when, and to what degree, do we need to take such measures?
Contactors should be subject to a regular inspection routine to detect excessive contact pitting or loose connections that can lead to overheating and distortion.
The simple answer is to say that it depends on the results of the risk assessment. This is the correct approach but we must understand that this includes all factors and not just the level of risk at the hazard point. For example, it may be thought that if the risk estimation shows a high level of risk, the interlock switch should be doubled up and monitored. But in many circumstances this device, due to its application, design and simplicity, will not fail to danger and there will be no undetected faults to monitor.
It should be checked that the contactor complies with relevant standards that cover the required characteristics and conditions of use. By attending to these factors it is possible to keep the possibilities of failure to a minimum. But for some situations even this is unacceptable and in order to increase the level of safety provision we need to use duplication and monitoring. The wiring that connects the components must also be considered. Undetected short circuit and ground faults could lead to a dangerous condition but if it is properly designed and installed using standards such as IEC/EN 60204, the chances of failure are greatly reduced. This system can provide a significant level of safety that will be adequate for many situations. You will have noticed that the contactor and the wiring are both prone to unlikely, though theoretically possible, faults. In some cases it may be possible, by taking precautions (e.g., with regard to cable protection and routing), to eliminate all fault possibilities. If this is not feasible then techniques relevant to categories 2, 3 and 4 such as duplication and monitoring are usually both more practical and cost effective.
Therefore, the type of category used will depend on both the risk assessment and the nature and complexity of the device or system. It is also clear that where a total system meets the requirements of category 3 for example it may include devices to category 1. If there are fault possibilities the higher the degree of risk, calculated in the risk estimation, the greater the justification for measures to prevent or detect them. The type of category should be chosen to give the most suitable and efficient method of doing this. Remember, the risk estimate is one factor but the nature of the protective device or system and the machine’s operating characteristics must also be taken into account.
Power Contactors
Figure 35
1-24
Safety Light Curtain Control System
Safety Light Curtain
Machine Controls
Safety Principles
Further Considerations and Examples Figure 35 shows the same basic circuit, but the interlock switch is replaced by a safety light curtain.
in a manner that prevents any foreseeable short circuits or ground faults. This system will satisfy the requirements of category 1.
The safety light curtain is a complex device. Even in its simplest form it will have a relatively large number of electronic components including integrated circuits. More sophisticated types (with more features) may also depend on programmable devices and software. To anticipate and eliminate all dangerous faults in an electronic but nonprogrammable device would be a huge task and with a programmable device it would be virtually impossible. There-fore we must accept that faults will be possible and the best answer is to detect them and ensure that the necessary protective action is taken (e.g., locking out to a safe state). So we would need a device that satisfies the requirements of category 2, 3 or 4. With a simple circuit such as in Figure 35 the light curtain will also monitor the wiring and contactors. As all light curtains are relatively complex, the choice of categories will usually depend solely on the results of the risk assessment. This does not preclude the fact that it may be possible to work to a different category if a device uses an unconventional but provable approach.
Start
Stop
K1 Guard Interlock Switch
Figure 36 Figure 37 shows a slightly more complex circuit. In this case there is a requirement for the interlock device to control more than one contactor, each being on a different power circuit. Its component parts must be given the same considerations. Start
Stop
We can see from the last two examples that the same degree of protection is provided by two types of systems using devices satisfying different categories.
Further Considerations and Examples This section provides examples of safety related control circuits with reference to recommended practices and the safety related control system categories where appropriate.
Minotaur MSR5T Safety Relay Monitoring Unit
General Requirements The system must be capable of withstanding expected influences. These will include temperature, environment, power loading, frequency of use, airborne interference, vibration, etc. The standard IEC 60204-1 “Safety of machinery—Electrical equipment of machines—Specification for general requirements” provides detailed guidance on such things as electric shock protection, wiring practices, insulation, equipotential bonding, equipment, power supplies, control circuits and functions, etc. A knowledge of this standard is essential for those concerned with the design and maintenance of safety related control systems. Circuits and Monitoring Safety Relay Units The examples given below are based on the use of a control interlocking switch but the same principle can be applied to other switching devices (e.g., emergency stop or trip devices). Category 1 Figure 36 shows a simple safety related control circuit. The interlock device has positive mode operation and satisfies the requirements of category 1. The contactor is correctly selected for its duty and is designed and manufactured to specific standards. The part of the system most prone to a fault is the connecting wiring. In order to overcome this, the wiring should be installed in accordance with the relevant clauses of IEC 60204-1. It should be routed and protected
K1
Guard Interlock Switch
K2
Figure 37 With a nonsafety related circuit an ordinary relay could be used to “split” the signal but where safety is concerned this would definitely not be acceptable as they can (and sometimes do) stick. Therefore a monitoring safety relay unit such as the Guardmaster MINOTAUR MSR5T is used to provide an ensured switching action. This system will satisfy the requirements of category 1. Category 2 Figure 38 shows a system which satisfies the requirements of category 2 and therefore must undergo a test of the safety function before the machine can be started. It must also be tested periodically. At initial power up the Minotaur will not allow switching of power to the contactor until the guard is opened and closed. This initiates a check for any single faults in the circuit from the switch to the Minotaur. Only when this check is successful will the contactor be energized. At every subsequent guard operation the circuit will be similarly checked.
1-25
Safety Principles
Further Considerations and Examples Start
Stop
Guard Interlock Switch
K1
Minotaur MSR6R (Reset mode) Safety Relay Monitoring Unit
Figure 38 Category 3 Figure 39 shows a system that satisfies the requirements of category 3 and is often suitable for applications with higher risk estimations. It is a dual channel system that is fully monitored, including the two contactors. On opening and closing the guard, any single dangerous fault will cause the Minotaur to lock off power to the contactors until the fault is corrected and the Minotaur is reset. Start
Stop
Guard Interlock Switch
Contactors K1
K2
Minotaur MSR6T Safety Relay Monitoring Unit
Figure 39 Category 4 Category 4 requires that the safety system function is still provided even with an accumulation of undetected faults. The most practicable way of achieving this is to employ continuous or high frequency monitoring techniques. This is not feasible with most mechanical or electro-mechanical components (e.g., mechanical switches, relays, contactors) such as those used in interlocking and emergency stop systems. These techniques are viable (and often used) to monitor solid state electronic components because a high frequency change of state is possible and does not substantially degrade the life of the component. Therefore the category 4 approach is often found in self-contained “sub-systems” such as light curtains. P.E.S. (Programmable Electronic Systems) In the safety related circuits shown above, the protective device is directly connected to the contactor(s) using only wiring and simple or fully monitored electro-mechanical devices. This is the recommended “hard wired” method. Its simplicity means that it is reliable and relatively easy to monitor. Increasingly, the normal
1-26
operational control of machinery is being handled by programmable equipment. With the advances in technology, programmable and complex electronic control systems could be regarded as the central nervous system of many machines. Whatever happens in the control system will affect the machine action and conversely whatever happens to the machine action will affect the control system. Stopping one of these machines by any source other than its control system may result in severe tool and machine damage as well as program loss or damage. It is also possible that, upon restarting, the machine may behave in an unpredictable manner due to “scrambling” of its control command sequence. Unfortunately, due to their complexity most programmable electronic systems have too many failure modes to allow their use as the only way of stopping the machine on command from an guard door interlock or emergency stop button. In other words, we can stop it without machine damage OR stop it SAFELY—BUT NOT BOTH. Three solutions are given below: 1. Safety Related Programmable Systems In theory it is possible to design a programmable system that has a safety integrity level high enough for safety related use. In practice this would be achieved by using special measures such as duplication and diversity with cross monitoring. In some situations this may be possible but it is important to realize that these special measures must be applied to all aspects including the writing of software. The basic question is, can you prove that there will be no (or sufficiently few) failures? A full failure mode analysis for even relatively simple programmable equipment may, at best, be excessively time consuming and expensive or, at worst, impossible. The standard IEC 61508 deals with this subject in great detail and anyone concerned with safety related programmable systems is advised to study it. The development costs of these systems are justifiable in applications where they have significant advantages or no other method will work. 2. Monitoring Unit with Time Delayed Override Command (see Figure 40). This system has the high integrity level of hard wiring and also allows a correctly sequenced shut-down which protects the machine and program. Main Contactor Timed Delay Output Minotaur MSR10 RD
Guard Interlock Switch
PLC
Normal Machine Control
Figure 40
Safety Principles
Further Considerations and Examples The Guardmaster MINOTAUR MSR10RD primary outputs are connected to inputs at the programmable device (e.g., P.L.C.) and the delayed outputs are connected to the contactor. When the guard interlock switch is actuated, the primary outputs on the Minotaur switch immediately. This signals the programmable system to carry out a correctly sequenced stop. After sufficient time has elapsed to allow this process, the delayed output on the Minotaur switches and isolates the main contactor. This family of Guardmaster products can be used with various protective devices and is available with other configurations and switching arrangements to suit the requirements of particular systems. Note: Any calculations to determine the overall stopping time must take the Minotaur output delay period into account. This is particularly important when using this factor to determine the positioning of devices in accordance with standard EN 999.
Other Considerations Machine Re-start If, for example, an interlocked guard is opened on an operating machine, the safety interlock switch will stop that machine. In most circumstances it is imperative that the machine does not restart immediately when the guard is closed. A common way of achieving this is to rely on a latching contactor start arrangement as shown in Figure 42. An interlocked guard door is used as an example here but the requirements apply to other protection devices and emergency stop systems.
Contactor
Contactor Control Coil
Interlock Switch Shown with Guard Closed
Auxiliary Contacts
"Start" Button
"Stop" Button
Derived Contactor Control Supply
Power Contacts
Guardmaster Atlas Guard Interlock Switch with Solenoid Release Locking
Neutral
PLC
3 Phase Power to Machine Motor
Figure 42
Contactor
Solenoid Release Signal
Figure 41 3. Programmable System Controlled Guard Locking Devices (see Figure 41). This system again provides the high integrity level of hard wiring combined with the ability to give a correctly sequenced shut down but it is only applicable where the hazard is protected by a guard. In order to allow opening of the guard door the Guardmaster ATLAS solenoid must receive a release signal from the P.L.C. This signal will only be given after a stop command sequence has been completed. This ensures there is no tool damage or program loss. When the solenoid is energized the door can be opened which causes the control circuit contacts on the ATLAS to isolate the machine contactor. In order to overcome machine run-down or spurious release signals it may be necessary to use a Guardmaster CU1 timed delay unit or CU2 stopped motion detector in conjunction with the P.L.C. (Either the Guardmaster Atlas or TLS-GD2 switches can be used in this application).
Pressing and releasing the start button momentarily energizes the contactor control coil which closes the power contacts. As long as power is flowing through the power contacts the control coil is kept energized (electrically latched) via the contactor’s auxiliary contacts which are mechanically linked to the power contacts. Any interruption to the main power or control supply results in the deenergizing of the coil and opening of the main power and auxiliary contacts. The guard interlock is wired into the contactor control circuit. This means that restart can only be achieved by closing the guard and then switching “ON” at the normal start button which resets the contactor and starts the machine. The requirement for normal interlocking situations is made clear in ISO 12100-1 Paragraph 3.22.4 (extract) When the guard is closed, the hazardous machine functions covered by the guard can operate, but the closure of the guard does not by itself initiate their operation. Many machines already have either single or double contactors which operate as described above (or have a system which achieves the same result). When fitting an interlock to existing machinery it is necessary to determine whether the power control arrangement meets this requirement and take additional measures if necessary.
1-27
Safety Principles
Reset Functions Reset Functions The Minotaur safety relays are designed with either monitored manual reset or automatic/manual reset.
Monitored Manual Reset A monitored manual reset requires a closing and opening of a circuit after the gate is closed or the E-Stop is reset. Figure 43 shows a typical configuration of a reset switch connected in the output monitoring circuit of an MSR6R/T. The mechanically linked normally closed auxiliary contacts of a power switching contactors are connected in series with a momentary push button. After the guard has been opened and closed again, the Minotaur will not allow the machine to be restarted until the reset button has been pressed and released. When this is done the Minotaur checks (i.e., monitors) that both contactors are OFF and that both interlock circuits (and therefore the guard) are closed. If these checks are successful the machine can then be restarted from the normal controls.
Momentary Push Reset Button
Interlock Switch
The use of control guards is only allowed under certain stringent conditions because any unexpected start-up or failure to stop would be extremely dangerous. The interlocking system must have the highest possible reliability (it is often advisable to use guard locking). The use of control guards can ONLY be considered on machinery where there is NO POSSIBILITY of an operator or part of his body staying in or reaching into the danger zone while the guard is closed. The control guard must be the only access to the hazard area.
Other Considerations Input Impedance The input impedance of the monitoring safety relays determines how many input devices can be connected to the relay and how far away the input devices can be mounted. For example, the Minotaur MSR6R/T has a maximum allowable input impedance of 500 ohms (Ω). When the input impedance is greater than 500 Ω, the MSR6R/T will not switch on its outputs. Care must be taken by the user to ensure that the input impedance remains below the maximum specification. The length, size and type of wire used affects input impedance. Table 2 shows typical resistance of annealed copper wire at 25°C.
Minotaur MSR6RT Safety Relay Monitoring Unit
ISO cross
Machine Controls Power Contactors
Figure 43 The reset switch should be located in a place that provides a good view of the hazard so that the operator can check that the area is clear before operation.
Auto/Manual Reset Some Minotaur safety relays have automatic/manual reset. In this case, the reset line can be jumpered allowing an automatic reset. The user must then provide another mechanism for preventing machine start-up when the gate closes. Alternatively, the user can use the circuit shown in Figure 43, but the Minotaur will not be able to detect a shorted reset switch or a shorted auxiliary contact on the contactor. An auto-reset device does not require a manual switching action but after de-actuation it will always conduct a system integrity check before resetting the system. An auto-reset system should not be confused with a device without reset facilities. In the latter the safety system will be enabled immediately after de-actuation but there will be no system integrity check.
Control Guards A control guard stops a machine when the guard is opened and directly starts it again when the guard is closed.
1-28
section mm2
AWG Size
Ω per 1000m
Ω per 1000ft 10.15
0,5
20
33.30
0,75
18
20.95
6.385
1,5
16
13.18
4.016
2,5
14
8.28
2.525
4
12
5.21
1.588
Table 2
Safety Principles
Control Guards Enclosed Thermal Current
Rated operational current Ie at the rated operational voltage Ue
VA
Designation
Utilizatio n
120V
240V
380V
480V
500V
600V
Make
Break
A150
AC-15
10
6
–
–
–
–
–
7200
720
A300
AC-15
10
6
3
–
–
–
–
7200
720
A600
AC-15
10
6
3
1.9
1.5
1.4
1.2
7200
720
B150
AC-15
5
3
–
–
–
–
–
3600
360
B300
AC-15
5
3
1.5
–
–
–
–
3600
360
B600
AC-15
5
3
1.5
0.95
0.92
0.75
0.6
3600
360
C150
AC-15
2.5
1.5
–
–
–
–
–
1800
180
C300
AC-15
2.5
1.5
0.75
–
C600
AC-15
2.5
1.5
0.75
0.47
0.375
0.35
D150
AC-14
1.0
0.6
–
–
–
D300
AC-14
1.0
0.6
0.3
–
–
E150
AC-14
0.5
0.3
–
–
125V
Direct Current
1800
180
0.3
1800
180
–
–
432
72
–
–
432
72
–
–
–
216
36
250V
400V
500V
600V
N150
DC-13
10
2.2
–
–
–
–
275
275
N300
DC-13
10
2.2
1.1
–
–
–
275
275
N600
DC-13
10
2.2
1.1
0.63
0.55
0.4
275
275
P150
DC-13
5
1.1
–
–
–
–
138
138
P300
DC-13
5
1.1
0.55
–
–
–
138
138
P600
DC-13
5
1.1
0.55
0.31
0.27
0.2
138
138
Q150
DC-13
2.5
0.55
–
–
–
–
69
69
Q300
DC-13
2.5
0.55
0.27
–
–
–
69
69
Q600
DC-13
2.5
0.55
0.27
0.15
0.13
0.1
69
69
R150
DC-13
1.0
0.22
–
–
–
–
28
28
R300
DC-13
1.0
0.22
0.1
–
–
–
28
28
Table 3 Number of Input Devices The risk assessment process should be used to help determine how many inputs devices should be connected to a monitoring safety relay unit (MSRU) and how often the input devices should be checked. To assure that E-Stops and gate interlocks are in an operational state, they should be checked for operation at regular intervals, as determined by the risk assessment. For example, a dual channel input MSRU connected to an interlocked gate that must be opened every machine cycle (e.g., several times per day) may not have to be checked. This is because opening the guard causes the MSRU to check itself, its inputs and its outputs (depending on configuration) for single faults. The more frequent the guard opening the greater the integrity of the checking process. Another example might be E-Stops. Since E-Stops are typically used only for emergencies, they are likely to be rarely used. Therefore a program should be established to exercise the E-Stops and confirm their effectiveness on a scheduled basis.
A third example might be access doors for machine adjustments, which like E-Stops might be rarely used. Here again a program should be established to exercise the E-Stops on a scheduled basis. The risk assessment will help determine whether the input devices need to be checked and how often they should be checked. The higher the level of risk, the greater integrity required of the checking process. And the less frequent the “automatic” checking, the more frequent should be the imposed “manual” check. Output Ratings Output ratings describe the ability of the safeguarding device to switch loads. Typically, the ratings for industrial devices are described as resistive or electromagnetic. A resistive load may be a heater type element. Electromagnetic loads are typically relays, contactors, or solenoids; where there is a large inductive characteristic of the load. Annex A of standard IEC 60947-5-1, shown in Table 3 describes the ratings for loads.
1-29
Safety Principles
Control Guards Designation Letter: The designation is a letter followed by a number, for example A300, A300 The letter relates to the conventional enclosed thermal current and whether that current is direct or alternating. For example A represents 10 amps alternating current. The number stands for the rated insulation voltage. For example, 300 represents 300V. Utilization: The Utilization describes the types of loads the device is designed to switch. The three utilisation relevant to IEC 947-5 are shown in Table 4. Utilization
Description of Load
AC-12
Control of resistive loads and solid state loads with isolation by opto-couplers
AC-13
Control of solid state loads with transformer isolation
AC-14
Control of small electromagnetic loads, (less than 72 VA)
AC-15
Electromagnetic loads greater than 72 VA
DC-12
Control of resistive loads and solid state loads with isolation by opto-couplers
DC-13
Control of electromagnets
DC-14
Control of electromagnetic loads having economy resistors in circuit
Table 4 Thermal Current, Ith: The conventional enclosed thermal current is the value of current used for the temperature-rise tests of the equipment when mounted in a specified enclosure. Rated Operational Voltage Ue and Current Ie; The rated operational current and voltage specify the making and breaking capacities of the switching elements under normal operating conditions. The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster products are specifically rated at 125VAC, 250VAC and 24VDC. Consult the factory for usage at voltages other than these specified ratings. VA: The VA (Voltage x Amperage) ratings indicate the ratings of the switching elements when making the circuit as well as breaking the circuit. Example 1: An A150, AC-15 rating indicates that the contacts can make a 7200VA circuit. At 120V AC, the contacts can make a 60 amp inrush circuit. Since the AC-15 is an electromagnetic load, the 60 amp is only for a short duration; the inrush current of the electromagnetic load. The breaking of the circuit is only 720 VA because the steady state current of the electromagnetic load is 6A, which is the rated operational current. Example 2: An N150, DC-13 rating indicates that the contacts can make a 275VA circuit. At 125V AC, the contacts can make a 2.2 amp circuit. DC electromagnetic loads do not have an inrush current like AC electromagnetic loads. The breaking of the circuit is also 275VA because the steady state current of the electromagnetic load is 2.2, which is the rated operational current.
1-30
Interlocking Principles and Devices One of the most important types of protective devices is a safety interlock switch that interlocks a guard door with the power source of the hazard. When the guard door is opened the power is isolated, thus ensuring that the machine is safe when the operator requires access. There are many variations of interlock switches each with their own characteristics. It is important to ensure that the type of device chosen is correct for its application. Later in this chapter we will look at a series of logical decisions leading to the exact choice of device to be used. First let us familiarize ourselves with some of the general features and requirements which make devices suitable for interlocking applications. Standards The standard ISO 14119: “Interlocking devices associated with guards” provides guidance and is intended to be used in conjunction with IEC 60947-5-1 for electromechanical switches and an equivalent standard for magnetic and proximity type switches (IEC 60947-5-3). Reliability An interlock switch must operate reliably even under extreme conditions and rough treatment. The operating mechanism should be kept as simple as possible and all materials used in its manufacture should be of the highest quality. The design should ensure that component wear is kept to a minimum. The mechanism should be enclosed in a strong sealed case. Security The security of an interlock switch is dependent on its ability to withstand attempts to “cheat” or defeat the mechanism. An interlock switch should be designed so that it cannot be easily defeated. In some circumstances personnel may be tempted to override the switch in some way. Information concerning the use of the machine, gathered at the risk assessment stage, will help to decide whether this is more likely or less likely to happen. The more likely it is to happen then the more difficult it should be to override the switch or system. The level of estimated risk should also be a factor at this stage. Switches are available with various levels of security ranging from resistance to impulsive tampering, to being virtually impossible to defeat. It should be noted at this stage that if a high degree of security is required it is sometimes more practical to achieve this by the way in which it is mounted.
Safety Principles
Control Guards system will fail to danger and is therefore unacceptable. This type of system is easily defeated by pushing the plunger while the guard is open. Even worse, the switch can be tripped accidentally by an operator leaning onto or into the machine while the guard is open. Note: It may be acceptable in certain applications to use a negative mode operating switch in conjunction with a positive mode device.
Gua
Figure 44
With single mechanical type interlocking switches, when the guard is opened the movement of the guard should be connected in the positive mode to the safety-related contacts of the switch. This ensures that the contacts are physically pulled apart or “force disconnected” by the movement of the guard. The switch should NOT rely solely on spring pressure to open the contacts as the force exerted may not be able to overcome sticking or welded contacts. There is also the possibility that the switch could fail to danger if the spring breaks and there is no other means of opening the contacts.
Gua
oor rd D
or
Positive Mode Forced Disconnection Overcomes Contact Weld
For example, if the switch is mounted as in Figure 44 with a covering track, there is no access to the switch with the guard door open. The nature of any “cheating” prevention measures taken at the fitting stage will depend on the operating principle of the switch. Positive Mode Operation (also referred to as Direct Opening) ISO TR 12100-2 explains that if a moving mechanical component inevitably moves another component along with it, either by direct contact or via rigid elements, these components are said to be connected in the positive mode.
o rd D
Figure 46 Figure 46 shows a simple example of positive mode operation giving forced disconnection of the contacts. A cam is mounted on the door hinge so as to directly operate the contacts whenever the guard door is open. Spring pressure can only close the contacts when the guard is fully closed. Any spring breakage will only result in a failure to a safe condition. Enclosure The positive mode operation principle shown in Figure 46 is used wherever it is relevant in Guardmaster interlock switches. They also avoid any possible abuse by enclosing the contact block and cam in a strong and secure enclosure. This means that the cam and the contact block cannot be separated and it is impossible to defeat the switch by cutting another slot in the cam. The principle is adapted further for tongue operated interlock switches as shown in Figure 47. These devices are widely used as they are simple to fit at the opening edge of the guard and can be used on sliding, hinged and removable guard doors. The actuator tongue is mounted on the guard door and opening the guard causes the tongue to force disconnection of the contacts. The switch mechanism is mounted in an enclosure and the tongue actuating principle is designed to resist tampering.
Sticking or Welded Contacts
Figure 45 Figure 45 shows a typical negative (or nonpositive) mode operating system. There is no direct link between the guard door and the safety contacts so the system relies entirely on spring pressure to open the contacts. In the event of spring failure, contact weld or sticking, the
1-31
Safety Principles
Control Guards
Forced Disconnection
Galvanic Isolation Figure 48 shows contact blocks with two sets of contacts. A galvanic isolation barrier is required if it is possible for the contacts to touch each other back to back in the event of contact weld or sticking.
Voltage Crossover
Galvanic Isolation Barrier
Figure 47 Figure 48 Fitness for Purpose At a minimum, all designs and materials must be able to withstand the expected operating stresses and external influences.
Typical Forms of Interlocking Devices In the broadest terms, there are two basic types of electrical interlocking systems, whose characteristics are shown in Figure 49.
Other Safety Principles For nonmechanical devices there is no physical contact (under normal conditions) between the switch and actuator. Therefore positive mode operation cannot be used as the way of ensuring the switching action and we need to use other methods as follows. Oriented Failure Mode With simple devices we can use components with an oriented failure mode as explained in ISO TR 12100-2. This means using components in which the predominant failure mode is known in advance and always the same. The device is designed so that anything likely to cause a failure will also cause the device to switch off. An example of a device using this technique is the Guardmaster FERROGARD noncontact magnetically actuated interlock switch. The contacts are connected with an internal nonresettable overcurrent protection device. Any overcurrent situation in the circuit being switched will result in an open circuit at the protection device that is designed to operate at a current well below that which could endanger the safety-related contacts. Duplication (also referred to as Redundancy) If components which are not inherently safe are used in the design and they are critical to the safety function, then an acceptable level of safety may be provided by duplication of those components or systems. In case of failure of one component, the other one can still perform the function. It is usually necessary to provide monitoring to detect the first failure so that, for example, a dual channel system does not become degraded to a single channel without anybody being aware of it. Attention also must be given to the issue of common cause failures. Any failure which will cause all duplicated components (or channels) to fail at the same time must be protected against. Suitable measures may include using diverse technologies for each channel or ensuring an oriented failure mode.
1-32
Control Interlocking
Without Guard Locking
Mechanical Devices
Non contact Devices
Power Interlocking
With Guard Locking
Unconditional Guard Unlocking
Conditional Guard Unlocking
Figure 49 Power interlocking: The power source of the hazard is directly interrupted due to the opening of the guard. Control interlocking: The power source of the hazard is interrupted by the switching of a circuit which controls the power switching device. The following text deals with the interlocking of electrical power supplies as this is by far the most common requirement but the same basic principles can be applied to hydraulic and pneumatic systems. Power Interlocking The movement of the guard is interlocked with the direct switching of the power to the hazard. For equipment using low voltage and power most types of interlock switch can be used for power interlocking. But because most industrial machinery uses a relatively high power three phase supply we need purpose designed power interlocking systems with the power interrupting switch capable of handling and breaking the load reliably.
Safety Principles
Control Guards
A
A
A
Figure 50
Figure 52
The most practical method of power interlocking is a trapped key system such as the PROSAFE system (see Figure 50). The power isolation switch is operated by a key that is trapped in position while the switch is in the ON position. When the key is turned the isolation switch contacts are locked open (isolating the power supply) and the key can be withdrawn.
Rotate and remove Key “A” from the power isolator. Power is then OFF. To gain access through guard doors Key “A” is inserted and rotated in the Key Exchange Unit. Both “B” Keys are then released for guard locks. Key “A” is trapped preventing power from being switched on. Two “C” Keys are released from the guard door locks for use in the next sequence step or as personnel keys (see Figure 53).
The guard door is locked closed and the only way to unlock it is by using the key from the isolator. When this key is turned to release the guard locking unit it is trapped in position and cannot be removed until the guard is closed and locked again. Therefore it is impossible to open the guard without first isolating the power source and it is also impossible to switch on the power without closing and locking the guard. This type of system is extremely reliable and has the advantage of not requiring electrical wiring to the guard. The main disadvantage is that because it requires the transfer of the key every time, it is not suitable if guard access is required frequently.
A
A
Figure 53 Figures 54 and 55 show other examples of trapped key interlock applications by using double key locking units and keys with different codes together with a key exchange unit, complex systems can be formed. Besides ensuring that the power is isolated before access can be gained it is also possible to use the system to enforce a pre-defined sequence of operation.
A
Figure 51 Whenever whole body access is required, the use of a personnel key is recommended as shown in Figure 51. The PROSAFE range is available in double key versions for such a requirement.
Figure 54
The use of a personnel key ensures that the operator cannot be locked in the guarded area. The key can also be used for robot teach mode switches, inch mode controls, etc.
1-33
Safety Principles
Control Guards Interlocking Switches without Guard Locking These devices do not restrict access and the guard door can be opened at any time but as soon as it is opened the switch isolates the power to the hazard via the contactor control circuit. If the hazard always ceases immediately and the operator cannot reach the parts while they are dangerous then the requirements are satisfied. IF THE HAZARD DOES NOT CEASE IMMEDIATELY there is a possibility that an operator can reach it while it is “running down” and still dangerous. To avoid this unacceptable situation there are three alternatives: 1. Use an interlocking device with guard locking to prevent guard opening before the hazard has ceased. (see Figure 56.)
Figure 55 Required Features Because the entire safety of this type of system depends on its mechanical operation it is critical that the principles and materials used are suitable for the expected demand made on them. If an isolation switch is part of the system it should have positive mode operation and it should satisfy the requirements of the relevant parts of IEC 60947. The integrity and security of the system revolves around the fact that under certain conditions the keys are trapped in place, therefore two basic features need to be ensured: 1. THE LOCK CAN ONLY BE OPERATED BY THE DEDICATED KEY. This means that it should not be possible to “cheat” the lock by using screwdrivers, etc., or defeat the mechanism by mistreating it in any straightforward manner. Where there is more than one lock on the same site it also means that the specifying of key codes must in itself prevent any possibility of spurious operation. 2. IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO OBTAIN THE KEY IN ANY WAY OTHER THAN THE INTENDED MANNER. This means that, for example, once the key is trapped, any excessive force applied to it will result in a broken key as opposed to a broken lock.
Figure 56 2. Install some form of braking device to achieve a fast stop. (see Figure 57.) Note: The integrity of the braking device needs to be considered both in terms of fault resistance and wear characteristics.
Control Interlocking Control interlocking is the most commonly used method of interlocking. An interlock switch is attached to the guard to detect movement and open the switch contacts whenever the guard is not fully closed. The contacts are connected via a control circuit to the hazard source primary control element (contactor). The control circuit considerations should be taken into account.
D.C . INJ EC BRA TION KE
Note the different types of devices suitable for control interlocking as illustrated in Figure 49 (page 32). The first major distinction is between devices with guard locking and without guard locking.
1-34
Figure 57 3. The distance between the hazard and the guard door should be such that it takes longer for the operator to reach the hazard than it does for the hazard to stop. (see Figure 58.)
Safety Principles
Control Guards
Figure 59 Figure 58 If a precise calculation is required, the standard EN 999 deals with the positioning of protective equipment with respect to approach speeds of parts of the human body. At present it does not specifically cover interlocked guard doors but its principle for the positioning of other safety devices based on approach speed and machine stopping time can reasonably be extrapolated to cover interlocked guard doors without guard locking. The following formula from EN 999 will give reliable results. S = (K x T) + C Where: S = The minimum distance in mm from the danger zone to the opening edge of the guard. K = 1600 (suggested). This parameter is based on research data showing that it is reasonable to assume an approach speed by the operator of 1600mm per second. The circumstances of the actual application must be taken into account. As a general guideline, the approach speed will vary from 1600 to 2500mm per sec. T = The overall stopping time of the system, i.e., the total time (seconds) from the opening of the interlock switch contacts to the cessation of the hazard.
These are: Tongue Operated Actuation With the Guardmaster Cadet switch as shown in Figure 59, the guard mounted actuator “tongue” opens or closes the contacts via the internal mechanism. Features: The tongue and mechanism are designed to prevent easy cheating of the switch. These devices are reliable and straightforward to install. They can be used on sliding, hinged and lift-off guards and their versatility makes them one of the most commonly used types of interlock switches. For consideration: The guard-mounted tongue needs to remain reasonably well aligned with the entry hole in the switch body. Tongue operated switches can be difficult to clean thoroughly. This may be a problem in the food/beverage and pharmaceutical industries. Hinge Operated Actuation The device is mounted over the hinge-pin of a hinged guard as shown in Figure 60. The opening of the guard is transmitted via a positive mode operating mechanism to the control circuit contacts.
C = An additional distance in millimeters based on possible intrusion towards the danger zone. This will depend on whether it is possible to reach over, around or through the guard before the switch contacts are opened. For example, the mesh on the guard may allow a finger, a hand or an arm to be extended through the guard. Standards EN 294 and EN 811 provide more information on calculation of reach distances. The next subdivision for interlocking devices without guard locking is their designation as mechanical actuation or noncontact actuation. Mechanically Actuated Devices With these devices the guard door is linked mechanically to the control circuit contacts of the switch using positive mode operation. There are three main types of mechanical actuation.
Figure 60
1-35
Safety Principles
Control Guards Features: When properly installed these types of switches are ideal for most hinged guard doors where there is access to the hinge center line. They can isolate the control circuit within 3° of guard movement and they are virtually impossible to defeat without dismantling the guard. For consideration: Care must be taken since an opening movement of only 3° can still result in a significant gap at the opening edge on very wide guard doors. It is also important to ensure that a heavy guard does not put excessive stress on the switch actuator shaft. Cam Operated Actuation This type of arrangement usually takes the form of a positive mode limit (or position) switch and a linear or rotary cam (as shown in Figure 61). It is generally used on sliding guards and when the guard is opened the cam forces the plunger down to open the control circuit contacts.
Positive Mode Limit Switch
Figure 61
Guard Closed
Non positive Mode Actuated Limit Switch
Figure 62 It is often advisable to use two switches as shown in Figure 62. Non contact (Nonmechanical) Actuation With these devices the guard door is linked to the control circuit contacts of the switch via a magnetic or electronic field. To make these types of devices suitable for interlocking duties they must incorporate enhancements that ensure their satisfactory operation. Because they do not have the benefit of true mechanical positive mode operation, noncontact switches must have other ways of ensuring that they cannot fail to a dangerous condition. This is achieved by either “oriented failure mode” principles or by the use of duplication and monitoring. The Guardmaster Ferrogard uses the principle of oriented failure mode. Due to the use of special components, the only safety-critical fault likely to occur would be a welding of the reed contacts due to excessive current being applied to the switch as illustrated in Figure 63.
Features: The simplicity of the system allows the switch to be both small and reliable. For consideration: It cannot be used on lift-off guards. It is extremely important that the switch plunger can only extend when the guard is fully closed. This means that it may be necessary to install additional stops to limit the guard movement in both directions. It is necessary to fabricate a suitably profiled cam that will operate within defined tolerances. The guard-mounted cam must never become separated from the switch as this will cause the switch contacts to close. Such a system can be prone to failures due to wear, especially when badly profiled cams or the presence of abrasive materials is a factor.
Positive Mode Actuated Limit Switch
Configured Magnetic Actuator in Sealed Case Actuation Field
Switch in Sealed Case
Non resettable Overcurrent Protection Device
Specially Profiled Heavy Duty Reed Contacts
External Fuse Suitably Rated to Protect Interlock Device
Figure 63 This is prevented by the nonresettable overcurrent protection device. There is a large margin of safety between the rating of this device and the reed contacts. Because it is nonresettable, the switch should be protected by a suitably rated external fuse. It is important that the switch is only operated by its intended actuator. This means that ordinary proximity devices which sense ferrous metal are not appropriate. The switch should be operated by an “active” actuator. The security can be further improved by coding such as on the Guardmaster Ferrotek. This switch uses the same oriented failure
1-36
Safety Principles
Control Guards mode principle as the Ferrogard but has higher security due to its coded actuator and sensor. Features: Noncontact devices are available in fully sealed versions, making them ideal for food and beverage applications as they have no dirt traps and can be pressure cleaned. They are extremely easy to apply and have a considerable operating tolerance so they can accept some guard wear or distortion and still function properly.
Wiga
4HR n WN2 6
0942
5516
Ferrocode
Up to 6 Switches
Safety Switch dc 28V 1A Vac 120 0.5A
Unconditional Guard Unlocking These devices are manually operated and the guard can be opened at any time. A handle or knob that releases the guard lock also opens the control circuit contacts. On a device such as the Guardmaster Centurion bolt switch, a time delay is imposed. The bolt which locks the guard in place operates the contacts and is withdrawn by turning the operating knob. The first few turns open the contacts but the locking bolt is not fully retracted until the knob is turned many more times (taking up to 20 seconds). The Prosafe trapped key system (see power interlocking section) can also be used to provide unconditional guard locking.
IP 67
Control Unit Contactor
e in Mad England
Red
Blk Blue
Power Supply
Wht
R
. r Ltd aste 2 4HR rdm .WN Gua land551 66 Eng 2 an, Wig Tel: 094
Safety 1
e ocod Ferr
Monitoring
m it Syste ol Un Contr f Safety Grn Yel 2 oo Safety er Pr Tamp Safety 1 Aux
Auxiliary
X2
Safety 2
X1
Figure 64 Sophisticated noncontact devices such as the Guardmaster Ferrocode feature an electronic coding principle. Ferrocode also has two separate and diverse switching “channels” and a control unit is available that monitors up to six sensor sets plus contactors and wiring (see Figure 64).
Features: These devices are simple to apply and they are extremely rugged and reliable. The time delay bolt switch is suitable mainly for sliding guards. For consideration: The stopping time of the hazard must be predictable and it must not be possible for the bolt to be withdrawn before the hazard has ceased. It must only be possible to extend the bolt into its locked position when the guard is fully closed. This means that it will be necessary to add stops to restrict the travel of the guard door, as shown in Figure 66.
For consideration: For the simpler actuation types, if security is an important issue, it may be necessary to apply them, as shown in Figure 65, so that they cannot be accessed while the guard is open. It is important, particularly for the noncoded types, that they are not subjected to extraneous interference by magnetic/electric fields. Hazard Area Stop
Switch
Actuator
Sliding Guard Guard Open—Machine Stopped—Guard Covering Switch
Figure 66 Conditional Guard Unlocking With these devices the guard can only be opened on receipt of a signal showing that:
Figure 65
The contactor is OFF.
Interlocking Switches with Guard Locking These devices are suited to machines with run down characteristics but they can also provide a significant increase of protection level for most types of machines.
A preset time interval has elapsed or alternatively that dangerous motion has ceased.
They provide interlocking of the hazard power source with guard movement and prevent the opening of the guard until it is safe to do so. These devices can be divided into two types: Unconditional and Conditional guard unlocking.
These signals are usually derived from the auxiliary contacts of the contactor and either a timer unit such as the Guardmaster CU1 or a stopped motion detection unit such as the Guardmaster CU2. They provide interlocking of the hazard power source with guard movement and also prevent the opening of the guard until it is safe to do so. Because an externally generated signal is required for lock release it makes them particularly suitable for use with PLC or other programmable electronic controlled machines.
1-37
Safety Principles
Control Guards
R2 R1 R3
Remote Indicator Start
K1
Safety Control and Auxiliary Circuits Contacts
Stop A1
R2 R1 R3
Safety
Solenoid Contacts
CU1 Timer Unit
Guard Mounted Actuator Tongue
A2
Solenoid Locking Switch
K1
13 14
Lock Release Solenoid
Figure 69 Figure 67 The best type of interlocking device for these purposes is a solenoidoperated locking switch such as the Guardmaster TLS-GD2 (as shown in Figure 67) or Atlas 4. For less frequently accessed applications, the Prosafe trapped key system (see power interlocking section) can be configured to operate in this way.
With the configuration shown in Figure 69, the switch will not release the guard until the contactor is OFF and a pre-set time interval has elapsed. The time range can be set from 0.1 sec to 40 minutes. The longest stopping time of the machine should be predictable and constant. It should not rely on braking methods that may degrade with use.
A1 X1
Solenoid Locking Interlock Switch (Titan shown)
41
54
53 A2 A1
Lock Release Solenoid
12
11 22
21
34
33
Safety Circuit
Start
K1
Start
42
K1
Stop
Stop
X2
CU2 Motion Sensing Unit
N P N P N P
Indication Circuit
Sensor
M Sensor
13
Solenoid Safety Solenoid Contacts Locking Switch
14 A2
Figure 68
Figure 70
In the example shown in Figure 68, the hazard ceases as soon as power is isolated by switching the machine OFF at the normal controls. The guard cannot be opened until the contactor has switched OFF. Once the guard is opened the control circuit contacts ensure that the contactor cannot be re-energized until the guard is closed and locked.
With the configuration shown in Figure 70, the switch will not release the guard until the contactor is OFF and all motion has stopped. On the systems shown in Figures 69 and 70, the machine is stopped by its operational control system either manually or automatically. Therefore these systems are especially useful on machines where tool damage or program loss could be caused by a crash stop due to inappropriate guard opening. Useful Questions for the Selection of Interlock Devices The following questions will assist in the logical selection of the most suitable type of interlocking device. Does the machine take time to run down after power isolation? YES = Guard locking with timed delay may be required. Is the machine stopping time predictable and constant? NO = Conditional guard locking with motion sensing may be required. Is whole body access required?
1-38
Safety Principles
Safety Light Curtains YES = Key operated guard locking with personnel key may be required. Can a crash stop cause machine or control system damage? YES = Conditional guard locking may be required. Will there be guard wear causing misalignment at the interlock device? YES = A noncontact device may be required. Does the device need to be totally sealed e.g. for washdowns or high humidity environment? YES = A noncontact device may be required. Is frequent access required? YES = Control interlocking may be most suitable. Is it likely that there will be attempts to cheat the interlock device? YES = A device with increased security may be required.
Safety Light Curtains Safety light curtains are most simply described as photoelectric presence sensors specifically designed to protect plant personnel from injuries related to hazardous machine motion. Also known as AOPDs (Active Opto-electronic Protective Devices), light curtains offer optimal safety, yet they allow for greater productivity and are the more ergonomically sound solution when compared to mechanical guards. They are ideally suited for applications where personnel need frequent and easy access to a point of operation hazard.
Operation Safety light curtains consist of an emitter and receiver pair that creates a multi-beam barrier of infrared light in front of, or around, a hazardous area. When any of the beams are blocked by intrusion in the sensing field, the light curtain control circuit sends a signal to the machine’s E-Stop. The emitter and receiver can be interfaced to a control unit that provides the necessary logic, outputs, system diagnostics and additional functions (muting, blanking, PSDI) to suit the application. When installed alone, the light curtain pair will operate as a control reliable switch. To eliminate susceptibility to false tripping attributed to ambient light and interference (crosstalk) from other opto-electronic devices, the LEDs in the emitter are pulsed at a specific rate (frequency modulated), with each LED pulsing sequentially so that an emitter can only affect the specific receiver associated with it. While this method lends itself to increased safety, light curtains must offer further protection in terms of Control Reliability.
Control Reliability
“The capability of the machine control system, the safeguarding, other control components and related interfacing to achieve a safe state in the event of a failure within their safety related functions.” Achieving a system that meets this requirement can be accomplished by a design strategy, method or feature that separates the safetyrelated functions of a system into components, modules, devices or systems that can be monitored or checked by other components, modules, devices or systems. Applying the following three simple concepts help ensure the performance of the safety function • Redundancy—use of identical methods • Diversity—use of dissimilar methods • Monitoring—use of verification methods The selection and integration of components, modules, devices and systems that have been specifically designed and intended for use in safety-related functions also contributes to the achievement of control. A disciplined design process is vital for achieving a complete and accurate design, and should be used ensure that control reliability is achieved. In terms of opto-electronic safeguarding, this means the light curtain system must be able to send a stop signal to the machine even in the event of a component failure(s). Light curtains have two cross monitored outputs that are designed to change state when the safety light curtain sensing field is broken. If one of the outputs fails, the other output responds and sends a stop signal to the controlled machine and as part of the cross monitored system detects that the other output did not change state or respond. The system would then go to a lock out condition, which prevents the machine from being operated until the safety light curtain is repaired. Resetting the safety light curtains or cycling power will not clear the lock out condition.
Types and Functions Allen-Bradley Guardmaster safety light curtains fall into three product families: Point of Operation Control (POC), Area Access Control (AAC), and Perimeter Access Control (PAC). Point of Operation Control (POC) POC light curtains use a pair of optic heads to create a curtain of infrared light that allows personnel frequent and easy access to point of operation hazards. These light curtains are used when the operator is required to interface with machinery at a relatively short distance from the hazardous area. Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Point of Operation Control light curtains are available in 14mm and 30mm resolutions for finger and hand protection, respectively.
Control Reliability is a concept that appears in the ANSI B11 series of standards and OSHA 1910.217. The definition, appearing in the most recent B11 standards is,
1-39
Safety Principles
Safety Light Curtains machine, stopping hazardous machine motion and protecting personnel.
Figure 71: POC Area Access Control (AAC) AAC is a long range system (up to 275 feet) that uses single-beam emitter and receiver units to create a protective barrier around hazardous machines including robotic cells, transfer stations, palletizers and loading machines. Breakage of the beam is used to stop the hazardous machine motion. Two-beam or multi-sided access control is attained through the use of corner mirrors.
Figure 73: PAC Blanking—Fixed and Floating Blanking allows portions of a light curtain’s sensing field to be disabled to accommodate objects typically associated with the process to be ignored by the light curtain. When this object is stationary—e.g. mounting hardware, a machine fixture, tooling or conveyor—so is the blanked portion of the beam. Known as fixed blanking, this function requires that the object be in the specified area at all times. If any of the beams programmed as “blanked” are not blocked by the fixture or workpiece, a stop signal is sent to the machine.
Fixed Blank Beam
Roller Work Path
Work Piece
Figure 72: AAC Perimeter Access Control (PAC) PAC light curtains use an emitter and receiver pair to create a singleor multi-beam barrier (1, 2, 3 or 4 beams) for full body detection around hazardous machinery. When the guarded perimeter is breached the safety light curtain sends a stop signal to the guarded
1-40
Figure 74: Fixed blanking Floating blanking allows an object such as feed stock to penetrate the sensing field at any point without stopping the machine. This is
Safety Principles
Safety Light Curtains accomplished by disabling up to two light beams anywhere within the sensing field. Instead of creating a fixed window, the blanked beams move up and down, or “float”, as needed. Depending on the number of beams floated, any one or two beams can be blocked anywhere in the sensing field without the system sending a stop signal to the protected machinery.
Work Piece
Work Piece
Floating Blank Beam Work Piece
Roller Work Path Power Supply
M8200
Figure 76: Muting Press Brake Die
Figure 75: Floating blanking When using blanking, fixed or floating, the Safety Distance (the minimum distance the light curtain can be from the hazard such that an operator cannot reach the hazard before the machine stops) is affected. Since blanking increases the minimum object size that can be detected, the minimum safety distance must also increase based on the formula for calculating the minimum safety distance (see Calculating Safety Distance, page 1-43). Muting Sometimes the process requires that the machine must stop when personnel enters the area, yet remain running when automaticallyfed material enters. In such a case, a muting function is necessary.
Muting requires the combination of a light curtain, two or four muting sensors and a control unit to process the signals and determine if and when to activate the muting function. Muting sensors are mounted in front of and behind the light curtain and only a specific combination of sensor outputs will initiate the muting function. For example, when the two sensors in front of the light curtain change state within a predetermined timeframe, the light curtain goes into muting. The muting sensors must be mounted far enough apart so that personnel cannot feasibly walk into the area and trip both muting sensors simultaneously and for a long enough period to initiate the muting of the light curtain. ANSI B11.19 states the safety performance requirements for muting. “Muting of the device shall be permitted during the nonhazardous portion of the machine cycle. Muting of the device shall be accomplished such that a single failure of a component, a subassembly or a module of the system/device that affects the performance of the safety-related functions shall not prevent a normal stop command from being initiated, or shall cause an immediate stop command. In the event of a failure, re-initiation of the machine shall be prevented until the failure is corrected or the system or device is manually reset.” For example, a simple cam-operated limit switch wired in parallel with the device’s output is not sufficient. A failure of the cam switch will not be detected.
Area Guarding Trip and Presence Sensing Devices When deciding how to protect a zone or area it is important to have a clear understanding of exactly what safety functions are required. In general there will be at least two functions.
1-41
Safety Principles
Safety Light Curtains • Switch off or disable power when a person enters the hazard area. • Prevent switching on or enabling of power when a person is in the hazard area. At first thought these may seem to be one and the same thing but although they are obviously linked, and are often achieved by the same equipment, they are actually two separate functions. Trip Point Start of detection
End of detection
Detected
the presence of a person beyond the tripping point and throughout the entire accessible hazard zone. In other words an area presence sensing device. Examples of area presence sensing devices are pressure sensitive mats, laser scanners, horizontally mounted light curtains. We can use a device that combines the perimeter tripping and area sensing functions or we can use a separate device positioned inside the tripping or guarded perimeter. It is obvious that any area sensing device also acts as a trip device when its sensing area is first entered. (e.g. see below)
Undetected
Hazard
Trip Point Start of detection
Hazard
Figure 77 To achieve the first point we need to use some form of trip device. In other words a device which detects that a part of a person has gone beyond a certain point and gives a signal to trip off the power. If the person is then able to continue past this tripping point and their presence is no longer detected then the second point (preventing switching on) may not be achieved. For applications where whole body access is possible, examples of devices with these characteristics are vertically mounted light curtains, single beam safety light barriers, sensitive edges, telescopic antennae switches. An interlocked guard door should usually also be regarded as a trip only device because (unless there are special provisions such as key access systems), there is usually nothing to prevent the door being closed after entry. Trip Point Start of detection
Figure 79 Laser Scanner The first step into the detection zone trips off the hazard power. Subsequent steps prevent switching on or enabling of the power. For trip devices and area presence sensing devices which also act as trip devices the safety distance calculation applies (see later section). There are two fundamental requirements:
UNDETECTED
Hazard Detected
Figure 78 If whole body access is not possible so a person is not able to continue past the tripping point, their presence is always detected and the second point (preventing switching on) is achieved. For these types of applications the same types of devices perform tripping and presence sensing. The only difference being the type of application. We can see that if it is possible to gain whole body access beyond the tripping point then it may be necessary to have some way of sensing
1-42
Detection Zone
• It must not be possible to access the hazard without tripping the device. • The device must be positioned far enough away so that it is not possible to reach the hazard before it has had enough time to “run down” to the safe condition. This means that the shortest accessible distance between the perimeter of the sensing zone of the device to the hazard must at least satisfy the safety distance formulae. Alternatively it may be possible that the hazard may be safeguarded in a way which does not entirely depend on separation distance. Typically this could involve hard guarding with interlocking with guard door locking. Until the machine is in a safe condition the guard door cannot be unlocked.
Safety Principles
Safety Light Curtains In this case the amount of over-travel or “coasting” and the time to stop the motion are critical. Sensitive edges can provide effective protection for many problematic hazard types such as shearing and trapping. It can also be very useful as a general trip device.
Presence Sensing Device Initiation (PSDI)
Figure 80 A risk assessment may show that a person could enter the guarded area and perhaps be lost from view. The guard door may be shut and the machine started by another person. One way of avoiding this situation is to sense the presence of a person anywhere within the enclosed guarded area. Using this approach it is possible to save space but this is usually at expense of accessibility by forklifts etc.
Also known as single break/double break operating mode, PSDI involves the use of a light curtain not only as a safety device, but as the control for machine operation. PSDI initiates a machine cycle based on the number of times the sensing field is broken. For example, as an operator reaches toward the hazard to insert a workpiece, breakage of the beams immediately stops the machine or prevents restart of the machine until the operator removes his hand from the area, at which time the machine automatically initiates its next cycle. OSHA 1910.217 (h) specifically addresses the application requirements and restrictions for the use of PSDI on mechanical power presses.
Applying Safety Light Curtains When determining the light curtain that is appropriate for the application, you must: 1. Identify each individual hazard on the equipment to be protected 2. Determine if the machine can be stopped at any point in its stroke or cycle 3. Identify what is to be protected: finger, hand, limb, body 4. Calculate safety distance 5. Size the light curtain—personnel must not be able to reach over, under or around the light curtain to access the hazard. Ultimately, Steps 1-3 of the selection process are based upon the findings of the Risk Assessment as outlined in the Safety Principles section (see page 1-17).
Calculating Safety Distance
Figure 81 If an area presence sensing device is used for that purpose, it does not need to comply with the size and positioning requirements of EN 999. But it still has the fundamental requirement that it must not be possible to access the hazard without tripping off the device. The movement of a person actuates the device. The device must cover the enclosed area. Typical devices are pressure sensitive mats, horizontal light curtains or grids, laser scanners. The selection of the type of device to use depends on matching the characteristic of the device to the characteristics of the application. In some cases instead of the operator moving to the hazard, the hazard moves to the operator e.g. powered doors. In this case the leading edge of the hazard is fitted with a sensitive edge which is actuated by a soft contact with a person and is capable of stopping the movement before any injury can occur.
When installing safety light curtains, a minimum safe distance that the light curtain can be mounted from the point of hazard must be calculated. The distance between the hazard and the light curtain must be such that the time it takes the operator to reach the hazard (with respect to approach speeds of parts of the human body) is greater than the stopping time of the machine. In the United States there are two formulas that are used to properly calculate the safety distance. The first, the OSHA formula, is the minimum requirement for the calculation of the safety distance. The second formula, the one recommended by Rockwell Automation, is the ANSI formula, which incorporates additional factors to be considered when calculating the safety distance. OSHA Safety Distance Calculation Formula The OSHA safety distance formula as specified in CFR Subpart O 1910.217 is as follows: Ds = 63 X TS
1-43
Safety Principles
Safety Light Curtains Where: DS Safety Distance 63 Is the OSHA recommended hand speed constant in inches per second TS Is the total stop time of all devices in the safety circuit, measured in seconds. This value must include all components involved in stopping the hazardous motion of the machinery. For a mechanical power press it is the stopping time measured at approximately the 90º position of the crankshaft rotation. Note:
The TS number must include the response times of all devices, including the response time of the safety light curtain, the safety light curtain controller (if used), the machine’s control circuit and any other devices that react to stop the hazardous motion of the machinery. Not including the response time of a device or devices in the stop time calculation will result in insufficient safety distance for the application. This may result in operator injury.
ANSI Formula for Safety Distance The ANSI calculation of the safety distance for light curtains, as used in B11.1-1988 and B11.19-1990, is as follows:
distance an object can penetrate the sensing field before the light curtain initiates a stop signal can be determined. Example: Using the ANSI formula, a light curtain response time (Tr) of 15ms, a machine stopping time (Ts+Tc) of 180ms, a brake monitor response time (Tbm) of 40ms and a 3.2 inch depth of penetration, the calculation would be as follows (Remember that the hand speed constant, K, is set by OSHA at 63 inches per second): Ds = K x (Ts + Tc + Tr + Tbm) + Dpf Ds = 63 x (0.180 + 0.015 + 0.040) + 3.2″ Ds = 63 x (0.235) + 3.2″ Ds = 14.805 + 3.2″ Ds = 18.00″ So, the minimum safe distance the safety light curtain must be mounted from the hazard is 18 inches. EN 999 Formula for Safety Distance EN 999 is the European standard that deals with the positioning of protective equipment with respect to approach speeds of parts of the human body. It is recommended for use on machines that are intended for sale or use in Europe. Quite similar to the ANSI formula, the formula from EN 999 is as follows: S = (K x T) + C
Ds = K x (Ts + Tc + Tr + Tbm) + Dpf Where: Ds The minimum safe distance from the danger zone to the light curtain (in.) K 63 in./sec (suggested). The hand speed constant as defined in ANSI B11.19-1990: “…the hand speed constant, K, has been determined by various studies and although these studies indicate speeds of 63 in./sec to over 100 in./sec, they are not considered conclusive determinations. The user should consider all factors, including the physical ability of the operator, when determining the value of K to be used.” Ts The stopping time of the machine, in seconds, measured at approximately the 90º position of crankshaft rotation as determined with a measuring device. Tc Response time, in seconds, of control circuit to activate machine stoppage as determined with a measuring device. Tr Light curtain response time as specified in seconds. Tbm Additional stopping time attributed to the response time of a brake monitor. If no brake monitor is available, a percentage factor must be added to account for braking system deterioration due to wear. For new brakes, 20% is recommended; for older brakes, 10% is the recommended factor. Dpf Additional distance based on the depth penetration factor (refer to Table 10 in 1910.217). By knowing the minimum object size that can be seen by the light curtain, the
1-44
Where: S The minimum distance in mm from the danger zone to the light curtain sensing field. K 1600 (suggested). This parameter is based on research data showing that it is reasonable to assume an approach speed by the operator of 1600mm/sec. The circumstances of the actual application must be taken into account. As a general guideline, the approach speed will vary from 1600 to 2500mm/sec. T The overall stopping time of the system, i.e., the total time, in seconds, from the initiation of the stop signal to the cessation of the hazard. C An additional distance, in millimetres, based on possible depth of penetration toward the hazard area. This will depend on whether it is possible to reach over, around or through the light curtain before the switch contacts are opened. Standards EN 294 and EN 811 provide more information on calculation of reach distances. Example: Using the same measurements (converted to mm) from the ANSI calculation above, the EN 999 equation yields: S = (K x T) + C S = (1600 x 0.235) + 81.28 S = (376) + 81.28 S = 457.28mm
Safety Principles
U.S. Safety Regulations Therefore, the minimum safe distance for the same application would be 457.28mm based on EN 999. R
S
S
R
Interference from Reflective Surfaces and Other Opto-Electronic Devices When reflective surfaces (shiny/polished metals, foils, glossy painted surfaces, etc.) are in close proximity to opto-electronic devices such as light curtains, the system is susceptible to faults due to deflection of the optical beams. A situation such as this can result in the light curtain not detecting an object or personnel in the sensing field. Point of
Reflective Surface
a Transmitte
D
4˚
a Receiver
4˚
S
R
S
R
S
R
S
R
Figure 83: Multiple POC
U.S. Safety Regulations
Beam
Light Beam Interrupted
Direction of
This section introduces some of the industrial machine guarding safety regulations in the U.S. This is only a starting point; readers must further investigate the requirements for their specific applications and take measures to ensure that their designs, uses and maintenance procedures and practices meet their own needs as well as national and local codes and regulations. There are many organizations that promote industrial safety in the United States. These include:
Safety Distance (a) mm 500
400
300
200
100 60 20 1
2
3
4
5
6
Operati ng
1. Corporations, which use established requirements as well as establish their own internal requirements; 2. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA); 3. Industrial organizations like the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), the Robotics Industries Association (RIA), and the Association of Manufacturing Technology (AMT); and the suppliers of safety products and solutions, like Rockwell Automation.
Figure 82: POC alignment/distance When installing light curtains, the potential for interference can be calculated to determine the minimum distance that the light curtain must be mounted from the reflective surface in question. As a general rule, no reflective surfaces should be contained within the beam angle of the light curtain emitter or receiver with misalignment taken into account. Using the following formula: D = R/2 (tan 2a) Where: D Distance to the reflective surface (worst case)
Occupational Safety and Health Administration In the United States, one of the main drivers of industrial safety is the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). OSHA was established in 1970 by an Act of the U.S. Congress. The purpose of this act is to provide safe and healthful working conditions and to preserve human resources. OSHA accomplishes this task by publishing regulations in Title 29 of the Code of Federal Regulation (29 CFR). Standards pertaining to industrial machinery are published by OSHA in Part 1910 of 29 CFR. Table 5 is a list of those standards pertaining to specific machines.
R Distance between the light curtain emitter and receiver a The angle of acceptable misalignment (angle of divergence) as determined from the light curtain specifications It is also necessary to take into account other opto-electronic devices near the safety light curtain. It is quite possible for light curtains to interfere with each other or “crosstalk.”
1-45
Safety Principles
U.S. Safety Regulations Section
Description
1910.212
General Requirements for all machines
1910.213
Woodworking machinery requirements
1910.214
Cooperage Machinery
1910.215
Abrasive Wheel Machinery
1910.216
Mills and Calendars in the rubber and plastics industry
1910.217
Mechanical Power Presses
1910.218
Forging Machines
1910.219
Mechanical Power-transmission Apparatus
Table 6 Where possible, OSHA promulgates national consensus standards or established Federal standards as safety standards. The mandatory provisions (e.g., the word shall implies mandatory) of the standards, incorporated by reference, have the same force and effects as the standards listed in Part 1910. For example, the national consensus standard NFPA 70 is listed as a reference document in Appendix A of Subpart S-Electrical of Part 1910 of 29 CFR. NFPA 70 is a standard, which was developed by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). NFPA 70 is also known as the National Electric Code (NEC). Therefore all the mandatory requirements in the NEC are mandatory by OSHA. With reference to safety light curtains, standards are categorized as either application standards or construction standards. Application standards define how to apply a light curtain to machinery. Examples include ANSI B11.1, which provides information on the use of machine guarding on power presses, and ANSI/RIA R15.06, which outlines light curtain use for robot guarding. Construction standards provide details on the design and construction of Presence Sensing Devices (PSDs) in safety applications. IEC61496, “Safety of Machinery -Electrosensitive Protective Equipment” covers the requirements of light curtains, and photoelectric sensors in general, used in safety applications. The following are selected OSHA standards and Precision Metalforming Association (PMA) interpretations related to machine guarding and safety light curtains: OSHA 1910.217(b)(7)—Part Revolution Clutch, Controls (7) Machines using part revolution clutches.
prevent initiation of a successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure shall be detectable by a simple test, or indicated by the control system. This requirement does not apply to those elements of the control system which have no effect on the protection against point of operation injuries. OSHA 1910.217(b)(14)—Brake System Monitoring (14) Brake system monitoring. When required by paragraph (c)(5) of this section, the brake monitor shall meet the following requirements: (i) Be so constructed as to automatically prevent the activation of a successive stroke if the stopping time or braking distance deteriorates to a point where the safety distance being utilized does not meet the requirements set forth in paragraph (c)(3)(iii)(e) or (c)(3)(vii)(c) of this section. The brake monitor used with the Type B gate or movable barrier device shall be installed in a manner to detect slide top-stop overrun beyond the normal limit reasonably established by the employer. (ii) Be installed on a press which indicates when the performance of the braking system has deteriorated to the extent described in paragraph (b)(14)(i) of this section; and (iii) Be constructed and in-stalled in a manner to monitor brake system performance on each stroke. OSHA 1910.217(c) - Safeguarding the Point of Operation (1) General Requirements. (i) Its shall be the responsibility of the employer to provide and insure the usage of “point of operation guards” or properly applied and adjusted point of operation devices on every operation performed on a mechanical power press (see Table 0–10. (ii) The requirement of subdivision (i) of this sub paragraph shall not apply when the point of operation opening is one-fourth inch or less (see Table 0–10. Table O-10 [from OSHA 1910.217 (f)(4)] Distance of Opening from Point of Operation Hazard (inches)
Maximum Width of Opening (inches)
1/2 to 1-1/2
1/4
(i) The clutch shall release and the brake shall be applied when the external clutch engaging means is removed, deactivated, or de-energized.
1-1/2 to 2-1/2
3/8
2-1/2 to 3-1/2
1/2
3-1/2 to 5-1/2
5/8
(ii) A red colour stop control shall be provided with the clutch/ brake control system. Momentary operation of the stop control shall immediately deactivate the clutch and apply the brake. The stop control shall override any other control, and re-actuation of the clutch shall require use of the operating (tripping) means which has been selected.
5-1/2 to 6-1/2
3/4
OSHA 1910.217(b)(13)—Control Reliability (13) Control reliability. When required by paragraph (c) (5) of this section, the control system shall be constructed so that a failure within the system shall not prevent the normal stopping action from being applied to the press when required, but does
1-46
6-1/2 to 7-1/2
7/8
7-1/2 to 12-1/2
1-1/4
12-1/2 to 15-1/2
1-1/2
15-1/2 to 17-1/2
1-7/8
17-1/2 to 31-1/2
2-1/8
Safety Principles
U.S. Safety Regulations OSHA 1910.217 (c)(3)—Point of Operation Devices (i) Point of operation devices shall protect the operator by: (a) Preventing and/or stopping normal stroking of the press if the operator’s hands are inadvertently placed in the point of operation. OSHA 1910.217 (c)(3)(iii)—Presence Sensing Device (iii) A presence sensing point of operation device shall protect the operator as provided in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(a) of this section, and shall be interlocked into the control circuit to prevent or stop slide motion if the operation’s hand or other part of his body is within the sensing field of the device during the down stroke of the press slide. (a) The device may not be used on machines using full revolution clutches. (b) The device may not be used as a tripping means to initiate slide motion except when used in total conformance with paragraph (h) of this section. (c) The device shall not be constructed so that a failure within the system does not prevent the normal stopping action from being applied to the press when required, but does prevent the initiation of a successive stroke until the failure is corrected. The failure shall be indicated by the system. (d) Muting (bypassing of the protective function) of such device, during the up stroke of the press slide, is permitted for the purpose of parts ejection, circuit checking, and feeding. (e) The safety distance (D(s)) from the sensing field to the point of operation shall be greater than the distance determined by the following formula: D(s) = 63 inches/second X T(s) Where: Ds = minimum safety distance (inches); 63 inches/second = hand speed constant; and Ts = stopping time of the press measured at approximately 90° position of crankshaft rotation (seconds). (f) Guards shall be used to protect all areas of entry to the point of operation not protected by the presence sensing device. OSHA 1910.217 (c)(5) Additional Requirements for Safeguarding Where the operator feeds or removes parts by placing one or both hands in the point of operation, and a two hand control, presence sensing device of Type B gate or movable barrier (on a part revolution clutch) is used for safeguarding. (i) the employer shall use a control system and a brake monitor which comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14) of this section. This requirement shall be complied with by November 1, 1975. (ii) the exception in paragraph (b)(7)(v)(d) of this section for two hand controls manufactured and installed before August 31, 1971, is not applicable under this paragraph (c)(5);
(iii) the control of air clutch machines shall be designed to prevent a significant increase in the normal stopping time due to a failure within the operating valve mechanism, and to inhibit further operation if such failure does occur, where a part revolution clutch is employed. The exception is paragraph (b)(7)(xi) of this section for controls manufactured and installed before August 31, 1971, is not applicable under this paragraph (c)(5). OSHA 1910.217(e) Inspection, Maintenance, and Modification of Presses (1) Inspection and maintenance records. (i) It shall be the responsibility of the employer to establish and follow a program of periodic and regular inspections of his power presses to insure that all their parts, auxiliary equipment, and safeguardings are in a safe operating condition and adjustment. The employer shall maintain records of these inspections which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, and the serial number, or other identifier of the power press that was inspected. (ii) Each press shall be inspected and tested no less than weekly to determine the condition of the clutch/brake mechanism, antirepeat feature and single stroke mechanism. Necessary maintenance or repair or both shall be performed and completed before the press is operated. The employer shall maintain records of these inspections and the maintenance work performed. These requirements do not apply to those presses which comply with paragraphs (b)(13) and (14) of this section. The employer shall maintain a certification record of inspections, test, and maintenance work which includes the date of inspection, the signature of the person who performed the inspection, test or maintenance; and the serial number or other identifier of the press that was inspected, tested or maintained. (2) Modification. It shall be the responsibility of any person modifying a power press to furnish instructions with the modification to establish new or changed guidelines for use and care of the power press so modified. (3) Training of maintenance personnel. It shall be the responsibility of the employer to insure the original and continuing competence of personnel caring for, inspecting, and maintaining power presses. OSHA 1910.217(f) Operation of Power Presses (2) Instructions to operators. The employer shall train and instruct the operator in the safe method of work before starting work on any operation covered by this section. The employer shall insure by adequate supervision that correct operating procedures are being followed. (3) Work area. The employer shall provide clearance between machines so that movement of one operator will not interfere with the work of another. Ample room for cleaning machines, handling material, work pieces, and scrap shall also be provided. All surrounding floors shall be kept in good condition and free from obstructions, grease, oil, and water.
1-47
Safety Principles
U.S. Safety Regulations (4) Overloading. The employer shall operate his presses within the tonnage and attachment weight ratings specified by the manufacturer.
National Fire Protection Association The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) was organized in 1896. Its mission is to reduce the burden of fire on the quality of life by advocating scientifically based consensus codes and standards, research and education for fire and related safety issues. The NFPA sponsors many standards to help accomplish its mission. Two very important standards related to industrial safety and safe-guarding are the National Electric Code and Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery. The National Fire Protection Association has acted as sponsor of the National Electrical Code since 1911. The original code document was developed in 1897 as a result of the united efforts of various insurance, electrical, architectural, and allied interests. The NEC has since been updated numerous times; it is revised about every three years. Article 670 of the NEC covers some details on industrial machinery and refers the reader to the Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery, NFPA 79. NFPA 79 applies to electrical/electronic equipment, apparatus, or systems of industrial machines operating from a nominal voltage of 600 volts or less. The purpose of NFPA 79 is to provide detailed information for the application of electrical/electronic equipment, apparatus, or systems supplied as part of industrial machines that will promote safety to life and property. NFPA 79, which was officially adopted in 1962, is very similar in content to the International Electro-technical Committee standard IEC 60204-1.
ANSI B11.3 Power Press Brakes, Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use of ANSI B11.4 Machine Tools - Shears - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B11.5 Machine Tools - Iron Workers - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B11.6 Lathes, Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use of ANSI B11.7 Machine Tools - Cold Headers and Cold Formers, Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B11.8 Drilling, Milling, and Boring Machines, Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use of ANSI B11.9 Grinding Machines, Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use of ANSI B11.10 Metal Sawing Machines, Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use of ANSI B11.11 Gear Cutting Machines, Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use of ANSI B11.12 Machine Tools - Roll-Forming and Roll-Bending Machines Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B11.13 Machine Tools - Single- and Multiple-Spindle Automatic Bar and Chucking Machines - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care and Use ANSI B11.14 Machine Tools - Coil-Slitting Machines Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B11.15 Pipe, Tube, and Shape Bending Machines, Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use
Machines, which are not covered by specific OSHA standards, are required to be free of recognized hazards which may cause death or serious injuries. These machines must be designed and maintained to meet or exceed the requirements of applicable industry standards. NFPA 79 is a standard that would apply to machines not specifically covered by OSHA standards.
ANSI B11.16 Metal Powder Compacting Presses, Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use
U.S. National Standards
ANSI B11.19 Machine Tools - Safeguarding When Referenced by Other B11 Machine Tool Safety Standards-Performance Criteria for the Design, Construction, Care and Operation
The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) serves as the administrator and coordinator of the United States private sector voluntary standardization system. It is a private, non profit, membership organization supported by a diverse constituency of private and public sector organizations. ANSI, itself, does not develop standards; it facilitates the development of standards by establishing consensus among qualified groups. ANSI also ensures that the guiding principles of consensus, due process and openness are followed by the qualified groups. Below is a partial list of industrial safety standards that can be obtained by contacting ANSI. ANSI B11.1 Machine Tools - Mechanical Power Presses - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B11.2 Machine Tools - Hydraulic Power Presses, Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use
1-48
ANSI B11.17 Machine Tools - Horizontal Hydraulic Extrusion Presses Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B11.18 Machine Tools - Machines and Machinery Systems for Processing Strip, Sheet, or Plate from Coiled Configuration Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use
ANSI B11.20 Machine Tools - Manufacturing Systems/Cells - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B11.21 Machine Tools - Machine Tools Using Lasers for Processing Materials - Safety Requirements for Design, Construction, Care, and Use ANSI B151.1 Horizontal Injection Moulding Machines - Safety Requirements for Manufacture, Care and Use ANSI B151.15 Extrusion Blow Moulding Machines - Safety Requirements ANSI B151.21 Injection Blow Moulding Machines - Safety Requirements ANSI B151.26 Plastics Machinery - Dynamic Reaction - Injection Moulding Machines - Safety Requirements for the Manufacture, Care and Use
Safety Principles
Organizations ANSI B151.27 Plastics Machinery - Robots used with Horizontal Injection Moulding Machines - Safety Requirements for the Integration, Care and Use ANSI B151.28 Plastics Machinery - Machines to Cut, Slit, of Buff Plastic Foams - Safety Requirements for the Manufacture, Care and Use ANSI B155.1 Packaging Machinery and Packaging-Related Converting Machinery - Safety Requirements for Construction, Care and Use ANSI B65.1 Safety Standard-Printing Press Systems ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces ANSI/NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery ANSI/RIA 15.06 Safety Requirements for Industrial Robots and Robot Systems
Organizations Organizations that provide copies of the standards and directives include: ANSI—American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street, New York, NY 10036 Phone: 212/642-4900 Fax (for ordering): 212/302-1286 Fax (general): 212/398-0023 Internet: www.ansi.org International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 3, rue de Varembe, P.O. Box 131 CH 1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland Phone: 011-41-22-919-0211 Fax: 011-41-22-919-0300 Internet: www.iec.ch/ International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 1, rue de Varembe, CH 1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland Phone: 011-41-22-749-0111 Fax: 011-41-22-733-3430 Internet: www.iso.ch/ British Standards Institution 389 Chiswick High Road, London W4 4AL United Kingdom Phone: 011-44-181-996-9000 Fax: 011-44-181-996-7400 Internet: www.bsi.org.uk/ Global Engineering Documents 7730 Carondelet Ave., Suite 407, St. Louis, MO 63105 Phone: 800/854-7179 Fax: 314/726-6418 Internet: http://global.ihs.com CEN--European Committee for Standardization Central Secretariat rue de Stassart 36, B-1050, Brussels, Belgium Phone: 011-32-2-550-0819 Fax: 011-32-2-550-0811 Internet: http://tobbi.iti.is/cen/welcome.html
CENELEC--European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization Central Secretariat rue de Stassart 35, B-1050, Brussels, Belgium Phone: 011-32-2-51-96-919 Fax: 011-32-3-51-96-871 OSHA--Occupational Safety & Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20210 Phone: 202/693-1999 Internet: http://www.osha.gov
Australian Safety Regulations Standards Association of Australia 1 The Crescent Homebush, NSW 2104 Phone: 202/693-1999 Internet: http://www.standards.com.au AS 4024.1-1996 Safeguarding of machinery. Part 1: General principles This standard identifies the hazards and risks associated with industrial machinery and describes methods of risk reduction. It also describes and illustrates the safety principles and protective measures that should be applied over the life-cycle of the machinery. AS4024.2-1998 Safeguarding of machinery. Part 2: Installation and commissioning requirements for electro-sensitive systems—Optoelectronic devices The basis of this standard is IEC61496-1 and -2. Part 2 covers the installation and commissioning of light curtains specifically related to machinery safety. AS 4024.3-1998 Safeguarding of machinery. Part 3: Manufacturing and testing requirements for electro-sensitive systems— Optoelectronic devices The basis of this standard is IEC61496-1 and -2. Part 3 covers the manufacturing and testing of light curtains specifically related to machinery safety. AS4024.4-1998 Safeguarding of machinery. Part 4: Installation and commissioning requirements for electro-sensitive systems—Pressure-sensitive devices The basis of the this standard is EN1760-1 and EN1760-2. Part 4 covers the installation and commissioning of mats, floors, edges and bars that are used with machinery, regardless of the energy used. AS 4024.5-1998 Safeguarding of machinery. Part 5: Manufacturing and testing requirements for electro-sensitive systems— Pressure-sensitive devices The basis of the this standard is EN1760-1 and EN1760-2. Part 5 covers the manufacturing and testing mats, floors, edges and bars that are used with machinery, regardless of the energy used.
1-49
Safety Principles
Notes Notes
1-50
Presence Sensing Safety Devices Safety Light Curtains Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 GuardShield Light Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 SafeShield Light Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Point of Operation Control (POC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Perimeter Access Control (PAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Area Access Control (AAC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces SafeShield DeviceNet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 120V AC Power Supply and Safety Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Safety Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Safety Laser Scanner Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 SafeZone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Safety Mats Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 MatGuard Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 MatGuard Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84 MatGuard Mat Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Safety Edges Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 Safedge Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 Safedge Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Overview GuardShield Typical System Configuration Components required for a “Guard only” system: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Optic heads (operate on 24V DC)ordered as a pair (transmitter/receiver) Cablestwo required per pairspecify transmitter cable and receiver cable Mounting brackets—included Safety Relay Module—optional (Note: It is possible to attain a Category 3 system by connecting the GuardShield OSSDs directly to two safety contactors and connecting and configuring the EDM mode of operation in the GuardShield’s receiver.) 3
1
2 4
2-2
The Allen-Bradley GuardMaster safety light curtain is a two box safety light curtain, consisting of a non matched transmitter and receiver pair. Any GuardShield transmitter of same protective height and resolution will work with any receiver of same protective height and resolution. The GuardShield safety light curtain has two transistor type, PNP safety outputs. These outputs may be connected to a safety relay module or directly to the primary control element of a machine. The GuardShield also has an auxiliary non safety output which can be connected to a PLC for status of the OSSDs, to a stack light or to control an infeed motor, etc. The GuardShield requires separate Transmitter and Receiver cables. The Transmitter cable utilizes a 4-pin micro quick-disconnect connector and is offered in lengths from 2 meters to 30 meters. The receiver cable has an 8-pin micro quick-disconnect connector and is also offered in lengths from 2 meters to 30 meters.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Overview The Allen-Bradley GuardMaster GuardShield is a two box, Type 4 light curtain with dip switch selectable operating modes.
The GuardShield has dip-switches located in both the Transmitter and Receiver endcaps. The dip-switches are accessible through a hinged door which is secured to the endcap with a security screw. The Transmitter dip-switches provide for the configuration and activation of Beam Coding and Machine Test Signal. Beam Coding changes the pulse pattern of the transmitted Infrared light. This helps to reduce optical interference as the GuardShield’s receiver “looks” for a specific pattern of Infrared light. Machine Test Signal is used to simulate the interruption of the GuardShield’s sensing field, which allows for the monitoring of the OSSD outputs. The machine control circuitry of a press may be connected to monitor the change in output status of both OSSDs at every stroke or cycle of the press. The GuardShield’s Receiver dip-switches provide for the configuration and activation of the following modes of operation; Guard Only—The GuardShield operates as an OFF/On switch. The OSSDs switch OFF when the sensing field is interrupted and return to the ON state when the sensing field is restored. Start Interlock—In this mode of operation, the GuardShield powers up with the OSSDs OFF until a manual reset of the GuardShield is completed. Restart Interlock – The GuardShield’s OSSDs will remain in the OFF state after each interruption of the sensing field. A manual reset of the GuardShield is required. Beam Coding—The status of the beam coding dip–switch must match the transmitter’s setting or the GuardShield will not power up to a Green state. EDM—External Device Monitoring allows the GuardShield to monitor the status of the primary control contactors or other final switching devices of the protected machinery. It is designed to require a change of state of the controlling device when the Guardshield’s OSSDs change state.
Receiver Access Door Interlock
Door Status Switch
Mode Activation Button
Guard Only
MPCE/EDM
Fixed Blanking
1 Beam Floating Blanking
2 Beam Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking—An object that will be always located in the sensing field can be “Blanked” out by setting the appropriate dip switch to the ON position and then depressing the Mode Activation Button. This allows the GuardShield to “Learn” that the object will always be obstructing certain beams. Floating Blanking—Floating Blanking allows any one or two beams in a GuardShield to be interrupted without the OSSDs changing to an OFF state. The 14mm resolution is capable of allowing two beams to “Float” throughout the protective height of the GuardShield’s sensing field.
Beam Coding
Unused
Receiver Dip Switches
The 30mm resolution is limited to allowing one beam to “float” throughout the protective height of the GuardShield’s sensing field.
2-3
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Overview SafeShield The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster SafeShield family of safety light curtains are software configurable, Type 4 AOPDs per IEC 61496. SafeShield is available in resolutions of 14mm and 30mm and offers many advanced features such as fixed blanking, fixed floating blanking, reduced resolution, beam coding, EDM, as well as a sevensegment status and diagnostic display on both transmitters and receivers. It is also possible to connect up to three segments in a cascaded configuration, with each of these segments having the advanced features individually programmed. Cable lengths between segments can be up to a maximum of three meters. A communication cable is provided to link your lap top to the SafeShield’s transmitter and receiver, allowing the programming and configuration of your system. Password protection assures that once a system is configured, it is securely stored in the system’s memory and is accessible only to authorized personnel. This versatile safety light curtain system provides maximum flexibility in solving simple to complex machine guarding applications.
mountable housing it allows easy wiring and configuration of DeviceNet parameters and diagnostic information. Typical System Configurations The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster SafeShield safety light curtain system is a two box design. This means the safety light curtain does not need a separate controller to operate. Therefore, the safety outputs of the light curtain (OSSDs) can be connected directly to any safety relay that will accept PNP inputs. The following are some common configurations of light curtain systems. The numbers on the drawing indicate the ordering steps to follow to ensure that a complete system is specified. Components required for a “Guard only” system: 1. 2. 3.
Optic heads (operate on 24V DC)ordered as a pair (transmitter/receiver) Cablestwo required per pairspecify length Mounting brackets—various styles available
Optional components (customer or Allen-Bradley Guardmaster supplied): 4.
Safety Relays
1
3
2
SafeShield DeviceNet Interface The SafeShield product family is also available with an optional DeviceNet interface, which is a nonsafety rated device that communicates status and diagnostic information from any SafeShield safety light curtain. In a compact 22.5m DIN rail
2-4
4
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Overview Point of Operation Control (POC) Overview Typical System Configurations The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster SafeShield safety light curtain system is a two box design. This means the safety light curtain does not need a separate controller to operate in a guard only mode with manual reset. Therefore, the safety outputs of the light curtain (OSSDs) can be connected directly to any safety relay that will accept PNP inputs. When more advanced features are required such as fixed blanking, floating blanking, presence sensing device initiation (PSDI), etc., the outputs of the safety light curtain must be connected to the 440L-M8100. This programmable interface can be configured to perform these functions (separate safety relays are also required with this module). The following are some common configurations of light curtain systems. The numbers on the drawing indicate the ordering steps to follow to ensure that a complete system is specified.
Components required for a system with options such as blanking, floating blanking, PSDI, etc. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Optic heads (operate on 24V DC)ordered as a pair (transmitter/receiver) Cablestwo required per pairspecify length Mounting bracketsminimum of 4 per optic head pair Programmable interface440L-M8100
Optional components (customer or Allen-Bradley Guardmaster supplied) 5.
Safety Relays
1
3
Components required for a “Guard only” system: 1. 2. 3.
Optic heads (operate on 24V DC)ordered as a pair (transmitter/receiver) Cablestwo required per pairspecify length Mounting bracketsminimum of 4 per optic head pair
2
4 5
Optional components (customer or Allen-Bradley Guardmaster supplied): 4.
Safety Relays
1 3
2 4
2-5
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Overview Components required for a single-beam Perimeter Access Control system (PAC), see Figure 2:
Perimeter Access Control Typical System Configurations The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Perimeter Access Control (PAC) safety light curtain system is a two box design. This means the safety light curtain does not need a separate controller to operate in a guard only mode with manual reset. Therefore, the safety outputs of the light curtain (OSSDs) can be connected directly to any safety relay that will accept PNP inputs. The following are some common configurations of light curtain systems. The numbers on the drawing indicate the ordering steps to follow to ensure that a complete system is specified.
1.
Optic head—transmitter and receiver are contained in same optic head (operates on 24V DC) Cablesone requiredspecify length (8-pin quick disconnect cable) Safety relay Power supply120V AC to 24V DC (if required) Mounting brackets Passive mirror column
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Components required for a multiple-beam Perimeter Access Control system (PAC), see Figure 1: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Optic heads (operate on 24V DC)ordered as a pair (transmitter/receiver) Cables7-pin cable for transmitter and 8-pin cable for receiver Safety relays Power supply120V AC to 24V DC Mounting brackets—minimum of 4 per optic head pair Mirror columns (for multiple side protection)
1
5
6
2
1 5
2 4 6 3
4
Figure 1
2-6
Figure 2: Single Beam PAC
3
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Overview Components Required for Perimeter Access Control (PAC) with Muting, see Figure 3: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Optic heads (operate on 24V DC) with muting moduleordered as a pair (transmitter/receiver) Cables7-pin cable for transmitter and 8-pin cable for receiver Safety relays Power supply Accessories/mounting brackets (muting lamp is required) Muting sensors (specified on page 2-38) Sensor patchcords (specified on page 2-38) Work Piece
1
6
Work Piece
2
5 1 7
Roller Work Path
Power Supply 3
4
M8200
Figure 3: PAC with Muting—Muting module is integral to PAC receiver
2-7
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Type 4 Specifications
Description The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster GuardShield safety light curtain is an economical, fully featured, Type 4 safety light curtain in a uniquely styled housing. GuardShield safety light curtains are general purpose presence sensing devices designed for use on hazardous machinery providing point of operation, as well as perimeter and access guarding. This self-contained, two box, safety light curtain has DIP switch selectable operating modes and are available in both 14mm and 30mm resolutions. Modes of operation such as fixed and floating blanking, beam coding, start/restart interlock, external device monitoring (EDM), machine test signal, are selected by dip-switches settings. These dipswitches are located beneath a security door, which are conveniently located on both the transmitter and receiver end caps.
Standards
EN 61496 Parts 1 & 2
Approvals
TUV and CE marked for all applicable directives; UL 61496, UL 1998
Protected Height
160mm...1760mm (6.3in...69.3in) in 160mm (6.3in) increments
Scanning Range/Resolution
0.3-7m/14mm (0.98-22.9ft/0.55in) 0.3m-18m/30mm (0.98-59ft/1.18in)
Resolution
14mm/30mm (0.55in/1.18in)
Enclosure Rating
IP 65
Connection Type
Transmitter: 4-pin micro QD Receiver: 8-pin micro QD
Supply Voltage Uv Maximum Residual Ripple
24V DC ± 20% 5 Vss
Power Consumption
0.9...2 Amps (no-load) 0.4A max (no load)
Synchronization
Optical, without separate synchronization channel
Outputs—Safety
2 x PNP, 0.5 A, short circuit protected
Output—Non safety
1 x PNP 0.5A max.
Minimum Output Voltage
Uv - 2V
Response Time
Depending on number of beams
Protection
Short circuit and overload
Cable Length
30m (100ft) max.
Mode of Operation
Manual or automatic restart
The GuardShield’s torsionally rigid, extruded aluminium, polyurethane powder coated housing, combined with an Environmental rating of IP65, allows the GuardShield to be used in guarding applications across a broad range of industries.
Safety Category
Type 4 (self-checking) per EN 61496
Operating Ambient Temp.
-10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
Features • • • • •
Fixed blanking—teachable Floating blanking—one or two beam Beam coding External Device Monitoring (EDM) Start/restart interlock
Air Humidity
15%...95% (not condensing)
Storage Temperature
-25°C to 75°C (-13°F to 167°F)
Approximate Dimensions Height Housing Cross Section
Length dependent upon protected height; (see dimensional drawings) 40 mm x 50 mm (1.57in x 1.96in)
Transmitter Wavelength
870nm
Vibration Resistance
IEC60068-2-6, frequency 10Hz to 55Hz Amplitude: 0.35mm (0.01in)
Shock
IEC60068-2-29 acceleration 10g, pulse duration 16ms
Note: The external power supply must be capable of buffering brief power failures of 20ms as specified in IEC 60204.
2-8
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Type 4 Product Selection 1. Safety Light Curtains—Standard System The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster GuardShield safety light curtains are ordered as pairs⎯transmitter and receiver⎯and are shipped under one part number. Each GuardShield transmitter and receiver is packaged with two right angle mounting brackets. After selecting the appropriate light curtain pair, ensure that required interfaces and accessories are ordered as well. Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
160 (6.3)
14 (0.55)
16
440L-P4J0160YD
160 (6.3)
30 (1.18)
8
440L-P4K0160YD
320 (12.6)
14 (0.55)
32
440L-P4J0320YD
320 (12.6)
30 (1.18)
16
440L-P4K0320YD
480 (18.9)
14 (0.55)
48
440L-P4J0480YD
480 (18.9)
30 (1.18)
24
440L-P4K0480YD
640 (25.2)
14 (0.55)
64
440L-P4J0640YD
640 (25.2)
30 (1.18)
32
440L-P4K0640YD
800 (31.5)
14 (0.55)
80
440L-P4J0800YD
800 (31.5)
30 (1.18)
40
440L-P4K0800YD
960 (37.8)
14 (0.55)
96
440L-P4J0960YD
960 (37.8)
30 (1.18)
48
440L-P4K0960YD
1120 (44.1)
14 (0.55)
112
440L-P4J1120YD
1120 (44.1)
30 (1.18)
56
440L-P4K1120YD
1280 (50.4)
14 (0.55)
128
440L-P4J1280YD
1280 (50.4)
30 (1.18)
64
440L-P4K1280YD
1440 (56.7)
14 (0.55)
144
440L-P4J1440YD
1440 (56.7)
30 (1.18)
72
440L-P4K1440YD
1600 (63.0)
14 (0.55)
160
440L-P4J1600YD
1600 (63.0)
30 (1.18)
80
440L-P4K1600YD
1760 (69.1)
14 (0.55)
176
440L-P4J1760YD
1760 (69.1)
30 (1.18)
88
440L-P4K1760YD
Note: The GuardShield transmitter requires a 4-pin cable and the receiver requires an 8-pin cable.
2. Cordsets⎯2 Required (one for transmitter and one for receiver) Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
Connector Style
Cable Pin/Wire Colour
Wire Rating
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
Transmitter
1
2
4
3
Straight
1 Brown 2 White 3 Blue 4 Black
22AWG 300V 3A
2 (6.5)
889D-F4AC-2
5 (16.4)
889D-F4AC-5
10 (32.8)
889D-F4AC-10
15 (49.2)
889D-F4AC-15
20 (65.6)
889D-F4AC-20
30 (98.4)
889D-F4AC-30
2 (6.5)
889D-F8AB-2
Receiver
2
1 7
3
8 6
5
4
Straight
1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red
24AWG 36V DC/30V AC 1.5A
5 (16.4)
889D-F8AB-5
10 (32.8)
889D-F8AB-10
15 (49.2)
889D-F8AB-15
20 (65.6)
889D-F8AB-20
30 (98.4)
889D-F8AB-30
2-9
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Type 4 Product Selection (continued) Cordsets Approximate Dimensions⎯mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 42 (1.7)
14.5 (0.57)
Straight female
Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
3. Safety Relay Interfaces—Optional Relay
Input
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Terminals
24V AC/DC 1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
115V AC
Removable
230V AC
MSR127RP 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC
Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126T) Dual Channel (MSR126.1T) Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126R)
MSR126
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
Reset
Catalogue Number
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
Monitored Manual
440R-N23133
Automatic/Manual
Monitored Manual
440R-C23139
24V AC/DC Light Curtain or Safety Mat
3 N.O.
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
115V AC
Removable
440R-N23117 440R-N23116 440R-N23115 440R-N23114 440R-N23113 440R-N23112 440R-N23123 440R-N23122 440R-N23121 440R-N23120 440R-N23119 440R-N23118
Automatic/Manual or Monitored Manual
230V AC
440R-C23137
440R-C23136
MSR131RTP
4. Safety Relay Interfaces⎯Optional (Used for muting applications) Relay
MSR22LM
2-10
Input Voltage
Reset
Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking
PSDI
Muting
Outputs
24V DC
Manual
no
no
yes
yes
2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux.
More Details
Catalogue Number
4-21
440R-P23071
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Type 4 Product Selection (continued) 5. Accessories⎯Optional Description
Catalogue Number
Steel L-shaped end cap mounting bracket (4 per package) 440L-AF6101 Note: Four brackets supplied with each GuardShield pair.
Aluminium middle mounting bracket for vibratory applications
440L-AF6108
Power supply: Output 24V DC, 3 Amps, 72W
1606-XLP72E
Laser Alignment Tool
440L-ALAT
Mounting Stand
440L-AMSTD
GuardShield Laser Alignment Tool Bracket
440L-AF6109
Mounting Stand—440L-AMSTD
Laser Alignment Tool 19.05 (0.75)
66.8 (2.63)
25.4 (1.0) 1828.8 (72)
12.19 (0.48)
63.5 (2.5) 62.48 (2.46)
4 (0.15)
11.1 (7/16) Dia.
Laser Alignment Tool (LAT)— 440L-ALAT 12.7 (1/2) Dia. 19.05 (0.75)
4.29 (0.169) hole dia. 81° x 2.66 (0.105) countersink 17.78 (0.70) 35.56 (1.4)
6.35 (0.25)
25.4 (1.0)
76.2 (3.0)
44.45 (1.75)
381.0 (15)
304.8 (12)
GuardShield LAT Bracket— 440L-AF6109
6.35 (0.25)
2-11
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Type 4 Weld Shields The GuardShield weld shields are sold as pairs in the same lengths as the protective heights of the GuardShield safety light curtain.
3.0 (0.118) Thick
These polycarbonate weld shields are designed as disposable devices whose purpose is to protect the front window of the GuardShield from damage.
37.3 (1.47)
L
49.5 (1.95)
R24 2X
R12 2X 10.16 (0.40)
GS Weld Shield Catalog Numbers
Dimension “L” mm (in)
440L-AGWS0160
175.3 (6.9)
440L-AGWS0320
335.3 (13.20)
440L-AGWS0480
495.3 (19.50)
440L-AGWS0640
655.3 (25.80)
440L-AGWS0800
815.3 (32.10)
440L-AGWS0960
975.4 (38.40)
440L-AGWS1120
1135.4 (44.70)
440L-AGWS1280
1295.4 (51.00)
440L-AGWS1440
1455.4 (57.30)
440L-AGWS1600
1615.4 (63.60)
440L-AGWS1760
1778 (70.00)
6. Corner Mirror for Multi-Sided Guarding Specially constructed glass mirrors for 2 and 3 sided safeguarding applications. Note: Each mirror reduces maximum scan range by 10% per mirror. For GuardShield Models
Catalogue Number
160
440L-AM1200300
320
440L-AM1200450
480
440L-AM1200600
640
440L-AM1200750
800
440L-AM1200900
960
440L-AM1201050
1120
440L-AM1201200
1280
440L-AM1201350
1440
440L-AM1201500
1600
440L-AM1201650
1760
440L-AM1201800
Mounting kit for mirrors. Each kit contains 1 bracket with fasteners. Order 2 kits per mirror. Mounting stand for mirror and light curtains (see page 2-21)
2-12
440L-AM120BRK 440L-AMSTD
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Type 4 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Required Mounting Bracket (included with Light Curtain) 20 (0.79)
Safety Light Curtain 42 (1.65) 20 (0.79)
52 (2.04) 52 (2.05) 11 (0.43)
42 (1.65) 18.9 (0.74) 14.5 (0.57)
40 (1.57)
3.0 (0.11)
40 (1.57)
32 (1.25)
C
B
A
Optional Middle Mounting Bracket 49.2 (1.93)
30 (1.18) 20 (0.78)
40.2 (1.58) 62 (2.44)
75 (2.95)
24 (0.94) >80 (3.14)
Note: Should be used in vibration applications.
Type
A Protective Height
B Mounting Value
C Total Length
440L-P4J0160YD
160 ±0.5
276
312 ±1.5
440L-P4J0320YD
320 ±0.5
436
472 ±1.5
440L-P4J0480YD
480 ±0.5
596
632 ±1.5
440L-P4J0640YD
640 ±0.5
756
792 ±1.5
440L-P4J0800YD
800 ±0.6
916
952 ±1.5
440L-P4J0960YD
960 ±0.6
1076
1112 ±1.5
440L-P4J1120YD
1120 ±0.6
1236
1272 ±1.8
440L-P4J1280YD
1280 ±0.7
1396
1432 ±1.8
440L-P4J1440YD
1440 ±0.7
1556
1592 ±1.8
440L-P4J1600YD
1600 ±0.8
1716
1752 ±2.0
440L-P4J1760YD
1760 ±0.8
1876
1912 ±2.0
2-13
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Type 4 Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram is not intended to be used for installation purposes. +24V DC Sender
S2 (Start/Restart)
Receiver Brown
Brown
Red Gray
OSSD 1
K2
S1 Test Machine Test Signal
Pink
Bulletin 100S Safety Contactors or 700S Safety Relays
OSSD 2
Black
K1 Yellow
MPCE/EDM
M
White Blue Green
Blue
Auxiliary Signal ➊
24V Ground ➊ Auxiliary output is non safety. Can be connected to a lamp, motor or status to a PLC.
K1, K2
Safety relay or safety contactor for OSSD 1 and OSSD 2 connection
S1
Switch for external system test (optional)
S2
Switch for reset of light curtain from start/restart interlock
To MSR127 Safety Relay Module +24V
L1
Test
L2
L3
4
Transmitter
Receiver
2
7
OSSD 1 OSSD 2
3
A
5
6
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
K4 K4
MSR127 K5
A2 S21
S22
S34
14
24
34
42 K5
Reset DC Common
2-14
K4
K5
M
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Specifications Standards
EN 61496 Parts 1 & 2, IEC/ , UL 61496 Parts 1 & 2
Approvals
TUV and CE marked for all applicable directives; UL 61496, UL 1998
Protected Height
160mm...1760mm (6.3in...69.3in) in 160mm (6.3in) increments
Scanning Range/Resolution
0.3-7m/14mm (0.98-22.9ft/0.55in) 0.3m-18m/30mm (0.98-59ft/1.18in)
Resolution
14mm/30mm (0.55in/1.18in)
Enclosure Rating
IP 65
Connection Type Transmitter 4-pin micro QD (M12) Receiver 10in cable with Y connector Y connector: one 4-pin M12 micro QD one 8-pin M12 micro QD
Description The GuardShield Remote Teach system provides a remote means of changing a fixed blanking configuration within the GuardShield safety light curtain. This keyswitch box eliminates the need to open the GuardShield receiver door and perform the Teach function.
Supply Voltage Uv Maximum Residual Ripple
24V DC ± 20% 0.05 Vss
The three-position key switch simulates the opening of the GuardShield receiver door, teaching the GuardShield light curtain the new fixed blanking area, closing the door and returning to the run mode of operation.
Power Consumption
4A max (no load)
Synchronization
Optical, without separate synchronization channel
Outputs—Safety
2 x PNP, 0.5 A, short circuit protected
The IP 65 rated key switch box is provided with a steel mounting back plate to facilitate mounting of the box in proximity to the GuardShield receiver. It is necessary to see the receiver LEDs when performing the teach function.
Output—Non safety
1 x PNP 0.5A max.
Minimum Output Voltage
Uv - 2V
Response Time
≤25ms max. ≤35ms with coding active
Protection
Short circuit and overload
Features
Cable Length
30m (100ft) max.
• • • •
Mode of Operation
Manual or automatic restart
Safety Category
Type 4 (self-checking) per EN 61496
Three-position spring key switch IP 65 rated key switch box Y connector for quick-disconnect connections Standard GuardShield cables
Operating Ambient Temp.
-10°C to 55°C (14°F to 131°F)
Air Humidity
15%...95% (not condensing)
Storage Temperature
-25°C to 75°C (-13°F to 167°F)
Approximate Dimensions Height Housing Cross Section
Length dependent upon protected height; (see dimensional drawings) 40 mm x 50 mm (1.57in x 1.96in)
Transmitter Wavelength
870nm
Vibration Resistance
IEC60068-2-6, frequency 10Hz to 55Hz Amplitude: 0.35mm (0.01in)
Shock
IEC60068-2-29 acceleration 10g, pulse duration 16ms
Key Switch Box Material
Cast Aluminum
Environmental Rating
IP 65
Note: The external power supply must be capable of buffering brief power failures of 20ms as specified in IEC 60204.
1
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Product Selection 1a. Safety Light Curtains—Remote Teach System The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster GuardShield remote teach system is ordered as a system. The system consists of a standard GuardShield transmitter in either 14mm or 30mm resolutions with mounting hardware, a GuardShield receiver with a 10in Y-connector cable, a metal key switch box and a 4-pin 2 meter patchcord which connects between the key switch box and the Y-connector. Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
160 (6.3)
14 (0.55)
16
440L-S4J0160YR
160 (6.3)
30 (1.18)
8
440L-S4K0160YR
320 (12.6)
14 (0.55)
32
440L-S4J0320YR
320 (12.6)
30 (1.18)
16
440L-S4K0320YR
480 (18.9)
14 (0.55)
48
440L-S4J0480YR
480 (18.9)
30 (1.18)
24
440L-S4K0480YR
640 (25.2)
14 (0.55)
64
440L-S4J0640YR
640 (25.2)
30 (1.18)
32
440L-S4K0640YR
800 (31.5)
14 (0.55)
80
440L-S4J0800YR
800 (31.5)
30 (1.18)
40
440L-S4K0800YR
960 (37.8)
14 (0.55)
96
440L-S4J0960YR
960 (37.8)
30 (1.18)
48
440L-S4K0960YR
1120 (44.1)
14 (0.55)
112
440L-S4J1120YR
1120 (44.1)
30 (1.18)
56
440L-S4K1120YR
1280 (50.4)
14 (0.55)
128
440L-S4J1280YR
1280 (50.4)
30 (1.18)
64
440L-S4K1280YR
1440 (56.7)
14 (0.55)
144
440L-S4J1440YR
1440 (56.7)
30 (1.18)
72
440L-S4K1440YR
1600 (63.0)
14 (0.55)
160
440L-S4J1600YR
1600 (63.0)
30 (1.18)
80
440L-S4K1600YR
1760 (69.1)
14 (0.55)
176
440L-S4J1760YR
1760 (69.1)
30 (1.18)
88
440L-S4K1760YR
Note: The GuardShield transmitter requires a 4-pin cable and the receiver requires an 8-pin cable.
1b. Safety Light Curtains—Remote Teach System Light Curtain Pairs It is possible to also purchase the system components individually. The table below represents the pair catalogue numbers of the GuardShield Light Curtains as well as the key switch box and the 2 meter patchcord. Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
160 (6.3)
14 (0.55)
16
440L-P4J0160YR
160 (6.3)
30 (1.18)
8
440L-P4K0160YR
320 (12.6)
14 (0.55)
32
440L-P4J0320YR
320 (12.6)
30 (1.18)
16
440L-P4K0320YR
480 (18.9)
14 (0.55)
48
440L-P4J0480YR
480 (18.9)
30 (1.18)
24
440L-P4K0480YR
640 (25.2)
14 (0.55)
64
440L-P4J0640YR
640 (25.2)
30 (1.18)
32
440L-P4K0640YR
800 (31.5)
14 (0.55)
80
440L-P4J0800YR
800 (31.5)
30 (1.18)
40
440L-P4K0800YR
960 (37.8)
14 (0.55)
96
440L-P4J0960YR
960 (37.8)
30 (1.18)
48
440L-P4K0960YR
1120 (44.1)
14 (0.55)
112
440L-P4J1120YR
1120 (44.1)
30 (1.18)
56
440L-P4K1120YR
1280 (50.4)
14 (0.55)
128
440L-P4J1280YR
1280 (50.4)
30 (1.18)
64
440L-P4K1280YR
1440 (56.7)
14 (0.55)
144
440L-P4J1440YR
1440 (56.7)
30 (1.18)
72
440L-P4K1440YR
1600 (63.0)
14 (0.55)
160
440L-P4J1600YR
1600 (63.0)
30 (1.18)
80
440L-P4K1600YR
1760 (69.1)
14 (0.55)
176
440L-P4J1760YR
1760 (69.1)
30 (1.18)
88
440L-P4K1760YR
Remote Teach Keyswitch Box Assembly
2
440L-M8600
DC micro QD 2 meter patchcord
889D-F4ACDM-2
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Product Selection (continued) 1c. GuardShield Remote Teach Receivers with Integrated Y-Cable Connector The GuardShield Remote Teach Light Curtain pairs consists of a strandard GuardShield and a GuardShield transmitter with integrated Y-cable connector. Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
160 (6.3)
14 (0.55)
16
440L-R4J0160YR
160 (6.3)
30 (1.18)
8
440L-R4K0160YR
320 (12.6)
14 (0.55)
32
440L-R4J0320YR
320 (12.6)
30 (1.18)
16
440L-R4K0320YR
480 (18.9)
14 (0.55)
48
440L-R4J0480YR
480 (18.9)
30 (1.18)
24
440L-R4K0480YR
640 (25.2)
14 (0.55)
64
440L-R4J0640YR
640 (25.2)
30 (1.18)
32
440L-R4K0640YR
800 (31.5)
14 (0.55)
80
440L-R4J0800YR
800 (31.5)
30 (1.18)
40
440L-R4K0800YR
960 (37.8)
14 (0.55)
96
440L-R4J0960YR
960 (37.8)
30 (1.18)
48
440L-R4K0960YR
1120 (44.1)
14 (0.55)
112
440L-R4J1120YR
1120 (44.1)
30 (1.18)
56
440L-R4K1120YR
1280 (50.4)
14 (0.55)
128
440L-R4J1280YR
1280 (50.4)
30 (1.18)
64
440L-R4K1280YR
1440 (56.7)
14 (0.55)
144
440L-R4J1440YR
1440 (56.7)
30 (1.18)
72
440L-R4K1440YR
1600 (63.0)
14 (0.55)
160
440L-R4J1600YR
1600 (63.0)
30 (1.18)
80
440L-R4K1600YR
1760 (69.1)
14 (0.55)
176
440L-R4J1760YR
1760 (69.1)
30 (1.18)
88
440L-R4K1760YR
1d. GuardShield Standard Transmitters The GuardShield Remote Teach Light Curtain pairs consists of a strandard GuardShield and a GuardShield transmitter with integrated Y-cable connector. Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
Protected Height mm (inch)
Resolution mm (inch)
No. Beams
Catalogue Number
160 (6.3)
14 (0.55)
16
440L-T4J0160YD
160 (6.3)
30 (1.18)
8
440L-T4K0160YD
320 (12.6)
14 (0.55)
32
440L-T4J0320YD
320 (12.6)
30 (1.18)
16
440L-T4K0320YD
480 (18.9)
14 (0.55)
48
440L-T4J0480YD
480 (18.9)
30 (1.18)
24
440L-T4K0480YD
640 (25.2)
14 (0.55)
64
440L-T4J0640YD
640 (25.2)
30 (1.18)
32
440L-T4K0640YD
800 (31.5)
14 (0.55)
80
440L-T4J0800YD
800 (31.5)
30 (1.18)
40
440L-T4K0800YD
960 (37.8)
14 (0.55)
96
440L-T4J0960YD
960 (37.8)
30 (1.18)
48
440L-T4K0960YD
1120 (44.1)
14 (0.55)
112
440L-T4J1120YD
1120 (44.1)
30 (1.18)
56
440L-T4K1120YD
1280 (50.4)
14 (0.55)
128
440L-T4J1280YD
1280 (50.4)
30 (1.18)
64
440L-T4K1280YD
1440 (56.7)
14 (0.55)
144
440L-T4J1440YD
1440 (56.7)
30 (1.18)
72
440L-T4K1440YD
1600 (63.0)
14 (0.55)
160
440L-T4J1600YD
1600 (63.0)
30 (1.18)
80
440L-T4K1600YD
1760 (69.1)
14 (0.55)
176
440L-T4J1760YD
1760 (69.1)
30 (1.18)
88
440L-T4K1760YD
3
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Product Selection (continued) 2. Cordsets⎯2 Required (one for transmitter and one for receiver) Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
Connector Style
Cable Pin/Wire Colour
Wire Rating
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
2 (6.5)
889D-F4AC-2
Transmitter
1
2
4
3
Straight
1 Brown 2 White 3 Blue 4 Black
22AWG 300V 3A
5 (16.4)
889D-F4AC-5
10 (32.8)
889D-F4AC-10
15 (49.2)
889D-F4AC-15
20 (65.6)
889D-F4AC-20
30 (98.4)
889D-F4AC-30
Receiver
2
1 7
3
8 6
5
Straight
4
1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red
24AWG 36V DC/30V AC 1.5A
Cordsets Approximate Dimensions⎯mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 42 (1.7)
14.5 (0.57)
Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
4
Straight female
2 (6.5)
889D-F8AB-2
5 (16.4)
889D-F8AB-5
10 (32.8)
889D-F8AB-10
15 (49.2)
889D-F8AB-15
20 (65.6)
889D-F8AB-20
30 (98.4)
889D-F8AB-30
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Product Selection (continued) 3. Safety Relay Interfaces—Optional Relay
Safety Outputs
Input
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Power Supply 24V AC/DC
1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
MSR127RP Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126T) Dual Channel (MSR126.1T) Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126R)
MSR126
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC
Reset
Catalogue Number
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
Monitored Manual
Automatic/Manual
Monitored Manual
440R-C23139
24V AC/DC Light Curtain or Safety Mat
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
3 N.O.
Removable
115V AC
440R-N23133 440R-N23117 440R-N23116 440R-N23115 440R-N23114 440R-N23113 440R-N23112 440R-N23123 440R-N23122 440R-N23121 440R-N23120 440R-N23119 440R-N23118
Automatic/Manual or Monitored Manual
230V AC
440R-C23137
440R-C23136
MSR131RTP
4. Safety Relay Interfaces⎯Optional (Used for muting applications) Relay
Input Voltage
Reset
Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking
PSDI
Muting
Outputs
Catalogue Number
24V DC
Manual
no
no
yes
yes
2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux.
440R-P23071
MSR22LM
5
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Product Selection (continued) 5. Accessories⎯Optional Description
Catalogue Number
Steel L-shaped end cap mounting bracket (4 per package) 440L-AF6101 Note: Four brackets supplied with each GuardShield pair.
Aluminium middle mounting bracket for vibratory applications
440L-AF6108
Power supply: Output 24V DC, 3 Amps, 72W
1606-XLP72E
Laser Alignment Tool
440L-ALAT
Mounting Stand
440L-AMSTD
GuardShield Laser Alignment Tool Bracket
440L-AF6109
Remote Teach Steel L-shaped end cap mounting bracket kit Note: Four brackets supplied with each GuardShield Remote Teach pair.
440L-AF6110
6. Corner Mirror for Multi-Sided Guarding Specially constructed glass mirrors for 2 and 3 sided safeguarding applications. Note: Each mirror reduces maximum scan range by 10% per mirror.
L5
For GuardShield Models
Catalogue Number
160
440L-AM1200300
320
440L-AM1200450
480
440L-AM1200600
640
440L-AM1200750
800
440L-AM1200900
960
440L-AM1201050
43.5 3˚ (1.71)
1120
440L-AM1201200
15.4 (0.61)
1280
440L-AM1201350
1440
440L-AM1201500
1600
440L-AM1201650
1760
440L-AM1201800
L1 L2 L3 18 (0.71)
L4 6.98 (0.275) Dia. 6 Places
Shown 440L-AM1201500
L5
L1 L2 L3 6.98 (0.275) Dia. 6 Places
172 123.4 (6.77) (4.86)
152.5 (6.0)
39 (1.54)
39 (1.54) Shown 440L-AM1200750
Mounting kit for mirrors. Each kit contains 1 bracket with fasteners. Order 2 kits per mirror. Mounting stand for mirror and light curtains
6
440L-AM120BRK 440L-AMSTD
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Mounting Stand—440L-AMSTD
Laser Alignment Tool 19.05 (0.75)
66.8 (2.63)
25.4 (1.0) 1828.8 (72)
12.19 (0.48)
63.5 (2.5) 62.48 (2.46)
4 (0.15)
11.1 (7/16) Dia.
Laser Alignment Tool (LAT)— 440L-ALAT
4.29 (0.169) hole dia. 81° x 2.66 (0.105) countersink 17.78 (0.70)
12.7 (1/2) Dia. 19.05 (0.75)
35.56 (1.4) 25.4 (1.0)
6.35 (0.25)
76.2 (3.0)
44.45 (1.75)
Key Switch Box 381.0 (15)
304.8 (12)
GuardShield LAT Bracket— 440L-AF6109
127 (5.0) 101.6 (4.0)
21.59 (0.85)
6.35 (0.25)
63.5 (2.50)
CONFIG RUN TEACH
10.16 (0.4)
127 (5.0)
101.6 (4.0) 13.33 (0.525)
99.31 (3.91)
440L-M8600
Weld Shields The GuardShield weld shields are sold as pairs in the same lengths as the protective heights of the GuardShield safety light curtain. These polycarbonate weld shields are designed as disposable devices whose purpose is to protect the front window of the GuardShield from damage. 3.0 (0.118) Thick
37.3 (1.47)
L
49.5 (1.95)
R24 2X
R12 2X 10.16 (0.40)
GS Weld Shield Catalog Numbers
Dimension “L” mm (in)
GS Weld Shield Catalog Numbers
Dimension “L” mm (in)
440L-AGWS0160
175.3 (6.9)
440L-AGWS1120
1135.4 (44.70)
440L-AGWS0320
335.3 (13.20)
440L-AGWS1280
1295.4 (51.00)
440L-AGWS0480
495.3 (19.50)
440L-AGWS1440
1455.4 (57.30)
440L-AGWS0640
655.3 (25.80)
440L-AGWS1600
1615.4 (63.60)
440L-AGWS0800
815.3 (32.10)
440L-AGWS1760
1778 (70.00)
440L-AGWS0960
975.4 (38.40)
7
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Approximate Dimensions (continued)—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Remote Teach Receiver Mounting Bracket (included with Light Curtain)
Mounting Bracket (included with Light Curtain) 20 (0.79)
52 (2.04)
6.5 (0.26)
12 (0.47) 22.2 (0.87)
42 (1.65) 18.9 (0.74) 14.5 (0.57)
3.0 (0.11)
45˚
40 (1.57)
45˚
45˚ 22.0 (0.86)
32 (1.25)
45˚
Optional Middle Mounting Bracket—Required for vibration applications 30 (1.18) 20 (0.78) 49.2 (1.93)
40.2 (1.58)
62 (2.44)
24 (0.94)
Note: Should be used in vibration applications.
Y-Connector
Female Coupling Nut—M12 x 1 16.8 (0.665)
52.0 (2.05)
4 3
End "A" Key Way Key
1 1
2
35.2 (1.388)
7
End "B" 3 4
6 5
8
Face View
8
18.1 (0.713)
Male Coupling Nut—M12 x 1
2.8 11.0 (0.43) (0.11)
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Approximate Dimensions (continued)—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Safety Light Curtain 11 (0.43)
>80 (3.14)
52 (2.05)
40 (1.57)
75 (2.95)
42 (1.65) 20 (0.79)
A B C 254 (10)
➊ ➊ ➋ ➋
J = K= D= R =
Type
A Protective Height
B Mounting Value
C Total Length
440L-P4➊0160Y➋
160 ±0.5
276
312 ±1.5
440L-P4➊0320Y➋
320 ±0.5
436
472 ±1.5
440L-P4➊0480Y➋
480 ±0.5
596
632 ±1.5
440L-P4➊0640Y➋
640 ±0.5
756
792 ±1.5
440L-P4➊0800Y➋
800 ±0.6
916
952 ±1.5
440L-P4➊0960Y➋
960 ±0.6
1076
1112 ±1.5
440L-P4➊1120Y➋
1120 ±0.6
1236
1272 ±1.8
440L-P4➊1280Y➋
1280 ±0.7
1396
1432 ±1.8
440L-P4➊1440Y➋
1440 ±0.7
1556
1592 ±1.8
440L-P4➊1600Y➋
1600 ±0.8
1716
1752 ±2.0
440L-P4➊1760Y➋
1760 ±0.8
1876
1912 ±2.0
14mm resolution 30mm resolution Standard DC micro (M12) quick-disconnect connector Remote teach, 10 inch pigtail with “Y” connector
9
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains GuardShield Remote Teach Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram is not intended to be used for installation purposes. +24V DC Sender
S2 (Start/Restart)
Receiver Brown
Brown
Red Gray
OSSD 1
K2
S1 Test Machine Test Signal
Pink
Bulletin 100S Safety Contactors or 700S Safety Relays
OSSD 2
Black
K1 Yellow
MPCE/EDM
M
White Blue Green
Blue
Auxiliary Signal ➊
24V Ground ➊ Auxiliary output is non safety. Can be connected to a lamp, motor or status to a PLC. To MSR127 Safety Relay Module +24V
L1
Test
L2
L3
4
Transmitter
Receiver
2
7
OSSD 1 OSSD 2
3
A
5
6
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
K4 K4
MSR127 K5
A2 S21
S22
S34
14
24
34
42 K5
Reset DC Common
10
K4
K5
M
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Specifications
Description SafeShield safety light curtains are active opto-electronic protection devices (AOPD) with resolutions of 14mm (0.55in) or 30mm (1.18in). Allen-Bradley Guardmaster SafeShield safety light curtains are selfchecking and are a Type 4 safety device. They have been designed for industrial applications and are characterized by: • • • • • •
High degree of reliability Compact size Sturdy modular construction Universal application possibilities Simple installation Software configured
Standards
EN 61496 Parts 1 & 2
Approvals
TUV, cULus and CE marked for all applicable directives
Protected Height
300mm...1800mm (12in...72in)
Scanning Range
0-2 or 5m, 2-6m/14mm 0-6m or 5-19m/30mm
Resolution
14mm/30mm (0.55in/1.18in)
Enclosure Rating
IP 65
Connection Type
12-pin metal M23 style on transmitter and receiver
Supply Voltage Uv Maximum Residual Ripple
24V DC ± 20% 5 Vss
On Time after applying supply voltage to Transmitter and Receiver
8 seconds maximum
Power Consumption
0.9...2 Amps (no-load)
Synchronization
Optical, without separate synchronization channel
Outputs Minimum Output Voltage
2 x PNP, 0.5 A, short circuit protected Uv - 2V
Response Time
Depending on number of beams
Protection
Short circuit and overload
Connection Maximum Wire Cross Section
1.0mm2 with jacket 1.5mm2 without jacket
Cable Length
Features • Control-reliable solid-state outputs • State of the art microprocessor technology with custom-designed ASICs (Application Specific Integrated Circuits) • Easy assembly and alignment • Quick-disconnect M23 style connectors • Long scanning range and high resolution • Small housing cross section: 40mm x 48mm (1.57in x 1.77in) • Fast response time • Possibility to daisy-chain up to three sensors (to prevent personnel from standing between protective field and the point of operation) • Construction in compliance with EN 61496 Parts 1 & 2 Type 4 (self-checking) • Tested and approved for USA, Europe, Canada and Japan • Resolution (object sensitivity) 14mm/30mm • Maximum height of protective field 1800mm (72in) • Minimum height of protective field 300mm (12in) • The optical axis (centre of window) is marked on the end cap. • Fixed blanking, floating blanking • Reduced resolution, beam coding
2-14
60m (196.8ft) maximum Protection against over-voltage (≥1kV) from Level 3 or higher (IEC 801 part 5; 2 kV) between PE and +V.
Mode of Operation
Manual or automatic restart
Safety Category
Type 4 (self-checking) per EN 61496
Operating Ambient Temp.
0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
Air Humidity
15%...95% (not condensing)
Storage Temperature
-25°C to 70°C (-13°F to 158°F)
Dimensions Height Housing Cross Section
Length dependent upon protected height; (see dimensional drawings) 40 mm x 48 mm (1.57in x 1.77in)
Vibration
5g 10-55Hz per IEC 68-2-6
Shock
10g 16ms to IEC 68-2-29
Note: The external power supply must be capable of buffering brief power failures of 20ms as specified in IEC 60204.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Product Selection 1. Safety Light Curtains—Standard System The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster SafeShield safety light curtains are ordered as pairstransmitter and receiverand shipped under one part number. After selecting the appropriate light curtain pair, ensure that required interfaces and accessories are ordered as well. Protected Height mm (inch) 300 (12) 450 (18) 600 (24) 750 (30) 900 (36) 1050 (42)
Resolution mm/Beams
Protected Height mm (inch)
Catalogue Number
14/40
442L-PA40314CBCD
30/15
442L-PA40330CBCD
14/60
442L-PA40414CBCD
30/23
442L-PA40430CBCD
14/80
442L-PA40614CBCD
30/30
442L-PA40630CBCD
14/100
442L-PA40714CBCD
30/38
442L-PA40730CBCD
14/120
442L-PA40914CBCD
30/45
442L-PA40930CBCD
14/140
442L-PA41014CBCD
30/53
442L-PA41030CBCD
1200 (48) 1350 (54) 1500 (60) 1650 (66) 1800 (72)
Resolution mm/Beams
Catalogue Number
14/160
442L-PA41214CBCD
30/60
442L-PA41230CBCD
14/180
442L-PA41314CBCD
30/68
442L-PA41330CBCD
14/200
442L-PA41514CBCD
30/75
442L-PA41530CBCD
14/220
442L-PA41614CBCD
30/83
442L-PA41630CBCD
14/240
442L-PA41814CBCD
30/90
442L-PA41830CBCD
Please order Host devices intended for daisy-chain applications (host sensor) separately (see page 2-18).
2. Cordsets2 Required (one for transmitter and one for receiver) Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
Cable
Connector Style
Pin/Wire Colour
1 Brown 2 Blue 3 Grey 4 Pink 5 Red 6 Yellow 7 White 8 Red/Blue 9 Black 10 Purple 11 Grey/Pink 12 Green
Straight
9
1 2
10
8 12 7
11
3 4
6 5
Right Angle
Wire Rating
18AWG 60V 4A
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
2 (6.5)
889M-F12AH-2
5 (16.4)
889M-F12AH-5
10 (32.8)
889M-F12AH-10
15 (49.2)
889M-F12AH-15
20 (65.6)
889M-F12AH-20
30 (98.4)
889M-F12AH-30
2 (6.5)
889M-R12AH-2
5 (16.4)
889M-R12AH-5
10 (32.8)
889M-R12AH-10
15 (49.2)
889M-R12AH-15
20 (65.6)
889M-R12AH-20
30 (98.4)
889M-R12AH-30
Approximate Dimensionsmm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 85 (3.35)
Length
26.2 (1.03) Dia. M23 x 1 Internal Threads
2-15
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Product Selection 3a. Safety Relay InterfacesRequired Input Voltage
24V DC
Reset
Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking
PSDI
Muting
Outputs
no
no
no
no
4 amp 2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux.
Manual/ Automatic
More Details
Catalogue Number
2-58
440L-M8200
Note: For wiring refer to Safeguarding Applications section of this catalogue.
3b. Safety Relay InterfacesOptional Relay
Input
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Power Supply 24V AC/DC
1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
MSR127RP Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126T) Dual Channel (MSR126.1T) Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126R)
MSR126
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC
Reset
Catalogue Number
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
Monitored Manual
Automatic/Manual
Monitored Manual
440R-C23139
24V AC/DC Light Curtain or Safety Mat
3 N.O.
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
440R-N23133 440R-N23117 440R-N23116 440R-N23115 440R-N23114 440R-N23113 440R-N23112 440R-N23123 440R-N23122 440R-N23121 440R-N23120 440R-N23119 440R-N23118
Automatic/Manual or Monitored Manual
440R-C23137
440R-C23136
MSR131RTP
3c. Optional DeviceNet Interface
2-16
Input Voltage
Outputs
More Details
Catalogue Number
24V DC
DeviceNet
2-52
442L-MDNET
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Product Selection 4. AccessoriesOptional Products
Catalogue Number
Plastic Swivel Mount Bracket (4 per package)
442L-AF6106 (1 package per system)
Metal Side Mount (4 per package)
442L-AF6107 (1 package per system)
Steel L-Mounting bracket, fixed (4 per package)
440L-AF6102 (1 package per system)
Power supply: Input85...265V AC Output24V DC, 3 Amps
1794-PS3
Laser alignment aid
440L-ALAT
SafeShield adaptor for laser alignment aid
442L-ALBK2
Sliding nuts (4 pieces supplied with SafeShield system)
440L-AF6105
Corner Mirror Selection Table Specially constructed glass mirrors for 2 and 3 sided safeguarding applications. Note: Each mirror reduces maximum scan range by 10% per mirror. For SafeShield Models
Catalogue Number
300
440L-AM1200300
450
440L-AM1200450
600
440L-AM1200600
750
440L-AM1200750
900
440L-AM1200900
1050
440L-AM1201050
1200
440L-AM1201200
1350
440L-AM1201350
1500
440L-AM1201500
1650 or 1800
440L-AM1201800
Mounting kit for mirrors. Each kit contains 1 bracket with fasteners. Order 2 kits per mirror. Mounting stand for mirror and light curtains (see page 2-20)
440L-AM120BRK 440L-AMSTD
2-17
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Cascadable Product Selection The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster SafeShield cascadable family of safety light curtains are ordered as a pair—transmitter and receiver—and is shipped under one part number. After selecting the appropriate light curtain pair, ensure that required interfaces and accessories are ordered as well.
Cascadable system
Patch cord max 3m
Standard system (Pg 40)
Safety Light CurtainsCascadable System Cascadable devices come with two M23 connectors; a system connector on one end of the device to connect the light curtain to your safety control system and an extension connector on the other end of the device to connect to the next light curtain segment. The maximum number of segments is three. The first segment of a two-cascaded system and the first and second segment of a three-cascaded system must always be a cascadable device (with a connector on both ends). This allows you to connect additional segments to the system (maximum of three segments). The last segment, which is either the second segment of a twocascaded system or the third segment of a three-cascaded system can
Protected Height mm (inch) 300 (12) 450 (18) 600 (24) 750 (30) 900 (36) 1050 (42)
Resolution mm/Beams
Catalogue Number
14/40
442L-PA40314DBCD
30/15
442L-PA40330DBCD
14/60
442L-PA40414DBCD
30/23
442L-PA40430DBCD
14/80
442L-PA40614DBCD
30/30
442L-PA40630DBCD
14/100
442L-PA40714DBCD
30/38
442L-PA40730DBCD
14/120
442L-PA40914DBCD
30/45
442L-PA40930DBCD
14/140
442L-PA41014DBCD
30/53
442L-PA41030DBCD
be a standard light curtain system ordered on page 2-15 which would only have a connector on one end. The maximum number of beams of all segments cannot exceed 480 beams. Resolution can be mixed between segments. For example the first segment could be a 14mm resolution and the second segment could be a 30mm resolution.
ATTENTION: When mixing resolution of a cascaded system ensure the proper safety distance calculations have been completed with largest resolution.
Protected Height mm (inch) 1200 (48) 1350 (54) 1500 (60) 1650 (66) 1800 (72)
To order controllers, safety relays and accessories, refer to page 2-16.
2-18
Resolution mm/Beams
Catalogue Number
14/160
442L-PA41214DBCD
30/60
442L-PA41230DBCD
14/180
442L-PA41314DBCD
30/68
442L-PA41330DBCD
14/200
442L-PA41514DBCD
30/75
442L-PA41530DBCD
14/220
442L-PA41614DBCD
30/83
442L-PA41630DBCD
14/240
442L-PA41814DBCD
30/90
442L-PA41830DBCD
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Product Selection—Patch Cordsets 2 Required (one for transmitter and one for receiver) to connect between segments Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
9
1 2
10
8 12 7
11
3 4
Connector Style
Cable Pin/Wire Colour
Wire Rating
1 Brown 2 Blue 3 Grey 4 Pink 5 Red 6 Yellow 7 White 8 Red/Blue 9 Black 10 Purple 11 Grey/Pink 12 Green
Straight
6 5
22AWG 250V 8A
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
0.3 (1.0)
889M-F12AHMU-0M3
0.6 (2.0)
889M-F12AHMU-0M6
1.0 (3.3)
889M-F12AHMU-1
2.0 (6.5)
889M-F12AHMU-2
3.0 (9.8)
889M-F12AHMU-3
Approximate Dimensionsmm (inches) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 85 (3.35)
Length
85 (3.35)
26.2 (1.03) Dia.
26.2 (1.03) Dia.
Male Plug M23 x 1 Internal Threads 3.8 (0.15)
44.4 (1.75)
8 (0 .31)
Female Plug
19 (0.75)
13 (0.51) 44 (1.73)
18 (0.71) 50 (1.97)
30.6 (1.2) 75 (2.95)
9 (0.35)
15 (0.59)
5.5 (0.22) 42 (1.65)
Swivel mount bracket 442L-AF6106
34.5 (1.36)
6 (0.24)
Side mounting bracket 442L-AF6107
2-19
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (cont)
14 (0.55)
10 (0.39)
6 (0.24) 10.5 (0.41) Sliding nut groove for side mounting
1
3.5 (0.14) 2.2 (0.09)
110
14 (0.55) 6 (0.24) 3.5 (0.14) 2.2 (0.09)
10 (0.39)
1
48 (1.89) 22.4 (0.88)
40 (1.57) 20 (0.79)
40 (1.57) 20 (0.79)
approx. 150 (5.91) (connector range)
Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
L1
Cable plug
M23
56.3 (2.22)
100 (3.94)
approx. 140 (5.51) (con. range)
74 (2.91)
56.3 (2.22)
approx. 140 (5.51) (conn. range)
L2
L1
A
S
A
L2
S
10.5 (0.41) Sliding nut groove for side mounting
74 (2.91)
36.2 (1.43)
100 (3.94)
Host—SafeShield sender, cascadable system. receiver, mirror image SafeShield sender, standard system (not cascadable). Receiver, mirror image Protective Field Height S
Protective Field Height S
Approximate Dimensions—mm (in)
Approximate Dimensions—mm (in) L1
L2
A
300 (11.8)
381 (15.0)
450 (17.7)
224 (8.8)
L1
L2
A
450 (17.7)
532 (20.9)
600 (23.6)
374 (14.7)
300 (11.8)
381 (15.0)
427 (16.8)
224 (8.8)
600 (23.6)
682 (26.9)
751 (29.6)
524 (20.6)
450 (17.7)
532 (20.9)
578 (22.8)
374 (14.7)
750 (29.5)
833 (32.8)
901 (35.5)
674 (26.5)
600 (23.6)
682 (26.9)
728 (28.7)
524 (20.6)
900 (35.4)
984 (38.8)
1052 (41.4)
824 (32.4)
750 (29.5)
833 (32.8)
879 (34.6)
674 (26.5)
1050 (41.3)
1134 (44.7)
1202 (47.3)
974 (38.4)
900 (35.4)
984 (38.8)
1030 (40.6)
824 (32.4)
1200 (47.3)
1283 (50.5)
1352 (53.2)
1124 (44.3)
1050 (41.3)
1134 (44.7)
1180 (46.5)
974 (38.4)
1350 (53.2)
1435 (56.5)
1503 (59.2)
1274 (50.2)
1200 (47.3)
1283 (50.5)
1329 (52.3)
1124 (44.3)
1500 (59.1)
1586 (62.4)
1654 (65.1)
1424 (56.1)
1350 (53.2)
1435 (56.5)
1481 (58.3)
1274 (50.2)
1650 (65.0)
1736 (68.4)
1804 (71.0)
1574 (62.0)
1500 (59.1)
1586 (62.4)
1632 (64.3)
1424 (56.1)
1800 (70.9)
1887 (79.3)
1955 (77.0)
1724 (67.9)
1650 (65.0)
1736 (68.4)
1782 (70.2)
1574 (62.0)
1800 (70.9)
1887 (79.3)
1933 (76.1)
1724 (67.9)
2-20
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
15.4 (0.61) 3°
33.5 (1.32)
39 (1.54)
∅7 (0.28)
43.5 (1.71)
Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (in) L4
L5
300 (11.8)
366 (19.4) 340 (13.4) 307 (12.1)
L1
—
29.5 (1.2)
450 (17.7)
523 (20.1) 497 19.6() 307 (12.1)
L3
L4 18 (0.71)
L2
L1
L2
L3
600 (23.6)
666 (26.2) 640 (25.2)
528.5 (20.8)
750 (29.5)
816 (32.1) 790 (31.1)
639.5 (25.2)
900 (35.4)
966 (38.0) 940 (37.0) 750 (29.5)
—
108 (4.3)
—
68.75 (2.7)
—
88.25 (3.5)
—
108 (4.3)
1050 (41.3)
1116 (43.9)
1090 (42.9)
972 (38.3)
—
72 (2.8)
1200 (47.3)
1266 (49.8)
1240 (48.8)
1146 (45.1)
—
60 (2.4)
1350 (53.2)
1416 (55.8)
1390 (54.7)
1296 (51.0)
—
60 (2.4)
1500 (59.1)
1566 (61.7)
1540 (60.6)
1415.5 (55.7)
707.95 (27.9)
75.25 (2.9)
1650 (65.0)
1716 (67.6)
1690 (66.5)
1596 (62.8)
798 (31.4)
60 (2.4)
1800 (70.9)
1866 (73.5)
1840 (72.5)
1746 (68.7)
873 (34.4)
60 (2.4)
L5
152.5 (6.0)
Protective Field Height S
For Mirror Selection Table see page 2-17
123.4 (4.86) 172 (6.77)
Mirror—440L-AM1200 Series 85.6 (3.73) 6.8 (0.27) Dia.
25.4 (1.0) 1828.8 (72)
9.4 (0.73) (2)
11.1 [7/16] (0.44) Dia. 11.1 (0.44) Dia.
76 (3.0)
38 (1.5)
Mounting Bracket
63.5 (2.5)
63.5 (2.5) 89 (3.5)
171 (6.75)
12.7 [1/2] (0.5) Dia. 19.05 (0.75)
6.35 (0.25)
25.4 (1.0) Dia.
76.2 (3.0)
12.7 (0.5) 381.0 (15)
304.8 (12)
Mirror mounting bracket 440L-AM120BRK
6.35 (0.25)
Mounting stands 440L-AMSTD
2-21
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Indicator Elements The LEDs and the 7-segment display of sender and receiver signal the operating status of the SafeShield.
Display
Meaning Orange: Cleaning or realignment required Yellow flashing: Reset required Red: System provides signals to switch off the machine
Yellow
Green: System enabled System error. The device is defective. Replace the receiver.
7-segment display
Bad alignment to sender.
h.
Operation with large protective field width Operation with reduced resolution and/or blanking Non coded operation (only after switching on)
Operation status indicators of the sender Display
Operation with code 1 (only after switching on)
Meaning
Operation with code 2 (only after switching on)
Yellow: Power supply OK System error. The device is defective. Replace the sender. The device is in the test mode.
Operation with code 1 (only after switching on) Operation with code 2 (only after switching on) All other displays are error messages.
Meaning of the operation indicator elements of the sender
Orange Yellow
7-segment display
Indicator elements of the receiver
2-22
All other displays are error messages.
Meaning of the operation indicator elements of the receiver
Non coded operation (only after switching on)
Other displays
Other displays
Red Green
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Electrical Installation Pin
ATTENTION: Make sure that the entire machine/system is disconnected during the electrical installation.
Notes:
• The safety light curtain is a Class A device. It may cause radio interference in residential areas. • To ensure full electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), earth ground (PE) must be connected. • The external voltage supply of the device must be capable of buffering brief mains failures of 20ms as specified in EN 60204. Suitable power supplies are available as accessories from Allen-Bradley Guardmaster. • The plug alignment (direction of turn) in the housing may vary from unit to unit. You can identify the proper pin assignment by the position of the pins in relation to each other as shown in the drawings. • System connections and extension connections in a cascaded system must be connected only if the system is off line. The RS 232 interface may be connected/disconnected with the system on line.
Wire Colour
Sender
Receiver
1
Brown
24V DC input (voltage supply)
24V DC input (voltage supply)
2
Blue
0V DC (voltage supply)
0V DC (voltage supply)
3
Grey
Test input: 0V: external test active 24V: external test inactive
OSSD1 (switching output 1)
4
Pink
Reserved
OSSD2 (switching output 2)
5
Red
Reserved
Reset/restart
6
Yellow
Reserved
External Device Monitoring (EDM)
7
White
Reserved
Reserved
8
Red/Blue
Reserved
Reserved
9
Black
Device communication
Device communication
10
Purple
Device communication
Device communication
11
Grey/ Pink
Input host/guest SEL
Input host/guest SEL
FE
Green
Functional ground
Functional ground
Pin assignment system connection M 23×11 + FE
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
5 10
6 7 11
8
5 10
6 7 11
2
4
8
3 FE
4 3
2
9
1
1
Pin assignment configuration connection M 8x4 (serial interface)
FE
4 3
Pin assignment system connection M 23×11 + FE
2
9
1
Pin
Sender/
Receiver
PC-side RS 232 SubD
1
Not assigned
2
RxD
Pin 3
3
0V DC (voltage supply)
Pin 5
4
TxD
Pin 2
Pin assignment configuration connection M 8x4 Note: The pin assignment of sender and receiver is identical.
2-23
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
5 10
6 7 11
8
5 10
FE
6 7 11
External Device Monitoring (EDM) The EDM checks if the contactors actually de-energise when the protective device responds. If, after an attempted reset, the EDM does not detect a response from the switching amplifier within 300ms, the EDM will deactivate the OSSD switching outputs again.
8
FE
24V or 0V (see Notes) 4 3
2
9
1
4 3
2
9
1
Pin assignment extension connection M 23×11 + FE—used on cascadable devices. Pin
Wire Colour
Sender
Receiver 24V DC output (voltage supply)
1
Brown
24V DC output (voltage supply)
2
Blue
0V DC (voltage supply)
0V DC (voltage supply)
3
Grey
Reserved
Reserved
4
Pink
Reserved
Reserved
5
Red
Reserved
Reserved
6
Yellow
Reserved
Reserved
7
White
Reserved
Reserved
8
Red/Blue
Reserved
Reserved
9
Black
Device communication
Device communication
10
Purple
Device communication
Device communication
11
Grey/Pink
Output host/guest SEL
Output host/guest SEL
FE
Green
Functional ground
Functional ground
Pin assignment extension connection M 23×11 + FE
2-24
Pin 6 k2 k1 Contactor Contacts
4 3
System connector K1 Contactor Coils K2
Connecting the contact elements to the EDM The EDM is implemented electrically by both N.C. contacts (k1, k2) having to close when the contact elements (K1, K2) de-energized by interruption of the sensing field: 24 Volts then applied at the input of the EDM. If 24V is not applied after an interruption of the sensing field, one of the contact elements is defective and the EDM prevents the machine restart. Notes:
• The EDM remains active after switching the device off and back on again. It can be deactivated only with the reset function. •If you connect the contact elements to be monitored to the EDM input, then you must select the operating mode EDM in the SCD (Safety Configuration & Diagnostic Software). If not, the device will show the error . • If you later deselect the EDM operating mode, pin 6 of the system plug must not remain connected to 24V. In this case, connect pin 6 to 0V.
!
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains SafeShield Reset Button/Restart Button In the operating mode with internal restart interlock the operator must first press the reset/restart button before restarting.
ATTENTION: Select the correct installation site for the reset button. Install the reset button outside the hazardous area such that it cannot be operated from inside the hazardous area. When operating the reset button, the operator must be able to view the entire hazardous area.
ATTENTION: Re configuration after device replacement. If you replace a configured safety light curtain with reset function activated with a replacement unit, the reset function must again be activated via the software. It is not sufficient to make the electrical connections, because new devices are supplied from the factory with the reset function deactivated.
Receiver
Transmitter
Reset/restart button Pin 5 24V
Connecting the reset button/restart button
2-25
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Point of Operation Control Maximum scanning range
6m/18m (19.69ft/59.06ft)
Resolution (object sensitivity)
14mm/30mm (0.55in/1.18in)
Maximum height of protective field
1814mm/1832mm (71.4in/72.1in)
Minimum height of protective field
314mm/332 mm (12.36in/13.07in)
The optical axis (centre of window) is marked on the end cap.
Specifications Standards
EN 50100
Approvals
BG, cULus and CE marked for all applicable directives
Point of Operation Control (POC) safety light curtains are active opto-electronic protection devices (AOPD) with resolutions of 14mm (0.55in) or 30mm (1.18in).
Protected Height
314mm...1832mm (12.3in...72.1in)
Scanning Range
0.3m...6m (0.98ft...19.6ft)/0.3m...18m (0.98ft...59.0ft)
Allen-Bradley Guardmaster POC safety light curtains are selfchecking and belong to Safety Category 4. They have been designed for industrial applications and are characterized by:
Resolution
14mm/30mm (0.55in/1.18in)
Enclosure Rating
IP 65
Connection Type
7-pin mini style quick-disconnect on transmitter and receiver
Supply Voltage Uv Maximum Residual Ripple
24V DC ± 20% 5 Vss
Description
• • • • • •
High degree of reliability Maintenance-free components Practical size Sturdy modular construction Universal application possibilities Simple installation
Features • Maintenance-free operation • Control-reliable solid-state outputs • State of the art microprocessor technology with custom-designed ASICs (Application Specific Integrated Circuits) • Easy assembly and alignment • Quick-disconnect mini style connectors • Long scanning range and high resolution • Small housing cross section: 52mm x 55mm (2.05in x 2.17in) • Fast response time ≤15ms • Large excess gain • Possibility to daisy-chain two sensors (to prevent personnel from standing between protective field and the point of operation) • Construction in compliance with EN 50100 Category 4 (self-checking) • Tested and approved for USA, Europe, Canada and Japan
Power Consumption
0.9...1.5 Amps (no-load)
Synchronization
Optical, without separate synchronization channel
Outputs Minimum output voltage
2 x PNP, 0.5 A, short circuit protected Uv - 2V
Response Time
≤15ms
Protection
Short circuit and overload
Connection Maximum wire cross section
1.0mm2 with jacket 1.5mm2 without jacket
Cable length
60m (196.8ft) Protection against over-voltage (≥1kV) from Level 3 or higher (IEC 801 part 5; 2 kV) between PE and +V.
Mode of Operation➊
Guard-only with automatic restart
Safety Category
Type 4 (self-checking)
Requirement
According to EN 50100
Operating Ambient Temp.
0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
Air Humidity
15%...95% (not condensing)
Storage Temperature
-25°C to 70°C (-13°F to 158°F)
Approximate Dimensions Height Housing cross section
Length dependent upon protected height; (see dimensional drawings) 52 mm x 55 mm (2.05in x 2.17in)
➊ The POC without using a separate control unit, will operate in a guard only mode with automatic restart.
2-26
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Point of Operation Control Product Selection 1. Safety Light Curtains The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster POC safety light curtains are ordered as pairstransmitter and receiverand shipped under one part number. After selecting the appropriate light curtain pair, ensure that required interfaces and accessories are ordered as well. Size mm (inches)
Resolution mm
Protected Height mm
in
Catalogue Number
300 (12)
14
314
12.3
440L-P4B0300-N
30
332
13.0
440L-P4D0300-N
450 (18)
14
464
18.2
440L-P4B0450-N
30
482
18.9
440L-P4D0450-N
600 (24)
14
614
24.1
440L-P4B0600-N
30
632
24.8
440L-P4D0600-N
750 (30)
14
764
30.0
440L-P4B0750-N
30
782
30.8
440L-P4D0750-N
900 (36)
14
914
36.0
440L-P4B0900-N
30
932
36.7
440L-P4D0900-N
14
1064
41.9
440L-P4B1050-N
30
1082
42.6
440L-P4D1050-N
1050 (42)
Size mm (inches)
Protected Height
Resolution mm
mm
in
1200 (48)
14
1214
47.8
440L-P4B1200-N
30
1232
48.5
440L-P4D1200-N
1350 (54)
14
1364
53.7
440L-P4B1350-N
30
1382
54.4
440L-P4D1350-N
1500 (60)
14
1514
59.6
440L-P4B1500-N
30
1532
60.3
440L-P4D1500-N
1650 (66)
14
1664
65.5
440L-P4B1650-N
30
1682
66.2
440L-P4D1650-N
1800 (72)
14
1814
71.4
440L-P4B1800-N
30
1832
72.1
440L-P4D1800-N
Catalogue Number
Please order the devices intended for cascaded applications (host sensor/guest sensor) separately (see page 2-18).
2. Cordsets2 Required (one for transmitter and one for receiver) Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
6 5
Pin Wire Colour 1 Black 2 White 3 Blue 4 Brown 5 Grey 6 Yellow 7 Green
1 7
4
Cable
Connector Style
2
Straight
3
Wire Rating
(5)/18AWG (2)20AWG 300V 3A
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
2 (6.5)
889N-F7AG-2
5 (16.4)
889N-F7AG-5
10 (32.8)
889N-F7AG-10
15 (49.2)
889N-F7AG-15
20 (65.6)
889N-F7AG-20
30 (98.4)
889N-F7AG-30
55.8 (2.2) 25.4 (1.00) Dia.
Straight Female Approximate Dimensions. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
2-27
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Point of Operation Control Product Selection 3. Programmable InterfaceOptional Input Voltage
24V DC
Reset
Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking
PSDI
Muting
Outputs
yes
yes
yes
yes
2 PNP OSSD 1 Aux. PNP
Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking
PSDI
Muting
Outputs
no
4 amp 2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux.
Manual/ Automatic
More Details
Catalogue Number
2-60
440L-M8100
More Details
Catalogue Number
2-58
440L-M8200
4. Safety Relay InterfacesRequired Input Voltage
24V DC
Reset
Manual/ Automatic
no
no
no
Note: For wiring refer to Safeguarding Applications section of this catalogue.
5. Safety Relay InterfacesOptional Relay
Input
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Power Supply 24V AC/DC
1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
MSR127RP Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126T) Dual Channel (MSR126.1T) Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126R)
MSR126
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC
Reset
Catalogue Number
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
Monitored Manual
Automatic/Manual
Monitored Manual
440R-C23139
24V AC/DC Light Curtain or Safety Mat
3 N.O.
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
MSR131RTP
2-28
440R-N23133 440R-N23117 440R-N23116 440R-N23115 440R-N23114 440R-N23113 440R-N23112 440R-N23123 440R-N23122 440R-N23121 440R-N23120 440R-N23119 440R-N23118
Automatic/Manual or Monitored Manual
440R-C23137
440R-C23136
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Point of Operation Control Product Selection 6. Safety Relay Interface (used for muting applications) Input Voltage
24V DC
Floating Blanking
Reset
Manual
Fixed Blanking
no
PSDI
no
Muting
Outputs
yes
2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux.
yes
More Details
Catalogue Number
4-21
440R-P23071
MSR22LM
7. AccessoriesOptional Products
Catalogue Number
Steel L-Mounting bracket, fixed (4 per package)
440L-AF6102 (1 package per system)
Mounting bracket, adjustable (4 per package)
440L-AF6103 (1 package per system)
Mounting bracket, adjustable with shock mount (4 per package)
440L-AF6104 (1 package per system)
Power supply: Input85...265V AC Output24V DC, 3 Amps
1794-PS3
Laser alignment aid
440L-ALAT
POC adaptor for laser alignment aid
440L-ALBRK
Sliding nuts (4 pieces supplied with POC system)
440L-AF6105
Corner Mirror Selection Table Specially constructed glass mirrors for 2 and 3 sided safeguarding applications. Note: Each mirror reduces maximum scan range by 10% per mirror. For POC Models
Catalogue Number
300
440L-AM1200300
450
440L-AM1200450
600
440L-AM1200600
750
440L-AM1200750
900
440L-AM1200900
1050
440L-AM1201050
1200
440L-AM1201200
1350
440L-AM1201350
1500
440L-AM1201500
1650 or 1800
440L-AM1201800
Mounting kit for mirrors. Each kit contains 1 bracket with fasteners. Order 2 kits per mirror. Mounting stand for mirror and POC (see page 2-21)
440L-AM120BRK 440L-AMSTD
Note: For Approximate Dimensions of mirror and mounting stands, see pages 2-20 and 2-21.
2-29
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Point of Operation Control Product Selection
Host Receiver Host Sender
Cable length is 170mm (6.5in)
Guest Receiver
Guest Sender
Safety Light CurtainsHost Guest The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster POC host guest family of safety light curtains are ordered as pairs—transmitter and receiver—and is shipped under one part number. After selecting the appropriate light curtain pair, ensure that required interfaces and accessories are ordered as well. HostPairs Size mm (inches)
GuestPairs
Protected Height
Resolution/ No. of Beams
Catalogue Number
mm
in
900 (36)
14mm/120
914
36.0
440L-C4B0900-N
30mm/60
932
36.7
440L-C4D0900-N
1050 (42)
14mm/140
1064
41.9
440L-C4B1050-N
30mm/70
1082
42.6
440L-C4D1050-N
1200 (48)
14mm/160
1214
47.8
440L-C4B1200-N
30mm/80
1232
48.5
440L-C4D1200-N
1350 (54)
14mm/180
1364
53.7
440L-C4B1350-N
30mm/90
1382
54.4
440L-C4D1350-N
1500 (60)
14mm/200
1514
59.6
440L-C4B1500-N
30mm/100
1532
60.3
440L-C4D1500-N
Resolution/ No. of Beams
150 (6)
14mm/20
150
5.9
440L-B4B0150-N
30mm/10
150
5.9
440L-B4D0150-N
300 (12)
14mm/40
314
12.3
440L-B4B0300-N
30mm/20
332
13.0
440L-B4D0300-N
450 (18)
14mm/60
464
18.2
440L-B4B0450-N
30mm/30
482
18.9
440L-B4D0450-N
600 (24)
14mm/80
614
24.1
440L-B4B0600-N
30mm/40
632
24.8
440L-B4D0600-N
750 (30)
14mm/100
764
30.0
440L-B4B0750-N
30mm/50
782
30.8
440L-B4D0750-N
900 (36)
14mm/120
914
36.0
440L-B4B0900-N
30mm/60
932
36.7
440L-B4D0900-N
Note: The maximum number of allowable beams in any combination of host/guest is 240 beams. Note: To order controllers, safety relays and accessories, refer to page 2-28.
2-30
Protected Height
Size mm (inches)
mm
in
Catalogue Number
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Point of Operation Control Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
Note: Approximate Dimensions C & D represent the suggested distances of mounting brackets.
Mini Style Quick-Disconnect (approx. 100mm 28 (1.1) (3.94in) space required for 21 (0.83) plugging in) 62 (2.44)
A
Protective Height D
B
A
B
C
POC 300
300
384
224
POC 450
450
534
374
POC 600
600
684
524
POC 750
750
835
675
POC 900
900
985
825
POC 1050
1050
1135
975
POC 1200
1200
1285
1125
POC 1350
1350
1435
1275
POC 1500
1500
1586
1426
POC 1650
1650
1736
1576
POC 1800
1800
1886
1726
D
80
Guest
C
31 (1.22)
D
C A B
27.5 (1.08) 55 (2.17)
Optical Axis = Center of exit window
52 (2.05)
Guest A
B
C
150
150
200
*
*
300
300
350
190
80
450
450
500
340
80
600
600
650
490
80
750
750
800
640
80
900
900
950
790
80
27.5 (1.08)
D 52 (2.05)
55 (2.17) 61 (2.40)
2-31
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Point of Operation Control Typical Wiring Diagrams
1
Sender Cable Plug
6
Pin
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
6 7
2
3
4
5
6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 3
4 7
POC Transmitter Inside View of Connector 1
2
3
4
5
1
6 7
2
3
4
5
Color
Function
Black +24V DC White 0V DC Blue Test Brown Test Grey N.C. Yellow N.C. Green PE POC Transmitter Top View of Connector
6 7 Pin #6
Pin #2 Pin #3
Receiver
Transmitter NC = No Connection
Electrical Installation Connecting the POC components is simple. Cable lengths up to 60m (196.8ft) are permitted (over-voltage protection for level 3 and higher (IEC 801), see Technical Data). The transmitter is connected to a 24V supply using a 7-conductor cable. The receiver is connected to the machine control and 24V supply using a 7-conductor cable. The maximum wire cross section is 1.5mm (0.06in) without jacket; 1mm (0.04in) with jacket. All light curtains come standard with prewired mini style quick-disconnect connectors in the end-caps. The POC requires +24V DC (± 20%) power supply, which is available from Allen-Bradley Guardmaster. LED Indicators Transmitter
Pin #5
Pin #7
PE
Communication
Communication
out 1 out 2
0V
24V DC
PE
nc
nc
Test Test
0V
24V DC
Pin #1
Receiver
Pin #1 = +24V Pin #2 = 0V Pin #3 = Test Pin #4 = Test Pin #5 = NC Pin #6 = NC Pin #7 = PE
Internal Connector
Mini Plug
Pin #4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
POC (transmitter) cable pin diagram Test Input (Transmitter) The POC switches to the green condition after the supply voltage has been applied, and the automatic power-up test has been completed. If an external test is desired, a contact (normally closed) can be connected at the test input (MCC = Machine Control Contact). Minimum opening duration ≥50ms. Continuous current during closed test input: 12mA. In-rush current when closing: 150mA (20ms). Test input open = Testing = Outputs on receiver inactive (red). Test input closed = No test Outputs on receiver active (green). POC Transmitter
Power On (Amber) Transmit (Yellow)
Output Active (Green) Output Inactive (Red) Weak Signal (Amber) Beam Break Required (Yellow) (only with 440L-M8100)
1
+24V
3 4 2
test 0V
7 PE
POC connection diagram
2-32
or
test contact
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Point of Operation Control Typical Wiring Diagrams (continued)
POC Transmitter
Outputs (Receiver) The output voltage UA of each channel depends on the supply voltage UV and the switched load and is at least
1 3
UA = UV - 2V
+24V Imax = 0.5A RL
Both outputs OSSD1 and OSSD2 (OSSD = Output Signal Switching Device) are control reliable, actively monitored PNP solid state outputs. The outputs can carry a maximum of 0.5 Amps and are short circuit protected. If the protected field is clear, the two outputs are HIGH (active). • An additional supply voltage must not be applied to the outputs.
4
Imax = 0.5A RL
5 6
RS 485 (440L-M8100/diagnostics)
2 0V 7
ATTENTION: Both output signals must be processed separately. They must not be connected in series or parallel.
PE
Receiver connection diagram
RS-485 Communication Interface This interface serves to communicate with the 440L-M8100 (optional). If the 440L-M8100 is not used, the connection is not used. Receiver Cable Plug
1 6 5
Pin
Color
Function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Black White Blue Brown Grey Yellow Green
+24V DC 0V DC Out 1 OSSD 1 Out 2 OSSD 2 -RS 485 Communications +RS 485 Communications PE
2 3
4 7
POC Receiver Top View of Connector
POC Receiver Inside View of Connector
Pin #6
Pin #1 Pin #2
Pin #5
Pin #3 Pin #7 Pin #1 = +24V Pin #2 = Gnd Pin #3 = OSSD1 Pin #4 = OSSD2 Pin #5 = Com- RS 485 Pin #6 = Com+ RS 485 Pin #7 = PE
Internal Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Mini Plug
Pin #4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Receiver cable pin diagram
2-33
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Maximum scanning range
70m
Maximum beam gap
500mm
Minimum beam count
1 beam
Maximum beam count
4 beams
Minimum housing length
320mm
Maximum housing length
1800mm
Specifications
Description Multi-beam safety light curtains from Rockwell Automation are infrared protection devices with 1 to 4 infrared beams. They operate on the through-beam principle, consisting of a sender and receiver unit and are suitable for access control and perimeter guarding. The PAC fulfils the pr EN 50100 requirements, safety category 4, in that it is a self monitoring device. • Integrated evaluation with state-of-the-art electronics and especially developed ICs (ASICs) • Beam coding for high interference immunity • Actively monitored semiconductor outputs • Mini style quick disconnect connectors • Fast response time • Large signal reserve (factor 2) • Optical synchronization of sender and receiver units • Multiple safeguarding by means of corner mirrors and columns • Operating modes: • Electronic Device Monitoring (EDM) • Restart Interlock • Muting configuration available
Standards
EN 50100
Approvals
BG and CE marked for all applicable directives
Protected Height
Depends on product selection
Scanning Range
70m (225ft), single beam PAC 7.5m
Beam Gap
Depends on product selection
Enclosure Rating
IP 65
Connection Type
7-pin mini style on transmitter and 8-pin on receiver
Supply Voltage Uv Maximum Residual Ripple
24V DC ± 20% 5 Vss
Power Consumption
7 watts—Transmitter 6 watts—Receiver
Synchronization
Optical, without separate synchronization channel
Outputs Minimum output voltage
2 x PNP, 0.5 A, short circuit protected Uv - 2V
Response Time
≤20ms
Protection
Short circuit and overload
Connection Max. wire cross section Cable length
The devices were designed for industrial applications and offer the following advantages: • • • • •
Beam coding for optimal interference immunity Adaptability for safe PLC Robust modular construction Universal application possibilities Simple installation
60m (196.8ft) maximum Protection against over-voltage (≥1kV) from Level 3 or higher (IEC 801 part 5; 2 kV) between PE and +V.
Mode of Operation
Guard-only with manual restart
Safety Category
Type 4 (self-checking)
Requirement
According to EN 50100
Operating Ambient Temp.
0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
Air Humidity
15%...95% (not condensing)
Storage Temperature
-25°C to 70°C (-13°F to 158°F)
Approximate Dimensions Height Housing Cross Section
2-34
1.0mm2 with jacket 1.5mm2 without jacket
Length dependent upon protected height; (see dimensional drawings) 52 mm x 55 mm (2.05in x 2.17in)
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Product Selection 1a. Multiple-Beam PAC The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster PAC multiple beam safety light curtains are ordered as pairstransmitter and receiverand shipped under one part number. After selecting the appropriate light curtain pair, ensure that required interfaces and accessories are ordered as well. The single-beam PAC can be ordered with a passive mirror column (440L-AMIRSTDZ500) or two right angle mirrors (440L-AMIRR2). Non muting Models Size mm (inches)
Beam Spacing mm
Number of Beams
684 (27)
500
600 (24)
Muting Models
Catalogue Number
Size mm (inches)
Beam Spacing mm
Number of Beams
2
440L-P4H2500-N
684 (27)
500
2
440L-P4H2500M-N
220
3
440L-P4H3220-N
600 (24)
220
3
440L-P4H3220M-N
1000 (40)
400
3
440L-P4H3400-N
1000 (40)
400
3
440L-P4H3400M-N
534 (21)
120
4
440L-P4H4120-N
Catalogue Number
1b. Single-Beam PAC (Note: Maximum scanning range is 7.5 meters.) Non muting Models Size mm (inches)
Beam Spacing mm
Number of Beams
684 (27)
500
1
Muting Models
Catalogue Number 440L-P4G1500-N 440L-AMIRSTDZ500
Required mirror unit
Size mm (inches)
Beam Spacing mm
Number of Beams
684 (27)
500
1
Catalogue Number 440L-P4G1500M-N 440L-AMIRSTDZ500
Required mirror unit
2a. CordsetsRequired—PAC Transmitter Female Connector Face View of Female
Connector Style
PAC Transmitter 6 5
1 7
4
2
Straight
3
Cable Pin Wire Colour 1 Black 2 White 3 Blue 4 Brown 5 Grey 6 Yellow 7 Green
Wire Rating
(5)/18AWG (2)20AWG 300V 3A
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
2 (6.5)
889N-F7AG-2
5 (16.4)
889N-F7AG-5
10 (32.8)
889N-F7AG-10
15 (49.2)
889N-F7AG-15
20 (65.6)
889N-F7AG-20
30 (98.4)
889N-F7AG-30
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
2 (6.5)
889N-F8AE-2
5 (16.4)
889N-F8AE-5
10 (32.8)
889N-F8AE-10
15 (49.2)
889N-F8AE-15
20 (65.6)
889N-F8AE-20
30 (98.4)
889N-F8AE-30
2b. CordsetsPAC Receiver and PAC Single Beam Female Connector Face View of Female
Connector Style
PAC Single Beam and PAC Receiver 6 7
5
2
8 4
Straight
1
3
Cable Pin Wire Colour 1 Red 2 White 3 Blue 4 Brown 5 Grey 6 Yellow 7 Green 8 Pink
Wire Rating
18AWG 300V 3A
2-35
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Product Selection 3a. Safety Relay InterfacesRequired Input Voltage
24V DC
Floating Blanking
Reset
Manual/ Automatic
no
Fixed Blanking
no
PSDI
no
Muting
Outputs
no
4 amp 2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux.
More Details
Catalogue Number
58
440L-M8200
3b. Safety Relay Interfaces—Optional Relay
Input
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Power Supply 24V AC/DC
1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
MSR127RP Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126T) Dual Channel (MSR126.1T) Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126R)
MSR126
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC
Reset
Catalogue Number
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
Monitored Manual
440R-N23133
Automatic/Manual
Monitored Manual
440R-C23139
24V AC/DC Light Curtain or Safety Mat
3 N.O.
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
MSR131RTP
2-36
440R-N23117 440R-N23116 440R-N23115 440R-N23114 440R-N23113 440R-N23112 440R-N23123 440R-N23122 440R-N23121 440R-N23120 440R-N23119 440R-N23118
Automatic/Manual or Monitored Manual
440R-C23137
440R-C23136
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Product Selection 4. Safety Relay InterfacesOptional (Used for muting applications) Relay
Input Voltage
Reset
Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking
PSDI
Muting
Outputs
24V DC
Manual
no
no
yes
yes
2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux.
More Details
Catalogue Number
4-21
440R-P23071
MSR22LM
5. Power Supply Description Power supply: Input93...265V AC Output24V DC, 3 Amps
Catalogue Number
1794-PS3
6. AccessoriesOptional Description
Catalogue Number
L-Mounting bracket, fixed (4 per package)
440L-AF6102 (1 package per system)
Mounting bracket, adjustable (4 per package)
440L-AF6103 (1 package per system)
Mounting bracket, adjustable with shock mount (4 per package)
440L-AF6104 (1 package per system)
Laser alignment aid
440L-ALAT
SafeShield adaptor for laser alignment aid
440L-ALBRK
Sliding nut kit (4 included)—Supplied with PAC
440L-AF6105
Muting lamp with 2m cable
440L-AMUTLP2M
Muting lamp with 10m cable
440L-AMUTLP10M
2-37
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Product Selection 7. Accessories—Mirrors and Mounting Columns Corner Mirror Specially constructed mirrors for 2 and 3 sided safeguarding applications. NOTE: Each mirror reduces maximum scan range by 10% per mirror. For PAC Models
Catalogue Number
2 Beam 500mm beam spacing
440L-A2MIRSTND
3 Beam 400mm beam spacing
440L-A3MIRSTND
440L-ASHIM
Mirror mounting shims
Mounting Columns Description
Catalogue Number
Floor mounted column for 2 beam PAC 500mm beam spacing
440L-AMTSTND2B
Floor mounted column for 3 beam PAC 400mm beam spacing
440L-AMTSTND3B
Floor mounted column for 2 beam PAC column with muting lamp 500mm beam spacing
440L-AMUTSTDLP2B
Floor mounted column for 3 beam PAC column with muting lamp 400mm beam spacing
440L-AMUTSTDLP3B
Muting Sensors Sensor Transmitted Beam Retroreflective Polarized Retroreflective
Connection Location
Type
Catalogue Number 42GRL-9000-QD➋
Transmitter (powered from an external supply) Receiver (connected directly to the muting module or 8100)
42GRR-9000-QD➊➋
Connected directly to muting module or 8100
42GRU-9000-QD➊➋
3 inch standard reflector
Dark Switching
Connected directly to muting module or 8100 3 inch standard reflector
92-39 42GRU-9200-QD➊➋ 92-39
Connected directly to muting module or 8100 (Operating Lever must be selected separately.)
802M-NX10➊➋
➊ Use with 4-pin, 3-wire DC Micro patchcord when connecting to muting module (5m length shown). 1m, 2m, 3m, and 5m lengths available, catalogue number 889D-F3ACDM-*. Where * = length in meters.
889D-F3ACDM-5
Mechanical Limit Switch
➋ Recommended cordset. when connecting to the 440L-M8100. Five meter length shown, other lengths available, see page 15-10 of this catalogue.
2-38
889D-F4AC-5
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Alternative Cable Connection PG 9 Cable Dia. 4 to 8 (0.16 to 0.31)
Multiple Beam Single Beam PAC
PAC 440L-P4G2502-N Mini Connector
Mini Connector 31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
21 (0.83)
21 (0.83)
E
D
E
R3 R
C A
R2
B
A
B
Detail A Cross Section
R1
F
F
23 (0.91)➊
23 (0.91)➊
27.5 (1.08)
Detail A
52 (2.05)
2.2 (0.09) 55 (2.17)
440L T4H-2500-N T4H-3220-N T4H-3400-N T4H-4120-N
A 500 440 800 360
B 684 597 985 534
C 524 437 825 374
D 80 80 80 80
E 107 107 107 107
F 77 50 78 67
R 500 220 400 120
PAC single beam P4G 1500-N
500
684
524
80
97
87
500
14 (0.55) 6 (0.24) 6.7 (0.26)
3.5 (0.14) 10.5 (0.41)
➊ With respect to centre of housing
2-39
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 14 (0.55) 6 2.2 (0.09) (0.24)
Detail A
69 55 (2.72) (2.17) 3.5 (0.14) 52 (2.05)
21 (0.83) 81 (3.1)
6.7 (0.26)
52 (2.05)
10.5 (0.41)
23 (0.91)
55 (2.17)
27.5 (1.08)
F
500 668 (19.69) (26.3) Detail A
A
B
C
87 (3.43)
G
B2 B1
E
A2 A1
179 (7.05)
440L-AMIRSTDZ500
Corner mirror—use with single-beam PAC (440L-P4G1500-N or 440L-P4G1500M-N)
Muting Lamp Connection
D
Mini Connector
31 (1.22)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
440L-R4H 2500M-N
500
663
524
80
265
77
86
440L-R4H 3220M-N
440
576
437
80
265
50
86
440L-R4H 3400M-N
800
964
825
80
265
78
86
440L-R4H 1500M-N
500
663
524
80
255
87
76
2-40
1
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 147.7 (5.81)
147.7 (5.81)
400 (15.75)
400 (15.75)
1216 (47.87)
1216 (47.87)
400 (15.75)
300 (11.81)
400 (15.75)
300 (11.81)
A
A
180 (7.09) Bubble Level
A-A 115 (4.53) 147.7 (5.81)
3.1 (0.12)
M10
15mm Dia.
Mounting the mirror columns—column 400
2-41
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 147.7 (5.81)
147.7 (5.81)
500 (19.69) 1216 (47.87)
500 (19.69) 1216 (47.87)
400 (15.75)
400 (15.75) A
A
180 (7.09) A-A 115 (4.53)
Bubble Level 147.7 (5.81)
3.1 (0.12)
M10
15mm Dia.
Mounting the mirror columns—column 500
2-42
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 440L-AF6102 Slider nut
M5 M5 x 18
5.3 (0.21)
10 (0.39)
24 (0.94)
25 (0.98)
12 14
22 (0.87) 44 (1.73)
5 (0.2)
60 (2.36)
4.8 (0.19)
440L-AF6103
80 (3.15)
M5 x 18
65 (2.56) 40 (1.57)
23 (0.91)
30 (1.18)
2°
51 (2.01)
11 (0.43)
440L-AF6104 Adjustable mounting bracket 90 (3.54) 65 (2.56)
25 (0.98)
40 (1.57)
M5 x 20
23 (0.91) 30 (1.18)
11 (0.43)
51 (2.01)
2° Attachment to machine
Adjustable bracket with shock mount 4 required
2-43
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Typical Wiring Diagrams 7-pin connector
6 5
1 7
2
Transmitter unit
Receiver unit and single-beam PAC
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal
8-pin connector
6
1 7
5
2
8 3
1 Red 2 White 3 Blue 4 Brown 5 Grey 6 Yellow 7 Green 8 Pink
1234567
Color Black White Blue Brown Grey Yellow Green
1234567
+24V 0V Test Test RW RW
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4
1234567
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NC = No Connection
Transmitter
Receiver
Yellow Amber
Yellow
Red Amber Green
LED indicator Transmitter
Receiver
Yellow
sender range: high/low MCC test
Yellow
press restart switch
Amber
operating voltage is applied
Amber
contamination
2-44
3
1234567
+24V 0V OSSD 1 OSSD 2 RES EDM OWS
4
Red
outputs inactive
Green
light beam unobstructed, outputs active
Color Red White Blue Brown Grey Yellow Green Pink
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Perimeter Access Control Typical Wiring Diagram 440L Light Curtain to 440R-N23135 (MSR127RP) +24V DC
Test
3
Receiver
Sender
2
4
OSSDA
2
3
OSSDB 4 L1
L2
L3
K4 A
S52
K4
S12
13
23
33
41
14
24
34
42
MSR127RP A2
S21
S22
S34
K5 K5
Reset
K4
K5
Bulletin 100S Safety Contactors or 700S Safety Relays
DC Common Note: For the 440L PAC unit, set the dip switches as follows: SW 1, 5, 6, 7, 8 to “B” SW 2, 3, 4 to “A” The dip switches are accessed by removing the connection cap of the receiver unit. The sender unit will not need dip switch configuration if these receiver settings are used.
2-45
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Area Access Control Specifications Standards
EN 50100
Approvals
BG and CE marked for all applicable directives
Protective Field Range
0.5 to 18m or 15 to 70m
Number of Beams
1
Light Beam Diameter
23mm
Sender/Receiver Unit Supply Voltage
24V DC ±20% 230V AC +15% to -10% (special order) 115V AC +15% to -10%
Description
Ripple
Max. 5% of Uv
The AAC photoelectric safety switch is a single-beam, noncontact presence sensing safety device consisting of separate transmitter and receiver units. The light beam produced between the emitter and receiver provides access protection for hazardous areas.
Frequency
48 to 62Hz with AC version
Input, Sender
Test contact
Test Time
Max. 150ms
Min. Opening Time of NC Contact for Test
75ms
The AAC serves as a presence sensing safety device for perimeter guarding to protect personnel from potentially hazardous areas such as: • • • • • •
Robotic work cells Machining centres Palletizers Plastics machinery Stackers Settling machinery in the stone working industry
Features • • • •
Long scan range Easy installation Die cast aluminium housing Heated front lens, i.e. it can be used even in outdoor applications
Power Consumption Voltage Version
24V
115V
230V
Sender Unit
5W
8W
8W
Receiver Unit
8W
11W
11W
Synchronization
Optical
Outputs
Safety Relays—Max. Operating Frequency 0.2Hz (1 operation in 5 seconds)
Switching Current (max./ min.)
2A/0.02A
Switching Voltage (max./ min.)
250V AC/24V DC
Response Time
≤22ms
Connection Cable
PG connector: IP67, max cable length 50m
Front Screen Heating
Standard
Operating Data Protection Class
2-46
I
Enclosure Rating
IP67
Safety Category
Type 4
Requirements
EN 50100 Part I/Part II
Ambient Operating Temperature
-25°C to 55°C
Storage Temperature
-25°C to 70°C
Air Humidity
15% to 95%
Vibration
5g, 10 to 55Hz to IEC 68-2-6
Impact Resistance
10g, 16ms to IEC 68-2-29
Weight
Sender unit: approx. 0.9 to 1.3kg Receiver unit: approx. 1 to 1.4kg
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Area Access Control Product Selection 1a. Selection Guide for 0.5m to 18m Range Catalogue Number
Operating Voltage Supply Current 24V DC 120V AC
Connection Type
Transmitter
Receiver
Terminal Chamber with Cable Gland (PG13.5 thread)
440L-T4F0018-Q
440L-R4F0018-Q
440L-T4F90018-Q
440L-R4F90018-Q
1b. Selection Guide for 15m to 70m Range Catalogue Number
Operating Voltage Supply Current 24V DC 120V AC
Connection Type
Transmitter
Receiver
Terminal Chamber with Cable Gland (PG13.5 thread)
440L-T4F0070-Q
440L-R4F0070-Q
440L-T4F90070-Q
440L-R4F90070-Q
2. Safety Relay Interfaces—Optional if additional outputs required Input Voltage
24V DC
Floating Blanking
Reset
Manual/ Automatic
no
Fixed Blanking
no
PSDI
no
Muting
Safety Outputs
More Details
Catalogue Number
4 amp 2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux.
58
440L-M8200
no
Note: For wiring refer to Safeguarding Applications section of this catalogue.
3. Safety Relay Interfaces—Optional Relay
Input
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Power Supply 24V AC/DC
1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
MSR127RP Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126T) Dual Channel (MSR126.1T) Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126R)
MSR126
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC 24V AC/DC 115V AC 230V AC
Reset
Catalogue Number
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
Monitored Manual
440R-N23133
Automatic/Manual
Monitored Manual
440R-C23139
24V AC/DC Light Curtain or Safety Mat
3 N.O.
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
Removable
115V AC
230V AC
440R-N23117 440R-N23116 440R-N23115 440R-N23114 440R-N23113 440R-N23112 440R-N23123 440R-N23122 440R-N23121 440R-N23120 440R-N23119 440R-N23118
Automatic/Manual or Monitored Manual
440R-C23137
440R-C23136
MSR131RTP
2-47
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Area Access Control Accessories
2-48
Description
Catalogue Number
Laser alignment aid
440L-ALAT
Adaptor for alignment aid on AAC
440L-ALBRK1
Mounting bracket for AAC
440L-AMBRK4
Corner mirror for scanning range 0 to 30m
440L-AMIRR1
Mounting kit for 440L-AMIRR1
440L-AMKIT
Mounting bracket for mirror 440L-AMIRRI
440L-AMBRK1
Glass corner mirror, 45° angle 0 to 30m
440L-AMIRR2
Long range mirror (15 to 79m)
440L-AMIRR3
Adaptor, Conduit, Pg13.5 to 1/2in NPT, Steel
440A-A17094
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Area Access Control Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 50 (1.96)
116 (4.57)
34 (1.33) 65 (2.5)
156 (6.14)
128 (5.03) 65 (2.5)
17.5 (0.68)
14 (0.55) Pg 13.5
Max Cable O.D. 8-10mm
M6 x 8 (6 places)
2-49
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Area Access Control Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 9 (0.35) 65 51 6.5 (0.26) (2.56)(2.01)
20 (0.79) M 8 x 30 SW 13
26 (1.02)
20° 64.5 (2.54) 46.5 (1.83)
58 (2.28) 9 (0.35) 40 (1.57)
82 (3.23) 39.5 64.5(1.55) (2.54)
20 (0.79)
M 8 x 45 SW 13
43 (1.69)
60°
22 (0.87)
6.5 (0.25)
6 (0.23)
Mounting bracket 440L-AMBRK4 16.5 (0.65)
33.5 (1.32) 63 (2.48)
67 (2.64)
160 (6.30) 149 (5.87) 124 (4.88)
177 (6.97) ~7 (0.28)
38 (1.50) 96 (3.78) 100 (3.94)
2.5 (0.10) 14 (0.55)
8.5 (0.33)
10 (.039)
Shown with bracket (440L-AMBRK1) Mounted to mirror (440L-AMIRR1)
Corner mirror
Catalogue number 440L-AMIRR1
76 (2.99)
80 (3.15)
40.5 (1.59)
96.5 (3.80)
40 (1.57) 63 (2.48)
146.5 (5.77)
Catalogue number 440L-AMIRR2
2-50
71 (2.80)
69.5 (2.74)
8.5 (0.33) 80 (3.15)
8.5 (0.33)
M6
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtains Area Access Control Typical Wiring Diagrams
1/2
3
24V DC
0V DC
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.O. Output
N.C. Output
N.O. Output
Test Input
{ { {
11
No Connection
0V DC
10
Receiver
PE
3
No Connection
1/2
24V DC
PE
Transmitter
24V DC supply with terminal chamber
1/2
3
N
4
5
6
7
8
9
N.O. Output
N.C. Output
N.O. Output
Test Input
{ { {
11
No Connection
10
PE
3
No Connection
115V DC
PE
1/2
Receiver
L1 115V AC
Transmitter
AC power supply with terminal chamber
2-51
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces SafeShield DeviceNet Module Specifications
Description The SafeShield DeviceNet interface is a nonsafety rated device that communicates diagnostic information from any SafeShield safety light curtain. In a compact 22.5m DIN rail mounted housing it allows easy wiring and configuration of DeviceNet parameters.
Features • • • • • •
Connects directly to DeviceNet networks Auto baud Change of State and strobe messaging Rotary DIP switches for MAC ID Compact 22.5mm housing Diagnostic capabilities • Weak signal • Alignment: number of beams, number of blocked beams, etc. • Output status • Setup configuration • LED diagnostics • System identification: product name, model, etc. • System status • System settings: fixed or floating blanking, auto power-up, etc. • Diagnostic: error codes, cause of lockout, troubleshooting suggestions, etc.
Safety Category
Nonsafety rated
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Power Supply
24V DC
Power Consumption
1w
Inputs
RS 233 from SafeShield
Outputs
DeviceNet
Power On Delay
1s
Indication LEDs
See Indicator table
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
Torque Settings—terminal screws
0.4–0.5Nm (3.54–4.43lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
22.5mm DIN rail
Weight
320g (0.71lbs)
Mechanical Life
N/A
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
Indicators Label
Colour
Dnet Status
Red/Green
Comm Status
Orange
OSSD Status
Red/Green
2-52
State OFF Green ON Steady Green Flashing Red Flashing Red ON Steady Green-Red-Green Off Flashing On Off Red Green
Status Interface not powered, or waiting for Autobaud Interface active and allocated by master Interface active but not allocated by master Minor correctable fault (baud rate) Major fault (possible duplicate address Power up sequence Internal Fault Fault or Warning Require User intervention No Faults or Warnings No Safety Communication Not Safe, OSSD not active Safe, OSSD active
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces SafeShield DeviceNet Module I/O Data Strobe and Change-of-State Output: Input Assembly = Status (0) Byte 1, Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Status Data Restart Beam Strength Device Warning Device Fault 0 Input Assembly = Modes (1) Byte 2, Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Floating Blanking Fixed Blanking Resolution Modes Restart Mode Range Mode Mode Mode Mode Input Assembly = Diagnostic (2) Byte 3, Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Diag. Code Diagnostic Codes Input Assembly = Beams (3) Byte 4, Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Beam Data Count of Beams
2 0
1 0
0 OSSD
2
1
0
EDM Mode
0
0
2
1
0
2
1
0
Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
Com. from SafeShield
N/A
N/A
24V DC
442L-MDNET
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 99 (3.89)
22.5 (0.88)
114.5 (4.5)
Typical Wiring Diagram 24V DC Reset
Light curtain Out1 Out2
L1 L2 L3 A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41 K1
MSR127RP
K2 S21
S22
S34
A2
14
24
K1
K2
34
42
M
0V
Light Curtain, Manual Reset, Monitored Output Black Blue White Red Shield
} DeviceNet Connection
2-53
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces 120V AC Power Supply and Safety Relay Specifications Input Power
120/230V AC
Power Consumption
2W/4W
Inputs
1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or 2 PNP (light curtain)
Maximum Input Resistance
110 ohms
Reset
Automatic/Manual
Outputs
3 N. O. Safety 1 N.C. Auxiliary nonsafety
Output Rating N.O. B300, AC15, 5A/250V AC N300, DC13, 3A/24V DC Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Description
Power ON Delay
1 second
The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster 120V AC interface box consists of a NEMA 4 rated lockable metal enclosure, a DIN mount 3amp, 24V DC power supply and either a single or dual 22.5mm safety relay(s).
Response Time
15ms
The single safety relay module provides 3 N.O. safety and one N.C. auxiliary (nonsafety) “potential free” relay outputs. The dual safety relay configuration allows for two pairs of safety light curtains to independently control one or two machines. The safety relay(s) can be configured for manual reset or automatic reset. The resetting function can be through the key switch mounted on the front cover of the interface box. Pre punched holes located on the bottom of the enclosure allow for easy wiring of the system.
Relay Module Indication LEDs K1 Green = Power Green = K1 Closed, if K1 alone is lit, check for short across reset button K2 Green = K2 Closed Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
NEMA 4, IP65
Max. Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Weight
4886/5113g (10.75/11.25lbs)
Electrical Life 222V AC/4A/880VA 100,000 operations cos 0 = 0.35 Maximum Operating Frequency
1200 cycles/hour
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.35mm 10-55Hz
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks 100ms
Recovery Time
2-54
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces 120V AC Power Supply and Safety Relay Product Selection Safety Outputs 3 N.O. 6 N.O.
Auxiliary Outputs 1 N.C. 2 N.C.
Power Supply
Catalogue Number 440L-M8400 440L-M8500
24V DC
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 200.0 (7.87) 161.9 (6.37)
301.6 (11.87) 3.17 (0.12) 1.77 (0.07) 63.5 (2.5)
22.2 (0.87)
104.7 (4.12)
2-55
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces 120V AC Power Supply and Safety Relay Typical Wiring Diagram M8400 Single Relay
L
Light Curtain Interface Box
Fuse
Fuse
L1
K3
6
7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Fuse
4 5
Fuse
K4 1 2 3
Machine Prime Mover Elements
Receiver
Transmitter
Relay Man. Restart (Jump 15 & 16, 17 & 18) Relay Auto Restart (Jump 16 & 17)
PE
+24V
OSSD1 OSSD2 GND
TEST
PE TEST
GND +24V
K3 K4
K3 K4
K3
N
+24V
To red wire of Safe/GuardShield Receiver
2-56
Arc Suppression Devices
K4
Relay Auto Restart w/ MPCE Feedback (N.C. contacts between 16 & 17) Man. Restart Internal to Light Curtain (Jumper 16 & 17)
OR
(Jumper Req’d if mts not used)
Relay Man. Restart w/ MPCE Feedback (N.C. contacts between 15 & 16, Jumper 17 & 18)
L2
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces 120V AC Power Supply and Safety Relay Typical Wiring Diagram M8500 Dual Relay L1
L
LC1
1 2 3
4 5
6
7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
LC2 Relay Man. Restart
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiver
Transmitter
LC1
(Jump 17 & 18, 19 & 20)
OSSD1 OSSD2 GND +24V PE
GND +24V PE TEST TEST
OSSD1 OSSD2 GND +24V PE
GND +24V PE TEST TEST
K4
(Jumper Req’d if mts not used)
K5
K4
+24V
K4
To red wire of +24V Safe/GuardShield Receiver
LC1
K6
Relay Auto Restart w/MPCE Feedback
(N.C. contacts between 21 & 22)
K3
(Jumper Req’d if mts not used) Arc Suppression Devices 100Ω, 2.2µF)
Relay Man. Restart w/MPCE Feedback
K5 K6
(N.C. contacts between 18 & 19)
OR
(Jump 21 & 22)
(N.C. contacts between (N.C. contacts between 17 & 18, Jumper 19 & 20) 20 & 21, Jumper 22 & 23) K3
OR
(Jump 20 & 21, 22 & 23) Relay Auto Restart
(Jump 18 & 19) K3
N
Fuse
K6
Fuse
K4
Light Curtain Interface Box Fuse
K5
Fuse
K3
LC2
Man. Restart Internal to To red wire of Light Curtain Safe/GuardShield Relay Auto Receiver (Jumper 21 & 22)
LC2
K5
K6
2-57
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces Safety Relay Specifications (continued) min.
typ.
max.
Contactor Monitoring T 21,T 22 Contactor Monitoring
NC contacts in series
Permissible Cont. Drop-off Time
No restrictions
Permissible Contactor Resp. Time
200 ms
Sensor Signal T 3,T 4
Two-channel
Input Resistance (active)
606Ω
Signal Active at
17.6V U
674Ω
742Ω
V
Description The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster 440L-M8200 safety relay is designed specifically to interface with safety light curtains. It has two normally open safety outputs (control reliable) and one normally closed auxiliary output. The 440L-M8200 requires 24V DC and has convenient connections for the transmitter and the receiver.
Signal LOW at
0V
Time Period Tolerance between T3 and T4
15 ms
2.4 V
Outputs 15 ms ➋
Response Time Switching Current
<0.1mA ➌
4A
Switching Voltage AC/DC
240V AC /60V DC
Switching AC /DC
1200 VA/ 50 W
Features • • • • • • •
Automatic or manual reset MPCE monitoring Din rail mount LED indication of power on outputs 2 N.O. safety outputs 1 N.C. auxiliary output Removable terminal strip for easy replacement
Specifications
Mech. Life Expectancy (switch actions)
10 7
Elec. Life Expectancy (switch actions)
10 9
Delay on Energization (NO contacts)
40 ms
Delay on Energization (NC contacts) 15 ms min.
typ.
max.
Standards
EN 50100
Approvals
BG and CE marked for all applicable directives
Protection Class
I
Housing Protection
IP 20 (switch cabinet, standard rail)
Supply Voltage U V
19.2V
24V
Residual Ripple ➊ Power Consumption (no load)
Supply Voltage Connection
UV Pluggable strip terminal
Cable Cross Section
2.5 mm 2
Load Capacity of Terminals (C 1 ...4,D 1 ...4)
2.5 A
Operating Data
28.8V
Safety Category
5V SS
Tested to
pr EN 50100 Part 1 and 2
Ambient Operating Temp.
0°C
+55°C
0.3A (6W)
Type 4
Storage Temperature
–25°C
+75°C
Start key
Relative Humidity (non condensing)
15%
95%
T 13,T 14
NO contact
Vibration Specification
5g,10 ...55Hz as per IEC 68-2-29
Command Unit Act. Time Period
30 ms
Shock Resistance
10g,16ms as per IEC 68-2-29
Approximate Dimensions (W x H x D)
152 x 73 x 118 mm 3
Inputs Command Unit
➊ Maximum voltage limits must not be exceeded, minimum levels must be achieved. ➋ Response time without attenuation of switching elements (relays), e.g. by means of interference suppressors. ➌ Contact gold plating vaporizes when currents >100mA switched. Minimum switched current becomes 10mA.
2-58
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces Safety Relay Product Selection Voltage
Reset
24V DC
Manual/ Automatic
Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking
PSDI
Muting
Relay Outputs
no
no
no
no
2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Aux. 4 amp
Catalogue Number
440L-M8200
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Approximate Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 152 (5.98)
118 (4.65)
70 (2.76) 35 (1.38)
Typical Wiring Diagrams Command Without start/ Unit N.O. “Reset” restart Monitoring N.C. interlock of contactors Without N.O. input contact contactor input monitoring input 2)
24V DC 0V 1)
or
A 1+
A 2-
PE
T0
PE
T 13
T 14
X 12
T21
T 22
2)
X 21
X 22
1.3
2.3
3.1
N.O. N.O. N.C. Contacts
Auto
Power Input
Off On Monitor Ext. Contactors Outputs Off
Reset
Sender
Receiver
24V DC 0V D1
X 11
0V
24V DC 0V
C1
or
24V DC 0V PE
24V DC 0V
C2
D2
24V DC 0V PE
24V DC 0V
T3
T4
OSSD OSSD 1 2
AOPD type 4
AOPD type 4
Sender
Receiver
C3
D3
24V DC 0V PE
C4
D4
1.4
2.4
N.O. output
3.2
N.C. contact input N.O. output
1) Potential equalization, if power pack -0V not connected with (VDE 0160) 2) Wire jumper
The jumpers X11/X12 for (disabling of) restart inhibit and X21/X22 for (disabling of) contactor monitoring must not be routed externally (only in isolated plastic-sheathed cables).
2-59
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces Control Unit areas and entry/exit systems. Furthermore, it assumes responsibility for control functions such as the muting of palletizer entry/exit systems or press brakes, as well as blanking and other control functions on presses (e.g. break operation). Typical areas of application are:
Description The 440L-M8100 Programmable Safety Interface Light Curtain Control Unit is a control unit for active opto-electronic protective devices (AOPD), and is designed as a self-monitoring device in accordance with EN 50100. It is intended for industrial applications and is distinguished by: • • • •
High availability No wearing parts Compact construction Universal applicability
Note: This product is only for use with POC safety light curtains. It can not be used with SafeShield, PAC or AAC devices.
Features • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Wear-free operation Secure, short-circuit-protected semi-conductor outputs Line monitoring of outputs Modem microprocessor technology Short response time LCD display for programming function indication and diagnostic messages Connection for two pairs of AOPD type 4 sensors or up to four pairs of AOPD type 2 sensors (also mixed operation) Automatic testing of AOPD type 2 sensors User-programmable combinations of defined functions Pre-programmed standard functions: Guard only, single-break, double-break Programming password Contactor monitoring and restart interlock may be selected Fixed/floating blanking for AOPD type 4 (SafeShield Safety Light Curtain) Muting function with connection for up to 4 muting sensors Outputs for indicators of all special functions RS 485 data interface for sensor controls and diagnostics Connection for operating mode selector switch Break operation with up to 8 breaks
Application Possibilities and Conditions Areas of Application The 440L-M8100 with an AOPD is used as a control unit in protective applications for point-of-operation guarding, hazardous
2-60
• Presses in the metal-working, plastics, leather and stone industries (functions: guarding, break operation, blanking, etc.) • Press Brakes (functions: guarding, blanking, muting before bottom dead centre, etc.) • Palletizer or entry/exit applications (functions: guarding, muting, etc.) Regulations for Use The 440L-M8100 is designed to be installed in the machine's control cabinet (IP 20). If it is used outside the control cabinet a suitable housing fitted with a DIN rail profile should be used, e.g. an electrical enclosure (IP 54). The same applies to applications which take place outside closed rooms (ambient temperature 0°C - 50°C (32°F - 122°F)). Operations such as programming or connecting the unit, i.e. all activities on the 440L-M8100 which could affect the safe operation of the unit, should only be carried out by qualified personnel.
System Structure Overview of System The 440L-M8100 has a standard housing with two 33-pin plug-in terminal strips. A two-line LCD display and set of control keys are built into the front panel for operation and programming. Three integral LED indicators display the 440L-M8100’s output conditions: green LED illuminate
outputs active
red LED illuminate
outputs inactive
yellow LED illuminate
malfunction
The yellow LED indicates an operational malfunction of the system or the peripheral equipment.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces Control Unit Connecting and Operating Elements The LCD display contains two lines, each capable of displaying 20 characters. In addition to the programming menus, all the system’s operational states are displayed. In the event of operational malfunctions or malfunctions of the peripheral equipment, appropriate diagnostic messages are given.
1 pair of type 4 sensors or 2 pair of type 2 sensors
1 pair of type 4 sensors or 2 pair of type 2 sensor
1 pair of type 4 sensors or 2 pair of type 2 sensors
The control keyboard is used in conjunction with the LCD display for programming and diagnostics on the 440L-M8100. Details on programming may be found in the operating instructions. Thanks to the plug-in connection terminals, the wiring can be prepared without the 440L-M8100, thus enabling any exchange to be carried out in the shortest possible time, without any need to rewire the connecting leads.
E1
E2
440L-M8100
E2
E1
440L-M8100
Function and Operation Operating Principle The 440L-M8100 assumes responsibility for control functions as an operational link between the machine control system and the control function from the AOPD, and switches the required control elements (contactors) of the machine control system via dualchannel semi-conductor outputs. The signals arriving from the 440L-M8100 and the peripheral equipment are further electronically processed by dual channel microprocessor electronics. Type 2 sensors (testable) and/or Type 4 sensors (self-monitoring) may be operated with the 440L-M8100. The internal control system can distinguish between the different categories. Type 2 sensors are automatically cyclically tested by the 440L-M8100 every 60 minutes. The 440L-M8100 is designed for the connection of two pairs of AOPD type 4 sensors or up to four pairs of AOPD type 2 sensors. (1 pair = 1 emitter and 1 receiver.) “Mixed” operation of sensor type 4 and type 2 AOPDs can also be configured.
E1
440L-M8100
E2
E1
E2
A 440L-M8100
Various types of connection to the 440L-M8100
Type 2 sensors are always to be used in pairs, i.e. 2 pairs of type 2 or 4 pairs of type 2 are used. The automatic testing of type 2 sensors increases the protective level of the whole protective system (no external measures needed). Instead of a second AOPD type 4 sensor, an extra 440L-M8100 (type 4) can also be connected, in order to “daisy chain” 440L-M8100s.
2-61
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces Control Unit Operating Modes
External Mode Select
Setting Operating Modes All set up 440L-M8100 operating modes can be called up using a corresponding BCD switch. A bridge connection or direct selection using the “run modes” program is possible for a fixed operating mode. Standard operating modes, such as guard only, single-break, double-break are provided preprogrammed, i.e. the interface can be operated without user programming. Input
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
1
guard only operation
0
1
0
single-break
1
0
0
double-break
1
1
0
user program 1
1
0
1
user program 2
0
1
1
user program 3
(1
1
1
not used)
keyboard mode (programming)
0
input not connected with ↓ open
1
input connected with ↓
Furthermore, 3 positions of the selector switch can be devoted to user-definable application programs. Restart Interlock/Indicator Lights The function “with/without restart interlock” can be set directly on terminals 52, 53 and 54. This can be done using either jumpers or external change over contacts, which makes it possible to switch over the restart interlock (RI) without programming, e.g. on presses: • In the dangerous downward motion with RI • In the non dangerous upward motion without RI For direct connection to indicator lights showing the following functions 24 DC outputs are available on terminals 57 to 64:
Connection terminals for operating mode selector switch, with assignment
“Reset button required” “Muting”
Guard only operation
*)
Single-break
*)
Double-break
*)
Multi-break (3-... 8 breaks)
*)
Blanking
*)
Muting
*)
Reduced Resolution
*)
Starting sequence for break operation
*)
Sensor test with/without Single stroke restart
Max. output current 0.4A each (minimum current 0.02A for “muting” and “blanking”).
Installation Mechanical Mounting, Ambient Conditions The 440L-M8100 is mounted on a DIN rail, or if necessary in a suitable external housing (snap-on mounting). The permissible ambient temperature range is 0°C - 50°C (32°F - 122°F) (IP 54).
*)
Contactor monitoring: with/without Reset button: latched/unlatched *) Can be programmed or combined into user programs 1, 2 and 3
Operating modes which may be programmed via the 440L-M8100 menu
“Reduced Resolution/Blanking” and “Dirt build-up” (AOPD)
Electrical Installation The 440L-M8100 operates with 24V DC ± 20% and has a current consumption of 0.5A (without load). Connection is potential-free via two 33-pin plug-in terminal strips. This enables the wiring to be carried out before the 440L-M8100 is installed. The terminals are designed for a maximum wire cross-section of: 1 x 2.5 mm2 with sleeve, or 1 x 4 mm2 solid.
2-62
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces Control Unit The extent of wiring depends on the particular application. A1 and A2 muting muting muting muting -
B1 and B2 - (open) muting single-stroke restart “latched restart” single-stroke restart “unlatched restart” single-stroke restart “latched restart” single-stroke restart “unlatched restart”
External Indicators Blanking/Reduced Resolution Muting If “Blanking/Reduced Resolution” is used, the corresponding indicators must be connected. These safety related indicators are monitored via the 440L-M8100 (output current 0.02...0.4A). The indicators “Restart Required” and “Weak Signal” are optional (output current 0...0.4A). In case of using this NPN indicator outputs on a PLC, a resistor (i.e. 1 kΩ/1 W) has to be connected between terminal 57-58 and/or 63-64 for potential equalization. The output signal is provided on terminal 58 and/or 64 (NPN function). The 0V-potential of both power supplies 440L-M8100 and PLC must be linked.
Functions dependent on program settings. Type-2 Sensors When type 2 sensors are used, two pairs are to be connected for each 440L-M8100 input circuit. They are tested automatically. The test command to the sensor (terminals 14/16/26/28) can be selected by simple connection to the adjacent terminals (terminals 15/17/27/29) (test with 0V potential or plus potential). The single-channel switching outputs of the type 2 receivers are connected to terminals 9 and 10 (pairs 1 and 2) and/or to terminals 21 and 22 (pairs 3 and 4).
2-63
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces Control Unit Specifications
440L-M8100 Blanking Modes 1.
Floating Blanking A. 14mm System: Min. = Gap - 0.2" - 0.9" Resolution Max. = Gap - 4.7" - 5.3" Resolution These are in 0.3" Increments B. 30mm System: Min. = Gap - 0 5" - 1.7" Resolution Max. = Gap - 9.4" - 10.6" Resolution These are in 0.6" Increments
Note: You may not use floating blanking with PSDI mode (e.g.: single break mode). 2.
24V DC 20% max. 5VSS
Current Consumption
approx. 12W (without load)
Inputs Run modes Data interface
For 2 ESPD type 4, 4 ESPD type 2 fixed/ programmable, called up via selector or fixed setting RS 485 for ESPD sensor failure control and diagnostics, Twisted pair required for cable length>10m
Input currents
Contactor monitoring: dynamic 100mA for T<1ms, static 10mA. Test inputs: dynamic 100mA for T<1ms, static 10mA
Reduced Resolution A. 14mm System Only Min. = 0.2" Gap - 0.9" RESOLUTION Max. = 1.1" Gap - 1.8" RESOLUTION These are in 0.3" INCREMENTS
3.
Supply voltage Ripple
Outputs Switching output
Fixed Blanking A. 14mm and 30mm: Can blank all beams but beam #1
Note: You may blank more than one area.
ATTENTION: The safety distance must be recalculated and light curtains must be remounted when floating blanking, reduced resolution or fixed blanking is activated.
2 x PNP, 0.5A, overload protection
Response time
5ms
Lamp driver
For command devices and special functions, max. 0.4A per output
Diagnostics
Via display for RS 485 interface
Requirement
In accordance with EN 50100 type 4
Enclosure rating
IP 20
Connection terminals
Plug-in type
Wire cross-section, max.
2.5mm2 with end sleeve/4mm2 solid
Ambient operating temp.
0 to 50°C
Storage temperature
-25°C to +70°C
Housing WxHxD
Standard housing for top hat rail (snapon mounting) 200 x 123 x 118mm3
Fitting type
Top hat rail 35 x 15mm2
Programmable InterfaceOptional Input Voltage
24V DC
2-64
Reset
Manual/ Automatic
Floating Blanking
Fixed Blanking
PSDI
Muting
Outputs
Catalogue Number
yes
yes
yes
yes
2 PNP OSSD
440L-M8100
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces Control Unit Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 200 (7.87)
118 (4.65)
4.5 (0.18)
123 (4.84)
34.5 (l.36)
Typical Wiring Diagram
PE
PE
Outputs Power Comm 1 2 Receiver 1
Input 24V DC
K2
No Conn. No Conn,
K1
PE
K2
24V max 0.5A
K1
24V max 0.5A
AOPD Sender
White Green Yellow Gray Blue Brown Black White Green Blue Brown
AOPD Receiver
Black
Supply voltage 24V DC ±20%
Safety Stop Circuit
PE
OutPE puts 1 2 Power Power Test 1 Test 2 Power Test 3 Test 4 1 2 Sender 1 Receiver 2 Sender 2 Output Channels
Auxiliary Inputs
Indicators
A1
A2
B1
B2
Cycle Relay System Contact Monitor Test
External Mode Select
Restart Mode
Restart Restart Muting Switch Required Active
Reduced Reso- Weak lution Signal
Receiver 1 or 2 Output Status
Ext Int
Blanking Lamp (required) (24V DC, 0.02-0.4A)
Muting Lamp (required) (24V DC, 0.02-0.4A)
Restart Lamp (optional) (24V DC, 0.4A max.)
Restart
Ext = Automatic Reset Int = Manual Reset
Hard wired for user defined mode 1, leave open for keyboard mode.
Relay Monitor
(or N.C. contact)
Muting switches or sensors
K1 K2
2-65
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner Overview Principles of Operation Measurement range Warning field (example) Maximum protective field
Configuration of the SafeZone’s Warning and Safety Fields are accomplished through Allen-Bradley’s SCD (Safety Configuration and Diagnostic) Windows-based software. Warning and Safety zones are easily configured through the use of the PCs mouse. Simply click and drag points along the perimeter of the particular zone to shape the contour of the perimeter.
Areas of Protection The SafeZone is suitable for personnel protection applications on:
Protective field (example) 6m 7.5m
• • • •
Stationary machinery Robot assembly cells Hazard zones—overhead motion Mobile transport vehicles
Stationary Application 60°
Test area (reference target)
The SafeZone safety laser scanner has been designed for industrial use. Its task is to detect access of persons to dangerous areas and stop the hazardous movement of a machine in this area. A signal is triggered as soon as a person or object enters the monitored area: • If a person or object is present within the warning field the SafeZone safety laser scanner switches a relay contact at the corresponding signal output. This signal can be used for acoustic and optical warnings. Warnings are to indicate that the hazardous area is to be left before the protective field is activated, and the SafeZone safety laser scanner OSSDs issue a stop signal that would trigger a machine stop. • If a person or object is present within the protective field the SafeZone safety laser scanner switches two independent relay contacts. This signal must lead to an immediate switching off of the dangerous machine movement.
2-66
The SafeZone safety laser scanner’s versatile software allows configuration of irregular shaped warning and safety zones.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner Overview Automatic Guided Vehicles (AGVs)
The SafeZone safety laser scanner is designed to detect fixed objects (walls, columns, etc.) as well as moving objects (people, AGVs, etc.). The SafeZone is typically mounted on the front of a mobile vehicle—in each direction of travel. Any object of sufficient resolution is detected.
The SafeZone can be configured with both an outer warning field and an inner safety field. The outer warning field has a separate nonsafety relay output which can connect to an alarm, indicating when the warning field has been broken. Penetration of the safety field causes the dual safety relay outputs of the SafeZone to change state and stop the vehicle’s movement. It is necessary to properly mount the SafeZone and then determine the size of the safety field based on a safety distance formula. This information is detailed in the SafeZone Installation Instruction manual.
2-67
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner SafeZone Specifications Standards
IEC61496
Safety Category
Type 3 ESPE acc. to EN 61496-1
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus,
Laser Protection Class
IEC 60825 Laser Class 1 (eye safe)
Measurement & Toler. Range 0 to 7.5m (0 to 24.6ft) Range for a Safe Detection of Objects the “Nominal Leg”
0 to 6m (0 to 19.6ft) (includes safety supplement)
Protective Field Res. Time
280ms
Maximum Angle
300°
Wavelength
905nm
Description
Pulse Frequency
5.76KHz + 5%
The SafeZone Safety Laser Scanner is an optoelectronic device that uses the diffuse reflection of emitted infrared light to determine the intrusion of a person or object within a defined area. A rotating deflection unit periodically emits Class 1 infrared laser light pulses over a 300° angular range to create a detection zone which is two dimensional. The reflected light is processed by the SafeZone, which will send a stop signal by switching the state of its safety relay outputs, if it is determined that a person or object is within the predefined detection zone.
Scanning Frequency
8Hz + 5%
Two zones can be created within the maximum scanning range of the SafeZone through the use of the SafeZone’s Windows based software. The “Safety Zone” is configurable for a 6m (19.7ft) radius and the “Warning Zone” up to a 7.5m (24.6ft) radius.
Laser Beam Divergence
15 mrad (0.86°)
Focal Length
30mm (1.18in)
Lens Diameter
30mm (1.18in)
The SafeZone can be used in stationary applications for horizontal detection in a defined protection zone, in vertical applications for whole body access detection, and on mobile safeguarding applications—AGVs (Automated Guided Vehicles). The maximum value of the machine’s stopping time plus the SafeZone’s response time must be calculated so that no person can gain access to a hazard point before the dangerous motion has ceased.
Scanning Angle
300°
Resolution
70mm (2.8in) at 6m (19.6ft)
Point Resolution
0.5°
Vibration
per IEC 2-6, frequency range 10-55Hz, amplitude: 0.35mm
Shock
per IEC 2-29, acceleration 10g, pulse duration: 16ms
Optics (Co-axial Transmitter and Receiver Optics)
Power Supply Operating Voltage
24V DC ± 25% (via a safety insulating transformer acc. to IEC 742)
Switch on Current
2A for 100ms
Power Consumption
24W total
Housing and Environmental Resistance Material
Aluminium
Enclosure Rating
IP 65
Weight
3.0kg
Operating Temperature
0°C ... 50°C (32°F to 122°F)
Storage Temperature
-20°C ... 70°C (-4°F to 158°F)
Features
Interfaces
• • • •
Data Interfaces to Computer
RS 232: 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
Signal Outputs for Warning Field, OSSD 1, OSSD 2
Potential-free relay outputs, max. 2A, max. 30V, purely resistive load, number of operations; 2 million
300° scanning angle Two programmable zones (Safety/Warning) Safety relay outputs Robust IP65 housing
2-68
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner SafeZone Product Selection 1. Safety Laser Scanner Catalogue Number
Description
442L-SSFZN
SafeZone Safety Laser Scanner, 24V DC
2. Cordsets Catalogue Number
442L-SCPWR
Description
Catalogue Number
Power & Outputs 5m (16.3ft)
442L-SCCFG
Description
Communication Cable for Configuration of Zones 5m (16.3ft)
View of the Soldered Side of the 8-Pin Socket—Connects to SafeZone. Opposite End Individual Leads Pre-stripped
Pin # 1
Signal
Explanation
Marking +
Colour
24V
24V DC supply
GND24
Ground
OSSD 2.1
Relay contact for protective field 2.1
S2
OSSD 2.2
Relay contact for protective field 2.2
S2
OSSD 1.1
Relay contact for protective field 1.1
S1
OSSD 1.2
Relay contact for protective field 1.2
S1
7
Warning field 1.1
Relay contact for warning field 1.1
A
Red
8
Warning field 1.2
Relay contact for warning field 1.2
A
Pink
FE
Functional Ground (Shield)
FE
Thick Black
2 3 4 5 6
-
Brown Blue White Grey Black Green
Pin # A C E G J L M
Signal
Explanation
View of the Soldered Side of the 14-Pin Socket Configuration Cable—Connects to SafeZone. Opposite End 9-Pin D-Sub Connector
Direction
Level
GND
Ground, RS 232
---
---
RTS
RS 232: Ready to send
Output
24V
CTS
RS 232: Clear to send Input
24V
TxD
RS 232: Transmit data
Output
24V
RxD
RS 232: Receive data
Input
24V
---
No connection
---
---
RES
Reset (active LOW)
Input
24V
No connection
---
---
N through U
Note: The SafeZone Safety Laser Scanner is a Type 3 device with two N.O. relay outputs. In order to attain a Category 3 system, the SafeZone must be connected through a safety relay module which monitors both FSDs.
2-69
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner SafeZone Product Selection (continued) 3. Safety Relays—Optional Relay
Safety Outputs
Input
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Type
Catalogue Number
Reset
440R-N23114
24V AC/DC Dual Channel (MSR126.1T)
115V AC
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23112
230V AC 2 N.O.
None
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
—
24V AC/DC
440R-N23120 Monitoring Manual
440R-N23119
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23133
115V AC 230V AC
MSR 126
24V AC/DC 1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain or Laser Scanner
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
115V AC
230V AC
MSR 127RP
440R-N23118
440R-C23139
24V AC/DC 1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or Safety Mat or Light Curtain or Laser Scanner
3 N.O.
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
440R-N23113
Automatic/Manual or Monitored Manual
—
115V AC
230V AC
440R-C23137
440R-C23136
MSR 131RTP
4. AccessoriesOptional Products
Catalogue Number
Power supply: Input85...265V AC Output24V DC, 3 Amps
1794-PS3
5. Typical Wiring Diagrams Wiring SafeZone Outputs to a Safety Relay Module 24V DC
Reset
OSSD 1.1 OSSD 2.1
A1 SafeZone Safety Laser Scanner
Inputs
Inputs
OSSD 2.2
MC 13 23 K1
OSSD 1.1
K2
K1
K2
*
M
Suppression diode
GND * Shi ld
2-70
*
OSSD 1.2
MC 14 24
OSSD 2.2 OSSD 1.2
OSSD 2.1
L1 L2 L3
Safety Monitoring Relay
A2
SafeZone OSSDs directly to FSDs (contactors)—Category 1 System
lk
K1
K2
0V
Suppression diode K1 and K2 relays must have positively-driven contacts
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner SafeZone Product Selection 5. Typical Wiring Diagrams (continued) SafeZone Warning Field Output 30V max
L
Warning field 1
Warning field 2
0V
N
Dimensions—mm (inches) 56.5 (2.22)
176 (6.9)
178 (7.0) Name Plate Label
158 (6.22)
137.5 (5.41) 15 (0.59) 24V DC Interface Signal 3.15 AT fuse
19 (0.74)
15.5 (0.61)
Warning Safety DIagnostics
11 (0.43) Male Plug I4 Pin
Male Plug 8 Pin
10 (0.39)
4mm Hex Socket Chassis Ground 1mm2 to 2.5mm2
X
Mounting Holes
Protective Cap
Protective Cap Female Cable Connector 8 Pin
Indication Lamps
green red yellow yellow
115 (4.52)
90 (3.54) min bend radius
~ 60 (2.36) 120 (4.72) min bend radius
Female Cable Connector 14 Pin
Min 175 (6.88) distance
115 (4.52)
176 (6.9)
Threaded M4 x 10 4 places
86 (3.38)
Mounting Surface 144 (5.66)
2-71
Presence Sensing Safety Devices Safety Laser Scanner Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SafeZone™ Multizone Safety Laser Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner Overview Principles of Operation
Measurement Range
The SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner operates on the principle of the time of flight of light. Pulses of infrared light are reflected off of a rotating mirror and are emitted over a 190° arc. The diffuse reflection of light is received from an intrusion in the preconfigured sensing field and processed to determine the location of and distance from the SafeZone multizone scanner.
Receiver
Maximum Protective Field Protective Field (example) Safety Field 190˚
5m
Up to 49m Subject to Object Reflectivity
The SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner is well suited to industrial applications and can be used in either vertical or horizontal applications to detect the intrusion of personnel or objects into the configured sensing field(s). This detection can result in an audible alarm or warning light being activated to warn of the intrusion or if the intrusion is in the safety field, the hazardous motion of machinery can be stopped.
Sender
Exit
Sender Path Receiver Path At the time of the emission of the infrared laser light, an electronic stop watch begins. The reflected light is then seen by the SafeZone multizone scanner and processed to determine the distance of the object from the scanner. Emitted Pulse of IR Laser Light
Start
Stop
Configuration of the SafeZone multizone’s warning and safety fields are accomplished using the SCD (Safety Configuration and Diagnostic) software which is supplied with each scanner. This Windows-based software allows easy configuration of irregularly shaped fields by simply clicking and dragging points along the perimeter of the particular zone to shape the contour of the perimeter of the warning or safety field.
2
Warning Field (example)
Stationary Horizontal Guarding—Single Field Set It is possible to configure a warning field and a safety field in front of machinery or equipment to protect personnel from accessing the area where hazardous motion takes place. The SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner is required to be mounted at a particular height from the floor. Irregular shapes are easily configured using the Windows-based, SCD software.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner Overview Stationary Vertical Guarding It is possible to mount the SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner to create a vertical safety field which provides access detection to a hazardous area. It is necessary to configure “contour as a reference” which monitors specific areas at the perimeter of the safety field. Contour as a reference must be configured for vertical applications as this configured feature prevents the manipulation of the scanner.
Stationary Horizontal Guarding—Two Safety Zones The SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner can be configured with two field sets, each set may consist of a warning zone and a safety zone. If the application warrants, it may only be necessary to configure the safety zone.
Automatic Guided Vehicles (AGVs) The SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner is designed to detect fixed objects (walls, columns) as well as moving objects (people, AGVs ). The SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner is typically mounted on the front of a mobile vehicle or for AGVs capable of bi-directional travel, in each direction of travel. Any object in the path of the moving vehicle, of sufficient resolution, is detected. When an object or person is detected in the configured warning field, a signal can be used to decrease the speed of the AGV. Intrusion into the safety field will send a signal to the AGV to stop. It is also possible to configure a predetermined time delay where the SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner will monitor the safety field. If the safety field becomes clear, the SafeZone’s OSSDs will change to a green state and allow the AGV to continue traveling.
Stationary Vertical Guarding—Two Safety Zones The SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner can be mounted to create one or two vertical detection areas in the same plane. Contour as a reference should be configured to prevent manipulation of the scanner. A static control input switches between the two configured fields
3
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner SafeZone Multizone Specifications
Description The Allen Bradley GuardMaster SafeZone multizone safety laser scanner is a Type 3 opto electronic device which uses the diffuse reflection of emitted infrared laser light to determine the intrusion of a person or object within a defined area. A rotating deflection mirror periodically emits Class 1 (eye safe) infrared laser pulses over a 190° angular area to create a two dimensional detection field. The reflected light is processed by the SafeZone multizone, which sends a stop signal by switching the state of its OSSDs, if it is determined that an object is within the preconfigured sensing field(s). The SafeZone multizone laser scanner is a versatile, rugged, optoelectronic device in an IP65 housing and is ideally suited for a wide range of industrial applications. Two zone sets (warning and safety) can be configured within the maximum scanning range of the device. The SCD windows-based software, supplied with each scanner, makes programming the SafeZone multizone simple and carefree. A configuration wizard is available to guide the programmer through simple or complex system configurations.
Features • • • • •
4
90° scanning angle Two pair of configurable field sets 7 segment diagnostic display Configurable resolutions 30, 40, 50, 70 and 150mm Integrated EDM
Standards
IEC IEC61496
Approvals
CE marked, TUV, cULus, Type 3 AOPDDR per IEC61496, SIL 2 per IEC61508
Response Time
60ms or 120ms
Resolutions
30mm (1.18in), 40mm (1.57in), 50mm (1.96in), 70mm (2.75in), 150mm (5.90in)
Safety Field Range
5m (16.4ft)
Warning Field
49 meters, dependant upon an objects reflectivity (20% reflectivity is 20 meter range)
Laser Protection Class
Class 1, (eye safe) IEC60825.1(2001) 21CFR 1040.10 & 1040.11
Laser Diode Wavelength
905nm
Angular Resolution
0.50° to 0.25°
Pulse Duration
3.1ns
Laser Beam Divergence
2.5 mrad (0.143°)
Beam Diameter at 5m
27mm (1.06in)
Maximum Scanning Angle
190°
Reflectivity
1.8%
Outputs
2 PNP, OSSDs, 500mA short circuit protected
Power Up Time
9 to 20 seconds
Power Consumption with Max Output Load
55 W
Operating Voltage ➊
24V DC +/- 20%
Switch on Current
2 Amps
Operating Temperature
-10°C to 50°C (+14°F to +122°F)
Storage Temperature
-25°C to 70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Shock Resistance
Single shock 15g, 11ms per EN 60068-2-27 Continuous shock 10g, 16ms per IEC 61496
Vibration Resistance
Frequency 10-150Hz, Amplitude 0.35mm or 5g per IEC61496
Average Weight
3.3 kg (7.28lb)
Housing Material
Die cast aluminum
Window Material
Polycarbonate
Environmental Rating
IP65
➊ The power supply must be capable of buffering brief voltage interruptions of 20ms as specified in EN60204.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner SafeZone Multizone Product Selection 1. Safety Laser Scanner Description
Catalog Number
Scan Head and I/O Module
442L-SFZNMZ
442L-CSFZNMZ-10
Prewired 13 Conductor Cable with Memory Module
442L-CSFZNMZ-20
Programming RS232 Cable
442L-ACRS232
Product Selection (continued) 2. Safety Relays—Optional Relay
Input
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Type
Reset
440R-N23114
24V AC/DC Dual Channel (MSR126.1T)
115V AC
Automatic/Manual
None
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
24V AC/DC
—
440R-N23120 Monitoring Manual
440R-N23119
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23133
MSR211P
Monitored Man. or Auto./Man.
440R-H23177
115V AC 230V AC
MSR 126
24V AC/DC 1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain or Laser Scanner
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
115V AC
230V AC
MSR 127RP
Two Inputs 1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or Light Curtain
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
24V DC
440R-N23113 440R-N23112
230V AC 2 N.O.
Catalogue Number
440R-N23118
MSR 211P
5
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner SafeZone Multizone 3. Accessories⎯Optional Description
Catalog Number
Mounting Kit 1: Mounting bracket for direct mounting at the rear on wall or machine. No adjustment facility
442L-AMBSFZNMZ1
Mounting Kit 2: Bracket only in conjunction with mounting kit 1. Mounting at the rear on wall or machine. Longitudinal and cross-wise adjustment possible
442L-AMBSFZNMZ2
Mounting Kit 3: Bracket only in conjunction with mounting kit 1 and 2. Mounting at the rear or below on wall, floor or machine. Longitudinal and cross-wise adjustment possible
442L-AMBSFZNMZ3
3.0 Amp power supply 1606-XLP72E USB to serial port adaptor cable 100 meter cable spool 13 conductor
9000USBS 442L-C13GD-S100
Replacement window kit 442L-SFZNMZW Scan head 442L-SFZNMZ-SM I/O module 442L-SFZNMZ-FM Unwired memory module 442L-SFZNMZ-MEM
6
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner SafeZone Multizone 4. Typical Wiring Diagrams
442L-SFZNMZ
S11 S12 S52
A1
13
23
33
41
14
24
34
42
MSR127T 440R-N23132 S21 S22
S34
A2
5. Bracket Assembly Bracket 3
46. 5 (1 .83 31. 5 (1 ) . 2 4 16. 5 (0 ) .64 )
193.2 (7 .6) 175 (6.8 8) 120 (4.7 2) 87.5 (3.4
4)
22.5 (0.8
8)
175 (6.8 8) 120 (4.7 2)
193.2 (7
.6)
67 (2.6 3) 46 (1.8 1)
9 (0.35) Dia.
9 (0.35) Dia.
Bracket 2
60 (2. 7 (0 36) .27 )
106.1 (4.17) 7 (0.27) 183 (7.20)
51.8 (2.03) 102 (4.01)
30 (1.18)
9 (0.35) Dia.
Bracket 1
Bracket shown assembled
7
155 (6.1)
77.5 (3.05)
58.25 (2.29)
65.17 (2.57) 159.15 (6.27)
27.83 (1.1)
M8 x 9 4 Places
13.5 (0.53)
78.52 (3.09) 53.23 (2.1)
136.8 (5.39)
M6 x 8 4 Places
120 (4.72)
8 31.65 (1.25)
154.94 (6.1) 92.53 (3.64)
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Laser Scanner
SafeZone Multizone
Dimensions—mm (inches)
210.6 (8.29) 185 (7.28)
34.85 54.02 (2.13) (1.37)
62.68 (2.47)
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats Overview Features • EC type certification • Third party certification to EN 1760-1, EN954-1 (ISO 13849-1) category 3 and IEC/EN 60204-1, AS 4024.5, ANSI B11.19, ANSI RIA R15.06 • Overall sensitivity including uniting strip • Control units monitor the status of each mat individually • Completely fail-safe system with cross monitored control unit • Rugged construction will take the pressure of 4500psi • Vinyl construction resistant to most oils • Sealed to IP67 • 5-year warranty on mats Chemical Resistance of Sensor Mat Vinyl Covering
Description MatGuard consists of a number of interconnecting pressure sensitive safety mats and a monitoring control unit which provide a system for area detection. The mat has been designed from the “ground up” to meet the arduous conditions found on the factory floor, and uses tried and trusted components and techniques throughout. The mats are available in a wide range of standard sizes to meet most requirements. Special sizes and shapes can be supplied.Each mat has two conductive plates that are held apart by non conductive compressible separators. Each 4 wire mat, operating on only 24V DC is pre-wired, and connected in series with any other mats forming a complete floor level guarding system for the hazardous areas. The circuit through the mat is monitored by the MatGuard Control Unit, which, when the area is clear provides a signal to the machine control circuit. When a mat is stepped on, the conductive plates touch and the resistance in the circuit falls to zero. This is monitored by the Control Unit, which shuts the machine down. The unique moulding process ensures the long life and reliability of the mat. Being completely sealed (IP67), water, liquids and coolants present no problem. In addition the tough vinyl will resist bleaches, acids, salts and all but the most aggressive of industrial chemicals. A range of control units is available including the Mat Manager which monitors the status of each mat or area of mats individually. This enables quick fault detection/repair and identification of actuated area.
Applications Types
2-72
Substance
Resistance of Mat Covering
Water
Excellent
Ethyl Alcohol
Excellent
Sodium Chloride
Excellent
Bleach
Excellent
Hydrochloric Acid
Fair to Excellent
Sulphuric Acid
Fair to Excellent
Nitric Acid
Fair to Excellent
Acetic Acid
Fair
Petrol (Gasoline)
Fair
Trichlorethylene
Fair to Poor
Benzene
Poor
Acetone
Poor
In general the covering has excellent resistance to acids, alkalis and salts. Hot acids and alkalis, as well as concentrated and organic acids, have a deleterious effect on prolonged exposure. The covering has fair resistance to aliphatic solvents, fair to poor resistance to aromatic and chlorinated solvents and poor resistance to ketones and most esters. Note: Combinations of chemicals can have unpredictable effects. Testing is recommended in such cases. Small pieces of the vinyl material are available if testing is required.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats Overview Anatomy of a Mat System Different ribbed pattern on reverse side (as illustrated) The controller detects a presence on the mat, a short circuit, or an open circuit. Under each of these conditions, the safety output relays turn off. When interfaced properly, the machine or hazardous motion will receive a stop signal, and an auxiliary output relay turns ON.
Wire location STD. 4.5m
Wire location Checker pattern (side 1) (for maximum anti-slip)
Straight rib pattern (side 2) (for ease of cleaning in 'hygiene' applications)
Active uniting trim maintains active sensing area at mat junctions
Heavy Duty Ribbed Vinyl Upper Conductive Plate
Mat at rest
Non conductive Compressible Separator Lower Conductive Plate Heavy Duty Ribbed Vinyl Mat Activated
When the mat is activated the non conductive compressible separators (shown red) compress into their recess allowing the two plates to make contact giving all over sensitivity.
Flexible Sealing Bead
Perimeter trim secures mats to floor Cable channel underneath trim
2-73
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats Overview Standards The MatGuard mat system has been designed to conform with the latest European Standard EN 1760-1 “Safety of machinery— Pressure sensitive devices; mats and floors.” This standard contains requirements for all aspects of design. Some of the most important points are as follows: (From 4.2.2) Where an effective sensing area is built up from more than one sensor (mat) it shall have no dead zone. The standard gives details of the size, force and positioning of test pieces for testing the mat sensitivity. (From 4.5.1) A single sensor (mat) shall still perform its function after one million actuations by a mass of 75kg. (From 4.7) When the actuating force is applied the output signal switching device(s) shall change from an ON state to an OFF state. It shall remain in the OFF state for at least as long as the actuating force is applied. (From 4.7.1) Device with reset – b) After the actuating force has been removed, the output signal switching device(s) shall only change to the ON state after the application of a reset signal. (From 4.7.2) Device without reset—For a pressure sensitive mat without reset the output signal switching device(s) shall change to an ON state at power ON and after the actuating force has been removed. (From 4.15) The pressure sensitive mats shall meet the requirements of the category for which they are specified... Note: The MatGuard mat system features an “active” mat and a dual channel monitoring control unit. This means that a single electrical fault in the mat, wiring or control unit will be detected and the control unit will go to a safe (OFF) condition.
(From informative annex B.1.1) The top (mat) surface should be of a material which will withstand the operating duty.....The top surface should not present a risk through becoming slippery due to wear or the effects of liquids.... (From informative annex B.1.7) In some situations, heavy loads (such as fork lift trucks) can be applied to the sensor (mat)..... If this is required the user should identify the need to the mat manufacturer. Note: The standard MatGuard mat can be successfully used with fork lift trucks. The MatGuard Mat System should be installed in accordance with the requirements of EN 999, “The positioning of protective equipment in respect of approach speeds of parts of the human body.”
2-74
The MatGuard Safety Mat system is also designed to meet the U.S. standards ANSI/RIA R15.06-1999 Safety Requirements for Industrial Robots and Robot Systems and ANSI B11.19 Performance Criteria for Safeguarding. These two U.S. standards have many similar requirements and provide performance criteria for design, installation and use. Excerpts from these standards include: From RIA R15.06 (From 11.7) Safety mat systems shall be designed, constructed and applied such that any single component failure shall not prevent the stopping action of the robot. (From 5.3.4) Safety mats shall have a minimum object sensitivity which detects 30 kg (66lb,) weight of an 80mm (3.125in) diameter circular disk anywhere on the mat sensing surface; provide a means to retain minimum object sensitivity at the area where mats joined together. From ANSI B11.19 (From 11.1.1.4) The safety mat device shall have a maximum response time that is not affected by object sensitivity adjustments or environmental changes. (From 11.1.1.5) When a component, module, device or system failure occurs, the safety related function shall prevent initiation of the hazardous machine motion, initiate an immediate stop command and prevent re-initiation of the hazardous machine motion. From AS 4024.5 The MatGuard Safety Mat system is designed to meet the Australian Standard AS 4024.5, which has many similarities to the European Standard EN1760-1. Excerpts from this standard include: (From 3.2.2) Where an effective sensing area is built up of more than one sensor, it shall have no dead zone. (From 3.7) When the actuating force is applied the output signal switching device (s) shall change from an 'on ' state to an 'off' state. It shall remain in the 'off' state for at least as long as the actuating force is applied. (From 3.8) The sensor shall be provided with a means for fixed permanent location. (From 3.10) Provisions shall be made on the top surface of the sensor to minimize slipping under the expected operating conditions.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats Overview Application Details Safety Distance Calculations ANSI/RIA R15.06 The minimum distance calculated is the minimum horizontal distance from the outer edge of the MatGuard sensor mat detection zone to the nearest part of the hazard. The formula for floor mounted safety mats is:
Safety Distance Calculations EN999 The minimum distance calculated is the minimum horizontal distance from the outer edge of the MatGuard sensor mat detection zone to the nearest part of the hazard. The formula for floor mounted safety mats is:
Ds = [K x (Ts + Tc + Tr)] + Dpf
• Ds is the minimum safety distance. • K is a minimum speed constant based on the movement of the hand/arm only and the body being stationary. K=1600mm/s (63in/s) • Ts is the worst stopping time of the machine/equipment • Tc is the worst stopping time of the control system • Tr is the response time of the safeguarding device • Dpf is the depth penetration factor which is the maximum travel towards the hazard within the safety mat area that may occur before a stop is signalled. Dpf=1200mm (48in) The response time of the machine and control system used in the calculation must be the worst case. Some machines have inconsistent response times that are dependent upon mode of operation, nature of the work piece and point in the operating cycle at which stopping is initiated. An allowance should be made for wear in brakes, temperature, aging of components, etc., if this can affect the response time. An allowance for further delays in the machine control system may be required in some circumstances. Calculation Example In this example, the MatGuard system is being used with a machine and control system with a worst case response time measured at 0.485 seconds. The system is on a flat surface, it is not on a raised platform. Using the formula above, T = Ts+ Tc+ Tr 0.035 + 0.485 0.520s S = (63 x 0.520) + 48 80.76in
Sensor mats will be required from 2032mm right up to the edge of the machine base plate.
S = [1600 x (t1 + t2)] + (1200 – 0,4H)
• S is the minimum safety distance in mm in a horizontal plane from the danger zone to the detecting edge of the device furthest from the danger zone. • 1600 is a minimum speed constant based on the movement of the hand/arm only and the body being stationary. 1600mm/s = 63in/s • t1 is the maximum time between the actuation of the sensing function and the output signal switching devices being in the off state. • t2 is the maximum response time of the machine, i.e., the time required to stop the machine or remove the risks after receiving the output signal from the protective equipment. • 1200 is the depth penetration factor which is the maximum travel towards the hazard within the safety mat area that may occur before a stop is signalled. 1200mm = 48in • H is the distance above the reference plane, e.g. floor, in millimetres The response time of the machine and control system used in the calculation must be the worst case time. Some machines have inconsistent response times which are dependent upon mode of operation, nature of the work piece and point in the operating cycle at which stopping is initiated. An allowance should be made for wear in brakes, temperature, aging of components, etc., if this can affect the response time. An allowance for further delays in the machine control system may be required in some circumstances. Calculation Example In this example, the MatGuard system is being used with a machine and control system whose worst case response time has been measured as 0.485 seconds. The system is on a flat surface, it is not on a raised platform. Using the formula above, T = t1 + t2 0.035 + 0.485 0.520s S = (1600 x 0.520) + 1200 832 + 1200 2032mm
Sensor mats will be required from 2032mm right up to the edge of the machine base plate.
2-75
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mats Specifications
Description The MatGuard safety mat is a pressure sensitive safeguarding product that is designed to detect the presence of people on its sensing surface. The MatGuard safety mat has two conductive hardened steel plates that are held apart by non conductive compressible separators. Each 4-wire mat, operating on only 24V DC, is pre-wired and connected in series with other mats to form a floor level guarding system for hazardous areas. The circuit through the mat is monitored by the MatGuard Control Unit which provides a signal to the machine control circuit when the area is clear. When a mat is stepped on, the conductive plates touch and the resistance in the circuit falls to zero. This is monitored by the control unit, which sends a shutdown signal to the machine. Since the MatGuard safety mat is completely sealed (IP67), water, liquids and coolants present no problem. In addition, the tough vinyl will resist bleaches, acids, salts and many industrial chemicals. The unique moulding process ensures the long life and reliability of the mat.
Features • • • • •
Hardened steel plate construction No dead spots 4-wire system to detect opens and shorts Can withstand a static pressure of 4500 psi IP67 rated (NEMA 6P)
2-76
Standards
EN1760-1, EN954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, ANSI RIA R15.06, ANSI/B11.19, AS4024.5
Category
Cat. 1 device per EN954-1 Suitable for Cat. 3 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Operating Voltage
24V DC, -20% +10% provided by the control unit
Maximum length of connection wires
200m (656ft)
Standard Length of Cable
4.5m (15ft)
Minimum Detection Weight
27 kg (60 lbs) on an 80mm (3.125in) diameter circular disk
Maximum Pressure Applied to Mat
31,034 kPa (4500psi)
Maximum Detection Zone Size 100m2 (1076 ft2) Mechanical Life
10,000,000 operations
Operating temperature
-25°C to 55°C (-13°F to 131°F)
Humidity
100% RH
Degree of enclosure protection
IP67 (NEMA 6P)
Vibration
10-200Hz, 5g
Shock/Bump
11ms 10g /16ms 10g
Terminal isolation
IP20 DIN 0470
Conductor size Wires 0.75mm2 (18AWG) 2 wire Jacket OD 3.8mm x 7.4mm (0.15in x 0.29in) Weight
10.9 kg/m2 (2.2 lbs/ft2)
Material & colour Mat Yellow, Black or Brown available on special order Plastisol Vinyl Trim 6063 Aluminium Mounting
Flat surface
Thickness
16mm (0.63in)
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mats Product Selection—Standard Mats Mat Size
Standard Perimeter Trim Kit
Safety Mat
millimetres 500 x 500
inches 19.7 x 19.7
440F-T1010
Catalogue Number 440F-M1010BYNN
500 x 1500
19.7 x 59.1
440F-T1030
440F-M1030BYNN
750 x 500
29.5 x 19.7
440F-T1510
440F-M1510BYNN
750 x 750
29.5 x 29.5
440F-T1515
440F-M1515BYNN
750 x 1500
29.5 x 59.1
440F-T1530
440F-M1530BYNN
1000 x 500
39.4 x 19.7
440F-T2010
440F-M2010BYNN
1000 x 750
39.4 x 29.5
440F-T2015
440F-M2015BYNN
1000 x 1000
39.4 x 39.4
440F-T2020
440F-M2020BYNN
1000 x 1250
39.4 x 49.2
440F-T2025
440F-M2025BYNN
1000 x 1500
39.4 x 59.1
440F-T2030
440F-M2030BYNN
900 x 1800
35.4 x 70.9
440F-T1836
440F-M1836BYNN 440R-C23139
Recommended control unit. For other control units see page 2-85 of this catalog.
Examples of Standard System Configurations Bill of Materials
Fixed Barrier Guard
Catalogue Number
Perimeter Trim
Description
440F-M1010BYNN
Mat 500 x 1500
Fixed Barrier Guard
Machine (Hazard)
2 1
440F-M1030BYNN
Perimeter Trim
Perimeter Trim
Mat 1000 x 1500
Mat
440F-T3210 ➊
Perimeter Trim
2
440F-T3310 ➊
Perimeter Trim
1
440F-T3220 ➊
Uniting Trim
1
440F-C4000S
Controller
1
440F-T3012
Corner Trim
4
Catalogue Number
Description
Qty.
Mat 500 x 500
Perimeter Trim Fixed Barrier Guard
1
440F-M2025BYNN Machine (Hazard)
440F-M1010BYNN
Mat
1 1
440F-M1510BYNN 440F-T3310 ➊
Perimeter Trim
1
440F-T3012
Corner Trim
1
440F-T3020 ➊
Uniting Trim
2
440F-C4000P
Controller
1
Mat 750 x 500 Mat 1000 x 1250 Mat 500 x 500
Electrical Connections Perimeter Trim
Perimeter Trim
Perimeter Trim
Machine Access way
Mat 500 x 500
Qty. 1
440F-M2030BYNN
➊ Customer must cut trim to proper length.
2-77
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mats Product Selection—Configurable Mats MatGuard safety mat and trim kit catalogue numbers can be configured by selecting the appropriate codes from the tables below. M
13
23
A
Y
NN
A 650mm
Mats: 440Fabcdeab
Trim Kit: 440F -
T
13
23
➊ B 1150mm
a
e
“A” Dimension—mm (inches)
Trim Options
Code
Description
Code
Description
K
Cable Channel Trim
T
Standard Trim
2 digit number
Length of the mat in millimetres/50 Must be in 50 (1.97) increments Min. allowed 150 (03); Max. allowed 1000 (20) The length of A must be equal to or shorter than B. The max. length of A is 900 (18) when B is greater than 1500 (30) e.g. 750 = 15, 1000 = 20
b “B” Dimension—mm (inches) Code
Description
2 digit number
Length of the mat in millimetres/50 Must be in 50 (1.97) increments Min. allowed 200 (04); Max. allowed 1800 (36) The length of A must be equal to or shorter than B. The max. length of A is 900 (18) when B is greater than 1500 (30) e.g. 750 = 15, 1500 = 30
c Cable Exit Code
Description
A
Two 4.5m (15ft) 2-wire cables—exit out the A corners
B
Two 4.5m (15ft) 2-wire cables—exit out the B corners
C
One 9.1m (30ft) 4-wire cable with M12 connector— exits out of upper left corner
D
One 9.1m (30ft) 4-wire cable without connector— exits out of upper left corner
F
One 0.76m (2.5ft) 4-wire cable with M12 connector— exits out the upper right corner.
d Colour Code
Description
B
Black
Y
Yellow
2-78
➊ Order controller separately. See page 2-85 for selection details.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mats Product Selection, Trim Options Type
Description
Approximate Dimensions
Catalogue Number
Square ends 2m length
440F-T3210
Square ends 3m length
440F-T3310
External Corner Standard Perimeter Trim Aluminium
page 2-82
440F-T3012
Internal Corner Standard Perimeter Trim Aluminium
page 2-82
440F-T3013
Square ends 2m length
440F-T3211
Square ends 4m length
440F-T3411
External Corner Perimeter Trim with Cable Channel Aluminium
page 2-83
440F-T3014
Internal Corner Perimeter Trim with Cable Channel
page 2-83
440F-T3015
Standard Perimeter Trim ➊ Aluminium For use with up to 3 cables running through channel
Perimeter Trim with Cable Channel ➊ Aluminium Used when up to 8 cables need to be fed through channel
➊ Mitred end, custom lengths available. Contact factory.
2-79
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mats Accessories Type
Description
Dimensions—mm (inches)
Catalogue Number
13 x 25 x 2m (½ x 1 x 6.6ft)
440F-T3216
13 x 25 x 3m (½ x 1 x 9.8ft)
440F-T3316
Aluminum Right Angle Perimeter Trim
Stainless Steel Angle Clip Perimeter Trim 5 per package
Ø5,5 (0.22)
440F-T102933
20 (0.79)
7 (0.28)
20 (0.79) 7 (0.28) 10 (0.39)
45(1.78)
14,2 (0.56)
Stainless Steel Z-Clip Perimeter Trim 5 per package
45 (1.8)
10 (0.39)
440F-T102935
Ø5,5 (0.22)
1m (3.28ft) length square ends
440F-T3120
2m (6.5ft) length square ends
440F-T3220
3m (9.8ft) length square ends
440F-T3320
Vinyl Wire Guide
63.5 (2.5) width 2m (6.6ft) length
440F-A3230
Accessories Kit for 440F-C4000S and 440F-C4000P 4 Butt Splices, 2 500mA Fuses, 1Reset Lamp, 4 Wire Terminations
N/A
440F-A108433
#6 x 9.5 (3/8)
440F-A17143
Active Uniting Trim Used to join two mats to ensure no dead spots
12 Philips Flat Head, Stainless Steel screws for 440FA-3211 and 440FT3411 Channel Trim Secures top to the bottom.
2-80
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mats Accessories (continued) Type
Description
Dimensions—mm (inches)
Catalogue Number
12 Philips Flat Head, Stainless Steel Screws with Anchors for 440F-T3210. 440F-T3310 and 440F-T3510 Trim
#10 x 32 (1.25)
440F-A17141
12 Flat Head, Stainless Steel Screws with Anchors for 440F-T3211 and 440F-T3411 Channel Trim
#10 x 32 (1.25)
440F-A17142
2m (6.5ft)
889D-F4AC-2
5m (16.4ft)
889D-F4AC-5
10m (32.8)
889D-F4AC-10
15m (49.2ft)
889D-F4AC-15
20m (65.6)
889D-F4AC-20
30m (98.4ft)
889D-F4AC-30
4 Pin M12 Straight Female Cordset 22AWG 300V 3A Yellow PVC Jacket, PUR Over mould 1
2
4
3
1 Brown 2 White 3 Blue 4 Black
2-81
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mats Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Mat System When more than one mat is needed to protect an area, use the dimensions below to determine how large of an area is covered.
PLEASE SUPPLY A SKETCH LAYOUT FOR MULTIPLE MATS
Active Uniting Trim When pressure is applied, the uniting trim causes the mat to deflect and change state, therefore giving all over sensitivity even on the joints.
When calculating the overall area of layout add ‘X’, ‘Y’ & ‘Z’ to allow for Perimeter trim and joints.
(Y) - Add 10mm (0.4in) for joint (Z) - Add 52mm (2.0in) for Standard Perimeter Trim or 99.5mm (3.9in) for channel trim.
(X) Dim A or B
(Z) - Add 52mm (2.0in) for Standard Perimeter Trim or 99.5mm (3.9in) for channel trim.
(X) Dim A or B
Overall size
IMPORTANT: Use the Distance Calculation shown on page 2-75 to ensure adequate coverage around the hazard.
Standard Perimeter Trim Internal and External Corners 43 (1.7)
Channel Dimensions
52 (2.0) 14 (0.55)
43 (1.7)
14 (0.55) 96 (3.8)
52 (2.0)
96 (3.8)
2-82
11 (0.43)
Standard perimeter trim holds three standard 2-wire mat cables or 2 4-wire cables. The equivalent of two cables are needed when connecting two mats in series.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mats Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Perimeter Trim with Cable Channel Internal and External Corners Channel Dimensions 44.5 (1.8)
99.5 (3.9) 14 (0.55)
44.5 (1.8)
9.2 (0.36)
42.2 (1.66)
Cable channel trim holds up to 8 standard 2-wire mat cables or 7 4-wire cables even when going around corners.
144 (5.7) 99.5 (3.9)
144 (5.7)
Typical Wiring Diagrams Two-Wire Cable Option Black Outer Jacket
White Insulation
Black Insulation Black Insulation
Black Insulation
Checker Pattern
White Insulation
White Insulation
Straight Pattern
4-Pin Micro M12 Connector Option Chequered Rib Side of Mat 43 (1.70)
14 (0.56)
Straight Male Straight Rib Side of Mat
2-83
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Controllers Specifications Standards
EN1760-1, EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, ANSI RIA R15.06, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.5
Category
Cat. 3 per EN954-1
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TUV
Operating Voltage
24V AC/DC or 110/230V AC
Power Consumption
6W, 9VA
Fuse Input (internal replaceable) 2-500mA time lag, (4000S, 4000P) 1-500mA time lag, (4000D) Output (external) 5A Quick acting
Description The MatGuard Control Unit monitors all of the mats which are connected together to form a safeguarded zone. The safeguarded zone can be up to a total of 100m2 and made from any number of mats. The controller is designed to interface with the control circuit of the machine and includes two safety relays to ensure control redundancy. The controller detects a presence on the mat, a short circuit, or an open circuit. Under each of these conditions, the safety output relays turn off. When interfaced properly, the machine or hazardous motion will receive a stop signal, and an auxiliary output relay turns ON. The controller comes in two different package styles, a plastic case for surface or wall mounting, and a steel case for surface or wall mounting. Each style offers many of the same basic features. Each controller accepts power supplies of 24V AC/DC, and 110/230V AC. The plastic and steel-cased styles include reset buttons. The steel-cased controller offers extra protection against inadvertent impacts.
Inputs: Safety Mat Contactor Monitoring
2 N.O. 1 N.C.
Reset
Monitored Manual or Automatic/Manual
Input Impedance
500 Ω
Outputs: Safety Auxiliary
2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Auxiliary
Output Rating
A300, AC-15, 4A/250V AC P300, DC-13, 2A/30V DC
Minimum Switching Capability
10mA at 10V
Response Time Mat pressed to output open
35ms
Indicator LEDs
Green – Power Green – Auto Reset Mode Green – Manual Reset Mode Green – Machine Enabled
Internal Selector Switches
Auto/Manual Reset; 110/230V AC
Maximum Detection Zone Size
100m2 (1076ft2)
Mechanical Life
10,000,000 operations
Operating temperature
-25°C to 45°C (-13°F to 113°F)
Contamination level
III
Humidity
90% RH
Alternatively, see the Product Selection table for safety relays that can also control and monitor safety mats.
Enclosure Protection: 4000P 4000S
IP65 (NEMA 13) IP62 (NEMA 12)
Features
Terminal Protection
IP20 DIN 0470
• • • •
Maximum conductor size: 4000P, 4000S
1 x 1.5mm2 (16AWG)
Weight: 4000P 4000S
880g (1.94lbs) 3200g (7.05lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Material
Polycarbonate or steel
Vibration
0.15mm,10–55Hz
Selectable voltage supply Auto/manual reset Four-wire system to detect opens and shorts Third Party Approval — AMTRI, TUV
Application Types
2-84
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Controllers Product Selection Housing Style
Mounting
Material
Page
440F-C4000P
Polycarbonate 24V AC/DC, 110/230V AC Surface (Wall) Mount
Catalogue Number
— Steel Case
440F-C4000S
24V AC/DC, 22.5mm housing, 35mm DIN Rail
440R-P23073 —
4-24
110V AC, 45mm housing, 35mm DIN Rail
440R-P23074
24V AC/DC, 55mm housing, 35mm DIN Rail
440R-J23102
MSR23M
115V AC, 55mm housing, 35mm DIN Rail
MSR121RT
—
440R-J23100
230V AC, 55mm housing, 35mm DIN Rail
440R-J23099
24V AC/DC, 45mm housing, 35mm DIN Rail
440R-C23139
110V AC, 45mm housing, 35mm DIN Rail
MSR131RTP
4-30
—
4-40
230V AC, 45mm housing, 35mm DIN Rail
440R-C23137
440R-C23136
24V DC 45mm Housing 35mm DIN Rail
MSR210P
4-72
440R-H23176
17.5mm Housing 35mm DIN Rail
MSR220P
4-76
440R-H23178
24V DC, 22.5mm Housing 35mm DIN Rail Solid State Safety Outputs
—
4-26
440R-N23198
MSR210P/MSR220P
MSR30RTP
Accessories Description
Page
Catalogue Number
Fuse, 500mA
14-6
440R-A31562
Spares Kit
2-85
440F-A108433
2-85
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Controllers Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 107 (4.21)
175 (6.89)
4 x M4 Mounting Holes
157 (6.18)
10 (0.39)
11 (0.43)
125 (4.92)
75 (2.95)
230 (9.1)
440F-C4000P
165 (6.5)
11 (0.43)
33 (1.3) 210 (8.3)
5.8 x 7.6 (0.23 x 0.30)
225 (8.9)
143 (5.6)
440F-C4000S
Block Diagram A1
NO
A2 +Ve
MC MC
F2
F1 110/ 230
24VDC
PB
K5
K3
K4
Man K6
K1
Power
-Ve
2-86
K4
K3
~
IND
14
32
K2
K6
K3
Auto K3
31
K6
K1
SW1
K4
13 23
K2
K4
K2
K3
K5
Enabled K2
K3
K4
K5 K4
Logic
R
2
1
3
4
24
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Controllers Typical Wiring Diagrams 230V AC
+24V DC Safety Mat
Reset with Lamp L1 L2 L3
+ve 1
2
3
4 N/O PB
M A Internal 110 Switches 230 N
L1 L2 L3
R IND 13 23 31
440F-C4000S 440F-C4000P
Safety Mat
K1
K1
MSR121S
MC MC 14 24 32 K1 K2
Ground
Aux Output
K2
PE A2 S21 S22 S34 S33 Y32 14 24
K2
-ve
A1 S11 S52 S12 X5 Y31 13 23 33 41
M Ground
34 42
M
K1 K2
Reset
Safety Mat Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Safety Mat, Monitored Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Monitored Output +24V DC
+24V DC Safety Mat
Reset
L1 L2 L3
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2 L1 L2 L3
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51
K1
MSR30RT/RTP K1
MSR131RTP
K2
K2
S12 S22 A2
14
24 Y32
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52
Ground
K1 K2
M
K1 K2
Output Inputs Active Closed
Aux to PLC or Indicator
Ground
Safety Mat, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
M
Safety Mat, Dual Channel Output Monitored Manual Reset, Output Monitoring
+24V DC Safety Mat Safety Mat Termination or Expansion Cable
Fuses
S12 S22 S32 MSR 220P
S42 S52 S62
A1 S11 S32 S41 S12 S22 S51
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
Termination or Expansion Cable
L
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR210P K2
A2 S21 S31 S42 S52 S62 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32 K1 K2
M
Reset
Ground
Output Active
Inputs Closed
Four Individually Monitored Safety Mats, Monitored Manual Reset, Dual Output, Output Monitoring
2-87
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mat Manager Specifications Standards
EN1760-1, EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, ANSI RIA R15.06, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.5
Category
Cat. 3 per EN954-1
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives,
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 110/230V AC 0.8 to 1.1 x rated voltage, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
13W or 13VA
Fuses Input Output (external)
500mA internal (2) 6A Slow Blow or 10A Quick Blow
Safety Inputs
8 4-wire safety mats with micro-QD.
The Safety Mat Manager is designed to monitor multiple safety mats, each with its own connection. The Safety Mat Manager accepts up to 8 individual mats with 4-pin micro quick disconnect connectors.
Maximum Input Resistance
100 ohms
Reset Internal switch selectable Button
Monitored Manual or Auto./Man. Front Panel or Remote via Terminals
The Safety Mat Manager provides an LED status indication for each of the mat connections. Since the LEDs indicate whether the mat is shorted or open, troubleshooting and replacement of a damaged mat within a mat system, is much quicker when compared to a traditional mat system where multiple mats are wired in series.
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
Output Rating
B300, AC-15, 2A/250V AC N300, DC-13, 2A/24V DC
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Response Time
35ms
Indication LEDs Power Machine Enabled Auto Reset Mode Manual Reset Mode
Green Green Green Green
Mat Status LEDs Run Condition Stop Condition Missing Shorting Plug Not Used
Green Green-Red (Bi-colour) Red Off
Description
An internal switch allows for the setting of the reset to Automatic/ Manual or Monitored Manual. When set to Automatic/Manual, the reset circuit can be jumpered, connected auxiliary contacts, or connected to an unmonitored manual reset by adding a momentary normally open switch in the monitoring loop. When set to Monitored Manual, the monitoring circuit must be closed and then opened to activate the outputs. Stepping on any one of the mats deactivates the safety outputs. The outputs include 2 normally open safety rated outputs used to shut down the machine and 1 normally closed auxiliary output to indicate the status of the Mat Manager. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
Features • • • •
Accepts up to 8 individual mats 2 Safety output contacts 1 Auxiliary output contact Automatic/Manual or Monitored Manual Reset
2-88
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +45°C (-13°F to 113°F)
Enclosure Protection
IP65 (NEMA 13) Steel with Polycarbonate Face plate
Maximum Conductor Size
0.2–2.5mm2 (24-14AWG)
Torque Settings—terminal screws
0.4Nm (3.54 lb•in)
Mounting
Surface (Wall) Mount
Weight
3160g (7lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosφ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosφ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.15mm
Shock
10g, 11ms half-sine
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Mats MatGuard Mat Manager Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
Up to 8 4 wire Mats with M12 Connectors
2 N.O.
2 N.C. 1 N.O.
24V AC/DC, 110/230V AC
440F-C28013
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
135 (6.5)
230 (9.1)
33 (1.3) 18 (0.7)
210 (8.3)
5.8 x 7.6 (0.23 x 0.30)
11 (0.43)
225 (8.9)
143 (5.6)
Typical Wiring Diagrams
1
Up to 8 MatGuard Sensor Mats with 4 pin Micro QD Connectors
2
110V AC, 230V AC Alternative Supply Connection
+24V DC Supply
3
4
L
L1
L2
+Ve
13
23
31
MC
K1
440F-C28013 Mat Manager Control Unit 5
6
7
8
L3
Fuses
K2 N
-Ve N/O PB
R
IND 14
24
32 MC
Auxiliary Output
K2 Reset & Indicator
Supply Ground
K1
Motor Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
M
PE Ground
Safety Mat System, Monitored Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Output Monitoring
Accessories Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) #24 Mtg Holes for #10 Screws 1
38 (1.5)
20 (0.78)
Connector A
25 (1)
0.3m (1ft) 1
43 (1.7)
Catalogue Number 4 3
2
Y-Cable
Wiring
To Mat Control Unit
Description
4 3 2 1
Safety Mat
2 1
897D-F4ACDM-B0M3 4 3
Safety Mat
2
2 1
Connector B
2-89
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Overview System Components
Sensing Surface
The Safedge sensitive edge systems are used in a variety of applications where the edge of an object must be detected by contact. The Safedge system consists of three parts: 1) a c-rail, which is used to mount the profile; 2) a profile, which contains the sensing surface; and 3) a control unit, which checks the operation of the profile and interfaces with the control system. A typical system is shown below.
The profile is best actuated along its sensing surface. The sensing surface of the Safedge system is active along almost the full length of the edge. The 10 millimetres at the beginning and end are not active.
C-Rail
Sensing Surface Control Unit Sensing Angle
+
Sensing Length Profile
One distinct advantage of the Safedge system is the active corners. Pressure applied to the corners is detected by the control unit.
+
Active Corners
GE SAFED OP
ST FA UL T RU N
Control Unit
tem ac/dc ng Sys 0r 24V 529 Monitori ctor) 50Hz Cross t to IEC sele Fully ac (see resi stan N/O,C, N/C 2A 240/120V t & Imp act 250V tigh Voltage tacts Dus t Supply Aux Con oof, 12V dc 2A N/O Hos epr 250V Volt age IP65 Stri p Contacts Safe dge Safety
Operating Principle The profile works on the principle of a two-wire design with conductive rubber. Two wires run the length of the profile. The wires are terminated with a known resistor. When the profile is deformed, the conductive rubber comes in contact with each other and causes the overall resistance to drop. Pressure required is 10 Newtons (2.25lbs) when applied in this direction
Conductive Rubber
Force Travel Relationship Flexible Wire Cores
Non conductive Rubber
The control unit provides a voltage source to the wires in the profile. It continuously checks the continuity of the wires for shorts, opens and changes in resistance. If the circuit opens, becomes shorted, or the resistance changes, the output of the control unit turns off. The control unit can also be used to monitor the performance of the output switching devices.
2-90
Since the Safedge system is a contact device, a force is required to operate the device. This force is dependent on the shape of the object applying the force, the speed of the object and deformation distance on the profile. To help understand the force requirements, the European standard EN1760-1 provides three test objects travelling at two speeds. Shown in the graph below is the force that is applied over the deformation distance on the surface of the profile. Note that the force required to operate the corners is greater than the force required along the straight section of the profile. This force must be used as a guideline, as the inanimate object can not be harmed.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Overview Risk Assessment
300
A risk assessment must be performed to determine the proper use of the edge system. Additional protective measures must be used when an individual can reach around or over the edge system and gain access to a hazard. The edge system is designed to be a contact type of system. Therefore “cushion factor” is an important consideration.
250
Force (N)
200 150 100
Selecting the Cushion Factor
50 0 0.0
2.0 (0.08)
Vp = 10mm/s
3.6 (0.14)
5.5 (0.22)
7.2 (0.28)
8.7 (0.34)
Distance—mm (inches)
Automated doors will continue to close for some finite time after the profile sends the initial stop signal. This is known as the system response time. The system response time is the sum of the Safedge control unit response time, the control system response time, and the mechanical stopping time. Systems with longer response time should utilize larger cushion factors. Users must validate that injury does not occur if parts of the body get jammed, for example between the sensing edge and the fixed part of a machine.
Force vs. Distance
300 250
Force (N)
200 150 100 50 0 0.0 Vp = 100mm/s
One of the important characteristics of edge systems is called cushion factor. The cushion factor is the distance the profile can be depressed after the signal is generated. This is important when the profile is mounted on automated doors.
1.9 (0.07)
3.9 (0.15)
5.4 (0.21)
7.4 (0.29)
8.8 (0.35)
Users might also consider a reversing option. When the profile is depressed, the Safedge control unit sends a signal to a reversing relay. Since the reversing relay is not a safety rated device, the user must still confirm that injury does not occur if parts of the body get jammed.
Distance—mm (inches)
2-91
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Overview Typical Applications Typical applications for sensitive edge systems are: • • • • • • •
Sliding doors Sliding gates Automated guided vehicles X-Y tables Fence tops Scissor jacks Loading platforms
The profile is mounted on the leading edge of the moving object. As the profile comes in contact with an object, the sensing surface of the profile deforms. The deformation causes the conductive rubber parts to make contact and reduce the circuit resistance. The control makes contact. Typically, the edge of the object is leading edge and is moving, like a sliding door or gate. Edge systems have also been used on the leading edges of X-Y tables and automated guided vehicles.
Safedge can also be ordered with a rubber cover as shown below. This allows compression of the rubber boot without deforming the profile.
In some applications, a drip edge or seal is needed to reduce wind and rain leaking into a door. The Safedge system accommodates both types of applications. Safedge has three profiles that include a sealing lip. C-Rail
2-92
Sensing
Rubber Boot
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Overview Cable Termination
Series Connection
The cable can be terminated in one of four ways providing flexibility in design and installation of cable routing. Specify the LHT or RHT from the point of view of looking directly at the end of the profiles as shown below. SET—Straight
Connection in series If more than one profile is to be used, they are normally connected in series as shown.
SAFEDGE E V A L U A T O R
STOP OPEN RUN
Fully Cross Monitored Safety Control System Supply Voltage 240/120Vac (see selector) 50-60Hz 0r 24Vac/dc IP65 Hoseproof, Dust tight & Impact resistant to IEC 529 Safety Contacts 250V 2A N/O Aux Contacts 250V 2A C/O Safedge Strip Voltage 6Vdc
UNDER—Under Wire terminal connections
Uses 6K resistor (yellow)
Parallel Connection
LHT—Left-hand
RHT—Right-hand
SAFEDGE E V A L U A T O R
Uses 15K resistor (blue)
STOP OPEN RUN
Fully Cross Monitored Safety Control System Supply Voltage 240/120Vac (see selector) 50-60Hz 0r 24Vac/dc IP65 Hoseproof, Dust tight & Impact resistant to IEC 529 Safety Contacts 250V 2A N/O Aux Contacts 250V 2A C/O Safedge Strip Voltage 6Vdc
A maximum of two profiles can be connected in parallel.
Connection Methods The profiles can be connected in one of two ways: series or parallel. Either method provides the same performance. Selection of the method is determined by ease of installation. The more popular method is series.
2-93
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Specifications Standards
EN1760-2, EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.5
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TÜV, c-tick not required
Power supply
Operates on 4V DC supplied from control unit
Operating temperature EPDM material -5°C to +55°C (23°F to 131°F) NBR/CR material 0°C to + 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
Description The ability of the Safedge profile to out perform competition lies in its innovative design. It uses a combination of non conductive rubber and flexible wire cored conductive rubber bonded together so it keeps bouncing back into shape even after repeated compressions. The Safedge profiles come in 3 different cushions factors: 5mm (0.2in), 19mm (0.75in) and 41mm (1.6in). Cushion factor is the distance the profile can be depressed after a signal has been generated. The profiles are also offered with a sealing lip which is designed to reduce drafts between the profile and opposing surface.
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP67 (NEMA 6P)
Conductor Size
(18AWG)
Materials EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Modified Rubber NBR/CR Acrylonitrile (34% nitrile) Butadiene Rubber/Chloropriene Rubber Mounting
Any position using Type C112 “C” rail
Weight
See Ordering Details
Chemical Resistance of Safedge Profile Substance
Resistance—“S” Profile EPDM
Resistance—“N” Profile NBR/CR
Acetic Acid (10%)
Good
Good
The profiles come in two different materials. Use the EPDM material in the presence of conductive fluids. The NBR/CR material performs better in the presence of oils. Review the chemical resistance chart to help make the best choice of material. If in doubt, a small sample of the profile should be tested for chemical resistance before a final selection is made.
Acetone
Good
Fair
Ammonium Hydroxide (35%)
Good
Good
Benzene
Poor
Poor
Diesel Oil
Poor
Good
Ethyl Alcohol (Ethanol)
Good
Good
The Safedge profile has no rigid internal parts which can “break through” or cause fatigue failures after prolonged use. The multistranded copper wire core throughout the length of the strip insures that there are no problems of resistance build up on long lengths.
Hydrochloric Acid (10%)
Good
Good
Lubricating Oil
Poor
Good
Nitric Acid (10%)
Good
Fair
Petrol
Poor
Fair
Features • • • • • • •
Various profiles Conductive rubber technology Up to 50m lengths Aluminium, plastic or zinc coated steel, mounting rails Rubber boot optional Active corners Sealing lip available
2-94
Silicone Fluids
Good
Good
Sodium Chloride (25%)
Good
Good
Trichlorethylene
Good
Poor
Vegetable Oils (general)
Good
Good
Water (distilled)
Good
Good
Water (sea)
Good
Good
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Product Selection—Profiles Code (Page 2-100)
Dimension
Profile
Description
0110S
Black, EPDM, Weight: 463g/m (0.33lbs/ft)
Cushion Factor
28.5 (1.12)
A
24.5 (0.96)
5mm
28.5 (1.12)
C
0110N
24.5 (0.96)
Black, NBR/CR, Weight: 460g/m (0.31lbs/ft)
5mm
28.5 (1.12)
B
0110R
24.5 (0.96)
Red, EPDM, Weight: 502g/m (0.34lbs/ft)
5mm
E
43 (1.69)
28.5 (1.12)
1610S 14 (0.55)
Black, EPDM, Weight: 843g/m (0.57lbs/ft)
19mm
F
43 (1.69)
28.5 (1.12)
1610N 14 (0.55)
Black, NBR/CR, Weight: 837g/m (0.56lbs/ft)
19mm
H
68 (2.68) 36 (1.42)
30 (1.18)
0310S
Black, EPDM, Weight: 1209g/m (0.81lbs/ft)
41mm
28.5 (1.12)
D, J
24.5 (0.96)
0510S
28-30 (1.10-1.18)
G, K
5mm
Catalogue Number
5 (16.4)
440F-E0110S05
10 (32.8)
440F-E0110S10
20 (65.6)
440F-E0110S20
5 (16.4)
440F-E0110N05
10 (32.8)
440F-E0110N10
20 (65.6)
440F-E0110N20
5 (16.4)
440F-E0110R05
10 (32.8)
440F-E0110R10
20 (65.6)
440F-E0110R20
5 (16.4)
440F-E1610S05
10 (32.8)
440F-E1610S10
20 (65.6)
440F-E1610S20
5 (16.4)
440F-E1610N05
10 (32.8)
440F-E1610N10
20 (65.6)
440F-E1610N20
5 (16.4)
440F-E0310S05
10 (32.8)
440F-E0310S10
20 (65.6)
440F-E0310S20
5 (16.4)
440F-E0510S05
10 (32.8)
440F-E0510S10
20 (65.6)
440F-E0510S20
5 (16.4)
440F-E0804S05
10 (32.8)
440F-E0804S10
20 (65.6)
440F-E0804S20
25 (0.98)
43 (1.69)
14 (0.55)
Black, EPDM, with Sealing Lip Weight: 545g/m (0.37lbs/ft)
Length— m (ft)
0804S 17 (0.67)
Black, EPDM, with Sealing Lip Weight: 1013g/m (0.68lbs/ft)
19mm
2-95
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Product Selection—Profiles Code (Page 2-100)
Dimension
Profile
Description
0210S
Black, EPDM, with Sealing Lip Weight: 1291g/m (0.87lbs/ft)
Cushion Factor
Length— m (ft)
Catalogue Number
5 (16.4)
440F-E0210S05
10 (32.8)
440F-E0210S10
20 (65.6)
440F-E0210S20
5 (16.4)
440F-E0118S05
10 (32.8)
440F-E0118S10
20 (65.6)
440F-E0118S20
5 (16.4)
440F-E1111S05
10 (32.8)
440F-E1111S10
20 (65.6)
440F-E1111S20
I, L
68 (2.68) 36 (1.42)
30 (1.18)
41mm (1.61in)
M
16 (0.63)
29 (1.14)
0118S
Black, EPDM Weight: 242g/m (0.163lbs/ft)
3.75mm (0.15in)
18 (0.71)
N, O
2-96
67 (2.64)
50 (1.97)
1111S
Black, EPDM Weight: 680g/m (0.457lbs/ft)
NA
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Product Selection—“C” Rails Code
Dimension—mm (inches) 10 (0.39)
A
25 (0.98)
10 (0.39)
B
25 (0.98) 10 (0.39)
C
25 (0.98) 10 (0.39)
D
25 (0.98) 10 (0.39)
E
25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 10 (0.39)
F
20 (0.79)
10 (0.39)
G
25 (0.98) 25 (0.98)
18 (0.71)
H
25 (0.98)
8.5 (0.33)
I
18 (0.71)
45 (1.77)
J
13 (0.51)
45 (1.77)
NA
10 (0.4)
Description
Catalogue Number
Aluminium type; Type C112/A Suitable for all profiles. 3m (9.8ft) length Weight: 258g/m (0.17lbs/ft)
440F-R1212
Zinc-Coated Steel; Type C112/S Suitable for all profiles 2m (6.5ft) length Weight: 663g/m (0.45lbs/ft)
440F-R1112
PVC Black; Type C112/PB Suitable for all profiles 3m (9.8ft) length Weight: 111g/m (0.07lbs/ft)
440F-R1212PB
PVC Red; Type C112/PR Suitable for all profiles 3m (9.8ft) length Weight: 111g/m (0.07lbs/ft)
440F-R1212PR
PVC Yellow; Type C112/PY Suitable for all profiles 3m (9.8ft) length Weight: 111g/m (0.07lbs/ft)
440F-R1212PY
Aluminium Vertical Lip; Type C112/ A2 Suitable for all profiles 2m (6.5ft) length Weight: 368g/m (0.25lbs/ft)
440F-R1214
Aluminium Horizontal Lip; Type C112/A3 Suitable for all profiles 2m (6.5ft) length Weight: 388g/m (0.26lbs/ft)
440F-R1215
Aluminium Deep Channel; Type C112/A4 Suitable for all profiles 2m (6.5ft) length Weight: 345g/m (0.23lbs/ft)
440F-R1216
Aluminium; Suitable for Mini Profile Only 2m (6.5ft) length Weight: 150g/m (___lbs/ft)
440F-R1219
Aluminium Suitable for Rubber Boot Only ?m (ft) length Weight: 667g/m (0.448lbs/ft)
440F-R2151
Aluminium End Plate for C-Rail Option J 2 Plates 4 Screws, flat head, Philips, 10mm, #6, Weight: 7g (0.01lbs)
440F-R2152
2-97
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Product Selection—Component Parts Dimension
Name
Description
Catalogue Number
1m
440F-A1301
2m
440F-A1302
5m
440F-A1305
12m
440F-A1306
15m
440F-A1307
6kΩ (yellow) resistor for series termination
440F-A1308
15kΩ (blue) for parallel termination
440F-A1309
Closing Cap material: EPDM
440F-A1302S
Closing Cap material: NRB
440F-A1302N
To close profiles 440F-E0310S and 440F-E1610S.
440F-A1303S
To close profiles 440F-E1610N.
440F-A1303N
Axial Connector
With this connector you can directly connect two profiles. Suitable for 440F-E0110S and 440F-E0110R profiles.
440F-A0061S
Straight Pin Connector
Kit contains one pair of pins suitable for one joint.
440F-A0004
Connector and Cable
Terminator
Closing Cap
Closing Cap
90° Corner Connector
440F-A0071S 440F-A007IS
When using profile 440F-E0110N select
440F-A007IN
When using profile 440F-E0310S select
440F-A0073S
When using profile 440F-E1610S select
440F-A0074S
When using profile 440F-E1610N select
440F-A0074N
When using profile 440F-E0110N select
440F-A0072N
When using profile 440F-E0110S or 440F-E0110R select
440F-A0072S
When using profile 440F-E1610N select
440F-A0075N
When using profile 440F-E1610S select
440F-A0075S
When using profile 440F-E0310S select
440F-A0076S
45° Corner Connector
When using profile 440F-E0110N
440F-A0071N45
60° Corner Connector
When using profile 440F-E0110N
440F-A0071N60
90° Corner Connector (vertical)
2-98
When using profile 440F-E0110S select When using profile 440F-E0110R select
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Product Selection—Component Parts Dimension
Name
Description
Catalogue Number
Use only on Mini Profile—1m
440F-A1181
Use only on Mini Profile—3m
440F-A1183
Use only on Mini Profile—5m
440F-A1185
Terminator
Use only on Mini Profile— 8kΩ (yellow) resistor for series termination
440F-A1186
Closing Cap
Use only on Mini Profile— Closing Cap material: EPDM
440F-A1318
Cyanocrylate Adhesive
Contents: 3g. Sufficient for approximately 10 terminations.
440F-A0020
Shears
Use to cut profiles.
440F-A3084
Connection Box
Polycarbonate housing 53mm X 53mm X 35mm complete with two pole terminal and trumpet type screw on connector with strain and relief clamp. For use with coiled cable
440F-A0116
2.5m (8.2ft) (extended) of flexible coiled cable.
440F-A2450
3.5m (11.5ft) (extended) of flexible coiled cable.
440F-A2700
Connector and Cable
Coiled Connection Cable
Control Unit
Connection Box
Coiled Cable
Closing Cap “C” Rail
Connection Box
Connector with Resistor
Cable Connector
Example application of profile using coiled cable. The coiled cable can not be directly connected to the profile due to the weight of the cable. The proper use of the coiled cable is to connect the coiled cable to the profile through the connection box. The coiled cable should be secured to both the moving and stationary objects so as to prevent straining of the terminal connections.
Closing Cap
2-99
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Factory Assembled Product Selection (standard profile)
440F-E ➊
C a
A b
M c
V d
01270 e
a Profile Code
Description
A
0110S
B
0110R
C
0110N
D
0510S with Sealing Lip on Right Side
E
1610S
F
1610N
G
0804S with Sealing Lip on Right Side
H
0310S
I
0210S with Sealing Lip on Right Side
J
0510S with Sealing Lip on Left Side
K
0804S with Sealing Lip on Left Side
L
0210S with Sealing Lip on Left Side
N
Rubber Boot over 0110S
O
Rubber Boot over 1610S
Code
RHT right entrance with 10m cable
K
SET straight entrance with 1m cable
L
SET straight entrance with 2m cable
M
SET straight entrance with 3m cable
N
SET straight entrance with 5m cable
O
SET straight entrance with 10m cable
P
UNDER entrance with 1m cable
Q
UNDER entrance with 2m cable
R
UNDER entrance with 3m cable
S
UNDER entrance with 5m cable
T
UNDER entrance with 10m cable
d Termination Code
Description
A
LHT left exit with 1m cable
B
LHT left exit with 2m cable
C
LHT left exit with 3m cable
D
LHT left exit with 5m cable LHT left exit with 10m cable
F
RHT right exit with 1m cable
“C” Rail
G
RHT right exit with 2m cable
Description 1212 aluminium for “Profile” codes A-L 1112 zinc coated steel for “Profile” codes A-L
C
1212PB PVC black for “Profile” codes A-L
D
1212PR PVC red for “Profile” codes A-L 1212PY PVC yellow for “Profile” codes A-L 1214 aluminium with vertical lip for “Profile” codes A-L
G
1215 aluminium with horizontal lip for “Profile” codes A-L
H
1216 aluminium deep rail for “Profile” codes A-L
J
2151 aluminium for “Profile” codes N and O
N
No C-Rail (not needed)
H
RHT right exit with 3m cable
I
RHT right exit with 5m cable
J
RHT right exit with 10m cable
K
SET straight exit with 1m cable
L
SET straight exit with 2m cable
M
SET straight exit with 3m cable
N
SET straight exit with 5m cable
O
SET straight exit with 10m cable
P
UNDER exit with 1m cable
Q
UNDER exit with 2m cable
R
UNDER exit with 3m cable
c
S
UNDER exit with 5m cable
T
UNDER exit with 10m cable
Cable Entrance
U
Parallel Termination—15kΩ
V
Series Termination—6kΩ
Code
Description
A
LHT left entrance with 1m cable
B
LHT left entrance with 2m cable
C
LHT left entrance with 3m cable
D
LHT left entrance with 5m cable
E
LHT left entrance with 10m cable
F
RHT right entrance with 1m cable
G
RHT right entrance with 2m cable
H
RHT right entrance with 3m cable
I
RHT right entrance with 5m cable
J
RHT right entrance with 10m cable
K
SET straight entrance with 1m cable
L
SET straight entrance with 2m cable
2-100
Description
J
E
B
F
Cable Entrance Code
b
A
E
c (continued)
e Length of Edge Code
Description
5 digit number
Enter length of edge in mm for example: 50m=50000; 500mm=00500 300mm minimum
➊ Order controller separately. See page 2-104 for selection details.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Factory Assembled Product Selection (mini-profile)
c Cable Entrance Code
Description
K
SET straight entrance 1m cable
M
SET straight entrance 3m cable
N
SET straight entrance 5m cable
P
UNDER entrance 1m cable
R
UNDER entrance 3m cable
S
UNDER entrance 5m cable
d Termination
440F-E ➊
M a
I b
M c
V d
01270 e
a Profile
Code
Description
K
SET straight entrance 1m cable
M
SET straight entrance 3m cable
N
SET straight entrance 5m cable
P
UNDER entrance 1m cable
R
UNDER entrance 3m cable
S
UNDER entrance 5m cable
V
Series Termination—8kΩ
Code
Description
e
M
0118S 3.75mm (0.15in) Cushion Factor Black, Mini Profile
Length
b “C” Rail Code
Description
I
1219 aluminium for “Profile” code M
N
No C-Rail (not needed)
Code
Description
5 digit number
Enter length of edge in mm for example: 50m=50000; 500mm=00500 300mm minimum
➊ Order controller separately. See page 2-104 for selection details.
2-101
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Profiles Factory Assembled Examples 440F-EDFHV00490
V
F
Series Termination Type 1214 Aluminum Rail 6KΩ with Vertical Lip
440F-ECAKV01250
A Type C112/A Aluminum C Rail
H RHT—Right Hand Entrance with 3m Cable
V Series Termination 6KΩ
C
D
Type 0110N Oil Resistant Profile 1250 mm long
Type 0510S Profile with Sealing Lip 490mm long
K SET Cable Entrance with 1m Cable
This is a single oil resistant profile which is 1250mm long. The edge is terminated with a Series Termination. A 1m cable enters straight into the closing cap from a DIN-rail mounted controller. The profile is mounted on a standard aluminium C rail.
Note orientation of sealing lip to cable entrance
This is single profile has a sealing lip and is 490mm long. The profile is terminated with a Series Termination. A 3m cable enters into the right hand side of the closing cap from a plastic surface mounted controller. The profile is mounted on an aluminium rail with a vertical lip for ease of mounting. The orientation of the sealing lip to the vertical lip can be reversed by the user by sliding the profile out of the C Rail, rotating the C Rail 180° and then re-inserting the profile back into the C Rail. 440F-EBGCU03560
G Type 1215 Aluminum Rail with Horizontal Lip
440F-ECFGD01250
F Type 1214 Aluminum Rail with Vertical Lip
G RHT—Right Hand Entrance with 2m Cable
D LHT Cable Exit 5m
U Parallel Termination 15KΩ
B
Type 0110R Profile 3560mm long
C LHT—Entrance with 3m Cable
C
Type 0110N Oil Resistant Profile 1250mm long
This is a single oil resistant profile which is 1250mm long. The edge is terminated with a 1m cable. A 1m cable enters straight into the closing cap. The profile is mounted on a standard aluminium C rail. A control unit is not included. This edge is intended to be used in series with another length of edge which has a terminating resistor.
2-102
This is a red-coloured single profile which is 3560mm long. This profile is part of a parallel profile system, for ease of mounting, as it is terminated with a Parallel Termination. A 3m cable enters into the left side of the closing cap from a plastic surface mount controller. The profile is mounted on an aluminium C Rail with a horizontal lip for ease of mounting. The horizontal lip can be reversed by the user by sliding the profile out of the C Rail, rotating the C Rail and then re-inserting the profile back into the C Rail. A separate catalogue number must be entered for the other profile.
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Controllers Specifications Standards
Description The Safedge controllers are designed to operate with the Safedge profiles. The controller continuously monitors the profile for actuation and generates an output signal when the profile is depressed. The Safedge controller provides a low voltage to the profile. When the profile is pressed, the controller detects a change in resistance and turns off its output relays. When pressure is released from the profile, the output relays of the controller return to an on state. The controller has redundant voltage free positively-guided output relays which can be used to interface with a machine control system.
EN1760-2, EN954-1, ISO 13849-1, AS4024.5, EN954-1, ANSI B11.19
Safety Category
Cat. 3 per EN954-1
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TuV
Power Supply 251 252
24V AC/DC or 110/230V AC 50/60Hz 24V AC/DC 50/60Hz
Power Consumption 251 252
<6VA <4VA
Fuses, Internal 251D, 251P 251P 252D
500mA Power Supply, Replaceable 2 x 2A Safety Output, Replaceable 500mA, Resettable
Fuses, External
4A on AC, 2A on DC
Safety Input Profile Monitoring
6KΩ, 12V DC open circuit, 4V DC run condition 1 N.O.
Maximum Input Impedance Profile Monitoring Circuit
9KΩ 1KΩ
Outputs 251 Safety 252 Safety 251, 252 Auxiliary
2 N.O. 1 N.O. 1 N.C.
Output Rating
2A/250V AC, 2A/125V AC 1A/30V DC
Min. Switching Current/Volt.
10mA/10V
The ‘251’ controller comes capable of operating at 24V AC/DC, or 120/230V AC from separate terminals. An internal switch changes the operating voltage from 120V AC to 230V AC. The ‘252’ controller operates at 24V AC/DC.
Max. Response Time
13ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Run Yellow = Open Circuit Red = Stop
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
An auxiliary output relay is available to provide a signal about the controller’s status. Three LEDs indicate whether the controller is in RUN, STOP or OPEN condition. The controller operates in manual or automatic reset mode.
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE0110
Pollution Degree
3
Features • • • • • •
1 N.O. or 2 N.O. Safety Outputs 1 N.C. Auxiliary Output 24V AC/DC or 120/240V AC Output Monitoring LED Indicators for RUN, STOP and OPEN Automatic/Manual Reset
Operating Temperature
-10°C to 55°C (-14°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection 251D, 252D 251P
IP40 (NEMA 1) IP65 (NEMA 13)
Terminal Protection
IP20 DIN 0470
Max Conductor Size 251D, 252D 251P
1 x 4mm2 (10AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (10 AWG) solid 1 x 1.1mm2 (18AWG) stranded 1 x 1.5mm2 (16AWG) solid
Case Material
Polycarbonate
Weight 252D 251D 251P
181g (0.4lbs) 450g (1.0lbs) 650g (1.4lbs)
Vibration
0.15mm 10-55Hz
Shock
10g, 11ms half sine
2-103
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Controllers Product Selection Housing Type
Description
Catalogue Number
440F-C251D
35mm DIN Rail Mountable
440F-C252D
Surface Mountable
440F-C251P
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 440F-C251D 130 (5.12) 115 (4.53)
45.5 (1.79)
440F-C252D
75 (2.95)
Pg 16/21
Block Diagram L
N
+Ve X1 X2
F1
Z2
K2 K1
K2
VR
K3
31
E
Logic
K3
G
R -Ve
14
32
K3 K1
K1 K2
K1
12V K2
2-104
13 23
24VDC
~
Z1
118 (4.64)
22.5 (0.88)
86 (3.38)
4 x M4 Mounting Holes
Pg 16/21
115 (4.53) 130 (5.12)
73 (2.87)
120 (4.72)
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
440F-C251P
K1
Q1 Q2 K2
Y 24
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Safety Edges Safedge™ Controllers Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
24V DC
Reset
L1 L2 L3 Z2
X1
23
13
L1 L2 L3
31
L
440F-C251D 440F-C251P
Safedge
Safedge
L +Ve Z1
K1
Z2
+Ve Z1
X1
13
23
31 K1
440F-C251D 440F-C251P
K2
K2 N
-
Ve
42
24
X2 14 K1
N
- Ve
X2
M
K2
24V Ground
N
Series Terminated, Safedge Input, Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Monitored Output
14
24
K1
K2
42
M
Series Terminated, Cascaded, Safedge Input, Automatic Reset, Dual Channel Output, No Output Monitored
+24V DC
+24V DC
Reset
L1 L2 L3 Z1
Z2
X1
13
L1 L2 L3
+
21 Safedge
Safedge
Safedge
+
K1
440F-C252D
Z1
Z2
X1
13
21 K1
440F-C252D
K2
-
X2
24V Ground
14 K1
-
22
K2
X2
M 24V Ground
Parallel Terminated, Safedge Input, Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Monitored Output
14
22
M
K1
Series Terminated, Safedge Input, Automatic Reset, Single Channel Output, No Output Monitored
Accessories Page
Catalogue Number
Fuse, 500mA
Description
14-6
440R-A31562
Fuse, 2A
14-2
440A-A09197
2-105
Presence Sensing Safety Devices
Notes
2-106
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Elf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cadet 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Trojan T15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Trojan 5 & 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 MT-GD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Guard Locking Switches Spartan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 TLS-GD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Atlas 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 440G-MT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Centurion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Ferrogard 3, 4 & 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Ferrogard 6, 9 & 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Ferrogard GD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 Ferrogard GS1 & GS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52 Sipha Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Sipha Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60 Sentinel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64 Ferrocode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Hinge Switches Sprite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 Ensign 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74 Rotacam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Elf Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and BG
Safety Contacts
1 N.C. or 2 N.C. direct opening action
Designation/Utilization Cat. A600/AC-15 (Ue) (Ie) N600/DC-13 (Ue) (Ie)
600V 1.2A 600V 0.4A
500V 240V 120V 1.4A 3A 6A 500V 250V 125V 0.55A 1.1A 2.2A
Description
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
The Elf is a tongue (or key) operated safety interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or liftoff guards. The Elf ’s unique miniature housing (only 75 × 25 × 29mm) makes it the smallest interlock currently available. It is designed for smaller machines such as printers, copiers or domestic machinery which, until now, have been unable to use safety interlocks due to space restrictions.With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, the versatile Elf can offer up to eight different actuator entry options.
Minimum Current
5V 5mA DC
Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a specially profiled stainless steel key that is permanently mounted to the guard door. The semi-flexible key allows the Elf to be used on small radii doors (60mm or 2.36in).
Min Operating Radius
The Elf is available with 2 N.C. or 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. safety contact and conduit entry (1 × M16 or connector style) sealed to IP67 (watertight and dustproof). A blanking plug is supplied for the unused key entry.
Features • • • • •
Ideal for small, light weight guards The smallest interlock switch available Contacts, 2 N.C. or 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install Environmental protection: IP67
Safety Contact Gap
>2mm (0.078in)
Rtd. Impulse withstand Volt.
(Uimp) 2500V
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Pollution Degree ➊
3
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening
3.6mm (0.141in) 150mm (5.90in) 60mm (2.36in) with GD2 kit
Break Contact Min Force
6N (1.35lb)
Max Actuation Speed
160mm (6.29in) per sec
Max Actuation Frequency
2 Cycle per sec
Case Material
UL approved glass filled polyester
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
1 x M16 or quick-disconnect style
Operating Temperature
-20°C to +80°C (-4°F to +176°F)
Fixing
2 x M4
Mounting
Any position
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
60g (2.11oz)
Colour
Red
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation.
Applications Note: Lift-off guards require good alignment when using tongue actuated interlock switches. IMPORTANT: It must not be possible to lift the guard without actuating the interlock. An interlock on either side may be required.
3-2
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Elf Product Selection Catalogue Number Safety Contacts
1 N.C.
Auxiliary Contacts BBM/MBB
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
—
BBM
Actuator
M16 Conduit
M16 Conduit/ 1/2in Adaptor
Quick Disconnect
Flat
440K-E33036
440K-E33029
440K-E33074
90°
440K-E33040
440K-E33030
440K-E33025
GD2 Metal Align. Guide w/Semi-Flex Actuator
—
440K-E33031
440K-E33075
—
440K-E33014
—
440K-E33076
Flat
440K-E33080
440K-E33037
440K-E33077
90°
440K-E33041
440K-E33045
440K-E33024
GD2 Metal Align. Guide w/Semi-Flex Actuator
—
440K-E33046
440K-E33078
—
440K-E33047
—
440K-E33079
—
Recommended mating cable, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-2
Accessories Description
For Dimensions See Page
Catalogue Number
Flat Actuator
14-6
440K-A21014
90° Actuator
14-6
440K-A21006
GD2 Metal Alignment Guide with Semi-Flexible Actuator
14-6
440K-A21030
Alignment Guide
14-6
440K-A21069
Mounting Plate
14-6
440K-A33624
3-3
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Elf Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 75 (2.95)
25 (0.98)
29 (1.14)
End Entry 4 (0.16)
75 (2.95)
4.5 (0.18)
12.5 (0.49)
6 (0.24)
17.5 (0.69)
6 (0.24)
4.5 (0.18)
4 (0.16) R 2.1
Front Entry
13 (0.51)
6 (0.24)
1 x M16
12.5 (0.49)
25 (0.98)
18 (0.71)
3 (0.12) 16.5 (0.65)
34.5 (1.36) 36 (1.42)
Typical Wiring Diagrams (shown with guard closed, actuator inserted) 1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
2 N.C.
23
11
21
11
24
12
22
12
1 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
Terminal 1
11
2 N.C.
Contact
Terminal
Contact
11 N.C.
2
1
3
12
3
4
2
23
Contact Open
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion
21 N.O.
4
Contact Action
24
N.C. 22
1 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM) 6 11/12 23/24
3.8
4.2
3-4
N.C. 12
0mm
2 N.C. 6 11/12 21/22
4
0mm
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Elf Application Details
90° actuator
Head Position 2
Head Position 3 Front entry
Front entry
8 possible actuator entry points
Head Position 4
Side entry
Side entry
Front entry
Head Position 1 Top entry
Front entry
Flat actuator
The head rotates 360° in 90° increments to give 8 possible actuator entry points.
Bottom entry
GD2 Metal Alignment Guide with semi-flexible actuator
3-5
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Cadet 3 Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus, TUV Nord
Safety Contacts
2 N.C. or 3 N.C. direct opening action
Designation/Utilization Cat. A600/AC-15 (Ue) (Ie) N600/DC-13 (Ue) (Ie)
600V 1.2A 600V 0.4A
Description
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
The Cadet 3 is a tongue (or key) operated safety interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, the versatile Cadet 3 can offer up to eight different actuator entry options. The unique compact housing (90.5 x 31 x 30.4mm (3.56 x 1.22 x 1.19in)) has industry standard DIN 50047 fixing centres for ease of mounting.
Min Current
5V 5mA DC
Typical Contact Resistance
5mΩ
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a specially profiled stainless steel key that is permanently mounted to the guard door. A semi-flexible key allows the Cadet 3 to be used on small radii doors (60mm or 2.36in). Available with a variety of contact configurations, the Cadet 3 is sealed to IP67. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused key entry.
Features • • • • • •
Compact size Ideal for small, light weight guards Contacts, 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. or 3 N.C. Sealed to IP67 Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install Industry standard fixing centres to DIN 50047
500V 240V 120V 1.4A 3A 6A 500V 250V 125V 0.55A 1.1A 2.2A
Rtd. Impulse Withstand Volt. (Uimp) 2500V Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Pollution Degree ➊
3
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening
5mm (0.098in)
Min Operating Radius
150mm (5.905in) (60mm (2.36in) with GD2 kit)
Break Contact Min Force
15N (3.38pd)
Max Actuation Speed
160mm (6.299) per sec
Max Actuation Frequency
2 Cycle per sec
Case Material
UL approved glass filled polyester
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
1 x M16 or quick-disconnect style
Operating Temperature
-20°C to + 80°C (-4°F to +176°F)
Fixing
2 x M4
Mounting
Any position
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
80g (0.176lbs)
Colour
Red
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occur which becomes conductive due to condensation.
Applications Note: Lift-off guards require good alignment when using tongue actuated interlock switches. IMPORTANT: It must not be possible to lift the guard without actuating the interlock. An interlock on either side may be required.
3-6
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Cadet 3 Product Selection Catalogue Number Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
3 N.C.
—
BBM/MBB
—
BBM
2 N.C.
M16 Conduit
M16 Conduit/ 1/2in Adaptor
Quick Disconnect
Flat
440K-C21096
440K-C21048
440K-C21090
90°
440K-C21097
440K-C21057
440K-C21091
GD2 Metal Alignment Guide with SemiFlex Actuator
—
440K-C21062
440K-C21092
—
440K-C21070
—
—
Flat
440K-C21098
440K-C21050
440K-C21054
90°
440K-C21061
440K-C21058
440K-C21067
GD2 Metal Alignment Guide with SemiFlex Actuator
—
440K-C21074
440K-C21088
—
440K-C21055
—
—
Flat
440K-C21052
440K-C21093
440K-C21060
90°
440K-C21065
440K-C21094
440K-C21068
GD2 Metal Alignment Guide with SemiFlex Actuator
—
440K-C21095
440K-C21089
—
440K-C21080
—
—
1 N.O.
MBB
Actuator
Recommended mating cable, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-11 for details and additional lengths.
889R-F6ACA-2
Accessories Description
For Dimensions See Page
Catalogue Number
Flat Actuator
14-6
440K-A21014
90° Actuator
14-6
440K-A21006
GD2 Metal Alignment Guide with Semi-Flexible Actuator
14-6
440K-A21030
3-7
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Cadet 3 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 90.5 (3.56)
25.0 (0.98)
22.0 (0.87)
13.0 (0.51)
31.0 (1.22)
20.0 (0.79)
Front Entry
38.4 (1.51) 36.4 (1.43) 34.4 (1.35)
4.5 (0.18) R 2.15 4 (0.16)
13.0 (0.51)
4 (0.16)
4.5 (0.18)
3-8
25.0 (0.98) 30.4 (1.2)
M16 Thread Form
13.0 (0.51)
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Cadet 3 Typical Wiring Diagrams (shown with guard closed, actuator inserted) 2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
3 N.C.
33
21
11
31
21
11
34
22
12
32
22
12
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
Contact Action Contact Open
1
Terminal 11
5
12
2
21
6
22
3
33
4
34
N.C. N.C. N.O.
Terminal 11
3.8
Contact N.C.
12 21
N.C.
22 31
N.C.
32
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM)
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion
3 N.C.
Contact
3 N.C. 3.8
0mm
0mm
11/12 21/22 31/32
11/12 21/22 33/34 4.5
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (MBB) 3.8
0mm
11/12 21/22 33/34 3.3
3-9
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan T15 Specifications
Description The Trojan T15 is a compact universal tongue actuated safety interlock switch designed to fit at the opening edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, movable only by releasing the cover screws, the Trojan T15 can offer four different options for actuator entry.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TUV Nord
Safety Contacts
2 N.C. or 1 N.C. direct opening action
Designation/Utilization Cat. A600/AC-15 (Ue) (Ie) N600/DC-13 (Ue) (Ie)
600V 1.2A 600V 0.4A
Max. Switched Current/ Voltage/Load
500V/500VA
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Min Current
5V 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
>2 x 2mm (0.078in)
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
500V 240V 120V 1.4A 3A 6A 500V 250V 125V 0.55A 1.1A 2.2A
The Trojan T15 features a compact housing, only 75 x 52 x 32mm (2.95 x 2.04 x 1.25in) and includes direct opening action contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism. The Trojan T15 has 2 N.C. safety contacts or 1 N.C. safety contact and 1 N.O. auxiliary contact. The unit is sealed to IP67 and has three M20 conduit entries.
Rtd. Impulse Withstand Volt. (Uimp) 2500V Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Pollution Degree ➊
3
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening
6mm (0.236in)
Operation of the switch is achieved by the insertion of the specially profiled stainless steel actuator which should be permanently fixed to the leading edge of the guard door. The standard T15 incorporates actuator retention force of 30N. An optional catch mechanism helps keep doors shut on vibrating machinery.
Min Operating Radius
175mm (6.89in) 60mm (2.36in) with flexible actuator
Break Contact Min Force
30N (6.7lb)
Max Actuation Speed
160mm (6.29) per sec
Max Actuation Frequency
2 Cycle per sec
Features
Case Material
UL approved glass filled polybutylene terephthalate
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
• • • • •
Compact size, 75 x 52 x 32mm (2.95 x 2.05 x 1.26in) case 30N actuator retention force Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications Contacts: 2 N.C. safety or 1 N.C. safety & 1 N.O. auxiliary GD2 style available for demanding applications
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
3 x M20 or quick disconnect style
Operating Temperature
-20°C to +80°C (-4°F to +176°F)
Fixing
2 x M5
Mounting
Any position
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
120g (0.265lbs)
Colour
Red
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occur which becomes conductive due to condensation.
Applications Note: Lift-off guards require good alignment when using tongue actuated interlock switches. IMPORTANT: It must not be possible to lift the guard without actuating the interlock. An interlock on either side may be required.
3-10
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan T15 Product Selection Contacts Model Type
Safety
2 N.C.
M20 Conduit
Aux.
—
Standard 1 N.C.
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
—
GD2 Front Entry 1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Quick Disconnect
Actuator
Standard
1/2in NPT Adaptor
End Entry
Standard
440K-T11303
440K-T11267
440K-T11307
Fully-Flex
440K-T11395
440K-T11273
440K-T11384
—
440K-T11269
—
440K-T11385
Standard
440K-T11305
440K-T11268
440K-T11386
Fully-Flex
440K-T11396
440K-T11276
440K-T11387
—
440K-T11270
—
440K-T11388
Standard
440K-T11463
440K-T11288
440K-T11389
Fully-Flex
440K-T11397
440K-T11287
440K-T11390
—
440K-T11280
—
440K-T11391
Standard
440K-T11398
440K-T11284
440K-T11392
Fully-Flex
440K-T11399
440K-T11283
440K-T11393
—
440K-T11279
—
440K-T11394
Recommended mating cable, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-2
Accessories Description
For Dimensions See Page
Catalogue Number
Standard Actuator (Standard model only)
14-5
440K-A11238
GD2 Standard Actuator (GD2 model only)
14-4
440G-A27011
Flat Actuator
14-5
440K-A11112
3-11
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan T15 Accessories (continued) Description
For Dimensions refer to page
Catalogue Number
14-5
440K-A11144
14-6
440K-A27010
Sliding Bolt Actuator
14-4
440G-A27163
Catch and Retainer Kit (Standard Model Only)
14-4
440K-A11094
Alignment Guide with Semi-Flexible Actuator (Discard the Alignment Guide for GD2)
Alignment Guide with Fully-Flexible Actuator (Discard the Alignment Guide for GD2)
Optional Items Alignment Guide and Flexible Actuator
Catch and Retainer
Plug In Connection
Used to keep guards on vibrating machinery closed. The quick-disconnect option allows a quick connection facility.
For use with flexible actuator
3-12
15° flexibility in any direction
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan T15 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
52 40 (1.57) (2.05)
20.5 (0.81)
5.5 (0.22) Fixing holes for M5 screws
5 (0.2) GD2 Guides 5 (0.2)
32 (1.26)
31 (1.22)
15 (0.59)
13 (0.51) 16 (0.62) 5.5 (0.22)
33.4 (1.31)
20.5 (0.81)
15.75 (0.62)
41 (1.61) 75 (2.95)
Typical Wiring Diagrams (shown with guard closed, actuator inserted) 2 N.C.
1 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM)
23
11
21
11
24
12
22
12
1 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
Terminal 1
2 N.C.
Contact
11
Terminal
Contact
11 N.C.
2
1
3
12
3
4
2
23
Contact Open
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion
21 N.O.
4
Contact Action
N.C. 12
24
N.C. 22 2 N.C.
1 N.C. & 1 N.O. (BBM) 20 11/12 23/24
15
10
6
0mm
20 11/12 21/22
15
10
6
0mm
6.5
3-13
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan 5 & 6 Specifications
Description The Trojan family is a universal tongue (or key) actuated safety interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. The dual key entry slots and rotatable head, movable only by releasing the cover screws, allow four actuator entry options. The Trojan contains all of the safety related functions—i.e., forced guided contacts, tamper resistant mechanism—allowing the machine to be safeguarded in compliance with the machine directive.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and BG
Safety Contacts
4 N.C. or 3 N.C. or 2 N.C. direct opening action
Designation/Utilization Cat. AC (Ue) (Ie) DC
500V 250V 100V 1A 2A 5A 250V 0.5A 24V 2A
Max Switched Current/ Voltage/Load
500V/500VA
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Min Current
5V 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
>2 x 2mm (0.078in)
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Voltage
(Uimp) 2500V
Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a specially profiled stainless steel key that is permanently mounted to the leading edge of the guard door. The Trojan actuator includes a self-ejecting mechanism that prevents operation of the switch if the actuator is not mounted to the guard door (e.g., if the operator uses a spare key).
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O. or 2 N.O.
Pollution Degree ➊
3
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening
6mm (0.23in)
Min Operating Radius
175mm (6.89in) (60mm) (2.36in) with flexible actuator)
The Trojan 6 is available with either 4 N.C. safety contacts, 3 N.C. safety contacts and 1 N.O. auxiliary contact or 2 N.C. safety contacts and 2 N.O. auxiliary contacts. The unit is sealed to IP67 and has three M20 conduit entries.
Break Contact Min Force
20N (4.5lb)
Max Actuation Speed
160mm (6.29in) per sec
Max Actuation Frequency
2 Cycle per sec
Case Material
UL approved glass filled polyester
Features
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
• Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications • Self-ejecting tamper resistant actuator, only operates when mounted to the guard • Four possible actuator entry points, easy to install • GD2 style available for demanding applications • Conforms to EN1088, EN292, EN60947-5-1, EN60204-1
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
3 x M20 or quick disconnect style
Operating Temperature
-20°C to +80°C (-4°F to +176°F)
Fixing
2 x M5
Mounting
Any position
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
160g (0.35lbs)
Colour
Red
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occur which becomes conductive due to condensation.
3-14
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan 5 & 6 Product Selection
Contacts Model Type
Safety
Aux.
BBM/ MBB
BBM
BBM Gold Contacts
Trojan 5 Standard
MBB 2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM Trojan 5 GD2 Front Entry MBB
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect
Actuator
M20 Conduit
1/2in NPT Adaptor
End
Standard
440K-T11090
440K-T11202
440K-T11205
Guide/Semi-Flex
440K-T11110
440K-T11203
440K-T11206
Guide/Fully-Flex
440K-T11467
440K-T11204
440K-T11207
—
440K-T11089
—
440K-T11129
Standard
440K-T11085
—
—
Standard
440K-T11118
440K-T11208
440K-T11224
Guide/Semi-Flex
440K-T11123
440K-T11209
440K-T11363
Guide/Fully-Flex
440K-T11468
440K-T11210
440K-T11364
—
440K-T11146
440K-T11469
440K-T11365
GD2 Standard
440K-T11336
440K-T11211
440K-T11366
Guide/Semi-Flex
440K-T11337
440K-T11212
440K-T11367
Guide/Fully-Flex
440K-T11338
440K-T11213
440K-T11368
—
440K-T11147
—
440K-T11226
Standard
440K-T11339
440K-T11470
440K-T11369
Guide/Semi-Flex
440K-T11340
440K-T11471
440K-T11370
Guide/Fully-Flex
440K-T11341
440K-T11472
440K-T11371
—
440K-T11167
—
440K-T11372
Recommended mating cable for Trojan 5, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-11 for details and additional lengths.
889R-F6ACA-2
3-15
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan 5 & 6 Product Selection (continued)
Contacts Model Type
Safety
3 N.C.
Aux.
1 N.O.
BBM/ MBB
BBM
MBB Trojan 6 Standard 2 N.C.
4 N.C.
3 N.C.
2 N.O.
—
1 N.O.
BBM
4 N.C.
—
1/2in NPT Adaptor
End Entry
Standard
440K-T11171
440K-T11435
440K-T11403
Semi-Flex
440K-T11436
440K-T11405
440K-T11404
Fully-Flex
440K-T11437
440K-T11406
440K-T11407
—
440K-T11449
440K-T11408
440K-T11409
—
440K-T11450
440K-T11465
440K-T11451
Standard
440K-T11174
440K-T11438
440K-T11410
Semi-Flex
440K-T11439
440K-T11412
440K-T11411
Fully-Flex
440K-T11440
440K-T11413
440K-T11414
—
440K-T11452
440K-T11416
440K-T11415
—
440K-T11453
440K-T11454
440K-T11455
—
—
440K-T11441
440K-T11172
440K-T11417
BBM
Trojan 6 GD2 Front Entry 2 N.O.
BBM
Standard
440K-T11418
440K-T11466
440K-T11419
Guide/Semi-Flex
440K-T11442
440K-T11420
440K-T11421
Guide/Fully-Flex
440K-T11443
440K-T11423
440K-T11422
—
440K-T11188
440K-T11444
440K-T11424
—
440K-T11456
440K-T11457
440K-T11458
Standard
440K-T11445
440K-T11425
440K-T11426
Guide/Semi-Flex
440K-T11446
440K-T11428
440K-T11427
Guide/Fully-Flex
440K-T11447
440K-T11429
440K-T11430
—
440K-T11459
440K-T11433
440K-T11434
MBB
—
440K-T11460
440K-T11461
440K-T11462
—
—
440K-T11448
440K-T11432
440K-T11431
Recommended mating cable for Trojan 6, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
3-16
Quick Disconnect
M20 Conduit
MBB
MBB
2 N.C.
M20 Conduit Actuator
889D-F8AB-2
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan 5 & 6 Accessories Description
For Dimensions refer to page
Catalogue Number
Standard Actuator (Standard Model Only)
14-5
440K-A11095
GD2 Standard Actuator (GD2 Model Only)
14-4
440G-A27011
Flat Actuator
14-5
440K-A11112
Alignment Guide with Semi-flexible Actuator
14-5
440K-A11144
14-6
440K-A27010
14-4
440G-A27163
14-4
440K-A11094
(Discard the Alignment Guide for GD2)
Alignment Guide with Fully-flexible Actuator (Discard the Alignment Guide for GD2)
Sliding Bolt Actuator (GD2 Model Only)
Catch and Retainer Kit (Standard Model Only)
3-17
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan 5 & 6 Approximate Dimensions—mm (in) Standard Model
32 (1.26)
End Entry
5.5 (0.22)
14
9 (0.35)
(0.55)
3 (0.12)
15.75 (0.62)
20.5 (0.81)
5 (0.2)
3 (0.12)
95 (3.74)
24 (0.94)
5 (0.2)
20.5
(0.81)
40 (1.57)
52 (2.05)
5.5 (0.22) Front Entry
15.75 (0.62) 46 (1.81) 7 (0.28)
GD2 Model
Mounting Holes
for M5 Screws 8 (0.31)
32 (1.26)
36 (1.42)
5
32 (1.26)
End Entry
9 (0.35)
14 (0.55) 5.5 3
(0.12)
15.75 (0.62)
20.5
(0.81)
3
6 (0.24)
95 (3.74)
(0.12) 24 (0.94)
5 (0.2) 5.5 (0.22)
20.5
(0.81)
40 (1.57)
52 (2.05)
Front Entry
15.75 (0.62) 46 (1.81) 7 (0.28)
3-18
Mounting Holes for M5 Screws 8 (0.31)
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches Trojan 5 & 6 Typical Wiring Diagrams Trojan 5 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
34
Auxiliary Circuit (N.O.) Safety Circuit 2 (N.C.) Safety Circuit 1 (N.C.)
33
22
21
12
11
1
Terminal 11
5
12
2
21
6
22
3
33
4
34
Contact N.C. N.C. N.O.
Contact Action Contact Open
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM) 20 15 10 5 0mm 11/12 21/22 33/34 5.5
Contact Closed
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (MBB) 20 15 10 5 0mm 11/12 21/22 33/34 4.8
Trojan 6 4 N.C.
3 N.C. + 1 N.O.
42
41
Safety Circuit 4 (N.C.)
44
43
Auxiliary Circuit (N.O.)
44
43
Auxiliary Circuit 2 (N.O.)
32
31
Safety Circuit 3 (N.C.)
32
31
Safety Circuit 3 (N.C.)
34
33
Auxiliary Circuit 1 (N.O.)
22
21
Safety Circuit 2 (N.C.)
22
21
Safety Circuit 2 (N.C.)
22
21
Safety Circuit 2 (N.C.)
12
11
Safety Circuit 1 (N.C.)
12
11
Safety Circuit 1 (N.C.)
12
11
Safety Circuit 1 (N.C.)
4 N.C. Connector Pinout
1 2
7 8
3
4
6 5
2 N.C. + 2 N.O.
1
Terminal 11
7
12
6
21
5
22
4
31
3
32
8
41
2
42
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. Contact N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
Terminal 11
Contact
12 21 22 31 32 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O.
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. Terminal 11 12 21 22 33 34 43 44
Contact N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O.
Contact Action Contact Open
Contact Closed 20 11/12 21/22 31/32 41/42
15
4 N.C. 10
3.8
3.8
0mm
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM) 20 15 10 3.8 11/12 21/22 31/32 43/44 4.1
0mm
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. (MBB) 20 15 10 4.3 0mm 11/12 21/22 33/34 43/44 3.2
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. (BBM) 20 15 10 3.6 0mm 11/12 21/22 33/34 43/44 3.9
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. (MBB) 20 15 10 4.3 0mm 11/12 21/22 33/34 43/44 3.6
3-19
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches MT-GD2 Specifications
Description The MT-GD2 is a robust tongue actuated safety interlock switch designed to fit at the opening edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, the MT-GD2 can offer eight different options for actuator entry. The MT-GD2 features a compact housing of only 117mm x 40mm x 43mm with DIN 50041 standard fixing centres and includes forced guided contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TUV Nord
Safety Contacts
2 N.C., 3 N.C., 4 N.C. direct opening action
Utilization Rating
AC 15
Designation/Utilization Cat. A600/AC-15 (Ue) (Ie) N600/DC-13 (Ue) (Ie)
600V 1.2A 600V 0.4A
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Min Current
5V, 5mA DC
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
500V 240V 120V 1.4A 3A 6A 500V 250V 125V 0.55A 1.1A 2.2A
Rtd. Impulse Withstand Volt. (Uimp) 2500V Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O. or 2 N.O.
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening Break Contact Min Force
6mm (0.24in)
Max Actuation Speed
1m/s
Max Actuation Frequency
2 cycle per sec
Case Material
Painted zinc
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
1/2in NPT or M20 or Quick Disconnect
Operating Temperature
-20°C to +80°C (-4°F to +176°F)
Fixing
4 x M5
Mounting
Any position
Features
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
• • • • • •
Weight
520g (1.15lbs)
Colour
Red
The MT-GD2 is available with a variety of contact configurations enabling it to be used as part of a system for higher-risk applications. The unit is sealed to IP67 and has 1 conduit entry. Operation of the switch is achieved by the insertion of the specially profiled stainless steel actuator which should be permanently fixed to the leading edge of the guard door. An optional flexible actuator allows the MT-GD2 to operate on smaller radii doors (≥60mm) and a flat actuator gives additional mounting options. A style incorporating a latch release mechanism allows manual retention of the actuator in the switch until the release mechanism is manually activated.
Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install Variety of contact configurations Optional latch release styles Industry standard fixing centres to DIN/EN50041 Conforms to EN1088, EN292, EN60947-5-1, EN60204-1, EN50041
12N (2.7lb)
Torque Settings Fixing Bolts 1.6Nm Lid Screws 16.Nm Terminal Screws 1.0Nm Note: The safety contacts of the Guardmaster switches are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
MT-GD2 Latch Release Style
3-20
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches MT-GD2 Product Selection Contacts Type
Safety
3 N.C.
MT-GD2
MT-GD2 Latch Release
2 N.C.
Catalogue Number
Auxiliary BBM/MBB
1 N.O.
BBM
2 N.O.
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
4 N.C.
—
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
4 N.C.
—
MBB
BBM
MBB —
Actuator
M20 Conduit
1/2in NPT Conduit
Quick Disconnect
—
440K-MT55002
440K-MT55085
440K-MT55094
Standard
440K-MT55074
440K-MT55022
440K-MT55095
Fully-Flexible
440K-MT55075
440K-MT55029
440K-MT55096
—
440K-MT55005
440K-MT55086
440K-MT55097
Standard
440K-MT55076
440K-MT55026
440K-MT55098
Fully-Flexible
440K-MT55077
440K-MT55087
440K-MT55099
440K-MT55004
440K-MT55088
440K-MT55100
440K-MT55006
440K-MT55089
440K-MT55101
440K-MT55093
440K-MT55090
440K-MT55102
—
—
440K-MT55039
440K-MT55062
440K-MT55042
Standard
440K-MT55078
440K-MT55041
440K-MT55070
Fully-Flexible
440K-MT55079
440K-MT55045
440K-MT55103
—
440K-MT55063
440K-MT55065
440K-MT55066
Standard
440K-MT55080
440K-MT55050
440K-MT55104
Fully-Flexible
440K-MT55081
440K-MT55051
440K-MT55052
440K-MT55082
440K-MT55091
440K-MT55106
440K-MT55083
440K-MT55092
440K-MT55105
440K-MT55084
440K-MT55060
440K-MT55061
—
Mating cable 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-13 for details and additional lengths.
889M-F12X9AE-2
3-21
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches MT-GD2 Accessories Description
For Dimensions refer to page
Catalogue Number
GD2 Standard Actuator
14-4
440G-A27011
Flat Actuator
14-5
440K-A11112
Fully-Flexible Actuator
14-4
440G-A27143
Sliding Bolt Actuator
14-4
440G-A27163
Extended Flat Actuator
14-5
440K-A17116
Typical Applications Note: Lift-off guards require good alignment when using tongue actuated interlock switches. IMPORTANT: It must not be possible to lift the guard without actuating the interlock. An interlock on either side may be required.
3-22
Interlock Switches
Tongue Switches MT-GD2 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. MT-GD2
MT-GD2 Latch Release 119 (4.68) 118.5 (4.66)
11.5 (0.45)
Front Entry
10.5 (0.41)
116.5 (4.59) 40.7 (1.6)
24.6 (0.97)
End Entry 5 (0.20) 9.2 (0.36) 30.8 (1.21)
20.5 (0.81)
8.75 (0.34)
51 (2.0)
43 (1.69)
60 (2.36) 102.4 (4.03)
30.8 (1.21)
43 (1.69)
10.5 (0.41)
22 (0.86) Dia.
40 (1.57) 30 (1.18)
38 (1.5)
20.5 (0.81)
40 (1.57) 30 (1.18)
8.75 (0.34)
74.6 (2.93) 30.8 (1.21)
5 (0.20)
60 (2.36)
67.6 (2.66)
4 x Fixing Holes Clearance for M5
5 (0.20)
9.2 (0.36)
20.6 (0.81)
Typical Wiring Diagrams (shown with guard closed, actuator inserted) 4 N.C.
3 N.C. + 1 N.O.
41
31
21
11
41
31
21
11
41
31
21
11
42
32
22
12
42
32
22
12
42
32
22
12
4 N.C. Connector Pinout
9
8 7
2 N.C. + 2 N.O.
12
1 10 2
11
6 5
1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 12
3 4
Terminal
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. Contact
11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42
Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
2 N.C. + 2 N.O.
Contact
Terminal
Contact
11 12 21 22 33 34 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O.
N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O.
Ground
Contact Action Contact Open
4 N.C.
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion
20
15
10
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. (MBB) 5
11/12 21/22 31/32 41/42
0mm
20
15
10
5.6
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (MBB) 0mm
11/12 21/22 31/32 43/44
20
15
10
5.6
0mm
11/12 21/22 33/34 43/44 5.2
5.2
5.2
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM) 20
15
10
11/12 21/22 31/32 43/44
5.2
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM) 20
0mm
15
10
5.2
0mm
11/12 21/22 33/34 43/44 5.6
5.6
3-23
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Spartan Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TUV Nord
Safety Contact
2 N.C. or 3 N.C. direct opening action
Utilization Cat.
Description
AC 15 AC (Ue) 500V 250V 100V (le) 1A 2A 5A DC 250V/0.5A 24V/2A
Maximum Switched Current/ 500V/500VA Volt/Load
The Spartan is a positive mode, tongue operated guard locking interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is isolated and ensures that it remains isolated while the guard is open. It is available in two contact configurations: two safety (N.C.) contacts and one auxiliary (N.O.) contact or three safety (N.C.) contacts. The Spartan head has two entry slots and it can be rotated to provide four actuator entry points. A blanking plug is provided to seal the unused slot.
Thermal Current (lth)
The guard may only be opened when a signal is applied to the Spartan’s internal solenoid which releases the lock mechanism. Therefore the Spartan is ideal for machines which do not stop immediately or where premature interruption of the machine could cause damage to tooling and components or cause an additional hazard.
Max Actuation Speed
160mm/second (6.3 in/sec)
Max Actuation Frequency
1 cycle/second
Protection
IP 67
The locking mechanism withstands forces up to of 1200N (270lbs.) and an LED provides visual indication of switch status.
Conduit Entry
1 x M20 or quick disconnect style
A catch kit with actuator alignment is also supplied to relieve stress on the locking solenoid and to protect the unit from actuator damage due to poor guard alignment. Manual release points with security screws or special key allow the locked Spartan to be released in the event of total power failure on a machine.
Features • • • • •
Power to release Lid mounted status indication High locking force—1200N (270lbs.) 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 3 N.C. Rotatable head: 4 possible key entry slots
10A
Min Current
5V 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
>2mm
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Volt
2500V
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Pollution Degree ➊
3
Case Material
UL Approved glass filled polyester
Actuator Material
Stainless steel
Operating Temperature
-20°C to 60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
Fixing
2 x M5
Mounting
Any position
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
260g (0.57 lb)
Colour
Red
Max Holding Force
1200N (270lbs)
Min Operating Radius
175mm (6.9in)
LED Indication
Solenoid monitor LED
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC (solenoid)
Solenoid Power
Typically 7W 100% ED
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation.
Typical Applications Note: Lift-off guards require good alignment when using tongue actuated interlock switches. IMPORTANT: It must not be possible to lift the guard without actuating the interlock. An interlock on either side may be required.
3-24
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Spartan Product Selection Contacts Actuator
Solenoid Voltage 24 V AC/DC
Standard
110 V AC/DC
230V AC/DC
Catalogue Number
Safety
Aux.
M20 Conduit
M20 Conduit/ 1/2in Adaptor
Quick Disconnect
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
440G-S36001
440G-S36044
440G-S36058
3 N.C.
—
440G-S36007
440G-S36047
440G-S36059
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
440G-S36003
440G-S36045
440G-S36060
3 N.C.
--
440G-S36009
440G-S36048
440G-S36061
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
440G-S36005
440G-S36046
440G-S36062
3 N.C.
—
440G-S36011
440G-S36049
440G-S36063
Mating cable 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-13 for details and additional lengths.
889M-F12X9AE-2
Accessories Description
For Dimensions refer to page
Catalogue Number
Replacement Actuator with Catch Retainer and Guide
14-4
440G-A36050
Emergency Override
14-4
440G-A36026
3-25
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Spartan Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 14.5 (0.57)
12 (0.47) 120 (4.72)
40 (1.57)
37 (1.46)
14 (0.55)
31 (1.22)
35 (1.38)
Conduit Entry (M20)
8 (0.31)
9 (0.35) Emergency Release Points
5 (0.2)
20.5 (0.81)
58 (2.28) 52 (2.05) 40 (1.57)
7 (0.28)
Key
8 (0.3)
Ø5.5 (0.22)
5.5 (0.22) 34.5 (1.36)
Typical Wiring Diagrams 2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
3 N.C.
Auxiliary Circuit Safety Circuit 2
Safety Circuit 3
22
34
33
Safety Circuit 2
21
Safety Circuit 1
22 32
31
12
11
21
Safety Circuit 1
12
AC/DC Solenoid Power
A2
11
AC/DC Solenoid Power
A2
A1
Solenoid AC/DC 100% ED.
Solenoid AC/DC 100% ED.
A1
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
9
8 7
12
1 10 2
11
6 5
3 4
1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10
Contact
Terminal
Contact
A1 A2 11 12 21 22 33 34
Solenoid Power
A1 A2 11 12 21 22 31 32
Solenoid Power
Contact Action Contact Open
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion
N.C. N.C. N.O.
0mm
6
N.C. N.C. N.C. 3 N.C.
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. 12 11/12 21/22 33/34
2.5
3-26
3 N.C.
Terminal
12 11/12 21/22 33/34
6
0mm
2.5
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Spartan Application Details 4 possible actuator entry positions
1 2
Locking Force = ≤1200N
3-27
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches TLS-GD2 Specifications Shown with optional Key Release Kit
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus, BG and TUV
Safety Contacts
(TLS 1 & 2) 3 N.C. direct opening action (TLS 3) 4 N.C. direct opening action
Utilization Cat.
Description The TLS-GD2 is a positive mode, tongue operated guard locking interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is isolated and ensures that it remains isolated while the guard is open. It has three safety (N.C.) contacts and two auxiliary (N.O.) contacts. The TLS-GD2 head has two entry slots and it can be rotated to provide four actuator entry points. A blanking plug is provided to seal the unused slot. The guard may only be opened when a signal is applied to the TLSGD2’s internal solenoid which releases the lock mechanism. Therefore the TLS-GD2 is ideal for machines which do not stop immediately or where premature interruption of the machine could cause damage to tooling and components or cause an additional hazard.
AC 15 AC (Ue) 500V 250V 100V (le) 1A 2A 5A DC 250V 0.5A, 24V 2A
Max Switched Current/Volt/ Load
500V/500VA
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Min Current
5V 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
>2mm
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Volt
(Uimp) 2500V
Auxiliary Contacts
(TLS 1 & 2) 2 N.O. (1 solenoid monitoring) (TLS 3 1 N.O.)
Pollution Degree
3
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening
7mm (0.28in)
Break Contact Min Force
12N (2.7lbs)
The TLS-GD2 is available in three types. Aside from the standard style, the TLS-1 GD2 and TLS-3GD2 incorporate a power-torelease function. Three manual release points with security screws allow the locked TSL-GD2 to be released in emergencies. An optional lid-mounted key-release style can also be supplied. All types have five sets of contacts in various forms and are suitable for use with PLCs.
Max Actuation Speed
160mm per sec (6.3ins per sec)
Max Actuation Frequency
1 Cycle per sec
Case Material
UL approved glass filled polyester
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
A stainless steel actuator guide is fitted to protect the unit from actuator damage due to poor guard alignment or guard wear.
Operating Temperature
-20°C to + 60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
Mounting
4 x M5
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
3 x M20 or quick-disconnect style
Fixing
Any position
Locking
TLS1 & 3 power to release TLS2 power to lock
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Features
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
• Power to release or power to lock • High locking force ≤2000N (450lbs.) • Five contacts: 2 N.C.& 1 N.O. for door position monitoring 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 2 N.C. for lock monitoring • Rotatable head: 4 possible key entry slots • Conforms to EN1088 & EN60947-5-1
Weight
400g (.88lbs)
Colour
Red
Max Holding Force
2000N (450lbs.)
Max Releasable Load
100N (22.5lbs)
Min Operating Radius
160mm (6.3in) (80mm with flexible actuator) (3.15in)
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC (solenoid)
Solenoid Power
Typically 7W 100% ED
Note: With the ‘power to lock’ style, provisions may be required to ensure that a dangerous situation can not result from open circuit faults or power cuts.
Note: The safety contacts of the Guardmaster switches are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
3-28
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches TLS-GD2 Product Selection Contacts Type
Safety
Aux.
Solenoid Contacts
Voltage
24V AC/DC TLS-1 GD2 Power to Release
110V AC/DC
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
230V AC/DC
24V AC/DC TLS-2 GD2 Power to Lock
2 N.C.
TLS-3 GD2 Power to Release
1 N.O. 110V AC/DC
Catalogue Number Actuator
M20 Conduit
M20 Conduit/ 1/2in Adaptor
Quick Disconnect
—
440G-T27121
—
440G-T27233
Standard
440G-T27251
440G-T27169
440G-T27234
Fully Flex
440G-T27252
440G-T27171
440G-T27235
—
440G-T27124
—
440G-T27236
Standard
440G-T27253
440G-T27172
440G-T27237
Fully Flex
440G-T27254
440G-T27174
440G-T27238
—
440G-T27123
—
—
—
440G-T27127
—
440G-T27239
Standard
440G-T27255
440G-T27175
440G-T27240
Fully Flex
440G-T27256
440G-T27177
440G-T27241
—
440G-T27132
--
440G-T27242
Standard
440G-T27257
440G-T27178
440G-T27243
Fully Flex
440G-T27258
440G-T27180
440G-T27244
230V AC/DC
—
440G-T27129
—
—
—
440G-T27134
—
440G-T27245
24V AC/DC
Standard
440G-T27259
440G-T27181
440G-T27246
Fully Flex
440G-T27260
440G-T27183
440G-T27247
2 N.C. 110V AC/DC
230V AC/DC
—
440G-T27138
—
440G-T27248
Standard
440G-T27261
440G-T27184
440G-T27249
Fully Flex
440G-T27262
440G-T27186
440G-T27250
—
440G-T27136
—
—
Mating cable for TLS-3 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-13 for details and additional lengths. Mating cable for TLS-1 & TLS-2 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-13 for details and additional lengths.
889M-F12X9AE-2 889M-F12AH-2
Applications Note: Lift-off guards require good alignment when using tongue actuated interlock switches. IMPORTANT: It must not be possible to lift the guard without actuating the interlock. An interlock on either side may be required.
3-29
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches TLS-GD2 Accessories Description
Locking Cover
3-30
For Dimensions refer to page
Catalogue Number
TLS-GD2 Standard Actuator
14-4
440G-A27011
Flat Actuator
14-5
440K-A11112
Fully-Flexible Actuator
14-4
440G-A27143
Sliding Bolt Actuator
14-4
440G-A27163
For TLS-1 with external override key
—
440G-A27140
For TLS-3 with external override key
—
440G-A27142
For TLS-1 with override key attached
—
440G-A27207
For TLS-3 with override key attached
—
440G-A27208
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches TLS-GD2 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
5 (0.2)
Optional Key Release
126 (4.96) 105 (4.13)
Switch 6 (0.24)
14 (0.55)
25.5 (1)
14 (0.55)
22 (0.87) 27 (1.06) 37 (1.46)
20.5 (0.81) 33 (1.3)
43 (1.69)
9 (0.35)
6.5 (0.26)
5 (0.2) 21 17 (0.83) (0.67)
3 (0.12)
5.5 (0.22)
6.5 (0.26)
5 (0.2)
M5
21 (0.83)
73 (2.87)
86 (3.39) 57 (2.24)
17 (0.67)
2 x M5
15 (0.59) 30 (1.18) 3 (0.12)
6.5 (0.26)
4 (0.16)
52.5 (2.07) 60.5 (2.38) 67.5 (2.66)
Typical Wiring Diagram TLS-1 & TLS-2 Connector Pinout
9
8 7
12
1 10 2
11
6 5
3 4
1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 2 5
Contact
Terminal
Contact
A1 A2 11 42 21 22 33 34 53 54
Solenoid Power
A1 A2 11 42 21 52 33 34
Solenoid Power
—
—
Contact Action Contact Open
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion
TLS-3
Terminal
N.C. N.C. N.O. N.C.
N.C. N.C. N.O.
TLS-1 & TLS-2 AC/DC A2 A1 100% ED. 54 42
34 53 22
33 21 11
41 12
TLS-1 GD2 20 6.6 3 0mm 41/42 11/12 21/22 33/34 53/54 Closed when power on
TLS-3 AC/DC A2 A1 100% ED. 51 52 42 41
TLS-2 GD2 20 41/42 11/12 21/22 33/34 53/54
34 22 12
33 21 11
TLS-3 GD2
6.6 3 0mm Closed when power on Open when power on
20 41/42 51/52 33/34 11/12 21/22
6.6 3
0mm
3-31
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Atlas 5 Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and CSA
Safety Contacts Atlas 5 2 N.C. direct opening action 1 N.O. direct opening action Atlas 5 trapped key (left hand) 2 N.C. direct opening action 1 N.O. direct opening action Utilization Cat.
Description The Atlas 5 is a positive mode, tongue operated guard locking interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is isolated and ensures that it remains isolated while the guard is open. The guard may only be opened when a signal is applied to the internal solenoid which releases the lock mechanism. A heavy-duty switch, the Atlas 5 locking mechanism withstands forces up to 5500N (1236lbs.) and the die-cast alloy housing is ideal for use in harsh environments. A unique feature of the Atlas 5 is its patented selfaligning head that tolerates actuator or guard misalignment, making it particularly useful for heavy machine guards.
AC 15 AC (Ue) 500V 250V 100V (le) 1A 2A 5A DC 250V 0.5A, 24V 2A
Maximum Switched Current/ Volt/Load
500V 500VA
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Min Current
5V. 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
> 2mm contact block
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Volt
(Uimp) 2500V
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
The Atlas 5 is designed for machines that do not stop immediately or where premature interruption of the machine could cause damage to tooling and components or cause an additional hazard. With 2 safety (N.C.) contacts and 2 auxiliary (N.O.) contact, Atlas 5 is ideal for PLC controlled machines.
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening
8mm (.31in.)
Break Contact Min Force
12N (2.7 lbs)
Max Actuation Speed
160mm per sec (6.3 in. per sec)
Max Actuation Frequency
2 Cycle per sec
Features
Case Material
Die cast alloy
• • • •
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Protection
IP65
Conduit Entry
3 x M20 or 3 x 1/2in NPT or quick disconnect
Mechanical lock High locking force—5500N (1236lbs.) Heavy duty die-cast alloy housing ideal for harsh environments Patented self-aligning head tolerates actuator misalignment
3-32
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +60°C (14°F to +140°F)
Fixing
4 x M5
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
1200g (2.65lbs)
Colour
Red
Max Holding Force
5500N (1236lbs)
Min Operating Radius
300mm end entry, 800mm entry front
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC (solenoid)
Solenoid Power
13W typical 100% ED
Solenoid Rating
100% duty
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Atlas 5 Product Selection Contacts Type
Actuator
Safety
Standard Atlas 5
Standard
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
LH Key Lock
Catalogue Number
Solenoid Voltage
M20 Conduit
1/2in NPT
Quick Disconnect
24V AC/DC
440G-L07264
440G-L07258
440G-L07298
110V AC/DC
440G-L07263
440G-L07257
440G-L07299
230V AC/DC
440G-L07262
440G-L07256
440G-L07300
Aux.
24V AC/DC
440G-L07255
440G-L07249
440G-L07301
110V AC/DC
440G-L07254
440G-L07248
440G-L07302
230V AC/DC
440G-L07253
440G-L07247
440G-L07303
M23 mating cable 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-13 for details and additional lengths.
889M-F12AH-2
Accessories Description
For Dimensions refer to page
Catalogue Number
Standard Actuator
14-3
440G-A07136
Replacement End Cap
14-3
440G-A07180
Fully Flex Actuator
14-3
440G-A07269
3-33
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Atlas 5 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. ) (31.5 800 R Min
12 (0.47)
2 Manual Lock Release Points
56 (2.2)
56 (2.2)
23 (0.91) 5 (0.2) 10 (0.39)
52 (2) Ctrs
17 (0.67)
23 (0.91)
Lock 30 (1.18)
Unlock
4 X M5
14 (0.55)
13 (0.51)
163 (6.4) Ctrs 184 (7.24)
5 (0.2)
43 (1.69)
25 (0.98)
12 (0.47)
56 (2.2)
16 (0.63) 5 (0.2)
LH Key Lock style Only
R Min 300 (11
.8)
80 (3.15)
90 (3.54)
16 (0.63)
Front Entry Actuator Hole
25 (0.98)
95 (3.74)
Typical Wiring Diagrams Aux
Aux
Safety
Safety
Guard Open—Solenoid De-energized
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AC/DC Solenoid Supply Terminal Configuration Machine in Run Condition
8 A1 A2 E
A1 A2 AC/DC 100% ED. 5 7 1
2
3
6 8 4
Lid Illumination Only
Connector Pinout
9
8 7
12 11
6 5
3-34
1 10 2 3 4
1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 5 2 12
Terminal
Contact
A1 A2 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
Solenoid Power N.C.
Contact Action Contact Open
N.C. N.O.
20
Ground
12
5/6 7/8 1/2 3/4 19
N.O.
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion
13.5
0mm
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Atlas 5 Application Details
CU 2 Stop Motion Detector Unit
CU 1 Timer Unit Used with Atlas for machines with constant overruns. Gives a timed delay to the lock/release signal. Failsafe and adjustable to a range of times from 0.1 seconds up to 40 minutes. For more details, see the Safety monitoring relay section in this catalogue.
Used with Atlas for machines with constant or variable over run. Gives a timed delay to the lock/release signal. Fail safe and adjustable to a range of times from 0.1 seconds up to 40 minutes. For more details, see the Monitoring Safety Relay section in this catalogue.
Minotaur MSR6R/T Monitoring Safety Relay Unit Ensures a maximum level of safety by monitoring all wiring in the safety circuit including switches and contactors. Any fault and the power to the machine is switched off. Other Minotaur units are available, see the Safety monitoring relay section in this catalogue.
3-35
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches 440G-MT Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
cULus, TUV
Safety Contacts
4 N.C., 3 N.C., 2 N.C. direct opening action
Auxiliary Contacts Utilisation Category
Description The 440G-MT solenoid switch is a positive mode, tongue operated guard locking interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is isolated and ensures that it remains isolated while the guard is open. The guard may only be opened when a signal is applied to the internal solenoid which releases the lock mechanism. The 440G-MT locking mechanism withstands forces up to 1600N (360lbs) and the die-cast alloy housing is ideal for use in harsh environments.
1 N.O., 2 N.O. AC 15 AC (Ue) 250V (le) 2A DC 250V 0.5A, 24V 2A
Max. Switched Current/Volt/ Load
500V 500VA
Thermal Current (lth)
5A
Min Current
5V, 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
> 2mm contact block
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Voltage
(Uimp) 2500V
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
The 440G-MT solenoid switch is designed for machines that do not stop immediately or where premature interruption of the machine could cause damage to tooling and components or cause an additional hazard.
Pollution Degree
3
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening
15mm (0.59in)
Break Contact Min Force
6N (1.35lbs)
Features
Max Actuation Speed
160mm per sec (6.3 in. per sec)
Max Actuation Frequency
2 Cycle per sec
Case Material
Painted zinc alloy
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
• Mechanical lock • High locking force—1600N (360lbs.) • Heavy duty die-cast alloy housing ideal for harsh environments
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
3 x M20, 3 x 1/2in NPT or quick disconnect style
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +60°C (13°F to +140°F)
Fixing
4 x M5
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 cycles
Electrical Life
1,000,000 cycles
Weight
1400g (3.08lbs)
Colour
Red
Torque Settings Fixing Bolts 1.6Nm Lid Screws 1.6Nm Terminal Screws 1.6Nm
3-36
Max Holding Force
1600N (360lbs)
Min Operating Radius
60mm (2.36in)
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC
Solenoid Power
13W typical 100% ED
Solenoid Rating
100%
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches 440G-MT Product Selection Solenoid Voltage
Contacts BBM/MBB
Safety
3 N.C.
24V AC/DC
1 N.O.
BBM 2 N.C.
—
2 N.O.
4 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM 2 N.C.
—
230V AC/DC
BBM —
Actuator
M20 Conduit
1/2in NPT Adaptor
Quick Disconnect
Standard
440G-MT47037
440G-MT47039
440G-MT47041
Fully-Flex
440G-MT47038
440G-MT47040
440G-MT47042
—
440G-MT47007
440G-MT47008
440G-MT47043
Standard
440G-MT47044
440G-MT47046
440G-MT47048
Fully-Flex
440G-MT47045
440G-MT47047
440G-MT47049
—
440G-MT47010
440G-MT47011
440G-MT47050
—
3 N.C.
110V AC/DC
Catalogue Number Aux.
2 N.O.
—
440G-MT47031
440G-MT47032
440G-MT47069
Standard
440G-MT47070
440G-MT47073
440G-MT47075
Fully-Flex
440G-MT47071
440G-MT47074
440G-MT47076
—
440G-MT47013
440G-MT47009
440G-MT47072
Standard
440G-MT47077
440G-MT47079
440G-MT47081
Fully-Flex
440G-MT47078
440G-MT47080
440G-MT47082
—
440G-MT47012
440G-MT47014
440G-MT47083
4 N.C.
—
—
440G-MT47033
440G-MT47034
440G-MT47106
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
—
440G-MT47016
440G-MT47017
440G-MT47107
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
—
440G-MT47015
440G-MT47024
440G-MT47108
4 N.C.
—
—
440G-MT47035
440G-MT47036
440G-MT47111
M23 mating cable 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-13 for details and additional lengths.
889M-F12X9AE-2
Accessories Description
For Dimensions refer to page
Catalogue Number
TLS-GD2 Standard Actuator
14-4
440G-A27011
Flat Actuator
14-5
440K-A11112
Fully-Flexible Actuator
14-4
440G-A27143
Sliding Bolt Actuator
14-4
440G-A27163
Extended Flat Actuator
14-5
440K-A17116
Replacement Cover No LED No Override Key
—
440G-MT47120
3-37
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches 440G-MT Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 4 x M5
40 (1.57)
144 (5.66)
5 (0.19)
20.5 (0.80)
38 (1.49)
30 (1.18)
46 (1.81)
9.2 (0.36) 40.7 (1.60) 46.75 (1.84)
199 (7.83)
15.5 (0.61) 23 (0.90)
3-38
2 x Manual Release Points
8.75 (0.34)
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches 440G-MT Typical Wiring Diagrams 4 N.C. AC/DC Solenoid Power
+ A2
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. AC/DC Solenoid Power
+
A1
A2
9
8 7
12
1 10 2
11
6 5
3 4
11
12
11
12
11
22
21
22
21
22
21
32
31
32
31
34
33
42
41
44
43
44
43
Solenoid 100% ED AC
Terminal
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion
Solenoid 100% ED AC
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. Contact
A1 A2 11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42
Solenoid Power N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
Terminal
2 N.C. + 2 N.O.
Contact
A1 A2 11 12 21 22 31 32 43 44
Solenoid Power N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O.
Terminal A1 A2 11 12 21 22 33 34 43 44
Contact Solenoid Power N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O.
Ground
Contact Action Contact Open
A1
12
4 N.C. 1 3 4 6 7 8 2 5 9 10 12
A2
A1
Solenoid 100% ED AC
Connector Pinout
+
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. AC/DC Solenoid Power
4 N.C. 12 11/12 21/22 31/32 41/42
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM) 0mm
6
3.5
12 11/12 21/22 31/32 43/44
6
0mm
3.5
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. (BBM) 12 11/12 21/22 33/34 43/44
6
0mm
3.5
3-39
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Centurion Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus, BG, and SUVA
Safety Contact
2 N.C. direct opening action
Designation/Utilization Cat. AC (Ue) (Ie) DC
AC15 500V 250V 100V 1A 2A 5A 250V 0.5A 24V 2A
Max Switched Current/Volt/ Load
500V/500VA
The Centurion is a positive mode, thumbwheel operated machine guard locking interlock switch that locks the guard closed until the operator manually rotates the thumbwheel, retracting the shaft from the guard door. The action of retracting the shaft initiates two functions; it isolates the power to the machine while the guard is open and, due to the operating principle, gives up to 20 seconds delay before the guard can be opened.
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Min Current
5V 5mA
Safety Contact Gap
>2mm (0.078in)
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.C.
Alternative styles with longer shafts can increase the time delay by as much as 50%. The Centurion is ideal for use on simple machines with short, constant run down times. It is important that correct installation and operation of the unit are followed to ensure that the retractable shaft cannot be extended when the guard is open. For machines with long or variable run down times or where frequent access is required, solenoid locking switches such as the TLS-GD2 and Atlas 5 should be considered.
Shaft Movement to Achieve Contact Operation
2mm (0.078in)
73013
Description
The Centurion has 2 safety (N.C.) contacts, 1 auxiliary (N.O.) contact and 1 conduit entry (either M20 or quick disconnect). EX and Pneumatic styles of the Centurion are also available; see the Explosion Proof section on page 16-1 for more information. Note: Additional safety measures (i.e., a shroud) should be used to ensure the thumbwheel can only be accessed by fingertips.
Features • • • •
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Volt
(Uimp) 2500V
Case Material
Heavy duty die cast alloy
Locking shaft
Stainless Steel
Protection
IP66
Conduit Entry
1 x M20 or quick disconnect
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +80°C (-10°F to +176°F)
Mounting
2 x M4
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
500g (1.20lbs)
Colour
Red
Note: The safety contacts of the Guardmaster switches are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
Centurion Thumbwheel Operation
Manually operated time delay, allows for machine run down Simple operation & installation Robust die cast housing, ideal for heavy duty applications Contacts, 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. (sealed to IP66)
Interlocking shaft is manually retracted from the guard by rotating the thumbwheel.
3-40
Interlock Switches
Guard Locking Switches Centurion Product Selection Catalogue Number Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
2 N.C.
BBM/MBB
1 N.O.
Type
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect
Right Hand
440K-B04025
440K-B04046
Left Hand
440K-B04026
440K-B04047
Right Hand Extended Bolt
440K-B04039
440K-B04048
Left Hand Extended Bolt
440K-B04040
440K-B04049
BBM
Recommended mating cable, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F8AB-2
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
Ø 20 (0.79)
36 (1.42)
86 (3.39) 15 (0.59)
6 (0.24) Ø14 (0.55)
6 (0.24)
View from Side 16.5 (0.65)
14 (0.55)
24 (0.94) 35 (1.38)
View from Rear
30 (1.18) 64 (2.52)
View from End
98 (3.86)
LH Style Front View
RH Style Front View
40.5 (1.59)
Typical Wiring Diagrams Safety Circuit 1 Safety Circuit 2 Auxiliary
22
12
21
34
11
33
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
1 2
8 3
4
Terminal 1
11
7
12
7
6
21
6 5
5
22
4
33
3
34
8
Contact N.C.
Contact Action Contact Open
Contact Closed
Actuator withdrawal distance from full insertion 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM)
N.C.
N.O.
24.5 11/12 21/22 33/34
2
0mm
Ground
3-41
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21 Specifications
Description The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers Non contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The FRS1, FRS2, FRS20, FRS21 are rectangular housings. Sealed to IP67 (NEMA6P), these Ferrogards are ideal for wet environments. Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts to indicate the guard condition. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Reed Contacts
Safety Auxiliary
Operating Distance – Make
12mm (0.47in) 15mm (0.59in)
Operating Distance – Break
23mm (0.91in) 26mm (1.02in)
Closing Time
3.0ms 0.5ms
Dropout Time
2.1ms 0.3ms
Bounce Time
0.7ms 0.7ms
Initial Contact Resistance
15mΩ
Initial Capacitance, Terminal to Terminal
0.65pF 0.2pF
Initial Insulation Resistance, Terminal to Terminal
1 x 106Ω
10mΩ
1 x 106Ω
Safety Contact Switching Capability AC 250VAC 2A max DC 24VDC 1A max Safety Contact External Fusing AC <1.6A quick blow DC <0.8A quick blow Auxiliary Contact Switching Capability
300VDC, 250VAC, 0.5A including inrush 15VA/10W suitable for AC/DC circuits
Min Initial Breakdown Voltage
600VAC 600VAC
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +65°C (14° to 149°F)
Features
Enclosure Protection
IP67 (NEMA6P)
• • • • •
Cable
Non contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (up to 2A AC, 1A DC) Plastic rectangular housing (IP67) Cable or Quick Disconnect (QD) connections
FRS 1
0.75mm2 (18 AWG) 2 wire Jacket OD 5.6mm (0.22in)
FRS 2
0.50mm2 (20 AWG) 4 wire Jacket OD 6.5mm (0.26in)
FRS 20
0.50mm2 (20 AWG) 4 wire Jacket OD 6.5mm (0.26in)
FRS 21
0.50mm2 (20 AWG) 6 wire Jacket OD 7.5mm (0.3in)
Quick Disconnects
M12 x 1, 4 pin or 6 pin
Case Material
Red moulded ABS Plastic
Mounting
Any position M4 mounting security screws included
Weight (not including cable) Sensor Actuator FRS 1 35g (0.08lbs) 85g (0.19lbs) FRS 2 40g (0.09lbs) 85g (0.19lbs) FRS 20 43g (0.09lbs) 85g (0.19lbs) FRS 21 43g (0.09lbs) 85g (0.19lbs)
3-42
Electrical Life
1 x 106 at the rated load
Mechanical Life
10 x 106
Vibration
7g, 10 to 200Hz
Shock
50g
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21 Product Selection Safety Contact Switching Capability
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
None
1 N.C.
1 N.O. 250V AC 2A
Connection
2 N.C. 1 N.O.
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Type
440N-G02001
4m Cable
440N-G02004
6m Cable
FRS 1
440N-G02041
10m Cable
440N-G02015
2m Cable
440N-G02002
4m Cable
440N-G02014
6m Cable
440N-G02038
8m Cable
FRS 2
2 N.C.
440N-G02019
15m Cable
440N-G02043
20m Cable
440N-G02040
4 Pin Micro QD
440N-G02093
4 Pin Micro QD
440N-G02085
ABS Plastic FRS 20
440N-G02097
2m Cable
440N-G02055
4m Cable
440N-G02061
6m Cable
FRS 21
440N-G02060
10m Cable
440N-G02059
6 Pin Micro QD
440N-G02098
2m Cable
FRS 2
4 Pin Micro QD
6m Cable
440N-G02092 440N-G02094
FRS 20
440N-G02090 440N-G02058
4m Cable 1 N.O.
440N-G02033
10m Cable
2m Cable
24V DC 1A
440N-G02022
8m Cable
4 Pin Micro QD None
Catalogue Number
2m Cable
4m Cable None
Housing Material
440N-G02077 FRS 21
6 Pin Micro QD
440N-G02083 440N-G02099
Mating cable, 4-pin straight 2m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-2
Mating cable, 4-pin straight 5m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-5
Mating cable, 4-pin straight 10m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-10
Mating cable, 6-pin straight 2m. See page 15-11 for details and additional lengths.
889R-F6ACA-2
Mating cable, 6-pin straight 5m. See page 15-11 for details and additional lengths.
889R-F6ACA-5
Mating cable, 6-pin straight 10m. See page 15-11 for details and additional lengths.
889R-F6ACA-10
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped complete with actuator.
Accessories Description Replacement Actuator
Page Number
Catalogue Number
—
440N-A02005
3-43
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Switch, QD Version
Actuator
15-19 (0.59-0.75)
4 (0.16)
30 (1.18)
8 (0.31)
19.5 (0.77)
=
2 (0.08) 7 (0.28)
=
=
15 (0.59)
= =
=
=
4 (0.16)
8 (0.31)
2 (0.08)
5 (0.20)
=
=
5 (0.2) 60 (2.36)
5 (0.2)
76 (2.99)
60 (2.36)
5 (0.2)
=
60 (2.36)
=
5 (0.2)
=
=
2 (0.08)
76 (2.99)
5 (0.2)
13 (0.51)
15 (0.59)
= =
4 (0.16)
76 (2.99)
Switch, Cable Version
=
= =
8 (0.31)
19.5 (0.77)
15 (0.59)
19.5 (0.77)
30 (1.18)
30 (1.18)
Typical Wiring Diagrams FRS 1
FRS 2
Cable
Cable Brown Blue
QD Brown
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Blue
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Black Aux. N.O.
Aux. N.O. White
FRS 21
FRS 20 Cable
Cable
QD Brown Blue
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
QD
Red & Blue Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally Red
Black White
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Red & Black Safety N.C. Fuse Externally Red & White Red & Yellow Aux N.O. Green
3-44
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally Aux N.O. Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21 Application Details Operating Principle
Encapsulated in the Ferrogard is a unique high power industrial reed, capable of switching up to 15A. The need switch is de-rated by a non resettable overload protection fuse. On presenting the actuator to the switch, the high intensity magnetic field from the actuator causes the contacts to close. On removing the actuator (opening the door), the safety contacts open.
Typical Operating Curve
10 (0.39)
When the actuator is aligned with the switch, the sensing distance is 10mm (0.39.) As the amount of misalignment increases, the sensing distance decreases. Beyond 4mm (0.16), the switch will not actuate in the presence of the actuator.
4 (0.16)
4 (0.16)
Misalignment tolerance on nonferrous materials
3-45
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 3, 4 & 5 Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Reed Contacts
Safety Auxiliary
Operating Distance – Make FRS3 12mm (0.47in) 21mm (0.83in) FRS4 12mm (0.47in) 13mm (0.51in) FRS5 12mm (0.47in) NA
Description The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated switches offers non contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switches opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The FRS 3, 4 and 5 have terminal connections. The user must drill a hole in the housing at a convenient location to allow the wiring to enter the housing. The cover is secured with anti-tamper security screws. Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts to indicate the guard condition. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the specifications table.
Operating Distance – Break FRS3 FRS4 23mm (0.91in) 24mm (0.94in) FRS5 23mm (0.91in) 10mm (0.39in) 12mm (0.47in) NA Closing Time
3.0ms 0.5ms
Dropout Time
2.1ms 0.3ms
Bounce Time
0.7ms 0.7ms
Initial Contact Resistance
15mΩ
Initial Capacitance, Terminal to Terminal
0.65pF 0.2pF
10mΩ
Initial Insulation Resistance Terminal to Terminal
1.x.106 Ω
Safety Contact Switching Capability
250V AC 2A max
Safety Contact External Fusing
≤1.6A quick blow
Auxiliary Contact Switching Capability
300V DC, 250V AC, 0.5A including inrush. 15VA/10W suitable for AC/DC circuits
Min Initial Breakdown Voltage
600V AC 600V AC
1x106 Ω
Features
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +65°C (14° to 149°F)
• • • • •
Enclosure Protection
IP65 (NEMA 13)
Case Material
Red moulded ABS Plastic
Mounting
Any Position M4 mounting security screws included.
Electrical Life
1 x 106 at rated loaded
Mechanical Life
10 x 106
Vibration
10 to 200Hz
Shock
50g
Non contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (up to 2A) Various contact arrangements Terminal connections
3-46
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 3, 4 & 5 Product Selection Safety Contact Switching Capability
Connection
250VAC 2A
Terminals
Housing Material
Safety Contacts
ABS Plastic
1 N.C.
Auxiliary Contacts
Type
Catalogue Number
1 N.C.
FRS 3
440N-G02003
1 N.O.
FRS 4
440N-G02008
None
FRS 5
440N-G02009
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place.
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
—
440N-A02005
Replacement Actuator
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Switch
Actuator 30 (1.18)
50 (1.97)
2 Holes 4 Through
=
=
=
6 (0.24)
36 (1.41)
=
15 (0.59)
4 (0.16)
= 76 (2.99)
60 (2.36)
38.5 (1.52)
57 (2.24)
69 (2.72)
5 (0.2) 5 (0.2)
2 (0.08)
=
7 (0.28)
38 (1.5)
6 (0.24)
=
=
25 (0.98)
8 (0.31)
19.5 (0.77)
Typical Wiring Diagrams FRS 3
FRS 4
1 2
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
3 4
FRS 5
1 2
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
1 2
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
3 Aux N.C.
4
Aux N.O.
Application Details See page 3-54 for operating principles and mounting examples.
3-47
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 6, 9 & 10 Specifications
Description The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers Non contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch opens the N.C. safety contact which is intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The FRS 6, 9 and 10 sensors and actuators incorporate slim housings to accommodate narrow mounting areas. They are environmentally sealed to IP67 (NEMA6P), which makes them ideal for wet environments. These Ferrogard switches have two active sensing faces allowing more flexible mounting options. Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the specifications table.
Features • • • • • •
Non contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (up to 3A) Two sensing faces IP67 (NEMA 6P) Rating Slim housings
3-48
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Contact Arrangements
1 N.C. Safety Contact
Electrical Life
1 x 106 at rated load
Safety Contact Switching Capability FRS 6 250V AC 2A max FRS 9 24V DC 1A max FRS 10 110V AC 3A max Safety Contact External Fusing FRS 6 <1.6A quick blow FRS 9 <0.8A quick blow FRS 10 <2.5A quick blow Operating Distance – Make
12mm (0.47in)
Operating Distance – Break
23mm (0.91in)
Closing Time
3.0ms
Dropout Time
2.1ms
Bounce Time
0.7ms
Initial Contact Resistance
15mΩ
Initial Capacitance, Terminal to Terminal
0.65pF
Initial Insulation Resistance, Terminal to Terminal
1 x 106 Ω
Min Initial Breakdown Voltage
600VAC
Mechanical Life
10 x 106
Mounting
Any Position M4 mounting security screws included.
Weight (not including cable) FRS 6 FRS 9 FRS 10
Sensor Actuator 28g (0.06lbs) 70g (0.15lbs) 28g (0.06lbs) 70g (0.15lbs) 28g (0.06lbs) 70g (0.15lbs)
Case Material
Red moulded ABS Plastic
Cable
0.75mm2 (18 AWG) 2 wire Jacket OD 5.6mm (0.22in)
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +65°C (14° to +149°F)
Environmental
IP67 (NEMA 6P)
Vibration
7-15g, 10 to 200Hz
Shock
50g
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard 6, 9 & 10 Product Selection Safety Contact Switching Capability
250V AC 2A
24V DC 1A
110V AC 3A
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Housing Connection Material 2m Cable 4m Cable 6m Cable 10m Cable 4 Pin Micro QD 2m Cable 1 N.C. None ABS Plastic 4m Cable 6m Cable 10m Cable 4 Pin Micro QD 2m Cable 4m Cable Mating cable, 4-pin straight 2m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
Type
Catalogue Number 440N-G02023 440N-G02028 440N-G02032 440N-G02013 440N-G02095 440N-G02044 440N-G02075 440N-G02082 440N-G02089 440N-G02096 440N-G02045 440N-G02088
FRS 6
FRS 9
FRS 10
889D-F4AC-2
Mating cable, 4-pin straight 5m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-5
Mating cable, 4-pin straight 10m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-10
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place.
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
—
440N-A02025
Replacement Actuator
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Actuator
7 16 (0.28) (0.62)
4 (0.16) 11 (0.43)
4.5 (0.18)
6 (0.24)
19 (0.75)
7 16 (0.28) (0.63)
12 (0.47)
46 (1.81)
54 (2.13)
84 (3.31)
= =
4.5 (0.18)
46 (1.81)
4.5 (0.18)
=
12 (0.47)
13 (0.51)
7 (0.28)
82 (3.23) =
73 (2.87)
54 (2.13)
84 (3.31) 46 (1.81) 6 (0.23)
46 (1.81)
4.5 (0.18)
Switch, QD Version
19.5 (0.77)
19.5 (0.77)
73 (2.87)
Switch, Cable Version
4 (0.16) 11 (0.43) 19 (0.75)
Typical Wiring Diagrams QD
Cable Brown
Blue
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Application Details See page 3-54 for operating principles and mounting examples.
3-49
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard GD2 Specifications
Description The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers Non contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The GD2 version has a stainless steel housing for added protection against inadvertent impacts to the housing. The contacts are completely sealed to meet IP68 (NEMA6P) requirements, making them ideal for wet environments. The GD2 also has a wider temperature range than the plastic Ferrogard switches, making them useful in a wider range of applications.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Reed Contacts
Safety Auxiliary
Operating Distance – Make
12mm (0.47in) 15mm (0.59in)
Operating Distance – Break
23mm (0.91in) 26mm (1.02in)
Closing Time
3.0ms 0.5ms
Dropout Time
2.1ms 0.3ms
Bounce Time
0.7ms 0.7ms
Initial Contact Resistance
15mΩ 10mΩ
Initial Capacitance, Terminal to Terminal
0.65pF 0.2pF
Initial Insulation Resistance, Terminal to Terminal
1x106 Ω 1x106 Ω
Safety Contact Switching Capability AC 250V AC 2A max DC 24V DC 1A max Safety Contact External Fusing AC <1.6A quick blow DC <0.8A quick blow
Unlike some magnetic switches, the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts to indicate the machine and guard condition.
Auxiliary Contact Switching Capability
300V DC, 250V AC, 0.5A including inrush. 15VA/10W suitable for AC/DC circuits
Min Initial Breakdown Voltage
600V AC
All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the specifications table.
Environmental
IP68 (NEMA 6P)
Cable
0.50mm2 (20 AWG) 7 wire Flexible thermoplastic elastomer Jacket OD 8mm (0.2in)
Features
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +125°C (-13° to +257°F)
• • • • • •
Case Material
Stainless Steel; BS3146 ANC4B (316L)
Mounting
Any Position; M4 mounting security screws included
Non contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (up to 2A AC, 1A DC) Wide Temperature Range (-25°C to +125°C) Stainless Steel Housing Various Contact Arrangements
3-50
600V AC
Weight (not including cable) Sensor Actuator 156g (0.34lbs) 168g (0.37lbs) Electrical Life
1 x 106 at rated load
Mechanical Life
10 x10 6
Vibration
7-15g, 10 to 200Hz
Shock
50g
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard GD2 Product Selection Safety Contact Switching Capability 250V AC 2A
24V DC 1A
Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts 1 N.C. 1 N.O. None 2 N.C. 1 N.O. 1 N.C. None 2 N.C. 1 N.O.
Connection
Housing Material
3m Cable
Stainless Steel
Type FRS 2 GD2 FRS 20 GD2 FRS 21 GD2 FRS 2 GD2 FRS 20 GD2 FRS 21 GD2
Catalogue Number 440N-G02112 440N-G02113 440N-G02117 440N-G02118 440N-G02119 440N-G02123
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped with complete actuator.
Accessories Description
Page Number —
Actuator
Catalogue Number 440N-A02128
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Actuator
Switch 8 (0.31)
16 (0.63)
16.75 (0.66) 33.5 (1.32)
5 (0.20)
78.5 (3.09)
39.25 (1.55) 39.25 (1.55)
5 (0.20)
11.5 (0.45)
19.5 (0.77)
7 (0.28)
16 (0.63)
8 (0.31) 16.75 (0.66)
78.5 (3.09)
11.5 (0.45)
39.25 (1.55) 39.25 (1.55)
8 (0.31) 62.5 (2.46)
33.5 (1.32) 6 (0.24)
62.5 (2.46)
4.4 (0.17)
4.4 (0.17) 7 (0.28)
19.5 (0.76)
Typical Wiring Diagrams FRS 2
FRS 21 Red Blue
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Red
Yellow Green
Aux. N.O.
Blue Black
Black White
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Yellow
FRS 20 Red
Blue
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Green
Aux. N.O.
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
White Note: Unit must be to a grounded to a grounded metal frame or grounded via the field wiring per NEC requirements.
Application Details See page 3-54 for operating principles and mounting examples.
3-51
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard GS1 & GS2 Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals GS1 and GS2 CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus GS2 Ex EExd IIC T6 Baseefa Operating Distance – Make GS1 GS2 12mm (0.47in) 15mm (0.59in)
Description The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers Non contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation of control power to a machine primary control element. The GS1 and GS2 are designed for heavy duty applications. The GS1 is housed in a stainless steel or brass housing. The GS2 offers the same characteristic as the GS1, but in an Ex housing for hazardous locations. Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse rated as shown in the specifications table. See the Explosion Proof section on page 16-1 for more information on the EX version of the Ferrogard GS2.
Operating Distance – Break GS1 GS2 23mm (0.91in) 26mm (1.02in) Closing Time
3.0ms
Dropout Time
2.1ms
Bounce Time
0.7ms
Initial Contact Resistance
15mW
Initial Capacitance, Terminal to Terminal
0.65pF
Initial Insulation Resistance, Terminal to Terminal
1 x 106 Ω
Safety Contact Switching Capability
250V AC 2A max
Safety Contact External Fusing
< 1.6A quick blow
Min Initial Breakdown Voltage
600V AC
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +125°C (-13° to +257°F)
Enclosure Protection
IP68 (NEMA 6P)
Cable GS1 Brass 0.75 mm2 (18AWG) 2 wire Grey PVC Jacket OD 6mm (0.24in) Stainless Steel 0.75 mm2 (18AWG) 2 wire Jacket OD 7mm (0.28in) GS2 White PVC 1.34 mm2 (16AWG) 2 wire Braided Polyolefin Jacket OD 8.4.mm (0.32in)
Features • • • • •
Non contact actuation High tolerance to misalignment High switching current (2A AC) Metal housings (IP 68) Ex version available
Case Material
Stainless Steel or Brass
Mounting
Any Position M3 mounting security screws included.
Weight (not including cable) GS1 Brass GS1 Steel 381g (0.84lbs) Actuator 388g (0.86lbs) 116g (0.26lbs)
3-52
Electrical Life
1 X 106 at rated load
Mechanical Life
10 X 106
Vibration
15g, 20 to 1000Hz
Shock
50g
Ex Version
See Explosion Proof Section
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard GS1 & GS2 Product Selection Safety Contact Switching Capability
Auxiliary Contacts
Safety Contacts
Connection
Housing
Catalogue Number
Type
Brass 2m Cable 250V AC, 2A
1 N.C.
440N-G02048 GS 1
Stainless Steel
None
Brass
3m Cable
440N-G02049 440N-H02046
GS 2 Ex
Stainless Steel
440N-H02047
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped complete with Actuator.
Accessories Description
Used with
Page Number
Catalogue Number
Actuator, Alnico
Brass Switch
—
440N-A02056
Actuator, Epoxy-painted
Stainless Steel
—
440N-A02057
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. GS1 Switch
GS1 & GS2 Actuator
GS2 Switch
19 (0.75)
13 (0.51)
60 (2.36) 25 (0.98)
16 (0.63)
127 (5)
17 (0.67)
30 (1.18)
6.5 19 (0.26)(0.75)
67 (2.64)
33.5 (1.32)
114.5 (4.51)
46 (1.81)
54 (2.13)
11 (0.43)
6.5 22 (0.87) (0.26)
54 (2.13)
12 (0.47)
7 (0.28)
20 (0.79)
Typical Wiring Diagrams QD
Cable Brown
Blue
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Note: Unit must be to a grounded to a grounded metal frame or grounded via the field wiring per NEC requirements.
Application Details See page 3-54 for operating principles and mounting examples.
3-53
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard Applications Application Details Operating Principle
Encapsulated in the Ferrogard is a unique high power industrial reed, capable of switching up to 15A. The need switch is de-rated by a non resettable overload protection fuse. On presenting the actuator to the switch, the high intensity magnetic field from the actuator causes the contacts to close. On removing the actuator (opening the door), the safety contacts open.
Mounting Example 1 Door Closed, Machine RUN
Door Opened, Machine STOP, Door Covering Switch
2mm No access to switch thus preventing attempts to defeat the interlock.
Sliding Door
Sliding Door
Note: Whenever possible, the units should be mounted so that no access can be obtained to the switch when the guard door is open, thus preventing attempts to defeat the safety system.
Mounting Example 2 Min 50mm
2mm
✔
✘
Switch
Switch
Actuator
Actuator
Door 1
Door 2
It is advisable, where possible, to mount the switch and actuator on nonferrous materials otherwise it may effect the operating distances. If mounting on ferrous material, use of a 5mm plastic spacer is recommended.
3-54
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrogard Applications Application Details Note: Under the requirements of the Machinery Directive all machinery must undergo risk assessment to determine the necessary level (or category) of the safety related control system or hazard avoidance measures. While the Ferrogard complies with the requirements of EN1088 it may not be suitable for all types of machinery or environments. Where magnetic materials are present or if it is foreseeable that through machine function or use. Ferrogard operation by magnates other than the supplied actuator is possible, then use of an alternative Allen-Bradley Guardmaster switch is recommended. Other Non contact options include: Ferrocode (which utilizes additional coding techniques preventing them from being overridden by simple means). Alternatively additional measures may be taken to prevent the Ferrogard being easily bypassed. Consideration should be given to the recommended installation example given in the instructions and those in EN1088.
✔ ✔ ✘
Typical Applications Sliding Guard
Removable Guard
Hinged Guard
Note: Removable guards using Non contact switches may require two switches, one at either side of the guard, or the use of a flap to prevent initial lifting of the non-interlocked edge.
3-55
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sipha Control Units Specifications (continued) Safety Inputs Sipha 1 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Sipha 2 & 6 6 x (1 N.C. & 1 N.O.) Maximum Input Resistance Terminals 1 – 4 200Ω Terminals 2 – 3 150Ω Minimum Approach Speed
17mm/s (0.67in/s)
Safety Outputs Sipha 1 1 N.O. Sipha 1 2 N.O. Sipha 6 2 N.O. + 1 N.O. Delayed (0.6 to 30sec) Output Rating
B300, AC-15, 4A/250V AC P300, DC-15, 2A/30V DC
Minimum Switched Current/ Voltage
10mA/10V
With the increasing speed and complexity of applications a simple magnetic switch may be insufficient to meet the increased risks, therefore Sipha’s design incorporates several magnetically sensitive elements which must be triggered in a particular sequence to operate correctly. The Sipha sensor, designed to operate with its own actuator, helps prevent defeatability by a simple magnet.
Maximum Recommended Output Fuse
5A quick blow AC, 3A quick blow DC
The control unit is available in three types. The Sipha 1 control unit operates on 24V AC/DC and offers 1 N.O. safety output and 1 N.C. solid state auxiliary output. The Sipha 2 control unit operates on either 24V AC/DC, 110V AC or 230V AC and offers 2 N.O. safety outputs and 1 N.C. auxiliary output. The Sipha 6 has wiring terminals for up to 6 sensors, a delayed output for Category 1 stops and offers the same wide range of power supply capability as the Sipha 2 control unit. Between 2 and 6 Sipha sensors can be directly connected to the Sipha 6 control unit. An internal DIP switch mutes the unused connections to sensors 1, 2, 3 and 4. This allows for individual monitoring to each interlock and provides enhanced safety integrity when compared to six interlocks running off a single Sipha 2 control unit.
Auxiliary Output Switching Capability Sipha 1 100mA/230V AC, 100mA/24V DC Sipha 2 & 6 2A/230 V AC, 2A/24 V DC
Description
Auxiliary Outputs (not for safety use) Sipha 1 1 N.C. Photovoltaic MOSFET (on resistance typically 36Ω) Sipha 2 & 6 1 N.C.
Indication LEDs
Green LED = Power on Green LED = Output closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Torque Settings— Terminal Screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
The Sipha control units are designed to operate with the Sipha sensors and actuators. The controllers have automatic reset.
Conductor Size
0.2-2.5mm2 (24-14AWG)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Features
Mounting
35mm DIN Rail
• • • •
Non contact actuation Magnetic coded sensing Control Unit acts as safety relay Four types of switches
Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Sipha 1 & 2 Cat. 3 per EN954-1 Sipha 6 Cat. 4 per EN954-1 Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TÜV
Power Supply Sipha 1 24V AC/DC Sipha 2 & 6 24V AC/DC and 110/230V AC Power Consumption Sipha 1 <2VA Sipha 2 & 6 <4VA
3-56
Weight Sipha 1 140g (0.31lbs) Sipha 2 410g (0.90lbs) Sipha 6 675g (1.49lbs) Electrical Life 220V AC/4A880VA cosϕ=.35 220V AC/1.7A375VA/ cosϕ=.6 30V DC/2A60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
1mm, 10 to 55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half-sine
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sipha Control Units Product Selection Housing
Supply Voltage
Safety Contacts Auxiliary Contacts
Housing
Type
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
1 N.O.
1 N.C. Solid State
22.5mm
Control Unit 1
440N-S32013
24V AC/DC 110V/230V AC
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
45mm
Control Unit 2
440N-S32021
24V AC/DC 110/230V AC
2 N.O. 1 N.O. Delayed
1 N.C.
90mm
Sipha 6
440N-S32052
Accessories Housing
Page Number
Catalogue Number
14-6
440R-A31562
Replacement Fuse, 500mA
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Sipha Control Unit Type 1
Sipha Control Unit Type 2 22.5 (0.89)
99 (3.9) 45.5 (1.79)
73 (2.87)
75 (2.95)
82 (3.23)
120 (4.72)
35mm DIN Rail Mounting 35mm DIN Rail Mounting
84 (3.31)
76 (2.99)
Sipha 6 Control Unit
83 (3.27) 118 (4.65)
90 (3.54)
3-57
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sipha Control Units Block Diagrams Sipha 1
A1
A2
13
X2
X1
Sipha 1
21
~
K1
Out
K1
K1
K2
Out
Pwr
~
K2
K2
K1
24V DC
110/230
K1
13 23 21
X1 X2 F2
F1
K2
Pwr
N +Ve
L
K1
K1
K2
3
4
L2
L3
K2
Logic Logic
NC 1
-Ve
2
1
3
4
14
2
22
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V AC/DC
L1
L2
L3
Yellow
Sipha Sensor
Sipha Actuator
Blue
2
1 A1 13 21 X1
K1
Sipha 1 Control Unit
Guard Closed
K2 Reset
22 X2
3 4 A2 14
Green Red
K1 K2
Aux to Indicator or PLC Input
M
Single Sipha Sensor, 24V Supply, Dual Channel Output, Manual Reset, Monitored Output 110V AC
L1 L1
Sipha Sensor
Sipha Actuator
Blue Yellow
2
Guard Closed
1
110V 230V 3
4
A1
13
23
31 X1
Sipha 2 Control Unit
A2
14
K1
Reset
24
K2
32 X2
Green Red
K1 K2
Aux to Indicator or PLC Input
N
Single Sipha Sensor, 110V AC Supply, Dual Channel Output, Manual Reset, Monitored Output
3-58
M
14 24
22
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sipha Control Units Typical Wiring Diagrams (continued) 24V AC/DC
L1
White
Black
2 Guard Closed
L2
L3
Yellow
Sipha Sensor
Sipha Actuator
Blue
1 A1
13
23
31 X1
K1
Sipha 2 Control Unit
Aux contact for indication
Reset
3 4 A2
14
24
K2
32 X2
Guard Closed
Green
Yellow
White
Red
Black
Sipha Sensor
Sipha Actuator
Blue
K1 K2
Aux to Indicator or PLC Input
M
Aux contact for indication
Guard Closed
White
Red
Black
Sipha Sensor
Sipha Actuator
Blue
Aux contact for indication
Multiple Sipha Sensor, Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Monitored Output Application Details See page 3-62 for application details.
3-59
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sipha Sensors Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC60947-5-1, IEC/EN60947-5-3, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Rating dependent on control unit and application.
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TÜV
Maximum Safety Sensing Distance Style S1 Style S2 Style S3 Style S4
Description With the increasing speed and complexity of applications a simple magnetic switch may be insufficient to meet the increased risks, therefore Sipha’s design incorporates several magnetically sensitive elements which must be triggered in a particular sequence to operate correctly. The Sipha sensor, designed to operate with its own actuator, helps prevent defeatability by a simple magnet. The Sipha with its moulded-in brackets and diminutive size, is extremely versatile and simple to install. The Sipha Sensor must be connected to the Sipha control unit giving a monitored circuit. For high-risk applications the control unit is used with a single sensor to give a high-integrity system. For other applications, multiple sensors (including mechanical switches) can be connected to one Sipha control unit. Sipha has facilities for connecting a manual reset button and for monitoring external devices such as contactors. Four types of sensors and actuators are available incorporating different operating distances and physical sizes.
Auxiliary Contact Switching Capability
Non contact actuation Magnetic coded sensing Four housing styles Must be operated with its own safety control unit
3-60
300VDC, 250VAC, 0.5A including inrush. 15VA/10W suitable for AC/DC circuits
Operating Temperature S1, S2, S3 -10°C to +55°C (+14° to +131°F) S4 (GD2) -25°C to +125°C (-13° to +257°F) Enclosure Protection S1, S2, S31 IP67 (NEMA 6P) S4 (GD2) IP67 (NEMA 6P) Cable S1 0.54 mm2 (20AWG) 4 wire PVC Jacket OD – 4mm (0.16in) S2 0.54 mm2 (20AWG) 4 wire PVC Jacket OD – 4mm (0.16in) Cable S1 0.54mm2 (0.02in) (20AWG) 4 wire PVC jacket OD—4mm (0.16in) S2 0.54mm2 (0.02in) (20AWG) 4 wire PVC jacket OD—4mm (0.16in) Case Material S1, S2 S30 (Actuator) S31 (Sensor) S4 (GD2)
Features • • • •
Make Break 5mm (0.20in) 11mm (0.43in) 9mm (0.35in) 12mm (0.47in) 5mm (0.20in) 12mm (0.47in) 10mm (0.39in) 13mm (0.51in)
Mounting Weight (not including cable) S1 S2 S3 S4
Moulded ABS Polyester Nylon (Trogamid) Stainless Steel Any Position Sensor Actuator 18g (0.04lbs) 15g (0.03lbs) 20g (0.04lbs) 30g (0.07lbs) 18g (0.04lbs) 6g (0.01lbs) 150g (0.33lbs) 170g (0.37lbs)
Shock
30g, 11ms half-sine
Vibration
1mm, 10 to 55Hz
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sipha Sensors Product Selection Housing Style
Housing
Safety Contacts
S1
Auxiliary Contacts
Type
None
S11
1 N.C.
S12
1 N.O.
Connection
Catalogue Number
3m Cable
440N-S32014
10m Cable
440N-S32016
S13
ABS Plastic None
1 N.C.
S21
S22
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
S2
1 N.O.
S23
None
S31
1 N.C.
S42
1 N.O.
S43
3m Cable
440N-S32022
10m Cable
440N-S32032
3m Cable
440N-S32037
10m Cable
440N-S32036
3m Cable
440N-S32015
10m Cable
440N-S32017
3m Cable
440N-S32023
10m Cable
440N-S32033
3m Cable
440N-S32038
10m Cable
440N-S32039
4 Pin Micro QD
440N-S32024
Polyester (Actuator) Nylon [Trogamid] (Sensor)
S3
Stainless Steel
440N-S32047 8 Pin Micro QD 440N-S32046
S4 Mating cable, 4-pin straight 2m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-2
Mating cable, 4-pin straight 5m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-5
Mating cable, 4-pin straight 10m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-10
Mating cable, 8-pin/7-wire straight 2m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F8AC-2
Mating cable, 8-pin/7-wire straight 5m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F8AC-5
Mating cable, 8-pin/7-wire straight 10m. See page 15-10 for details and additional lengths.
889D-F8AC-10
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped complete with actuator.
Accessories Description
Page Number
Actuator S10
440N-A32019
Actuator S20 Actuator S30 Actuator S40 (GD2)
Catalogue Number
440N-A32020 —
440N-A32025 440N-A32041
3-61
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sipha Sensors Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
6 (0.24) M4
12 (0.47)
13 (0.51)
4.2 (0.17)
4.2 (0.17) 7 (0.28)
25 (0.98)
4.5 (0.18) 9 (0.35)
4.5 (0.18)
82 (3.23) 73 (2.87)
68 (2.68)
82 (3.23)
22 (0.87)
41
13 (0.51)
7 (0.28)
24 M4 (0.94) 4.8 (0.19)
12 (0.47)
Sensor
7 (0.28) 5 19 19 (0.2) (0.75) (0.75)
Actuator
19 (0.75)
19 (0.75)
Actuator
Sipha S4
Ø 30 (1.18)
7 (0.28)
19.5 (0.77)
16.75 (0.66) Actuator
Ø 5.1 (0.2)
33.5 (1.32)
8 (0.31)
7 (0.28) 16.75 (0.66)
5 (0.20)
16 (0.63)
11.5 (0.45)
4.4 (0.17) 7 (0.28)
19.5
33.5 (1.32) Sensor
16.75 (0.66)
78.5 (3.09)
16.75 (0.66)
62.5 (2.46)
10 (0.39)
M18
11.5 (0.45)
78.5 (3.09)
Sensor
62.5 (2.46)
4.4 8 (0.31) (0.17)
6 8 (0.24) (0.31)
39.25 (1.55) 39.25 (1.55)
60 (2.36)
3-62
7 (0.28)
4.5 (0.18)
Sensor Sipha S3
41 (1.61)
25 (0.98)
22 (0.87)
24 (0.94)
22 (0.87) 48 (1.89)
41
24 (0.94)
4.2 (0.17)
7 (0.28)
7
39.25 (1.55) 39.25 (1.55)
4.8 (0.19)
Sipha S2
41 (1.61)
Sipha S1
Actuator
7 (0.28)
16 (0.63)
5 (0.20)
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sipha Sensors Typical Wiring Diagrams S11, S21
S13, S23
S12, S22 Red Safety N.C.
Safety N.C.
Safety N.C.
Safety N.O. Green
Black
Aux N.O. White
No Connection Aux N.C.
Safety N.O.
Black Aux N.C.
White
Safety N.C.
Safety N.C.
Safety N.O.
Yellow
Yellow Green
Red
S42
Blue
Blue
Safety N.O.
S31
Safety N.O. S43 Safety N.C. No Connection Aux N.O. Safety N.O.
3-63
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sentinel 1 Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN954-1
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 48V AC, 110V AC, 230V AC
Power Consumption
< 2VA
Internal Fuses Power 250mA replaceable N.C. Output 2A replaceable
Description The Sentinel 1 is an electro-magnetically coded standalone Non contact interlock. It operates without a safety relay while providing a highly coded system to help prevent defeat of the switch by simple magnets. Self-checking and monitoring functions are contained in the switching unit which also has LED status indication. The Sentinel 1 has 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. output and is supplied prewired. A replaceable fuse for overload protection is easily accessed by removing the front of the switch with a security bit.
Features • • • • •
Non contact actuation Electro-magnetic coding Standalone operation Plastic box style housing (IP65) Terminal connections
3-64
Operating Distance
Make 7mm (0.28in) Break 10mm (0.39in)
Misalignment Tolerance
±5mm (0.2) make and break
Output Rating
B300, AC-15, 2A/250V AC P300, DC-13, 2A/250V DC
Minimum Switching Capability
10mA/10V
Indication LEDs
Green = Guard closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +125°C (-13°F to +257°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP65 (NEMA 13)
Cable
0.75 sq. mm2 (18 AWG) 2 wire PVC Jacket OD 7.5mm (.3in)
Case Material
Red reinforced ABS
Mounting
Any position M4 mounting security screws included
Weight (not including cable)
Sensor Actuator 120g (0.26lbs) 39g (0.09lbs)
Electrical Life
100,000 at rated load
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 at no load
Vibration
10-55Hz, 1mm displacement
Shock
8g, 11ms half-sine
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sentinel 1 Product Selection Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Power Supply
24V AC/DC
48V AC 1 N.C.
1 N.O. 110V AC
230V AC
Connection
Catalogue Number
2m Cable
440N-N15017
4m Cable
440N-N15023
6m Cable
440N-N15021
12m Cable
440N-N15041
2m Cable
440N-N15028
2m Cable
440N-N15015
6m Cable
440N-N15027
2m Cable
440N-N15013
4m Cable
440N-N15024
12m Cable
440N-N15040
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped complete with actuator.
Accessories Page Number
Catalogue Number
Replacement Actuator
Description
—
440N-A15005
Replacement Fuse 2A
14-2
440A-A09197
Replacement Fuse 250mA
14-2
440A-A09196
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Actuator
Switch
19 (0.75) 5 (0.2)
=
82 (3.23)
4 (0.16)
73 (2.87)
57 (2.24)
69 (2.72)
4.5 (0.18)
36 (1.42)
=
38 (1.5)
7 (0.28) 4.5 (0.18) = =
Mounting 2 x M4
50 (1.97)
5 (0.2) 19 (0.75)
3-65
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sentinel 1 Typical Wiring Diagrams Sentinel 1 Sensor
Red
+ Supply Voltage -
Blue Safety N.C. Fuse Externally
Black
White Yellow
Auxiliary N.O. Green
Application Details Operating Principle
On presenting the actuator to the switch, the highintensity electromagnetic field together with a resonant frequency signal causes the contacts to close. On removing the actuator, (opening the door) the safety contacts open, isolating the machine. The switch can not be overridden by magnets, tools, etc.
Actuator Approaches
✔ ✔ ✔
3-66
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Sentinel 1 Application Details—Installation Mounting Hinge Guards
Door stop
Double Hinge Guards
Switch ≤25mm
Switch 2mm Minimum 5mm Maximum
Switch
Actuator
Actuator
Guard Actuator
Sliding Guards
Lift Off Guards
2mm Minimum 5mm Maximum Switch
2mm Minimum 5mm Maximum
Switch
Actuator
Switch Guard
Actuator
Guard
Actuator
Door stop
3-67
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrocode Specifications (continued) Utilization Category (AC)
4A/250V AC/1000VA at COSϕ=1
Max Switched DC Current/Volt 2A/30V DC/60W Min Switched DC Current/Volt 10mA/10V
Description
Max Output Fuse
5A quick acting
Indication
Green = Power ON Green = Output closed
Max Drop Out Time
<50mS
Impulse withstand Voltage
2500V
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (14°F to 131°F)
Contamination Level
3
Humidity
90% RH
Degree of Enclosure Protection
IP40 DIN 0470
Terminal Isolation
IP20 DIN 0470
A two-channel system, the Ferrocode setup consists of an actuator and a separate safety switch head that is connected to a monitoring control unit. The Ferrocode uses electromagnetic coding, which provides a higher level of security over magnetic coding systems. To further prevent possible override of the system, both sensor and actuator are supplied with tamper-resistant mounting hardware.
Max Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14 AWG) stranded with sleeve stripped 8mm,1 x 4mm2 (14AWG) solid conductor
Terminals
The absence of moving parts and direct physical contact between sensor and actuator eliminate mechanical wear.
Plus-minus terminal screws M3.5 Box terminal with wire protection
Weight 24V DC unit 110/230V unit
314g (0.69lbs) 530g (1.17lbs)
A Ferrocode sensor may be used without the control unit for low power/low risk applications. However, risks should be thoroughly evaluated prior to application of this method.
Material & Colour
Red polycarbonate
The control unit should be used when monitoring and checking of the circuit is required. Up to 6 Ferrocode switches can be interfaced with the 110/230V control unit and up to 15 Ferrocode switches with the 24V version. A control unit may also be used in conjunction with electromechanical safety devices such as limit switches, gate interlocks and emergency stops with two contacts, 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
Housing
16 way D = 120 H = 73 W = 45.5
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Fixing Details
35mm DIN rail
Switching Head Power Supply
24V DC +/– 15%
Power Consumption
<1VA
Internal Fuse
1A output fuse
Safety Distance
ON = 7mm, OFF = 9mm
Features
Aux. Distance
ON = 9mm, OFF = 14mm
• Electro-magnetic tamper resistant coding • Interfaces directly to a safety relay control unit
Outputs
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
Utilization Category (AC)
0.5A/120V AC/60VA at COSϕ =1
Max Switched DC Current/Volt 1A/28V DC/28W
Specifications Standards
Category
Min Switched DC Current/Volt 10mA/10V EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Max Output Fuse
1A quick acting
Indication
LED 1
Impulse withstand Voltage
2500V
Cat. 3 per EN954-1 (Sensors with controller)
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (14°F to 131°F)
Contamination Level
3
Green 1 = Guard closed
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Humidity
90% RH
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110/230V AC
Degree of Protection
IP67 (NEMA 6P)
Power Consumption
<6VA
X1-X2 Contactor Monitor Loop
Normally closed contactor loop
Weight (not including cable) Switch 30g (0.07lbs) Actuator 40g (0.09lbs)
Safety Inputs
1 N.O. & 1 N.C. from Ferrocode head
Internal Fuse
500 mAT replaceable supply fuse
Internal Switches
Mains selector switch
Relay Output
2 N.O. & 1 N.C. TÜV approved
3-68
Material & Colour
Red moulded ABS plastic
Fixing Details
M4
Cable
0.2 mm2 (24AWG) 6 wire; Braided PVC Jacket OD 6mm (0.23in)
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrocode Product Selection Type
Supply Voltage
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Connection
Housing
Catalogue Number
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
Terminals
45mm Wide Polycarbonate
440N-C02068
24V AC/DC
Control Unit
110V 230V AC 2m Cable Switch & Actuator
24V AC/DC
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
440N-C02067
6m Cable
None
440N-C02070
Red, ABS Plastic
8m Cable 10m Cable
440N-C02078 440N-C02076 440N-C02079
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door close, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped complete with actuator.
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
Actuator
—
440N-A02071
Fuse, 500mA
14-6
440R-A31562
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Switch
Actuator 7 (0.28)
Control Unit
7 (0.28) 4.5 (0.18)
4.5 (0.18) 45.5 (1.79)
35 (1.38) DIN Rail Mounting
73 (2.87)
73 (2.87)
73 (2.87)
=
82 (3.23)
41 (1.61)
54 (2.13)
84 (3.31)
=
120 (4.72)
7 (0.28) 16 (0.63)
= =
11 4 4 (0.43) (0.16) (0.16) 19 (0.75)
19 (0.75)
4.5 (0.18) 19 (0.75)
4.5 (0.18)
Block A1
A2
F1 110/230
X1
24V DC
S13 S14 S21 S22 X2 Red (Black) (White) (Green) (Yellow) 13 23
K1
K2 K2 K3
~
K3
31
K3 VR1 Logic
Power
K2
K1 K2
K1
K2
K3 Logic
K3
Output Blue
14 24
32
3-69
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrocode Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V DC Reset
L1 L2 L3
Sensor 1
Actuator
Sensor 2
Actuator
Sensor 3
Actuator
B1 S13 S21 A1 13 23 31 X1 K1
Ferrocode
K2 B2 S14 S22 A2 14 24 32 X2 Aux
K1 K2 Ground
Multiple Sensor Input, Manual Reset, Dual-Channel Output, Monitored Output L1
L1 L2 L3 B1 S13 S21 A1 13
K1
Sensor 1
Actuator
23 31 X1
Ferrocode
K2 B2 S14 S22 A2 14 24 K1
K2
32 X2 Aux
M
N
Single Sensor Input, Automatic Reset, Dual-Channel Output, Monitored Output Ferrocode Sensor Red
Blue
+ 24V DC Supply –
Black Safety N.C. White
Yellow Safety N.O. Green
3-70
Note: External Fuse is recommended when switch is not powered by a Ferrocode control unit. Recommend using 24V DC or 110V AC, 300mA fuse.
M
Interlock Switches
Non contact Switches Ferrocode Typical Application Details On presenting the actuator to the switch, the high-intensity electromagnetic field together with a resonant frequency signal causes the contacts to close. On removing the actuator (opening the door) the safety contacts open, isolating the machine. The switch can not be overridden by magnets, tools, etc.
Safety contact operating distance: make 7mm, break 9mm Auxiliary contact operating distance: make 9mm, break 14mm
Application Details Actuator Spacing
Actuator Approach Directions >25mm Switch
Switch Actuator
Actuator
On hinged doors, install switch at the opening edge. Where 2 switches are mounted adjacent, they should be no closer than 25mm. Recommend a 2mm spacing between switch and actuator.
Typical Configurations The Ferrocode switch can be used without a control unit for low risk/low power applications.
Wigan WN2 4HR
Six Ferrocode switches can be used with one control unit for high risk applications. Connect the N.C. contacts (black and white wires) in series and the N.O. contacts (green and yellow wires) in parallel.
A1 A2 X1 X2 B1 B2 S13 S14
0942 55166
SUPPLY
Red
Blue
Black
White
Wigan WN2 4HR
Wigan WN2 4HR
Wigan WN2 4HR
Wigan WN2 4HR
Wigan WN2 4HR
Wigan WN2 4HR
0942 55166
0942 55166
0942 55166
0942 55166
0942 55166
0942 55166
One Ferrocode switch used with a control unit provides a higher integrity system.
A1 A2 X1 X2 B1 B2 S13 S14 SUPPLY
Red
SEE SIDE FOR SUPPLY
Ferrocode
Ferrocode
Safety Switch
Actuator
1A 28Vdc 0.5A 120Vac IP 67
Wigan WN2 4HR
0942 55166
Made in England
FERROCODE Control Unit TAMPER PROOF SAFETY SYSTEM pr EN 1088 EN 60204 pt.1 AUXILIARY
SAFETY 1
!
ISOLATE BEFORE REMOVING COVER SAFETY 2
Green
Yellow
31 32 13 14 23 24 S21S22
Made in England
Black
White
Wigan WN2 4HR
0942 55166
Made in the EC
POWER
OUTPUT
Blue
SEE SIDE FOR SUPPLY
Made in the EC
Ferrocode
Ferrocode
Ferrocode
Ferrocode
Ferrocode
Ferrocode
Safety Switch
Safety Switch
Safety Switch
Safety Switch
Safety Switch
Safety Switch
1A 28Vdc 0.5A 120Vac IP 67
1A 28Vdc 0.5A 120Vac IP 67
1A 28Vdc 0.5A 120Vac IP 67
1A 28Vdc 0.5A 120Vac IP 67
1A 28Vdc 0.5A 120Vac IP 67
1A 28Vdc 0.5A 120Vac IP 67
Made in England
Made in England
Made in England
Made in England
Made in England
Made in England
FERROCODE Control Unit TAMPER PROOF SAFETY SYSTEM pr EN 1088 EN 60204 pt.1 AUXILIARY
SAFETY 1
!
POWER
OUTPUT ISOLATE BEFORE REMOVING COVER SAFETY 2
Green
Yellow
31 32 13 14 23 24 S21S22
Ferrocode
Ferrocode
Safety Switch
Actuator
1A 28Vdc 0.5A 120Vac IP 67
Wigan WN2 4HR
0942 55166
Made in England
Made in England
Typical Applications Sliding Guard
Removable Guard
Hinged Guard
Note: Removable guards using Non contact switches may require two switches, one at either side of the guard, or the use of a flap to prevent initial lifting of the non-interlocked edge.
3-71
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches Sprite Specifications
Description Developed from the highly successful Ensign, the Sprite offers the same safety related features in a more compact housing—only 75 × 25 × 29mm (2.95 x 0.98 x 1.14in)—making it the smallest interlock currently available. The Sprite has been designed for smaller machines such as printing machines, copiers or domestic machinery which, until now, have been unable use standard safety interlocks due to space restrictions. Despite its diminutive size the Sprite includes the necessary safety related functions, such as forced guided contacts and a tamper resistant mechanism allowing machinery to be safeguarded in compliance with the machinery directive. The Sprite’s shaft is connected to the existing hinge pin and the degree of operation can be adjusted to suit the application via the adjustable cam in the switch head. Note: After adjustment, the cam must be secured in position with the
supplied cam locking pin to ensure optimal performance.
The Sprite is available with two N.C. or one N.O. and one N.C. safety contact in a watertight and dustproof IP67 housing.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus NRTL/C and TUV
Safety Contacts
2 N.C. or 1 N.C. direct opening action
Utilisation Cat. AC (Ue) (le) DC
AC 15 500V 250V 100V 1A 2A 5A 250V 0.5A 24V 2A
Max Switched Current/ Voltage/Load
500V/500VA
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Minimum Current
5V 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
>2mm (0.08in)
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Voltage
(Uimp) 2500V
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Pollution Degree ➊
3
Shaft Rotation for Contact Operation
Maximum 11°; Minimum 3° (adjustable)
Break Contact Min Force
8cNm (torque on shaft)
Case Material
UL approved glass filled polyester
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
1 × M16 or quick-disconnect style
Operating Temperature
-20°C to +80°C (-4°F to 176°F)
Fixing
2 x M4
Features
Mounting
Any position
• • • • •
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Ideal for small, light weight guards The smallest hinge interlock switch available, 75 × 25mm case Degree of operation can customized with adjustable cam Contacts, 2 N.C. or 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Four possible shaft positions, easy to install
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
80g (0.176lb)
Colour
Red
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation.
Four Position Rotating Head
50, 60, or 80mm long actuator shafts
3-72
The head rotates 360° in 90° increments to give four possible shaft operating positions.
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches Sprite Product Selection
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
2 N.C.
BBM/MBB
—
1 N.C.
—
1 N.C.
BBM
Catalogue Number
Actuator Shaft Dimensions mm (inches)
M16 Conduit
M16 Conduit/ 1/2in Adaptor
Quick Disconnect
80 x ∅10 (3.14 x 0.39)
440H-S34019
440H-S34023
440H-S34027
60 x ∅8 (2.36 x 0.31)
440H-S34020
440H-S34024
440H-S34028
50 x ∅10 (1.96 x 0.39)
440H-S34010
440H-S34017
440H-S34014
80 x ∅10 (3.14 x 0.39)
440H-S34021
440H-S34025
440H-S34029
60 x ∅8 (2.36 x 0.31)
440H-S34022
440H-S34026
440H-S34030
50 x ∅10 (1.96 x 0.39)
440H-S34012
440H-S34018
440H-S34015
Recommended standard cordset, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-10 for additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-2
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 25 (0.98) 75 (2.95)
12.5 (0.49)
R 2.1
29 (1.14) 12.5 (0.49)
1 x M16
5 (0.2)
12.5 (0.49) 3 18 (0.71) (0.12)
17.5 (0.69) 12.5 (0.49)
Length ➊
34.5 (1.36) 36 (1.42)
16.5 (0.65)
Diameter ➊ ➊ See Product Selection for dimensions.
Typical Wiring Diagrams 1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
2 N.C.
23
11
21
11
24
12
22
12
1 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
Terminal 1
11
2 N.C.
Contact
Terminal
Contact
11 N.C.
2
1
3
12
3
4
2
23 24
N.C. 22
1 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM)
Contact Action
3°
Contact Closed
Shaft rotation
21 N.O.
4
Contact Open
N.C. 12
11/12 21/22
2 N.C.
0°
3°
0°
11/12 21/22 11°
11°
3-73
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches Ensign 3 Specifications Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus, BG and SUVA
Safety Contacts
2 N.C. or 3 N.C. direct opening action
Utilization Cat. AC (Ue) (le) DC
AC 15 500V 250V 100V 1A 2A 5A 250V 0.5A 24V 2A
Max Switched Current/ Voltage/Load
500V/500VA
The Ensign 3 is a hinge actuated safety interlock switch designed to fit at the hinge point of guards. With its rotatable head, the versatile Ensign 3 offers up to four different mounting options.
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Minimum Current
5V 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
>2mm (0.08in)
Operation of the unit is achieved by the hinging action of the guard. The actuation shaft is connected to the existing hinge pin and the degree of operation can be adjusted to suit the application via the adjustable cam in the switch head.
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Voltage
(Uimp) 2500V
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O. (available with 2 N.C. safety contact)
Note: After adjustment, the cam must be secured in position with the
Pollution Degree ➊
3
Shaft Rotation to Achieve Contact Operation 3 N.C. 2 N.C., 1 N.O. (BBM) 2 N.C., 1 N.O. (MBB)
Adjustable 12° maximum; 3° minimum Adjustable 14° maximum; 5° minimum Adjustable 12° maximum; 3° minimum
Break Contact Min Force
8cNm (torque on shaft)
Case Material
UL approved glass filled polyester
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Features
Protection
IP67
• • • • •
Conduit Entry
1 × M16 or connector style
Description
supplied cam locking pin to ensure optimal performance.
The switch includes the necessary safety related functions, such as forced guided contacts and a tamper resistant mechanism, allowing machinery to be safeguarded in compliance with the machinery directive. It is sealed to IP67 and has one conduit entry, M16 or connector style.
Compact size—90.5 x 31 x 30.4mm housing Ideal for small, lightweight guards Degree of operation can be customized with adjustable cam Contacts, 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 3 N.C. (sealed to IP67) Four possible shaft positions, easy to install
Operating Temperature
-20°C to +80°C (-4°F to 176°F)
Fixing
2 × M4
Mounting
Any position
Mechanical Life
1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight
100g (.22lb)
Colour
Red
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation.
50, 60, or 80mm long actuator shafts
3-74
The head rotates 360° in 90° increments to give four possible shaft operating positions.
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches Ensign 3 Product Selection
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
3 N.C.
—
BBM 2 N.C.
M16 Conduit
M16 Conduit/ 1/2in Adaptor
Quick Disconnect
80 x ∅10 (3.14 x 0.39)
440H-E22025
440H-E22050
440H-E22059
BBM/MBB
—
1 N.C. MBB
Catalogue Number
Actuator Shaft Dimensions mm (inches) 60 x ∅8 (2.36 x 0.31)
440H-E22031
440H-E22051
440H-E22060
50 x ∅10 (1.96 x 0.39)
440H-E22047
440H-E22052
440H-E22061
80 x ∅10 (3.14 x 0.39)
440H-E22027
440H-E22053
440H-E22037
60 x ∅8 (2.36 x 0.31)
440H-E22033
440H-E22054
440H-E22039
50 x ∅10 (1.96 x 0.39)
440H-E22048
440H-E22055
440H-E22062
80 x ∅10 (3.14 x 0.39)
440H-E22029
440H-E22056
440H-E22038
60 x ∅8 (2.36 x 0.31)
440H-E22035
440H-E22057
440H-E22040
50 x ∅10 (1.96 x 0.39)
440H-E22049
440H-E22058
440H-E22063
Recommended standard cordset, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-11 for additional lengths.
889R-F6ACA-2
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
20 22 (0.79)(0.87) Ctrs Ctrs
31 (1.22)
25 (0.98) Ctrs
34.4 (1.35) 36.4 (1.43) 38.4 (1.51)
R 2.15
25 (0.98) 30.4 (1.2)
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
3 (0.12) 13 (0.51)
90.5 (3.56)
12.5 (0.49) Length ➊
➊ See Product Selection for dimensions.
Diameter ➊
Typical Wiring Diagrams 2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
3 N.C.
33
21
11
31
21
11
34
22
12
32
22
12
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout 1 5 2 6 3 4
Contact Action Contact Open
Contact Closed
Shaft rotation
Terminal 11 12 21 22 33 34
Contact N.C. N.C. N.O.
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM) 5° 0° 11/12 11/12 21/22 21/22 33/34 31/32 6° (MBB) 4° 0° 11/12 21/22 33/34 3°
3 N.C. Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32 3 N.C. 5°
Contact N.C. N.C. N.C.
0°
3-75
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches Rotacam Specifications
Description A heavy-duty hinge actuated safety interlock switch, the Rotacam shaft can be used as, or connected to, the existing hinge pin for direct operation of the switch. Machine power is isolated when the guard has been opened just 5°. For applications requiring a larger degree of operation the internal cam can be adjusted from 5° to 11°.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus, SUVA and TUV
Contact Arrangement
2 N.C. & 1 N.O. direct opening action
Utilization Cat. AC (Ue) (le) DC
AC 15 500V 250V 100V 1A 2A 5A 250V 0.5A 24V 2A
Thermal Current (lth)
10A
Minimum Current
5V 5mA DC
Safety Contact Gap
>2mm (0.08in)
Rtd. Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Rtd. Impulse withstand Voltage
(Uimp) 2500V
Shaft Rotation to Achieve Contact Operation
11° maximum; 5° minimum, (adjustable)
Note: After adjustment, the cam must be secured in position with the
supplied cam locking pin to ensure optimal performance.
Break Contact Min Force
12cNm (torque on shaft)
The Rotacam is available with two N.C. safety contacts and one N.O. auxiliary contact. The switch includes the necessary safety related functions, such as forced guided contacts and a tamper resistant mechanism, allowing machinery to be safeguarded in compliance with the machinery directive.
Max Actuation Speed
160mm per sec (6.29in)
Max Actuation Frequency
1 Cycle per sec
Case Material
Heavy duty die cast alloy
Actuator Shaft
Stainless Steel
Protection
IP66
The die-cast housing is sealed to IP66 and features one M20 conduit entry (1/2in NPT and connector style also available). Two different shaft lengths of 30mm and 85mm can also be specified.
Conduit Entry
1 × M20 or quick-disconnect style
EX and Pneumatic styles of Rotacam are also available; see the Explosion Proof section on page 16-1 for more information.
Features • Can be used as a hinge pin on light and medium weight guard doors • Isolates power within 5° of door movement • Degree of operation can be customized with adjustable cam • Robust die-cast case, ideal for heavy duty applications • Contacts, 2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +80°C (-13°F to 176°F)
Fixing
2 x M4
Mounting
Any position
Mechanical Life
>1,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
>1,000,000 operations
Weight
420g (.926lb)
Colour
Red
Note: The safety contacts of the Guardmaster switches are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started. Fixing Methods
Roll Pin
Pre-Bored The actuator shaft is pre-bored allowing the existing hinge pin to be utilised as the flexing point.
3-76
Solid Shaft The solid actuator shaft can be used as the hinge pin on certain guards.
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches Rotacam Product Selection
Safety Contacts
2 N.C.
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.C.
BBM/MBB
Type Size (L=Length: D-Dia) mm (inches)
Catalogue Number Shaft Type
M20 Conduit
M20 Conduit/ 1/2in Adaptor
Quick Disconnect
L = 30 (1.18) D= 16 (0.63)
Pre-Bored
440H-R03074
440H-R03078
440H-R03111
L = 85 (3.35) D= 12.7 (0.5)
Solid
440H-R03079
440H-R03088
440H-R03112
BBM
Recommended standard cordset, 2m (6.5ft). See page 15-10 for additional lengths.
889D-F8AB-2
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 3.5 (0.14)
99 (3.9)
38 (1.5)
6.5 (0.26)
L
6.5 (0.26)
D
6.5 (0.26)
86 (3.39)
65 (2.56)
36 (1.42) 52 (2.05)
24 (0.94)
14.5 (0.57)
24.5 (0.96)
15.5 (0.61)
25 (0.98) 13 (0.51)
2 x holes 3.2 (0.13)
2 x holes M4 Note: Holes only on pre-bored models.
5 (0.2) 8 (0.31)
9.5 (0.37)
3-77
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches Rotacam Typical Wiring Diagrams Safety Circuit 1
Safety Circuit 2
Auxiliary Circuit 33
21
11
34
22
12
2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
1 2
7 8
3
4
6 5
Contact Action Contact Open
1 7 6 5 4 3 8
Terminal 11 12 21 22 33 34
Contact N.C. N.C. N.O. Ground 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. (BBM) 5
Contact Closed
Shaft rotation
11/12 21/22 33/34 6
3-78
0mm
Safety Relays
Why Use a Minotaur? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Quick Guide to Safety System Architectures . . . . . . . 4-3 Minotaur Safety Relay Selection Navigator . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Monitoring Safety Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs. . . . 4-42 Two Hand Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 Timing Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Stop Motion Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Back EMF Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Modular Monitoring Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Safety Relays
Why Use a Minotaur? Relays and Control Units Control units provide functions such as time delays, motion sensing and two hand control supervision.
Without Safety Relay
Control Circuit Supply
The functional requirements for monitoring safety relay units, such as the Guardmaster Minotaur range, will depend on their use in the system. Their basic tasks are: 1. To detect faults on safety-related electrical control circuits, e.g. faults in sensors, wiring, contactors, etc. 2. To provide an ensured switching action, e.g. to act as an intermediate relay to amplify a signal or distribute it to multiple devices. 3. To provide a manual reset facility. They achieve their function by using internal redundancy (e.g. duplication) and monitoring.
Short Circuit Possible Fault
Contactor Possible Fault
Switch Possible Fault
With Safety Relay
Minotaur Unit: Monitors Switches, E-Stops, Contactors, Safety Circuit Wiring, etc.
Power Supply
Switch Wiring: Minotaur monitors for faults that may cause danger.
Contactor Wiring: Minotaur monitors for faults that may cause danger. From Supply
Switches: Minotaur monitors for faults that may cause danger.
To Load Contactors: Minotaur monitors for faults that may cause danger.
Applications
MSR6R/T
4-2
Contactor monitoring circuit Contactor switching circuit Supply inclusive of switching circuit Contactor Monitored by Minotaur
Safety Relays
Quick Guide to Safety System Architectures Selection Guidelines
Making the Right Choice
There are four safety system architectures available from Rockwell Automation. They are as follows:
Begin the selection process by evaluating the needs of your application. The Quick Guide below can be used to direct you towards the best solution. Some of the guidelines will clearly point you to one type of architecture or another. Some will require further analysis before making a final decision. Due to the diverse nature of machine guarding, it is possible to create a hybrid system or a combination of architectures to provide adequate safeguarding of a particular machine or manufacturing system.
1. Component systems: At the lowest level, a safety function can be accomplished with an actuating device and a control device. For example, an e-stop button that opens up the coil of a safety control relay performs a simple safety function. Component system architectures are intended for low risk applications. 2. Dedicated safety monitoring relay systems: Dedicated safety relays are used for specific applications. These systems utilize packaged control modules that are designed to interface to common safety devices such as e-stops, safety gates, light curtains, safety mats. Some dedicated relays provide special functions like timing, twohand control, muting, and presence sensing device initiation. Since there are many different types of input devices and functions, there are many different types of dedicated safety monitoring relays. Dedicated safety monitoring relays have the ability to provide basic diagnostics in the form of LED’s on their front panels and auxiliary contacts that may be connected to a PLC or indicator lamp. Dedicated safety relays system architectures are used in medium to high-risk applications. 3. Expandable safety monitoring relay systems: This is a new architecture being introduced to the machine safeguarding market; it’s the MSR200 family. It provides the unique ability to easily add input and output modules to a “basic” safety relay module. Since the modular system is microprocessor based, it also has the ability to provide enhanced diagnostics over a communication connection. For instance, the I/O and error status can be communicated over a field bus network. Being a relatively new architecture, it currently accepts inputs from common types of safety devices: e-stops, safety gates, light curtains and safety mats. Modular safety relay system architectures can be used in medium to high-risk applications. 4. Safety PLC systems: Safety PLCs bring programmability, high I/ O counts, distributed control and a high level of communications to safety architectures. They also bring some special functions not previously available in dedicated systems: high speed counters and analog signals. Safety PLC architectures are often applied in a variety of complex, high-risk applications.
Quick Guide Characteristics
Architecture
Application Complexity Low
Dedicated Relays
Medium
Dedicated or Expandable Relays
High
Safety PLCs
Communication Status
Expandable Relays
Control
Safety PLCs
Diagnostics Low
Dedicated Relays
Med
Expandable Relays
High
Safety PLC
Expandability Low
Dedicated Relays
Med
Expandable Relays
High
Safety PLC
Input Types Special
Dedicated Relays or Safety PLCs
Common
Dedicated or Expandable Relays
I/O Count Low
Dedicated Relays
Med
Expandable Relays
High
Safety PLCs
I/O Location Contained
Dedicated or Expandable Relays
Spread Out
Safety PLC
Sequential Shutdown None
Dedicated or Expandable relays
Yes
Safety PLC
Zone Control Few
Dedicated or Expandable Relays
Many
Safety PLCs
4-3
Safety Relays
Minotaur Safety Relay Selection Navigator Immediate Outputs
Relay Model
Cat. per EN 954-1
Safety Inputs➊
Delayed Outputs
Auxiliary
Safety
Operating Voltage
Auxiliary
EM SS EM SS SS EM EM SS EM SS SS 24 NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NC NC NO DC
24 AC
120 AC
230 AC
Monitoring Safety Relays MSR8T
3
1 N.C.
3
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR5T
4
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
3
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
—
—
MSR30RT/RTP
4
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or SM
—
2
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR126R/T
4
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or LC
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR123RT
4
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or LC
2
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR9T
3
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
2
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR33RT/RTP
4
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
—
2
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR23M
4
SM
2
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
—
MSR22LM
4
3 x 2 N.C.
2
—
1
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR127RP/TP
4
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or LC
3
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR6R/T
3
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
3
—
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR121RT
4
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or SM
3
—
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR131RP/TP
4
1 or 2 N.C. or SM or LC
3
—
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR124RT
4
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or LC
5
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR18T
4
1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
5
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs MSR38D/DP
4/3
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or SM
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
—
—
1
•
—
—
—
3
2 N.C.
2
—
1
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
—
—
MSR138DP
4/3
1 or 2 N.C. or LC
2
—
—
—
—
3
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR138.1DP
4/3
1 or 2 N.C. or LC
2
—
—
—
—
2
1
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
3
2 N.C.
8
—
1
—
—
1
—
—
1
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR15D
MSR10RD
Two-Hand Control Relays MSR35H/HP
4
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
—
2
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR125H/HP
4
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
•
•
MSR7R/C
3
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
3
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
Expansion Units MSR132E/EP
4
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
4
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
—
—
MSR132ED/EDP
3
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
—
—
—
—
—
4
—
—
2
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR122E
4
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
6
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
MSR19E
4
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
8
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
➊ SM = 4 wire Safety Mat, LC = Light Curtain EM = Electromechanical, SS = Solid State, and • = included
4-4
Safety Relays
Output Switching Current, A
Reset ➋ Auto./ Man.
Mon. Man.
250V AC
24V DC
Housing Width (mm)
Approvals Removable Terminals C-tick
CE
BG
cULus
TUV
Additional Information
Relay Model
Monitoring Safety Relays •
—
4
3
45.5
—
•
•
—
•
—
4-14
MSR8T
•
—
4
3
22.5
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-10
MSR5T
•
•
—
2
22.5
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-26
MSR30RT/RTP
•
•
5
3
22.5
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-36
MSR126R/T
•
•
6
3
45.0
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-32
MSR123RT
•
—
4
3
45.5
—
•
•
—
•
—
4-16
MSR9T
•
•
—
2
22.5
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-28
MSR33RT/RTP
•
•
3
3
22.5 & 45.0
•
—
•
•
•
—
4-24
MSR23M
—
•
3
3
45.0
•
—
•
•
—
—
4-20
MSR22LM
•
•
5
3
22.5
•
•
•
•
•
—
4-38
MSR127RP/TP
•
•
4
3
45.5
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-12
MSR6R/T
•
•
6
3
55.0
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-30
MSR121RT
•
•
3
2.5
45.0
•
•
•
—
—
—
4-40
MSR131RP/TP
•
•
4
2
100
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-34
MSR124RT
•
•
0.75
2
90.0
—
•
•
—
•
•
4-18
MSR18T
•
•
4-46
MSR38D/DP
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs •
—
2
22.5
•
•
•
—
•
—
4
2
45.5
—
•
•
—
•
•
4-44
MSR15D
•
•
6
3
45.0
•
•
•
—
—
—
4-48
MSR138DP
•
•
6
3
45.0
•
•
•
—
—
—
4-48
MSR138.1DP
•
•
4
3
152
—
•
•
—
•
—
4-42
MSR10RD
Two-Hand Control Relays —
—
—
2
22.5
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-52
MSR35H/HP
—
—
5
3
22.5
•
•
•
•
—
—
4-54
MSR125H/HP
—
—
4
2
45.5
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-50
MSR7R/C
Expansion Units —
—
6
3
22.5
•
•
•
•
•
—
4-60
MSR132E/EP
—
—
6
3
22.5
•
•
•
•
•
—
4-60
MSR132ED/EDP
—
—
4
2
100
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-58
MSR122E
—
—
0.75
2
90
—
•
•
—
•
•
4-56
MSR19E
Note: ➋ Auto./Man. = Automatic/Manual and Mon. Man. = Monitored Manual
4-5
Safety Relays
Minotaur Safety Relay Selection Navigator (continued) Immediate Outputs
Relay Model
Safety
Cat. per EN 954-1
Inputs➊
Delayed Outputs
Auxiliary
Safety
Operating Voltage
Auxiliary
EM SS EM SS SS EM EM SS EM SS SS 24 NO NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NC NC NO DC
24 AC
120 AC
230 AC
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays MSR210P
4
Two independent inputs 1, 2, or 3 N.C. or SM or 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
2
—
1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR211
4
Two independent inputs 1, or 2 N.C. or LM
2
—
1
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR220P
4
Two independent inputs 1, 2, or 3 N.C. or SM or 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR221P
4
Two independent inputs 1 or 2 N.C. or LC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR230P
4
—
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR238P
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
—
—
1
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR240P
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
MSR245P
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
—
—
—
Control Units CU1
1
1 N.O.
—
—
—
—
—
2
—
—
1
—
—
•
•
•
•
CU2
1
1 NPN & 1 PNP
2
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
CU3
1
1 Phase
2
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
•
•
•
•
CU4
3
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
—
—
—
—
—
2
1
—
—
—
—
•
•
—
—
➊ SM = 4 wire Safety Mat, LC = Light Curtain EM = Electromechanical, SS = Solid State, and • = included
4-6
Safety Relays
Output Switching Current, A
Reset ➋ Auto./ Man.
Mon. Man.
250V AC
24V DC
Housing Width (mm)
Approvals Removable Terminals C-tick
CE
BG
cULus
TUV
Additional Information
Relay Model
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays •
•
3
2.5
45.0
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-72
MSR210P
•
•
3
2.5
45.0
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-74
MSR211P
—
—
—
—
17.5
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-76
MSR220P
—
—
—
—
17.5
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-78
MSR221P
—
—
3
2.5
22.5
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-80
MSR230P
—
—
5
3
22.5
•
•
•
—
•
•
4-82
MSR238P
—
—
—
—
17.5
•
•
•
—
—
—
4-84
MSR240P
—
—
—
—
144
•
•
•
—
—
—
4-86
MSR245P
Control Units •
—
4
3
45
—
•
•
—
•
•
4-62
CU1
•
—
4
3
45
—
•
•
—
•
•
4-66
CU2
•
—
4
3
45
—
•
•
—
•
•
4-70
CU3
•
—
5
3
22.5
—
•
•
•
•
—
4-64
CU4
Note: ➋ Auto./Man. = Automatic/Manual and Mon. Man. = Monitored Manual
4-7
Safety Relays
Power Supply Unit Specifications Standards
IEC/EN 60204-1
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Power Supply
110V AC and 230V AC 50/50Hz
Power Consumption
<4W
Fuses Input (external)
500mA time lag
Outputs
500mA@ 24V DC
Indication LEDs
Red = Power on
Impulse Withstand Voltage
3000V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Description
Humidity
90% RH
The Minotaur power supply converts either 110V AC or 230V AC to 24V DC. It is intended to be used with an MSR5T or a Ferrotek noncontact interlock.
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque Settings—terminal screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
The power supply can be connected to an MSR5T and used to interface to 110V AC or 230V AC emergency stop and gate interlock control signals. The power supply can be used to power 3 Ferrotek control units and one MSR5T for noncontact interlock protection.
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
210g (0.46lbs)
Features
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
• • • •
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
110V AC or 230V AC input 24V DC output <4VA power consumption 22.5mm wide housing
4-8
Safety Relays
Power Supply Unit Product Selection Description
Output
Catalogue Number
110/230V AC Power Supply
500mA @ 24V DC
440R-A32003
Dimensions—mm (inches) 22.5 (0.89)
75 (2.95)
82 (3.23)
99 (3.9)
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
Typical Wiring Diagrams 110V Connections 110V AC Supply Jumper
A1
Jumper
A3
A2
24V AC Output
A4
24V AC Output
_
+
+
_
24V AC Output
24V AC Output
_
+
_
+
230V Connections 230V AC Supply
A1
A3
24V AC Output
Jumper
A2
A4
+
24V AC Output
24V AC Output
_
+
_
+
24V AC Output
_
+
_
4-9
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR5T Specifications Standards
Description The MSR5T has 1 N.C. single channel input for use with gate interlocks and emergency stop buttons in lower risk applications. The MSR5T has output monitoring that can accommodate an automatic/manual reset function. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of the contacts. The MSR5T has 3 N.O. safety outputs and 1 N.C. auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary contact is a nonsafety output intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs. The Minotaur power supply converts either 110V AC or 230V AC to 24V DC. It is intended to be used with an MSR5T or a Ferrotek noncontact interlock. When used with the MSR5T, the Minotaur power supply acts like a 110V AC (230V AC) input module allowing a single channel 110V AC (230V AC) circuit to be wired directly into a safety circuit.
Features • • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 Single channel input 3 N.O. safety outputs 1 N.C. auxiliary output 22.5mm wide housing Optional 110/230V AC input module
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TUV
Power Supply
24V AC/DC±15% 50/60Hz
Power Consumption
<4VA
Safety Inputs
1 N.C.
Maximum Input Resistance
200 Ω
Reset
Automatic/Manual
Outputs
3 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15 4A/250V AC, 4A/120V AC P300 DC-13 3A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
4A
Fuses, output
5A quick acting
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Maximum Dropout Time
90ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Output
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded, 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque Settings—terminal screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
210g (0.46lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ = 0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Applications Switching + circuit
-- Supply
MSR5T
Contactor monitoring circuit Contactor switching circuit Supply inclusive of switching circuit Contactor Monitored by Minotaur
The MSR5T monitors itself for any internal fault
The safety function is ensured by the Minotaur
4-10
Contactors: Provides contactor monitoring if two or more contactors are used
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relay Minotaur MSR5T Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
1 N.C.
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
24V AC/DC
440R-B23020
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
110/230V AC Power Supply Unit
4-8
440R-A32003
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.89)
99 (3.9)
A1
24VDC
75 (2.95)
K1
13 23 33 41
X2
X1
82 (3.23)
~
A2
K2
K1 K1
K1
K2
K1
K2
K2
K2
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
14 24 34
42
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC
24V DC Reset
open
E-Stop
L1 L2 L3 A1
13
23
33
41
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 A1
X1
23
13
33
41
X1
closed
K1
MSR5T
MSR5T
K2
K1 A2
14
24
34
K1
K2
K3
42
K3
K2
X2 Aux
A2
M
M
Ground
M
14
34
24 K1
K2
42
X2 Aux
M
Ground
Single-Channel Gate Interlock, Automatic Reset, Single-Channel Output, No Monitored Output
Dual-Channel E-Stop, Manual Reset, Dual-Channel Output, Monitored Output
4-11
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR6R/T Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 110V or 230V AC 50/ 60Hz
Power Consumption
<4VA
Safety Inputs
2 N.C.
Input Simultaneity
0.5 seconds
Maximum Input Resistance
500 Ω
Reset
Monitored Man. or Auto./Man.
Description
Outputs
3 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
The MSR6R/T has an internal switch that allows the user to select either 1 N.C. single channel input for use with gate interlock and emergency stop buttons in lower risk applications or 2 N.C. dual channel inputs for higher risk applications.
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15; 4A/250V AC, 4A/120V AC P300 DC-13; 3A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
4A
Fuses Input (internal, replace.) Output (external)
500mA time lag 5A quick acting
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Maximum Dropout Time
50ms
Indication LEDs
Red = Power On; Green = K1 Closed; Green = K2 Closed; Amber = Single Channel Mode
The MSR6R/T has an internal selector switch that can accommodate automatic/manual or a monitored manual reset function. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of the contacts. Monitored manual requires the use of a manually operated normally open momentary switch to activate the outputs. The MSR6R/T has 3 N.O. safety outputs and 1 N.C. auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary contact is a nonsafety output intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
Features • • • • • • •
Category 3 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 Switch selectable input 3 N.O. safety outputs 1 N.C. auxiliary output Switch selectable reset 45mm wide housing
4-12
2500V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded, 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque Settings—term. screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
510g (1.12lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Application Details
MSR6R/T
Impulse Withstand Voltage
Contactor monitoring circuit Contactor switching circuit Supply inclusive of switching circuit Contactor Monitored by Minotaur
Use a slotted screwdriver to pop open cover to reveal switches & fuse. R&T Reset Selector Switch D R = Monitored manual reset Input Switch facility with system check for high integrity utilizing a Replacement S Fuse momentary push button. The push and release feature R means the button can not be Reset Switch T held in. D & S Input Selector Switch T = Automatic system D = Dual channel input. check. S = Single channel input.
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR6R/T Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.C or 2 N.C.
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-C23017
110V AC
440R-C23018
230V AC
440R-C23019
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 45.5 (1.79)
120 (4.72)
A1
A2
X1 X2
S24
13 23 33
S23
41
T R
73 (2.87)
K3 K2
24VDC K2
~
K3
K1
K2 K1
K1
K3
K4
K4 K1
K5 K1
D
K5 K6
S K6
K2
K2
35mm DIN Rail Mounting S14
14 24
S13
34 42
Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
24V DC Reset
L1 L2 L3 S23 S24
open
S
A1
13
23
33
41 X1
S13
open
S
MSR6R/T
R closed
L1 L2 L3 S23 S24
K1 S14
A2
14
24
34
13
23
33
41 X1
MSR6R/T
K1
T closed
42 X2
S13
S14
A2
M
Aux
K1
A1
14
24
34
M
Aux
K1
N
42 X2
Ground
Single-Channel Safety Gate, Monitored Manual Reset, Single-Channel Output, Monitored Output
Single-Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, Single-Channel Output, No Monitored Output L1
24V DC Reset
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 S23 S24
open
A1
13
23
33
41 X1
D
S23 S24
open
closed
S13
K1
Ground
K2 S14
A2
14
24
K1
K2
34
Dual-Channel Safety Gate, Monitored Manual Reset, Dual-Channel Output, Monitored Output
33
41 X1 K1 K2
T
closed
42 X2 Aux
23
D MSR6R/T
MSR6R/T
R
A1
13
S13
M
S14
A2
14
24
K1
K2
34
42 X2 Aux
M
N
Dual-Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, Dual-Channel Output, Monitored Output
4-13
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR8T Specifications Standards
Description The MSR8T has 1 N.C. single channel input for use with gate interlocks and emergency stop buttons in lower risk applications. The MSR8T has output monitoring that can accommodate an automatic/manual reset. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of the contacts. The MSR8T has 3 N.O. safety outputs and 2 N.C. auxiliary outputs. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary contacts are nonsafety outputs intended to provide an external signals about the status of the safety outputs. The MSR8T can be used either as an extension unit to other Minotaur units or as a independent single channel input device. When used as an extension unit, the MSR8T inputs are connected to one of the outputs on the host unit. The outputs on the MSR8T will then mimic the outputs on the host unit.
Features • • • • • •
Category 3 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 1 N. C. single channel input 3 N.O. safety outputs 2 N.C. auxiliary output 45mm wide housing
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110/230V AC 50/60Hz
Power Consumption
<4VA
Safety Inputs
1 N.C.
Maximum Input Resistance
200 Ω
Reset
Automatic/Manual
Outputs
3 N.O. Safety; 2 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15 4A/250V AC, 4A/120V AC P300 DC-13; 3A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
4A
Fuses Input (internal, replace.) Output (external)
500mA time lag 5A quick acting
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Maximum Dropout Time
90ms
Indication LEDs
Red = Power On Green = Output On
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded, 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque Settings—terminal screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
210g (0.46lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-14
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR8T Product Selection Type
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.C.
3 N.O.
2 N.C.
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-E23030
110/230V AC
440R-E23031
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 120 (4.72)
45.5 (1.79)
A2
A1
X1 X2 S13
13 23 33
S14
41
51
34 42
52
F1 K2 24VDC
73 (2.87)
~
K3
K2
K1 K1
K1
K2
K3
K2
K1
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
14 24
Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
L1
L1 L2 L3 S13
open
A1
13
23
33
41
51
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
X1
open
S13
A1
13
23
33
41
51 X1 K1
MSR8T
S14
A2
K1
14
24
K1
K2
34
42
K2
MSR8T closed
52 X2 Aux
M
M
N
S14
A2
K2 14
24
K1
K2
34
42
52 X2 Aux
M
M
Ground
Single-Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, Single-Channel Output, No Monitored Output
Single-Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, Single-Channel Output, Monitored Output
Application Details
Voltage Selector Switch (440R-E23031 only)
230V AC 110V AC
Replaceable Fuse
4-15
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR9T Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110/230V AC 50/ 60Hz
Power Consumption
<4VA
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
Input Simultaneity
0.5 seconds
Maximum Input Resistance
500 Ω
Reset
Automatic/Manual
Description
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
The MSR9T has 1 N.C. and 1 N.O. dual channel input for use with gate interlocks and emergency stop buttons in higher risk applications. The MSR9T is typically used for gate interlocks incorporating the diversity of one positive opening and one non positive opening interlock.
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15 4A/250V AC, 4A/120V AC P300 DC-13; 3A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
4A
Fuses Input (internal, replace.) Output (external)
500mA time lag 5A quick acting
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Maximum Dropout Time
50ms
The MSR9T has 2 N.O. safety outputs and 1 N.C. auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary contact is an nonsafety output intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
Indication LEDs
Red = Power On Green = Output On
Features • • • • • • •
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
The MSR9T has output monitoring that can accommodate an automatic/manual reset. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of the contacts.
Category 3 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 1 N.C. and 1 N.O. dual channel input 2 N.O. safety outputs 1 N.C. auxiliary output Automatic reset 45mm wide housing
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded, 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque Settings—term. screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
210g (0.46lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Applications Contactor monitoring circuit Contactor switching circuit MSR9T
Supply inclusive of switching circuit Contactor Monitored by Minotaur
4-16
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR9T Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-F23027
110/230V AC
440R-F23028
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 120 (4.72)
45.5 (1.79) A1
A2
S13
X1 X2
S14
S21
S22
13 23
31
14 24
32
F1 110/230
73 (2.87)
K2 K1
K3 K3
K2
24VDC
~
K3
VR1 Logic
K1
K1 K1 K2
K1
T1 Logic
C1
T2
K2
K2
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
L1 Reset
L1 L2 L3 closed
S21 S22
A1
13
23
31
L1 L2 L3 closed
X1
S21 S22
A1
13
23
31
X1 K1
K1 MSR9T
MSR9T
K2
K2 open
S13
S14
A2
14
24
K1
K2
32
open
X2
S13
M
Aux
S14
A2
14
24
K1
K2
32
X2
M
Aux
N
N
Dual-Channel Safety Gate, Manual Reset, Dual-Channel Output, Monitored Output
Dual-Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, Dual-Channel Output, No Monitored Output
Application Details
Replaceable Fuse Voltage Selector Switch (440R-F23028)
230V AC 110V AC
4-17
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR18T Specifications
Description The Minotaur MSR18T is a monitoring safety relay unit with dual channel input, 5 safety outputs and 2 auxiliary outputs. It is designed for operation as E-Stop, safety gate applications, and 2-hand control applications. The MSR18T is a versatile unit with extensive diagnostics. It can be used with E-Stop buttons, gate interlocks, two-hand controls as well as expansion relays when additional inputs are needed. When used in a suitably configured circuit, the MSR18T provides additional safety rated output circuits with checking and monitoring of its status. Safety critical faults or power failures will cause them to initiate a lock-out to a safe state.
Features • • • • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 24V AC/DC and 110V AC or 240V AC Dual channel inputs 5 N.O. safety outputs 2 N.C. auxiliary outputs E-Stop and gate applications 2-hand control applications 5 LEDs for comprehensive diagnostics
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1, EN 574
Category
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TÜV
Power Supply AZ1 and AZ2 AZ1 AZ2
24V AC/DC -20%, +10% 120V AC -15%, +10% 240V AC -15%, +10%
Power Consump. 24V AC/DC 120V and 240V AC
3.6W 6.1VA, 5.7W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. or 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 2 N.C.
Input Simultaneity
0.5 seconds
Maximum Input Resistance
100Ω
Reset
Automatic/Man. or Monitored Man.
Outputs
5 N.O. Safety; 2 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
C300 AC-15 0.75A/250V AC, 1.5A/120V AC Q300 DC-13 2A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
1 x 8A, 2 x 7A, 3 x 5.5A, 4 x 5A, 5 x 4.5A
Fuses Input (internal elect.) Output (external)
20s reset time 1.6 slow blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
24V AC/DC, 20mA
Maximum Dropout Time
20ms
Indication LEDs
Red = Input Short Green = Power Green = Run Red = Input Fault Red = Output Fault
Impulse Withstand Voltage
3000V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +55°C (-13°F to +131°F)
Humidity
95% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG)
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.8N⋅m (7lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polyester PBT
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
395g (0.87lbs)
Electrical Life 222V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
5,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
5g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-18
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR18T Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Output
1 N.C. or 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 2 N.C.
5 N.O.
2 N.C.
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC and 120V AC
440R-ZBR520AZ1
24V AC/DC and 240V AC
440R-ZBR520AZ2
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 103 (4.06)
90 (2.34)
A1
B1
A2
T11
T32 T12 T31 T34 IF1
T22 T35 13 23 33 43 53
61
73
K3
PTC
K2
Logic
~
97 (3.82)
24V DC Input Short
Output Fault
K1 Run
K2
K1
Power
X1
B2
Input Fault
K3
X2 T33 14 24 34 44 54
62 74
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC
24V DC open
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 T11 T12 X1 X2 T22 T35 A1 B1 13 23 33 43 53
61
T11 T12 X1 X2 T22 T35 A1 B1 13 23 33 43 53
61
73
73
K1 K1
MSR18T
closed
open
MSR18T K2
closed T31 T32 IF1 T33 T34 A2 B2 14 24 34 44 54
K1
Reset
T31 T32 IF1 T33 T34 A2 B2 14 24 34 44 54
62 74
M
Aux
62 74
M
K1
Aux
K2
Ground
Ground
Single-Channel Input, Monitored Manual Reset, Single-Channel Output, Monitored Output
Dual-Channel Input 1 N.O. & 1 N.C., Automatic Reset, Dual-Channel Output, No Monitored Output
L
L open L1 L2 L3
Switch 1 T11 T12 X1 X2 T22 T35 A1 B1 13 23 33 43 53
61
L1 L2 L3
73
T11 T12 X1 X2 T22 T35 A1 B1 13 23 33 43 53
61
73
K1
Switch 2
K1
closed
MSR18T
MSR18T K2
K2 T31 T32 IF1 T33 T34 A2 B2 14 24 34 44 54
T31 T32 IF1 T33 T34 A2 B2 14 24 34 44 54
62 74
K1
Aux
M
K1
Reset
K2
N
Two-Hand Control, Automatic Reset, Dual-Channel Output, No Monitored Output
62 74
Aux
M
K2
N
Dual-Channel Input (2 N.C.), Monitored Manual Reset, Dual-Channel Output, Monitored Output
4-19
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR22LM Specifications
Description The MSR22LM safety monitoring relay is designed to monitor light curtains with the added features of muting and presence sensing device initiation (PSDI). It provides an output to a machine control system when the light curtain is clear. When the inputs to the MSR22LM are closed (conducting), the output relays are closed if the monitoring circuit is satisfied. The MSR22LM has 3 sets of dual channel inputs. This allows it to operate in 4 different configurations: 1. Monitors up to 3 light curtains in guard only mode. 2. Monitors up to 2 light curtains with 2 muting sensors (only 1 curtain muted). 3. Monitor 1 light curtain with 4 muting sensors. 4. Monitors up to 3 light curtains with PSDI (only 1 curtain initiated). The MSR21LM uses microprocessor based technology to offer a wide variety of advanced safety solutions in a small 45mm DIN rail mounted housing. Internal selector switches provide for easy selection of up to 10 different applications. Four LEDs give operational status as well as diagnostic information. Removable terminals reduce wiring and installation costs when replacement is necessary.
Features • • • • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 Light curtain muting—2 or 4 sensor Presence sensing device initiation—up to 3 breaks 45mm housing Removable terminals 24V DC supply voltage Start/restart interlock Third party approval—BG
Application Details Disconnect power. Use a screwdriver to pop open cover to reveal internal switches. Front Cover
ch1
ch2
6
9
6
9
3
0
3
0
6
9
6
9
3
0
3
0
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61496-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.3
Category
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and BG
Power Supply
24V DC ±15%
Power Consumption
4W
Inputs
2 N.C. Symmetric or Asymmetric Switch Selectable
Input Simultaneity
0.5s
Max. Input Resistance S12-S14 S21-S22 S33-S34
300 ohms 200 ohms 250 ohms
Reset
Start/Restart
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per N.O. IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15; 3A/250V AC, 3A/120V AC P300 DC-13; 3A/24V DC B300 AC-15; 2A/250V AC, 2A/ 120V AC P300 DC-13; 2A/24V DC
N.C. Thermal Current (non switching)
5A
Fuses Input (external) Output (external)
500mA time lag 6A quick acting
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
1mA/10V
Power ON Delay Manual Reset Auto Reset
40ms 200ms
Response Time
15ms
Indication LEDs Power K1
Green = Ready Green = K1 Closed, If K1 alone is lit, Check for short across reset button Green = K2 Closed
K2 Operating Temperature
-15°C to +55°C (+5° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Torque settings—terminal screws
1 N·m (8 lb·in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
220g (0.485 lbs)
Electrical Life 222V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Maximum Operating Frequency
1200 cycles/hour
Mechanical Life
10,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.35mm 10-55Hz
1
10
Inside View
4-20
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR22LM Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
3 x 2 N.C.
2 N. O.
1 N. C.
24V DC
440R-P23071
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 45 (1.77)
118 (4.65)
A1+ A2 S12 S14 S21 S22 S24 S23 S31 S32 S34 S33 S41 S42 S44 S43 M1M2 13 23
PTC
31
Galvanic Separation
86 (3.39)
K1
Monitoring Logic 1
K1
K1
Monitoring Logic 2
run1
K2
K2
K2
run2
48
X44
58
14 24
32
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC
Muting Sensors
Power Maintained Push Button
K3 (Aux)
MS1
Start
K3 (Aux)
L1
L2 L3
OSSD 1 DC
Light Curtain LC2 - not muted Jumper S21-S22 and S23-S24 if LC2 is not used
K3 A1 S12 S14 S21 S22 S23 S24 S31 S32 S33 S34 13
MSR22LM Auto Restart LC1 2 2 Sensor Mute 2 30sec Mute
Receiver
A2 M1 M2 48
Sender
Stop
MS2
2
K1
2
K2
58 X44 S43 S44 S41
S42 14
23 31
24 32
OSSD 2 DC OSSD 1 DC Muted Lamp
Start/Restart Required
K4
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
M
Start/ Restart
Light Curtain LCI - muted 24V Ground
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
Sender
Receiver
Fuses OSSD 2 DC
K3
K4
Safety Contactors or Safety Control Relays
Note: Two light curtains with 2-sensor muting and Auto Restart LC1.
4-21
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR22LM Typical Wiring Diagrams (continued) 24V DC
Power
Muting Sensors
K3 (Aux)
MS3
MS1
Start K3 (Aux)
L1
L2 L3
MS4
OSSD 2
Stop
MS2
OSSD 1 K3
Light Curtain LC2 - not muted A1 S12 S14 S21 S22 S23 S24 S31 S32 S33 S34 13 23 31
MSR22LM Auto Restart 4 4 Sensor Mute 5 1hr Mute
4
K1
5
K2
A2 M1 M2 48 58 X44 S43 S44 S41
S42 14 24 32
Start/ Restart
Muted Lamp
K4
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
M Key Switch
Start/Restart K3 Required
24V Ground
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
Sender
Receiver
Fuses
K4
Safety Contactors or Safety Control Relays
Note: Typical 1 light curtain with 4-sensor muting and Auto Restart LC1. 24V DC Sender
Receiver
Power OSSD 2
Fuse
L1
OSSD 1
L2 L3
Fuses
OSSD 2 OSSD 1 K3
Light Curtain 2 Guard Only
Sender
Receiver
A1 S12 S14 S21 S22 S23 S24 S31 S32 S33 S34 13 23 31
OSSD 2 OSSD 1
MSR22LM PSDI Break/Start, Short Doublebreak
6
K1
2
2
K2
A2 M1 M2 48 58 X44 S43 S44 S41
Light Curtain 1 PSDI
S42 14 24 32
K4
M
Machine Cycle PSDI
24V Ground
6
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
Sender
Receiver
Light Curtain 3 Guard Only
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Start/Restart
Start/Restart Required
K3
K4
Safety Contactors or Safety Control Relays
Note: Light curtain inputs, Presence Sensing Device Initiation (on LC1) Start/Restart Interlock, Dual Channel Output, Output Monitoring.
4-22
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR22LM Application Details MSR22LM—Shown connected to a safety light curtain. Multiple settings are available offering a variety of advantages. Below are the three most common settings.
Auto Initiation Sequence (Stepping)—Double Break Shown Auto initiation allows the machine to start and stop to the number of times the light curtain beams are broken and cleared. Illustrated below is the MSR22LM set to auto initiation double break mode (after initial start-up sequence). Single or three break modes can also be selected.
Protective Mode Example shows a press protected by a safety light curtain connected to the MSR22LM.
In machine operation, whenever the light curtain beams are broken the press immediately stops ensuring there is no danger to the operator. Once the beams are cleared the machine can then be started.
1st break—processed material removed 1st clear—light curtain clear Machine remains in stop mode
Muting Mode Two examples are shown, both conveyor applications with a safety light curtain protecting the dangerous area. In-line and cross beam muting is used to allow the material to pass through the light curtain without stopping the machine. Any other object or person will be detected by the light curtain which will initiate machine stop. LC MS4 MS3
2nd break—new material inserted Machine remains in stop mode
MS2 MS1
In-line muting requires the material to break the beams in a sequence, as shown. Only if all four MS beams are broken in turn and then clear in turn will the light curtain allow material through without initiating machine stop.
2nd clear—light curtain clear Machine starts. Upon completion of cycle 1st break will start sequence again.
LC
M
MS1
Cross beam muting requires the material to break the beams in a sequence. MS1 first and then MS2. Only if the beams are broken in turn and then clear in turn will the light curtain allow material through without initiating machine stop.
4-23
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR23M Specifications
Description The MSR23M control unit is designed to monitor 4 wire safety mats that are connected together to form a safeguarded zone. The size of the safeguarded zone is limited by the total input impedance (100 ohms maximum) created by the wiring and connections. The controller is designed to interface with the control circuit of the machine and includes two safety relays to ensure control redundancy.
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.5
Category
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, BG and CSA (24V only)
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110V AC
Power Consumption
2W
Inputs
2 N.C., 4-wire safety mat
Maximum Input Resistance
100 ohms
Reset
Monitored Man. or Auto./Man.
Outputs
2 N. O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
➊Output Utilization per N.O. IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15; 3A/250V AC, 3A/125V AC P300 DC-13; 2.5A/24V DC B300 AC-15; 2A/250V AC, 2A/125V AC P300 DC-13; 2A/24V DC
N.C. Thermal Current (non switching)
1 x 8A, 2 x 7A
Fuses Input (external) Output (external)
500mA time delay 6A fast acting
The controller detects a presence on the mat, a short circuit, or an open circuit. Under each of these conditions, the safety output relays turn off. When interfaced properly, the machine or hazardous motion receives a stop signal, and an auxiliary output turns ON.
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
1mA/10V
Power ON Delay Manual Reset Auto Reset
40ms 200ms
Response Time
15ms
Features
Indication LEDs Power K1
Green=Ready, Red=Mat Activated Green=K1 Closed, If K1 alone, check for short across reset button Green=K2 Closed
• • • • • •
Category 4 Stop category 0 Removable terminals Monitored or automatic reset 4-wire safety mats sensing Third party approval—BG
K2 Operating Temperature
-15°C to +55°C (+5°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque settings—term. screws
1 N·m (8 lb·in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
220g (0.485lbs)
Electrical Life 222V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Maximum Operating Frequency
1200 cycles/hour
Mechanical Life
10,000,000 operations
Vibration
10g 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half-sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-24
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR23M Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
4-Wire Safety Mat
2 N. O.
1 N. C.
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-P23073
110V AC
440R-P23074
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.89)
118 (4.65)
A1(+)
45 (1.77)
A2(-)
S11
Overvoltage & short circuit protection
S12
S22
S33
S34
13
23
31
14
24
32
Monitoring Logic
86 (3.39)
K1
86 (3.39)
24V K2
K1
K2
35mm DIN Rail Mounting 440R-P23073
440R-P23074
S21
Typical Wiring Diagrams +110V AC
+110V AC Reset
Reset L1 L2L3
A1 S11 S21 13 23 31 S33
MSR23M
Safety Mat
A1 S11 S21 13 23 31 S33 K1
M A2 S12 S22 14 24 32 S34 K1 K2
N
Safety Mat
A
K2
L1 L2L3
MSR23M
K1
A2 S12 S22 14 24 32 S34
M
K1
M
Ground
Safety Mat Input, Monitored Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Monitored Output
Safety Mat Input, Automatic Reset, Single Channel Output, No Monitored Output
Application Details Disconnect power. Use a screwdriver to pop open cover to reveal internal switches.
Power LED K1 K2 Automatic/Manual Reset Monitored Manual Reset
4-25
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR30RT/RTP Specifications
Housing with removable terminals shown.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/ EN60204-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, C-Tick, cULus, TUV
Power Supply
24V DC SELV
Power Consumption
3W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2N.C., or 4-wire Safety Mat
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
200 ohms
Outputs
2 N. O. Safety, Solid State 1 N.C. Aux, Solid State
Description
Output Rating Safety Auxiliary
2A @ 24VDC 50mA @ 24VDC
The Minotaur MSR30RT/RTP is a microprocessor based, monitoring safety relay, with safety rated, solid state outputs.
Fuses, Output External
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Power On Delay
3s
The versatility of the MSR30RT/RTP inputs allows it to be connected to gate interlocks, e-stop devices and four-wire safety mats. The gate interlocks and e-stops can be either single channel or dual channel normally-closed circuits.
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time
20ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power (Pwr) Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed
Pwr LED 3s Blink Diagnostics Constant 2 Blinks 4 Blinks Continuous Blinking
Initialization Normal operation Config. change during operation Solid state output switch fault Internal Fault
The reset capability of the MSR30RT/RTP allows it to set up for manual or automatic start and restart. The outputs include two normally-open safety rated outputs that can be connected to loads up to 2A at 24V DC. These outputs can be used to send a safety stop signal to a machine or manufacturing system.
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+14° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
The MSR30RT/RTP also has one solid state normally-closed auxiliary output, which must only be used to indicate the status of the MSR30RT/RTP.
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Pollution Degree
2
Features
Conductor Size
0.2 – 2,5mm2 (24 – 14AWG)
• • • • • •
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
130g (0.287 lbs)
Category 4 per EN954-1 Stop Category 0 2 Solid State Safety Outputs 1 Solid State Auxiliary Output 1 N.C., 2 N.C or Safety Mat Input Monitored Manual or Automatic/Manual Reset
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Wiring Terminations S11 & S21 S12 & S22 A1 – S34
Input contacts Reset switch
S11 – S34
Automatic reset, start-up test disabled
S21 – S34
Automatic reset, start-up test enabled
A1 – Y2 A1 – Y41
4-26
Pulse train output
Monitoring circuit Cross-fault monitoring disabled
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR30RT/RTP Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Catalogue Number
1 N.C., 2 N.C or Safety Mat
2 N.O. Solid state
1 N.O. Solid state
Fixed
440R-N23197
Removable
440R-N23198
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
99 (3.89)
A1
S1 1
Y41
S34
A1 MSR30RT/RTP
114.5 (4.5)
14
24
Y32
A2
S12
S22
Y32
14
24
S21
Y2
Typical Wiring Diagrams Safety Mat, Monitored Dual Channel, Automatic Dual Channel, Automatic Dual Channel, Monitored Dual Channel, Monitored Manual Reset, Cross-fault Reset, No Cross-fault Reset, Cross-fault Manual Reset, No Cross-fault Manual Reset, Cross-fault Monitoring, No Startup Test Monitoring, No Startup Test Monitoring, No Startup Test Monitoring, No Startup Test Monitoring, No Startup Test S11 S21
A1
S11 S21
S11
S12 S22
S34
S12 S22
S34
S11
S12 S22
Single Channel, Monitored Single Channel, Automatic Reset, No Cross-fault Manual Reset, No Cross-fault Monitoring, No Startup Test Monitoring, No Startup Test A1
S21
S12 S22
S21
S34 Y41
S12 S22
S11
A1
S34 Y41
+24V
S34 Y41
Dual Channel, Automatic Reset, No Cross-fault Monitoring, Startup Test S11
S21
S12 S22
S34 Y41
A1
S21
S12 S22
S11
A1
S34 Y41
Single Channel, Automatic Reset, No Cross-fault Monitoring, Startup Test
S11 S21
A1
S12 S22
S34
Safety Mat, Automatic Reset, Cross-fault Monitoring, No Startup Test
S11
S21
A1
S11 S21
S11
S12 S22
S34 Y41
S12 S22
S34
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2 K1
MSR30RT/RTP
S12 S22 A2
24 Y32
K1 K2
Aux to PLC or Indicator
K1
MSR30RT/RTP
K2 14
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2
Ground
A1
+24V Reset
S12 S22 A2
A1
M
Dual Channel E-Stop, Dual Channel Delayed Outputs, Monitored Manual Reset, Output Monitoring
14
24 Y32
K1
Ground
Aux to PLC or Indicator
M
Single Channel Gate Interlock, Single Channel Output, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
4-27
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR33RT/RTP Specifications
Housing with removable terminals shown.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/ EN60204-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Approvals
CE for all applicable directives, CTick, cULus, TUV
Power Supply
24V DC SELV (max with no load) electrically separate supply source
Power Consumption
3W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
200 ohms
Outputs
2 N. O. Safety, Solid State 1 N.O. Aux, Solid State
Description
Output Rating Safety Auxiliary
2A @ 24VDC 50mA @ 24VDC
The Minotaur MSR33RT/RTP is a microprocessor-based, monitoring safety relay, with safety-rated, solid state outputs.
Short-Circuit Protection
Inputs and outputs (safety and aux)
Power On Delay
3s
The MSR33RT/RTP is designed to operate with dual channel inputs where one channel is normally closed and the other is normally open. The Sipha sensors can be connected to the MSR33RT/RTP inputs.
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time
20ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power (Pwr) Green = CH1 Energized Green = CH2 Energized
Pwr LED 3s Blink Diagnostics Constant 2 Blinks 4 Blinks Continuous Blinking
Initialization Normal operation Config. change during operation Solid state output switch fault Internal Fault
Test pulses are used to dynamically check the input circuits. All inputs and outputs are short-circuit protected. The reset capability of the MSR33RT/RTP allows it to set up for monitored manual or automatic reset. A start-up test can be enabled if automatic reset is used. The start-up test requires the inputs to be cycled before energizing the outputs. The reset and start-up test is determined by the connection wiring.
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+14° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN VDE 0470-1
Terminal Protection
IP20
Pollution Degree
2
Conductor Size
0.2 – 2,5mm2 (24 – 14AWG)
The MSR30 also has one solid state, normally-open auxiliary output, which must only be used to indicate status of the MSR33RT/RTP.
Mounting
In panel enclosure (IP54) 35mm DIN rail
Weight
130g (0.287 lbs)
Features
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
• • • • •
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
The outputs include two normally-open safety rated outputs that can be connected to loads up to 2A at 24V DC. These outputs can be used to send a safety stop signal to a machine or manufacturing system.
Category 4 per EN954-1 Stop Category 0 2 Solid State N.O. Safety Outputs 1 Solid State N.O. Auxiliary Output 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Input
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Wiring Terminations S11 & S21 S12 & S22 A1 – S34
Input contacts Reset switch
S11 – S34
Automatic reset, start-up test disabled
S21 – S34
Automatic reset, start-up test enabled
A1 – Y2
4-28
Pulse checking dynamic output
Monitoring circuit
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR33RT/RTP Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Catalogue Number
1 N.C. & 1 N.O
2 N.O. Solid state
1 N.O. Solid state
Fixed
440R-F23199
Removable
440R-F23200
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
99 (3.89)
A1
S11
Y41
S34 A1
MSR33RT/RTP
114.5 (4.5)
14
24
Y32
A2
S12
S22
Y32
14
24
S21
Y2
Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V
+24V Reset
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2 K1
MSR33RT/RTP
K1
MSR33RT/RTP
K2 S12 S22 A2
K2
24 Y32
14
S12 S22 A2
K1 K2
Aux to PLC or Indicator
Ground
M
24 Y32
K1 K2
Aux to PLC or Indicator
Ground
Sipha Sensor Inputs, Dual Channel Outputs, Monitored Manual Reset, Output Monitoring Start-up Test Disabled
+24V
14
Sipha Sensor Inputs, Dual Channel Outputs, Automatic Reset, Output Monitoring Start-up Test Enabled
+24V Reset
L1 L2 L3
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2
L1 L2 L3 S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2
K1
MSR33RT/RTP
K1
MSR33RT/RTP
K2 S12 S22 A2
14
K2
24 Y32
S12 S22 A2
K1 K2
Ground
M
Aux to PLC or Indicator
M
Dual Channel Inputs, Dual Channel Outputs, Monitored Manual Reset, Output Monitoring Start-up Test Disabled
14
24 Y32
K1 K2
Ground
Aux to PLC or Indicator
M
Dual Independent Inputs, Dual Channel Outputs, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring Start-up Test Disabled
4-29
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR121RT Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/ EN60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & BG
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 115/230V AC 0.8–1.1 x rated voltage, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption
4W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C., Light Curtain or Safety Mat
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Description
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
45 ohms
The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Minotaur MSR121RT is a safety monitoring relay that provides three normally open safety contacts, a normally open auxiliary contact and a solid state auxiliary output for use with interfacing to PLCs.
Reset
Auto./Man. or Monitored Man.
Outputs
3 N.O. Safety, 1 N.C. Aux, 1 S.S. PNP Aux.
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 8A/250V AC DC -1L 8A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
A300 AC-15; 6A/250V AC, 6A/ 125V AC N300 DC-13; 3A/24V DC; 6A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
Output, Solid State
20mA @ 24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
See limit curve Max 10A in one current path
The MSR121RT has a versatile input arrangement. It can be connected to a single or dual channel safety gate or e-stop, a safety mat input or a light curtain that provides cross fault detection. Reset and output monitoring is determined by the wiring configuration. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of external contactors. Monitored manual requires the use of a manually operated normally open momentary switch. The MSR121RT has 3 normally open safety rated outputs. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. It has one normally closed auxiliary output as well as a solid state PNP auxiliary output to indicate the status of the MSR121RT to a indicator lamp or a PLC.
Features • • • • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 3 Safety contacts N.O. 1 Auxiliary contact N.C. 1 Solid state PNP auxiliary contact Single/dual channel operation Cross fault monitoring Monitored or automatic reset E-stop, safety gate, safety mat or light curtain applications
current2 x number of contact paths, (A2)
Contact Current Limit Curve
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 300,000 operations 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Fuses, output external
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 0.5µAu
Power On Delay
1s
Response Time 24V DC 24/115/230V AC
15ms 20ms
Recovery Time
100ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power on; Green = K1 Closed; Green = K2 Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23° to +131°F)
200
Humidity
90% RH
180
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
160
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
140
Electronic Short Circuit Prot.
Inputs & solid state output
120
Pollution Degree
2
100
Conductor Size
0.2 - 4mm2 (24 - 12AWG)
80
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
60
Weight 24V DC 110 and 230V AC
290g (0.64lbs) 370g (0.82lbs)
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Current over 3 contacts
40
Current over 2 contacts
20 0
0
10
20
30
40
50
Ambient Temperature (°C)
4-30
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250V AC/6A/1500VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/2.5A/625VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/1.5A/375VA cosϕ=0.35 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
60
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR121RT Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C., Safety Mat or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
1 N.C. 1 S.S. PNP
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-J23102
115V AC
440R-J23100
230V AC
440R-J23099
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram A1 (+)
87 (3.42) 109.5 (4.31)
S11
S52
S12
Y31
Y32
33
41
13
23
33
41
14
24
34
42
K2 S21 (PE)
75 (2.95)
23
K1
MSR121RT
45 (1.77)
13
S22
X5
S33
S34
14
24
34
A2 (–)
42
4.5 (0.17)
Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V DC
L1
+ 24VDC -
Light curtain Out 1 Out 2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 A1 S11 S12 S52 X5 Y31 13 23 33 41
A1 S11 S52 S12 X5 Y31 13 23 33 41
Safety Mat
K1
K1
MSR121RT PE A2 S21 S22 S34 S33 Y32 14 24
Reset
MSR121RT
K2
PE A2 S21 S22 S34 S33 Y32 14 24
34 42
K2 34 42
M
K1 K2
Ground
Reset
M
K1 K2
N
24V DC Light Curtain, 115/230V AC Safety Relay, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Safety Mat Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
+24V DC
E-Stop
L1 L2 L3 A1 S11 S52 S12 X5 Y31 13 23 33 41
Safety Gate
+24V DC
L1 L2 L3
Closed
A1 S11 S12 S52 X5 Y31 13 23 33 41 K1
K1 MSR121RT
MSR121RT
PE A2 S21 S22 S34 S33 Y32 14 24
Ground
Reset
K2
K2
PE A2 S21 S22 S34 S33 Y32 14 24
34 42
K1 K2
Dual Channel E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
M Ground
34 42
K1 K2
M
Single Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
4-31
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR123RT Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and BG
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 115/230V AC 0.8 – 1.1 x rated voltage, 50/60Hz 0.9 – 1.1 x 24V DC
Power Consumption
4W
Safety Inputs
1N.C., 2 N.C., Light Curtain
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
240 ohms
Description
Reset
Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual
Outputs
2 N. O. Safety, 1 S.S. PNP Aux.
The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Minotaur MSR123RT is a safety monitoring relay that provides two normally open safety contacts and a solid state auxiliary output for use with interfacing to PLCs.
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 8A/250V AC DC-1: 8A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
A300, AC-15 6A/250V AC, 6A/125V AC N300, DC-13; 3A/24V DC; 6A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
Thermal Current (non switching)
See limit curve Max 10A in one circuit
Reset and output monitoring is determined by the wiring configuration. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of external contactors. Monitored manual requires the use of a manually operated normally open momentary switch.
Output, Solid State
20mA @ 24V DC
The MSR123RT has 2 normally open safety rated outputs. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The solid state auxiliary output is a PNP circuit with short circuit protection designed to indicate the status of the MSR123RT.
The MSR123RT can be connected to either a single or dual channel safety gate or e-stop, or can be connected to a light curtain that provides cross fault detection.
Fuses, output external
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 0.5µAu
Power On Delay
1s
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time
100ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power on Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Features • • • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 2 Safety contacts N.O. 1 Solid state PNP auxiliary contact Single/dual channel operation Cross fault monitoring Monitored or automatic reset E-stop, safety gate or light curtain applications
current2 x number of contact paths, (A2)
Contact Current Limit Curve 140
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Short Circuit Protection
Solid state outputs
Pollution Degree
2
Conductor Size
0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
120
Weight 24V DC 110 and 230V AC
270g (0.353lbs) 350g (0.474lbs)
100
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA/cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA/cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
40
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
20
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
80 60
0 0
10
20
30
40
50
Ambient Temperature (°C)
4-32
Operating Temperature
60
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR123RT Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or Light Curtain
2 N.O.
1 S.S. PNP
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-J23106
115V AC
440R-J23104
230V AC
440R-J23103
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram
87 (3.42) 109.5 (4.31)
A1(+) S11
45 (1.77)
75 (2.95)
S52
S12
Y31 Y32
13
23
13
23
14
24
24
A2(-)
K1 MSR123RT
K2 S21 (PE)
4.5 (0.17)
S22
X5
S33
S34
14
Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V DC + 24VDC -
Safety Gate
L1
Light curtain Out 1 Out 2 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Closed
A1 S11 S12 S52 X5 Y31 13 23
A1 S11 S12 S52 X5 Y31 13 23
K1 MSR123RT
K1
MSR123RT PE A2 S21 S22 S34 S33 Y32 14 24
M
K1 K2
Reset
PE A2 S21 S22 S34 S33 Y32 14 24
K2
N
M
K1
Ground
115/230V Supply, 24V DC Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Single Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
+24V DC
E-Stop
L1 L2 L3 A1 S11 S12 S52 X5 Y31 13 23 K1 MSR123RT
PE A2 S21 S22 S34 S33 Y32 14 24
Reset
K1 K2
K2
M
Ground
Dual Channel E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
4-33
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR124RT Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & BG
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 115/230V AC 0.8 – 1.1 x rated voltage, 50/60Hz (0.85 – 1.1 x 24V DC)
Power Consumption
3W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or Light Curtain
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
50 ohms
Description
Reset
Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual
Outputs
5 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Minotaur MSR124RT is a safety monitoring relay that provides versatile inputs and monitoring capability with a large number of safety outputs in a 100mm package.
Output Rating
B300, AC-15, 4A/250V AC N300, DC-13, 2A/24V DC
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 10A/250V AC DC-1: 10A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
A300, AC-15 5A/250V AC, 5A/125V AC 2A/250V AC, 2A/125V AC N300, DC-13 4A/24V DC 10A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
Thermal Current (non switching)
See limit curve Max 10A in one circuit
Fuses Output (external)
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 0.5µAu
The MSR124RT can be connected as either a single or dual channel safety gate or e-stop, or can be connected to a light curtain that provides cross fault detection. Reset and output monitoring are determined by the wiring configuration. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of the contacts. Monitored manual requires the use of a manually operated normally open momentary switch to activate the outputs. The outputs include 5 normally open safety rated outputs and 1 auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary output is not safety rated and shall only be used for indication purposes.
Features • • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 5 Safety contacts N.O. Single/dual channel operation Cross fault monitoring Monitored or automatic reset E-stop, safety gate or light curtain applications
Contact Current Limit Curve current2 x number of contact paths, (A2)
10mA/10V
Power On Delay
1s
Response Time
20ms
Recovery Time
100ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power on Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
180
Pollution Degree
2
160
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight 24V DC 110 and 230V AC
550g (1.21lbs) 710g (1.57lbs)
40
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA/cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA/cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
20
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
200
140 120 100 80 60
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
Ambient Temperature (°C)
4-34
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
60
Vibration
10g 10-55Hz
Shock
10g, 16ms 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR124RT Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-G23110
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or Light Curtain
5 N.O.
1 N.C.
115V AC/24V DC
440R-G23108
230V AC/24V DC
440R-G23107
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram S11 A3+
87 (3.42) 109.5 (4.31)
A1
75 (2.95)
100 (3.93)
S12 S21 S23 S22 S12 A4
13 23 33 43 53 81
MSR124RT Y1 Y2 PE X1 X2 X5 X6 A2
14 24 34 44 54 82
4.5 (0.17)
Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V DC
+24V DC Light curtain Out 1 Out 2 L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 A3+ S11 S12 S21 S23 S22 13 23 33 43 53
A3+ S11 S22 S12 S21 S23 13 23 33 43 53
81 X2
81 X2 K1
MSR124RT
K1
MSR124RT
K2 K2 A4- PE
Y1 Y2 X5 X6 14 24
34 44 54
A4- PE
82 X1
34 44 54
82 X1
Reset
M
K1 K2
Ground
Y1 Y2 X5 X6 14 24
M
K1 K2
Ground
115/230V Supply, 24V DC Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Dual Channel E-Stop Input, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output L1
L1 Light curtain Out 1 Out 2 L1 L2 L3 A1 S11 S12 S21 S23 S22 13 23 33 43 53
E-Stop
L1 L2 L3
A1 S11 S12 S22 S21 S23 13 23 33 43 53
81 X2
81 X2 K1
MSR124RT
K1
MSR124RT
K2 A2 PE
Y1 Y2 X5 X6 14 24
34 44 54
A2 PE
82 X1
K1 K2
N
115/230V Supply, 24V DC Light Curtain, Automatic Reset, Monitored Output
M
Y1 Y2 X5 X6 14 24
34 44 54
82 X1
K1
M
N
Single Channel E-Stop Input, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
4-35
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR126R/T Specifications
Description The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Minotaur MSR126R/T is a safety monitoring relay that provides the very basics for safety control systems in a 22.5mm package. The MSR126R/T is designed for connection to a single channel safety gate, a single channel e-stop or a light curtain that provides cross fault detection. The MSR126.1R/T is designed for connection to a dual channel safety gate or e-stop, as it performs cross fault detection across the inputs. The MSR126R and MSR126.1R are designed for applications where a monitored manual reset is required. Monitored manual reset requires the use of a manually operated normally open momentary switch to activate the outputs. The MSR126T and MSR126.1T are designed for applications where automatic/manual reset is required. Automatic/manual reset allows a jumper across the S33-S34 circuit, and therefore does not perform output monitoring. The outputs are only 2 normally open safety rated outputs. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/ EN60204-1, IEC60947-4-1, IEC60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus (except 42V AC units) and BG
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 42/115/230V AC (0.8 – 1.1 x rated voltage), 50/60Hz
Power Consumption
4W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or Light Curtain
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
90 ohms
Reset
Auto./Manual or Monitored Manual
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 6A/250V AC DC-1: 6A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 6A/250V AC, 6A/125V AC P300, DC-13 3A/24V DC 6A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
Thermal Current (non switching)
Max 6A in one current path
Fuses Output (external)
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Maximum Thermal Current, Ie
1 x 6A, 2 x 4A
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Power On Delay
300ms
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time
100ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power on Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Features
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
• • • • • • •
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
2
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 2 Safety contacts N.O. Single/dual channel operation Cross fault monitoring Monitored or automatic reset E-stop, safety gate or light curtain applications
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight 24V DC 110 and 230V AC
160g (0.353 lbs) 215g (0.474 lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250V AC/6A/1500VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/2.5A/625VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/1.5A/375VA cosϕ=0.35 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 300,000 operations 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
10g 10-55Hz
Shock
10g, 16ms 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-36
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR126R/T Product Selection Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Reset
Input
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-N23117
115V AC
440R-N23116
230V AC
440R-N23115
24V AC/DC
440R-N23114
115V AC
440R-N23113
230V AC
440R-N23112
24V AC/DC
440R-N23123
115V AC
440R-N23122
Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126T) Automatic/Manual Dual Channel (MSR126.1T) 2 N.O.
None Light Curtain or Single Channel (MSR126R) Monitored Manual
230V AC
440R-N23121
24V AC/DC
440R-N23120
115V AC
440R-N23119
230V AC
440R-N23118
Dual Channel (MSR126.1R)
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
75 (2.95)
13 A1
23 S33
24 S34 13 23
K1
110 (4.33)
K2 14 24 S21 14
S22 S11
A2 S12
Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
L1
Reset OSSD1
Reset
L1 L2 L3 A1 S11 S12
+ Light 24V DC Curtain -
S33 13
E-Stop
L1 L2 L3
23 A1 S11 S12
23
S33 13
K1
MSR126R
K1
MSR126.1R K2
A2
S21 S22
S34 14
K2
24
A2
OSSD2 K1
M
K2
S21 S22
S34 14 K1
N
24
M
K2
N
115/230V Supply, 24V DC Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output L1
Dual Channel E-Stop Input, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Safety Gate
L1 L1 L2 L3
Closed A1 S11 S12 S33 13
23
E-Stop
L1 L2 L3 A1 S11 S12
K1
S33 13
23 K1
MSR126T
MSR126.1T
K2
K2 A2
S21 S22
S34 14 K1
24 K2
A2
M
S21 S22
S34 14 K1
N
24 K2
M
N
Single Channel Safety Gate Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
Dual Channel E-Stop, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
4-37
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR127RP/TP Specifications
Description
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/ EN60204-1, IEC60947-4-1, IEC60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and BG
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 115V AC or 230V AC 0.8 to 1.1 x rated voltage, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption
2W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or 2 PNP (light curtain)
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
110 ohms
Reset
Monitored Manual or Auto./Manual
The MSR127RTP can be connected in three different input wiring configurations: 1 N.C., 2 N.C., or with 2 PNP connections from a light curtain. When connected in the 2 N.C. fashion, the MSR127RTP checks for cross faults across the two inputs. When connected to light curtains, the light curtain must perform the cross fault detection.
Outputs
3 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 5A/250V AC DC-1: 5A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15; 5A/250V AC, 5A/125V AC P300, DC-13; 3A/24V DC 5A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
The MSR127RP has a monitored manual reset. The MSR127TP has an automatic/manual reset. Models with automatic/manual reset can have the reset jumpered or can be converted to an unmonitored manual reset by adding a normally open switch in the monitoring loop. Models with monitored manual reset provide checking of the output monitoring circuit.
Thermal Current (non switching) Units with 24V AC/DC supply: Units with 115/230V AC supply:
3x4A or 2x5A 3x3A or 2x4A or 1x5A
Fuses Output (external)
6A Slow Blow or 10A Quick Blow
The outputs include 3 normally open safety rated outputs as well as 1 normally closed auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary output is a nonsafety output intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 0.5mAu
Power On Delay
1s
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time
100ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power Green = CH1 Closed Green = CH2 Closed
Features • • • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 3 Safety contacts 1 Auxiliary contact Cross fault monitoring Monitored or automatic reset Removable terminals Light curtain, E-Stop or safety gate applications
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Maximum Conductor Size
0.2 to 4mm2 (24-12AWG)
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4Nm (3.54lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight 24V DC 110V AC or 230V AC
210g (0.463lbs) 260g (0.573lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250V AC/6A/1500VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/2.5A/625VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/1.5A/375VA cosϕ=0.35 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 300,000 operations 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-38
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR127RP/TP Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminal s
Type
Reset
Catalogue Number
MSR127T
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23126
MSR127R
Monitored Manual
440R-N23129
MSR127T
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23125
MSR127R
Monitored Manual
440R-N23128
MSR127T
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23124
MSR127R
Monitored Manual
440R-N23127
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23132
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23131
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23134
MSR127TP
Automatic/Manual
440R-N23130
MSR127RP
Monitored Manual
440R-N23133
Power Supply 24V AC/DC
Fixed
115V AC 230V AC
1NC, 2NC, or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
1 N.C. 24V AC/DC Removable
115V AC 230V AC
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
99 (3.89)
13 A1 S12
23 S11(+)
K1
114.5 (4.5)
33 41 S52 S12 13 23 33 41
S52
S21
K2 14 24 34 42
S22 S22 24
S21(-) 14
S34 34
A2 42
Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
L1
Reset
Light curtain, 24V DC Out1 Out2
L1 L2 L3 A1
S11
S52
S12
23
13
33
E-Stop
41
L1 L2 L3 A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
K1
K1
MSR127TP
MSR127RP K2 S21
S22
S34
A2
34
14
24
K1
K2
42
S21
S22
S34
A2
M
14
24
34
42
M
K1 N
N
Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Single Channel E-Stop, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
L1
L1
Reset L1 L2 L3
E-Stop A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
L1 L2 L3
open
41
A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
K1
K1
MSR127RP
MSR127RP K2 S21
S22
S34
A2
14
24
K1
K2
34
K2
42
N
M
S21
closed
S22
S34
A2
14
24
K1
K2
34
42
M
N
Dual Channel E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Dual Channel Safety Gates, Automatic Reset, Monitored Output
4-39
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR131RTP Specifications
Description The MSR131RTP is a versatile monitoring safety relay. It can be connected in four different input wiring configurations: 1 N.C., 2 N.C., 2 PNP connections from a light curtain, or a four wire safety mat. When connected in the 2 N.C. fashion, the MSR131RTP checks for cross faults across the two inputs. When connected to light curtains, the light curtain must perform the cross fault detection. The MSR131RTP has output monitoring that can accommodate either automatic/manual reset or a monitored manual reset. When configured with automatic/manual reset (jumpers on X1-X2 and X3-X4), the MSR131RTP can have the reset terminals S33-S34 jumpered or can be converted to an unmonitored manual reset by adding a normally open switch in the monitoring loop (S33-S34). When configured to monitored manual reset, the MSR131RTP checks the output monitoring circuit through the manual application of the reset switch. The outputs include 3 normally open safety rated outputs, 2 normally closed auxiliary outputs, and 2 solid state outputs. One solid state output indicates that the inputs are closed. The second solid state output indicates that the safety outputs are active. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary output is a nonsafety output intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
Features • • • • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 Light curtain, safety mat, E-Stop inputs 3 safety contacts 2 auxiliary contact 2 solid state outputs Cross fault monitoring Monitored or automatic reset Removable terminals
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Approvals
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 115V or 230V AC 0.85 to 1.1 x rated volt., 50/60Hz
Power Consumption Safety Inputs
4W
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & BG
1 N.C., 2 N.C., light curtain or safety mat
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
45 ohms
Reset Outputs
Monitored manual or Auto./manual
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 6A/250V AC DC-1: 6A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 3A/250V AC, 6A/125VAC P300, DC-13; 3A/24V DC 6A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
3 N.O. safety; 2 N.C. auxiliary; 1 S.S. PNP inputs closed; 1 S.S. PNP outputs active
Thermal Current (non switching)
1 x 6A, 3x5A
Output, Solid State
30mA short circuit protected
Fuses Output (external)
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V DC
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 2mAu
Power On Delay
1s
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time Indication LEDs
100ms Green = Power; Green = Start Green = CH1 Input Closed Green = CH2 Input Closed Green = CH1 Output Active Green = CH2 Output Active
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4–0.5Nm (3.54–4.43lb²in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight 24V DC 110V AC or 230V AC
320g (0.71lbs) 450g (0.99lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250V AC/6A/1500VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/2.5A/625VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/1.5A/375VA cosϕ=0.35 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 300,000 operations 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 cycles
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-40
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR131RTP Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or Safety Mat or Light Curtain
3 N.O.
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-C23139
115V AC
440R-C23137
230V AC
440R-C23136
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 45 (1.77)
99 (3.89)
A1 S33 S34 S52 S11 13 23 51 X3 S11(+) S12 S21(-) S22 41 S12 13 23 33 41 51
K1
S52
S21
114.5 (4.5) X4 A2
33 51
K2
Y30 Y1
S22 Y31 Y2
14 24 34 42 52 Y32 Y35 42 52 X1 X2 14 24
52 34
Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V DC
+24V DC Safety gate
Reset
Light Curtain Out2 Out 1
open
closed
L1 L2 L3
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51
L1 L2 L3
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51 K1
K1
MSR131RTP
MSR131RTP K2
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52 K1 K2
Ground
Output Active
M
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52
M
K1
Ground
Inputs Closed
Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Output Inputs Active Closed
Single Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
+24V DC
+24V DC Reset Safety Mat
E-Stop L1 L2 L3
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51
L1 L2 L3
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51 K1
MSR131RTP
MSR131RTP
K1
K2 K2
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52
Ground
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52
M
K1 K2
Ground
Dual Channel E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output L1 Light Curtain Out1 Out 2
Safety Mat, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring Light Curtain Out1 Out 2
L1 L2 L3
+24V DC Reset
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51
K1
MSR131RTP
Output Inputs Active Closed
L1
+24V DC Reset
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51
MSR131RTP
K2
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52
+24V DC Ground Output Active
K1 K2
L1 L2 L3
K1
K2
N
M
K1 K2
Output Inputs Active Closed
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52
M
Inputs Closed
115/230V AC Supply, 24V DC, Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
N
+24V DC Ground Output Active
K1 K2
M
Inputs Closed
115/230V AC Supply, 24V DC, Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, No Output Monitoring
4-41
Safety Relays
Safety Monitoring Relay Minotaur MSR144RTP Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/ EN 60204-1, AS4024.1, ISOTR12100
Category Approvals
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1
Power Supply
24V DC; 0.85 to 1.1 x rated voltage
Power Consumption Safety Inputs
4W + expanders
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, TÜV & cULus
1 N.C., 2 N.C., light curtain or 4-wire safety mat
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
45 ohms
Description
Reset Outputs
Monitored manual or Auto./manual
The MSR144RTP is a versatile monitoring safety relay. It can be connected in four different input wiring configurations: 1 N.C., 2 N.C., 2 PNP connections from a light curtain, or a four wire safety mat. When connected in the 2 N.C. fashion, the MSR144RTP checks for cross faults across the two inputs. When connected to light curtains, the light curtain must perform the cross fault detection.
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive) Safety & Aux. Safety & Aux. Solid State
2 N.O. safety; 2 N.C. auxiliary; 1 S.S. PNP inputs closed; 1 S.S. PNP outputs active
y e r ng a n ha i m C i l e to r P ct e j b u
Any combination of up to five MSR230 and MSR238 output modules can be easily connected to the MSR144RTP by removing the terminator, inserting a ribbon cable from the expander and then placing the terminator into the last expansion module.
Fuses Output (external)
B300, AC-15, 5A/250V AC P300, DC-13; 3A/24V DC 20mA/30V DC short circuit protection
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V DC
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 2µAu
Power On Delay
1s
The MSR144RTP has output monitoring that can accommodate either automatic/manual reset or a monitored manual reset. When configured with automatic/manual reset (jumpers on X1-X2 and X3-X4), the MSR144RTP can have the reset terminals S33-S34 jumpered or can be converted to an unmonitored manual reset by adding a normally open switch in the monitoring loop (S33-S34). When configured to monitored manual reset, the MSR144RTP checks the output monitoring circuit through the manual application of the reset switch.
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time Indication LEDs
100ms
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
The outputs include 2 normally open safety rated outputs, 2 normally closed auxiliary outputs, and 2 solid state auxiliary outputs. One solid state output indicates that the inputs are closed. The second solid state output indicates that the safety outputs are active.
Pollution Degree
2
The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary outputs are nonsafety outputs intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
S
Green = Power; Green = Start Green = CH1 IN Green = CH2 IN Green = CH1 output energized Green = CH2 output energized
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN VDE 0470-1
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.6–0.8N•m (5–7lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Features
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
• • • • • • • • • •
Weight
315g (0.71lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01°/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 or 1 (with MSR238) Light curtain, safety mat, E-Stop inputs 2 NO safety outputs 2 NC auxiliary outputs 2 solid state auxiliary outputs Crossfault monitoring Monitored or automatic reset Removable terminals Expansion for up to 5 modules
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
4-1
Safety Relays
Safety Monitoring Relay Minotaur MSR144RTP Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Power Supply
Catalog Number
1 N.C., 2 N.C., Light Curtain, or Safety Mat
2 N.O.
2 N.C. 2 PNP Solid State
Removable
24V DC
440R-C23205
Block Diagram
99 (3.89)
A1(+) A2(-) S1 1(+) Y31 X3
X4 S33 S34
S1 1
S12
S5 2
CH1 IN
Overvoltage protection
13
23
31
41
14
24
32
42
CH2 IN
Reset mode
AC (DC)
PWR
Inputs closed
114.5 (4.5)
Output active
24VDC
K1
Start
45 (1.77)
Monitoring Feedback Loop
Dimensions—mm (inches)
CH2
K1
K2
K2
CH2
CH1
Y30 Y32 Y35 Y1 Y2
S21
CH1
S22
X1 X2
Typical Wiring Diagrams
y e r ng a n ha i m C i l e to r P ct e j b u
Reset
Fuses
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 31 41
13
23
33
43
13
23
33
43
MSR230
MSR230
6 sec delay shown Y3-Y5, Y3-Y7
Fuses
Termination
Light Curtain Out1 Out2
L1 L2 L3
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 31 41
17 27 35
32 42
14
K1 K2 Output Active
Inputs Closed
34
44
14
24
34
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 32 42
M
K7 K8 K9 K10
K3 K4 K5 K6
Dual Channel Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
MSR144RTP
S
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 32 42
K1 K2
Ground
Output Active
Inputs Closed
13 23 33 43 MSR230
Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
17 27 35
Termination
24V DC
2 sec delay shown Y4-Y5
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 31 41
MSR238DP
14 24 34 44
9 1 Stop 7 Dig. Comm 8 DC Comm 1 4 3 2 Enable
+24V DC
Safety Mat
L1 L2 L3
Fuses
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 31 41
13 23 33 43
MSR230
K6
Relays, contactors, solenoids, valves, etc.
L1 L2 L3
K1
K3
K2
K4
MSR144RTP
14 24 34 44
K6
K3 K4 K5
M
Relays, contactors, solenoids, valves, etc.
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 32 42
Y3 Y4 Y7 Y8 18 28 36
Dual Channel E-stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
4-2
Inputs Closed
PowerFlex 70
Fuses E-stop
Output Active
M
K2 K3
Single Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
L1 L2 L3
Reset
Y3 Y4 Y7 Y8 18 28 36
K1
Ground
Relays, contactors, solenoids, valves, etc.
+24V DC
K1
K2
44
Termination
Ground
24
24V DC Stop
MSR238DP
K2
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR144RTP
MSR144RTP
Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
Termination
+24V DC
+24V DC
M
K1 K2 Ground
Output Active
Inputs Closed
M
K3 K4 K5 K6
Relays, contactors, solenoids, valves, etc.
Safety Mat, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
M
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs Minotaur MSR10D Specifications
Description The MSR10RD has 2 N.C. dual channel input for use with gate interlocks and emergency stop buttons in higher risk applications. The MSR10RD has output monitoring that accommodates automatic/manual or monitored manual reset. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of the contacts. Monitored manual requires the use of a manually operated normally open momentary switch to activate the outputs. The MSR10RD has 8 N.O. instantaneous safety outputs and 1 N.C. instantaneous auxiliary outputs as well as 1 N.O. safety and 1 N.C. auxiliary delayed outputs. The delay is set by an internal potentiometer. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary contact is an nonsafety output intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
Features • • • • • • • • •
Category 3 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 and 1 2 N.C. dual channel input 8 N.O. instantaneous safety outputs 1 N.C. instantaneous auxiliary output 1 N.O. delayed safety output 1 N.C. delayed auxiliary output Automatic/manual or monitored manual reset 152mm wide housing
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Power Supply
24V AC/DC and 110/230V AC
Power Consumption
<4VA
Safety Inputs
2 N.C.
Input Simultaneity
0.5s
Maximum Input Resistance
500 Ω
Reset
Monitored Manual or Auto./Manual
Outputs
8 N.O. Safety Instantaneous 1 N.O. Safety delayed 0.1 to 10s 1 N.C. Auxiliary Instantaneous 1 N.C. Auxiliary delayed 0.1 to 10s
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 4A/250V AC, 4A/125V AC P300, DC-13 3A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
4A
Fuses Input (internal, replace.) Output (external)
500mA time lag 5A quick acting
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Maximum Dropout Time
50ms instantaneous
Indication LEDs
Red = Power On Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed Green = Off Delay Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded, 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque Settings—term. screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
1054g (2.32lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-42
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs Minotaur MSR10D Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Reset
2 N.C.
8 N.O. Instantaneous 1 N.O. Delayed
1 N.C. Instantaneous 1 N.C. Delayed
Delayed Timing
Catalogue Number
0.1 to 10s
440R-G23029
1 second fixed delay
440R-G23067
0.5 second fixed delay
440R-G23068
Monitored Manual Automatic/Manual
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 152 (5.98)
118.2 (4.65)
A1
A2 F1
73 (2.87)
110/ 230
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
~
+ X2
X1
S14
S13
13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
D13 D21
91
K1
24V DC K3
K3
K4
K4
K5
K5
K6
K6
K7
K7
K8
K8
K1
K9
K4
K10
K7
K9
Timer
K10
K2
K3
K2
T1 K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K3
K4
K3 K5
K6
K7
K6 K8
K4
K9
K6
VR1
K7
K10
K8
K2
-
S24
S23
14
24 34
44 54
64 74
84
D14
92
D22
Typical Wiring Diagrams L
Reset Guard Closed & Unlocked
L1 L2 L3 A1
A2
42
12 22
34
41
S13 S14
54
+
A1 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
91
D13 D21 X1 K1
MSR10RD
53
K2
TLS2-GD2 Stop 11
21
33
S23 S24
-
A2 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84
92
D14 D22 X2
M
K1 K2
Aux
Aux
N
Dual Channel Guardlocking Safety Gate, Delayed Gate Release, Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Monitored Output Application Details Timing Potentiometer Replaceable Fuse Voltage Selector Switch
230V AC 110V AC
Fully CCW Fully CW Maximum 10s Minimum 0s
4-43
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs Minotaur MSR15D Specifications
Description The MSR15D has 2 N.C. dual channel input for use with gate interlocks and emergency stop buttons in higher risk applications. The MSR15D has output monitoring that can accommodate an automatic/manual reset. Automatic/manual reset can use a jumper or can be used to check operation of the contacts. The MSR15D has 3 N.O. safety outputs, 1 N.C. auxiliary output and 1 N.O. delayed safety output. The delay is set by an internal potentiometer. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary contact is a nonsafety output intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TÜV
Power Supply
24V AC/DC
Power Consumption
<4VA
Safety Inputs
2 N.C.
Input Simultaneity
0.5s
Maximum Input Resistance
500 Ω
Reset
Automatic/Manual
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 4A/250V AC, 4A/125V AC P300, DC-13; 2A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
4A
Fuses Input (internal, replace.) Output (external)
500mA time lag 5A quick acting
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Maximum Dropout Time
90ms
Indication LEDs
Red = Power On Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Features
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
• • • • • • • •
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Safety category 3 Stop category 0 and 1 2 N.C. dual channel input 2 N.O. safety outputs 1 N.O. safety delayed output 1 N.C. auxiliary output Automatic/manual reset 45mm wide housing
The safety function is ensured by the Minotaur
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded, 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque Settings—terminal screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
230g (.51lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Switch circuit MSR15D monitors for any single fault that may cause a danger.
4-44
MSR15D monitors itself for any internal fault.
Contactors: Provides contactor monitoring if two or more contactors are used in series.
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs Minotaur MSR15D Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
1 N.C.
24V AC/DC
2 N.O. Instantaneous 2 N.C.
Delay Timing
Catalogue Number
0.1 to 10 seconds
440R-M23048
1 to 35 seconds
440R-M23057
1 N.O. Delayed
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 118 (4.65)
45.5 (1.79)
A1
A2
X1
X2
S13 S14
13
D13
23
31
F1 K1
K2 K1 24VDC
73 (2.87)
~
K3
K4
K2
K1
K5
K3
K3
K2
K5
K4
K4
K3
K5 K4
K2
K5
K1
Timer K3
K2
K1
VR1
K2
K1
35mm DIN Rail Mounting S24
D14
S23
14
24 32
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC L1 L2 L3
Reset Guard Closed & Unlocked A1
A2
12 22
34
42
54
41
53
S13 S23 A1 13 23 31 D13
X1 K2 K2
MSR15D
TLS2-GD2 Stop 11
21
33
S14 S24 A2 14 24 32 D14 X2
M
K1 K2
Aux
Ground
Dual Channel Guardlocking Safety Gate, Delayed Gate Release, Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Monitored Output Application Details Adjustment of delay time for output D13-D14
Maximum
Minimum
500 mAT Fuse replacement
4-45
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs Minotaur MSR38D/DP Specifications
Housing with removable terminals shown.
Description
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/ EN60204-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Approvals
CE for all applicable directives, CTick, cULus, TUV
Power Supply
24V DC SELV
Power Consumption
3W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C.
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
200 ohms
Outputs
2 N. O. Safety, 1 N.C. Aux,
Output Rating Safety Auxiliary
2A @ 24V DC 50mA @ 24V DC
Fuses, Output External
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
The Minotaur MSR38D/DP is a microprocessor-based, monitoring safety relay, with delayed, safety-rated, solid state outputs.
Power On Delay
3s
Response Time
15ms
The inputs of the MSR38D/DP are the same as the MSR30. They can be connected to gate interlocks, e-stop devices or 4-wire safety mats. The gate interlocks and e-stops can be either single channel or dual channel normally-closed circuits.
Recovery Time
20ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power (Pwr) Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed
Pwr LED 3s Blink Diagnostics Constant 2 Blinks 4 Blinks Continuous Blinking
Initialization Normal operation Config. change during operation Solid state output switch fault Internal Fault
The reset capability of the MSR38D/DP allows it to set up for manual or automatic start and restart. The outputs include two delayed normally-open safety rated outputs that can be connected to loads up to 2A at 24V DC. These outputs can be used to send a safety stop signal to a machine or manufacturing system. The delay is accomplished by the configuration of jumpers on the terminals. The delay can be easily adjusted by reconfiguring the jumpers. The MSR38D/DP also has one solid state normally-closed auxiliary output, which must only be used to indicate the status of the MSR38D/DP. The auxiliary output responds immediately to the change in input status; it is not delayed.
Features • • • • • •
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 Stop Category 0 or 1 2 Delayed Solid State Safety Outputs 1 Solid State Auxiliary Output 1 N.C., 2 N.C. or Safety Mat Input Monitored Manual or Automatic/Manual Reset
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+14° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Pollution Degree
2
Conductor Size
0.2 – 2,5mm2 (24 – 14AWG)
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
130g (0.287 lbs)
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Wiring Terminations S11 & S21 S12 & S22 A1 – S34
Input contacts Reset switch
S11 – S34
Automatic reset, start-up test disabled
S21 – S34
Automatic reset, start-up test enabled
A1 – Y2 A1 – Y41
4-46
Pulse train output
Monitoring circuit Cross-fault monitoring disabled
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs Minotaur MSR38D/DP Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Catalogue Number
1 N.C., 2 N.C., or Safety Mat
2 N.O. Solid state
1 N.C. Solid state
Fixed
440R-M23203
Removable
440R-M23204
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
99 (3.89)
S21
Y11
Y12
A1
Y41
S11
Y13 S34 A1
MSR3D/DP
114.5 (4.5)
18
28
Y32
A2
S12
S22
Y32
18
28
S21
Y2
Typical Wiring Diagrams See MSR30 (page 4-26) for additional input wiring configurations. +24V
+24V Reset
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2 K1
MSR38D/DP
K1
MSR38D/DP
K2 S12 S22 A2
14
24 Y32
S12 S22 A2
K1 K2
Aux to PLC or Indicator
Ground
M
14
24 Y32
K1
Aux to PLC or Indicator
Ground
Dual Channel E-Stop, Dual Channel Delayed Outputs, Monitored Manual Reset, Output Monitoring
M
Single Channel Gate Interlock, Single Channel Delayed Output, Automatic Reset, No Output Monitoring
Application Details (Typical) Apply jumpers (links) on the terminals identified to achieve the desired off delay. Delay (s)
Y11
Y12
Y13
Delay (s)
Y11
Y12
Y13
Delay (s)
Y11
Y12
Y13
0
—
—
—
8
S21
S11
—
50
—
S21
S21
0.5
S11
—
—
10
—
S11
S21
60
S11
S11
S11
1
—
S11
—
12
S21
—
S11
80
S11
S11
S21
1.5
—
—
S11
15
—
S21
S11
100
S11
S21
S11
2
S21
—
—
18
S11
S11
—
120
S11
S21
S21
3
—
S21
—
21
S11
—
S11
160
S21
S11
S11
4
—
—
S21
26
—
S11
S11
200
S21
S11
S21
5
S11
S21
—
30
S21
S21
—
250
S21
S21
S11
6
S11
—
S21
40
S21
—
S21
300
S21
S21
S21
4-47
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs Minotaur MSR138DP Specifications Standards
Description The MSR138DP is a versatile monitoring safety relay. It can be connected in four different input wiring configurations: 1 N.C., 2 N.C., or 2 PNP connections from a light curtain. When connected in the 2 N.C. fashion, the MSR138DP checks for cross faults across the two inputs. When connected to light curtains, the light curtain must perform the cross fault detection. The MSR138DP has output monitoring that can accommodate either automatic/manual reset or a monitored manual rest. When configured with automatic/manual reset (jumpers on X1-X2 and X3-X4), the MSR138DP can have the reset terminals S33-S34 jumpered or can be converted to an unmonitored manual reset by adding a normally open switch in the monitoring loop (S33-S34). When configured to monitored manual reset, the MSR138DP checks the output monitoring circuit through the manual application of the reset switch. The outputs of the MSR138DP include 2 normally open immediate safety outputs and 3 normally open delayed safety outputs. The outputs of the MSR138.1DP include 2 normally open immediate safety rated outputs, 2 normally open delayed safety outputs and 1 normally closed delayed safety output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. A N.C. timer reset switch can be added to force the delayed contacts opened prior to the completion of the timing cycle. An electronic protection circuit detects shorts across the input, when the MSR138DP wired for cross fault detection.
Features • • • • • • • •
Category 4/3 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 and 1 Light curtain, E-Stop, Safety Gate inputs 2 immediate safety outputs Delayed outputs: 3 safety or 2 safety and 1 aux. Cross fault monitoring Monitored or automatic reset Removable terminals
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category Instantaneous/Delayed
Cat. 4/Cat. 3 per EN 954-1
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 115V AC or 230V AC 0.8 to 1.1 x rated voltage, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption
4W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C. or light curtain
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
135 ohms
Reset
Monitored Manual or Auto./Manual
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 3 N.O. Safety Delayed (MSR138DP); 2 N.O. Safety Delayed (MSR138.1DP); 1 N.C. Aux. Delayed (MSR138.1DP)
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 7A/250V AC DC-1: 7A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 6A/250V AC, 6A/125V AC P300, DC-13; 3A/24V DC 6A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
Thermal Current (non switching) Units with 24V AC/DC supply: Units with 115/230V AC supply:
Max 7A in one current path 5x3.5A or 3x4.5A 5x2.5A or 3x3.5A
Fuses Output (external)
6A Slow Blow or 10A Quick Blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10ma/10V
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 0.5mAu
Power On Delay
1s
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time
100ms
Indication LEDs
Green= Power Green= CH1 Output Active Green= CH2 Output Active Green=CHT1 Timed Output Act. Green=CHT2 Timed Output Act.
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4–0.5 Nm (3.54–4.43lb²in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight 24V DC 110V AC or 230V AC
350g (0.77lbs) 490g (1.08 lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250V AC/6A/1500VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/2.5A/625VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/1.5A/375VA cosϕ=0.35 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 300,000 operations 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 cycles
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-48
Safety Relays
Monitoring Safety Relays with Delayed Outputs Minotaur MSR138DP Product Selection Inputs
Safety Delayed Outputs
Safety Outputs
Time Delay
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
1.0s fixed
115V AC
440R-M23080
24V AC/DC
440R-M23143
115V AC
440R-M23141
230V AC
440R-M23140
24V AC/DC
440R-M23147
115V AC
440R-M23145
230V AC
440R-M23144
24V AC/DC
440R-M23151
115V AC
440R-M23149
230V AC
440R-M23148
24V AC/DC
440R-M23084
115V AC
440R-M23082
0.15 – 3s
3 N.O. (MSR138DP)
0.5 – 10s
1.5 – 30s 1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or Light Curtain
2 N.O. 0.15 – 3s
2 N.O. 1 N.C. (MSR138.1DP)
230V AC
440R-M23081
24V AC/DC
440R-M23088
115V AC
440R-M23086
0.5 – 10s
230V AC
440R-M23085
24V AC/DC
440R-M23092
115V AC
440R-M23090
230V AC
440R-M23089
1.5 – 30s
Dimensions—mm (inches)
Block Diagram
45 (1.77)
99 (3.89)
A1 (+) A2 (-) S11 (+) X1 X2 X3 X4 Overvoltage protection AC
S12
13
S52
Logic Channel 1 CH1
PWR
CHT1
CH1
114.5 (4.5)
37 47
57
Logic Channel 2
Start Logic
24VDC
23
Overvoltage protection
CH1 CH2
CH T1
CHT2
24VDC
S33 S34 Y1 Y2 Y39 Y40
CHT1
CH1
CH T2
23
37 47
55
Logic Channel 2
CH1
CH2
CHT1 CH2
CH1
CH T1
CH2
CH T2
CHT2
CHT2
Time Reset
Time Reset
S21/PE
13
S52
Logic Channel 1
PWR
CH2
S12
Start Logic
AC
CHT2
CHT1 CH2
A1 (+) A2 (-) S11 (+) X1 X2 X3 X4
S22
14
24
38 48
58
S21/PE
S33 S34 Y1 Y2 Y39 Y40
MSR138DP
S22
14
24
38 48
56
MSR138.1DP
In applications with 24V DC supply: terminal S21 must not be connected to PE.
Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V DC
L1 Reset
+
E-Stop
Reset Light Curtain Out2 Out 1 24VDC -
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
A1 S52 S11 S12 S21 S22
S33 S34 13 23 37 47 57
A1 S52 S11 S12 S21 S22
S33 S34 13 23 37 47 55
K1
K1
MSR138DP
MSR138.1DP K2
K2
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y39 Y40 Y2 Y1 14 24 38 48 58 K1 K2 D1 D2
Ground
Timer Override
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y39 Y40 Y2
M
Indicator D1, D2 = Delayed Output Load
24V DC Supply Dual Channel E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Y1 14 24 38 48 56
M
K1 K2 D1 D2
N
Indicator D1, D2 = Delayed Output Load
115/230V AC Supply, 24V DC Light Curtain, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
4-49
Safety Relays
Two Hand Relays Minotaur MSR7R & MSR7C Specifications
Description The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Minotaur MSR7R & MSR7C are logic units for monitoring and interfacing two hand control devices with a safety related circuit. The MSR7R is for use with mechanical switches and the Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800Z Zero Force Touch Buttons. The MSR7C is for use with electronic-sensing (for example, capacitive or photoelectric) palm buttons because the MSR7C will not turn its output ON if a power interruption occurs while a person’s hands are on the buttons. The MSR7 has 3 N.O. safety outputs and 1 N.C. auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The auxiliary contact is a nonsafety output intended to provide an external signal about the status of the safety outputs.
Standards
EN574, EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, IEC60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Cat. IIIb per EN 574
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TÜV
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 110V AC or 230V AC
Power Consumption
<4VA
Safety Inputs
1 N.C & 1 N.O.
Input Simultaneity
0.5s
Maximum Input Resistance
500 W
Reset
Automatic
Outputs
3 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 4A/250V AC, 4A/125V AC P300, DC-13; 2A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
4A
Fuses Input (Internal, replace.) Output (external)
500mA time lag 5A quick acting
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Maximum Dropout Time
50ms
Indication LEDs
Red = Power On Green = K1Closed Green = K2 Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
The MSR7 requires the two switches to be operated within 0.5 seconds of each other and will only authorize the ON state while both switches are held down. If one of the switches is released, the output goes to the OFF state and the machine cannot be restarted until both buttons are released and then operated simultaneously.
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
The MSR7 conforms to EN574 which gives specific requirements for two hand control units and logic devices. Categories IIIB or IIIC are achieved depending upon the wiring.
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded, 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Torque Settings—terminal screws
1N⋅m (8.85lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Features • • • • • •
Safety category 3 per EN 954-1 Safety category IIIb per EN 574 Two-hand control unit 3 N.O. safety outputs 1 N.C. auxiliary output 45mm wide housing
Applications Shown with Mechanical two hand push button station or two capacitive switches
Contactor monitoring circuit Contactor switching circuit
Supply inclusive of switching circuit Contactor Monitored by Minotaur The safety function is ensured by the Minotaur.
MSR7R/MSR7C
Contactors: Provides contactor monitoring if two or more contactors are used in series.
Switch Circuit: MSR7R monitors for single fault that may cause a danger.
MSR7R monitors itself for any fault.
4-50
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
510g (1.12lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Two Hand Relays Minotaur MSR7R & MSR7C Product Selection Minotaur
Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Input Buttons
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-D23021
110V AC
440R-D23022
Mechanical or Bulletin 800Z
MSR7R 1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
3 N.O.
1 N.C. Capacitive or Photoelectric
MSR7C
230V AC
440R-D23023
24V AC/DC
440R-D23024
110V AC
440R-D23025
230V AC
440R-D23026
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 120 (4.72)
A1
45.5 (1.79)
A2
X1
X2
S13
S14
K3 24VDC
~
S23
K5A
K5
K4
S24
13 23 33
41
K3
K4
K2
K1
K1
K2
K5
K1
73 (2.87)
K5
A1
A2
X1
K4
K3
S23
S24
K2
14 24 34 42 13 23 33 41
K4 K1
K1 K5
Timer
K2
K4
24VDC
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
K4
X2
K5 ~
K1
K1
K2
Q1 K2
K2
K3
K3
K1
K2
K1
S13 S14
K3 K2
14 24
34 42
Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
L1
Switch 2
Switch 2 Reset E-Stop
S23
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3 S24
A1
13
23
33
41
S23
X1
S24
A1
13
23
33
41
X1 K1
MSR7C
K1
MSR7R
K2
K2 S13
S14
A2
14
24
K1
K2
Switch 1
34
42
S13
X2
S14
A2
14
24
Switch 1
M
34
42
X2
M K1
K2
N
N
Dual Channel Two-Hand Control, Automatic Reset, Dual Channel Output, Monitored Output
Dual Channel Two-Hand Control, Automatic Reset, Dual Channel Output, No Monitored Output
Application Details
Replacement Fuse
4-51
Safety Relays
Two Hand Relays Minotaur MSR35H/HP Specifications
Housing with removable terminals shown.
Description The Minotaur MSR35H/HP is a microprocessor-based, two-hand control monitoring safety relay, with safety rated, solid state outputs. The input of the MSR35H/HP accepts two switches, each containing one normally open and one normally closed. Both switches must be actuated within 0.5 seconds of each other. The reset capability of the MSR35H/HP allows it to set up for manual or automatic start and restart. The outputs include two normally-open safety rated outputs that can be connected to loads up to 2A at 24V DC. These outputs can be used to send a safety stop signal to a machine or manufacturing system. The MSR35H/HP also has one solid state normally-closed auxiliary output, which must only be used to indicate the status of the MSR35H/HP.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, EN574, IEC/EN60204-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1) Cat. IIIC per EN574
Approvals
CE for all applicable directives, CTick, cULus, TUV
Power Supply
24V DC SELV
Power Consumption
3W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. & 1 N.O. (Two sets)
Max. Allowable Input Resistance
200 ohms
Outputs
2 N. O. Safety, 1 N.C. Aux,
Output Rating Safety Auxiliary
2A @ 24VDC 50mA @ 24VDC
Fuses, output external
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Power On Delay
3s
Response Time
15ms
Recovery Time
20ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power (Pwr) Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed
Pwr LED 3s Blink Diagnostics Constant 2 Blinks 4 Blinks Continuous Blinking
Initializing Phase Normal Operation Config. change during operation Solid state output switch fault Internal Fault
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+14° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Pollution Degree
2
Features
Conductor size
0.2 – 2,5mm2 (24 – 14AWG)
• • • • •
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
130g (0.287 lbs)
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 Cat. IIIC per EN574 2 Solid State Safety Outputs 1 Solid State Auxiliary Output Two-hand control input
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-52
Safety Relays
Two Hand Relays Minotaur MSR35H/HP Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Catalogue Number
Two-Hand Control
2 N.O. Solid state
1 N.O. Solid state
Fixed
440R-D23201
Removable
440R-D23202
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
99 (3.89)
A1
Y41
S11
S34 A1
MSR33RT/RTP
114.5 (4.5)
14
24
Y32
A2
S12
S22
Y32
14
24
S21
Y2
Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V
+24V L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2
S11 S21 A1 S34 Y41 Y2
S1
S1 K1
MSR35H/HP
K1
MSR35H/HP
K2 S2
S12 S22 A2
14
S2
K1 K2
Ground
K2
24 Y32
Aux to PLC or Indicator
Two-Hand Control, Dual Channel Outputs, Automatic Reset, Output Monitoring
S12 S22 A2
M
14
24 Y32
K1 K2
Ground
Aux to PLC or Indicator
M
Two-Hand Control, Dual Channel Outputs, Automatic Reset, Output Monitoring
4-53
Safety Relays
Two Hand Relays Minotaur MSR125H/HP Specifications Standards
EN 574, EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Cat. IIIC per EN 574
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & BG
Power Supply
24V DC, 115V AC or 230V AC
Power Consumption
2W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. and 1 N.O.
Input Simultaneity
<0.5s
Maximum Input Resistance
40 ohms
Description
Reset
Automatic
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety
The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Minotaur MSR125H/HP is a logic unit for monitoring and interfacing two hand control devices with a safety related circuit. The MSR125H/HP is for use with mechanical switches and the Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800Z Zero-Force Touch Buttons.
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 6A/250V AC DC-1: 6A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 6A/250V AC, 6A/125V AC P300, DC-13; 3A/24V DC 6A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
The MSR125H/HP has 2 N.O. safety outputs. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
Thermal Current (non switching)
1x6A, 2 x 4A
Fuses Output (external)
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Power On Delay
1s
The MSR125H/HP requires the two switches to be operated within 0.5 seconds of each other and will only authorize the ON state while both switches are held down. If one of the switches is released, the output goes to the OFF state and the machine cannot be restarted until both buttons are released and then operated simultaneously. The MSR125H/HP conforms to EN574 Category IIIC, which gives specific requirements for two hand control units and logic devices. The MSR125H has fixed terminals and the MSR125HP has removable terminals.
Response
20ms
Recovery Time
500ms
Indication LEDs
Green = Power on Green = CH1 Output Active Green = CH2 Output Active
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Features
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
• • • • • •
Conductor Size
0.2-4mm2 (24-12AWG)
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
2
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Safety category IIIc per EN 574 Two-hand control unit 2 N.O. safety outputs Removable terminals 22.5mm wide housing
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4-0.5N·m (3.54-4.43lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight 24V DC 115 and 230V AC
210g (0.463 lbs) 260g (0.573 lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250V AC/6A/1500VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/2.5A/625VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/1.5A/375VA cosϕ=0.35 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 300,000 operations 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0-55Hz 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-54
Safety Relays
Two Hand Relays Minotaur MSR125H/HP Product Selection Inputs
Input Buttons
1 N. C. 1 N. O.
Safety Outputs
Mechanical or Bulletin 800Z
Terminals
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V DC
440R-D23171
Removable MSR125HP
115V AC
440R-D23169
230V AC
440R-D23168
2 N. O. Fixed MSR125H
24V DC
440R-D23166
115V AC
440R-D23164
230V AC
440R-D23163
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
99 (3.89)
A1(+) S11
S12
S13
Y1
Y2
A1 S11 S12 S13 Y1 Y2
S21 S22 S23 S21
S22
23
13
23
14
24
– +
+ –
114.5 (4.5)
13
S23
A2 A2(-)
14
24
Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
L1 S1
S1
A1
L1 L2 L3 S11
S12
S13
Y1
13
23
L1 L2 L3 A1
S12
S13
Y1
13
23 K1
K1
MSR125H/HP
S11
MSR125H/HP
K2 A2
S21
S22
S23
Y2
14
24
K1
K2
A2
S22
S23
Y2
14
24
M
S2
M
S2
S21
K1 N
N
Two-Hand Control, Dual Channel, Auto Reset, Output Monitoring
Two-Hand Control, Dual Channel, Auto Reset, Output Monitoring
4-55
Safety Relays
Expansion Units Minotaur MSR19E Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 4 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Power Supply AZ1 and AZ2 AZ1 AZ2
24V AC/DC -20%, +10% 120V AC -15%, +10% 240V AC -15%, +10%
Power Consump. 24V AC/DC 120V and 240V AC
3.6W 6.1VA, 5.7W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
Input Simultaneity
0.5s
Description
Maximum Input Resistance
100Ω
Reset
Automatic
The Minotaur MSR19E is a monitoring safety expansion relay unit with dual channel input. It is designed to be operated as an “extension” of a “master” safety relay. When wired properly, the outputs of the MSR19E will mimic the outputs of the master relay.
Outputs
8 N.O. Safety; 2 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
C300, AC-15 0.75A/240V AC, 1.5A/120V AC Q300, DC-13; 2A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
1x8A, 2x7A,4x6A,6x5A,8x4.5A
Fuses Input (internal elect.) Output (external)
20s reset time 1.6 slow blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
24V AC/DC, 20mA
Maximum Dropout Time
20ms
Features
Indication LEDs
• • • •
Red = Input Short Green = Power Green = K1 Green = K2
Impulse Withstand Voltage
3000V
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
2
With its 8 safety outputs, the MSR19E can be used to drive multiple safety circuits. Two auxiliary normally closed contacts are available to provide indication of the status of the MSR19E, which would reflect the status of the master safety relay.
Safety category according to wiring Dual channel inputs 8 N.O. safety outputs 2 N.C. auxiliary outputs
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +55°C (-13°F to +131°F)
Humidity
95% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40, (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG)
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.8N⋅m (7lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polyester PBT
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
630g (1.4lbs)
Electrical Life 222V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
10,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
10g, 11ms half sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-56
Safety Relays
Expansion Units Minotaur MSR19E Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Output
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
8 N.O.
2 N.C.
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC and 120V AC
440R-ZBE820AZ1
24V AC/DC and 240V AC
440R-ZBE820AZ2
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 90 (2.34)
103 (4.06)
A1
B1
A2
S3 J1
S4
13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 91 101
PTC K1
97 (3.82)
94 (3.7)
97 (3.82)
24V DC
~
Logic Input Short
K2
Power B2
S2 S1
J2
14
24 34
44 54 64 74 84 92 102
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC open L1 L2 L3 T11 T12 X1 X2 T22 T35 A1 B1 13 23 33 43 53
L1 L2 L3 A1 B1 S1 S3 J1 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 91 101
61 73 K1
closed
K2
MSR18T
MSR19E
T31 T32 IF1 T33 T34 A2 B2 14 24 34 44 54
A2 B2 S2 S4 J2 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 92 102
62 74
M
K1
K2
M
Aux
Aux
Ground
Single Channel Gate Input, Single Channel Expansion, Single Channel Output Automatic Reset, Expansion Monitoring, No Monitored Output L
open L1 L2 L3 T11 T12 X1 X2 T22 T35 A1 B1 13 23 33 43 53
L1 L2 L3 A1 B1 S1 S3 J1 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 91 101
61 73 K1
closed
K3
MSR18T
MSR19E K2
T31 T32 IF1 T33 T34 A2 B2 14 24 34 44 54
A2 B2 S2 S4 J2 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 92 102
62 74
M
K1
Reset
K4
K2
Aux
K3
M K4
Aux
N
Dual Channel Gate Input, Dual Channel Expansion, Dual Channel Output Monitored Manual Reset, Expansion Monitoring, Monitored Output
4-57
Safety Relays
Expansion Units Minotaur MSR122E Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and BG
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 115V AC or 230V AC 0.8 to 1.1 x rated voltage, 50/60 Hz (0.85 to 1.1 x 24V DC)
Power Consumption
3W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Maximum Input Resistance
160 ohms
Description
Outputs
6 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Auxiliary 1 N.C. Monitoring
The MSR122E is designed to be an expansion relay for use with the Minotaur safety relays. The MSR122E is typically used in safety system applications where additional outputs switching connections are needed to help shut down a manufacturing process, properly and safely.
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 10A/250V AC DC-1: 10A/24V DC
➊Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 N.O. (Inductive) N.C.
The MSR122E can be connected as a single channel (1 N.C.) or dual channel (2 N.C.) input configuration.
N.O. N.C.
A300, AC-15 5A/250V AC, 5A/125V AC 2A/250V AC, 2A/125V AC N300, DC-13 4A/24V DC 10A/24V DC @ 6 ops/min
The outputs include 6 normally open safety rated outputs used to shut down the manufacturing system and 1 normally closed auxiliary output to indicate the status of the MSR122E. One additional normally closed output is available to allow the host relay to monitor the status of the MSR122E. The safety, auxiliary and monitoring outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
Features • • • •
Safety category according to wiring 6 Safety contacts 1 Auxiliary contact 1 Monitoring contact
current2 x number of contact paths/A2
Fuses Output (external)
6A Slow Blow or 10A Quick Blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 0.5µAu
Response Time
30ms
Indication LEDs
Green = CH1 Closed Green = CH2 Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2 -5°C to +50°C (+23°F to 122°F)
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24-12AWG)
ACV
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4Nm (3.54 lb•in)
24V
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
550g (1.21lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250V AC/10A/2500VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=0.35 250V AC/5A/1250VA cosϕ=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
300,000 operations 700,000 operations 350,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
5,000,000 operations
200
150
100
50
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
0 0
10
20
30
40
Ambient temperature/°C
4-58
See limit curve Max 10A in one current path
Operating Temperature
Contact Current Limit Curve 250
Thermal Current (non switching)
50
60
Safety Relays
Expansion Units Minotaur MSR122E Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
6 N.O.
1 N.C.
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-E21358
115V AC
440R-E21357
230V AC
440R-E21356
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram
109.5 (4.31)
A2 A3
13
23 33 43
53
63 81 X1
14
24 34 44
54
64 82 X2
MSR122E
87 (3.42) A2 A4
100 (3.93)
75 (2.95)
4.5 (0.17)
Typical Wiring Diagrams L1
+24V DC Reset
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
A1 A3 13 23 33 43 53 63 81 X1
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51 K1
MSR131RTP
MSR122E
K2
M
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52
24V DC Ground
N
K3
A2 A4 14
M
24 34 44 54 64 82 X2
K3
K1 K2
Output Inputs Active Closed
120/230V AC Host (MSR131) with Dual Channel Light Curtain Input and Single Channel Expansion (MSR122) with Monitoring L1 Light Curtain Out 2 Out 1
A1
S52 S11 S12
Reset
+
+24V DC -
S21 S22
L1 L2 L3 S33 S34 13
23
37
47
L1 L2 L3 A1 A3 13 23 33 43 53 63 81
57
X1
K1
MSR138DP A2
X1
X2
X3
X4
D1
MSR122E
K2 Y39 Y40
Y2
Timer Reset
Y1 14
24
K1
K2
38
48
58
M
A2 A4 14
D2 24 34 44 54 64 82
X2
M
D1 D2
Indicator
D1, D2 = Delayed Output Load
N
120/230V AC Host (MSR138) with Dual Channel Light Curtain Input and Dual Channel Delayed Expansion (MSR122) with Monitoring
4-59
Safety Relays
Expansion Units Minotaur MSR132E Specifications Standards
Description The Minotaur MSR132E is a monitoring safety expansion relay unit with single or dual channel input and either immediate or timed offdelay outputs. It is designed to be operated as an “extension” of a “master” safety relay. When wired properly, the outputs of the MSR132E will mimic the outputs of the master relay. The outputs include 4 normally open safety rated outputs used to shut down the manufacturing system and 2 normally closed auxiliary outputs to indicate status of the MSR132E. One additional normally closed output is available to allow the host relay to monitor the status of the MSR132E. The safety, auxiliary and monitoring outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
Category Instantaneous/Delayed
Cat. 4/Cat. 3 per EN 954-1
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and BG
Power Supply
24V AC/DC 50/60Hz or 24VDC 0.85 to 1.1
Power Consumption
1.5W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C.
Outputs
4 N. O. Safety, 2 N.C. Aux, 1 N.C. Monitoring
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 6A/250V AC DC-1: 3A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 6A/250V AC, 6A/125VAC P300, DC-13 3A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
2x6A, 3x5A, 4x 4A
Fuses, output external
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Minimum Switched Current/ Voltage
10mA/10V
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 2µAu
Power On Delay
100ms
Response Time
50ms
Recovery Time
100ms
Indication LEDs
Green = K1 Closed Green = K2 Closed
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Features • • • • • •
Category 4/3 per EN 954-1 Stop Category 0 or 1 4 Safety contacts N.O. 2 Auxiliary contacts N.C. 1 Monitoring contact N.C. Single channel input
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+14° to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Pollution Degree
2
Conductor size
0.2 - 4mm2 (24 - 12AWG)
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
215g (0.474 lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250V AC/6A/1250VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/2A/500VA cosϕ=1 250V AC/4A/1000VA cosϕ=0.35 250V AC/1.5A/1000VA cosϕ=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 300,000 operations 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
10-55Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-60
Safety Relays
Expansion Units Minotaur MSR 132E Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Supply
Terminals
24V AC/DC Fixed
24V DC
1 N.C. + 2 N.C.
4 N.O.
2 N.C.
24V AC/DC
Removable
24V DC
Time Delay
Catalogue Number
0s
440R-E23191
0.5s
440R-E23192
1s
440R-E23193
2s
440R-E23194
3s
440R-E23195
0s
440R-E23097
0.5s
440R-E23159
1s
440R-E23160
2s
440R-E23098
3s
440R-E23161
4s
440R-E23162
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram A1
X1 13 23 33 43 51 61
Ch1 Ch2 A2
X2 14 24 34 44 52 62
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC
Reset MSR132EDP
E-Stop L1 L2 L3
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S52 S11 Y31 S33 S34 13 23 33 41 51
L1 L2 L3
A1 X1 13 23 33 43 51 61 K3
K1
MSR131RTP
K4 K2
A2 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y30 Y32 Y35 Y2 Y1 14 24 34 42 52 K1 K2
A2 X2 14 24 34 44 52 62
M
M K3 K4
Ground
Aux
Output Inputs Active Closed
Dual Channel E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Dual Channel Output, Single Channel Delayed Expansion, Monitored Output
4-61
Safety Relays
Timing Control Units CU1 Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TÜV
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 110/230V AC
Power Consumption
<4VA
Inputs
1 N.C.
Maximum Input Resistance
500 Ω
Reset
Automatic/manual
Description
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Auxiliary
The CU1 is an on-delay timing unit designed to energize and thus unlock guard locking devices after a preset time delay expires. It can be used with power to unlock devices, like the Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Atlas, Spartan, 440G-MT, or TLS-GD2, on machines which have a run down cycle or do not stop immediately. It may also be incorporated into other parts of the safety related controls system, should a predictable, on-delay be required.
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 4A/250V AC, 4A/125VAC P300, DC-13; 3A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
2x4A
A removable cover allows access to the AC power switch, the replaceable fuse, and the DIP switches & potentiometer which control the timing. Power to the CU1 can be either 24V AC/DC (+/ - terminals) or 110/230V AC (A1/A2 terminals). If 110V AC or 230V AC power is used, an internal switch must be set to the appropriate position.
Max. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Indication LED
Red = Power on Red/Green = Timing/Output on
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Timed Off-Delay
0.1s to 40min.
Fuses Input (external) Output (external)
500mA time lag 5A quick acting
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20 DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
A typical operation starts with the safety outputs (13/14 and 23/24) open and the X1/X2 loop closed.
Pollution Degree
3
Torque Settings—terminal screws
1N⋅m (8 lb⋅in)
1. Apply power to A1/A2 or +/-. a. The Power LED turns ON and the Output LED turns red. b. After the time delay expires, the Output LED turns green and the safety outputs (13/14 and 23/24) close. 2. Remove power to A1/A2 or +/-. a. Immediately, the safety contacts (13/14 and 23/24) open, the Power LED turns off and the Output LED turns Off. 3. Go to step 1.
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
The status of the CU1 can be signaled to the Remote Indicator Unit via terminals R1/R2/R3, or to a PLC or other indicator by using the N.C. auxiliary contacts (31/32).
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm(0.03in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half-sine
The X1/X2 terminals are designed to monitor the performance of the contactors which isolate the power to the moving parts of the machinery. The timing can not begin until the X1/X2 loop is closed. The X1/X2 loop must remain closed during the whole timing cycle. Opening the X1/X2 loop during the timing cycle causes the time to be reset to zero. If monitoring is not needed, the X1/X2 loop can be linked.
Features • • • •
Category 1 per EN 954-1 Stop category 1 Timed on-delay output 0.1s to 40 min 2 N.O. safety outputs
4-62
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
360g (0.79lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA/cosϕ=3.5 220V AC/1.7A/375VA/cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Timing Control Units CU1 Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
1 N.O.
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
24V AC/DC and 110/230V AC
440R-T07114
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
CU1 Remote Indication Unit
—
440R-A07138
Dimensions—mm (inches)
Block Diagram Remote Indication Unit 36 (1.42) 38 (1.50)
Control Unit 45.5 (1.79)
120 (4.72)
A1
+
A2
X1 K2
57 (2.24)
73 (2.87)
69 (2.72)
SW1
K2 K1
~
K3
K3
K2
K2
G
R
13 23
31
14 24
32
K1 K2 K1
VR1
24V DC Q1 K3
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
50 (1.97)
X2
F1 110/230
K2
R2
R1
R3
Max (3 Wire) Cable Size 6mm Ø
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC K1 (aux) K2 (aux)
Start
L1 L2 L3
Stop Guard Closed & Locked
TLS1-GD2 A1
42
54
A2
41 12 22
53 34
21
33
11
13
A1 +
23 31 X1 K2
CU1 A2 -
K1
R1 R2 R3 14 24 32 X2
Remote Indicator
K2
K2
Aux
M Ground
Guard Locking Safety Gate, Delayed Gate Release, Automatic Reset, Monitored Output Application Details General time settings via DIP switches A
B
1
<1 sec. to 10 secs. C
2
6 secs. to 5 mins. 10 secs.
DIP switches general time setting and the potentiometer fine tunes the time settings. Easy access 500mAT replaceable fuse.
2
1 sec. to 39 secs. D
1
Adjustable Time Delay
1
2
1
2
48 sec. to 41 secs.
Fine adjustment time setting via potentiometer -
-
+
+ Fully CCW Maximum
Fully CW Minimum
4-63
Safety Relays
Timing Control Units CU4 Specifications
Description The CU4 is an off-delay timing unit which can be operated standalone or as an extension of a host relay. The timed outputs are used in applications where power must be maintained for a fixed duration after an input signal is received. For example, driving a power to lock TLS2-GD2 to maintain a guard door in the locked position for a fixed duration after a stop button is pressed. Another example would be maintaining the connection of a drive to a motor until the braking function is achieved, and then dropping out a contactor to remove power to the motor. The inputs can be connected in either a single channel or dual channel configuration. The inputs must remain closed during the complete timing cycle. Opening the contacts before the timing cycle completes causes the timer to be reset to zero. The CU4 has a redundant structure with two independent safe timer circuits. The outputs include two normally open safety delayed outputs as well as one normally closed safety output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. When used an extension of a host relay, the normally closed contacts should be used in the feedback loop of the host relay. If used in standalone application, the normally closed contacts can be used to signal an auxiliary device or PLC. A typical operation starts with power applied to A1/A2 and the input circuits open. 1. Close the B11/B12 and B21/B22 circuits. a. The safety outputs (17/18 and 27/28) close immediately. 2. Open the B11/B12 or B21/B22 circuits. a. The timing process starts. b. The safety outputs (17/18 and 27/28) open after the time expires. 3. Go to Step 1.
Features • • • • • •
Category 3 per EN 954-1 Stop category 1 Timed off-delay 0.15s to 30s 2 Safety contacts 1 Auxiliary contact 1 Monitoring contact
4-64
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and BG
Power Supply
24V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 0.85 to 1.1 x rated voltage
Power Consumption
2.5W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15 5A/250V AC, 5A/125V AC N300 DC-13 3A/24V DC
Timed Off-Delay
0.15 to 30s
Fuses Output External
6A Slow Blow or 10A Quick Blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Contact Material
Ag Sn O2/0.5µ Au
Response Time
30msec
Indication LEDs
Green = Power Green =CH t1 Active Green = CH t2 active
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Maximum Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24-12AWG)
Torque Settings—terminal screws
0.4Nm (3.54lb²in)
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
165g (0.36lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Timing Control Units CU4 Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.C. or 2 N.C.
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
Timing Range
Catalogue Number
0.15 – 3s
440R-S23173
0.5 – 10s
440R-S23174
1.5 – 30s
440R-S23175
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
A1 35
75.0 (2.95)
17 B11 17 27
27 B12 35
18 28 B21 28
36 B22 A2
110 (4.33)
K1 K2 36 18
Typical Wiring Diagrams
E-Stop A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S23 X2 13 23 33 43 53
L1 L2 L3
81
A1 B11 B21 17
27
35
A1
Aux Circuit
Aux Circuit
+24V DC
Solenoid
54
42
K1
MSR124RT A2 PE
Y1 Y2 X5 X6 X1 14 24
34 44 54
M
82
A2
CU4
K2 A2
B12 B22 18
41 12
28
36
11
53 22
34
21
33
Reset K1 K2
TLS2-GD2 Power to Lock
Ground
Dual Channel Wiring to CU4 Inputs
E-Stop A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S23 X2 13 23 33 43 53
L1 L2 L3
81
A1 B11 B21 17
27
35
A1
K1
MSR124RT A2 PE
Y1 Y2 X5 X6 X1 14 24
34 44 54
82
A2
CU4
K2
M
A2
B12 B22 18
Solenoid
36
54
42 41 12
28
Aux Circuit
Aux Circuit
+24V DC
11
53 22
34
21
33
Reset K1 K2
TLS2-GD2 Power to Lock
Ground
Single Channel Wiring to CU4 Inputs
4-65
Safety Relays
Stop Motion Monitors CU2 Specifications
Description The CU2 control unit is a compact timing and stop motion detector interface module. By utilizing two independent inductive proximity inputs which monitor the movement of two metal parts of the machine (e.g., sprockets, cams or linkages), the control unit detects when hazardous motion has ceased. When the hazardous motion has stopped the unit will send a signal to unlock guard locking devices. It has been developed to integrate guardlocking interlock switches on machines which have variable or unpredictable run down cycles.
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TÜV
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110/230V AC
Power Consumption
< 4VA
Inputs
1 NPN and 1 PNP, normally open
Maximum Input Resistance
500 Ω
Reset
Automatic/Manual
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15 5A/250V AC, 5A/125V AC N300 DC-13 3A/24V DC
Timed Off-Delay
0.1s to 40min.
Fuses Input (external) Output (external)
500mA time lag 5A quick acting
Max. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Maximum Dropout Time
90ms
Indication LEDs
Red = Power on Red/Green = Timing/Output on
A removable cover allows access to the DIP switches and potentiometer which control the timing. The on-delay may be adjusted between 0.1 seconds to 40 minutes, through a series of 4 broad time ranges. The final adjustment is made by a potentiometer.
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
The Y1/Y2 terminals provide a check of contactors at machine power up. This is only relevant to certain special applications. For normal use these terminals should be linked. After all motion has ceased, the N.O. safety on contacts close, which may be used to energize electrically operated solenoid locking guard switches. In addition the N.C. contacts open to indicate the unit’s status. LED indication in the unit displays power, timer on, and outputs.
Features • • • • • •
Category 1 per EN 954-1 Stop category 1 NPN and PNP Inputs Timed off-delay 0.1s to 40 min. 2 N.O. Safety Outputs 1 N.C. Auxiliary Output
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1), DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20, DIN 0470
Conductor Size
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
Torque Settings—terminal screws
1N⋅m (8lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
360g (0.79lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA/cosϕ=3.5 220V AC/1.7A/375VA/cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half-sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-66
Safety Relays
Stop Motion Monitors CU2 Product Selection Description
Controller and Sensors
Sensor Voltage
Sensor Size
24V DC Supplied by Control Unit
Sensing Distance
12mm
3mm
18mm
5mm
30mm
10mm
Control Unit Voltage
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC
440R-S07279
110/230V AC
440R-S07280
24V AC/DC
440R-S07281
110/230V AC
440R-S07282
24V AC/DC
440R-S07283
110/230V AC
440R-S07284
Accessories Description
Voltage 24V DC
Control Unit only
110/230V AC
Size
Output Type
45mm
2 N.O. & 1 N.C.
12mm 24V DC Supplied by Control Unit
Sensor only
18mm 30mm
Replacement Fuse
Catalogue Number 440R-S07139 440R-S07140
NPN
872C-D3NN12-E2
PNP
872C-D3NP12-E2
NPN
872C-D5NN18-E2
PNP
872C-D5NP18-E2
NPN
872C-D10NN30-E2
PNP
872C-D10NP30-E2 440R-A31562
page 14-6
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 45.5 (1.79)
120 (4.72)
A1
A2
Y1
F1 110/230
K1
73 (2.87)
~
K2
Brown Black Blue N P N
K3
13 23
31
14 24
32
K1
K2
K2 G
Y2
K2
R
K1
K3
24VDC
Logic K3
Timer
Q1 K2
35mm DIN Rail Mounting Brown Black Blue P N P
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC K1 (aux) Start
K2 (aux) L1 L2 L3
Stop Proximity Sensor
Guard Closed & Locked
TLS1-GD2 54
A1
42
A2
41 12 22
53 34
21
33
11 K1
K2
A1 N
P
N 13 23 31 Y1 K2 K2
CU2 A2
P
N
M
P 14 24 32 Y2
Proximity Sensor
Aux
Ground
Guardlocking Safety Gates, Motion Sensors, Delayed Gate Release, Automatic Reset, Monitored Output
4-67
Safety Relays
Stop Motion Monitors CU2 Sensor Details Specifications
Description Bulletin 872C WorldProx inductive proximity sensors are selfcontained, general purpose, solid-state devices designed to sense the presence of ferrous and nonferrous metal objects without touching them. The switch body consists of a plastic face and a nickel-plated brass barrel. It meets NEMA 1, 2, 3, 4, 6P, 12, 13 and IP67 (IEC529) enclosure standards. The electronic circuitry is fully potted for protection against shock, vibration, and contamination. The CU2 is designed to operate with one normally-open NPN and one normally-open PNP inductive proximity sensor. The sensors translucent end caps which glow when the LED indicator is on, and is visible from almost every angle. The sensors contained in this section are some of the more popular size inductive proximity sensors. See the Rockwell Automation/AllenBradley Sensors catalogue for an extensive range of proximity sensors.
Dimensions—mm (inches)
Standards
IEC60947-5-2
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives and cULus
Operating Voltage
10-30 DC
Sensing Distance
2mm, 5mm or 10mm
Correction Factors Mild Steel Stainless Steel Brass Aluminium Copper
1.0 0.7 – 0.8 0.4 – 0.5 0.3 – 0.4 C – 0.3
Load Current
200mA
Outputs
NPN or PNP normally open
Leakage Current
£10mA
Voltage Drop
≤1.64V
Repeatability
≤2%
Hysteresis
≤10% typical
Indication LED
Red = Output energized
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Humidity
95% RH
Enclosure Protection
NEMA 1, 2, 3, 4, 6P, 12, 13, IP67
Electrical Protections
False pulse on power, transient noise, reverse polarity short circuit, overload.
Cable Size
3 x 1mm2 (18AWG) stranded
Cable Length
2mm2 (14AWG)
Case Material
Plastic faced, nickel plated brass barrel
Mounting
M12, M18 or M30 Flush fitting (shielded sensing)
Shock
30g, 11ms half sine
Vibration
1mm peak, 10 – 55Hz
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
A
360° Visible LED
C
B
2m (6.5ft) mm (inches) Thread Size
Shielded
M12 x 1 M18 x1 M30 x 1
4-68
A
B (max)
C (min)
50.8 (2.00)
46.7 (1.84)
12 (0.47) Yes
18 (0.71) 30 (1.18)
Safety Relays
Stop Motion Monitors CU2 Sensor Details Application Details Application Accessories
General time settings via DIP switches
Adjustable Time Delay PNP and NPN Inductive Sensors for use with CU2
Sensors detect when motion has ceased by monitoring two targets on moving metal parts. When motion has ceased the CU2 begins timing down. Once preset time limit has been passed the CU2 sends a signal allowing locked guard to be opened. NPN Inductive Sensor
DIP switches general time setting and the potentiometer fine tunes the time settings. Easy access 500mAT replaceable fuse.
A 1 2 <1 sec. to 10 secs. C
1 2 6 secs. to 5 mins. 10 secs.
1
D 2 48 secs. to 41mins.
B
C Rotary movement of machine
B 2 1 sec. to 39 secs.
Fine adjustment time setting via potentiometer
PNP Inductive Sensor
A
6mm max
1
D Fully CCW Maximum
6mm max
Fully CW Minimum
CU1 remote indication unit:
A remote indication unit to indicate the status of the circuit can be connected to the CU 1s R1, R2 and R3 connections.
Typical Wiring Diagrams NPN (Sinking)
PNP (Sourcing)
+
10-30V DC Brown
+
Load Black
+
10-30V DC
Brown Blue
+
-
Black Load Blue
4-69
Safety Relays
Back EMF Monitors CU3 Specifications
Description The CU3 is a control unit which detects stopped motion and is ideal for use with guard locking interlock switches. It is designed to interface with single or three-phase induction motors by measuring the drive voltage and the back electro-magnetic field (emf) of the motor. The front window of the CU3 can be popped off to reveal a replaceable fuse and a potentiometer. The potentiometer sets the threshold voltage measured at terminals Z1/Z2. The maximum threshold voltage is approximately 2.5V peak (potentiometer turned fully CCW). When the voltage at Z1/Z2 exceeds the threshold voltage, the safety outputs de-energize, and the safety contacts at terminals 13/14 and 23/24 open. When the supply to a motor is disconnected, motor speed will reduce to zero. During the run down period the back emf generated by the motor is monitored by the CU3. When the level of the back emf dips below the threshold voltage, the safety outputs close. This enables the output device (e.g., solenoid locking or unlocking switch) to be activated.
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TÜV
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110/230V AC
Power Consumption
< 4VA
Inputs
Z1- Z2 Motor voltage
Maximum Motor Voltage
500 V
Reset
Automatic/manual
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 1 N.C. Auxiliary
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300 AC-15 5A/250V AC, 5A/125V AC N300 DC-13 3A/24V DC
Fuses Power (internal, replace.) Motor Input (external) Output (external)
500mA time lag 500mA quick acting 5A quick acting
Max. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V
Indication LED
Red = Power on Red/Green = Timing/Output on Yellow = Fault Red = Motor running
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Operating Temperature
-10°C to +55°C (+14°F to +131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 DIN 0470
Terminal Protection
IP20 DIN 0470
Conductor Size
If the Z1/Z2 circuit opens, the CU3 goes into a fault state, indicated by the fault led. The fault must be corrected and the power to the CU3 cycled to clear the fault state.
1 x 2.5mm2 (14AWG) stranded 1 x 4mm2 (12AWG) solid
Installation Group
C in accordance with VDE 0110
Pollution Degree
3
The 24V DC version must be operated with an isolated supply. The CU3 is not intended for use with variable frequency drives.
Torque Settings—terminal screws
1N⋅m (8lb⋅in)
Case Material
Red Polycarbonate
Features
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
• • • •
Weight
510g (1.12lbs)
Electrical Life 220V AC/4A/880VA/cosϕ=3.5 220V AC/1.7A/375VA/cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Category 1 per EN 954-1 Stop category 1 2 N.O. safety outputs 1 N.C. auxiliary output
Application Details Adjust to suit machine rundown and motor sensitivity.
Replaceable Fuse
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 operations
Vibration
0.75mm (0.30in) peak, 10-55Hz
Shock
30g, 11ms half-sine
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-70
Safety Relays
Back EMF Monitors CU3 Product Selection Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
CU3 Power Supply
Catalogue Number
24V AC/DC ➊
440R-S35001
110V AC
440R-S35002
230V AC
440R-S35003
➊ The 440R-S35001 requires an isolated supply when operating on 24V DC.
Accessories Description
Page Number
Catalogue Number
500mA Fuse
14-6
440R-A31562
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 45 (1.77)
120 (4.72)
A1
A2
X2
X1
13 23
31
F1
73 (2.87)
Stop
24VDC
~
K1
K3
K2 K3
K2
K2
K1
K1 K1
K1
Sensitivity Power
35mm DIN Rail Mounting
Run K3 Fault
K2
Logic
Z1
Z2
Q1
K2
14 24
32
Typical Wiring Diagrams 24V DC K1 (aux) Start
K2 (aux) L1 L2 L3
Stop 500mA Fuse Guard Closed & Locked A1
A2
TLS1-GD2 54
42
Z1
13
23 31 X1 K2
41 12 22
53 34
21
33
11
A1
K2
CU3
A2
Z2
14 24 32 X2
K1 K2
500mA Fuse Aux
M Ground
Guardlocking Safety Gate, Back EMF Detection, Automatic Reset, Monitored Output
4-71
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR210P
Category
Description The MSR210P forms one of the base units for the modular Minotaur MSR200 family of monitoring safety relays. It can be combined with other modules of the MSR200 Series to configure a safety control system with numbers of inputs and outputs matching users’ specific application requirements, as well as diagnostic and networking capabilities. Up to 10 input modules and 2 output modules can be connected to one base unit by simply removing the terminator, included with each base unit, and connecting the ribbon cables of the neighboring module. The terminators must be inserted into the final input and output modules. The MSR210P has two inputs. Each input can be wired in one of four ways: 1 N.C., 2 N.C., 3 N.C., 1 N.C. & 1 N.O., or safety mat connections. The MSR210P uses pulsed input monitoring to check for faults to power, ground or between inputs before a demand is placed on the safety system. Connecting a single device (must be at least dual channel) to each input meets the requirements of category 4 per EN 954-1.
24V DC; 0.8 to 1.1 x rated voltage
Power Consumption
8W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C., 3 N.C./Safety Mat
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Max. Input Resistance Inputs Reset
1300ohms 3200ohms
Reset
Monitored Man. or Auto./Man.
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety; 1 N.O. Auxiliary 1 SS PNP Inputs Closed 1 SS PNP Outputs Active
➊ Output Utilization per IEC60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 3A/250V AC, 3A/125VAC P300, DC-13; 2.5A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
1x6A, 2x4A
Output, Solid State
20mA @ 30V DC
Fuses Output (external)
6A Slow Blow or 10A Quick Blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V DC
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 2mAu
Ribbon Cable Contacts
Gold plated
Power On Delay
3s
Response Time MSR210 MSR210 + Input Exp. Mod.
29ms 34ms + 6ms/module
Recovery Time
40-145 ms, depending on expansion modules used
Indication LEDs
Green = Input 1 Closed Red = Input 1 Open Green = Input 2 Closed Red = Input 2 Open Green = CH1 Output Active Green = CH2 Output Active Green = Power Green = Run (Outputs Active) Red = Stop (Outputs Off) + Diag. Amber = Ready (Inputs closed)
The MSR210P has the capability to perform external device monitoring (EDM). The EDM capability works in conjunction with the Reset option. The user selects EDM and the reset function by jumpers across terminals Y40, Y41 and Y42. The MSR210P has two semiconductor outputs designed to send status information to a PLC. Terminal Y33 indicates the inputs are closed (the Ready LED is on). Terminal Y32 indicates the outputs are active. The outputs include 2 normally open safety rated outputs and 1 normally closed auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Power Supply
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Short Circuit Protection
Inputs; SS Outputs
Features
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
• • • • • • • • •
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4–0.5 Nm (3.54–4.43lb²in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 Pulsed input monitoring 2 Input circuits: gate, E-Stop or safety mat 2 Safety outputs, 1 auxiliary output 2 Solid state outputs 10 Diagnostic LEDs Monitored or automatic reset Removable terminals
Specifications Standards
Approvals
4-72
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
280g (0.62lbs)
Electrical Life (w/Surge Supp.) 250VAC/6A/1250VA cosö=1 250VAC/2A/500VA cosö=1 250VAC/4A/1000VA cosö=0.35 250V AC/1.5A/1000VA cosö=0.6 24V DC/2A/48W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 300,000 operations 100,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 cycles
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TÜV
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR210P Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Solid State Outputs
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or 3 N.C. or Safety Mat
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
2 PNP
24V DC
440R-H23176
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 45 (1.77)
99 (4.72)
S12 S11
S32 S31
S51 S41
Y40
133 23 Y41 Y42
3 A1
13 23 31
K1 K2
114.5 (4.5)
14 24 32
Y1 S42
4 2
2
Y31
Y33
Y31 Y32 14
24
32
Typical Wiring Diagrams +24V DC
+24V DC
A1
S32 S41 S12 S51 S22
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
MSR210P
L1 L2 L3
Closed
A1 S11 S12 S21 S22 S31 S32
Termination or Expansion Cable
K1 K2
L1 L2 L3
K1 K2
Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32
Safety Gate
M
K1 K2
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
MSR210P A2 S42 S52 S62
A2 S62 S11 S42 S52 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32
M
K1 K2
Closed Reset
Closed Ground
Output Active
Inputs Closed
Ground
Safety Mat and Dual Channel Safety Gate, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Two Triple Channel Inputs, Automatic Reset, Monitored Output +24V DC
Fuses Safety Gate Closed A1 S41 S12 S22 S32 S51
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
Termination or Expansion Cable
+24V DC
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Gate L1 L2 L3
Closed A1 S41 S12 S22 S32 S51 Termination or Expansion Cable
K1
MSR210P
K2
Safety Gate
K1 K2
Closed
M
Reset Output Active
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR210P K2
A2 S11 S42 S52 S62 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32
A2 S11 S42 S52 S62 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32
Ground
Output Inputs Active Closed
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Gate
Fuses
Safety Gate
Termination or Expansion Cable
Termination or Expansion Cable
Fuses
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Mat
Inputs Closed
Two Dual Channel Safety Gates, Monitored Manual Reset, No Monitored Output
M Safety Gate
K1 K2
Closed Ground
Output Active
Inputs Closed
Two Single Channel Safety Gates, Automatic Reset, No Monitored Output
Diagnostics – Red Stop LED blinks Blink Rate
Description
2
Change in Y40/Y41/Y42 circuit during operation.
3
Fault in external feedback circuit Y1-Y2. Clear fault and cycle power to reset the module.
Continuous
Internal fault in base or expansion module
4-73
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR211P Category
Description The MSR211P forms one of the base units for the modular Minotaur MSR200 family of monitoring safety relays. It can be combined with other modules of the MSR200 Series to configure a safety control system with numbers of inputs and outputs matching users’ specific application requirements, as well as diagnostic and networking capabilities. Up to 10 input modules and 2 output modules can be connected to one base unit by simply removing the terminator, included with each base unit, and connecting the ribbon cables of the neighboring module. The terminators must be inserted into the final input and output modules. The MSR211P has two inputs. Each input can be wired in one of three ways: 1N.C., 2 N.C., or 2 PNP connections from a light curtain. The MSR211P does not perform cross fault monitoring, and would not detect a short across the inputs of a 2 N.C. input. When connected to light curtains, the light curtain must perform the cross fault detection.
24V DC; 0.8 to 1.1 x rated voltage
Power Consumption
8W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C., light curtain
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Max. Input Resistance Inputs Reset
1300ohms 3200ohms
Reset
Monitored Man. or Auto./Man.
Outputs
2 N.O. safety; 1 N.C. auxiliary 1 SS PNP Inputs Closed 1 SS PNP Outputs Active
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 6A/250V AC DC-1: 6A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15; 3A/250V AC, 3A/125VAC P300, DC-13; 2.5A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
1x6A, 2x4A
Output, Solid State
20mA @ 30V DC
Fuses Output (external)
6A slow blow or 10A quick blow
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V DC
Contact Material
AgSnO2 with 2 micron gold plating
Ribbon Cable Contacts
Gold plated
Power On Delay
3s
Response Time MSR211 MSR211+ MSR221
25ms 30ms+2.4ms per MSR221
Recovery Time
40-145 ms, depending on expansion modules used
Indication LEDs
Green = Input 1 closed Red = Input 1 open Green = Input 2 closed Red = Input 2 open Green = CH1 output active Green = CH2 output active Green = Power Green = Run (outputs active) Red = Stop (outputs off) + diagnostics Amber = Ready (inputs closed)
The MSR211P has the capability to perform external device monitoring (EDM). The EDM capability works in conjunction with the reset option. The user selects EDM and the reset function by jumpers across terminals Y40, Y41 and Y42. The MSR211P has two semiconductor outputs designed to send status information to a PLC. Terminal Y33 indicates the inputs are closed (the Ready LED is on). Terminal Y32 indicates the outputs are active. The outputs include 2 normally open safety rated outputs and 1 normally closed auxiliary output. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Power Supply
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Short Circuit Protection
Input; SS outputs
Features
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
• • • • • • • •
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4–0.5 Nm (3.54–4.43lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 2 Input circuits: light curtain, gate, or E-Stop inputs 2 Safety outputs, 1 auxiliary output 2 Solid state outputs 10 Diagnostic LEDs Monitored or automatic reset Removable terminals
Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus & TUV
4-74
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
280g (0.62lbs)
Electrical Life 222V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 cycles
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR211P Product Selection Inputs
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Solid State Outputs
Power Supply
Catalogue Number
Two Inputs 1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or Light Curtain
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
2
24V DC
440R-H23177
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 45 (1.77)
99 (3.89)
S12 S11
S20 S21
S32 S31
S51 S41
Y40
13
23 31
14
24 32
13 23 Y41 Y42
33 A1
K1
114.5 (4.5)
K2 Y1 S42
Y2 S50
S34 S62
Y31
Y32
Y31 Y32 Y33 Y30 14 24
Y33
A2 32
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
Termination or Expansion Cable
S32
A1 S12
Termination or Expansion Cable
Termination or Expansion Cable
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR211P
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2
S32
A1 S12
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
K1
K2
M
K1 K2 Reset Ground
Output Active
Safety Gate
Safety Gate
Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32
Closed
L1 L2 L3
MSR211P
K2 A2 S42 S62
Termination or Expansion Cable
+24V DC
+24V DC
A2 S42 S62
Light Curtain and Dual Channel Safety Gate, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
M
K1 K2
Closed
Reset Ground
Inputs Closed
Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32
Output Active
Inputs Closed
Light Curtain and Single Channel Safety Gate, Monitored Manual Reset, No Monitoring Output
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2
S32
A1 S12
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
Termination or Expansion Cable
Termination or Expansion Cable
+24V DC
MSR211P
L1 L2 L3
K1
Safety Gate
K2 A2 S42 S62
Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32 K1 K2
Closed Ground
Output Active
M
Inputs Closed
Light Curtain and Dual Channel Safety Gate, Automatic Reset, Monitored Output Diagnostics – Red Stop LED blinks Blink Rate
Description
2
Change in Y40/Y41/Y42 circuit during operation.
3
Fault in external feedback circuit Y1-Y2. Clear fault and cycle power to reset the module.
Continuous
Internal fault in base or expansion module
4-75
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR220P Specifications Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and BG
Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Power Supply
24V DC from the base unit
Power Consumption
2W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C., or 3 N.C. 1 N.C. and 1 N.O. or Mat
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Maximum Input Resistance
1300ohms
Indication LEDs
Green = Input 1 Closed Red = Input 1 Open Green = Input 2 Closed Red = Input 2 Open
Description The MSR220P is an input expansion module for the modular Minotaur MSR200 family of monitoring safety relays. It can be connected to either the MSR210P or MSR211P to provide additional inputs. Up to 10 input modules can be connected to a base unit by simply removing the terminator, included with each base unit, and connecting the ribbon cables of the neighboring module. The connecting ribbon cable provides power to the MSR220P as well as a check on its status. The terminators must be inserted into the final output module. The input modules to a base unit can be either MSR220P or MSR221P in any combination or order. The MSR220P has two independent inputs, which can be wired in one of five ways: 1N.C., 2 N.C., 3 N.C., 1 N.C. and 1 N.O. or a safety mat. When used with the MSR210 base unit, the inputs to the MSR220 are continuously pulse-checked for shorts to power, ground and across inputs. Connecting a single device (must be at least dual channel) to each input meets the requirements of category 4 per EN594-1. Four LEDs provide status information on the inputs. Green indicates the input is closed and red indicates the input is open.
Features • • • • • •
Category 4 per EN 954-1 Stop category 0 17.5mm DIN rail housing 2 Input circuits: gate, e-stop or safety Mat 4 Diagnostic LEDs Removable terminals
4-76
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90%RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
Torque Settings—terminal screws
0.4–0.5 Nm (3.54–4.43lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
95g (0.21lbs)
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR220P Product Selection Inputs
Catalogue Number
Two Independent Inputs, 1 N.C., 2 N.C., 3 N.C., 1 N.C. and 1 N.O. or Safety Mat
440R-H23178
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 17.5 (0.68)
99 (3.89)
S12
S22
S32
Input 1 MSR220P 114.5 (4.5)
Input 2 S42
S52
S62
Typical Wiring Diagrams
S12 S22 S32
MSR 220P
MSR 220P
S42 S52 S62
S42 S52 S62
E-Stop S11 S21 S31
Safety Mat
Safety Gate
Safety Gate
Termination or Expansion Cable
Closed
Closed
S12 S22 S32
+24V DC
Dual Channel
Fuses
A1 S11 S12 S22 S32 S41 S51
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR210P K2
A2 S42 S52 S62 S21 S31 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32
M
K1 K2
E-Stop
Single Channel
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Mat
S51 S41 S21 S11
Reset
Ground
Output Inputs Active Closed
MSR220P Expanding an MSR210P
S12 S22 S32
Closed
S12 S22 S32
MSR 220P
S42 S52 S62
E-Stop Sipha Sensor
A1 S12
MSR 220P
Closed S42 S52 S62
S11 S21 S31
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2
Dual Channel
S32
S31 Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Termination or Safety Gate Expansion Cable Gate
Closed
+24V DC
Single Channel Safety Gate
Triple Channel
S31 S21 S11
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR211P K2
A2 S42 S62 S11 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32 K1 K2
E-Stop
M
Reset Ground
Output Inputs Active Closed
MSR220P Expanding an MSR211P
4-77
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR221P Specifications
Description The MSR221P is an input expansion module for the modular Minotaur MSR200 family of monitoring safety relays. It can be connected to either the MSR210P or MSR211P to provide additional inputs.
Standards
IEC/EN60204-1, ISOTR12100, ISO13849-1 (EN 954-1), B11.19, AS4024.1
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, C-Tick, TUV, cULus
Power Supply
24V DC from the base unit
Power Consumption
2W
Safety Inputs
1 N.C., 2 N.C., Light curtain
Input Simultaneity
Infinite
Maximum Input Resistance
1300ohms
Indication LEDs
Green = Input 1 Closed Red = Input 1 Open Green = Input 2 Closed Red = Input 2 Open
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90%RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Up to 10 input modules can be connected to a base unit by simply removing the terminator, included with each base unit, and connecting the ribbon cables of the neighboring module. The connecting ribbon cable provides power to the MSR220P as well as a check on its status. The terminators must be inserted into the final output module. The input modules to a base unit can be either MSR220P or MSR221P in any combination or order.
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
Torque Settings—terminal screws
0.4–0.5 Nm (3.54–4.43lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
The MSR221P has two independent inputs, which can be wired in one of three ways: 1N.C., 2 N.C. or a light curtain. When connected in the 2 N.C. configuration, the MSR221P does not perform cross fault monitoring (i.e., checks for shorts between the 2 inputs).
Weight
95g (0.21lbs)
Four LEDs provide status information on the inputs. Green indicates the input is closed and red indicates the input is open.
Features • • • •
17.5mm DIN rail housing 2 Input circuits: gate, e-stop or light curtains 4 Diagnostic LEDs Removable terminals
4-78
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR221P Product Selection Inputs
Catalogue Number
Two Independent Inputs 1 N.C. or 2 N.C. or Light Curtain
440R-H23179
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 17.5 (0.68)
99 (3.89)
S12
S20
S32
Input 1 MSR221P 114.5 (4.5)
Input 2 S42
S50
S62
Typical Wiring Diagrams Closed
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2 L1 L2 L3
S12 S22 S32
S12 S20 S32
MSR221P
MSR221P
A1 S12
S32
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
MSR211P K1 K2
S42 S50 S62
Out 1 Out 2 Light Curtain
Closed S42 S50 S62
A2 S42 S62 S11 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32
Safety Gate
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Gate
+24V DC
M
K1 K2
E-Stop Reset Ground
Output Inputs Active Closed
Safety Mat and Dual Channel E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
S12 S22 S32
S12 S20 S32
MSR221P
Closed
Fuses
A1 S41 S12 S22 S32 S51
MSR221P
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
MSR210P
Termination or Expansion Cable
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2
Safety Gate
Closed
L1 L2 L3
K1 K2
S42 S50 S62
Out 1 Out 2 Light Curtain
Closed Safety Gate
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Gate
+24V DC
S42 S50 S62
A2 S11 S42 S52 S62 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32 K1 K2
E-Stop
M
Reset Ground
Output Inputs Active Closed
Light Curtain, Dual Channel Safety Gates and E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
4-79
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR230P Specifications
Description The MSR230P is an output expansion module for the modular Minotaur MSR200 family of monitoring safety relays. It can be connected to either the MSR210P or MSR211P base unit to provide additional outputs. Up to 2 MSR230P output modules can be connected to one base unit by simply removing the terminator, included with each base unit, and connecting the ribbon cables of the neighboring module. The connecting ribbon cable provides power to the MSR230P as well as a check on its status. The terminators must be inserted into the final output module.
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus, & TÜV
Category
Cat. 4 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Power Supply
24V DC from the base unit
Power Consumption
1.5W
Fuses Output (external)
6A Slow Blow or 10A Quick Blow
Outputs
4 N.O. Safety
Output Utilization per IEC60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 6A/250V AC DC-1: 6A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 3A/250V AC, 3A/125VAC P300, DC-13 2.5A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
1x6A, 2x4A
Output, Solid State
20mA @ 30V DC
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10ma/10V DC
Contact Material
AgSnO2 + 2µAu
Response Time
Does not add additional response time to base module
Indication LEDs
Green = CH1 Output Active Green = CH2 Output Active
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
The MSR230P has four safety rated outputs that work in parallel with the safety outputs of the base unit. When the output of the base unit is activated, the outputs of the MSR230P are also activated.
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90% RH
The outputs are 4 normally open safety rated outputs. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function.
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
Features
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4–0.5 Nm (3.54–4.43lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
• 4 N.O. safety outputs • 2 Diagnostic LEDs • Removable terminals
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
215g (0.47lbs)
Electrical Life 222V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
2,000,000 cycles
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-80
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR230P Product Selection Safety Outputs
Catalogue Number
4 N.O.
440R-H23180
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 22.5 (0.88)
99 (3.89)
13
23
43
33
13 23 33 43
Ch1 MSR230P
114.5 (4.5)
Ch2 14 24 34 44
14
24
34
44
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Closed
13 23 33 43
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
MSR230P
Termination
Fuses
A1 S41 S12 S22 S32 S51
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Gate
+24V DC
13 23 33 43
MSR230P
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR210P K2
A2 S11 S42 S52 S62 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32 K1 K2
E-Stop
14 24 34 44
14 24 34 44
K3 K4
K7 K8
K5 K6
M
K3 K10
Reset Ground
Relays, contactors solenoids, valves, etc.
Output Inputs Active Closed
Dual Channel Safety Gate and E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
Termination or Expansion Cable
Light Curtain Out 1 Out 2 A1 S12
S32
Fuses Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
13 23 33 43
MSR230P
13 23 33 43
MSR230P
Termination
+24V DC
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR211P K2
A2 S42 S62
Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32 K1 K2
E-Stop
14 24 34 44
14 24 34 44
K3 K4
K7 K8
K5 K6
Reset Ground
Output Inputs Active Closed
K3 K10
M
Relays, contactors solenoids, valves, etc.
Light Curtain and Dual Channel E-Stop, Monitored Manual Reset, Monitored Output
4-81
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR238 Specifications
Description The MSR238 is an time-delayed output expansion module for the modular Minotaur MSR200 family of monitoring safety relays. It can be connected to either the MSR210 or MSR211 base unit or to the MSR230output module to provide time-delayed outputs. Up to 2 output modules can be connected to one base unit by simply removing the terminator, included with each base unit, and connecting the ribbon cables of the neighboring module. The connecting ribbon cable provides power to the MSR238 as well as a check on its status. The terminators must be inserted into the final output module. The MSR238 has two safety rated outputs that work in parallel with the safety outputs of the base unit. When the output of the base unit is activated, the outputs of the MSR238 are the user-selected time delay expires. The time delay is set by connecting jumpers to the wiring terminals. The outputs are 2 normally open safety rated outputs. The safety outputs have independent and redundant internal contacts to help ensure the safety function. The delayed normally closed output is an auxiliary signal that must only be used to indicate the status of the MSR238.
Features • • • • • •
Category 3 per EN 954-1 Stop category 1 2 Diagnostic LEDs Removable terminals 2 N.O. Delayed Safety Outputs 1 N.C. Delayed Aux. Output
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Approvals
C-Tick, CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TUV
Category
Cat. 3 per EN954-1 (ISO13849-1)
Power Supply
24V DC from the base unit
Power Consumption
2.5W
Fuses Output (Ext. Recommended)
6A Slow Blow or 10A Quick Blow
Outputs
2 N.O. Safety 1 N.C. Auxiliary
Output Utilization per IEC 60947-4-1 (Resistive)
AC-1: 6A/250V AC DC-1: 6A/24V DC
➊ Output Utilization per IEC 60947-5-1 (Inductive)
B300, AC-15 3A/250V AC, 3A/125VAC P300, DC-13 2.5A/24V DC
Thermal Current (non switching)
1x6A, 2x4A
Min. Switched Current/Voltage
10mA/10V DC
Contact Material
AgSnO2 with 2 micron gold plating
Indication LEDs
Green = CH1 Output Active Green = CH2 Output Active
Impulse Withstand Voltage
2500V
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 141°F)
Humidity
95% RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Maximum Conductor Size
0.2 – 2.5mm2 (24-12 AWG)
Torque Settings—term. screws
0.4 – 0.5 Nm (3.54 – 4.43 lb²in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
215 (0.47lbs)
Electrical Life 222V AC/4A/880VA cosϕ=0.35 220V AC/1.7A/375VA cosϕ=0.6 30V DC/2A/60W 10V DC/0.01A/0.1W
100,000 operations 500,000 operations 1,000,000 operations 2,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
10,000,000 cycles
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
➊ See Output Ratings on page 1-29 for details. Consult factory for ratings not shown.
4-82
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR238 Product Selection Delayed Safety Outputs
Delayed Auxiliary Outputs
Catalogue Number
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
440R-H23196
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 99 (3.89)
22.5 (0.88)
17 Y3
27 Y6
Y5
35 Y4 17 27 35
Ch1
MSR238
114.5 (4.5)
Ch2 Y3
Y7
18 28 36 Y4
Y8
18
28
36
+24V DC Closed
Fuses
Termination or Expansion Cable
Safety Gate
6 sec delay shown
A1 S41 S12 S22 S32
S51
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
17 23
35
Termination
Typical Wiring Diagram
L1 L2 L3
K1
MSR238
MSR210
K2 A2
S11 S42 S52
S62 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34
Y1
Y2 14
24 32
Y3
Y4
Y7
Y8
K1 K2
E-Stop
Reset
Ground
18
28
36
K7 K8
K9
M
Relays, contactors solenoids, valves, etc.
Output Inputs Active Closed
Application Details (Typical) Apply jumpers (links) on the terminals identified to achieve the desired off delay. Delay (s)
Jumper
Jumper
Delay (s)
Jumper
Jumper
Delay (s)
Jumper
Jumper Y3-Y8
0
None
None
8
Y3-Y6
Y3-Y7
60
Y4-Y5
0.5
Y3-Y5
None
9
Y4-Y5
Y3-Y7
80
None
Y4-Y7
1
Y4-Y6
10
None
Y4-Y8
100
Y3-Y5
Y4-Y7
1.5
Y3-Y6
15
Y4-Y6
Y4-Y8
120
Y4-Y6
Y4-Y7
2
Y4-Y5
18
Y3-Y6
Y4-Y8
160
Y3-Y6
Y4-Y7
3
Y3-Y5
Y4-Y6
21
Y4-Y5
Y4-Y8
200
Y4-Y5
Y4-Y7
4
Y3-Y6
Y4-Y5
26
None
Y3-Y8
250
Y3-Y5, Y4-Y6
Y4-Y7
5
None
Y3-Y7
30
Y3-Y5
Y3-Y8
300
Y3-Y6, Y4-Y5
Y4-Y7
6
Y3-Y5
Y3-Y7
40
Y4-Y6
Y3-Y8
7
Y4-Y6
Y3-Y7
50
Y3-Y6
Y3-Y8
4-83
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR240P Specifications
Description The MSR240P is a communications module for the modular Minotaur MSR200 family of monitoring safety relays. It can be connected to either the MSR210P or MSR211P base unit to provide diagnostic and status information to remote devices like the MSR245P display. The MSR240P is connected in place of the terminator plug to the free bus connector of the Basic Module or the last connected Expansion Module, depending on the system configuration. Data transfer and power supply are routed through the same bus cable and connectors. A green LED in the front of the MSR240P indicates the presence of supply voltage. A blinking yellow LED signals data exchange activity through the RS232/RS485 interface. The transmission rate for the RS485 can be set with the help of two DIP switch segments at 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 baud. The station address can be set by 5 additional DIP switch segments. Up to 32 stations can be connected onto a single RS485 network. The connected supervisory monitoring or data acquisition system can process and store the data, display it, and record the reason causing a shutdown, along with the time and date of each such occurrence. This makes fault diagnosis much easier.
Features • • • • • •
Data Transmission RS232 or RS485 Galvanically Isolated interfaces 17.5mm DIN housing 2 Diagnostic LEDs Removable terminals
4-84
Standards
IEC/EN60204-1, ISOTR12100
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives
Power Supply
24V DC from the base unit
Power Consumption
2W
Protocols
RS232 or RS485
Transmission Rates
2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90%RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–4mm2 (24–12 AWG)
Torque Settings—terminal screws
0.4–0.5 Nm (3.54–4.43lb•in)
Case Material
Polyamide PA 6.6
Mounting
35mm DIN rail
Weight
90g (0.20lbs)
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR240P Product Selection Interface Type
Catalogue Number
RS232
440R-H23181
RS485
440R-H23182
RS232 + RS485
440R-H23183
Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram 17.5 (0.68)
RS485 RS232
B Gnd TxD Gnd
A
T
99 (3.89)
MSR240P
114.5 (4.5)
Typical Wiring Diagrams
<_ + _
manual reset output active monitoring active EDM active
MSR245
T
+
_
24V DC
Closed
Fuses L1 L2 L3
A1 S41 S12 S22 S32 S51
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
13 23 33 43
MSR230P MSR210P
A
B
T
Termination or Safety Gate Expansion Cable
+24V DC
TxD
Gnd Gnd
MSR240P
A2 S11 S42 S52 S62 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32 K1 K2
E-Stop
K1 K2
14 24 34 44 K3 K4
K5 K6
M
Reset Ground
Output Inputs Active Closed
4-85
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR245P Specifications
Description The MSR245P is a display module for the modular Minotaur MSR200 family of monitoring safety relays. The MSR245P Display Module is interfaced to an MSR200 system through an MSR240P Communication Module, using the RS232 interface, with a two-core shielded cable. The display is refreshed approximately every six seconds. Using the four-line LCD display and the three function key-switches, the configuration of external circuits, and the on-off status of all inputs of the system can be checked and interrogated. The microprocessor, in the base module, scans all the inputs starting with the base module and working its way to the left. The first scanned input is “base module input 1”. The last scanned input would be input 2 of the module furthest from the base module. The display shows the lowest scanned input that de-energized the safety outputs (safety outputs open). After the lowest scanned input is cleared, the display will refresh and show the next input which is open. In this way, each open input circuit can be troubleshot and closed. When all inputs are closed, the user can scroll through the display. The MSR245P requires 24V DC supply voltage. The power supply input as well as the RS232 are galvanically isolated from the MSR200 system, but can be connected non isolated if required.
Features • • • • • •
Recalls and displays system information Simple menu selection Stores details of last registered stop occurrence Clearly readable backlit display Back-lit 4-line alphanumeric display RS232 interface
4-86
Standards
IEC/EN60204-1, ISOTR12100
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives
Power Supply
24V DC
Power Consumption
0.5W
Interface
RS232
Pollution Degree
2
Operating Temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to 131°F)
Humidity
90%RH
Enclosure Protection
IP40 (NEMA 1)
Terminal Protection
IP20
Conductor Size
0.2–2.5mm2 (24–14 AWG)
Torque Settings—terminal screws
0.4– 0.5Nm (3.54–4.43lb•in)
Mounting
Panel cut out or 35mm DIN rail (option)
Weight
250g (0.55lbs)
Vibration
10-55 Hz, 0.35mm
Shock
10g, 16ms, 100 shocks
Example Messages Bold = standard text Not Bold = text depending on function System menu: Manual/auto reset Output active/deactivated Monitoring active/device ready EDM active/deactivated (feedback circuit) Input configuration: Input Module 4 MSR220 emergency off Input 1: 2-channel Input 2: 1-channel Functions/Interruption messages: Input Module 4 Input 2 causes interrupt safety mats or cross-fault causes interrupt transmission fault fault EDM loop fault Y40 loop malfunction Output active/inactive
Safety Relays
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays Minotaur MSR245P Product Selection Description
Catalogue Number
Display Module
440R-H23184
DIN Rail Base Adaptor Kit
440R-H23185
Dimensions—mm (inches)
<_
MSR245P 72 (2.83)
manual reset output active monitoring active EDM active
+ _
16 (0.62) 68 (2.67) 57 (2.24)
144 (5.66)
Front cut out: 68 x 138 Optional DIN rail mounting base EN 50022-35 x 7.5 Typical Wiring Diagram MSR245P
<_ + _
manual reset output active monitoring active EDM active
T
+
_
24V DC
Closed
Fuses L1 L2 L3
A1 S41 S12 S22 S32 S51
Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
13 23 33 43
MSR230P
A
B
T
Termination or Safety Gate Expansion Cable
+24V DC
TxD
Gnd Gnd
K1
MSR210P MSR240P A2 S11 S42 S52 S62 S21 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34 Y1 Y2 14 24 32 K1 K2
E-Stop
K2
14 24 34 44 K3 K4
K5 K6
M
Reset Ground
Output Inputs Active Closed
4-87
Safety Relays
Notes
4-88
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Rotary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Solenoid Release Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Electronic Timed-Delay Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Stopped Motion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Exchange Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Bolt Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Access/Chain Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Slamlock Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Slamlock Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Valve Lock, 3 Port Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Miniature Valve Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Switchgear Adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Overview
CNC precision cut keys Interlocking and Control Solutions Trapped Key Interlocks—Why Use Them? Based upon the premise that no one key can be in two places at once, key interlock systems can be configured to ensure a predetermined sequence of events takes place or that hazards have been reduced before operators can become exposed to them. It is a mechanical system and is therefore widely used in applications including those where the location of plant, environment or explosive atmospheres make the use of electrical interlock systems unsuitable or expensive to install. In addition, unique coding can be provided, lending to a greater degree of security and tamperresistance. Why Prosafe? In order to derive the full benefits from a trapped key interlocking system its components must be totally practical, easily maintainable and readily available. Prosafe’s unique key and code barrel gives the ability for even complicated interlocking systems and spare parts to be ordered from our worldwide network of distributors—fast! A first for trapped key interlocks.
Tested to 100,000 operations 4. Custom colour/text keys and ID tags—nominal extra charge. 5. A complete range of isolators, key exchange, miniature valve interlocks and gate interlocks—all using the same key principle. CE Marking—Tested and Approved Only Prosafe products carry the prestigious BG mark. A sign of safety, independently tested by the German Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Arbeitssicherneit, ‘BIA’. Additional tests for valve interlocks include Lloyds Certificate for fire test and salt-mist resistance. Switches and sensors carry the necessary ‘BASEEFA’ approvals while isolator switches carry UL, CSA and TUV approvals. Over 100,000 Operations Prosafe products have been subjected to independent, exhaustive testing. With only a small amount of lubricant added infrequently, keys were inserted, rotated and removed at a rate of 12 times per minute. After 100,000 operations (at 10 operations a day this is equivalent to 27 years) the unit was functioning satisfactorily and most importantly would ‘pass’ only the original or equivalent new key. No incorrect keys could operate the lock, underlining the unit’s integrity as well as longevity.
5 Unique Prosafe Benefits Compare the following to other trapped key manufacturers: 1. All stainless interlocking and coded parts—including the code barrel and internal components at no extra cost. 2. Weather cap as standard—no extra charge for dust caps and seals. 3. Standard red colour-coded key and ID tags—at no extra charge.
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-2
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Overview The Advantage 90° Key Operation
Key Trapped Key Free
Weather cap supplied as standard with colour coded tagging.
Code barrels: Factory assembled to ensure safety integrity. Internal components are captive within the code barrel.
Rugged and reliable push-pull operation no springs or cams to fail. Tamper-resistant screws
Stainless Steel Construction
Prosafe Keys Compact, solid and sturdy keys supplied with dust seals and coded tagging. Optional colours/text are available.
5-3
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Overview Designing an Interlocking System Plant and Machinery Interlocking Primary hazards (Power isolation)
Auxiliary hazards
Key control element
Guarded area access
Ancillary functions
Bolt lock for sliding guards
A
B
A B
Rotary key switch
Timed delay unit
A
B
Comments Consider factors such as run down and environmental factors such as hazardous (explosive) atmospheres. Use EEX isolator and timed delay units where necessary.
C
C
D
C
Access lock for general duty sliding, hinge and lift off guards
Bolt lock off device for grounding and capacitive discharge
Consider if the hazard is removed immediately i.e., a) Machine run on due to momentum. b) Pressurization of hydraulic or pneumatic systems. c) Stored energy such as capacitance or static electricity. d) Temperature, either hot or cold, creating a hazard.
Required when more than one hazard element needs isolation or more than one exposure/access point interlocking. Comments Consider sequentially interlocking all primary sources of hazard so all are eliminated. In turn, releasing a single key to input in key control element. Additional monitoring, isolation or control functions such as switches or solenoid locks may be incorporated at this stage to eliminate other elements.
C
3 Port spool valve
Chain interlock for large or poorly aligned sliding, hinge and lift off guards To gain access to the danger zone.
C
D
Comments Consider 2 key versions to provide a) Personnel key exchange types to prevent operator lock-in (whole body access applications only). b) Lock out devices requiring 2 keys in from different sources to enable controlled access.
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-4
Rotary key switch
C
Solenoid key release unit coupled to temperature or pressure switch sensors
D
3 Port spool valve
Consider removal of all power providing kinetic energy to the system i.e., electrical motors, pressurized air, etc.
A
Required when additional functions such as programming/machine resetting are necessary. Comments Two key versions required at access points to facilitate this feature.
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Overview Illustrated Principles of Trapped Key Interlocking
C
C A ETU Isolator with timed delay key release
ABB KEX Trapped key ‘A’ Locking off ETU, Release access door lock, key ‘B’.
B SBL ‘B’ key in to retract bolt from guard door.
BC DAL ‘B’ key in then ‘C’ key out to open guard door.
C RKS To energize robot teach mode.
Sequence of Operation 1. The ETU isolator has two keys. One is a non removable key. The other key (a ‘A’ coded key) can be removed after a timed duration, which is set by a potentiometer inside the ETU isolator. Turn the non removable key to turn the hazardous machine motion off and start the timer. When the time expires, the Key Free LED turns ON. Remove the ‘A’ key.
5. Turn the second ‘B’ key 90° and remove it from the KEX. Removal of this key also traps the ‘A’ key in the KEX and prevents the restarting of the machine.
2. Insert the ‘A’ key into the Key Exchange Unit (KEX) and turn it 90°.
7. Turn the ‘C’ key 90° and remove the ‘C’ key. Rotate the access handle to allow full body entry into the hazard zone.
3. Turn one of the ‘B’ keys 90° and remove it from the KEX. This traps the ‘A’ key in the KEX and prevents the restarting of the machine.
8. Take the ‘C’ key into the hazard zone, insert it into the rotary key switch (RKS) and turn it 90° to send a signal to the machine control system, to allow the machine to operate in a slow or teach mode.
4. Insert the ‘B’ key into the Single-key Bolt Lock (SBL) and turn it 90° to gain partial body access to the machine.
6. Insert the ‘B’ key into the Dual-key Access Lock (DAL) and turn it 90°.
9. Reverse the process to return the machine to full operational mode.
Bill of Materials Item 1
Quantity 1
2
1
3 4 5 6
1 1 1 1
Description Single Key Time Delayed with an B Primary Key Key Exchange Unit, A Primary Key, Two B Secondary Keys Trapped (included) Single Bolt Lock, B Primary Key Dual Access Lock, B Primary Key, C Secondary Key Trapped (included) Rotary Key Switch, C Primary Code Barrel A Key
Catalogue Number 440T-MSTUE110A 440T-MKEXE110A0B0B 440T-MSBLE100B 440T-MDALE100B0C 440T-MRKSE100C 440T-AKEYE100A
Note: Primary keys must be ordered separately, when not provided for by a previous sequential trapped key. In the example above, only one primary key must be ordered separately. The remaining primary keys are provided by a previous sequential secondary (trapped) key.
5-5
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Overview Code Selection Ordering Prosafe trapped key products requires codes to be included in the catalogue number. • The codes are added to the end of the catalogue number. • Each code must be two characters in length. • Single letter codes must be preceded by a 0 (zero). • The first code(s) is the primary code and the last code(s), if necessary, are the secondary code(s). • Primary codes do not include the key. The key must be ordered separately or must come from a previous operation. • Secondary codes come complete with a key, as the key is trapped in the code barrel. • Use the table on page 5-7 to select and track codes. Ordering Example 1:
440T
M
DALE 10
➊
➋ Two character Secondary code (Key included)
Two character Primary Code (Key not included) Product Feature Product Type (Dual-key Access Lock) M = Machine Interlock A = Accessory Bulletin Number (T = Trapped Key)
Order catalogue number 440TMDALE100A0B to get a Dual key Access Lock with an “A” primary code and a “B” secondary code, with a “B” key included. Ordering Example #2:
440T
M
KEXE 16
➊
➊
➋
➋
➋ Two character Secondary code (Key included)
Two character Secondary code (Key included) Two character Secondary code (Key included) Two character Primary Code (Key not included) Two character Primary Code (Key not included) Product Feature Product Type (Dual-key Access Lock) M = Machine Interlock A = Accessory Bulletin Number (T = Trapped Key)
Order catalogue number 440TMKEXE160A0B0C0C0C to get a key exchange unit with “A” and “B” primary codes and three “C” secondary codes. The “A “and “B” keys are not included. The three “C” keys, which are trapped in the secondary code barrels, are included.
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-6
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Overview Key Coding Below is an example reference guide that is useful in selecting and tracking codes. Start down the 0A column as the lower codes (typically 0A to ZA) are stocked. The chart continues on to ZZ. Note that there only 25 letters used—Q is not used.
0A
Codes are ordered with upper case letters. Labels with two letter codes will show the first letter in upper case and the second letter in lower case.
0B 0C 0D
Start Down
Code
Application Application Application Application Application Application Application & date Code & date Code & date Code & date Code & date Code & date Code & date
0A
Aa
Ab
Ac
Ad
Ae
Af
0B
Ba
Bb
Bc
Bd
Be
Bf
0C
Ca
Cb
Cc
Cd
Ce
Cf
0D
Da
Db
Dc
Dd
De
Df
0E
Ea
Eb
Ec
Ed
Ee
Ef
0F
Fa
Fb
Fc
Fd
Fe
Ff
0G
Ga
Gb
Gc
Gd
Ge
Gf
0H
Ha
Hb
Hc
Hd
He
Hf
0I
Ia
Ib
Ic
Id
Ie
If
0J
Ja
Jb
Jc
Jd
Je
Jf
0K
Ka
Kb
Kc
Kd
Ke
Kf
0L
La
Lb
Lc
Ld
Le
Lf
0M
Ma
Mb
Mc
Md
Me
Mf
0N
Na
Nb
Nc
Nd
Ne
Nf
0O
Oa
Ob
Oc
Od
Oe
Of
0P
Pa
Pb
Pc
Pd
Pe
Pf
0R
Ra
Rb
Rc
Rd
Re
Rf
0S
Sa
Sb
Sc
Sd
Se
Sf
0T
Ta
Tb
Tc
Td
Te
Tf
0U
Ua
Ub
Uc
Ud
Ue
Uf
0V
Va
Vb
Vc
Vd
Ve
Vf
0W
Wa
Wb
Wc
Wd
We
Wf
0X
Xa
Xb
Xc
Xd
Xe
Xf
0Y
Ya
Yb
Yc
Yd
Ye
Yf
0Z
Za
Zb
Zc
Zd
Ze
Zf
5-7
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Rotary Switches Specifications (continued) Weight RPSE 10, 11, 12, 13, 20 RPSE14, 16 RKSE10,11,12,13 RKSE14,16 Electrical Operations Climatic Test Ambient Temperature
Description The rotary switches are used for electrical isolation of machinery to enable safe access. Once the power has been turned off, the key can then be withdrawn and used in the next sequence of operation such as unlocking an access hatch or allowing valves to be operated. The rotary switch can either be mounted in a panel or purchased in an IP65 enclosure. The rotary switch is available with 4 poles, either 4 N.O. or 2 N.C. and 2 N.O. The 100A 4 N.O. switch has 3 contacts rated at 100A and 1 contact rated at 20A.
Features • • • • • • •
316L stainless steel keys Direct drive operation—positively opens contacts IP 65 rated enclosure—water and dust resistant Stainless steel dust cap included Up to 100A isolation 4 N.O. or 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. contacts Replaceable code barrel assembly
Specifications Standards
Category Approvals Enclosure Rating Conduit Entries Operating Temperature Mechanical Operations Max. Shear Force to Key Max. Torque to Key Humidity Finger Protection
EN292-1&2, EN1088, IEC/EN60204-1, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19, AS4024.1, UL508, CSA 22.2 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, and 4 systems BG, cULus on contact block, CE marked for all applicable directives, and C-Tick not required IP65 (RKS only) 4 x M20 (RKS only) -10°C to +40°C (14°F to +104°F) 100,000 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 95% RH DIN 57106/VDE 0106 T.100
Rtd. Insulation Voltage (Ui) Rtd. Impulse withstand Volt. (Uimp) S3 Intermittent Rating (VDE 0530 Part 1) Duty Factor Last Two-Digits of Catalog No. (See Product Selection table) Rtd. Uninterrupted Current (lu) IEC/EN/VDE UL/CSA Rtd. Operational Voltage (Ue) IEC/EN/SEV/VDE UL/CSA Main Switch Isol. Voltage Up To Rtd. Operational Current (Ie) AC-21A IEC/EN/VDE AC-1 SEV Rtd. Oper. Power at 50-60Hz AC-23A IEC/EN/VDE 3 Phase 220-240V 3 Pole 380-440V 500-690V AC-3A IEC/EN/VDE 3 Phase 220-240V 3 Pole 380-440V 500-690V DOL-Rating UL/CSA 3 Phase 140V 3 Pole 240V 480V 600V Rated Breaking Capacity AC-23/AC-3 220-240 V Motor Switch 380-440 V 500-690 V Maximum Fuse Size (Gl) Rated Fuse Short Circuit Current Terminal Cross Section Single/Multiple Wire: min. mm2 max. mm2 Fine Strand Wire minimum mm2 With Sleeve maximum mm2 American Wire Gauge (AWG)
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-8
500g (1.1lbs) 1000g (2.2lbs) 850g (1.9lbs) 1250g (2.8lbs) >100,000 Constant to DIN IEC 68 Part 2-3 Variable to DIN IEC 68 Part 2-30 Encased -25°C to +40°C (10°F to +104°F) 690V 6kV 60/40/25% = 1, 3/1, 6/2xlu 10 11 16
12
13
14
20A 16A
32A 30A
63A 60A
100A 100A
690V 600V 750V
690V 600V 750V
690V 600V 750V
1000V 600V 1000V
20A 20A
32A 32A
63A 63A
100A 100A
4kW 7.5kW 15kW 7.5kW 15kW 30kW 7.5kW 15kW 30kW
22kW 37kW 37kW
4kW 7.5kW 15kW 5.5kW 11kW 22kW 5.5kW 11kW 22kW
22kW 37kW 30kW
1.5HP 3HP 7.5HP 10HP
3HP 10HP 20HP 20HP
5HP 15HP 30HP 40HP
7.5HP 30HP 50HP 50HP
250A 250A 150A 25A 15kA
330A 330A 220A 35A 15kA
500A 500A 270A 63/50A 15/20kA
600A 600A 300A 100A 25kA
1 10 0.75 6
1 10 0.75 6
4 16 2.5 10
2.5 3.5 1.5 2.5
8
8
6
2
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Rotary Switches Product Selection Type
Contacts
Current
4 N.O.
Catalogue Number 440T-MRKSE10➊
20A
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
440T-MRKSE11➊
32A
440T-MRKSE12➊
63A
440T-MRKSE13➊
3 N.O. & 1 N.O.
3 N.O. 100A and 1 N.O. 20A
440T-MRKSE14➊
8 N.O. 4 N.O. 2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20A
440T-MRKSE16➊ 440T-MRPSE10➊ 440T-MRPSE11➊ 440T-MRPSE12➊ 440T-MRPSE13➊ 440T-MRPSE14➊ 440T-MRPSE16➊ 440T-MRPSE20➊
IP65 Enclosure Mounted
4 N.O.
20A 32A 63A 3 N.O. 100A and 1 N.O. 20A 20A 40A
4 N.O.
Panel Mounted
3 N.O. & 1 N.O. 8 N.O. 4 N.O.
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Accessories Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel, All Except 100A Replacement Code Barrel, 100A Replacement Dust Cap Cable Grip, M20 Conduit Adaptor, M20 to 1/2in NPT Plastic Supplemental Contact Assembly, 20A 1 N.O. Late Make, Early Break 1 N.C. Auxiliary Supplemental Contact Assembly, 20A 2 N.O. Late Make, Early Break
Additional Information
Catalogue Number
14-2 14-2
440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASCBE11➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗ 440A-A09028 440A-A09042
For use with RPSE12, RPSE13, RPSE20
440T-AACA10
For use with RPSE12, RPSE13, RPSE20
440T-AACA11
See page 5-33
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) RKSE10 and RKSE11
RKSE12 and RKSE13
80 (3.14)
100 (3.93)
2 Off M4 Mounting Holes
73.4 (2.88)
38 (1.49) 65 (2.55)
90CRS (3.54)
4 Off 20mm (0.78) Knockouts Typical Position 2 Off Top & 2 Off Bottom
Weather Cap
39 (1.53) 24 (0.94)
Cover Code Barrel View of ‘A’
2 Off M4 Mounting Holes
115 (4.52)
Assembly Adaptor Plate 23 (0.9) 60CRS (2.35)
2 Off 20mm (0.78) Knockouts on Rear Face
125CRS (4.92) 165 (6.49) Mounting Centres
Coded Key
24 (0.94)
44CRS (1.73)
‘A’
46 (1.81) 80 (3.14) 88.4 (3.48)
39 (1.53)
18 (0.7)
175 (6.88)
‘A’
4 Off Dia. 20mm (0.78) 61CRS Knockouts Typical Position (2.4) 2 Off Top & 2 Off Bottom
5-9
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Rotary Switches Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) RKSE16 Weather Cap Assembly
OFF ON
2 Off M4 Mounting Holes External
80 (3.15)
100 (3.98)
‘A’
60 crs
RKSE14
90 crs
60 crs Coded Key
163 (6.42)
160 (6.3) Code Barrel Assembly
Unit in Off Position Key Removed M25/M32 Conduit Entry Knockouts 2 per end
100 (3.98)
View on ‘A’
4 Off M4 Mounting Holes Internal
85 (3.35)
Adaptor Plate
18 (0.71) 44 crs
RPSE10 and 11
100 (3.98)
96 (3.78)
Unit in On Position Key Trapped
32 (1.26)
Panel Mounting Details
±23 (0.9)
25 (0.98) Weather Cap Assembly
Fixing Screws
3 (0.12) max. Panel Thickness 16 (0.6) Switch Unit
Code Barrel
16 (0.6)
2 Holes ±4.0 (0.15) Dia.
Mtg. Block 71.5 (2.8) 55.5 (2.19)
OFF 25 (0.98) ON 43 (1.69)
64 Square Legend Plate
5-10
Legend Plate
Holes ±4.4 (0.17)
Panel Mounting Details
Holes ±20 (0.79)
High Visibility Traffalite Label Permanently Secured with Tessa 4970 Adhesive
RPSE 12, 13, 14 and 20
Hole 20 (0.79)
64 Square Fascia
±23 (0.9) 16 (0.6) 3 Max Panel Thickness 64 (2.5) Panel Mntg Block
Base Mountings M4 Fixings
110.5 (4.35)
25 (0.98)
±50 (1.96) ±46 (1.8)
Switch Unit
16
240 (9.4)
Drive Adaptor Panel
32 (1.26)
250 (9.8)
4 Off 20 (0.79) Dia. Knockouts Typical Position 2 Off Top & 2 Off Bottom
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Rotary Switches Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) RPSE16
3 (0.12) max. Panel Thickness
32 (1.26) 16 (0.6)
16 (0.6)
46 (1.8) Dia.
Code Barrel
±23 2 Holes (0.9) ±4.0 (0.15) Dia.
Hole 20 (0.79) Panel Mounting Details
25 (0.98)
Fixing Screws
Switch Unit
Weather Cap Assembly
Mtg. Block
OFF
ON
Legend Plate
Drive Adaptor Panel
Typical Wiring Diagrams Shown with Key Free 1
2
1
2
1
2 (100A)
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4 (100A)
3
4
5
6
5
6
5
6 (100A)
5
6
7
8
7
8
7
8 (20A)
7
8
RKSE10 and RPSE10 RKSE12 and RPSE12 PKSE13 and RPSE13 --------- and RPSE20
RKSE11 and RPSE11
RKSE14 and RPSE14
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
RKSE16 and RPSE16
5-11
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Solenoid Release Units Specifications Standards
EN292-1&2, EN1954-1, IEC/EN60204-1, EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ISO138491, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, and 4 systems BG, cULus and CE marked for all applicable directives 24V DC, 110V AC, 230V AC, 110V DC
Category Approvals Solenoid Voltage Solenoid Power
Description The solenoid release unit is used for electrical isolation of machinery to enable safe access. It consists of a rotary power switch (RPS) and a solenoid. The trapped key can be removed once an external signal is given to its internal solenoid locking mechanism. An indicator light on the SRU indicates when trapped key can be removed; that is, when power is applied to the solenoid. The solenoid signal only needs to be present when key removal is necessary. The solenoid is rated for 100% duty cycle. Power to the solenoid can be removed after the trapped key is removed. Removing the trapped key causes the isolating power switch to change state; the normally open contacts open and the normally closed contacts (if applicable) will close.
DC Types AC Types Electrical Characteristics Mounting Max Shear Force to Key Max Torque to Key Material Trapped Key Components Face Plate Optional Box Cable
6.5W continuous 6VA continuous See rotary power switches Any position 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel ABS Plastic 0.75sq. mm2 (18AWG) 2-wire PVC jacket QD 0°C to +40°C (+32°F to +104°F) 95% RH
Operating Temperature Humidity Environmental With Optional Plastic IP65 (NEMA 13) Enclosure Electrical Life >100,000 Mechanical Life 100,000
The trapped key can then be used in the next sequence of the operation.
Features • • • • • • • • • • •
Direct drive operation—positively opens contacts Integral solenoid monitoring Key trapped until release signal is applied IP 65 enclosure or panel mounted versions LED or NEON “key free” indication 316L stainless steel construction 24V DC, 110V AC/DC or 230V AC solenoid options Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard UL and CSA approval on switches Single or multiple key units available (contact factory) Replaceable code barrel assembly
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-12
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Solenoid Release Units Product Selection Solenoid Voltage
Contacts 2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
24V DC
Current
32A
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20A
4 N.O.
32A
2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 230V AC
20A
4 N.O.
32A
2 N.O. & 2 N.C. 4 N.O. 3 N.O. & 3 N.C.
110V DC
440T-MSRUE11➊ 440T-MSRUE10➊ 440T-MSRUE12➊ 440T-MSRUE22➊ 440T-MSRUE20➊ 440T-MSRUE23➊ 440T-MSRUE33➊ 440T-MSRUE30➊ 440T-MSRUE34➊ 440T-MSRUE44➊ 440T-MSRUE40➊ 440T-MSRUE46➊
20A
4 N.O.
110V AC
Catalogue Number
20A
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Accessories Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap
Additional Information
Catalogue Number 440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗ 440T-AIPB10 440T-AIPB22
See page 5-33 For use with 20A units For use with 32A units
Optional IP65 Plastic Enclosure
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Typical Wiring Diagram
90 (3.54)
Trapped Key (not included)
Solenoid Status 70 Indicator (2.76) Lamp
150 (5.91)
70 (2.76)
90 (3.54) 82 (3.23) R4 (0.16) Max Panel Cutout
MC MC
Gnd
132 (5.20)
6 Holes 4.5 (0.18) Dia
120 (4.72)
160 (6.30)
Terminal Block
Solenoid Status Monitor Switch. Contacts Break When Solenoid Retracted.
+
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
100 (3.93) Optional Enclosure 440T-AIPB10
Optional Enclosure 440T-AIPB22
300 (11.81)
230 (9.06)
110 (4.33)
5-13
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Electronic Timed-Delay Units Specifications Standards
Category Approvals
Description The Electronic Timed-delay Unit (ETU) is used in applications that require an elapsed time to occur before allowing access to a hazardous area. The ETU uses a CU1 control unit timer to execute the timing sequence. Turning a non removable key initiates the timer. When the CU1 times out, its output energizes an internal solenoid, which then allows the removal of either one or two trapped keys.
Operating Temperature Humidity Mechanical Operations Max. Shear Force to Key Max. Torque to Key Material Trapped Key Components Face Plate Optional Box Assembly Fixing Weight Inputs Time Range
EN292-1&2, EN1954-1, IEC/EN60204-1, EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ISO138491, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19, AS4024.1 Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems BG and CE marked for all applicable directives 0°C to +40°C (32°F to +104°F) 95% RH 100,000 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel ABS Plastic Tamper resistant screws 2.0kg (4.4lbs) 24V DC, 110V AC and 230V AC 0.1 second to 40 minutes
The Single-key Timed delay Unit (STU) has one trapped key. After the CU1 timer has expired, the single trapped key can be removed and used to continue the next sequence in allowing access to the hazard. The single key must be returned to the STU and trapped to allow the non removable key to re-initiate the hazard. The Dual-key Timed delay Unit (DTU) has two trapped keys. After the CU1 timer has expired, both keys can be removed and used to continue the next sequences in allowing access to the hazard. Both keys must be returned to the DTU and trapped to allow the non removable key re-initiate the hazard. See the CU1 control unit for details on setting the delay time.
Features • • • • • •
Timed-delay output up to 40 minutes Single key or Dual key 316L stainless steel keys Category 1 Stop Replaceable code barrel assembly Optional IP65 enclosure
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-14
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Electronic Timed-Delay Units Product Selection Type
Solenoid Voltage
Contact Set 1 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A
24V DC Single Key Out Panel Mounted
110V AC 230V AC 24V DC
Dual Key Out Panel Mounted
110V AC 230V AC
Contact Set 2 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A I N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A
Catalogue Number 440T-MSTUE10➊ 440T-MSTUE11➊ 440T-MSTUE20➊ 440T-MSTUE22➊ 440T-MSTUE30➊ 440T-MSTUE33➊ 440T-MDTUE10➊➊ 440T-MDTUE11➊➊ 440T-MDTUE20➊➊ 440T-MDTUE22➊➊ 440T-MDTUE30➊➊ 440T-MDTUE33➊➊
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Accessories Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap
Page Number
Catalogue Number 440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗ 440T-AIPB20 440T-AIPB23
5-33 For use with 20A units For use with 40A units
Optional IP65 Plastic Enclosure
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be use for installation purposes. 250 (9.84) 226 (8.90) 216 (8.50) 118 (4.65)
90 (3.54)
160 (6.30) 150 (5.91) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)
Optional ABS Box (440T-AIPB20) for 20 Amp Isolator One Key for STU (key not included) Nonremovable Key Two Keys for DTU (keys not included) 98 (3.86)
95 (3.74) 110 (4.33)
300 (11.81)
230 (9.06)
8 Holes 4.6 (0.18) Dia.
Optional ABS Box (440T-AIPB23) for 40 Amp Isolator
5-15
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Stopped Motion Units Specifications Standards
Category Approvals
Description The Stopped Motion Unit (SMU) is used in applications that require the detection of stopped motion of mechanical parts of a machine. The SMU uses inductive proximity sensors to detect motion and the CU2 control unit to monitor the sensors. The CU2 requires a PNP and an NPN output type proximity sensors. When the proximity sensors stop detecting movement, the CU2 activates its output, powering an internal solenoid. With the solenoid energized, one or two trapped keys can be removed from the SMU.
Operating Temperature Humidity Mechanical Operations Maximum Shear Force to Key Maximum Torque to Key Material Trapped Key Components Face Plate Optional Box Inductive Sensors Assembly Fixing Weight Inputs Time Range Zero Speed Sensors
EN292-1&2, EN1954-1, IEC/EN60204-1, EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, ISO138491, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19, AS4024.1 Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) BG and CE marked for all applicable directives 0°C to +40°C (32°F to +104°F) 95% RH 100,000 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel ABS Plastic Stainless Steel Barrel, Plastic Face Tamper resistant screws 2.0kg (4.4lbs) 24V DC, 110V AC and 230V AC 0.1 second to 40 minutes 2x inductive sensors
The removable trapped keys (one or two) can be used to continue the next sequence in allowing access to the hazardous area. See the CU2 control unit for details on setting the delay time. Additional proximity sensors can be found in the Sensors catalogue.
Features • • • • • •
Stopped motion detection NPN and PNP proximity sensors Timed-delay output up to 40 minutes Category 1 Stop Replaceable code barrel assembly Optional IP65 enclosure
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-16
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Stopped Motion Units Product Selection (sensors not included) Type
Solenoid Voltage
Contact Set 1 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A 3 N.O. 40A 2 N.O. 20A
24V DC Single Key Out Panel Mounted
110V AC 230V AC 24V DC
Dual Key Out Panel Mounted
110V AC 230V AC
Contact Set 2 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A 1 N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A I N.O. 20A 1 N.C. 20A
Catalogue Number
Type
Page Number
Catalogue Number
—
5-33
250V 500mA
NA For use with 20A units For use with 40A units
440T-MSMSE10➊ 440T-MSMSE11➊ 440T-MSMSE20➊ 440T-MSMSE22➊ 440T-MSMSE30➊ 440T-MSMSE33➊ 440T-MDMSE10➊➊ 440T-MDMSE11➊➊ 440T-MDMSE20➊➊ 440T-MDMSE22➊➊ 440T-MDMSE30➊➊ 440T-MDMSE33➊➊
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Accessories Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap Replacement Fuse
Size
—
Optional IP65 Plastic Enclosure
— NPN PNP NPN PNP NPN PNP
12mm Inductive Proximity Sensors
18mm 30mm
4-67
440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗ 440R-A31562 440T-AIPB20 440T-AIPB23 872C-D3NN12-E2 872C-D3NP12-E2 872C-D5NN18-E2 872C-D5NP18-E2 872C-D10NN30-E2 872C-D10NP30-E2
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 250 (9.84)
226 (8.90) 216 (8.50) 118 (4.65)
90 (3.54)
160 (6.30) 150 (5.91) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)
Optional ABS Box (440T-AIPB20) for 20 Amp Isolator One Key for STU (key not included) Nonremovable Key Two Keys for DTU (keys not included) 98 (3.86) 300 (11.81)
95 (3.74) 110 (4.33)
230 (9.06)
8 Holes 4.6 (0.18) Dia.
Optional ABS Box (440T-AIPB23) for 40 Amp Isolator
5-17
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Exchange Units Specifications Standards Category Approvals Operating Temperature Mechanical Operations Max. Shear Force to Key Max. Torque to Key Humidity Material
EN292-1&2, EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems BG, CE marked for all applicable directives and C-Tick not required -40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F) 100,000 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 95% RH 316L Stainless steel
Accessories Description The key exchange unit (KEX) is used in an interlocking sequence to link together other devices in the Prosafe range and caters to more complex operating sequences. The operating principle is such that no secondary keys can be removed from the unit until all primary keys have been inserted, rotated, and trapped. The primary keys remain trapped until all secondary keys have been re-inserted, rotated, and trapped. It is typically used in applications where there is more than one access way to the hazardous area, and each access way must be open at the same time. The key exchange unit accomplishes this by allowing one or more keys to be inserted which then releases multiple keys out. A typical process may require a rotary key switch to turn a motor off. The key from the rotary switch is removed and inserted into a KEX. The KEX then releases three keys which would allow simultaneous access to the hazard area through three different gates. This KEX is described as 1 key in 3 keys out. The keys in are considered primary codes, so the keys are not included in the KEX. The keys out are considered secondary codes, so the keys are included.
Features • A range of off-the-shelf units in various combinations • 316L Stainless steel construction • Primary key(s) in release secondary keys simultaneously on units up to 6 way • Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard • Replaceable code barrel assembly
Optional Key Exchange Cabinets L No. of Keys Painted Mild Steel 11 way 400 (max) (15.7) 15 way 400 (max) (15.7) 25 way 600 (max) (23.6) 40 way 800 (max) (31.4) Stainless Steel 15 way 400 (max) (15.7) 25 way 600 (max) (23.6) 40 way 800 (max) (31.4)
W
300 (11.8) 400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.4)
200 (7.87) 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26)
400 (15.7) 600 (23.6) 800 (31.4)
210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26)
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-18
D
mm (inches)
Catalogue Number
440T-AIPB30 440T-AIPB33 440T-AIPB34 440T-AIPB35
440T-AIPB40 440T-AIPB44 440T-AIPB45
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Exchange Units Product Selection Key Exchange Units Number of Keys 2 way 3 way 4 way 5 way 6 way 4 way 5 way 6 way 6 way 7 way 8 way 9 way 10 way 11 way 12 way 13 way 14 way 15 way 16 way 17 way 18 way 19 way 20 way 21 way 22 way 23 way 24 way
Keys in and out 1 key in 1 key out 1 key in 2 keys out 1 key in 3 keys out 1 key in 4 keys out 1 key in 5 keys out 2 key in 2 keys out 2 key in 3 keys out 2 key in 4 keys out 3 key in 3 keys out 1 key in 6 keys out 1 key in 7 keys out 1 key in 8 keys out 1 key in 9 keys out 1 key in 10 keys out 1 key in 11 keys out 1 key in 12 keys out 1 key in 13 keys out 1 key in 14 keys out 1 key in 15 keys out 1 key in 16 keys out 1 key in 17 keys out 1 key in 18 keys out 1 key in 19 keys out 1 key in 20 keys out 1 key in 21 keys out 1 key in 22 keys out 1 key in 23 keys out
Catalogue Number 440T-MKEXE10♦ 440T-MKEXE11♦ 440T-MKEXE12♦ 440T-MKEXE13♦ 440T-MKEXE14♦ 440T-MKEXE15♦ 440T-MKEXE16♦ 440T-MKEXE17♦ 440T-MKEXE18♦ 440T-MKEXE19♦ 440T-MKEXE20♦ 440T-MKEXE22♦ 440T-MKEXE23♦ 440T-MKEXE24♦ 440T-MKEXE25♦ 440T-MKEXE26♦ 440T-MKEXE27♦ 440T-MKEXE28♦ 440T-MKEXE29♦ 440T-MKEXE30♦ 440T-MKEXE33♦ 440T-MKEXE34♦ 440T-MKEXE35♦ 440T-MKEXE36♦ 440T-MKEXE37♦ 440T-MKEXE38♦ 440T-MKEXE39♦
♦ Specify the codes individually for each primary key in (key not included) and each secondary key out (key included). See page 5-6 for code selection. Consult factory for other configurations of keys in and keys out.
Accessories Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap
Page Number
Catalogue Number
5-33
440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (4, 5 or) 6 Way Key Exchange Unit 200 (7.87) 169 (6.65)
200 (7.87) 169 (6.65) 27.5 (1.08)
55.5 (2.18) 185 (7.28)
4 Fixing Holes 8.6 (0.33) Dia.
87 (3.43)
111 (4.37)
4 Fixing Holes 8.6 (0.33) Dia.
Key Exchange Cabinets (painted mild steel or stainless steel)
56 (2.20) 27.5 (1.08)
L
(2) 3 Way Key Exchange Unit
185 (7.28) 87 (3.43) W
D
5-19
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Bolt Interlocks Specifications Standards Category Approvals
Single Dual
Description The bolt interlocks are designed to allow access to hazardous areas when an appropriate key is inserted into the interlock. These bolt interlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to provide a rugged, industrial grade method of helping prevent access through gates.
Operating Temperature Mechanical Operations Max. Shear Force to Key Max. Torque to Key Humidity Weight Material Mounting
Bolt
EN292-1&2, EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems BG, CE marked for all applicable directives and C-Tick not required -40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F) 100,000 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 95% RH (SBL) 0.60kg (1.32lbs) (DBL) 1.10kg (2.43lbs) 316L Stainless Steel SBL 2 x M5 Counterbored from Top or 2 x M5 from Underside with M5 Nuts DBL 4 x M5 Counterbored from Top or 4 x M5 from Underside with M5 Nuts 15mm (0.59in) Ø
One advantage of the bolt interlocks is that there is no need to run power wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped key rotary switch on a control panel and the key is then hand-carried to the gate by the operator. The Single Bolt interlock (SBL) is designed to be used to access hazardous areas where partial body exposure is required. The SBL is not shipped with a key. If two keys are needed for partial body access, select the Dual Bolt interlock (DBL) that requires both keys to be trapped to operate. This version of the DBL does not include the keys. When whole body access is needed, the DBL, with one primary key and one secondary trapped key (included) should be used. The secondary key serves the function of a personnel key. This DBL allows the operator to carry the personnel key into the hazardous area. When the operator returns from the hazardous area and returns the personnel key to the DBL, the locking sequence can be reversed and the process re-started.
Features • • • • • • •
316L Stainless steel construction Single or dual key units Various extensions of bolt Direct drive push/pull operation Replaceable code barrel assembly Fitted with tamper resistant screws Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-20
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Bolt Interlocks Product Selection Type
Trapped Condition
Single Key
Key Trapped to Bolt Retract
Both Keys Trapped to Retract Bolt Dual Key Primary Key Trapped, Secondary Key Free to Retract Bolt
Bolt Retracted—mm (inches) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 12 (0.47) 0 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51) 0mm 3 (0.11) 6 (0.23) 13 (0.51)
Bolt Extended—mm (inches) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06) 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66) 20 (0.78) 27 (1.06)
Catalogue Number 440T-MSBLE10➊ 440T-MSBLE11➊ 440T-MSBLE12➊ 440T-MSBLE13➊ 440T-MDBLE10➊➊ 440T-MDBLE11➊➊ 440T-MDBLE12➊➊ 440T-MDBLE13➊➊ 440T-MDBLE14➊➋ 440T-MDBLE15➊➋ 440T-MDBLE16➊➋ 440T-MDBLE17➊➋
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ➋ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Accessories Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap
Page Number
Catalogue Number
5-33
440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Single Key Bolt Interlock
Dual Key Bolt Interlock 2 x M5
48.5 (1.90)
15 (0.59) Bolt Dia.
28.5 (1.22) & 30 (1.18) Pitches Code Barrel 20 (0.79) Screws M4 x 8 Boss Dia. Torx Head
15 (0.59) Bolt Dia.
Secondary 3.5 (0.13)
➋ 30.5 (1.2)
Primary 3.5 (0.13) 57.7 (2.27)
Weather Cap Lock Screw (M5)
➋
29 (1.14)
48.5 (1.90)
15.8 (0.62)
20 (0.79) Boss Dia. 36.3 (1.42) M5 Fixing using Nut Recesses Weather Cap for Front Mntg Lock Screw (M5)
57.7 (2.27)
44.5 (1.75)
44.5 (1.75) 28.5 (1.22) & 30 (1.18) Pitches
15.8 (0.62)
4 x M5
3.5 (0.13)
Code Barrel Screws M4 x 8 Torx Head
5.8 (0.22) 25.4 27.4 (1.0) (1.07)
12 (0.47) 30 (1.18)
59.7 (2.35) 65.5 (2.57) Key Trapped Bolt Retracted
25.4 27.4 (1.0) (1.07) 12 (0.47)
30 (1.18)
124 (4.88) Max M5 Fixing using Nut Recesses for Front Mntg
➋ Standard Retracted Projections 0, 3, 6 & 13 (0, 0.11, 0.23 & 0.51) Extension 14 (0.55)
5-21
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Access/Chain Interlocks Specifications Standards Category Approvals
Single
Dual
Description The access interlocks are designed to allow access to hazardous areas when an appropriate key is inserted into the interlock. These access interlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to provide rugged, industrial grade method of helping prevent access through gates. They are actuated by either a lever or a rod which is connected to chain.
EN292-1&2, EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems BG, CE marked for all applicable directives, and C-Tick not required +/-10mm (0.39in) 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) -40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F) 95% RH 316L stainless steel
Misalignment Max. Shear Force to Key Max. Torque to Key Operating Temperature Humidity Material Mounting SAL and SCL 2 or 4 x M5 Counterbored from Top or 2 or 4 x M5 from Underside with Nuts DAL and DCL 4 or 6 x M5 Counterbored from Top or 4 or 6 x M5 from Underside with Nuts Weight SAL and SCL 0.8kg (1.8lbs) DAL and DCL 1.35kg (3lbs) Mechanical Life 100,000
One advantage of the access interlocks is that there is no need to run power wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped key rotary switch on a control panel and the key is then hand-carried to the gate by the operator. The Single key Access interlock (SAL) and Single-key Chain lock (SCL) are designed to be used to access hazardous areas where partial body exposure is required. If two keys are needed for partial body access, select the dual-key access interlock (DAL) or dual-key chain lock (DCL) with both keys trapped. When whole body access is needed, the DAL or DCL, with one key trapped and one key free should be used. The secondary key serves the function of a personnel key. The DAL and DCL allow the operator to carry the personnel key into the hazardous area. When the operator returns from the hazardous area and returns the personnel key to the DAL or DCL, the locking sequence can be reversed and the process restarted.
Features • • • • • •
316L Stainless steel construction Single and dual key units Direct drive operation Fitted with tamper resistant screws Stainless steel dust cap as standard Replaceable code barrel assembly
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-22
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Access/Chain Interlocks Product Selection Operation
Actuator Lever Chain
Single Key
Key Condition Key trapped to release lever Key trapped to release chain Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release lever Both keys trapped to release lever Primary key trapped, secondary key free to release chain Both keys trapped to release chain
Lever Dual Key Chain
Catalogue Number 440T-MSALE10➊ 440T-MSCLE10➊ 440T-MDALE10➊➋ 440T-MDALE11➊➊ 440T-MDCLE10➊➋ 440T-MDCLE11➊➊
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ➋ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Accessories Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap Replacement Spare Block Catch Replacement Spare Chain Catch
Page Number
Catalogue Number 440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗ 440T-ACAD10 440T-ACHA10
5-33 — —
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Single Key Access Interlock
Dual Key Access Interlock
98 (3.86)
Max 35.3 (1.38)
3.5 (0.13)
3.5 (0.13)
Min 28.5 (1.22) Pitch
48.5 (1.90)
44.5 (1.75)
Chain Assembly 305 (12.0) Long Chain
25.4 (1.0) 12.7 (0.5)
44.5 (1.75)
Max 35.3 (1.38)
12.7 (0.5) 3.5 (0.13)
28.5 (1.22) & 30 (1.18) Pitches
Min 28.5 (1.22) Pitch
4 x M5
28.5 (1.22) & 30 (1.18) Pitches
6 x M5
25.4 (1.0)
Min 10 (0.39) Max 13.5 (0.53) 30.5 (1.20)
10 (0.39)
48.5 (1.90)
57.7 (2.27)
98 (3.86) 30.5 (1.20)
57.7 (2.27)
Code Barrel Screws M4 x 10 Torx Head
100 (3.94)
Code Barrel Screws M4 x 10 Torx Head
100 (3.94) 25.4 (1.0)
12 (0.47) Catch Assembly
27.4 (1.07)
25.4 27.4 (1.0) (1.07)
12 (0.47) 60 (2.36) Max
Catch Assembly 119 (4.65) Max
5-23
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Slamlock Mechanical Specifications
Single
Dual
Description The Prosafe Slamlock combines the features of trapped keys with tongue actuated interlocks. When the actuator is inserted into the interlock (guard closed), the trapped key can be rotated and removed. With the key free, the actuator can not be removed thus locking closed the guard door. The trapped key must be re-inserted and rotated 90° to unlock the guard.
Standards
EN292-1&2, EN1088, IEC/EN60947-51, GS-ET-19, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems
Approvals
BG, CE marked for all applicable directives, and C-Tick not required
Operating Temperature
-40°C to +200°C (-40°F to +392°F)
Mechanical Operations
In excess of 105 operations under normal working conditions.
Max Shear Force to Key
15.1kN (3398lbs)
Max Torque to Key
14Nm (124lb•in)
Humidity
95% RH
Weight Single key version Dual key version Code Barrels
Tested to 100,000 operations
Ambient Working Temp
-10°C to +50°C (14°F to +122°F)
Material
316L Stainless Steel
Mounting SSL
Slamlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to provide a rugged, industrial grade method of interlocking guard doors. One advantage of the slamlock is that there is no need to run power wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped key on a control panel or by a Prosafe RKS type unit and the key is then hand-carried to the gate by the operator.
760gm (0.76kg (1.68lbs)) 1332gm (1.33kg (2.93lbs))
DSS Max Holding Force
2 x M5 Counterbored from Top or 2 x M5 from Underside with Nuts 4 x M5 Counterbored from Top or 4 x M5 from Underside with Nuts 2000N (450lbs)
The single key Slamlock (SSL) is used to interlock hatches, guards and doors where full body access is not required. Dual key Slamlock (DSL) is similar to the single key version but has a secondary key to allow ‘2 key in’ or ‘key exchange’ conditions. The key exchange version may be used where whole body access is required, as the secondary key can be used as a personnel key.
Features • • • • • • • •
316L stainless steel construction Selection of actuator types available Single or dual key versions available Direct drive operation Replaceable code barrel assembly Fitted with tamper resistant screws Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard Conforms to EN 292, EN 1088, GS ET 19
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-24
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Slamlock Mechanical Product Selection Type
Key Condition
Single Key
Key Trapped to Release Actuator
Actuator Standard Flexible Flat Standard Flexible Flat Standard Flexible Flat
Primary Key Trapped, Secondary Key Free to Release Actuator
Dual Key
Both Keys Free to Release Actuator
Catalogue Number 440T-MSSLE10➊ 440T-MSSLE11➊ 440T-MSSLE12➊ 440T-MDSLE10➊➋ 440T-MDSLE11➊➋ 440T-MDSLE12➊➋ 440T-MDSLE20➊➊ 440T-MDSLE22➊➊ 440T-MDSLE23➊➊
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ➋ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
38.3 (1.5)
3.5 (0.13)
48 (1.88) 20.8 (0.81) Top Entry
Double Key Slamlock
28.5 (1.22) & 30 (1.18) Pitch Range 43.6 (1.71) 64.1 (2.52)
57.7 (2.27) 3.5 (0.13)
4 x M5 48 (1.88) 20.8 (0.81)
2 x M5
28.5 (1.22) & 30 (1.18) Pitch Range 38.3 (1.5) 43.6 (1.71) 64.1 (2.52)
Top Entry Front Entry Code Barrel Screws M4 x 8 Torx Head
Front Entry 5 (0.19) 34 (1.33)
20.8 (0.81)
25.4 (1.0) 4 (0.15)
4 (0.15)
18 (0.70) 2 Holes, ±5.5 thru
57.7 (2.27) 25 (1.0) 18 (0.70)
Secondary
3.5 (0.13)
19 (0.74)
Primary
25.4 (1.0)
151 (5.94) Bottom Entry
Flexible/Adjustable Actuator
Flat Actuator
36 (1.41)
Code Barrel Screws M4 x 8 Torx Head
5.5 (0.21)
20.8 (0.81)
93 (3.66) Bottom Entry
57.7 (2.27)
5 (0.19) 34 (1.33)
5.5 (0.21)
3.5 (0.13)
Standard Actuator
31 (1.22)
3.5 (0.13)
M5 CSK 52 (2.04)
13 40 (1.57) 8 (0.51) (0.31) 2 Off 5.5 Slots 51 (2.0) 20 (0.78)
52 (2.04)
40 (1.57)
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Single Key Slamlock
4 (0.15)
18 (0.70)
36 (1.41)
14.5 (0.57)
5-25
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Slamlock Electrical Specifications Standards
Single
Dual Description The Prosafe Slamlock with electrical isolation combines the features of trapped key tongue actuated interlocks while also providing sets of electrical safety and auxiliary contacts. When the actuator is inserted into the lock and the key is removed the actuator is trapped in the unit thus locking closed the guard door. In this state the safety contacts are closed and the auxiliary contacts are open. To open the guard door the key must be inserted and rotated 90°, opening the safety contacts, closing the auxiliary contacts and enabling the actuator to be released thus unlocking the guard door. While the guard door is open the key is trapped in the unit. Slamlocks with electrical isolation offer the features of electrical safety interlock switches with the benefits of a trapped key/enforced sequence systems. They allow a combination of both approaches for safeguarding machinery and processes to be used. The single key Slamlock (SSS) is used to interlock hatches, guards and doors where full body access is not required. The single key locks the actuator and operates the switch in the same action. Dual key Slamlock (DSS) is similar to the single key version but has a secondary key to allow ‘2 key in’ or ‘key exchange’ conditions. The key exchange version may be used where whole body access is required, as the secondary key can be used as a personnel key.
Features • Electrical safety contacts combined with trapped key/enforced sequence feature • Most of unit constructed from 316L stainless steel • Selection of actuator types available • Single or dual key versions available • Direct drive operation • Replaceable code barrel assembly • Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard
EN292-1&2, EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, GS-ET-19, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Category Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1) Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems Approvals BG, CE marked for all applicable directives, and C-Tick not required Safety Contact 2 N.C. positive break Utilization Category AC 15 AC (Ue) 500V 250V 100V (le) 1A 2A 5A DC 250V 0.5A, 24V 2A Max. Switched Current/ 500V/500V A Voltage/Load Thermal Current (lth) 10A Minimum Current 5V 5mA DC Safety Contact Gap >2 x 2mm (0.07in) Rtd. Insulation Voltage (Ui) 500V Rtd. Impulse Withstand Volt. (Uimp) 2500V Auxiliary Contacts 1 N.O. Pollution Degree 3 Actuator Travel-Pos. 5mm (0.19in) Opening Minimum Operating Radius 175mm (6.88in) (60mm (2.36in) with flexible actuator) Break Contact Min. Force 12N (2.7lbs) Max. Actuation Speed 1m/s Max. Actuation Frequency 2 cycle/s Case Material UL approved glass-filled polyester & 316L Stainless Steel Actuator Material Stainless steel Contact Protection IP67 Conduit Entry 3 x M20 Operating Temperature -20°C to +80°C (-4°F to 176°F) Humidity 95% RH Mounting SSS 4 x M5 Counterbored from Top or 4 x M5 from Underside with Nuts DSS 6 x M5 Counterbored from Top or 6 x M5 from Underside with Nuts Mechanical Life 100,000 Electrical Life 1,000,000 Weight (SSSE) 1160g (2.6lbs) (DSSE) 1700g (3.7lbs) Colour Red/Stainless Max. Holding Force 2000N (450lbs) Max. Releasable Load 100N (22.5lbs) Max. Shear Force for Keys 15.1KN (3398lbs) Max. Torque to Key 14Nm (124lb•in) Note: The safety contacts of the Guardmaster switches are described as normally closed (N/C), i.e. with the guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-26
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Slamlock Electrical Product Selection Contacts
Type
Key Condition Key Trapped to Release Actuator
Single Key Key Free to Release Actuator 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Break Before Make
Primary Key Trapped, Secondary Key Free to Release Actuator Dual Key Both Keys Free to Release Actuator
Actuator Standard Flexible Flat Standard Flexible Flat Standard Flexible Flat Standard Flexible Flat
Catalogue Number 440T-MSSSE10➊ 440T-MSSSE11➊ 440T-MSSSE12➊ 440T-MSSSE20➊ 440T-MSSSE22➊ 440T-MSSSE23➊ 440T-MDSSE10➊➋ 440T-MDSSE11➊➋ 440T-MDSSE12➊➋ 440T-MDSSE20➊➊ 440T-MDSSE22➊➊ 440T-MDSSE23➊➊
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ➋ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
5-27
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Slamlock Electrical Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Single Key Slamlock
3.5 (0.13) 38.3 (1.5)
11 21
48 (1.88)
Auxiliary Contacts
Safety Contacts
33
20.8 (0.81)
40 (1.57) 12 22
34
43.6 (1.71) 4 x M5 64.1 (2.52)
Top Entry
Front Entry
5.5 (0.21)
34 (1.33) 5 (0.19)
M20
20.8 (0.81)
4 (0.15) 3.5 (0.13)
Double Key Slamlock
38.3 (1.5)
93 (3.66) Bottom Entry Auxiliary Contacts
Safety Contacts
57.7 (2.27)
11 21
48 (1.88)
33
20.8 (0.81)
40 (1.57) 12 22
34
43.6 (1.71) Top Entry
64.1 (2.52)
6 x M5 240 (9.44) Key - Trapped Key - Free
Front Entry
5.5 (0.21)
34 (1.33)
5 (0.19)
20.8 (0.81)
M20 4 Actuator (0.15) Trapped Bottom Entry
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-28
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Slamlock Electrical Accessories Description
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
52 (2.04)
40 (1.57)
Replacement Standard Actuator
18 (0.7)
4 (0.15)
Catalogue Number
3.5 (0.13)
M5 CSK
36 (1.41)
440G-A27011
14.5 (0.57)
57 (2.24) 25 (0.98) 36 (1.41)
Replacement Flat Actuator
18 (0.7)
440K-A11112
31 (1.22) 40 (1.57) 52 (2.04)
3.5 (0.13)
2 Holes, 5.5 Thru Replacement Flexible Actuator 19 (0.74)
13 (0.51) 51 (2.0)
Replacement Keys Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap
18 (0.7)
440G-A27143
8 20 (0.78)
See page 5-33 See page 5-33 See page 5-33
2 Holes, 5.5 Slots 440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Typical Applications Actuator out, key trapped, safety contacts open, auxiliary contact closed.
Key
Contacts Housing Actuator
Locking force = 2000N (450lbs)
5-29
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Valve Lock, 3 Port Spool Specifications Standards Approvals Flow Operating Temperature Humidity Mechanical Operations Max. Shear Force to Key Maximum Torque to Key Material Weight Inputs Assembly Fixing
Description The 3 port spool valve is used for pneumatic isolation of machinery to enable safe access. Rotation of the trapped key isolates the pneumatic power ensuring a safe condition. The key can then be withdrawn and used in the next sequence of operation.
EN292-1&2, EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 BG and CE marked for all applicable directives Up to 10BAR (120 psi) -10°C to +50°C (14°F to +122°F) 95% RH 100,000 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 316L Stainless steel 0.60kg (1.32lbs) 24V DC, 110V AC and 230V AC Tamper resistant screws
Product Selection Description 3 Port spool valve Optional Enclosure
Catalogue Number 440T-VPVLE10➊ 440T-AIPB24
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page
Features • • • • • • •
Direct drive operation Pneumatic isolation of moving machinery or processes Up to 10 BAR (120 psi) Multiple key units available Virtually maintenance free Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard Replaceable code barrel assembly
5-6 for code selection.
Accessories Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap
Page Number
Catalogue Number 440T-AKEYE10⊗
5-33
440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 150 (5.91)
107.5 (4.23)
225 (8.86)
215 (8.46)
150 (5.91)
140 (5.51)
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel construction.
5-30
Trapped Key (not included)
3 Port Spool Valve 1/4in BSP Ports 6 Holes M5 (0.20)
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Miniature Valve Interlocks Specifications Standards Approvals Ambient Temperature Mechanical Operations Maximum Shear Force to Key Maximum Torque to Key Relative Operating Humidity Material
EN292-1&2, EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 BG and CE marked for all applicable directives -40°C to +200°C (14°F to +392°F) 100,000 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 25% to 95% 316L Stainless Steel
Product Selection Valve Size 0.25in BSP 0.375in BSP 0.5in BSP 0.25in BSP 0.375in BSP 0.5in BSP 1.0in BSP 1.0in BSP
Features • • • • • • •
Direct drive operation Supplied with valves 0.25in to 1in Direct body mounting with security screws Locked open or locked closed options Virtually maintenance free Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard Replaceable code barrel assembly
Valve Status Catalogue Number Key Free/Valve Locked Closed 440T-VMVLE10➊ Key Free/Valve Locked Closed 440T-VMVLE11➊ Key Free/Valve Locked Closed 440T-VMVLE12➊ Key Free/Valve Locked Open 440T-VMVLE13➊ Key Free/Valve Locked Open 440T-VMVLE14➊ Key Free/Valve Locked Open 440T-VMVLE15➊ Key Free/Valve Locked Closed 440T-VMVLE18➊ Key Free/Valve Locked Open 440T-VMVLE19➊
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
5-6 for code selection.
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Valve Locked Closed Key Free
Accessories
Valve Open Key Trapped
Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Replacement Dust Cap Locking Disc Coded Key
Page Number
Catalogue Number 440T-AKEYE10⊗
5-33
440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Code Barrel Assembly
Dim A (nom)
Dim B (nom)
Valve Handle
Dim C (nom)
Ball Valve
Dimensions—mm (inches) Model MVLE10 MVLE11 MVLE12 MVLE13 MVLE14 MVLE15 MVLE16 MVLE17 MVLE18 MVLE19
A 104 (4.1) 104 (4.1) 112 (4.4) 104 (4.1) 104 (4.1) 112 (4.4) 108 (4.3) 108 (4.3) 115 (4.5) 115 (4.5)
B 68 (2.7) 68 (2.7) 80 (3.2) 68 (2.7) 68 (2.7) 80 (3.2) 110 (4.3) 110 (4.3) 110 (4.3) 110 (4.3)
C 38 (1.5) 38 (1.5) 48 (1.9) 38 (1.5) 38 (1.5) 48 (1.9) 53 (2.1) 53 (2.1) 61 (2.4) 61 (2.4)
5-31
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Switchgear Adaptors Product Selection (3/8 sq shaft) Mounting Type
Trap Direction 65° CW to Trap 65° CCW to Trap 90° CW to Trap 90° CCW to Trap +/- 90° to Trap 45° CW to Trap 45° CCW to Trap
45°
Catalogue Number 440T-MSGAU10➊ 440T-MSGAU11➊ 440T-MSGAU12➊ 440T-MSGAU13➊ 440T-MSGAU14➊ 440T-MSGAU17➊ 440T-MSGAU18➊
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection.
Accessories Description The switch gear adaptor is used to interlock preparatory switch gear applications or other host equipment such as spool valves. Power is isolated and locked off when the key is rotated and removed. The key can then be used in the next sequence of operation.
• Virtually maintenance free
440T-AKEYE10⊗ 5-33
440T-ASCBE14➊ 440T-ASFC11⊗
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 45° Mounting Type
63 )
Panel Drilling Details
(2 . 36 (1.41) Dia.
8 (0.31) Dia. (on 50.8 PCD)
45
36 (1.41) Dia.
A B C D E
16 (0.62) 9.5 (0.37)
8 (0.31) Dia. (on 50.8 PCD)
1 2 3 4 5
60 (2.36)
3.2 (0.12) 40 (1.57)
The Prosafe Advantage 9.5 (0.37) square
Stainless steel construction.
5-32
(0 19 .7 4)
8 (0.31) Dia.
45 8 (0.31) Dia.
( 0 17 .6 6)
2 (1 5.4 .0 )
7 (0.27) Dia.
2 (1 5.4 .0 )
EN292-1&2, EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 BG and CE marked for all applicable directives -10°C to +50°C (14°F to +122°F) >100,000 15.1kN (3398lbs) 14Nm (124lb•in) 95% RH 0.30kg (0.66lbs) 316L Stainless steel 2 x M4 3/8sq in x 7/8in long (standard) 9/16in dia. x 7/8in long (optional— contact factory)
67
Operating Temperature Mechanical Operations Max. Shear Force to Key Max. Torque to Key Humidity Weight Material Mounting Shaft Dimensions
Catalogue Number
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
Specifications
Category Approvals
Page Number
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
Features
Standards
Description Replacement Key Replacement Code Barrel Optional Dust Cap
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Accessories Product Selection Description
Approximate Dimensions— mm (inches)
Catalogue Number
Stainless Steel Weatherproof Keys 17 (0.66) Standard Key
64 (2.51)
50 (1.96)
440T-AKEYE10⊗
39 (1.54)
Stainless Steel Weatherproof Dust Cap
440T-ASFC10⊗ 16 (0.63) 60.5 (2.38)
Stainless Steel Weatherproof Dust Cap for Switchgear Adaptor
440T-ASFC11➊
16 (0.63)
42 (1.65)
Stainless Steel Replacement Code Barrel for 100A Rotary Switch
23 (0.91) 10 (0.39)
440T-ASCBE11➊
32 (1.26) 2 Fixing Holes 4.5 (0.18) Dia
42 (1.65)
Stainless Steel Replacement Code Barrels for Products Other than 100A RPS/RKS Units
23 (0.91)
440T-ASCBE14➊
2 Fixing Holes 32 (1.26) 4.5 (0.18) Dia
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-6 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-6 for code selection.
ATTENTION: The presence of spare keys, override keys, or spare actuators can compromise the integrity of safety interlocking systems.Personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss can result from the introduction of spare keys, override keys or spare actuators into interlocking systems without appropriate management controls, working procedures and alternative protective measures to control their use and availability.
5-33
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches
Notes
5-34
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline Rope Tensioner System (LRTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lifeline 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Lifeline 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Push Buttons 800 E-Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline Rope Tensioner System (LRTS) Specifications Material Tensioner Cable gripper Cable gripper gears Cable P. Bolt
Glass filled nylon Acetal, aluminium alloy, stainless steel Stainless steel Cable to BS 302:1987, wire Ø4.0 Stainless steel
Colour Tensioner Cable gripper Cable P. Bolt
Yellow Yellow/natural Red Natural
Tensioner Cable gripper
140g (0.31lb) 80g (0.17lb)
Weight
Description The LRTS is a unique cable (rope) tensioning system which enables quicker installation of cable actuated systems. Other methods are traditionally time consuming and sometimes awkward to fit. Features of the system include:
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +80°C (13°F to 176°F)
Cable Diameter
4mm (0.15in)
Max. Cable Adjustment
300mm (11.8in)
Tensioner Holding Force
500N (112.5lb) max.
1. Cable adjustment up to 300mm (11.8in) (150mm (5.9in) either side of tensioner) 2. Quick thread and grip of cable with cable grip 3. Cable tidy incorporated into the cable grips 4. Simple tensioning via the setting bolt with allen key.
Gripper Holding Force
280N (63.0lb) max.
Protection
IP 30
Tensioner Adjustment
5mm A/F Allen key
Due to the appeal of quick installation and universal use, the LRTS can also be used for applications other than cable actuated emergency stop systems.
Features • • • • •
Unique cable grip system Can be installed and commissioned in approximately 3 minutes Ease of installation, no specialist tools required Up to 300mm (11.8in) of cable adjustment Cable tidy incorporated into cable grips
Typical Applications
6-2
Four Steps to Install
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline Rope Tensioner System (LRTS) Product Selection Description
Catalogue Number 440E-A13079 440E-A13080 440E-A13081 440E-A13082 440E-A13083 440E-A13084 440E-A13085
Installation kit—5m Installation kit—10m Installation kit—15m Installation kit—20m Installation kit—30m Installation kit—50m Installation kit—75m
Accessories Description
Catalogue Number
Tensioner and Allen wrench only
440E-A17105
Gripper 2 pack
440E-A17107
Gripper 20 pack
440E-A17106
Tensioner, 2 Grippers and Allen wrench
440E-A17112
2 Tensioners, 2 Grippers and Allen wrench
440E-A17140
15m
440E-A17026
30m
440E-A17027
100m
440E-A17028
125m
440E-A17129
300m
440E-A17095
500m
440E-A17032
Red Cable
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 45 (1.77)
90 (3.54) 12 (0.47) Dia.
70 (2.75) Dia.
43 (1.69)
40 (1.57)
Cable Grip
25 (0.98)
67 (2.63)
Tensioner Cable
Cable Grip
P. Bolts Tensioner
6-3
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 3 Specifications
Description The Lifeline 3 is a cable (rope) operated emergency stop device designed to meet the stringent requirements of EN 418 (Safety of Machinery—Emergency Stop Equipment). The Lifeline 3 system can be installed along or around awkward machinery such as conveyors and provides a constant-access emergency-stop facility. The Lifeline 3 is the only device of its kind to incorporate the following features in one unit making it the most versatile cable switch on the market. 1. The positive-mode mechanism ensures that the contacts are immediately latched open on actuation and can only be reset by the intentional action of turning the blue reset knob. The design also protects against nuisance tripping and the effects of thermal expansion. 2. The cable-status indicator makes the system easy to set up and maintain for spans up to 30m (98ft). 3. Four sets of contacts are provided: 2 N.C. + 2 N.O., 3 N.C. + 1 N.O., or 4 N.C. contacts. 4. Sealed to IP67 with rugged construction using die-cast alloy and stainless steel to withstand harsh conditions.
Standards
EN 418, ISO 13850, ISOTR 12100, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 60947-5-5
Approvals
CE marked for all applicable directives, cULus and TUV
Safety Contact
2 N.C. or 3 N.C. or 4 N.C. direct opening action
Designation/Utilization Cat. A600/AC-15 (Ue) (Ie) N600/DC-13 (Ue) (Ie)
600V 500V 240V 120V 1.2A 1.4A 3A 6A 600V 500V 250V 125V 0.4A 0.55A 1.1A 2.2A
Thermal Current (lth)
10 A
Minimum Current
5 V 5 mA
Safety Contact Gap
>2 x 2mm (0.078in)
Rtd. Impulse Withstand Voltage
(Uimp) 2500 V
Pollution Degree
3
Max. Actuation Frequency
1 cycle/s
Case Material
Heavy-duty die-cast aluminium alloy (LM24)
Eye Nut Material
Stainless steel
Indicator Material
Glass filled nylon
Protection
IP67
Conduit Entry
1 x 1/2in NPT, 1 x M20, quickdisconnect style
Operating Temperature
-25°C to +80°C (-13°F to +176°F)
Operation Force
<125N (28.1lb) (300mm deflection)
Tensioning Force to Run Position
103N (23.17lb) typical
Tensioning Force to Lockout
188N (42.3lb) typical
Max. Cable Span Between Switches
30m (98.42ft)
Fixing (mounting holes)
4 x M5
Features
Mounting
Any position
• • • • • •
Mechanical Life
1,000,000
Weight
610g (1.34lb)
Colour
Yellow body, blue reset button
Switches up to 30m (98ft) span Universal mounting and operation Switch lockout on cable pulled and cable slack Cable-status indicator on switch lid Industry standard fixing centres to DIN/EN 50041 Quick disconnect styles available.
Typical Applications
6-4
Important: It is recommended that the LRTS (Lifeline Rope Tensioning System) should be used with the Lifeline 3 cable rope switch.
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 3 Product Selection Catalogue Number Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
1/2in NPT Conduit
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect
2 N.C. 3 N.C. 4 N.C.
2 N.O. 1 N.O. —
440E-D13120 440E-D13114 440E-D13108
440E-D13118 440E-D13112 440E-D13106
440E-D13132 440E-D13124 440E-D13136
Recommended Standard Cable Connector/Cordset (2m (6.5ft) (see page 15-13).
889M-F12X9AE-2
Accessories Description
Catalogue Number P. Bolt Complete M8 x 1.25 Thread Size 58mm (2.28in) Threaded Length 12mm (0.47in) Dia. Eye 95mm (3.74in) Overall Length Lifeline Tensioner Spring 19mm (0.75in) Diameter 210mm (8.27in) Overall Length 50N Force
440E-A17003
440E-A13078
Inside Corner Pulley
440A-A17101
Outside Corner Pulley
440A-A17102
6-5
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 3 Application Details—mm (inches) Lifeline 3
Cable Grips
Tensioner
Polypropylene-covered steel cable 2
1
2 P. Bolts 3
1
F
Tension 125 (5) Indicator
d 2-3m (6-9ft)
2-3m (6-9ft)
125 (5)
Reset Knob 4
2 ≤30m (98ft)
Lifeline 3
Tensioner Spring 1
2
2
1 5
F
Tension 125 (5) Indicator
d 2-3m (6-9ft)
2
2-3m (6-9ft)
125 (5)
6 Wall
≤10m (32ft)
Notes: 1. The first and last P. Bolt must be located as close as possible to the switch eyelet while maintaining adequate clearance (125mm/5in) from the cable grips to allow free movement. This ensures a straight and efficient pulling action on the switches. 2. Additional P. Bolts, spaced 2-3m (6-9ft) apart, help keep the perpendicular pull force, F, and distance, d, within IEC60947-5-5 specifications of 200N (45lbs) and 400mm (15.75in). 3. We recommend using a switch at both cable ends, especially in applications with long cable runs or cable runs going around bends. This helps ensure that the safety function is fulfilled upon actuation of the cable in any direction. 4. ISO13850 (EN418) requires that the full length of cable to be within view when the reset is turned to the run position or the machine must be inspected over the whole length of the cable, both before and after resetting. 5. On shorter cable runs (max 10m), a Lifeline tensioner spring may be used at one end of the span. The installation must be such that the above requirements can be met. When a spring is used, the last P. Bolt must be located as close as possible to the spring while maintaining adequate clearance (125mm/5in) from the cable grips to allow free movement. This is intended to help to ensure that a pull near the end of the cable will be between P. Bolts. This should result in operation of the switch contacts instead of only the spring moving. 6. Careful attention is required for the design of the installation to ensure that the cable is not likely to become trapped or snagged. This is especially important when using a tensioner spring because a cable snag between the location of the pull and the switch could prevent the actuation of the safety function. 7. It is essential that when the installation is complete, a thorough functional test is made. This should include checking all types and directions of pull over the length of the cable as well as checking for slack-cable tripping.
6-6
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 3 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 56 (2.2) 43 (1.69)
10.5 (0.41)
204 (8.03) 4 x M5 mounting holes
60 (2.36)
40 (1.57
30 (1.18)
Typical Wiring Diagrams 4 N.C. style
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. style
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. style
41
31
21
11
43
31
21
11
43
33
21
11
42
32
22
12
44
32
22
12
44
34
22
12
4 N.C. Connector Pinout
9
8 7
12
1 10 2
11
6 5
3 4
Terminal 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 12
11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42
10.5 13.5
0mm 11/12 21/22 31/32 43/44
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. Contact
Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
2 N.C. + 2 N.O.
Contact
Terminal 11 12 21 22 33 34 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O.
Contact N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O.
Ground
Contact Action Contact Open
Contact Closed 4 N.C. style
0mm 3 11/12 21/22 31/32 41/42
6
9
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. style
Cable Slack Cable Tension Cable Pulled Lockout Lockout Range
3
6
9
10.5 13.5
Cable Slack Cable Tension Cable Pulled Lockout Range Lockout
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. style
0mm 11/12 21/22 33/34 43/44
3
Cable Slack Lockout
6
9
Cable Tension Range
10.5 13.5
Cable Pulled Lockout
6-7
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 4 Specifications Standards Approvals Safety Contact
Description The Lifeline 4 cable/push button operated system can be installed along or around awkward machinery such as conveyors and provide a constant emergency stop access. The Lifeline 4 is the only device of its kind to incorporate the following features in one unit making it the most versatile cable switch on the market. 1. The positive mode mechanism ensures that the contacts are immediately latched open on actuation and can only be reset by the intentional action of turning the blue reset knob. The design also protects against nuisance tripping and the effects of thermal expansion. 2. A mushroom head emergency stop button is included on the unit to provide E-Stop access even at the extreme ends of the span. 3. The cable status indicator makes the system easy to set up and maintain for spans up to 125 meters. 4. Four sets of contacts are provided: 2 N.C. + 2 N.O., 3 N.C. + 1 N.O., or 4 N.C. contacts. 5. Sealed to IP 66 with rugged construction using die cast alloy and stainless steel to withstand harsh conditions.
Designation/Utilization Cat. A600/AC-15 (Ue) (Ie) N600/DC-13 (Ue) (Ie) Thermal Current (lth) Minimum Current Safety Contact Gap Rtd. Insulation Voltage Rtd. Impulse withstand Voltage Pollution Degree Max. Actuation Frequency Case Material Eye Nut Material Emergency Stop & Indicator Material Protection Conduit Entry Operating Temperature Operation Force Max Cable Span Between Switches Fixing Mounting Mechanical Life Weight Colour
EN60947-5-5, ISO13850, ISOTR 12100, IEC 60947-5-1, EN 418 CE marked for all applicable directive, cULus and BG 2 N.C. or 3 N.C. or 4 N.C. direct opening action 600V 500V 240V 120V 1.2A 1.4A 3A 6A 600V 500V 250V 125V 0.4A 0.55A 1.1A 2.2A 10A 5V 5mA >2 x 2mm (0.078in) (Ui) 500V (Uimp) 2500V 3 1 Cycle per sec Heavy duty die cast alloy Stainless Steel Acetal IP66 3 x M20, 3 x 1/2in NPT, quickdisconnect style -25°C to 80°C (-13°F to 176°F) <125N (300mm deflection; 28.1lb deflection) 75m (246ft) standard model 75m to 125m extended length model 4 x M5 Any position 1,000,000 630g (1.38lb) Yellow body, Red E-Stop button, Blue reset button
Features • Switches up to 125 meter span • Universal mounting and operation • Lid mounted emergency stop button, designed to conform to EN418 • Switch lockout on cable pulled and cable slack • Cable status indicator on switch lid Lid mounted E-Stop button A mushroom head emergency stop button is included on the unit to provide total E-Stop access even at the extreme ends of the span.
6-8
Cable status indicator on lid The cable status indicator makes the system easy to setup and maintain for spans up to 125 meters.
Important: It is recommended that the LRTS (Lifeline Rope Tensioning System) should be used with the Lifeline 4 cable rope switch.
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 4 Product Selection Catalogue Number Cable Span Up to 75m
75 to 125m
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
1/2in NPT Conduit
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect
2 N.C. 3 N.C. 4 N.C. 2 N.C. 3 N.C. 4 N.C.
2 N.O. 1 N.O. — 2 N.O. 1 N.O. —
440E-L13133 440E-L13043 440E-L13135 440E-L13155 440E-L13152 440E-L13149
440E-L13137 440E-L13042 440E-L13139 440E-L13153 440E-L13150 440E-L13147
440E-L13140 440E-L13141 440E-L13142 440E-L13163 440E-L13164 440E-L13165
Recommended Standard Cable Connector/Cordset (2m (6.5ft) (see page 15-13).
889M-F12X9AE-2
Accessories Description
Catalogue Number
P. Bolt complete M8 x 1.25 Thread Size 58mm (2.28in) Threaded Length 12mm (0.47in) Dia. Eye 95mm (3.74in) Overall Length Tensioner spring 19mm (0.75in) Diameter 210mm (8.27in) Overall Length 50N Force
440E-A17003
440E-A13078
Replacement cover
440E-A13054
Replacement cover no E-Stop
440E-A17115
Inside corner pulley
440A-A17101
Outside corner pulley
440A-A17102
Mounting Bracket
440E-A17130
6-9
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 4 Accessories Description Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot Light—Amber Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 ¼ Bulb (Sold Separately) Indicator, 1/2in NPT Conduit Pilot Light—Amber Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb (Sold Separately) Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot Light—Amber Lens Bayonet Style Insert Use LED Bulb (Sold Separately) Indicator, 1/2in NPT Conduit Pilot Light—Amber Lens Bayonet Style Insert Use LED Bulb (Sold Separately) Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot Light—Red Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb (Sold Separately) Indicator, 1/2in NPT Conduit Pilot Light—Red Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb (Sold Separately) Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot Light—Red Lens Bayonet Style Insert Use LED Bulb (Sold Separately) Indicator, 1/2in NPT Conduit Pilot Light— Red Lens Bayonet Style Insert Use LED Bulb (Sold Separately)
6-10
Catalogue Number 440A-A19001 440A-A19005
440A-A17124
440A-A17122 440A-A19002 440A-A19007
440A-A17125
440A-A17123
Bulb, 24V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.8W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09056
Bulb, 110V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.6W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09055
Bulb, 240V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.75W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09054
Red LED Bulb, 24V AC/DC for Conduit Pilot Light Bayonet Style Insert
800E-N157R
Amber LED Bulb, 24V AC/DC for Conduit Pilot Light Bayonet Style Insert
800E-N157A
Red LED Bulb, 120V AC for Conduit Pilot Light Bayonet Style Insert
800E-N169R
Amber LED Bulb, 120 AC for Conduit Pilot Light Bayonet Style Insert
800E-N169A
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 4 Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. Standard Model
25.5 (1.0)
51 (2.01)
85 (3.35)
37 (1.46) 81 (3.19) min. to 94.5 (3.72) max.
10.5 (0.41)
48 (1.89) 62 (2.44)
115 (4.53)
4 Mounting Holes Clearance for M5 Screws
7.0 (0.28) 101 (3.98)
48 (1.89) 62 (2.44)
Extended Length Models (75 to 125m cable span)
Emergency Stop Button Reset Button 4 Mounting Holes Clearance for M5 Screws
51 (2.0) 85 (3.35)
101 (3.98)
7.0 (0.28)
25.5 (1.0)
51 (2.01)
85 (3.35)
37 (1.46) 81 (3.19) min. to 94.5 (3.72) max.
115 (4.53)
10.5 (0.41)
6-11
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 4 Typical Wiring Diagrams 4 N.C. Connector Pinout
9
8 7
12 5
1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 12
1 10 2
11
6
Terminal
3 4
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. Contact
11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42
Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
2 N.C. + 2 N.O.
Contact
Terminal
Contact
11 12 21 22 33 34 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O.
N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O.
Ground
Contact Action Contact Open
Contact Closed 4 N.C. style
0mm 3 11/12 21/22 31/32 41/42
6
9
3 N.C. + 1 N.O. style
10.5 13.5
Cable Slack Cable Tension Cable Pulled Lockout Range Lockout
6-12
0mm 11/12 21/22 31/32 43/44
3
6
9
10.5 13.5
Cable Slack Cable Tension Cable Pulled Lockout Range Lockout
2 N.C. + 2 N.O. style
0mm 11/12 21/22 33/34 43/44
3
Cable Slack Lockout
6
9
Cable Tension Range
10.5 13.5
Cable Pulled Lockout
Emergency Stop Devices
Cable (Rope) Pull Switches Lifeline 4 Application Detail—mm (inches) Mounting Specifications Lifeline 4
Cable Grips
Steel Cable
Tensioner
P. Bolts
E-Stop Button
Tension 300 (11.81)
Reset Knob
2-3m (6.5-9ft) ≤75m (246ft)
Indicator
Mounting Specifications with Spring Tensioner Lifeline 4
Cable Grips
Steel Cable
Tensioner
P. Bolts
Lifeline Tensioner Spring
Tension 300 (11.81)
Wall
2-3m (6.5-9ft) ≤10m (32ft)
Indicator
Mounting Specifications for Extended Length Models Lifeline 4
Cable Grips
Steel Cable
Tensioner
Tensioner
P. Bolts
E-Stop Button
Tension 300 (11.81) Indicator
Reset Knob
2-3m (6.5-9ft) 75-125m (246-410ft)
6-13
Emergency Stop Devices
Push Buttons 800 E-Stops ! Specifications—22.5mm
Back of Panel Components
Front of Panel (Operators)
Electrical Ratings
Mechanical Ratings Description Vibration (assembled to panel) Shock Degree of protection Mechanical design life (typical)
Environmental Temperature range (operating): per IEC 947-1 Temperature range (short term storage): per IEC 947-1 Materials Bushings, mounting rings
Bezels
Seals: diaphragm style Seals: lip and flat gasket styles Illuminated lenses
Plastic (800EP/ES)
Metal (800EM/EB)
10 to 2000Hz, 1.52mm displacement (peak-to-peak) max./10g max. 1/2 cycle sine wave for 11ms and no damage at 100g IP66 (NEMA Type 3, IP66 (NEMA Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13) 3R, 4, 12, 13) 500,000 cycles: mushroom 100,000 cycles: operators mushroom key operators (plastic), push-pull/twist 50,000 cycles: operators mushroom key operators (metal) -25°C to +55°C (-13°F to +131°F) ➋
Description Standard contact block ratings➋
Thermal current
Terminal marking Wire capacity (screw terminal)
Dielectric strength (min) Electrical design life cycles Electrical shock protection: Per IEC 529 Mechanical Ratings Vibration
-40°C to +70°C (85°C max. for 24 hours) -40°F to +158°F (185°F max. for 24 hours) Shock Glass-filled thermoplastic polyester, rated UL94 V-O Glass-filled thermoplastic polyester, rated UL94 V-O Silicone rubber Nitrile rubber
Die-cast zinc; dark olive chromate finish Anodized aluminum (EB, EM, ES line)
Transparent nylon Type 12
Contact block mechanical design Contact operation
Operating forces (typical) Environmental Temperature range Operating ➋➌ Short term storage ➌ Materials Springs Electrical contacts: Standard Low voltage
! See Performance Data: refer to page Important-2 of the A113 Industrial Controls catalogue. ➋ Operating temperature below 0°C (32°F) are based on the absence of freezing moisture and liquids. ➌ Per IEC 947-1. ➍ UL File & Guide Number E14840.
6-14
2-Across Style 3-Across Style NEMA, EEMAC NEMA, A600, A600, Q600, VDE Q600, 600V AC; 0660; AC15, DC 13 AC15, DC 13 to to IEC 947 IEC 947 10A max. 10A max. without continuous current enclosure (40°C to UL508, CSA22.2 (104°F) ambient) 6A #14, IEC 947, VDE with enclosure 0660, part 200 (60°C (140°F)) Conforming to CENELEC EN50013 Min of (1) #20AWG #18 to #12AWG Max of (2) (0.75 to 2.5mm 2) #14AWG or (1) Max (2) #14AWG #12AWG or (1) #12 AWG 2,200V for one minute 1,000,000 at 2A Finger-safe conforming to IP2X
10 to 2000Hz 1.52mm displacement (peakto-peak) max./10g max. 6hr 1/2 cycle sine wave for 11ms and no damage at 100g min 5,000,000 cycles
10 to 150Hz 0.15mm displacement (peakto-peak) max./2g max. 6hr 1/2 cycle sine wave for 11ms and no damage at 50g max
N.C. slow make, double break (positive opening); N.C.L.B. late break, double break (positive opening) 2.78N: all contact 2.6N: each N.C. blocks contact block
-25°C to +55°C (-13°F to +131°F) -25°C to +55°C (70°C max for 24 hrs) (-13°F to +131°F (158°F max for 24 hrs)) Stainless steel and zinc coated music wire
Silver nickel alloy Fine silver Palladium silver Gold-plated over alloy: spanner; gold- silver plated silver nickel: stationary contacts Terminals: Screw type Plated steel Push-on type Agency approvals Approvals UL listed ➍/CSA certified Standard conformity UL508, UL486E NEMA ICS-1 and CSA22.2 #14, ICS-2 IEC 204-1, NEMA ICS-1 and 947; SEV 1005, ICS-2 (1983), IEC 1093; VDE 0113, 144, IEC 947-1, IEC 0660 Part 201; BS 947-5, VDE 0550, 4794; CEE 24; UL VDE 0660, Part 200 486E, UL 508, CSA22.2 #14
Emergency Stop Devices
Push Buttons 800 E-Stops Product Selection—22.5mm 2-Position Push-Pull Operators, Non Illuminated—Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull
40mm Trigger Action Twist-to-Release Mushroom
Colour
40mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom
Operator Material Plastic Metal
40mm Mushroom Operator Twist-to-Release — Round (Trigger Action) !
Plastic
Red
40mm Push-Pull Mushroom
Push-Pull Twist-to-Release — Round ➋
Metal Plastic
Push-Pull — Round ➋
Metal
800E-15YE112 Legend Plate for 40mm Ca
Catalogue Number 800EP-MTS44 800EM-MTS44 800EP-MT4 800EM-MT4 800ES-MP24 800EM-MP24
2-Position Trigger Action Operators, Non Illuminated—Key Release ➌
40mm Key Release Mushroom
60mm Key Release Mushroom
2 Position Trigger Action ! Mushroom Operator
Colour
Ronis Key Lock Red Zadi Key Lock
800E-16YE112 Legend Plate for 60mm Cap
Size
Catalogue Number
40mm—Round
800EP-MKR44
60mm—Round
800EP-MKR64
40mm—Round
800EP-MKZ44
60mm—Round
800EP-MKZ64
Back-of-Panel Components, Non Illuminated Operators Mounting Latch and Contact Block Combination
2-Across
3-Across
Mounting 2-Across
3-Across
Contact ➊➋ 1 N.C. Late break
Catalogue Number 800E-2LX01L
1 N.O. - 1 N.C. Late break
800E-2LX11L
1 N.C. Late break
800E-3LX01L
1 N.O. - 1 N.C. Late break
800E-3LX11L 800E-2LX01LS
2-Across 1 N.C. Self-monitoring 3-Across
800E-3LX01S
! Trigger action operators are compliant with EN418 standards using standard N.C., N.C. Late Break, or N.C. Self-Monitoring contact blocks. Key Release operators are IP66, Type 4/13. ➋ Emergency stop push buttons are compliant with EN 418 standard when using N.C. Late break (N.C.L.B.) contact blocks. ➌ Key release operators are IP66, Type 4 and 13.
6-15
Emergency Stop Devices
Push Buttons 800 E-Stops Product Selection—22.5mm 2-Position Red Push-Pull Operators, Illuminated —Mushroom ➊
40mm Mushroom Push-Pull
800E-15YE112 Legend Plate for 40mm Cap
60mm Jumbo Mushroom Push-Pull
Operator Material
Size
Catalogue Number
40mm
800ES-LMP24
60mm
800ES-LMJP24
40mm
800EM-LMP24
60mm
800EM-LMJP24
Plastic
Metal Back-of-Panel Components, Illuminated Operators 2-Across (5 ckts. max.)
Mounting
3-Across (4 ckts. max.)
Type
Volts
Catalogue Number
24 AC/DC
800E-2DL3
120 AC/DC
800E-2DL5
24 AC/DC
800E-2DL3R
120 AC
800E-2DL5R
24 AC/DC
800E-3DL3
120 AC/DC
800E-3DL5
24 AC/DC
800E-3DL3R
120 AC
800E-3DL5R 800E-2TL5
Incandescent 2-Across LED (red)
Incandescent Full Voltage Power Module with Latch
3-Across LED (red)
2-Across (3 ckts. max.)
3-Across (2 ckts. max.)
Incandescent 2-Across LED (red) Incandescent 3-Across LED (red)
Transformer Power Module with Latch 2-Across
24 AC/DC 120 AC/DC
800E-2TL7
24 AC/DC
800E-2TL5R
120 AC
800E-2TL7R
24 AC/DC
800E-3TL5
120 AC/DC
800E-3TL7
24 AC/DC
800E-3TL5R
120 AC
800E-3TL7R
3-Across
800E-2X01L
2-Across Late Break !
3-Across Contact Blocks ! Emergency stop push buttons are compliant with EN 418 standard when using N.C.L.B. contact blocks.
6-16
1 N.C. Late break 800E-3X01L
Emergency Stop Devices
Push Buttons 800 E-Stops ! Specifications—30.5mm Electrical Ratings Dielectric strength Electrical design life cycles Mechanical Ratings Vibration
Shock Degree of protection
2200V for one minute 1,000,000 at max. rated load 10 to 2000Hz 1.52mm displacement (peak-to-peak) max./10g max. (except Logic Reed) 1/2 cycle sine wave for 11ms ≥25g (contact fragility) and no damage at 100g Type 1, 4, 4X, 12, 13; watertight/oiltight IEC 529 IP66/65
Mechanical design life cycles 250,000 min. (Push-pull/twist-to-release) Contact operation Shallow, mini, and low voltage contact blocks: Slow, double make and break. Typical operating forces 7.5lbs max. push or pull 2-position push-pull Environment Temperature range Operating➋ -40°C to +55°C (-40°F to +131°F) Storage -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F) Standard Contact Ratings
Maximum thermal continuous current Ith 10A AC/2.5A DC. Bulletin 800T units with 800T-XA contacts have ratings as follows: Max. Opertnl. Volts Ue
Utilization Category IEC
NEMA
AC 600
AC-15
A600
DC 600
DC-13
Q600
Rated Operational Currents Volts Ue 120 to 600 72 to 120 24 to 72 28 to 600 24 to 28 ➌
Make
Break
7200VA 720VA 60A 720VA 60A 10A 69VA 2.5A
! Performance Data: see publication A113, page Important-2. ➋ Operating temperatures below freezing are based on the absence of moisture and liquids. ➌ For applications below 24V/24mA, PenTUFF contacts are recommended.
6-17
Emergency Stop Devices
Push Buttons 800 E-Stops Product Selection—30.5mm Emergency Stop Operators — 2-Position Red Non Illuminated
2-Position Push-Pull/Twist
2-Position Push-Pull
Operator Position
Contacts Maintained Out Maintained In
N.C.L.B. ! Closed Open
Enclosure Protection
Release
Catalogue Number
Push-Pull
800T-FX6D4
Type 4 & 13 800T-FXT6D4 Push-Pull/Twist 800H-FRXT6D4
Type 4, 4X & 13 Push-Pull N.O. Open Closed N.C.L.B. ! Closed Open
800T-FXT6A1 Push-Pull/Twist 800H-FRXT6A1
Type 4, 4X & 13 N.C.L.B.! Closed Open N.C.L.B.! Closed Open
Push-Pull
800T-FX6A5
Type 4 & 13 800T-FXT6A5 Push-Pull/Twist 800H-FRXT6A5
Type 4, 4X & 13 Push-Pull S.M.C.B. ➊➋ Closed Open
800T-FX6A1
Type 4 & 13
800TC-FX6D4S
Type 4 & 13 800TC-FXT6D4S Push-Pull/Twist 800HC-FRXT6D4S
Type 4, 4X & 13 Push-Pull N.O. Open Closed S.M.C.B. ➊➋ Closed Open
800TC-FXT6A1S Push-Pull/Twist 800HC-FRXT6A1S
Type 4, 4X & 13 Push-Pull S.M.C.B. Closed Open S.M.C.B.➊➋ Closed Open
800TC-FX6A1S
Type 4 & 13
800TC-FX6A5S
Type 4 & 13 800TC-FXT6A5S Push-Pull/Twist Type 4, 4X & 13
800HC-FRXT6A5S
Note: Emergency stop push buttons are compliant with EN-418 and IEC 60947-5-5 Standards when using N.C.L.B. contact blocks. ➊ Normally closed late break contact. When button is pushed from the OUT to IN position, the mechanical detent action of the operator occurs before electrical contacts change state. When the button is pulled from the IN to the OUT position, the electrical contacts change state before the mechanical detent occurs. ➋ The Self-Monitoring Contact Block (S.M.C.B.) is composed of a N.C.L.B. contact wired in series with a N.O. monitoring contact. The N.O. monitoring contact automatically closes when the S.M.C.B. is properly installed onto the E-Stop operator. If the S.M.C.B. is separated from the E-Stop operator, the N.O. monitoring contact will automatically open.
6-18
Emergency Stop Devices
Push Buttons 800 E-Stops Product Selection—30.5mm 2-Position Red Illuminated, Push-Pull and Push-Pull/Twist Release Units
Illuminated 2-Position Push-Pull/Twist
Illuminated 2-Position Push-Pull
Operator Position
Contacts N.O. N.C.L.B.➊➋
Maintained Maintained Out In
Type
Lamp
Volts
Enclosure Protection
Release Push-Pull
120 AC/DC Incan-descent 24 AC/DC Full Voltage
Type 4 & 13 Type 4, 4X & 13
800H-FRXTQ10RA1
Push-Pull
800T-FXQ24RA1
Type 4, 4X & 13
LED
800H-FRXTQ24RA1
Push-Pull
800T-FXQH10RA1
Push-Pull/ Twist Push-Pull
24 AC/DC Open Closed
Closed Open 120 AC Incan-descent
Type 4 & 13 Type 4, 4X & 13
800T-FXTQH10RA1 800H-FRXTQH10RA1 800T-FXQH24RA1 800T-FXTQH24RA1
Push-Pull/ Twist
800H-FRXTQH24RA1
Push-Pull
800T-FXP16RA1
Type 4 & 13 Type 4, 4X & 13
800T-FXTQ24RA1
Push-Pull/ Twist
Type 4 & 13 120 AC
800T-FXTQ10RA1
Push-Pull/ Twist
Type 4 & 13 Type 4, 4X & 13
Catalogue Number 800T-FXQ10RA1
Push-Pull/ Twist
800T-FXTP16RA1 800H-FRXTP16RA1 800T-FXP26RA1
240 AC Transformer
Type 4 & 13
Push-Pull
Type 4, 4X & 13
Push-Pull/ Twist
Type 4 & 13
Push-Pull
Type 4, 4X & 13
Push-Pull/ Twist
Type 4 & 13
Push-Pull
Type 4, 4X & 13
Push-Pull/ Twist
800T-FXTP26RA1 800H-FRXTP26RA1 800T-FXPH16RA1
120 AC LED
800T-FXTPH16RA1 800H-FRXTPH16RA1 800T-FXPH26RA1
240 AC
800T-FXTPH26RA1 800H-FRXTPH26RA1
Note: A jumbo or large legend plate is recommended if space allows. Note: Emergency stop push buttons are compliant with EN-418 and IEC 60947-5-5 Standards when using N.C.L.B. contact blocks. ➊ Normally closed late break contact. When button is pushed from the OUT to IN position, the mechanical detent action of the operator occurs before electrical contacts change state. When the button is pulled from the IN to the OUT position, the electrical contacts change state before the mechanical detent occurs. ➋ Consult your local Allen-Bradley sales office for availability of illuminated E-Stops with Self Monitoring Contact Blocks (S.M.C.B.s).
6-19
Emergency Stop Devices
Push Buttons 800 E-Stops Accessories Type Enclosure Plastic (IP66, NEMA 4/4X/13 Base Mount For use with 22.5mm Push Buttons
Square Legend Plate
Style
Catalogue Number 800E-1PY
1 Hole
800E-2PY
2 Hole Yellow 3 Hole
800E-3PY
5 Hole
800E-5PY
For 800E Buttons Aluminum
Aluminum, Blank
For 800 E Buttons
Yellow, Emergency Stop
800E-19AE100
800E-15YE112
40mm Circular Legend Plate 60mm Circular Legend Plate
For 800T Buttons Circular Legend Plate For 800H
6-20
Colour
800E-16YE112
Yellow, Blank
800T-X646
Yellow, Emergency Stop
800T-X646EM
Yellow, Blank
800H-W690
Position Interlock Switches Safety Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Small Plastic Senator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Large Metal Senator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 802T Direct Opening Action NEMA-Style Switches . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Imp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Small Plastic Senator Specifications Standards
Category
Approvals Safety Contacts
Description The small plastic Senator safety limit switches conform to EN 50047 and have been developed to provide a range of options including metal or plastic cases in various sizes, a choice of snap acting, slow break/make with 2 or 3 contact configurations and a choice of actuator heads. The Senator range offers the option of rotating the head in 90° increments before installation to allow ease of mounting. Allen-Bradley/Guardmaster limit switches can be used in other applications other than guard doors, for example on moving machine beds, crane arms, lifts, elevators, etc. Operation of these limit switches is achieved by the sliding action of the guard or other moving object deflecting the plunger or lever. For safety applications it is important that upon actuation, the guard or other moving objects should not pass completely over the switch and allow the plunger or lever to return to its original position.
Features • Large selection of actuator heads • Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts • Snap-acting, slow make before break or slow break before make contact blocks • Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. 3 N.C., 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. • Conforms to EN 50047, EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292 and EN 60204-1
Auxiliary Contacts Designation/Utilization Cat. A600/AC-15 (Ue) (Ie) N600/DC-13 (Ue) (Ie) Min Current Thermal Current (lth) Rated Insulation Voltage Rated Impulse withstand Volt Travel for Positive Opening Max Switching Speed Min Switching Speed Max Switching Frequency Case Material Roller Material Enclosure Protection Operating Temperature Pollution Degree ➊ Mech. Life Expectancy
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems cULus, TUV and CE marked for all applicable directives 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C., 3 N.C. or 4 N.C. slow acting 1 N.O. (with 2 N.C.) 600V 500V 240V 120V 1.2A 1.4A 3A 6A 600V 500V 250V 125V 0.4A 0.55A 1.1A 2.2A 5V, 5mA, DC 10A 600V AC 2500V Various (see Product Selection table) 250mm/s 100mm/min 6000 operation per hour UL approved glass-filled polybutylene terephthalate Various polymers IP 66 Min -25°C (-18°F) Max 80°C (+176°F) 3 1 x 107 M20 or 1/2in NPT 2 x M4 Any position Red
Conduit Entry Fixing Mounting Colour
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation.
Operating Examples
Cam Displacement (A) 30°
Adjustable Lever Arms 30°
60°
30°
60°
30°
60°
30°
60°
Applications Types
The actuating cam should be profiled at 30° for optimum operation. (Note: Plunger-type switches operate from a flat profile.
7-2
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Small Plastic Senator Product Selection Contact Operator Type
Safety
Aux.
Contact Type
Typical Force/ Torque to Operate
Contact Opening Characteristics Open Closed Positive Opening Point 2.7 8N
0mm
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
4.0
Catalogue Number 1/2in NPT Conduit
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect ➊
440P-CRPS11E
440P-CRPS11B
440P-CRPS11D4
440P-CRPB12E
440P-CRPB12B
440P-CRPB12R6
440P-CRPB03E
440P-CRPB03B
440P-CRPB03R6
440P-CRPM12E
440P-CRPM12B
440P-CRPM12R6
440P-CDPS11E
440P-CDPS11B
440P-CDPS11D4
440P-CDPB12E
440P-CDPB12B
440P-CDPB12R6
440P-CDPB03E
440P-CDPB03B
440P-CDPB03R6
440P-CDPM12E
440P-CDPM12B
440P-CDPM12R6
440P-CHLS11E
440P-CHLS11B
440P-CHLS11D4
440P-CHLB12E
440P-CHLB12B
440P-CHLB12R6
440P-CHLB03E
440P-CHLB03B
440P-CHLB03R6
440P-CHLM12E
440P-CHLM12B
440P-CHLM12R6
6.2
11-12
5N
23-24 11-12 23-24 2.4
0mm
2 N.C
1 N.O
BBM
6N
2.1 5N
3.3
6.2
11-12 21-22 33-34 3.0
0mm
3 N.C.
—
—
5N
1.9 5N
3.3
6.2
11- 12 21- 22 31- 32
Roller Plunger
0mm
2 N.C
1 N.O
MBB
6N
2.1 5N
3.3
6.2
11-12 21-22 33-34 1.3 2.7 7N
0mm
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
4.0
6.4
11-12
5N
23-24 11-12 23-24 2.1
0mm 0N
2.0 5N
3.3
6.4
11-12
2 N.C
1 N.O
BBM
6N
21-22 33-34 3.0 7N
0mm 0N
3 N.C.
—
—
5N
2.1 5N
3.3
6.4
11- 12 21- 22 31- 32
Dome Plunger.
0mm 0N
1.9
3.3
6.4
11- 12
2 N.C
1 N.O
MBB
6N
21- 22 33- 34 1.3 5N
0mm
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
3.5 6N
6.5
10.0
11-12
5N
23-24 11-12 23-24 2.6
0mm
2 N.C
1 N.O
BBM
6N
3.1 2N
5. 3
10.0
11- 12 21- 22 33- 34 4.6
0m m
3 N.C.
—
—
5N
2.9 2N
5.3
10.0
11- 12 21- 22 31- 32
Hinge Lever
0m m
3.0
5. 3
10.0
11-12
2 N.C
1 N.O
MBB
6N
21-22 33-34 2. 5 2N
Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 4-pin, DC Micro (M12) connector. See page 15-10 for additional lengths. Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 6-pin AC Micro connector. See page 15-10 for additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-2 889R-F6ACA-2
➊ D4 suffix uses a 4-pin DC Micro (M12) connector. R6 suffix uses a 6-pin AC Micro (dual keyway) connector.
7-3
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Small Plastic Senator Product Selection (continued) Contact Operator Type
Safety
Aux.
Contact Type
Typical Force/ Torque to Operate
Contact Opening Characteristics Open Closed Positive Opening Point 88˚
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
31˚ 31˚ 50˚ 15 cNm 0˚ 15cNm
50˚
0.15Nm
BBM
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect ➊
440P-CSLS11E
440P-CSLS11B
440P-CSLS11D4
440P-CSLB12E
440P-CSLB12B
440P-CSLB12R6
440P-CSLB03E
440P-CSLB03B
440P-CSLB03R6
440P-CSLM12E
440P-CSLM12B
440P-CSLM12R6
440P-COHS11E
440P-COHS11B
440P-COHS11D4
440P-COHB12E
440P-COHB12B
440P-COHB12R6
440P-COHB03E
440P-COHB03B
440P-COHB03R6
440P-COHM12E 440P-COHM12B
440P-COHM12R6
88˚
23-24 11-12 23-24
88˚
1 N.O
1/2in NPT Conduit
11-12
16˚
2 N.C
Catalogue Number
0.14Nm
16˚
27˚ 27˚ 47˚ 47˚ 10cNm 0˚ 10cNm
88˚
11- 12 21- 22 33- 34 37˚
88˚
3 N.C.
—
—
0.14Nm
47˚
37˚
27˚ 0˚ 27˚ 47˚ 10cNm 10cNm
88˚
11- 12 21- 22 31- 32
Short Lever 88˚
47˚ 26˚
47˚
26˚
0˚
88˚
11- 12
2 N.C
1 N.O
MBB
0.14Nm
21- 22 33- 34 37˚ 10cNm
4.2 5N
0mm
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
37˚ 10cNm
6.5
9.0
11-12
5N
23-24 11-12 23-24 3.0
3.9 2N
0mm
2 N.C
1 N.O
BBM
6N
5.3
9.0
11-12 21-22 33-34 5.6
3.8 2N
0m m
3 N.C.
—
—
5N
5.3
9. 0
11- 12 21- 22 31- 32
Offset Hinge
4.0
0mm
5.3
9.0
11-12
2 N.C
1 N.O
MBB
6N
21-22 33-34 3.1 2N
88˚
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
50˚
31˚ 31˚ 50˚ 15 cNm 0˚ 15cNm
0.15Nm
23-24 11-12
88˚
1 N.O
BBM
440P-CALS11E
440P-CALS11B
440P-CALS11D4
440P-CALB12E
440P-CALB12B
440P-CALB12R6
440P-CALB03E
440P-CALB03B
440P-CALB03R6
440P-CALM12E
440P-CALM12B
440P-CALM12R6
23-24 16˚
2 N.C
88˚
11-12
0.14Nm
16˚
27˚ 27˚ 47˚ 47˚ 10 cNm 0˚ 10cNm
88˚
11- 12 21- 22 33- 34 37˚
37˚
27˚
27˚ 88˚
3 N.C.
—
—
0.14Nm
47˚
10cNm
0˚
10cNm
47˚
88˚
11- 12 21- 22 31- 32
Adjustable Lever ➋
88˚
47˚ 26˚
0˚
26˚
47˚
88˚
11- 12
2 N.C
1 N.O
MBB
0.14Nm
21- 22 33- 34 17˚ 10cNm
17˚ 10cNm
Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 4-pin, DC Micro (M12) connector. See page 15-10 for additional lengths. Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 6-pin AC Micro connector. See page 15-10 for additional lengths. ➊ D4 suffix uses a 4-pin DC Micro (M12) connector. R6 suffix uses a 6-pin AC Micro (dual keyway) connector. ➋ Not positive opening
7-4
889D-F4AC-2 889R-F6ACA-2
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Small Plastic Senator Product Selection (continued) Contact Operator Type
Safety
Aux.
Contact Type
Typical Force/ Torque to Operate
Contact Opening Characteristics Open Closed Positive Opening Point
1 N.C
1 N.O
31˚ 31˚ 50˚ 15 cNm 0˚ 15cNm
50˚
88˚
Snap Acting
0.15Nm
BBM
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect ➊
440P-CRRS11E
440P-CRRS11B
440P-CRRS11D4
440P-CRRB12E
440P-CRRB12B
440P-CRRB12R6
440P-CRRB03E
440P-CRRB03B
440P-CRRB03R6
440P-CRRM12E
440P-CRRM12B
440P-CRRM12R6
88˚
23-24 11-12 23-24
88˚
1 N.O
1/2in NPT Conduit
11-12
16˚
2 N.C
Catalogue Number
0.14Nm
16˚
27˚ 27˚ 47˚ 47˚ 10 cNm 0˚ 10cNm
88˚
11- 12 21- 22 33- 34 37˚
88
3 N.C.
—
—
0.14Nm
47˚
37˚
27˚ 0˚ 27˚ 47˚ 10c Nm 10cNm
88˚
11-12 21-22 31-32
Rubber Roller ➋ 88˚
47˚ 26˚
0˚
26˚
47˚
88˚
11- 12
2 N.C
1 N.O
MBB
0.14Nm
21- 22 33- 34 17˚ 10 cNm
17˚ 10c Nm
Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 4-pin, DC Micro (M12) connector. See page 15-10 for additional lengths. Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 6-pin AC Micro connector. See page 15-10 for additional lengths.
889D-F4AC-2 889R-F6ACA-2
➊ D4 suffix uses a 4-pin DC Micro (M12) connector. R6 suffix uses a 6-pin AC Micro (dual keyway) connector. ➋ Not positive opening
Typical Wiring Diagrams ➌ Two-Circuit Type D4 4-Pin Micro Connector 1 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
Terminal 1
Contact
11 N.C.
Same Polarity
11
12
23
24
2
1
3
12
3
4
2
23 N.O.
4
24
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
Three-Circuit Type R6 6-Pin Micro Connector 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. Connector Pinout
32
31
34
33
22
21
22
21
12
11 3 N.C.
12
11
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Auxiliary Circuit (N.O.) Safety Circuit 2 (N.C.) Safety Circuit 1 (N.C.)
Terminal 1
11
5
12
2
21
6
22
3
33
4
34
Contact N.C.
N.C.
N.O.
3 N.C. Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32
Contact N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
➌ See Product Selection tables for positive opening circuits.
7-5
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Small Plastic Senator Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 11.5 (0.45) 9.3 (0.36) Dia. 28 (1.10)
12 (0.47)
4.0 (0.15)
4.0 (0.15)
17 (0.66)
90 (3.54) Max.
20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
79 (3.11) Max.
20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Roller Plunger
Dome Plunger
41 (1.61) 17.5 (0.68) Dia.
5 (0.19)
15 (0.59) Dia.
50 (1.96)
38 (1.49)
4.0 (0.15)
4.0 (0.15) 112 (4.4)
100 (3.93) Max. 20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Hinge Lever
7-6
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Short Lever
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Small Plastic Senator Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 40 (1.57) 17.5 (0.68) Dia.
12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) Dia. 45-90 (1.77-3.54)
42 (1.65)
4.0 (0.15)
4.0 (0.15)
106 (4.17) Min.
103 (4.05) 17 (0.66)
20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
31 (1.22) 31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Offset Hinge
Adjustable Lever 40.7 (1.60)
50 (1.96) Dia.
45-77 (1.77-3.03)
133 (5.23) Min.
4.0 (0.15)
20 (0.78) 22 (0.86)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Rubber Roller
7-7
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Large Metal Senator Specifications Standards
Category
Approvals Safety Contacts
Description The large metal Senator safety limit switches conform to EN 50041 and have been developed to provide a range of options including metal or plastic cases in various sizes, a choice of snap acting, slow break/make with 2, 3 or 4 contact configurations and a choice of actuator heads. The Senator range offers the option of rotating the head in 90° increments before installation to allow ease of mounting. Allen-Bradley/Guardmaster limit switches can be used in other applications other than guard doors, for example on moving machine beds, crane arms, lifts, elevators, etc. Operation of these limit switches is achieved by the sliding action of the guard or other moving object deflecting the plunger or lever. For safety applications it is important that upon actuation, the guard or other moving objects should not pass completely over the switch and allow the plunger or lever to return to its original position.
Features • Large selection of actuator heads • Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts • Snap-acting, slow make before break or slow break before make contact blocks • Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. 3 N.C., 2 N.C. + 2 N.O., 3 N.C. + 1 N.O., or 4 N.C. • Conforms to EN 50041, EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292 and EN 60204-1
Auxiliary Contacts Designation/Utilization Cat. A600/AC-15 (Ue) (Ie) N600/DC-13 (Ue) (Ie) Min Current Thermal Current (lth) Rated Insulation Voltage Rated Impulse withstand Volt Travel for Positive Opening Max Switching Speed Min Switching Speed Max Switching Frequency Case Material Actuator Material Enclosure Protection Operating Temperature Pollution Degree ➊ Mechanical Life Expectancy
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems cULus, TUV and CE marked for all applicable directives 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C., 3 N.C. or 4 N.C. slow acting 1 N.O. (with 2 N.C.) 600V 500V 240V 120V 1.2A 1.4A 3A 6A 600V 500V 250V 125V 0.4A 0.55A 1.1A 2.2A 5V, 5mA, DC 10A 600V AC 2500V Various (see Product Selection table) 250mm/s 100mm/min 6000 operation per hour Die cast alloy See “Product Selection” table IP 66 Min -25°C (-18°F) Max 80°C (+176°F) 3
Conduit Entry Fixing Mounting Colour
1 x 107 M20 or 1/2in NPT 2 x M5 Any position Red
➊ Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to condensation.
Operating Examples
Cam Displacement (A) 30°
Adjustable Lever Arms 30°
60°
30°
60°
30°
60°
30°
60°
Applications Types
The actuating cam should be profiled at 30° for optimum operation. (Note: Plunger-type switches operate from a flat profile.
7-8
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Large Metal Senator Product Selection Contacts Operator Type
Safety
Aux.
Contact Type
Typical Force/ Torque to Operate
Contact Opening Characteristics Open Closed Positive Opening Point 2.3 10N
0mm
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
4.5
Catalogue Number 1/2in NPT Conduit
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect ➊
440P-MRPS11E
440P-MRPS11B
440P-MRPS11N5
440P-MRPB04E
440P-MRPB04B
440P-MRPB04M9
440P-MRPB13E
440P-MRPB13B
440P-MRPB13M9
440P-MRPB22E
440P-MRPB22B
440P-MRPB22M9
440P-MDPS11E
440P-MDPS11B
440P-MDPS11N5
440P-MDPB04E
440P-MDPB04B
440P-MDPB04M9
440P-MDPB13E
440P-MDPB13B
440P-MDPB13M9
440P-MDPB22E
440P-MDPB22B
440P-MDPB22M9
440P-MSLS11E
440P-MSLS11B
440P-MSLS11N5
440P-MSLB04E
440P-MSLB04B
440P-MSLB04M9
440P-MSLB13E
440P-MSLB13B
440P-MSLB13M9
440P-MSLB22E
440P-MSLB22B
440P-MSLB22M9
7.5
11-12
13N
23-24 11-12 23-24 1.3
1.4 10N
0mm
4 N.C
—
—
11N
4.0
7.5
11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42
1.4 10N
0mm
4.0
7.5
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O
BBM
11N
21-22 31-32 43-44 1.9
Metal Roller Plunger
1.5 10N
0mm
4.0
7.5
11-12
2 N.C
2 N.O
MBB
11N
21-22 33-34 43-44 1.9
2.7 10N
0mm
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
4.5
7.5
11-12
13N
23-24 11-12 23-24 1.6
1.7 10N
0mm
4 N.C
—
—
11N
4.0
7.5
11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42
1.6 10N
0mm
4.0
7.5
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O
BBM
11N
21-22 31-32 43-44 2.0
Metal Dome Plunger
1.5 10N
0mm
4.0
7.5
11-12
2 N.C
2 N.O
MBB
11N
21-22 33-34 43-44 2.0
83˚
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
54˚
35˚ 35˚ 54˚ 35 cNm 0˚ 35cNm
0.34Nm
23-24 11-12 23-24 15˚
83˚
4 N.C
—
—
83˚
11-12
0.20Nm
44˚
15˚
21˚ 0˚ 21˚ 44˚ 35cNm 10cNm
83˚
11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42
83˚
20˚ 20˚ 44˚ 44˚ 35cNm 0˚ 35cNm
83˚
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O
BBM
0.34Nm
21-22 31-32 43-44 26˚
Metal Short Lever
83˚
26˚
20˚ 20˚ 44˚ 44˚ 35cNm 0˚ 35cNm
83˚
11-12
2 N.C
2 N.O
MBB
0.34Nm
21-22 33-34 43-44 26˚
26˚
Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 5-pin mini connector. See page 15-12 for additional lengths. Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 12-pin 9 wire. See page 15-12 for additional lengths.
889N-F5AE-6F 889M-F12X9AE-2
➊ N5 = 5-pin mini connector. M9 = 12-pin M23 connector (use 9 wire).
7-9
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Large Metal Senator Product Selection (continued) Contacts Operator Type
Typical Force/ Torque to Operate
Contact Opening Characteristics Open Closed
Catalogue Number 1/2in NPT Conduit
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect ➊
440P-MALS11E
440P-MALS11B
440P-MALS11N5
440P-MALB04E
440P-MALB04B
440P-MALB04M9
440P-MALB13E
440P-MALB13B
440P-MALB13M9
440P-MALB22E
440P-MALB22B
440P-MALB22M9
440P-MARS11E
440P-MARS11B
440P-MARS11N5
440P-MARB04E
440P-MARB04B
440P-MARB04M9
440P-MARB13E
440P-MARB13B
440P-MARB13M9
440P-MARB22E 33-34 43-44 Metal Rod 26˚ 26˚ Lever ➋ Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 5-pin mini connector. See page 15-12 for additional lengths. Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 12-pin 9 wire. See page 15-12 for additional lengths.
440P-MARB22B
440P-MARB22M9
Safety
Aux.
Contact Type
Positive Opening Point 83˚
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
54˚
35˚ 35˚ 54˚ 35 cNm 0˚ 35cNm
0.34Nm
23-24 11-12 23-24 15˚
83˚
4 N.C
—
—
83˚
11-12
0.20Nm
15˚
21˚ 0˚ 21˚ 44˚ 44˚ 35cNm 10cNm
83˚
11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42
83˚
20˚ 20˚ 44˚ 44˚ 35cNm 0˚ 35cNm
83˚
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O
BBM
0.34Nm
21-22 31-32 43-44 26˚
Metal Adjustable Lever ➋
83˚
26˚
20˚ 20˚ 44˚ 44˚ 35cNm 0˚ 35cNm
83˚
11-12
2 N.C
2 N.O
MBB
0.34Nm
21-22 33-34 43-44 26˚
83˚
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
54˚
26˚ 35˚ 35˚ 54˚ 35 cNm 0˚ 35cNm
23-24 11-12 23-24 15˚
83˚
4 N.C
—
—
83˚
11-12
0.34Nm
0.20Nm
44˚
15˚
21˚ 0˚ 21˚ 44˚ 35cNm 10cNm
83˚
11-12 21-22 31-32 41-42
83˚
20˚ 20˚ 44˚ 44˚ 35cNm 0˚ 35cNm
83˚
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O
BBM
0.34Nm
21-22 31-32 43-44 26˚
83˚
26˚
20˚ 20˚ 44˚ 44˚ 35cNm 0˚ 35cNm
83˚
11-12
2 N.C
2 N.O
MBB
➊ N5 = 5-pin mini connector. M9 = 12-pin M23 connector (use 9 wire). ➋ Not positive opening
7-10
0.34Nm
21-22
889N-F5AE-6F 889M-F12X9AE-2
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Large Metal Senator Product Selection (continued) Contacts Operator Type
Contact Type
Typical Force/ Torque to Operate
Contact Opening Characteristics Open Closed
Catalogue Number 1/2in NPT Conduit
M20 Conduit
Quick Disconnect ➊
440P-MSRS11E
440P-MSRS11B
440P-MSRS11N5
440P-MSRB04E
440P-MSRB04B
440P-MSRB04M9
440P-MSRB13E
440P-MSRB13B
440P-MSRB13M9
440P-MSRB22E
440P-MSRB22B
440P-MSRB22M9
440P-MTAS11E
440P-MTAS11B
440P-MTAS11N5
440P-MTAB04E
440P-MTAB04B
440P-MTAB04M9
440P-MTAB13E
440P-MTAB13B
440P-MTAB13M9
440P-MTAB22E 2 N.C 2 N.O MBB 0.20Nm 33-34 43-44 Telescope 31˚ 31˚ Arm ➋ Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 5-pin mini connector. See page 15-12 for additional lengths. Recommended standard cordset, 2m, 12-pin 9 wire. See page 15-12 for additional lengths.
440P-MTAB22B
440P-MTAB22M9
Safety
Aux.
90˚
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
32˚ 0˚ 20cNm
32˚ 20cNm
0.20Nm
23-24 11-12 23-24 10˚
90˚
4 N.C
—
—
90˚
11-12
0.20Nm
10˚
17˚ 0˚ 17˚ 20cNm 20cNm
90˚
11-12 21-22 31-32 8
41-42
90˚
19˚ 19˚ 20cNm 0˚ 20cNm
90˚
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O
BBM
0.20Nm
21-22 31-32 43-44 24˚
24˚
90˚
18˚ 18˚ 20cNm 0˚ 20cNm
90˚
11-12
Metal Spring Rod ➋
2 N.C
2 N.O
MBB
0.20Nm
21-22 33-34 43-44 26˚
26˚
90˚
1 N.C
1 N.O
Snap Acting
39˚ 0˚ 20cNm
39˚ 20cNm
0.20Nm
23-24 11-12 23-24 10˚
90˚
4 N.C
—
—
90˚
11-12
0.20Nm
10˚
24˚ 0˚ 24˚ 20cNm 20cNm
90˚
11-12 21-22 31-32 8
41-42
90˚
23˚ 23˚ 20cNm 0˚ 20cNm
90˚
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O
BBM
0.20Nm
21-22 31-32 43-44 30˚
90˚
30˚
24˚ 24˚ 20cNm 0˚ 20cNm
90˚
11-12 21-22
889N-F5AE-6F 889M-F12X9AE-2
➊ N5 = 5-pin mini connector. M9 = 12-pin M23 connector (use 9 wire). ➋ Not positive opening
7-11
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Large Metal Senator Typical Wiring Diagram 4 N.C.
1 N.O. 1 N.C.
1 N.O. 3 N.C.
2 N.O. 2 N.C.
41
31
21
11
11
23
43
31
21
11
43
33
21
11
42
32
22
12
12
24
44
32
22
12
44
34
22
12
Same polarity this side of block
N5 Connector 2 Circuit 5-Pin Mini Connector 1 (N.C.) 11
12
23
24
Auxiliary Circuit (N.O.)
M9 12-Pin M23 Connector 4 N.C. Connector Pinout
9
8 7
12
1 10 2
11
6 5
3 4
Terminal 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 12
3 N.C. 1 N.O. Contact
11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42
Terminal 11 12 21 22 31 32 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.
2 N.C. 2 N.O.
Contact
Terminal
Contact
11 12 21 22 33 34 43 44
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.O.
N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O.
Ground
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 17 (0.66) Dia.
21 (0.82)
18 (0.70) Dia. 19 (0.74)
48 (1.88)
60 (2.36)
118 (4.64) 60 (2.36)
40 (1.57)
Roller Plunger
7-12
63 (2.48)
34 (1.33) 30 (1.18)
33 (1.29) 43 (1.69)
64 (2.51) 7 (0.27)
30 (1.18)
40 (1.57)
105 (4.13)
33 (1.29) 43 (1.69)
Dome Plunger
60 (2.36)
30 (1.18) 133 (5.23)
40 (1.57)
43 (1.69)
Short Lever
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Large Metal Senator Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) (continued) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 17 (0.66) Dia.
64 (2.51) 7 (0.27)
16 (0.62)
103 (4.05) 172 (6.77) Max. Extension
85 (3.34) Max.
30 (1.18)
60 (2.36)
40 (1.57)
5 (0.19) Dia.
57 (2.24)
240 (9.44) Max Extension
16 (0.62)
60 (2.36)
103 (4.05) 30 (1.18)
43 (1.69)
33 (1.29) 43 (1.69)
40 (1.57)
Adjustable Lever
Rod Lever
10 (0.39) Dia.
303 (11.92) Min Extends to 900 (35.43) Max
211 (8.3)
60 (2.36)
30 (1.18)
60 (2.36)
30 (1.18)
11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 40 (1.57)
43 (1.69)
Spring Rod
40 (1.57)
43 (1.69)
Telescopic Arm
7-13
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches 802T Direct Opening Action NEMA-Style Switches Specifications Standards
Category
Approvals
Enclosure Rating Operating Temperature Cable Versions Temperature Storage Temperature
Description Bulletin 802T Direct Opening Action limit switches have been designed for use in control reliable applications and safety applications per ISO 14119. These limit switches utilize the same mounting dimensions as other NEMA style limit switches. The rugged metal construction and plug-in body are designed for use in harsh industrial environments. Direct Opening Action assures that the normally closed contacts open when the limit switch is actuated. This opening will occur even in the event of a contact weld condition, up to 10 Newtons.
ATTENTION: To ensure that the normally closed (safety) contacts open, the limit switch actuator must be displaced beyond the point of Direct Opening Action (see specifications). Features • • • • • •
Direct opening action Snap acting contacts Rugged metal construction Long life and reliability Plug-in design NEMA 6P/IP67 sealing
Typical Applications • • • • • •
Machine guards Access gates and doors Cranes or hoists Transfer stations Indexing tables Robotic cells
7-14
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems cULus listed, CE marked for all applicable directives and TUV for 2circuit models NEMA 4, 6P, 12, 13 and IP67 -18°C to +110°C (0°F to +230°F) -18°C to 60°C (0°F to 140°F) -40°C to 121°C (-40°F to 250°F)
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, 2 Circuits) NEMA Rating Designation
A600 AC-15
Max Max Voltage
Make
120 240 480 600
60 30 15 12
Break
Continuous Carrying Current
Make
Break
6.00 3.00 1.50 1.20
10 10 10 10
7200 7200 7200 7200
720 720 720 720
A
VA
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz, 4 Circuits) NEMA Rating Designation
Max Max Voltage
Make
A300
120 240
60 30
Break
Continuous Carrying Current
Make
Break
6.00 3.00
10 10
7200 7200
720 720
Make
Break
69 69
69 69
A
VA
DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole) NEMA Rating Designation
Q300 Q300 DC 13
Max Voltage
Make
Break
Continuous Carrying Current
250 125
0.27 0.55
0.27 0.55
2.5 2.5
A
VA
Low Voltage DC 24V DC @ 1.1 Amps resistive load
802T Operating Levers See the Limit Switches section of the Sensors catalogue.
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches 802T Direct Opening Action NEMA-Style Switches Range of Operation Travel to Operate Contacts Max Travel
Max Travel
Travel to Reset
Travel to Reset
Travel to Operate Contacts Travel to Reset Contacts
Lever Type Spring Return
Top Push Roller Spring Return
Side Push Vertical Roller Spring Return
Max Travel
Side Push Horizontal Roller Spring Return
Product Selection
Number of Circuits
Torque/ Force to Operate (Max)
Lever Movement vs. Contact Operation
Travel to Operate (Max)
Torque/ Force to Operate Direct Opening Action (Min)
Travel to Operate Direct Opening Action (Min)
Max Travel
Travel to Reset Contacts (Max)
Catalogue Number
Lever Type • Spring Return 2 4
1 3
2 Clockwise or Counter Clockwise 4
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 3
2 4
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
Switch w/o Lever 802T-APD
2 4
1 3 2 4 6 8
0.45 N.m (4.0lbin)
13°
0.90 N.m (8lbf.in)
25°
90°
7° 802T-ATPD
Top Push Roller • Spring Return Normal 2
4
Operated
1 3
2 4
1 3
2 4
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Complete Switch 802T-DPD 28.47N (6.4lbf)
1.17mm 66.72N 2.29mm 5.99mm 0.64mm (0.046in) (15.0 lbf) (0.090in) (0.236in) (0.025in) 802T-DTPD
Side Push Vertical Roller • Spring Return 2
4
Normal
Operated
1 3
2 4
1 3
2 4
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Complete Switch 802T-KPD 24.5N (5.5lbf)
2.08mm 53.4N 4.19mm 5.74mm 1.14mm (0.082in) (12.0 lbf) (0.165in) (0.226in) (0.045in) 802T-KTPD
Side Push Horizontal Roller • Spring Return 2
4
Normal
Operated
1 3
2 4
1 3
2 4
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Complete Switch 802T-K1PD 24.5N (5.5lbf)
2.08mm (0.082in
53.4N 4.19mm 5.74mm 1.14mm (12.0 lbf) (0.165in) (0.226in) (0.045in) 802T-K1TPD
Modifications and Typical Levers—See page 7-17.
7-15
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches 802T Direct Opening Action NEMA-Style Switches Typical Example of a Dual Channel Safety Application 2-Circuit
4-Circuit
Negative Mode Operation
Positive Mode Operation Guard Closed
Guard Closed Aux 1
To Safety Related Part of the Machine Control System
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Aux 2
Safety Channel 2
Safety Channel 1
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes. 14.7 (0.58)
1.2 (0.05)
103.4 (4.07) 75.8 70.6 (2.98) (2.78)
19.1 (0.75)
24 (0.95)
8.7 (0.34) Dia.
59.5 (2.34) 83.7 (3.3)
29.4 (1.16)
36.5 (1.44)
(2) #10-32 UNF-28
20.6 (0.81)
41.3 (1.63)
42.9 (1.69)
Plug-In Switch
46.8 (1.84) 3.6 (0.14) 43.7 (1.72)
19.6 (0.77)
34.9 (1.38)
59.6 (2.35) 19.1 (0.75)
30.3 (1.19)
51.6 (2.03)
23.1 (0.91)
24.4 (0.96) 12.7 (0.5)
15.2 (0.60)
Lever Type Head
7-16
Top Push Roller Head
50.8 (2.0)
3.6 (0.14)
20.6 (0.81) 12.4 (0.49) Dia.
Side Push Roller Head
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches 802T Direct Opening Action NEMA-Style Switches Modifications Metric Conduit Entry To order a limit switch with a 20mm conduit entry, add the suffix “S6” to the catalogue number. Example: 802T-APDS6 Pre-wired Cable To order factory installed pre-wired type STOOW-A cable (5 conductor), add the suffix “Y” plus the number of feet required. The standard cable length is 1.52m (5ft). Extended cable lengths are available in multiples of 1.22m (4ft) only.
Micro Style Quick-Disconnect Micro quick-disconnects are available with a 5 pin 2 keyway AC or 5 pin single keyway DC. To order a limit switch with a AC micro quick-disconnect, add the suffix “R5” to the catalogue number. To order a limit switch with a DC micro quick-disconnect, add the suffix “D5” to the catalogue number. Example: 802T-APDR5 and 802T-APDD5. AC Micro QD 1
2
Same Polarity
Example: To order a limit switch with a factory installed 1.52m (5ft) cable, the catalogue number would become 802T-APDY5. To order a limit switch with a factory installed 2.44m (8ft) cable, the catalogue number would become 802T-APDY8. Mini Style Quick-Disconnect To order a Bulletin 802T pre-wired limit switch with a 5-pin (2 circuit) or 9-pin (4 circuit) mini connector, add the suffix “J1” or “J9” depending on desired wiring (“J9” wiring not available for 4 circuit models) to the catalogue number. Example: 802T-APDJ1
3
4
1
5
1
2 5
4
3
5
4
Levers Roller
“J1” Wiring
“J9” Wiring
4
Type 1
5
Same Polarity
1
3
2
3
4
Same Polarity
5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle (2 circuit) 2
DC Micro QD
2
Catalog Number
Material
Dia.
Width
Nylon Nylon Steel
0.75in 0.75in 0.75in
0.28in 1in 0.25in
802T-W1H
Ball Bearing
0.75in
0.23in
802T-W1B
802T-W1 802T-W1A
Same Polarity 1
2
4
Non-Adj. Cast Lever 1.5in Radius Roller on Front
9-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle (4 circuit) “J1” Wiring (“J9” wiring not available for 4 circuit) 3
4
1
2
8
6
Same Polarity
5
9
Same Polarity 1 2
8 9
3
7 6
10 4
5
7-17
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Imp Specifications Standards
Category
Approvals
Imp 1
Imp 2 NRTL/C
Description The Imp offers safety switch performance of bigger units in the most compact case available. Designed with two mounting hole options and a choice of actuator positions, the Imp will fit in the most confined spaces. Guardmaster limit switches can be used in other applications other than guard doors, for example on moving machine beds, crane arms, etc. Operation of these limit switches is achieved by the sliding action of the guard or other moving object deflecting the plunger or lever. It is important that upon actuation, the guard or other moving objects should not pass completely over the switch and allow the plunger or lever to return to its original position.
Features • Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts • Contacts, 1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
7-18
Safety Contacts Utilization Category AC (Ue) (le) DC Max. Switched Current/ Voltage/Load Thermal Current (lth) Minimum Current Safety Contact Gap Rtd. Insulation Voltage Rtd. Impulse Withstand Voltage Auxiliary Contacts Pollution Degree Actuator Travel for Positive Opening Break Contact Min. Force Maximum Actuator Travel Maximum Actuation Speed Max. Actuation Frequency Case Material Actuator Material Protection Conduit Entry Operating Temperature Mounting Mechanical Life Electrical Life Colour
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/ EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1 Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems CE marked for all applicable directives and CSA NRTL/C 1 N.C. positive break AC 15 500V 250V 100V 1A 2A 5A 250V 0.5A, 24V 2A 500V/500VA 10A 5V 5mA DC >2 x 2mm (0.079in) (Ui) 500V (Uimp) 2500V 1 N.O. 3 2.5mm (0.098in) 10N (2.25lb) 5mm (0.197in) 160mm (6.29in) per sec 2 Cycle per sec UL approved glass filled polyester Acetal IP30 3x break-outs -25°C to +80°C (-13°F to +176°F) 2 x M3 front or 2 x M4 top 10,000,000 operations 1,000,000 operations Red
Position Interlock Switches
Safety Limit Switches Imp Product Selection Contact Action Operator Type Top Push Roller Top Push Cross Roller
Contact Open
Contact Slow break before make
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
Contact Closed
0mm 1 11/12
Conduit
5 3x breakouts
23/24 2.5
Type
Catalogue Number
Imp 1 (roller parallel to switch front)
440P-M18001
Imp 2 (roller perpendicular to switch front)
440P-M18002
Dimensions—mm (inches) 10.3 (0.41) Ø11 (0.43)
2.4 (0.09)
2xM3
5mm Roller Travel
20 (0.79)
37.7 (1.48) 4 (0.16)
54 (2.13)
2xM4
15 (0.59)
4 (0.16) 15.2 (0.6)
25 (0.98)
23.3 (0.92)
Connections
11
12
23
24
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
7-19
Position Interlock Switches
Notes
7-20
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller . . . . . . . 8-6 GuardPLC 2000 Safety System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC Safety Control Systems System Overview CPU processes input values to control outputs.
GuardPLC 2000 Safety System
1755 Chassis
Slot Filler
Power Supply
I/O Module converts input-circuit signals to back plane levels and converts back plane signals to output circuit levels. The total number of safety I/O modules must not exceed six (any combination of digital, analog and counter).
8-2
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC Safety Control Systems System Overview Advantages
GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller is a fullyequipped and compact unit with built-in CPU, power supply, and I/O (digital I/O and counter/encoder module).
During the 1960s and throughout the 1970s, the machine control industry made the transformation from relay-based logic to programmable logic controllers, commonly referred to as PLC controllers. This transformation let the control engineer create systems with extremely high productivity, flexibility and reliability, and revolutionized the machine control market. The continual evolution and consolidation of safety standards among Europe, North America and Asia has brought about new practices in the application of safety on the factory floor. New classes of products such as safety relays and safety switches have become familiar fixtures in the automation industry. Now, just as the PLC controller changed the way standard machine control logic was accomplished, the Safety PLC System is changing the face of functional safety for machine control. Rockwell Automation is no stranger to meeting manufacturers’ safety needs. Some of the company’s earliest safety products included emergency stop buttons in the early 1900s and the AllenBradley 700P control relay with interlocked contacts in the 1940s. In the 1960s, the Bulletin 1040 was created for clutch/brake control for mechanical stamping presses. Throughout the 1970s and 1980s, Allen-Bradley, now part of Rockwell Automation, manufactured programmable controllers that featured unalterable core memory for unprecedented safety. Today, safe start-up and shutdown of igniters is provided by the Rockwell Automation advanced burner management control systems. GuardPLC 1200 and 2000 Safety controllers take Rockwell Automation into their next generation of safety systems. As industrial automation broadens to accommodate a more global marketplace, equipment manufacturers and users are applying international standards to their installations—in no area is this more true than in machine safety. Historically, safety and productivity have worked against each other on the plant floor. With the latest developments in machine safety products, this is no longer the case. In the past, machine safety was thought of as merely an expense; that notion has evolved into the acceptance of safety as an investment that may actually increase productivity. With Rockwell Automation Safety Systems, all maintenance programs are run in the same controller so that specific portions of a manufacturing cell can operate while other portions are stopped for safety reasons.
Depending on your application needs, Rockwell Automation offers two state-of-the-art GuardPLC Safety Control Systems. The GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller is designed for small control applications that require functional safety and that can be serviced with a fixed number of I/O points. In contrast, the GuardPLC 2000 Safety System is designed to control large applications. This system can have a maximum of 144 digital inputs, 96 digital outputs, or 48 analog inputs, or 48 analog outputs. You can have any combination of six safety-related I/O modules as long as you don’t exceed the maximum current of 30A for the 24V DC power supply. • Programming is simple. RSLogix Guard Software, designed to operate with Microsoft Windows NT v4.0 or Windows 2000, provides a drag-and-drop palette of function blocks to create safety logic; while, other screens help developers enter tag names, populate chassis, set up communication, and associate tags with specific I/O. • Affordable solution. The GuardPLC Safety Control System is built with redundant CPUs in one controller, has outputs with built-in monitoring, is designed to comply with the latest global safety standards, and uses graphical programming software. Therefore, the cost of a GuardPLC safety control system is affordable compared to the cost of using standard redundant PLC processors, excessive I/O hardware, custom software, and additional engineering time to create a safety system wherein all the components meet global safety standards. • Reliability. GuardPLC Safety Controllers and modules are designed specifically for very high MTBF (Mean Time Between Failure) and very low PFD (Probability of Failure on Demand). • Modularity. The GuardPLC 2000 system provides a configurable and expandable system including digital I/O, analog I/O, timers, and high-speed counters. • Compact size. The GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller mounts on a DIN rail and fits into limited panel space. • Flexibility. The programmable nature of the GuardPLC controllers make them ideal as solutions for several types of safety applications and provides for functionality that may be difficult or impossible to implement with a hard-wired safety solution. • High productivity. The flexible programming of the GuardPLC controllers helps the control engineer create maintenance modes of operation with “limited shutdown” capability, which allows for quick restarting of the process and reduced downtime. The extensive diagnostics aid in the troubleshooting and repair of the safety system as well as reduce downtime and increase productivity of the manufacturing process.
Safety System Features • Designed for application in systems up to Safety Integrity Level 3 (SIL 3) according to IEC 61508 without restrictions; certified by TÜV Product Services; and meets Machinery Directive EN 954– 1, Category 4.
8-3
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC Safety Control Systems System Overview (continued) • Eliminates the need for dual standard PLC processors and excessive I/O in safety-related applications • Eliminates writing, testing, and certifying software whose only purpose is to monitor the safety control system • Creates run time and maintenance programs using easy-toprogram function blocks A GuardPLC product is the intelligent combination of safety-related programmable controllers and easy-to-learn programming. As shown below, there are two types of controllers available to fit customer needs—one that’s compact and one that’s modular.
Communication A proprietary Ethernet safety link is used for programming and configuration between the safety controller and the Programming and Debugging Tool with RSLogix Guard software installed.
GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller is a fullyequipped and compact unit.
8-4
Safety Concept The GuardPLC 1200 and GuardPLC 2000 systems each have a failsafe CPU. Faults that individually have a direct impact on the safety system are detected within a Safety Time specified by the user. Faults that do not directly affect the safety function of the system unless they occur in combination with another fault are detected within the Multiple Error Occurrence Time, which is preset in the operating system to 24 hours. This results in the following behaviours: • The user specifies the Safety Time and the Watchdog Time for the safety system. The Multiple Error Occurrence Time is preset in the operating system (24 hours). • The controller continues to provide safety-related functions even upon the detection of an error. • Faulty input signals (e.g. incorrectly transmitted input values) do not affect the safety function of the CPU. Faulted input signals have a “0” value. • The failure of the CPU does not affect the safety function of the other safety-related modules (digital inputs, digital outputs, etc.).
GuardPLC 2000 Safety System is a modular system.
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC Safety Control Systems System Overview (continued) Functional Design Each of the logic circuits within the Safety PLC that supports digital and analog inputs, outputs, and counters contains several test points as shown in the following figure. A typical digital output logic circuit contains a test point near each of the two safety switches located behind the output driver as well as a third test point near the second output driver. Each of the two safety switches is controlled by a different microprocessor. If a failure is monitored at either of the two safety switches due to switch or microprocessor failure or at the test point near the output driver, the operating system of the Safety PLC automatically acknowledges system failure. Then, on its own, the Safety PLC defaults to a known state facilitating an orderly equipment shutdown.
A simple system for small control applications can consist of a single compact GuardPLC 1200 unit and a Programming and Debugging Tool, which is a personal computer running Windows NT v4.0 or Windows 2000 operating system and has RSLogix Guard 1200 or RSLogix Guard 2000 installed. On-board I/O includes a maximum of 20 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs, and 2 counters.
Programming and Debugging Tool
Proprietary Ethernet Safety Link Safety Switch 1
Safety Switch 2
Test Points
Test Points
Output Driver
To Actuator
Test Points Output Driver
Test Points To Secondary (Redundant) Actuator
GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Controller Microprocessor
Local I/O on-board the GuardPLC 1200 GuardPLC 1200 Back Plane Packaged Controller, 8 digital outputs, 20 digital inputs, and 2 counters. OUTPUTS
PLC
1200
INPUTS
For large applications, a module safety controller system communicates over a proprietary Ethernet safety link to a Programming and Debugging Tool with RSLogix Guard 2000 installed. You can have a maximum of 144 digital inputs, 96 digital outputs, or 48 analog inputs or 48 analog outputs.
Mechanical Design The GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller contains the safety controller, power supply, and associated safety-related I/O packaged in a rugged plastic housing. It’s a compact system that’s ideal for small spaces.
Programming and Debugging Tool
The GuardPLC 2000 Safety System chassis, which is a modular system, can house one safety controller, one power supply, and up to six safety-related I/O modules.
Proprietary Ethernet Safety Link
GuardPLC 2000 Safety Microprocessor
GuardPLC 2000 Back Plane
Local I/O on-board the GuardPLC 2000 Controller:
You can have any combination of 6 I/O modules including: a digital combination module with 24 inputs and 16 outputs, an 8-point analog input module, an 8-point analog output module and a high-speed counter module that provides 2 counters.
8-5
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller 1754–L28BBB Specifications Number of safety-related digital inputs Nominal Input Voltage On-State Voltage On-State Current Off-State Voltage Off-State Current Number of safety-related digital outputs Output Voltage Range Output Current
The GuardPLC 1200 is a safety-related compact Programmable Electronic System (PES), which is designed in accordance with IEC 61131. Despite its small size, it complies with the requirements for a control system with the safety integrity level (SIL 3) according IEC 61508. The GuardPLC 1200 is designed for smaller applications that require functional safety and that can be serviced with a fixed number of I/O points. The compact size of the GuardPLC 1200 combined with DIN rail mounting allows deployment even under cramped space conditions. The GuardPLC 1200 includes a power supply, CPU, Watchdog, 20 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs plus 2 counters and communication ports, all incorporated in a rugged plastic housing.
Typical Applications • • • • •
Perimeter guarding for Robot/weld cells Perimeter guarding for Packaging Machines Entertainment industry (ride control and ski lift control) Burner Management Press Controls
Features • • • • • • •
Rugged plastic housing DIN rail mounting I/O self test 30 I/O points 24V digital I/O Multiple I/O test points Certified by TÜV for use in applications to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508; EN 954–1, Category 4 • Programmed with RSLogix Guard Software • RS–232 port for ASCII communication (read only) • Ethernet port for programming, configuration and Peer-to-Peer
8-6
Number of safety-related counters Inputs per counter Counter Resolution Input Frequency Power Supply Voltage Power Rating Ambient Temperature (Operating) Storage Temperature Operating Humidity Shock Vibration Dimensions (WxHxD) Weight
20 (not electrically isolated) 24V DC 10-30V DC 2mA @ 10V DC, 13mA @ 30V DC 5V DC (maximum) 1.5mA per channel (maximum) 4mA per channel (minimum) 8 (not electrically isolated) 18.4 to 26.8 V DC Channels 1 through 6: 0.5A per channel Channels 7 & 8: 2A per channel 2 3 (Input A, Direction, Gate/Reset) 24 Bit 100 kHz (maximum) in counter modes 24V DC(20 / -15%), ≤ 15% ripple 8A (maximum) 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F) -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F) 5 to 95% (without condensation) Operating: 30g non operating: 50g Operating: 2g @ 10 to 500Hz 90 x 160 x 87mm (3.54 x 6.29 x 3.42in) 0.68 kg
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC 2000 Safety System 1755–L1 Specifications User Memory Operating Voltages Current Consumption Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Operating Humidity Shock Vibration Weight Dimensions (WxHxD)
500 KB application code memory 500 KB application data memory 3.3V DC 5V DC 3.3V @ 1.5A5V @ 0.1A 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F) -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F) 5 to 95% (without condensation) Operating: 30g non operating: 50g Operating: 2g @ 10 to 500Hz 6.3 kg (fully equipped) 255 x 285 x 210mm (10 x 11.22 x 8.26in)
The GuardPLC2000 CPU has one 10/100BaseT Ethernet port for programming and configuration and two interface ports (9-pin D-shell) for serial connections. The CPU controls all functions of the GuardPLC 2000 system as well as communication to other systems. LEDs display the operating modes: Run and Error for the I/O modules; Run, Error, Stop, Programming and Forcing for the CPU.
Typical Applications • • • • • • •
Perimeter guarding for Robot/weld cells Perimeter guarding for Packaging Machines Entertainment industry (ride control and ski lift control) Semi-conductor industry Press Control Burner Management Shipping (rudder controls)
Features • • • • • •
Metal chassis I/O self test 24V DC digital I/O Expandable number of I/O Multiple I/O test points Certified by TÜV for use in applications up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508; EN 954–1, Category 4 • Programmed with RSLogix Guard Software • RS–232 port for ASCII communication (read only) • Ethernet port for programming, configuration and Peer-to-Peer
8-7
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC 2000 Safety System Chassis 1755–A6 Power Supply 1755–PB720
The GuardPLC chassis houses the GuardPLC 2000 controller, power supply, and up to six safety I/O modules. A filler module is also available for unused slots (catalogue number 1755–N2).
Specifications Description Number of Slots Dimensions (WxHxD) Weight Mounting Catalogue Number
8-8
Expansion chassis for adding safety I/O modules 6 255 x 285 x 210mm (10 x 11.2 x 8.3in) 3.3kg (7.2lbs) Back-panel mounting 1755-A6
The power supply module transforms the system supply voltage from 24V to 3.3V DC/5V DC (used for internal I/O bus). It occupies the left-most slot of the GuardPLC 2000 chassis. The power supply comes with a lithium battery, which has a four-year life span, that is used for back-up. Four LEDs indicate the power supply, battery voltage, and faults.
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC Safety Control Systems Overview Safety-related input modules are automatically subjected to a highgrade, cyclical self-test in both the GuardPLC 1200 and GuardPLC 2000 systems during operation. These test routines are TÜV approved and help ensure the safe function of the respective module. When an error is detected, the application is provided with an “0” signal, and a detailed error message is generated optionally. If there are minor failures in the module (no effect on the safety function), no user diagnostic information is generated. • The GuardPLC 2000 digital I/O module has 24 inputs and 16 outputs for signals, and the inputs and outputs are electrically isolated in groups of eight. The GuardPLC 1200 digital I/O module has 20 inputs and 8 outputs. In case of module error, the outputs are switched to the de-energized state. • The analog output module, which is available in the GuardPLC 2000 system only, the eight channels on the analog input module can be used as eight single-ended or four differential analog inputs for 0 to 20 mA. No mixing is allowed. The incoming signals are converted into an integer value with a 12-bit resolution. This value then can be used in the user program. In case of module error, the logic outputs of the modules are switched to the de-energized state.
• The analog output module, which is available in the GuardPLC 2000 system only, has eight analog outputs with a 12-bit resolution. They are electrically isolated in groups of two outputs with a common ground. The output ranges of the module can be switched to 0 to 21 mA, 0 to 10.25V DC or -10.25 to +10.25V DC. For each channel, the module has a switch placed on the printed circuit board to switch the different output ranges. In case of module error, the outputs are switched to the deenergized state. • The counter module has two operating modes: counter mode and decoder mode. The module has 24-bit counters with two outputs each. The counters can operate in both directions (up and down) and have a separate reset input. The input signals of 5V can be in a frequency range of 0 to 1 MHz in a GuardPLC 2000 system. Use a PC to configure the input voltage, which can be 5V or in a range of 10 to 26.4V. In case of module error, the outputs are switched to the de-energized state. The counter can count pulses with direction and reset inputs up to 1 MHz in the GuardPLC 2000 system and up to 100 KHz in the GuardPLC 1200 system. The counter module can also be used as an 8-bit gray code encoder in the GuardPLC 2000 system or a 6-bit gray code encoder in the GuardPLC 1200 system.
I/O Hardware Safety Digital I/O Combination Module Max Maximum Operating Continuous Number Catalogue Operating Signal Delay Off-State On-State Number Voltage/ Signal Delay Current of Number Voltage (max) Current Current of Inputs Type (max) per Output Outputs Applications 1755– GuardPLC GuardPLC 2000 2000 Safety on = 70µs on = 70 µs applications off = 70 µs off = 15 µs 2mA @ 10V 2A (8A 1.5mA @ 18.4requiring 24V 10-30V 13mA @ 24 total per 16 5V DC 26.8V DC DC inputs and –IB24XOB16 DC 30V module) GuardPLC GuardPLC 24V DC 1200 1200 outputs on = 120 µs on = 15 µs off = 200 µs off = 90 µs
Safety Analog I/O Modules Number of Inputs/ Outputs 4 differential or 8 single–ended inputs — selectable 8 outputs
Data Format 12-bit signed Integer (natural binary) 12-bit signed Integer (natural binary)
Channel Update/ Resolution
Catalogue Number 1755–
Voltage Range
Current Range
Back Plane Current Load
±10V 0-10V DC
0-20.5mA (with shunt)
150 mA/3.3V DC 400 mA/24V DC
12 bits (0-1000)
IF8
±10V 0-10V DC
0-20mA
150 mA/3.3V DC 400 mA / 24V DC
12 bits (0-1000)
OF8
Safety Counter Module Inputs
Maximum Input Frequency
Outputs
Location
2
1 MHz
4
Any unused slot
Back Plane Current Load Catalogue Number 0.1A / 24V DC without load 0.8A (3.3V DC), 0.1A (5V 1755-HSC DC)
8-9
Safety PLCs
GuardPLC Safety Control Systems Weights Catalogue Number and Weight in kg (lb) • 1754–L28BBB 0.68 (1.5) • 1755–A6 3.3 (7.3) • 1755–HSC 0.26 (0.57) • 1755–IB24XOB16 0.26 (0.57) • 1755–IF8 0.24 (0.53) • 1755–L1 0.28 (0.62) • 1755–OF8 0.28 (0.62) • 1755–PB720 0.82 (1.8)
Programming Software RSLogix Guard Software The safety aspects of the GuardPLC Safety Control System extend beyond the physical control platforms. Like the controllers, programming software must also be certified to support Safety Integrity Level 3 (SIL 3) applications and is a critical component of the total safety system. The programming and configuration tool for GuardPLC 2000 and GuardPLC 1200 safety controls is RSLogix Guard software, designed to operate with Microsoft Windows NT v4.0 or Windows 2000 operating system. Since the RSLogix Guard software is a function block-based programming tool, there is no need for programmers to learn a cryptic programming language. Using such pre-defined elements as AND and OR gates, numerical functions, counters, and timers, programmers select and “drag” the appropriate functions onto their workstation screen. These functions, like the controllers, have been certified for use in applications up to SIL 3. Subsequent programming is as easy as drawing lines to “wire” inputs and outputs to the logical elements and making connections to hardware by way of user-defined variables or tags. The RSLogix Guard software is also used for system diagnosis and debugging. It can provide the status of controller CPU and I/O and can be used to obtain information about the application program.
8-10
Features • Save programming and configuration time using software that’s already certified for use in applications up to SIL 3 • Program your safety control system using pre-defined graphical elements and a “drag and drop” palette • Tag-based system
System Requirements To install RSLogix Guard Programming Software on a personal computer, you need to meet the following minimum requirements. CPU Processor RAM Graphic Adaptor Hard Disk Space
Operating System
Pentium II, 400 MHz 128M bytes Resolution: 1024 x 768 pixels (XGA) 30M bytes (minimum) for RSLogix Guard plus space for user defined programs Windows NT v4.0 or Windows 2000
Ordering Information You can install RSLogix Guard Programming Software on a local drive only (not a network). Description Catalogue Number RSLogix Guard 1200 for GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller 1754–PCS • 200 variables per POU (Program Organization Unit) RSLogix Guard 2000 for GuardPLC 1200 and GuardPLC 2000 Safety Controllers • 650 variables per POU (Program Organization 1755–PCS Unit) • User-defined function blocks
Contactors & Control Relays Safety Contactors Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 100S-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 104S-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 100S-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Safety Control Relays 700S-CF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 700S-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-C/104S-C Overview Specifications Conformity to Standards IEC 60947-4 IEC 60947 Type “2” Coordination IEC 60947-4-1 Annex H (Pending) — Special Requirements for Auxiliary Contacts Mechanically Linked with Power Contacts (Mirror Contacts) IEC 60947-5-1 Annex L — Special Requirements for Mechanically Linked Contact Elements
Description Bulletin 100S-C/104S-C safety contactors provide mechanically linked, positively guided contacts, which are required in feedback circuits for modern safety applications. The positively guided N.C. auxiliary contacts will not change state when a power contact welds. For additional information and selection of overload relays, mounting systems, and other MCS components, please see Publication 100-SG003C-EN-P.
Features • Positively guided/mechanically linked N.C. auxiliary contacts • Front-mounted auxiliary contact: – Permanently fixed – Protective cover to prevent manual operation – Red contact housing for easy identification – Incorporates IEC 60947-5-1 “Mechanically Linked” symbol • AC and DC operating coils • SUVA third-party certification
9-2
EN50205 UL 508 CSA 22.2 No. 14
Approvals SUVA Third-Party Certified CE marked for all applicable directives CSA Certified (Cert. No. LR 13908) UL Listed (File No. E3125, Guide No. NLDX) C-Tick not required
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-C Product Selection 3-Pole AC-Operated Contactors
• AC Operating Mechanism • 3 Main Contacts Ie
Auxiliary Contacts
Ratings for Switching AC Motors - AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
[A]
kW (50 Hz)
HP (60 Hz) 3∅
1∅
AC-3
AC-1
230V
400V 415V
500V
690V
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
9
32
3
4
4
4
1/2
1 1/2
2
2
5
7-1/2
12
32
4
5.5
5.5
5.5
1/2
2
3
3
7-1/2
10
16
32
5.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
1
3
5
5
10
15
23
32
7.5
11
13
10
2
3
5
7-1/2
15
15
30
65
10
15
15
15
2
5
7-1/2
10
20
25
37
65
11
18.5/ 20
20
18.5
3
5
10
10
25
30
43
85
13
22
25
22
3
7-1/2
10
15
30
30
60
100
18.5
32
37
32
5
10
15
20
40
50
72
100
22
40
45
40
5
15
20
25
50
60
85
100
25
45
55
45
7-1/2
15
25
30
60
NO
60
Catalogue Number !
NC
0
5
100S-C09⊗05C
1
4
100S-C09⊗14C
0
5
100S-C12⊗05C
1
4
100S-C12⊗14C
0
5
100S-C16⊗05C
1
4
100S-C16⊗14C
0
5
100S-C23⊗05C
1
4
100S-C23⊗14C
0
4
100S-C30⊗04C
1
4
100S-C30⊗14C
0
4
100S-C37⊗04C
1
4
100S-C37⊗14C
0
4
100S-C43⊗04C
1
4
100S-C43⊗14C
0
4
100S-C60⊗04C
1
4
100S-C60⊗14C
0
4
100S-C72⊗04C
1
4
100S-C72⊗14C
0
4
100S-C85⊗04C
1
4
100S-C85⊗14C
! For other contact configurations, please contact your local Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley distributor. ⊗
Coil Voltage Code and Terminal Position The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number Example: 120V, 60Hz: Catalogue Number 100S-C09⊗05C becomes Catalogue Number 100S-C09D05C. V Hz
12
24
32
36
42
50Hz
R
K
V
W
60Hz
Q
J
–
V
50/60
–
KJ
–
–
V Hz
220230
230
230240
50Hz
F
–
VA
60Hz
–
–
–
50/60
KL
KF
–
KA
100110
110
KP
–
D
–
KP
–
KP
–
KD
–
48
100
X
Y
–
X
–
KY
120
208240
L
–
–
KG
H
L
–
–
200
P
S
KG
D
–
–
–
KG
KL
277
347
380
380400
400
400415
T
–
–
–
N
–
G
A
T
I
E
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
KN
–
KB
240
208
127
440
200-220
480
500
550
600
B
–
M
C
–
N
B
–
–
C
–
–
–
–
Coil Terminal Position • All contactors are delivered with the coil terminals located on the line side. • For load side coil terminations, insert a “U” prior to the coil voltage code. Ordering example: Catalogue Number 100S-C09UD05C.
Cat. No. 100S-C09⊗05C Line Side
Cat. No. 100S-C09U⊗05C Load Side
9-3
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-C Product Selection 4-Pole AC-Operated Contactors
• AC Operating Mechanism • 4 Main Contacts Ratings for Switching AC Motors Ie
AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
[A]
kW (50 Hz)
Contact Configuration
HP (60 Hz)
1∅
3∅
AC-3
AC-1
230V
400V 415V
500V
690V
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
9
32
3
4
4
4
1/2
1 1/2
2
2
5
7-1/2
12
32
16
32
23
32
4
5.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
7.5
7.5
11
5.5
7.5
13
10
1/2
1
2
Auxiliary Contacts
Main Pole
2
3
3
3
5
3
7-1/2
5
5
10
7-1/2
15
10
15
15
NO
NC
NO
NC
Catalogue Number!
4
0
0
4
100S-C09⊗404C
3
1
0
4
100S-C09⊗304C
4
0
0
4
100S-C12⊗404C
3
1
0
4
100S-C12⊗304C
4
0
0
4
100S-C16⊗404C
3
1
0
4
100S-C16⊗304C
4
0
0
4
100S-C23⊗404C
3
1
0
4
100S-C23⊗304C
! For other contact configurations, please contact your local Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley distributor.
⊗
Coil Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number Example: 120V, 60 Hz: Catalogue Number 100S-C09⊗404C becomes Catalogue Number 100S-C09D404C. V Hz
100110
110
KP
–
D
–
KP
–
KY
KP
–
KD
277
347
380
380400
T
–
–
–
–
A
T
I
–
KA
–
–
12
24
32
36
42
50 Hz
R
K
V
W
60 Hz
Q
J
–
V
50/60 Hz
–
KJ
–
V Hz
220230
230
50 Hz
F
60 Hz 50/60 Hz
9-4
48
100
X
Y
–
X
–
–
230240
240
–
VA
–
–
KL
KF
120
208
208240
L
–
–
KG
H
L
KL
–
–
480
500
550
600
–
M
C
–
N
B
–
–
C
KB
–
–
–
–
127
200
P
S
KG
D
–
–
–
–
KG
400
400415
440
N
–
G
B
E
–
–
–
–
–
KN
–
200220
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-C Product Selection 3-Pole DC-Operated Contactors
• DC Operating Mechanism • 3 Main Contacts Ie
Ratings for Switching AC Motors - AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
[A]
kW (50 Hz)
HP (60 Hz)
Auxiliary Contacts
3∅
1∅
AC-3
AC-1
230V
400V 415V
500V
690V
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
9
32
3
4
4
4
1/2
1 1/2
2
2
5
7-1/2
12
16
32
4
32
5.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
7.5
5.5
7.5
1/2
2
1
3
3
3
5
7-1/2
5
10
10
15
23
32
7.5
11
13
10
2
3
5
7-1/2
15
15
30
65
10
15
15
15
2
5
7-1/2
10
20
25
37
65
11
18.5/ 20
20
18.5
3
5
10
10
25
30
43
85
13
22
25
22
3
7-1/2
10
15
30
30
60
72
85
100
18.5
100
32
22
100
40
25
45
37
45
55
32
40
45
5
10
5
15
15
7-1/2
20
20
15
40
25
25
50
50
30
60
60
60
NO
NC
Catalogue Number !
0
5
100S-C09⊗05C
1
4
100S-C09⊗14C
0
5
100S-C12⊗05C
1
4
100S-C12⊗14C
0
5
100S-C16⊗05C
1
4
100S-C16⊗14C
0
5
100S-C23⊗05C
1
4
100S-C23⊗14C
0
4
100S-C30⊗04C
1
4
100S-C30⊗14C
0
4
100S-C37⊗04C
1
4
100S-C37⊗14C
0
4
100S-C43⊗04C
1
4
100S-C43⊗14C
0
4
100S-C60⊗04C
1
4
100S-C60⊗14C
0
4
100S-C72⊗04C
1
4
100S-C72⊗14C
0
4
100S-C85⊗04C
1
4
100S-C85⊗14C
! For other contact configurations, please contact your local Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley distributor.
⊗
Coil Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number Example: 24V DC: Catalogue Number 100S-C09⊗05C becomes Catalogue Number 100S-C09ZJ05C. DC Voltage
100S-C09…C43 100S-C60…C85
9
12
24
36
48
60
64
72
80
110
115
125
220
230
250
Standard
ZR
ZQ
ZJ
ZW
ZY
ZZ
ZB
ZG
ZE
ZD
ZP
ZS
ZA
ZF
ZT
with Integrated Diode
—
—
DJ
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
with Integrated Diode
DR
DQ
DJ
DW
DY
DZ
DB
DG
DE
DD
DP
DS
DA
DF
DT
Coil Terminal Position • All contactors are delivered with the coil terminals located on the line side. • For load side coil terminations, insert a “U” prior to the coil voltage code. Ordering example: Cat No. 100S-C09UZJ05C.
Cat. No.
Cat. No.
100S-C09⊗05C
100S-C09U⊗05C
Line Side
Load Side
9-5
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-C Product Selection 4-Pole DC-Operated Contactors
• DC Operating Mechanism • 4 Main Contacts Ratings for Switching AC Motors Ie
AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
[A]
AC-3
kW (50 Hz)
AC-1
230V
400V 415V
Contact Configuration
HP (60 Hz)
1∅ 500V
690V
115V
Main Pole
Auxiliary Contact
3∅
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
9
32
3
4
4
4
1/2
1 1/2
2
2
5
7-1/2
12
32
4
5.5
5.5
5.5
1/2
2
3
3
7-1/2
10
16
32
5.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
1
3
5
5
10
15
23
32
7.5
11
13
10
2
3
5
7-1/2
15
15
NO
NC
NO
NC
Catalogue Number !
4
0
0
4
100S-C09⊗404C
3
1
0
4
100S-C09⊗304C
4
0
0
4
100S-C12⊗404C
3
1
0
4
100S-C12⊗304C
4
0
0
4
100S-C16⊗404C
3
1
0
4
100S-C16⊗304C
4
0
0
4
100S-C23⊗404C
4
100S-C23⊗304C
3
1
0
! For other contact configurations, please contact your local Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley distributor.
⊗
Coil Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number. Example: 24V DC: Catalogue Number 100S-C09⊗404C becomes Catalogue Number 100S-C09ZJ404C. DC Voltage 100S-C09...C23
9-6
9
12
24
36
48
60
64
72
80
110
115
125
220
230
250
Standard
ZR
with Integrated Diode
—
ZQ
ZJ
ZW
ZY
ZZ
ZB
ZG
ZE
ZD
ZP
ZS
ZA
ZF
ZT
—
DJ
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 104S-C Product Selection Reversing AC-Operated Contactors
• AC Operating Mechanism, 3 Main Contacts • Includes Mechanical/Electrical Interlock • Includes Reversing Power Wiring Ratings for Switching AC Motors Ie
Auxiliary Contacts Installed per Contactor
AC-2, AC-3, AC-4
[A]
kW (50 Hz)
HP (60 Hz)
1∅
3∅
AC-3
AC-1
230V
400V 415V
9
32
3
4
4
4
1/2
1 1/2
2
2
5
7-1/2
12
32
4
5.5
5.5
5.5
1/2
2
3
3
7-1/2
10
16
32
5.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
1
3
5
5
10
15
23
32
7.5
11
13
10
2
3
5
7-1/2
15
15
30
65
10
15
15
15
2
5
7-1/2
10
20
25
37
43
65
85
11
18.5/20
13
22
500V
690V
115V
230V
200V
230V
460V
575V
20
25
18.5
3
22
5
3
10
7.5
10
10
25
15
30
30
30
60
100
18.5
32
37
32
5
10
15
20
40
50
72
100
22
40
45
40
5
15
20
25
50
60
85
100
25
45
55
45
7-1/2
15
25
30
60
60
NO
NC"
Catalogue Number !
0
6
104S-C09⊗012C
1
5
104S-C09⊗210C
0
6
104S-C12⊗012C
1
5
104S-C12⊗210C
0
6
104S-C16⊗012C
1
5
104S-C16⊗210C
0
6
104S-C23⊗012C
1
5
104S-C23⊗210C
0
5
104S-C30⊗010C
1
5
104S-C30⊗210C
0
5
104S-C37⊗010C
1
5
104S-C37⊗210C
0
5
104S-C43⊗010C
1
5
104S-C43⊗210C
0
5
104S-C60⊗010C
1
5
104S-C60⊗210C
0
5
104S-C72⊗010C
1
5
104S-C72⊗210C
0
5
104S-C85⊗010C
1
5
104S-C85⊗210C
! For other contact configurations, please contact your local Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley distributor. " One of the N.C. auxiliary contacts is supplied as part of the mechanical/electrical interlock.
⊗
Coil Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number. Example: 120V 60 Hz: Catalogue Number 104S-C09⊗210C becomes Catalogue Number 104S-C09D210C. Standard Coil Voltage
100110
110
KP
–
D
–
KP
–
KY
KP
–
KD
277
347
380
380400
T
–
–
–
–
A
T
I
–
KA
–
–
12
24
32
36
42
48
100
50 Hz
R
K
V
W
60 Hz
Q
J
–
V
X
Y
–
X
50/60 Hz
–
KJ
–
–
–
Standard Coil Voltage
220230
230
230240
240
50 Hz
F
–
VA
60 Hz
–
–
50/60 Hz
KL
KF
120
200220
208
208240
127
200
P
S
KG
L
–
–
D
–
–
KG
H
L
–
–
KG
KL
–
–
400
400415
440
480
500
550
600
N
–
G
B
–
M
C
–
E
–
–
–
N
B
–
–
C
–
–
KN
–
KB
–
–
–
–
9-7
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 104S-C Product Selection Reversing DC-Operated Contactors
• DC Operating Mechanism, 3 Main Contacts, Line Side Coil Terminations • Includes Mechanical/Electrical Interlock • Includes Reversing Power Wiring Ratings for Switching AC Motors Ie [A]
AC-3
9
Auxiliary Contacts Installed per Contactor
AC-2, AC-3, AC-4 kW (50 Hz)
AC-1
32
230V
3
400V 415V
4
HP (60 Hz)
1∅ 500V
4
690V
4
115V
1/2
3∅ 230V
200V
1 1/2
2
230V
2
460V
5
575V
7-1/2
12
32
4
5.5
5.5
5.5
1/2
2
3
3
7-1/2
10
16
32
5.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
1
3
5
5
10
15
23
32
7.5
11
13
10
2
3
5
7-1/2
15
15
30
65
10
15
15
15
2
5
7-1/2
10
20
25
37
65
11
18.5/ 20
20
18.5
3
5
10
10
25
30
43
85
13
22
25
22
3
7.5
10
15
30
30
60
100
18.5
32
37
32
5
10
15
20
40
50
72
100
22
40
45
40
5
15
20
25
50
60
85
100
25
45
55
45
7-1/2
15
25
30
60
60
NO
NC"
Catalogue Number!
0
6
104S-C09⊗012C
1
5
104S-C09⊗210C
0
6
104S-C12⊗012C
1
5
104S-C12⊗210C
0
6
104S-C16⊗012C
1
5
104S-C16⊗210C
0
6
104S-C23⊗012C
1
5
104S-C23⊗210C
0
5
104S-C30⊗010C
1
5
104S-C30⊗210C
0
5
104S-C37⊗010C
1
5
104S-C37⊗210C
0
5
104S-C43⊗010C
1
5
104S-C43⊗210C
0
5
104S-C60⊗010C
1
5
104S-C60⊗210C
0
5
104S-C72⊗010C
1
5
104S-C72⊗210C
0
5
104S-C85⊗010C
1
5
104S-C85⊗210C
! For other contact configurations, please contact your local Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley distributor. " One of the N.C. auxiliary contacts is supplied as part of the mechanical/electrical interlock.
⊗
Coil Voltage Suffix Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number. Example: 120V 60 Hz: Catalogue Number 104S-C09⊗210C becomes Catalogue Number 104S-C09ZJ210C. DC Voltage 104S-C09…C43 104S-C60…C85
104S-C09…C43 104S-C60…C85
9-8
9
12
24
36
48
60
64
72
Standard
ZR
with Integrated Diode
—
ZQ
ZJ
ZW
ZY
ZZ
ZB
ZG
—
DJ
—
—
—
—
with Integrated Diode
DR
—
DQ
DJ
DW
DY
DZ
DB
DG
DC Voltage
80
110
115
125
220
230
250
Standard
ZE
ZD
ZP
ZS
ZA
ZF
ZT
with Integrated Diode
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
with Integrated Diode
DE
DD
DP
DS
DA
DF
DT
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-D Specifications Conformity to Standards IEC 60947-4 IEC 60947-4 Annex F IEC 60947 Type “2” Coordination CSA 22.2 No. 14 UL 508
Approvals Description Bulletin 100S-D safety contactors are designed to provide safe isolation of hazardous motion loads, utilizing “mirror contact” performance. Mirror contacts provide reliable indication about the open/closed status of the main power poles.
Features
CE marked for all applicable directives CSA Certified UL Listed SUVA Certified
• • • •
45…220 kW @500V 60…600 Hp @460V 75…700 Hp @575V Electronic and Conventional Coils AC & DC Integrated PLC Interface Low Power Pick-Up & Hold-In Wide Voltage Ranges • Complete Range of Accessories • Environmentally-Friendly • Compact Dimensions
9-9
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-D Product Selection 3-pole AC Contactors • Conventional and Electronic AC Coils • 3 Main Contacts • Non-Reversing Ie [A] 60°C
Switching of 3-Phase Motors—AC-2, AC-3
40°C
kW (50 Hz)
AC-3 AC-1 230V 400V 415V
⊗
Auxiliary Contacts
Hp (60 Hz)
500V
690V
N.C. ➊
N.O.
1000V 200V 230V 460V 575V
Catalogue Number
95
160
25
50
50
55
80
45
25
30
60
75
2
2
100S-D95⊗22C
110
160
32
55
55
63
100
55
40
40
75
100
2
2
100S-D110⊗22C
140
250
45
75
75
80/90➌ 110/132➌
75
40
50
100
125
2
2
100S-D140⊗22C
180
250
55
90
100
90/110➌ 132/160➌
90
50
60
150
150
2
2
100S-D180⊗22C
210
350
63
110
110
150
200
110
60
75
150
200
2
2
100S-D210⊗22C
250
350
80
132
150
160
250
133
75
100
200
250
2
2
100S-D250⊗22C
300
450
90
160
160
200
300
163
100
125
250
300
2
2
100S-D300⊗22C
420
500
132
220
250
300
425
225
150
175
350
400
2
2
100S-D420⊗22C
630
800
200
355
355
450
500
425
200
250
500
600
2
2
100S-D630⊗22C
860
1000
250
500
500
560
600
425
250
300
600
700
2
2
100S-D860⊗22C
AC Coil Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number. Example: 120V 60 Hz: Catalogue Number 104S-C09⊗210C becomes Catalogue Number 104S-C09D210C.
Conventional Coil
V
24
48
100
110
120
200
208
220… 230
230
240
277
380… 400
415
440
480
500
550
600
100S-D95… 100S-D180
50 Hz
K
Y
—
D
—
—
—
A
—
T
—
N
B
G
—
M
C
—
60 Hz
J
X
—
—
D
—
H
—
—
A
T
—
—
N
B
—
—
C
50/60 Hz
KJ
—
KP
KN
—
KG
—
—
KF
KA
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
V
24
42… 64
100
110… 130
200
208… 277
380… 415
440… 480
500
600
100S-D95… 100S-D250
50/60 Hz
EJ
EY
EP
ED
EG
EA
EN
EN
EN
—
100S-D300… 100S-D420
50/60 Hz
—
EY
EP
ED
EG
EA
EN
EN
EN
—
100S-D630… 100S-D860
50/60 Hz
—
—
EP
ED
EG
EA
EN
EB
EM
EC
100S-D95… 100S-D110
Electronic Coil w/PLC Interface ➋
➊ The N.C. contacts meet IEC 60947-4 Annex F requirements to mirror contact performance. The N.C. mirror contacts are wired in series or parallel and must be used as monitoring contacts with feedback to the safety circuit.
➋ Signal voltage of the Cat. No. 100S-D… electronic interface:Ue: 24V DC/Ie: 15 mA Pick-Up Voltage: 13.0V DC…30.2V DC Drop-Out Voltage: -3.0V DC…+5.0V DC ➌ Higher kW rating only applies to contactors with electronic coil.
9-10
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-D Product Selection 3-Pole DC Contactors • Conventional and Electronic DC Coils • 3 Main Contacts • Non-Reversing Ie [A] 60°C
Switching of 3-Phase Motors—AC-2, AC-3
40°C
kW (50 Hz)
Auxiliary Contacts
Hp (60 Hz)
N.O.
N.C. ➊
3
2/1L
AC-3 AC-1 230V 400V 415V 500V 690V 1000V 200V 230V 460V 575V 95
110
140
⊗
160
25
160
32
250
45
50
50
55
55
75
75
55
80
63
100
80
110
90 ➍ 132 ➍ 90
132
45
55
25
30
40
40
60
75
75
100
Catalogue Number 100S-D95⊗33LC ➋
2
2
100S-D95⊗22C
3
2/1L
100S-D110⊗33LC ➋
2
2
100S-D110⊗22C
3
2/1L
100S-D140⊗33LC ➋
2
2
100S-D140⊗22C
75
40
50
100
125
90
50
60
150
150
2
2
100S-D180⊗22C
180
250
55
90
100
210
350
63
110
110
150
200
110
60
75
150
200
2
2
100S-D210⊗22C
250
350
80
132
150
160
250
133
75
100
200
250
2
2
100S-D250⊗22C
300
450
90
160
160
200
300
163
100
125
250
300
2
2
100S-D300⊗22C
420
500
132
220
250
300
425
225
150
175
350
400
2
2
100S-D420⊗22C
630
800
200
355
355
450
500
425
200
250
500
600
2
2
100S-D630⊗22C
860
1000
250
500
500
560
600
425
250
300
600
700
2
2
100S-D860⊗22C
110 ➍ 160 ➍
AC Coil Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number. Example: 120V 60 Hz: Catalogue Number 104S-C09⊗210C becomes Catalogue Number 104S-C09D210C. Conventional Coil
V
24
48
110
125
220
250
100S-D95…100S-D140 ➋
DC
ZJ
ZY
ZD
ZS
ZA
ZT
Electronic Coil w/EI Interface ➌
V
24
48…72
110…130
200…255
100S-D95…100S-D300
DC
EZJ
EZY
EZD
EZA
100S-D420
DC
—
EZY
EZD
EZA
100S-D630…860
DC
—
—
ED
EA
➊ The N.C. contacts meet IEC 60947-4 Annex F requirements to mirror contact performance. The N.C. mirror contacts are wired in series or parallel and must be used as monitoring contacts with feedback to the safety circuit.
➋ For conventional DC coil only. The pickup winding must be interconnected with the N.C. late-breaking auxiliary contacts. ➌ Signal voltage of the Cat. No. 100S-D… electronic interface:Ue: 24V DC/Ie: 15 mA Pick-Up Voltage: 13.0V DC…30.2V DC Drop-Out Voltage: -3.0V DC…+5.0V DC ➍ Higher kW rating only applies to contactors with electronic coil.
9-11
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-C General Ratings Catalogue Number 100S-C09...100S-C85 Rated Isolation Voltage Ui IEC, AS, BS, SEV, VDE 0660; UL; CSA
690V 600V
Rated Impulse Voltage Uimp
8 kV
Rated Voltage Ue Main Contacts AC 50/60Hz
115, 200, 208, 230, 240, 380, 400, 415, 460, 500, 575, 690V
DC
24, 48, 110, 115, 220, 230, 300, 440V
Operating Frequency for AC Loads
50…60 Hz
Switching Motor Loads Catalogue Number
100SC09
100SC12
100SC16
100SC23
100SC30
100SC37
100SC43
100SC60
100SC72
100SC85
Standard Ratings
AC-2, AC-3, AC-4-50Hz DOL & Reversing IEC
AC-2, AC-3, AC-4-60Hz DOL & Reversing UL/CSA/IEC
9-12
230V
[A]
12
15
20
26.5
25
38
44
62
72
85
240V
[A]
12
15
20
26.5
35
38
44
62
72
85
400V
[A]
9
12
16
23
30
37
43
60
72
85
415V
[A]
9
12
16
23
30
37
43
60
72
85
500V
[A]
7
10
14
20
25
30
38
55
67
80
690V
[A]
5
7
9
12
18
21
25
34
42
49
230V
[kW]
3
4
5.5
7.5
10
11
13
18.5
22
25
240V
[kW]
3
4
5.5
7.5
10
11
13
18.5
22
25
400V
[kW]
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
32
40
45
415V
[kW]
4
5.5
7.5
11
15
20
22
32
40
45
500V
[kW]
4
5.5
7.5
13
15
20
25
37
45
55
690V
[kW]
4
5.5
7.5
10
15
18.5
22
32
40
45
1-Ph 115V
[A]
9.8
9.8
16
24
24
34
34
56
56
80
230V
[A]
10
12
17
17
28
28
40
50
68
68
115 V
[HP]
1/2
1/2
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
7-1/2
230 V
[HP]
1 1/2
2
3
3
5
5
7-1/2
10
15
15
3-Ph 200V
[A]
7.8
11
17.5
17.5
25.3
32.2
32.2
48.3
62.1
78.2
230 V
[A]
6.8
9.6
15.2
22
28
28
42
54
68
80
460 V
[A]
7.6
11
14
21
27
34
40
52
65
77
575 V
[A]
9
11
17
17
27
32
32
52
62
62
200 V
[HP]
2
3
5
5
7-1/2
10
10
15
20
25
230 V
[HP]
2
3
5
7-1/2
10
10
15
20
25
30
460 V
[HP]
5
7-1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
575 V
[HP]
7-1/2
10
15
15
25
30
30
50
60
60
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-D General Ratings Catalogue Number 100S-D95...100S-D860 Rated Isolation Voltage Ui IEC, AS, BS, SEV, VDE 0660; UL; CSA
690V 600V
Rated Impulse Voltage Uimp
12kV
Rated Voltage Ue Main Contacts AC 50/60Hz
115, 200, 208, 230, 240, 380, 400, 415, 460, 500, 575, 690, 1000V
DC
24, 48, 110, 115, 220, 230, 300, 440V
Operating Frequency for AC Loads
50…60 Hz
Switching Motor Loads Catalogue Number
100SD95
100SD110
100SD140
100SD140
100SD180
100SD180
100SD210
100SD250
100SD300
100SD420
100SD630
100SD860
Conventional
X
Electronic-EI
X
X
X
X
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
230V
[A]
95
110
X
140
140
180
180
210
250
300
420
630
860
240V 400V
[A]
95
[A]
95
110
140
140
180
180
210
250
300
420
630
860
110
140
140
180
180
210
250
300
420
630
415V
[A]
860
95
110
140
140
180
180
210
250
300
420
630
500V
860
[A]
95
110
115
140
140
180
210
250
300
420
630
690V
753
[A]
95
110
115
140
140
180
210
250
300
420
1000V
[A]
33
40
55
55
65
65
80
95
115
160
230V
[kW]
25
32
45
45
57
57
67
80
97
135
200
250
240V
[kW]
25
32
45
45
60
60
70
83
101
141
200
250
400V
[kW]
45
55
75
75
101
101
118
140
170
238
355
500
415V
[kW]
45
55
80
80
105
105
122
145
174
250
355
500
500V
[kW]
55
63
80
90
98
126
150
177
213
300
450
560
690V
[kW]
80
100
110
132
135
176
205
250
300
425
—
Coil Type Standard Ratings
AC-2, AC-3, AC-4-50Hz DOL & Reversing IEC
AC-2, AC-3, AC-4-60Hz DOL & Reversing UL/CSA/IEC
1000V
[kW]
45
55
75
75
90
90
110
132
160
225
1-Ph 115V
[A]
80
100
135
135
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
230V
[A]
68
110
136
136
176
176
216
—
—
—
—
—
115 V
[HP]
7.5
10
15
15
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
230 V
[HP]
15
25
30
30
40
40
50
—
—
—
—
—
3-Ph 200V
[A]
78.2
120
120
120
150
150
177
221
285
414
552
692
230 V
[A]
80
104
130
130
154
154
192
248
312
420
602
720
460 V
[A]
77
96
124
124
180
180
180
240
302
414
590
702
575 V
[A]
77
99
125
125
144
144
192
242
289
382
562
651
200 V
[HP]
25
40
40
40
50
50
60
75
100
150
200
250
230 V
[HP]
30
40
50
50
60
60
75
100
125
175
250
300
460 V
[HP]
60
75
100
100
150
150
150
200
250
350
500
600
575 V
[HP]
75
100
125
125
150
150
200
250
300
400
600
700
9-13
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-C Coil Data Catalogue Number
100S-C09
100SC12
100SC16
100SC23
100SC30
Voltage Range
100SC37
100SC43
100SC60
100SC72
100SC85
0.85…1.1 Pick-up
[x Us]
Dropout
[x Us]
Pick-up
[x Us]
Dropout
[x Us]
Pick-up
[VA/W]
70/50
70/50
70/50
70/50
80/60
80/60
130/90
200/110
200/110
200/110
Hold-in
[VA/W]
8/2.6
8/2.6
8/2.6
9/3
9/3
9/3
10/3.2
16/4.5
16/4.5
16/4.5
Pick-up
[W]
6.5
6.5
6.5
9.2
9.2
9.2
10.1
200
200
200
Hold-in
[W]
6.5
6.5
6.5
9.2
9.2
9.2
10.1
4.5
4.5
4.5
Operating Time AC: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 50/60 Hz
Pick-up
[ms]
15…30
15…30
15…30
15…30
15…30
15…30
15…30
20…40
20…40
20…40
Dropout
[ms]
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
with RC Suppressor
Dropout
[ms]
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
10…60
Pick-up
[ms]
40…70
40…70
40…70
40…70
50…80
50…80
50…80
20…40
20…40
20…40
Dropout
[ms]
7…15
7…15
7…15
7…15
7…15
7…15
7…15
—
—
—
with Integ. Suppres.
Dropout
[ms]
14…20
14…20
14…20
17…23
17…23
17…23
17…23
20…35
20…35
20…35
with Diode Suppres.
Dropout
[ms]
70…95
70…95
70…95
80…125
80...125
80...125
80...125
80...125
80...125
80...125
AC: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 50/60 Hz
DC
0.3…0.6 0.8…1.1 0.1…0.6
Coil Consumption AC: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 50/60 Hz DC
DC
9-14
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors 100S-D Coil Data Catalogue Number
100SD95
100SD110
100SD140
100SD140
100SD180
100SD180
100SD210
100SD250
100SD300
100SD420
100S-D630
100S-D860
Conventional
X
X
X
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
Coil Type Electronic-EI
X
X
—
X
—
Voltage Range AC: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 50/60 Hz
Pick-up
[x Us]
Dropout
[x Us]
Pick-up
[x Us]
Dropout
[x Us]
Pick-up
[VA/W]
Hold-in
[VA/W]
DC
DC
Pick-up
[W]
Hold-in
[W]
X
X
X
0.85…1.1
0.85…1.1
0.3…0.5
0.3…0.8
0.85…1.1
0.80…1.1
0.3…0.5
0.3…0.8
370/243 ➊
Coil Consumption AC: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 50/60 Hz
X
590/355➊
1915/1720 ➊
12/6
15/7
33/30
190 ➊
375 ➊
1980 ➊
6
7
30
75…90
75…90
60…100
30…60
30…60
70…145
Operating Time AC: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 50/60 Hz
Pick-up
[ms]
Dropout
[ms]
with RC Suppressor
Dropout
[ms]
—
—
—
Pick-up
[ms]
75…90
75…90
60…100
30…60
30…60
70…145
—
—
—
—
—
—
DC
Dropout
[ms]
with Integ. Suppres.
Dropout
[ms]
with Diode Suppres.
Dropout
[ms]
➊ Electronic coil drives are designed to minimize coil consumption. However, this design may cause a large inrush (<1ms) when energizing. This must be taken into account when sizing power supplies, all-or-nothing relays and the cross-sections of the coil wires.
9-15
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Contactors Connections 3-Pole Safety Contactors 51 61 71 81
51 61 71 81
11 21 31 41
52 62 72 82
52 62 72 82
12 22 32 42
1
3
5
21
1
3
5
13
1
3
5
2
4
6
22
2
4
6
14
2
4
6
100S-C09⊗05C...C23⊗05C
100S-C09⊗14C...C23⊗14C
100S-C30⊗04C...C85⊗04C
4-Pole Safety Contactors 11 21 31 41
11 21 31 41
12 22 32 42
12 22 32 42
1
3
5
7
1
3
5
R7
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
R8
100S-C09⊗404C...C23⊗404C
100S-C09⊗304C...C23⊗304C
Reversing Safety Contactors 51 61 71 81
21
51 61 71 81
11 21 31 41
21
11 21 31 41
52 62 72 82
22
52 62 72 82
12 22 32 42
22
12 22 32 42
1
3
5
13
21
1
3
5
13
1
3
5
21
1
3
5
2
4
6
14
22
2
4
6
14
2
4
6
22
2
4
6
104S-C09⊗210C...C23⊗210C
9-16
104S-C30⊗010C...C85⊗010C
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 700S-CF Specifications Conformity to Standards IEC 60947-5-1 IEC 60947-5-1 Annex L — Special Requirements for Mechanically Linked Contact Elements EN50011, EN50005, EN50022 UL 508 VDE 0660
Description Bulletin 700S-CF Safety Control Relays provide mechanically linked, positively guided contacts, which are required in feedback circuits for modern safety applications. The positively guided N.C. auxiliary contacts will not change state if a N.O. contact welds. Consult your local sales office or price list for pricing information.
Features • Positively guided/mechanically linked auxiliary contacts • Front-mounted auxiliary contact: – Permanently fixed – Protective cover to prevent manual operation – Red contact housing for easy identification – Incorporates IEC 60947-5-1 “Mechanically Linked” symbol • AC and DC operating coils • SUVA third-party certification
CSA 22.2 No. 14
Approvals SUVA Third-Party Certified CE Certified CSA Certified UL Listed (File No. E14840, Guide No. NKCR) C-Tick not required
Your order must include: • Catalogue number of the relays required, complete with coil suffix. • Catalogue number of adder decks, timers and accessories required. • If required, the part number of replacement coils.
9-17
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 700S-CF Product Selection Type CF Control Relays — 8-Pole AC Coil Voltage
AC-12
AC-15
Ith [A] 40°C
Connection Diagrams
Contacts
Ie [A] 60°C
24/ 48V
Main Contacts
120V 240V 400V 500V 600V 690V A1
Auxiliary Contacts
13
21
33
43
14
22
34
44
13
21
33
43
14
22
34
44
13
21
33
43
14
22
34
44
53
61
71
81
54
62
72
82
53
61
71
83
54
62
72
84
53
61
73
83
54
62
74
84
K1 A2
Main Contacts
20
20
10
10
10
6
2.5
1
A1 A2
A1
10
6
6
6
5
3
1.6
1
NC
Catalogue Number !
4
4
700S-CF440⊗C
5
3
700S-CF530⊗C
6
2
700S-CF620⊗C
1 K1
Adder Deck Contacts
NO
K1
1
A2
! All Catalogue Numbers are factory-stocked. ⊗
AC Coil Voltage Code The Catalogue Number is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number. Example: 120V 60 Hz: Catalogue Number 700S-CF440⊗C becomes Catalogue Number 700S-CF440DC. Voltage
12
24
32
36
42
50 Hz
R
K
V
W
60 Hz
Q
J
–
V
50/60 Hz
–
KJ
–
–
Voltage
230
230240
50 Hz
–
VA
60 Hz
–
–
50/60 Hz
KF
–
KA
9-18
100110
110
KP
–
D
–
KP
–
KP
–
KD
–
48
100
X
Y
–
X
–
KY
120
208
208240
L
–
–
F
KG
H
L
–
–
–
KL
600
200
P
S
KG
D
–
–
–
KG
KL
277
347
380
380400
400
400415
T
–
–
–
N
–
G
A
T
I
E
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
KN
–
KB
240
200220
127
440
220230
480
500
550
B
–
M
C
–
N
B
–
–
C
–
–
–
–
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 700S-CF Product Selection Type CF Control Relays — 8-Pole DC Coil Voltage
AC-12
AC-15
Ith [A] 40°C
Connection Diagrams
Contacts
Ie [A] 60°C
24/ 48V
Main Contacts
120V 240V 400V 500V 600V 690V A1
Auxiliary Contacts
13
21
33
43
14
22
34
44
13
21
33
43
14
22
34
44
13
21
33
43
14
22
34
44
53
61
71
81
54
62
72
82
53
61
71
83
54
62
72
84
53
61
73
83
54
62
74
84
K1 A2
Main Contacts
20
20
10
10
10
6
2.5
1
A1 A2
A1
10
6
6
6
5
3
1.6
NC
Catalogue Number !
4
4
700S-CF440⊗C
5
3
700S-CF530⊗C
6
2
700S-CF620⊗C
1 K1
Adder Deck Contacts
NO
1
1
K1 A2
! All Catalogue Numbers are factory-stocked. ⊗
DC Coil Voltage Code The Catalogue Number is incomplete. Select a coil voltage code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number. Example: 24V DC: Catalogue Number 700S-CF440⊗C becomes Catalogue Number 700S-CF440ZJC. Voltage
9
12
24
36
48
60
64
72
80
110
115
125
220
230
250
Standard
ZR
ZQ
ZJ
ZW
ZY
ZZ
ZB
ZG
ZE
ZD
ZP
ZS
ZA
ZF
ZT
With diode suppressor
—
—
DJ
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
9-19
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100S-C and 700S-CF General
Contact Ratings — NEMA Minimum Contact Rating
Contact Ratings — IEC AC-15 (solenoids, contactors) at rated voltage
Catalogue Number 700S-CF A600, P600
A600, Q600
17V
Location of welded N.O. contacts
10 mA
State of N.C. Contacts if N.O. contact welds Main
Front aux.
Main
Open
Open
Front aux.
Open
Open
24V
10A
6A
48V
10A
6A
Left side aux.
Open !
Open
120V 240V
10A 10A
6A 5A
Right side aux.
Open !
Open
400V
6A
3A
480V/500V
40ºC
Yes!
Mechanically Linked Contacts➋ Aux. Contact (Frontmounted)
2.5A
1.6A
600V
1A
1A
690V
1A
1A
Ith
20A
10A
AC-12 (Non-inductive, or
230V
8 kW
slightly inductive loads,
400V
14 kW
resistance furnaces)
690V
24 kW
20A
General
Mechanical Life
60º C Ith
! Side-mounted auxiliary contacts provide “mirror contact” performance. ➋ Defined in IEC 60947-5-1 annex L. Positive guidance is a relationship between contacts of opposite types (i.e., N.O. and N.C.)
6A
Catalogue Number 700S-CF
Aux. Contact (Frontmntd.)
[Mil]
15
15
Electrical Life
AC-15 (240V, 3A)
[Mil]
1.5
1.5
Weight
AC Op. Mechanism
[g]
390
–
2 x A4
2 x A4
230V
8 kW
400V
14 kW
Terminal CrossSections
690V
24 kW
Terminal Type
24V
12A
Switching DC Loads
DC-12 L
/R < 1ms, Resistive Loads
12A
48V
9A
9A
110V
3.5A
3.5A
220V
0.55A
0.55A
440V
0.2A
0.2A
DC-14
24V
9A
9A
L
48V
5A
5A
Loads
110V
2A
2A
with economy resistor in series
220V
0.4A
0.4A
440V
0.16A
0.16A
24V
5A
5A
/R < 15ms, Inductive
DC-13 Switching electromagnets
9-20
48V
3A
3A
110V
1.2A
1.2A
220V
0.6A
0.6A
440V
0.3A
0.15A
Terminal Size per IEC 60947-1 Flex. with Wire End Ferrule
1 Conductor 2 Conductor
[mm2] [mm2]
1…4 1…4
0.5…2.5 0.75…2.5
1 Conductor 2 Conductor
[mm2] [mm2]
1.5…6 1.5…6
0.5…2.5 0.75…2.5
Max. Wire Size per UL/CSA
[AWG]
16…10
18…14
Tightening Torque
[lb-in]
8.9…22
8.9…13.3
Tightening Torque
[Nm]
1…2.5
1…1.5
Solid
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100S-C and 700S-CF General (continued)
General (continued) Aux.Contact (Side-mounted) Contact Ratings — IEC AC-15 (solenoids, contactors) at rated voltage
Catalogue Number 700S-CF Rated Insulation Voltage Ui
120V
6
IEC
690V
240V
5
UL; CSA
600V
400V
3
Rated Impulse Strength Uimp
8 kV
500V
1.6
Ith
10A
Ith
6A
AC
115, 230, 400, 500, 690V
DC-13 (Solenoids and
24V
3A
DC
24, 48, 110, 220, 440V
contactors), IEC60947
48V
1.5A
110V
0.6A
Short-Circuit Protection IEC 1581 Fuse, gG
220V
0.3A
Rated Frequency
440V
0.2A
Ambient Temperature
[AWG]
18…14
[lb-in]
8.9…13.3
IEC 60947
AC-12 (Non-inductive, or 40ºC slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces), IEC60947 60ºC
Max. Wire Size per UL/CSA
High Test Voltage 1 minute (per IEC 947-4) Rated Voltage Ue
Tightening Torque Tightening Torque
[Nm]
1…1.5
Catalogue Number 700S-CF Operating Voltage
DC!
10A 50/60 Hz, DC
Storage
–55…+80 °C (–67…176 °F)
Operation at nominal current
–25…+60 °C (–13…140 °F)
Conditioned 15% current reduction after AC-1 at > 60°C
–25…+70 °C (–13…158 °F)
Corrosion Resistance
humid-alternating climate, cyclic, per IEC 68-2-30 and DIN 50 016, 56 cycles
Control Circuit
AC 50/60 Hz
2500V
Altitude
2000m above mean sea level, per IEC 60947-4
Type of Protection Pick-up
[x Us]
0.85…1.1
Dropout
[x Us]
0.3…0.6
Pick-up
[x Us]
0.8…1.1
Dropout
[x Us]
0.1…0.6
Inrush
[VA/W]
70/50
Seal
[VA/W]
8/2.6
Inrush/Seal
[W]
6.5
Pick-up Time
[ms]
15…30
Dropout Time
[ms]
10…60
Pick-up Time
[ms]
40…70
Dropout Time
[ms]
7…15
IP 2X (IEC 529 and DIN 40050) Finger Protection
in connected state safe from touch by fingers and back of hand per VDE 0106, Part 100
Coil Consumption AC 50/60 Hz
DC Operating Times AC 50/60 Hz
DC
! For 9V DC, code ZR, use operating voltage 0.65…1.3 x Us. For 24V DC, code ZJ or DJ, use operating voltage 0.7…1.25 x Us.
9-21
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100S-C and 700S-CF Auxiliary Contacts
NO
NC
1
0
Catalogue Number
100S-C all 700S-CF all
100-SA10
100S-C AC only 700S-CF AC only
100-SA20
100S-C09…C23 700S-CF all➋
100-SB10
100S-C09…C23 AC only 700S-CF AC only➋
100-SB20
-3
-4
-3
-SA10 -3
-4
-4
-3
-3
0
-4
2
-3
-4
Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Side Mounting without Sequence Terminal Designations ! • 1- and 2-pole • Two-way numbering for right or left mounting on the contactor • Quick and easy mounting without tools • Electronic-compatible contacts down to 17V, 10mA
For Use With Catalogue Number
Connection Diagrams
-4
Description
-SA20
1
0
13
44
14
43
-SB10 13
14
24
33
43
0
44
2
23
34
Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Side Mounting with Sequence Terminal Designations ! • 1- and 2-pole • Two-way numbering for right or left mounting on the contactor • Quick and easy mounting without tools • Electronic compatible contacts down to 17V, 10mA • L = Late break/Early make
-SB20
! AC Coils: Max. 2 N.O. auxiliary contacts may be mounted on the side. DC coils: Max. 1 N.O. auxiliary contact may be mounted on the side. No additional N.C. auxiliary contacts may be added to safety contactors and control relays listed in this publication. For additional contact configurations, consult your local Rockwell Automation/AllenBradley distributor. ➋ Double Numbering — Left-side mounting only is recommended for Catalogue Number 700S-CF… due to double numbering.
Marking Systems Uniform labelling materials for contactors, motor starting equipment, timing relays and circuit breakers Package Qty.
Catalogue Number
Label Sheet • Sheet with 105 self-adhesive paper labels, 6 x 17 mm
10
100-FMS
Marking Tag Sheet • Sheet with 160 perforated paper labels, 6 x 17 mm • To be used with a transparent cover
10
100-FMP
Transparent Cover • To be used with marking tag sheets
100
100-FMC
System V4/V5
100
100-FMA1
System Bul. 1492W
100
100-FMA2
Description
Marking Tag Adaptors • 100 each • To be used with marking tag:
9-22
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100S-C and 700S-CF Control Modules Connection Diagrams
Description DC Interface (electronic) • Interface between the DC control signal (PLC) and the contactor AC operating mechanism • Control voltage 18…30V DC (24V DC nominal) • For coil voltage of 110… 240V AC • Suitable for all 100S-C contactor sizes, 9…85 A • Requires no additional surge suppression for the coils • Power consumption – 0.1 W at 18V DC – 0.25 W at 24V DC – 0.5 W at 30V DC
Surge Suppressors For limitation of coil switching transients. • Plug-in, coil mounted • Suitable for all 100S-C contactor sizes, 9…85 A • RC, Varistor and Diode Versions
K1M
For Use With Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
100S-C with AC coils 700S-CF with AC coils
100-JE
(K1M)
RC Module AC Operating Mechanism
24…48V, 50/60 Hz 110…280V, 50/60 Hz 380…480V, 50/60 Hz
100S-C with AC coils 700S-CF with AC coils
100-FSC48 100-FSC280 100-FSC480
Varistor Module AC/DC Operating Mechanism
12…55V AC/12…77V DC 56…136V AC /78…180V DC 137…277V AC /181…350V DC 278…575V AC
100S-C all 700S-CF all
100-FSV55 100-FSV136 100-FSV277 100-FSV575
Diode Module DC Operating Mechanism
12…250V DC
100S-C with DC coils 100-FSD250 700S-CF with DC coils
9-23
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100-D Auxiliary Contacts
Description
NO
NC
1
1
2
0
• Side-mounted • With IEC sequence terminal designations
Connection Diagrams
53 63
74 84 54 64
73 83
• Electronically compatible auxiliary contacts • Ideal for use when switching low-power control circuits • Contact ratings: AC-1 250V, 0.1 A AC-15, DC-13 3…125V, 1…100V,
1
1
For Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
100-D Left or right outside mounting
100-DS2-11
100-D Left or right outside mounting
100-DS2-20
100-D Left or right outside mounting
100-DS2-B11
Labeling Material • Uniform labeling materials for contactors, motor protection devices, timing relays, and circuit breakers.
Marking Systems (for 100-D95...D860 contactors) Package Qty.
Catalogue Number
Label Sheet • 10 sheets with 105 self-adhesive paper labels each, 6 x 17mm
10
100-FMS
Marking Tag Sheet • 10 sheets with 160 perforated paper labels each, 6 x 17mm • To be used with a transparent cover
10
100-FMP
Transparent Cover • 100 each • To be used with marking tag sheets
100
100-FMC
System V4/V5
100
100-FMA1
System Bul. 1492W
100
100-FMA2
Description
Marking Tag Adaptors • 100 each • To be used with marking tag:
9-24
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100S-C and 700S-CF Auxiliary Contacts Internal Auxiliary Contacts Catalogue Numbers 100S-C09...100S-C23
Side-Mounted Auxiliary Contacts Catalogue Numbers 100-SA, 100-SB, 100-MC
25
10
Current Switching AC-12 Ith
at 40°C
[A]
at 60°C
[A]
20
[V]
24 48 120 240 400 415 500 690
24 48 120 240 400 415 500 690
[A]
10 10 10 10
6
[V]
24 48 110 220 400
24 48 110 220 400
[A]
5
5
AC-15 at Rated Operating Voltage DC-13 at Rated Operating Voltage
2
6
6 5
2.5 1
0.7 0.25 0.12
6 2
6
5
3
2.5 1.6 1
0.7 0.25 0.12
Continuous Current Rating per UL/CSA AC DC Short-Circuit Protection gG Fuse Type 2 Coordination Rated Impulse Voltage Uimp Insulation Voltage (between control and load circuit) per DIN, VDE 0106, Part 101 (NAMUR recommendation)
[A] [A]
10A, 600V (NEMA A600) 5A, 600V (NEMA P600)
10A, 600V (NEMA A600) 2.5A, 600V (NEMA Q600)
[A]
10
10
[kV]
8
6
250
500
17V, 10mA
17V, 10mA
Mutually unrestricted between all N.O. and N.C. contacts
100-SA, 100-SB: Mirror output performance per IEC60947-4 Annex F 100-MC: Mutually unrestricted between all N.O. and N.C. contacts
2 x A4
2 x A4
[V]
Contact reliability per DIN 19240 without contamination, normal industrial atmosphere Mechanically Linked Contacts per IEC 60947-5-1 Annex L (SUVA Third-party certified) Terminals Terminal Type Wire Size per IEC 60947-1 Flexible w/Wire-End Ferrule 1 Conductor
[mm2]
1…4
0.5…2.5
2 Conductor
[mm2]
1…4
0.75…2.5
Solid/Stranded Conductor
2
1 Conductor
[mm ]
1.5…6
0.5…2.5
2 Conductor
[mm2]
1.5…6
0.75…2.5
Nm [AWG] [lb-in]
1...2.5 16…10 8.9…22
1…1.5 18…14 8.9…13.3
Recommended Tightening Torque (min...max) Wire Size per UL/CSA Recommended Tightening Torque (min...max)
9-25
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100-DS2 Auxiliary Contacts Side-Mounted Auxiliary Contacts Catalogue Numbers 100-DS2 Conventional
Electronically Compatible
16
0.1 at 250V
Current Switching AC-12 Ith
at 40°C
[A]
at 60°C
[A]
AC-15 at Rated Operating Voltage
DC-13 at Rated Operating Voltage
12
[V]
230 240 400 415 500 690
[A]
5.5
[V]
24 48 110 220 440
[A]
5
5
2
3
2.5
1.6
1
1… 100mA at 3… 125V
0.7 0.25 0.12
Continuous Current Rating per UL/CSA AC DC Short-Circuit Protection gG Fuse Type 2 Coordination Rated Impulse Voltage Uimp Insulation Voltage (between control and load circuit) per DIN, VDE 0106, Part 101 (NAMUR recommendation)
[A] [A]
10A, 600V (NEMA A600) 2.5A, 600V (NEMA Q600)
[A]
10
[kV]
8
—
[V]
Contact reliability per DIN 19240 without contamination, normal industrial atmosphere Mechanically Linked Contacts per IEC 60947-5-1 Annex L (SUVA Third-party certified)
17V, 5mA
17V, 1mA
Mirror contact performance per IEC 60947-4 Annex F
Mirror contact performance per IEC 60947-4 Annex F
2 x A4
2 x A4
Terminals Terminal Type Wire Size per IEC 60947-1 Flexible w/Wire-End Ferrule 1 Conductor
[mm2]
1…2.5
1…2.5
2 Conductor
[mm2]
1…2.5
1…2.5
1 Conductor
[mm2]
1… 4
1… 4
2 Conductor
[mm2]
1… 4
1… 4
Nm [AWG] [lb-in]
1.4…2.3 16…12 12…20
1.4…2.3 16…12 12…20
Solid/Stranded Conductor
Recommended Tightening Torque (min...max) Wire Size per UL/CSA Recommended Tightening Torque (min...max)
9-26
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100S-C and 700S-CF Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. Mounting Position
c2
AC Contactors and Control Relays ➊
c1 c
DC Contactors and Control Relays
AC Contactors and Control Relays a
b
c
c1
c2
∅d
d1
d2
Catalogue Number
45 (1-25/32)
81 (3-3/16)
119.5 (4-3/4)
114.5 (4-43/64)
6 (1/4)
2 - 4.5 (2 - 3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
35 (1-25/64)
100S-C09…100S-C23, 700S-CF
45 (1-25/32)
81 (3-3/16)
136.5 (5-37/64)
131.6 (5-11/32)
6.5 (17/64)
2 - 4.5 (2 - 3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
35 (1-25/64)
100S-C30, 100S-C37
54 (2-1/8)
81 (3-3/16)
139.5 (5-11/16)
134.6 (5-29/64)
6.5 (17/64)
2 - 4.5 (2 - 3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
45 (1-25/32)
100S-C43
72 (2-53/64)
122 (4-51/64)
156 (6-11/32)
150.5 (6-1/8)
8.5 (21/64)
4 - 5.4 (4 - 7/32)
100 (3-15/16)
55 (2-11/64)
100S-C60…100S-C85
c2
∅d
d1
d2
Catalogue Number
DC Contactors and Control Relays a
b
c
c1
45 (1-25/32)
81 (3-3/16)
145.5 (5-49/64)
140.5 (5-37/64)
6 (1/4)
2 - 4.5 (2 -3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
35 (1-25/64)
100S-C09Z...100S-C16Z, 700SCF
45 (1-25/32)
81 (3-3/16)
162.5 (6-7/16)
158 (6-1/4)
6 (1/4)
2 - 4.5 (2 -3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
35 (1-25/64)
100S-C23Z
45 (1-25/32)
81 (3-3/16)
180.5 (7-5/32)
175.5 (6-61/64)
6.5 (17/64)
2 - 4.5 (2 -3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
35 (1-25/64)
100S-C30...100S-C37
54 (2-1/8)
81 (3-3/16)
183.5 (7-17/64)
179 (7-3/32)
6.5 (17/64)
2 - 4.5 (2 -3/16)
60 (2-23/64)
45 (1-25/32)
100S-C43Z
72 (2-53/64)
122 (4-51/64)
156 (6-11/32)
150.5 (6-1/8)
8.5 (21/64)
4 - 5.4 (4 -7/32)
100 (3-15/16)
55 (2-11/64)
100S-C60D...100S-C85D
Accessories mm
(inches)
Auxiliary contact block for side mounting 1- or 2-pole
Contactors with
a+9
(a + 23/64)
Electronic Timing Module on coil terminal side
b + 24
(b + 15/16)
Mechanical Interlock on side of contactor
a+9
(a + 23/64)
Interface Module on coil terminal side
b+9
(b + 23/64)
Surge Suppressor on coil terminal side
b+3
(b + 1/8)
Labelling with label sheet marking tag sheet with clear cover marking tag adapter for System V4/V5 marking tag adapter for System Bul. 1492W
+0 +0 + 5.5 + 5.5
(+ 0) (+ 0) (+ 7/32) (+ 7/32)
9-27
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 100S-D Contactors and Accessories Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes.
Mounting Position e2
c1 e4
e1
➊
e3
b
d1
øe
ød d2 c
a
Catalogue Number
a
b
c
c1
ød
d1
d2
øe
e1
e2
e3
e4
100S-D95, 100S-D110
120
170
156
110.5
5.2
145
100
M6
16
38.5
147
8
100S-D95-EI…100S-D180-EI, 100S-D140, 100S-D180
120
170
156
110.5
5.2
145
100
M8
20
39
160
10
100S-D210-EI…100S-D420-EI
155
205
180
110.5
6.5
180
130
M10
25
48
193
12.5
100S-D630-EI…100S-D860-EI
255
310
265
110.5
10
230
225
M12
40
70
291
22
Contactor with
[mm]
Auxiliary contact block
100-DS2…
a + 13.5 each
Mechanical interlock
100-DM…
a+a
Frame terminal block
100-DTB110 100-DTB180 100-DTB420
b + 7 each b + 7 each b + 8.5 each
Label holder
c…+ 5
➊ Convention DC coil contactors will have an additional auxiliary contact block mounted which will add 13.5mm (0.53in) to the “a” dimension on the right hand side.
9-28
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 700S-P Specifications Type Contact Rating Continuous Ratings Make/Break
700S-P 10 A @ 600V AC / 5 A @ 600V DC
AC
NEMA A600
DC
NEMA P600
Min. Contact Switching Ratings Contacts in Series DC Switching
Features • • • • • • •
Mechanically linked contacts meeting IEC 947-5-1-L 2…12 poles – all mechanically linked Red faceplate for easy identification of safety circuits IEC mechanically linked contacts symbol displayed on front Double-break contacts to reduce probability of welded contacts Visual indication of contact state Tamper resistant cover helps prevent changes which could jeopardize safety • Complete Catalogue number displayed on front • Ideal for use in safety circuits
Coil AC Consump-tion DC
64
125
250
500
600
5A 2.2A 1.1A 0.55A 0.24A 0.2A
2
10A 10A
3
—
4
—
5A
2A
0.7A
0.5A
—
7A
3A
1.5A
1.0A
—
10A
5A
2.5A
1.5A
1.5 mil. ops. at 10A break at 120V AC 14 mil. ops. at 1A break at 120V AC 6 mil. ops. at 1A break at 24V DC
AC
85…110%
DC
80…110%
Battery Charging
85…115% 50 Hz
60 Hz
Inrush
132 VA
138 VA
Sealed
19.3 VA
19 VA
Inrush
12.7 W
Sealed
12.7 W
Mechanically Linked Contacts Operating Time
Volts DC 24
1
Contact Electrical Life— Resistive Loads
Coil Voltage Range ➊
10V, 50 mA
All contacts are mechanically linked per IEC 947-5-1 annex L for 2 to 12 poles
Pick-up
AC – 10…20 ms / DC – 30…50 ms
Dropout
AC – 10…20 ms / DC – 20…33 ms 12.5 million operations ➋
Mechanical Life Contact Arrangement Contact Material/Design
2 to 12 Poles, Double Break Contacts N.O. or N.C. (8 N.C. Maximum) Silver Nickel/Bifurcated Panel mount or mount on 700-MP Rail Horizontal Mounting Recommended
Mounting Operating➌
–20…+65°C (–4…149°F)
Storage
–40…+65°C (–40…149°F)
Temperature Wire size per UL/CSA Tightening Torque
1X #18 AWG…2X #12 AWG 8…12 lb-in. (0.9…1.4 N•m)
➊ Coil voltage required for proper operation (percent of rated coil voltage). ➋ 90% of devices are expected to meet or exceed 12.5 million operations, and 50% of devices are are expected to meet 20 million operations. ➌ Temperature inside the panel.
9-29
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 700S-P Product Selection Type S-P Control Relays — AC and DC Coil Voltage
Connection Diagrams and Terminal Markings
Coil and Main Contacts
Additional Contacts
K1
A1X
A2X A3X
A4X
K2Y
A1Y
A2Y
A3Y
A4Y
K1
A1X A2X A3X
K2
A1Y A2Y A3Y A4Y
K1
A1X
A2X A3X
A4X
B1X
B2X
B3X
B4X
K2Y
A1Y
A2Y
A3Y
A4Y
B1Y
B2Y
B3Y
B4Y
K1
A1X A2X A3X
A4X
B1X
B2X
B3X
B4X
K2
A1Y A2Y A3Y A4Y
B1Y
B2Y
B3Y
B4Y
K1
A1X A2X A3X
B1X
K2
A1Y A2Y A3Y A4Y
B1Y
K1
A1X A2X A3X
A4X
B1X
K2
A1Y A2Y A3Y A4Y
B1Y
K1
A1X A2X A3X
A4X
B1X
K2
A1Y A2Y A3Y A4Y
B1Y
B2Y
B3Y
B4Y
K1
A1X A2X A3X
A4X
B1X
B2X
B3X
B4X
K2
A1Y A2Y A3Y A4Y
B1Y
B2Y
B3Y
B4Y
Contacts
AC Coils
24V DC Coils
Additional Contacts
NO
NC
Catalogue Number ➊
Catalogue Number ➊
—
3
1
700S-P310⊗
700S-DCP310Z24
—
2
2
700S-P220⊗
700S-DCP220Z24
—
7
1
700S-P710⊗
700S-DCP710Z24
—
6
2
700S-P620⊗
700S-DCP620Z24
—
5
3
700S-P530⊗
700S-DCP530Z24
—
4
4
700S-P440⊗
700S-DCP440Z24
—
3
5
700S-P350⊗
700S-DCP350Z24
10
2
700S-P1020⊗
700S-DCP1020Z24
A4X
—
A4X
B3X
B2X
B3Y
B2Y
B3X
B2X
B3Y
B2Y
B3X
B2X
B4X
B4Y B4X
B4Y B4X
C1X C2X C3X
C1Y
C2Y
C4X
C3Y
C4Y
! For other coil voltage, consult your local Allen-Bradley sales office. All Catalogue Numbers are factory-stocked. ⊗
AC Voltage Suffix Code
The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a voltage suffix code from the table below to complete the Catalogue Number. Example: Catalogue Number 700S-P310 becomes Catalogue Number 700S-P310A1 for a 120V AC coil.
9-30
Hz
24
115-120
230-240
277
460-480
60
A24
A1
A2
A27
A4
Contactors & Control Relays
Safety Control Relays 700S-P Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended for manufacturing purposes. AC: 97.63 (3.84) DC: 120.49 (4.74)
57.15 (2.25)
7.94 (0.31)
AC: 97.63 (3.84) DC: 120.49 (4.74) 7.94 (0.31)
57.15 (2.25)
89.69 (3.53)
89.69 (3.53)
79.38 (3.12)
79.38 (3.12)
Provision for 2 #8/#10 Mfg. Screws Provision for 2 #8/#10 Mfg. Screws
2- and 4-Pole Bulletin 700S-P Relay Approximate Shipping Weight AC - 0.68kg (1.5lbs), DC - 1.34kg (2.95lbs)
6- and 8-Pole Bulletin 700S-P Relay Approximate Shipping Weight AC - 0.79kg (1.75lbs), DC - 1.45kg (3.20lbs)
AC: 97.63 (3.84) DC: 120.49 (4.74)
57.15 (2.25)
7.94 (0.31)
Cat. No. 70034.93 (1.37)
{
MP4 = 229 (9) MP8 = 457 (18) MP12 = 686 (27) MP16 = 914 (36)
89.69 (3.53) 92.08 (3.62)
79.38 (3.12)
Provision for 2 #8/#10 Mfg. Screws
10- and 12-Pole Bulletin 700S-P Relay Approximate Shipping Weight AC - 1.02kg (2.25lbs), DC - 1.68kg (3.7lbs)
12.7 (0.5)
28.58 (1.12)
57.15 (2.25)
57.15 (2.25)
#8 Screws (Captive)
Universal Mounting Rail for Bulletin 700-P, -PH, -PK, and 700S-P Relays
9-31
Contactors & Control Relays
Notes
9-32
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 125 Amps to 315 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Features • • • • • • • • • • • •
Description Bulletin 194E load switches are designed for use as local motor isolation and IEC disconnect switch applications outside North America. Available with 3- and 6-pole versions with add-on additional poles, grounding and neutral terminals and auxiliary contacts, Bulletin 194Es share the same operating handles as the Bulletin 194L Control and Load Switches. Bulletin 194E switches are offered in two mounting styles, Front/ Door and Base/DIN configurations for a variety of installations. Switch body styles for Bulletin 194E base-mounted switches include standard interlock shaft; Bulletin 194E front-mounted switches include standard shaft. Two-position OFF-ON switch is used to connect or disconnect a variety of inductive loads, including solenoids, actuators, valves, magnetic starters, relays, and motors. Actuators featuring marked legend plates are available in SelectorKnob, Disk-Style, Rectangular-Style and Key-Operated versions. Selector-Knob versions are available in three sizes. Most actuators are available in colours of Gray/Black or Red/Yellow and have padlockable versions.
10-2
At-Motor Disconnect Switch 25, 32, 40, 63, 80, 100 A Inductive Load-Rated Switches IP65/Type 1/3/3R/12 Operating Handles IP2LX Finger-Safe Terminals 3- and 6-Pole Versions; Add-on Accessory Poles to Make 4-, 5-, 7- and 8-Pole Units Front/Door or DIN/Base Mounting Configurations Change over Switches OFF-ON Configurations 3- and 6-Pole Enclosed Switches Optional Thermoplastic Enclosures Positive-Guided Actuation Suitable as Motor Disconnect
Conformity to Standards • IEC 207 • IEC 947-1 • IEC 947-3 low-voltage switch gear and control gear part 3: switches, disconnecters, switch-disconnecters and fusecombination units. CE marked for all applicable directives. • UL 508: Industrial Control Equipment. cUL, 1999 edition • CSA: C22.2 No. 14: Industrial Control Equipment Approvals • UL listed (file number E54612 NLRV) • CSA certified (LR 13002) • Meets IEC, VDE and BS standard requirements • IEC/CE marked for all applicable directives (per EN 60947-3) • R.I.Na.—Italian Naval Registry Your order must include: • Catalogue Number of switch body • Catalogue Number of actuator • If required, Catalogue Number of accessories
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Product Selection OFF-ON Base-Mounted 3-Pole Switch (includes operating shaft) (Actuators listed on pages 10-4 and 10-5)
Switch Body (Includes Shaft)
Function Switching Angle
Contact Target Configuration X = Contact Closed O = Contact Open Handle Position ON/1 OFF/0 No. of Circuits
ON 1
1 2 3 OFF 0
O O O
X X X
Maximum Load Rating (A)
AC23A Rated Power [kW] at 690V AC 50 Hz
HP @ 480V AC 60 Hz 3 ∅
Catalogue Number
25
11
10
194E-A25-1753
32
15
15
194E-A32-1753
40
18.5
20
194E-A40-1753
63
22
25
194E-A63-1753
80
37
50
194E-A80-1753
100
45
50
194E-A100-1753
O
90
OFF-ON Front-Mounted 3-Pole Switch (includes operating shaft) (Actuators listed on pages 10-4 and 10-5)
ON 1
OFF 0
1 2 3
O O O
X X X
25
11
10
194E-E25-1753
32
15
15
194E-E32-1753
40
18.5
20
194E-E40-1753
63
22
25
194E-E63-1753
80
37
50
194E-E80-1753
100
45
50
194E-E100-1753
O
90
OFF-ON Base-Mounted 6-Pole Switch (includes operating shaft) (Actuators listed on pages 10-4 and 10-5)
ON 1
OFF 0
O
90
1 2 3 4 5 6
O O O O O O
X X X X X X
25
11
10
194E-A25-1756
32
15
15
194E-A32-1756
40
18.5
20
194E-A40-1756
63
22
25
194E-A63-1756
80
37
50
194E-A80-1756
100
45
50
194E-A100-1756
OFF-ON Front-Mounted 6-Pole Switch (includes operating shaft) (Actuators listed on pages 10-4 and 10-5)
ON 1
OFF 0
O
90
1 2 3 4 5 6
O O O O O O
X X X X X X
25
11
10
194E-E25-1756
32
15
15
194E-E32-1756
40
18.5
20
194E-E40-1756
63
22
25
194E-E63-1756
80
37
50
194E-E80-1756
100
45
50
194E-E100-1756
10-3
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Product Selection OFF-ON Base/Front-Mounted 3- and 6-Pole Switches (continued) (Switch Body listed on page 10-3) Actuators with Screw Fixing (Includes Legend Plate and Control Knob)
Rating
IP65
Colour
Black/Gray
Type A
IP65
Red/Yellow
Type I
IP65
Type S
Accessories — Page 10-11 Specifications — Page 10-17 Approximate Dimensions — Page 10-19
10-4
194E-25…100A
88 mm x 88 mm (3-15/32in x 3-15/32in)
194E-40…100A
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
194E-25…63A
64 mm x 64 mm (2-33/64in x 2-33/64in)
194E-25…100A
88 mm x 88 mm (3-15/32in x 3-15/32in)
194E-40…100A
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
194E-25…63A
64 mm x 64 mm (2-33/64in x 2-33/64in)
194E-25…100A
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
194E-25…63A
64 mm x 64 mm (2-33/64in x 2-33/64in)
194E-25…100A
67 mm x 67 mm (2-41/64in x 2-41/64in)
OFF-ON
194L-HE4A-175I
0-1
194L-HE6A-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE6A-175I
0-1
194L-HE8A-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE8A-175I
0-1
194L-HE4I-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE4I-175I
0-1
194L-HE6I-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE6I-175I
0-1
194L-HE8I-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE8I-175I
0-1
194L-HE4E-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE4E-175I
0-1
194L-HE6E-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE6E-175I
0-1
194L-HE4L-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE4L-175I
0-1
194L-HE6L-175
OFF-ON
194L-HE6L-175I
194E-25…100A
0-1 OFF-ON
194L-HE6G-175
88 mm x 88 mm (3-15/32in x 3-15/32in)
194E-40…100A
0-1 OFF-ON
194L-HE8G-175
67 mm x 67 mm (2-41/64in x 2-41/64in)
194E-25…100A
0-1 OFF-ON
194L-HE6N-175
90 mm x 90 mm (3-35/64in x 3-35/64in)
194E-40…100A
0-1 OFF-ON
194L-HE8N-175
48 mm x 62 mm (1-57/64in x 2-7/16in)
0-1
194L-HE4S-175
194E-25…63A OFF-ON
194L-HE4S-175I
64 mm x 78 mm (2-33/64in x 3-5/64in)
0-1
194L-HE6S-175
194E-25…100A OFF-ON
194L-HE6S-175I
Red/Yellow
Type N
IP65
64 mm x 64 mm (2-33/64in x 2-33/64in)
Catalogue Number 194L-HE4A-175
Black/Gray
Type G
IP65 Type 3/3R/12
194E-25…63A
Legend Marking 0-1
Red/Yellow
Type L with Locking for One Padlock (Padlock Not Included)
IP65 Type 3/3R/12
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
Black/Gray
Type E with Locking for One Padlock (Padlock Not Included)
IP65
Legend Plate Size
Use with Catalogue Number
Black/Gray
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Product Selection OFF-ON Front-Mounted 3- and 6-Pole Switches (continued) (Switch Body listed on page 10-3) Actuators with Central Fixing (Includes Legend Plate & Control Knob)➊
Rating
IP65
Colour
Black/Gray
Legend Plate Size
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
Use with Catalogue Number
Red/Yellow
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
Catalogue Number
0-1
194L-HC4A-175
OFF-ON
194L-HC4A-175I
0-1
194L-HC4I-175
OFF-ON
194L-HC4I-175I
0-1
194L-HC4E-175
OFF-ON
194L-HC4E-175I
0-1
194L-HC4L-175
OFF-ON
194L-HC4L-175I
194E-E25…63A
Type A
IP65
Legend Marking
194E-E25…63A
Type I
IP65
Black/Gray
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
194E-E25…63A
Type E with Locking (Padlock not Included)
IP65
Red/Yellow
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
Type L with Locking (Padlock not Included)
194E-E25…63A
➊ Use central-mounted handles with Catalogue Number 194E…switches.
Accessories — Page 10-11 Specifications — Page 10-17 Approximate Dimensions — Page 10-19
10-5
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Product Selection OFF-ON Front-Mounted 3- and 6-Pole Switches (continued) (Switch Body listed on page 10-3) 194L/194E Disk Actuators with Central Fixing (Type G, N) — Size 6
Rating
Colour
Use with Catalogue Number
Legend Plate Size
Black/ Gray IP65 Type 3/3R/12
67 mm x 67 mm (2-33/64in x 2-33/64in)
Legend Marking
Catalogue Number
0-1 OFF-ON
194L-HC6G-175
0-1 OFF-ON
194L-HC6N-175
194L-E25…100
Red/ Yellow Type G, N 194L/194E Central Fixing Actuators (Type B, D) Description
Central-Mounting Actuators (IP65) Handle Style: Knob Lever with Latch (Use with Catalogue Number 194E-E25-100-1753)
Pkg. Qty.
Catalogue Number
1
194L-HCB-001
Type B Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) — Central Fixing Use with Catalogue Number 194L-E25-100-1753
194L-HCDC-001
Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) — Central Fixing Use with Catalogue Number 194L-E25-100-1753
194L-HCDD-001 1
Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) — Central Fixing Use with Catalogue Number 194L-E25-100-1753 Key Removal Position (Includes Latch) — Central Fixing Use with Catalogue Number 194L-E25-100-1753
Type D
3-Position Front-Mounted Change over Switch (Includes Shaft) Contact Target Configuration X=Contact Closed O=Contact Open Handle Position Function 1 0 2 Switch Body Switching No. of (Includes Shaft) Angle Circuits
0
1 90
O
2
Accessories — Page 10-11 Specifications — Page 10-17 Approximate Dimensions — Page 10-19
10-6
194L-HCDG-001 194L-HCDH-001
Maximum Load Rating (A)
AC23A Rated Power [kW] at 690V AC 50 Hz.
HP @ 480V AC 60 Hz, 3∅
Catalogue Number
1
X
O
O
25
11
10
194E-A25-3753
2
X
O
O
32
15
15
194E-A32-3753
3
X
O
O
40
18.5
20
194E-A40-3753
4
O
O
X
63
22
25
194E-A63-3753
5
O
O
X
80
37
50
194E-A80-3753
6
O
O
X
100
45
50
194E-A100-3753
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Product Selection OFF-ON Front-Mounted 3- and 6-Pole Switches (continued) (Switch Body listed on page 10-3) 3-Position Change over Switch, Door Mount (includes operating shaft Contact Target Configuration X=Contact Closed O=Contact Open Handle Position Function No. of 1 0 2 Switch Body Switching Cir(Includes Shaft) Angle cuits )
Maximum Load Rating (A)
AC23A Rated Power [kW] at 690V AC 50 Hz.
HP @ 480V AC 60 Hz, 3∅
Catalogue Number
1
X
O
O
25
11
10
194E-E25-3753
2
X
O
O
32
15
15
194E-E32-3753
3
X
O
O
40
18.5
20
194E-E40-3753
4
O
O
X
63
22
25
194E-E63-3753
5
O
O
X
80
37
50
194E-E80-3753
6
O
O
X
100
45
50
194E-E100-3753
Use with Catalogue Number
Legend Marking
Catalogue Number
48 mm x 48 mm (1-57/64in x 1-57/64in)
194E-25…63-3753
I-O-2
194L-HE4A-375
64 mm x 64 mm (2-33/64in x 2-33/64in)
194E-25…100-3753
I-O-2
194L-HE6A-375
0
1 90
Actuators for Change over Switches Actuators with Screw Fixing (Includes Legend Plate & Control Knob)
O
2
Rating
Colour
IP65
Legend Plate Size
Black/Gray
Base-Mounting Distribution Switches
Imax [A]
AC23A Rated Power [kW] at 690V AC
HP @ 480V AC 60 Hz, 3∅
25
11
10
Contact Target Function No. of Switching CirAngle cuits OFF/0 1 ON 1
OFF 0
90
O
O
ON/ 1
Colour
Marking
Lockable (one padlock)
X
Red/ Yellow
O-1
No
2
O
X
Black/Gray
O-1
Yes
3
O
X
Red/ Yellow
O-1
No
194E-A25-1753-R 194E-A25-1753-Q 194E-A32-1753-R 32
Black/Gray
O-1
Yes
Catalogue Number
15
15 194E-A32-1753-Q
10-7
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Product Selection Enclosed Switch with Catalogue Number 194L-HE6N-175 Operating Handle and Thermoplastic Enclosure No. of Poles
Function Switching Angle
3
ON 1
OFF 0
Uses BaseMounted Switches
O
90
6
Maximum Load Rating (A) 25 32 40 63 80 100 25 32 40 63
Colour
Red/Yellow
Red/Yellow
Catalogue Number 194E-Y25-1753-6N 194E-Y32-1753-6N 194E-Y40-1753-6N 194E-Y63-1753-6N 194E-Y80-1753-6N 194E-Y100-1753-6N 194E-Y25-1756-6N 194E-Y32-1756-6N 194E-Y40-1756-6N 194E-Y63-1756-6N
OFF-ON Base-Mounted 3-Pole Switch with Catalogue Number 194L-HE6N-175 Red/Yellow Actuator Kits Function Switching Angle
ON 1
OFF 0
Maximum Load Rating (A)
AC23A Rated Power [kW] at 690V AC
HP @ 480V AC 60 Hz, 3 ∅
Catalogue Number
25
7.5
10
194E-A25-1753-6N
32
11
15
194E-A32-1753-6N
40
15
20
194E-A40-1753-6N
63
18.5
25
194E-A63-1753-6N
80
30
50
194E-A80-1753-6N
100
37
50
194E-A100-1753-6N
O
90
Type N
OFF-ON Front-Mounted 3-Pole Switch with Catalogue Number 194L-HE6N-175 Red/Yellow Actuator Kits Function Switching Angle
ON 1
OFF 0
O
90
Type N
Accessories — Page 10-11 Specifications — Page 10-17 Approximate Dimensions — Page 10-19
10-8
Maximum Load Rating (A)
AC23A Rated Power [kW] at 690V AC
HP @ 480V AC 60 Hz, 3 ∅
Catalogue Number
25
7.5
10
194E-E25-1753-6N
32
11
15
194E-E32-1753-6N
40
15
20
194E-E40-1753-6N
63
18.5
25
194E-E63-1753-6N
80
30
50
194E-E80-1753-6N
100
37
50
194E-E100-1753-6N
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Product Selection (continued) Enclosed Disconnect Load Switches — 3-Pole Base-Mounted Stainless Steel Enclosures IP66/Type 4/4X Maximum Load Rating (A)
Ref. Dim. Page
25
A1
32
A1
40
A1
63
A1
80
B1
100
B1
Painted Steel Enclosures IP66/Type 3/4/12 — 3-Pole Base-Mounted Maximum Load Rating (A)
Ref. Dim. Page
25
A1
32
A1
40
A1
63
A1
80
B1
100
B1
Non-Metallic Enclosures IP66/Type 3/4/4X — 3-Pole Base-Mounted Maximum Load Rating (A) Ref. Dim. Page 25
C1
32
C1
40
C1
63
C1
80
D1
100
D1
Handle Colour Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow
Catalogue Number ➊ 194E-CA20 194E-CA20E 194E-CA32 194E-CA32E 194E-CA40 194E-CA40E 194E-CA63 194E-CA63E 194E-CA80 194E-CA80E 194E-CA00 194E-CA00E
Handle Colour Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow
Catalogue Number ➊ 194E-FA20 194E-FA20E 194E-FA32 194E-FA32E 194E-FA40 194E-FA40E 194E-FA63 194E-FA63E 194E-FA80 194E-FA80E 194E-FA00 194E-FA00E
Handle Colour Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow
Catalogue Number ➊ 194E-KA20 194E-KA20E 194E-KA32 194E-KA32E 194E-KA40 194E-KA40E 194E-KA63 194E-KA63E 194E-KA80 194E-KA80E 194E-KA00 194E-KA00E
➊ Modifications: Up to two suffix codes may be added to an enclosed disconnect load switch. Example: Catalogue Number 194E-CA20-NP is a disconnect load switch with a power pole in a stainless steel enclosure (see page 10-14).
Accessories — Page 10-11 Specifications — Page 10-17 Approximate Dimensions — Page 10-19
10-9
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Product Selection Enclosed Disconnect Load Switches — 3-Pole Base-Mounted (continued) Metallic Enclosures IP54/Type 1 — 3-Pole Maximum Load Rating (A)
Ref. Dim. Page
25
A1
32
A1
40
A1
63
A1
80
B1
100
B1
ABS Thermoplastic Enclosure — IP65, For High-Impact Applications
Noryl Thermoplastic Enclosures — IP65, For Corrosion-Prone Applications
Description
Handle Colour Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow Black Red/Yellow
Catalogue Number ➊ 194E-AA20 194E-AA20E 194E-AA32 194E-AA32E 194E-AA40 194E-AA40E 194E-AA63 194E-AA63E 194E-AA80 194E-AA80E 194E-AA00 194E-AA00E
No. of Poles
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
3…4
194E-25/32
194L-G3572
3…4
194E-40/63
194L-G3663
3…4
194E-80/100
194E-G3665
6
194E-25/32
194E-G3663
6
194E-40/63
194E-G3665
No. of Poles
Switch Usage for Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
3…4
194E-25/32
194L-G3576
3…4
194E-40/63
194L-G3664
3…4
194E-80/100
194E-G3666
6
194E-25/32
194E-G3664
6
194E-40/63
194E-G3666
Use with Enclosures Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
194L-G3663, G3664, G3665, G3666 (5 per package)
194L-G3673
194L-G3572 and G3676 (5 per package)
194L-G3653
Additional Earth/Ground and Neutral Terminals — For Thermoplastic Enclosure
➊ Modifications: Up to two suffix codes may be added to an enclosed disconnect load switch. Example: Catalogue Number 194E-CA20-NP is a disconnect load switch with a power pole in a stainless steel enclosure (see page 10-14).
Accessories — Page 10-11 Specifications — Page 10-17 Approximate Dimensions — Page 10-19
10-10
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Accessories Auxiliary Contacts
Type
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number ➊
194E-A25…100
194E-A-P11
194E-E25…100
194E-E-P11
194E-A25…100
194E-A-PL11
194E-E25…100
194E-E-PL11
194E-A25…100
194E-A-P22
194E-E25…100
194E-E-P22
194E-A25...100
194E-A-PD10
194E-E25...100
194E-E-PD10
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.L.B.
2 N.O. + 2 N.C.
1 N.O. E.B. Additional Pole
Use with Catalogue Number 194E-A25 194E-A32 194E-A40 194E-A63 194E-A80 194E-A100 194E-E25 194E-E32 194E-E40 194E-E63 194E-E80 194E-E100
Catalogue Number ➊ 194E-A25-NP 194E-A32-NP 194E-A40-NP 194E-A63-NP 194E-A80-NP 194E-A100-NP 194E-E25-NP 194E-E32-NP 194E-E40-NP 194E-E63-NP 194E-E80-NP 194E-E100-NP
Earthing/Grounding Terminal
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number ➊
194E-A25/32
194E-A32-PE
194E-A40/63
194E-A63-PE
194E-A80/100
194E-A100-PE
194E-E25/32
194E-E32-PE
194E-E40/63
194E-E63-PE
194E-E80/100
194E-E100-PE
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number ➊
194E-A25/32
194E-A32-TN
194E-A40/63
194E-A63-TN
194E-A80/100
194E-A100-TN
194E-E25/32
194E-E32-TN
194E-E40/63
194E-E63-TN
194E-E80/100
194E-E100-TN
Neutral Terminal
➊ A maximum of two side-mount accessories may be added to a 194E switch.
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-11
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Accessories Base/DIN Rail Mounting (1) 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact or (1) 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact or Grounding Terminal
Additional Pole or Neutral Terminal or (1) 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact or (1) 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact
Front/Door Mounting (1) 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact or (1) 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact or Grounding Terminal or Additional Pole
Neutral Terminal or (1) 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact or (1) 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact
Terminal Covers
Number of Poles
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
194E-25/32
194E-25-C3
194E-40/63
194E-40-C3
194E-80/100
194E-80-C3
194E-25/32
194E-25-C4
194E-40/63
194E-40-C4
194E-80/100
194E-80-C4
3
4
6-Pole Mechanical Coupling
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
194E-25/32
194E-G3660
194E-40/63
194E-G3661
194E-80/100
194E-G3662
Note: User must order (2) Bulletin 194E 3-Pole Switches separately.
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-12
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Accessories (continued) Blank Legend Plate with Bezel
Package Quantity
10
0-1 Marked Legend Plates with Bezel
Package Quantity
10
OFF-ON Marked Legend Plate w/Bezel
Package Quantity
10
Catalogue Number 194L-A4-000 194L-A6-000 194L-A8-000 194L-I4-000 194L-I6-000 194L-I8-000 Catalogue Number 194L-A4-175 194L-A6-175 194L-A8-175 194L-I4-175 194L-I6-175 194L-I8-175 Catalogue Number 194L-A4-175I 194L-A6-175I 194L-A8-175I 194L-I4-175I 194L-I6-175I 194L-I8-175I
Additional Legend Plates/Frames Colour
Legend Size
Use with
Gray/Black
19.2 mm x 49 mm 3/4 in. x 1-59/64 in.
Size 6 Type G and N Style Actuators 194L-HE6G/N
18 mm x 84 mm 11/16 in. x 3-5/16 in.
Size 8 Type G and N Style Actuators 194L-HE8G/N
Red/Yellow
Gray/Black
Red/Yellow
Legend Marking (Blank) MAIN SWITCH HAUPTSCHALTER INTERR. PRINCIPALE INTERR. PRINCIPAUX INTERR. PRINCIPAL HUVUDBRYTARE WAHLSCHALTER EMERGENCY OFF (Blank) MAIN SWITCH HAUPTSCHALTER INTERR. PRINCIPALE INTERR. PRINCIPAUX INTERR. PRINCIPAL HUVUDBRYTARE WAHLSCHALTER EMERGENCY OFF
Catalogue Number 194L-G3515 194L-G3515A 194L-G3515B 194L-G3515C 194L-G3515D 194L-G3515E 194L-G3515F 194L-G3515G 194L-G3515H 194L-G3667 194L-G3667A 194L-G3667B 194L-G3667C 194L-G3667D 194L-G3667E 194L-G3667F 194L-G3667G 194L-G3667H
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-13
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Accessories (continued) Modifications for Enclosed Switches (see pages 10-9 & 10-10) Description
Maximum Load Rating (A) 25 32 40 63 80 100 25/32 40/63 80/100 25/32 40/63 80/100 25/32 40/63 80/100 25/32 40/63 80/100 25/32 40/63 80/100
Power Pole
Auxiliary Contact (1 N.O. + 1 N.C.) Auxiliary Contact (1 N.C.E.B.) Auxiliary Contact (1 N.O.E.M. + 1 N.C.L.B.) Earthing Terminal (Ground) Neutral Terminal (Unswitched)
Suffix
-NP
-P11
-PD10
-PL11
-PE
-TN
Operating Shafts Lengths
Construction
Use with Catalogue Number
Plastic
Catalogue Number ➊ 194L-G3380
34 mm (1-11/32 in.)
194E-E… Metal
194E-G3688
Plastic Metal Plastic Metal Plastic
194L-G2830 194E-G3687 194L-G3194 194E-G3707 194L-G3195
Standard Shaft 44 mm (1-47/64 in.) 52 mm (2-3/64 in.) Interlock Shaft
57 mm (2-15/64 in.)
194E-A…
Shaft Extension Kits Lengths
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
24 mm (15/16 in.) Per Extension Sold in Qty. of 10 Per Pkg.
194E-A…
194L-G2853
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Shaft Extension
Metal Shaft Extensions — with Padlock Provision in OFF Position Lengths 110 mm…235 mm (4-21/64 in. …9-1/4 in.) 230 mm…350 mm (9-3/64 in.…13-51/64 in.) ➊ Order in quantities of 100 (50 shafts per package).
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-14
194L-G3393 194E-A… 194L-G3394
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Accessories (continued) Metal Shaft Adaptor Kits — For use with 194R Type 4/4X Handles Description
Use with Catalogue Number
Catalogue Number
Kit includes bezel adapter and 194R-R1 operating shaft. Operating handle (Catalogue Number 194R-HS4) must be ordered separately.
194E-A
194E-G3675
Accessory Description Locking Ring Wrench For Central-Fixing Handles
Package Quantity
Catalogue Number
1
800E-AW1
Control Knob, Black, with Locking Facility
194L-G2864N 10
Control Knob, Red, with Locking Facility
194L-G2864R
Control Knob, Type P Control Knob, Black, 31 mm (1-7/32 in.) Diameter
194L-G2888N 50
Control Knob, Red, 31 mm (1-7/32 in.) Diameter
194L-G2888R
Control Knob, Black, L = 37.5 mm (1-31/64 in.) Control Knob, Black, L = 48 mm (1-57/64 in.) Control Knob, Black, L = 37.5 mm (1-31/64 in.) Control Knob, Black, L = 48 mm (1-57/64 in.)
194L-G3154N 194L-G3155N 194L-G3154R 194L-G3155R
50
Rectangular Front Frame with Blank Nameplate L = 48 mm x 62 mm (1-57/64 in. x 2-7/16 in.)
194L-G3196 10
Standard Black Control Knob
Rectangular Front Frame
Rectangular Front Frame with Blank Nameplate L = 64 mm x 78 mm (2-33/64 in. x 3-5/64 in.)
Metal Shaft Extension
194L-G3197
10
194L-G3399
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-15
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Accessories (continued) Shaft for Enclosures Suitable For
Enclosure Type 194L-G3572 194L-G3576 (95 x 150 x 86 mm) 194L-G3573 194L-G3577 (95 x 150 x 111 mm)
194L (Base-Mounted Switches) 194L-A12(16) 194L-A12(16) 194L-A20(25) 194L-A20(25) 194L-A12(16) 194L-A12(16) 194L-A12(16) 194L-A20(25) 194L-A20(25)
194E-C3663 194E-G3664 (125 x 180 x 105 mm) 194E-G3665 194E-G3666 (175 x 230 x 120 mm)
No. of Contacts
Suitable For Use with 194E Switch
No. of Poles
Shaft Required
194E-A25(32)
3 and 4
194L-G3194
—
—
—
5/6 7/8 9/10 5/6 7/8
Shaft 194L-G3195 Standard 194L-G3194 Standard 194L-G3195 194L-G3194 Standard 194L-G3194 Standard
—
—
—
194E-A40(63) 194E-A25(32)
3 and 4 6
194L-G3194 Standard
—
—
—
194E-A80(100) 194E-A40(63)
3 and 4 6
194E-G3707 Standard
1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4
Possible Accessory Combinations in Enclosure
Enclosure Type
194L-G3572 194L-G3576
Switch
194E-A25(32)
No. of Poles
3
Shaft
Aux. Contacts (single or double) X X X
Additional Pole Block X
On Switch Neutral Ground Termin- Terminal Block al Block X
X
194L-G3194
X
X X X
X X
X
(95 x 150 x 86 mm)
194E-G3663 194E-G3664
194E-A40(63)
3
194L-G3194
X X X
X X X X X
(125 x 180 x 105 mm)
194E-G3665 194E-G3666
194E-A25(32)
194E-A80(100)
6
3
194E-G3707
X X X X X
(175 x 230 x 120 mm)
194E-A40(63)
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-16
6
X X X X
Standard X X X
Standard
1L+1R
On Enclosure Neutral Ground Termin- Terminal Block al Block
X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Specifications Electrical Ratings Performance Data Rated operational voltage (Ue): IEC ➊
25 A IEC Applications [V] 690
32 A
40 A
63 A
80 A
100 A
690
690
690
690
690
600
600
600
600
600
Aux. Contacts 690
Rated operational voltage (Ue): UL, CSA
[V]
Rated insulation voltage (Ui): IEC/UL, CSA
[V]
Rated impulse voltage (Uimp): UL, CSA
[kV]
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Test voltage, (Ui) 1 minute
[kV] w [Hz]
2.5 1.0 50/60
2.5 1.5 50/60
2.5 1.6 50/60
2.5 2.4 50/60
2.5 3.6 50/60
2.5 5.5 50/60
2.5 0.4 50/60
[A]
30
40
50
75
100
120
10 ➋
[A]
25
32
40
63
80
100
6
[A]
25
32
40
63
80
100
10
Lost power per pole Rated frequency Conventional free air thermal current Ith ➊ Conventional enclosed thermal current Ith ➊
600
690/600 690/600 690/600 690/600 690/600 690/600
600 690/600
Rated current Ie ➊ AC-1/ AC-21A
Non inductive or only slightly inductive loads Switching of resistive loads with slight overload
Rated power Pe
AC-23A
AC-3
230V
[kW]
7.5
7.5
15
18.5
22
30
—
Occasional switching of 3∅ motors and other highly inductive loads (criterion for selecting main switches)
400V
[kW]
11
15
18.5
22
37
45
—
690V
[kW]
11
15
18.5
22
37
45
—
Squirrel-cage motors; starting and stopping of running motors
230V 400V 690V
[kW] [kW] [kW]
5.5 7.5 7.5
7.5 11 11
11 15 15
15 18.5 18.5
18.5 30 22
22 37 22
— — —
400/415V
[kA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A]
20 25 900 204 232 136
15 25 900 204 232 136
20 50 1300 484 336 196
15 63 1300 484 336 196
30 80 2500 780 680 376
25 100 2500 780 680 376
— — — — — —
Short circuit current (coordination type 2) Rated conditional short-circuit current Maximum fuse rating of circuit (type g, G) Rated short-time current 1cw, 1s Rated breaking capacity AC23A (cosϕ 0.45)
230V 400V 690V
DC switching capacity Rated current Ie
48V
[A]
25
32
40
63
80
100
110V 220V 440V 96V 2-poles 110V in 220V series 440V 600V 110V 3-poles 220V in series 440V 600V
[A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A]
6 1 0.5 25 23 5 1 0.6 25 13 22 1.5
6 1 0.5 32 25 6 1 0.6 32 15 2.2 0.6
8 1.5 0.6 40 32 8 1.5 0.8 40 20 3.6 2
10 15 0.6 63 50 10 1.5 0.8 63 28 3.6 2
16 3 0.7 80 70 16 3 1 80 50 6.5 3
0 3 0.7 100 80 20 3 1 100 63 6.5 3
90V 3-poles 110V in series 220V 440V 600V
[kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
1.3 1.1 0.9 0.6 0.4
1.5 1.3 1.1 0.6 0.4
2.9 2.2 1.7 0.9 0.5
4.1 3.3 2 0.9 0.5
5.1 5.5 3.5 1.1 0.9
7.2 7 4.4 1.1 0.9
1-pole
DC-21A
For resistive loads, T ≤ 1 ms Ue max = 660V
—
—
—
Rated power Pe DC-23A, DC-3, DC-5 For inductive loads, T ≤ 15 ms
➊ See conformity to standards listed on page.
—
➋ Suitable also for SEV 500.
10-17
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Specifications Electrical Ratings (continued) Performance Data Continuous current Heavy Pilot Duty Standard Duty Motor rating 60 Hz
120V, 1P 240V, 1P
single-phase (2-poles)
480V, 1P 600V, 1P 120V, 3P 240V, 3P
three-phase
480V, 3P 600V, 3P
25 A 32 A UL/CSA Applications [A] 25 32 [AC] A600 A600 [DC] — — FLA 9.8 16 HP 0.5 1 FLA 10 12 HP 1.5 2 FLA 8.5 14 HP 3 5 FLA 6.8 11.2 HP 3 5 FLA 13.6 19.2 HP 2 3 FLA 15.2 22 HP 5 7.5 FLA 14 21 HP 10 15 FLA 11 17 HP 10 15
40 A
63 A
80 A
100 A
40 — — 24 2 17 3 21 7.5 16 7.5 28 5 28 10 27 20 22 20
63 — — 34 3 28 5 26 10 20 10 40 7.5 42 15 34 25 27 25
80 — — 56 5 50 10 34 15 27 15 56 10 68 25 52 40 52 50
100 — — 80 7.5 68 15 55 25 44 25 84 15 80 30 65 50 52 50
Aux. Contacts — A600 Q600
—
—
Mechanical Data Performance Data Protection class according to IEC 529 Motor rating 60 Hz actuators switch bodies Mechanical life [million operations] Max wire gauges Terminal size per IEC 947-1 fine strands 1 conductor mm2 rigid wire 1 conductor mm2 Wire gauges according to UL/CSA [AWG]
25 A
32 A
40 A
63 A
80 A
100 A
Aux. Contacts
IP65 IP20 0.2
IP65 IP20 0.2
IP65 IP20 0.2
IP65 IP20 0.2
IP65 IP20 0.2
IP65 IP20 0.2
IP65 IP20 0.2
A5 1…10
A5 1…10
A7 2.5…16
A7 2.5…16
A9 4…35
A9 4…35
2xA2 0.5…2.5
1.5…16 14/8
1.5…16 14/8
2.5…25 12/4
2.5…25 12/4
4…50 10/1
4…50 10/1
0.75…2.5 18/14
Environmental Data Storage Operation
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-18
–40…+80°C (–40…+176°F) –25…+60°C (–13…+140°F)
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Front Installation Catalogue Number 194E-E… B1 B2
1(3/64) ... 5(13/64)
B1 B2
3.3 (1/8)
9.5 (3/8) Dia. 3.3 (1/8)
H
Q
9.5 (3/8) G P
L
6-Pole
F
3-Pole
Actuators Catalogue Number 194L-HE4A 194L-HE4I 194L-HE4S 194L-HE6A 194L-HE6I 194L-HE6S 194L-HE6N 194L-HE6G
P 28 (1-7/64) 28 (1-7/64) 28 (1-7/64) 28 (1-7/64) 28 (1-7/64) 28 (1-7/64) 34 (1-11/32) 34 (1-11/32)
Switch Body
Q 48 x 48 (1-57/64 x 1-57/64) 48 x 48 (1-57/64 x 1-57/64) 48 x 62 (1-57/64 x 2-7/16) 64 x 64 (2-33/64 x 3-5/64) 64 x 64 (2-33/64 x 3-5/64) 64 x 78 (2-33/64 x 3-5/64) 67 x 67 (2-41/64 x 2-41/64) 67 x 67 (2-41/64 x 2-41/64)
Use with Catalogue Number
B1➊
194E-E25/32
—
194E-E40/63 194E-E80/100
48 (1-57/64) 48 (1-57/64)
B2 36 (1-27/64) 36 (1-27/64) 36 (1-27/64)
F 45 (1-25/32) 54 (2-1/8) 72 (2-27/32)
H 64 (2-33/64) 72 (2-27/32) 90 (3-35/64)
L 60 (2-3/8) 74 (2-29/32) 90 (3-35/64)
G 90 (3-1/2) 108 (4-1/4) 144 (5-11/16)
➊ Does not apply to 194E-40/63A, 6-pole switches.
Catalogue Number 194E-E Switch Body with Catalogue Number 194L-HCA Actuator for Central Mounting
3.2 +0.2 0 (1/8)
48 X 48 (1-57/64 X 1-57/64)
24.1 +0.4 0 (61/64)
22.3 +0.4 0 (7/8)
1(3/64)... 6(15/64) 29 (1-5/32)
24.5 (31/32) L
Type 194E-E25/32 194E-E40/63 194E-E80/100
L 84.5 (3-21/64) 98.5 (3-7/8) 114.5 (4-33/64)
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-19
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base Mounting Catalogue Number 194E-A… Y
17 (43/64)
F1 D3
B
ø3.3 (1/8)
Q
B
H
E
P F
5 (13/64) L
D3
J
F1
3-Pole
194L-HE4A 194L-HE4I 194L-HE4S 194L-HE6A 194L-HE6I 194L-HE6S 194L-HE6N 194L-HE6G
28 (1-7/64) 28 (1-7/64) 34 (1-11/32) 34 (1-11/32)
64 x 64 (2-33/64 x 3-5/64) 64 x 78 (2-33/64 x 3-5/64) 67 x 67 (2-41/64 x 2-41/64) 67 x 67 (2-41/64 x 2-41/64)
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-20
6-Pole
* F=F1-F2
Actuators P Q 28 48 x 48 (1-7/64) (1-57/64 x 1-57/64) 28 48 x 48 (1-7/64) (1-57/64 x 1-57/64) 28 48 x 62 (1-7/64) (1-57/64 x 2-7/16) 28 64 x 64 (1-7/64) (2-33/64 x 3-5/64)
F2 G
*
X
Catalogue Number
F2
Cover Requirements Use with Catalogue Number 194E-A25/32 194E-A40/63 194E-A80/100
Y min. X≥ Y max. X≥ 5 142 9.5 90 (13/64) (5-19/32) (3/8) (3-35/64) 2.5 150 9.5 90 (7/64) (5-29/32) (3/8) (3-35/64) 2.5 150 9.5 90 (7/64) (5-29/32) (3/8) (3-35/64)
Switch Body Use with Cat. Number 194E-A25/32 194E-A40/63 194E-A80/100
D3 E F1 F2 G H L J 4.5 70 30 15 90 64 84 45 (3/16) (2-49/64) (1-3/16) (19/32) (3-1/2) (2-33/64) (3-5/16) (1-25/32) 4.5 80 37 17 108 72 98 54 (3/16) (3-5/32) (1-15/32) (43/64) (4-1/4) (2-27/32) (3-55/64) (2-1/8) 5.6 95 48.5 23.5 144 90 114 72 (7/32) (3-3/4) (1-29/32) (59/64) (5-11/16) (3-35/64) (4-1/2) (2-27/32)
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base Mounting Catalogue Number 194E-A… Catalogue Number 194E-A… Switch Body with Catalogue Number 194L-G2853 Shaft Extension Shaft extensions Y 17 (43/64)
B
ø3.3 (1/8)
Q
B
24 (61/64)
Switch body
24 (61/64)
4 (11/64)
2.5 (7/64) L
Switch Body Catalogue Number 194E-A 194E-A 194E-A L 25/32 40/63 80/100 88 102 118 with 1 shaft extension (3-15/32) (4-1/32) (4-21/32) 112 126 142 with 2 shaft ext. (4-27/64) (4-31/32) (15-19/32) 136 150 166 with 3 shaft ext. (5-23/64) (5-29/32) (6-35/64) 160 174 190 with 4 shaft ext. (6-5/16) (6-55/64) (7-31/64) 184 198 214 with 5 shaft ext. (7-1/4) (7-51/64) (8-7/16) 208 222 238 with 6 shaft ext. (8-13/64) (8-3/4) (9-3/8)
Actuators
Shaft
Type
194L-G2830
Y 2.5…9.5 (7/64…3/8) 9…18 194L-G3194 (23/64…23/32) 14…23 194L-G3195 (9/16)…(29/32)
194L-HE4A 194L-HE4I 194L-HE6A 194L-HE6I 194L-HE6N 194L-HE6G
B 36 (1-27/64) 36 (1-27/64) 48 (1-57/64) 48 (1-57/64) 48 (1-57/64) 48 (1-57/64)
Q 48 x 48 (1-57/64 x 1-57/64) 48 x 48 (1-57/64 x 1-57/64) 64 x 64 (2-33/64 x 2-33/64) 64 x 64 (2-33/64 x 2-33/64) 67 x 67 (2-41/64 x 2-41/64) 67 x 67 (2-41/64 x 2-41/64)
Front Installation Catalogue Number 194E-A… Catalogue Number 194E-A Switch Body with Metal Shaft Extension
2.5(7/64)... 9.5 (3/8) A
Catalogue Number 194L-G3393 194L-G3394
A 110…235 (4-11/32…9-1/4) 230…350 (9-1/16…13-25/32)
L
Catalogue Number 194E-A25/32 194E-A40/63 194E-A80/100
L➊ 60 (2-3/8) 74 (2-59/64) 90 (3-35/64)
➊ +2.5 (7/64) [DIN 46 277] 35 (1-3/8) Rails.
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-21
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base and Front Installation Catalogue Number 194E… with Auxiliary Contact Block Installed Contacts M 1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
9 (23/64)
2 N.O. + 2 N.C.
18 (23/32)
M
M
Catalogue Number 194E… with 4-Pole, Ground and Neutral Terminals Catalogue Number M 14 194E-25/32 (9/16) 17.5 194E-40/63 (11/16) 22 194E-80/100 (7/8) M
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-22
M
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are shown in millimetres (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base Mounting Catalogue Number 194E-A… Thermoplastic Enclosures E Ø D1
Ø D1
A
F
F
Ø D2
Complete Switches Catalogue Number Poles
Enclosures ABS Noryl Catalogue Number
3 and 4
194L-G3572
194L-G3576
6
194E-G3663
194E-G3664
3 and 4
194E-G3663
194E-G3664
6
194E-G3665
194E-G3666
3 and 4
194E-G3665
194E-G3666
194E-Y25/32
194E-Y40/63
194E-Y80/100
Catalogue Number 194E-A 20/32… No. of Extensions with 1 extension with 2 extensions with 3 extensions with 4 ➊ extensions with 5 ➊ extensions with 6 ➊ extensions
H
E B
B
96 (3-25/32) 120 (4-23/32) 144 (5-43/64) 168 (6-39/64) 192 (7-9/16) 216 (8-1/2)
A 150 (5-29/32) 180 (7-3/32) 180 (7-3/32) 230 (9-1/16) 230 (9-1/16)
B ØD1 95 22.5 (3-3/4) (57/64) 125 37.5 (4-59/64) (1-31/64) 125 37.5 (4-59/64) (1-31/64) 175 47.5 (6-57/64) (1-7/8) 175 47.5 (6-57/64) (1-7/8)
Catalogue Number 194E-A 40/63… Inside Enclosure Depth 107 (4-7/32) 131 (5-5/32) 155 (6-7/64) 179 (7-3/64) 203 (8) 227 (8-15/16)
ØD2 22.5 (57/64)
E 60 (2-3/8)
—
—
—
—
— —
155 (6-3/32) 155 (6-3/32)
F H 115 86 (4-17/32) (3-3/8) 145 105 (5-23/32) (4-1/8) 145 105 (5-23/32) (4-1/8) 195 120 (4-11/16) (4-47/64) 195 120 (4-11/16) (4-47/64)
Catalogue Number 194E-A 80/00… 114 (4-31/64) 138 (5-7/16) 162 (6-3/8) 186 (7-21/64) 210 (8-17/64) 234 (9-7/32)
➊ +2 When more than 4 modules are used, attach the first one to the switch body using the screws supplied with the extension (Catalogue Number: 194L-G2853).
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-23
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 25 Amps to 100 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Enclosed Switches 3/8 (9.7)
3/8 (9.7)
7-7/8 (200.2)
7-23/64 (186.9)
7-1/2 (190.5)
6-3/4 (171.5)
(4)- 5/16 (7.9)DIA. MTG. HOLES 1-15/64 (31.2)
9-1/2 8-3/4 (241.3) (222.3)
(4)- 5/16 (7.9)DIA. MTG. HOLES
2 (50.8)
1-15/64 (31.2)
4-15/16 (125.5)
Dim Ref. A1 194E-CA20…63, 194E-FA20…63, 194E-AA20…63
Dim Ref. B1 194E-CA80…00, 194E-FA80…00, 194E-AA80…00 1/2 (11.9)
4-29/32 (125.0)
6-7/8 6-3/16 (175.0) (157.0)
(4)-3/16 (4.6) DIA. MTG. HOLES 11/32 (8.9)
7-3/8 (188.0)
7-1/2 (190.5)
10-15/16 10 (277.9) (254.0)
4-3/16 (106.9)
Dim Ref. C1 194E-KA20…63
Product Selection — Page 10-3
10-24
4.00 (101.6 6-15/16 (176.3)
(4)-5/16 (7.1)DIA. MTG. HOLES 1/2 (11.9)
6-1/2 (164.1)
Dim Ref. B1 194E-KA80…00
8-11/16 (220.5)
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Features • • • • • • • • • •
Description Bulletin 194E load switches are designed for use in North America as local motor isolation and for IEC disconnect switch applications outside of North America. Available in 3- and 4-pole versions with add-on grounding and neutral terminals and auxiliary contacts, Bulletin 194Es use similar operating handles as the Bulletin 194L Control and Load Switches. Bulletin 194E switches are offered in two mounting styles, Front/ Door and Base/DIN configurations, for a variety of installations. Switch body styles for Bulletin 194E base-mounted switches include standard interlock shaft; Bulletin 194E front-mounted switches include standard shaft. Two-position OFF-ON switch is used to connect or disconnect a variety of inductive loads, including solenoids, actuators, valves, magnetic starters, relays, and motors up to 100 HP.
At-Motor Disconnect Switch 125, 160, 250, 315 A Versions of Inductive Load-Rated Switches IP65/Type 1/3/3R/12 Operating Handles IP2LX Finger-Safe Terminals 3- and 4-Pole Versions Front/Door or DIN/Base Mounting Configurations OFF-ON Configurations Box Lug and Bolt-on Terminals Available Switches Include Operating Shaft Suitable as Motor Disconnect
Conformity to Standards • IEC 207 • IEC 947-1 • IEC 947-3 low-voltage switchgear and control gear part 3: switches, disconnecters, switch-disconnecters and fusecombination units. CE • UL 508: Industrial Control Equipment. CUL Approvals • UL listed (Box Lug Version) • UR recognized (Bolt-on Version) • CUL listed (Box Lug Version) • CUR recognized (Bolt-on Version) • Meets IEC, VDE and BS standard requirements • IEC/CE marked for all applicable directives (per EN 60947-3) Your order must include: • Catalogue Number of switch body. • Catalogue Number of actuator. • If required, Catalogue Number of accessories.
10-25
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Product Selection OFF-ON Base-Mounted Switch — with Box Lugs — UL Listed Switch Body
Function Sw. Angle
No. of Poles
ON 1
3 OFF 0
O
90
ON 1
4 OFF 0
O
90
OFF/0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
ON/1 X X X
X X X X
Max. Load (Amps)
AC23 Rated kw 690V AC 50 Hz
Hp @ 480V AC 60 Hz 3 ∅
Catalogue Number
125
37
60
194E-A125-1753
160
37
60
194E-A160-1753
250
45
75
194E-A250-1753
315
45
100
194E-A315-1753
125
37
60
194E-A125-1754
160
37
60
194E-A160-1754
250
45
75
194E-A250-1754
315
45
100
194E-A315-1754
Max. Load (Amps)
AC23 Rated kw 690V AC 50 Hz
Hp @ 480V AC 60 Hz 3 ∅
Catalogue Number
125
37
60
194E-B125-1753
160
37
60
194E-B160-1753
250
45
75
194E-B250-1753
315
45
100
194E-B315-1753
125
37
60
194E-B125-1754
160
37
60
194E-B160-1754
250
45
75
194E-B250-1754
315
45
100
194E-B315-1754
OFF-ON Base-Mounted Switch — with Bolt-on Wiring — UR Recognized Switch Body
Function Sw. Angle
No. of Poles
ON 1
3 OFF 0
O
90
ON 1
4 OFF 0
O
90
OFF/0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
ON/1 X X X
X X X X
OFF-ON Front-Mounted Switch — with Box Lugs — UL-Listed Switch Body
Function Sw. Angle ON 1
OFF 0
O
90
ON 1
OFF 0
O
90
No. of Poles
OFF/0
ON/1
1 2 3
0 0 0
X X X
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0
X X X X
Max. Load (Amps) 125
AC23 Rated kw 690V AC 50 Hz 37
Hp @ 480V AC 60 Hz 3 ∅ 60
Catalogue Number 194E-E125-1753
160
37
60
194E-E160-1753
250
45
75
194E-E250-1753
315
45
100
194E-E315-1753
125
37
60
194E-E125-1754
160
37
60
194E-E160-1754
250
45
75
194E-E250-1754
315
45
100
194E-E315-1754
OFF-ON Front-Mounted Switch — with Bolt-on Wiring — UR-Recognized Switch Body
Function Sw. Angle ON 1
OFF 0
O
10-26
OFF/0
ON/1
Max. Load (Amps)
AC23 Rated kw 690V AC 50 Hz
Hp @ 480V AC 60 Hz 3 ∅
Catalogue Number
1
0
X
125
37
60
194E-F125-1753
2
0
X
160
37
60
194E-F160-1753
3
0
X
250
45
75
194E-F250-1753
315
45
100
194E-F315-1753
125
37
60
194E-F125-1754
160
37
60
194E-F160-1754
250
45
75
194E-F250-1754
315
45
100
194E-F315-1754
90
ON 1
OFF 0
No. of Poles
90
O
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0
X X X X
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Accessories Handles Actuators 194E — 125…315 A Actuators with Screw Fixing (Includes Legend Plate and Control Knob)
Rating
Colour
Black Type A
Legend Plate Size 88 mm x 88 mm 3-15/32 in. x 3-15/32 in.
Type I
IP65 Type 3/3R/12
Type G
Red/Yellow Type N Auxiliary Contacts—2 N.O./1 N.C.
Earthing/Grounding Terminal
PE
PE
Neutral Terminal
N
N
194E-HE13A-175 194E-125…315A 194E-HE8I-175 ON 1
130 mm x 130 mm 5-1/8 in. x 5-1/8 in. OFF 0
135 mm x 135 mm 5-5/16 in. x 5-5/16 in. 90 mm x 90 mm 3-35/64 in. x 3-35/64 in. 135 mm x 135 mm 5-5/16 in. x 5-5/16 in.
Catalogue Number 194E-HE8A-175
90 mm x 90 mm 3-35/64 in. x 3-35/64 in. Black
Legend Marking
130 mm x 130 mm 5-1/8 in. x 5-1/8 in. 88 mm x 88 mm 3-15/32 in. x 3-15/32 in.
Red/Yellow
Use with Catalogue Number
194E-HE13I-175
O
194E-HE8G-175
90
194E-HE13G-175 194E-125…315A 194E-HE8N-175 194E-HE13N-175
Use with 194E-A125-160 194E-B125-160 194E-A250-315 194E-B250-315 194E-E125-160 194E-F125-160 194E-E250-315 194E-F250-315
Catalogue Number
Use with 194E-A135-160 194E-E135-160 194E-A250-315 194E-E250-315 194E-B135-160 194E-F135-160 194E-B250 194E-F250 194E-B315 194E-F315
Catalogue Number
Use with 194E-A125-160 194E-E125-160 194E-A250-315 194E-E250-315 194E-B125-160 194E-F125-160 194E-B250 194E-F250 194E-B315 194E-F315
Catalogue Number
194E-AB-P21-160 194E-AB-P21-315 194E-EF-P21-160 194E-EF-P21-315
194E-AE160-PE 194E-AE315-PE 194E-BF160-PE 194E-BF250-PE 194E-BF315-PE
194E-AE160-TN 194E-AE315-TN 194E-BF160-TN 194E-BF250-TN 194E-BF315-TN
10-27
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Accessories Handles (continued) Terminal Cover
Use with 194E-A125-160 194E-E125-160 194E-A250-315 194E-E250-315 194E-B125-160 194E-F125-160 194E-B250-315 194E-F250-315
Catalogue Number 2 covers per pole required
194E-AE125-C1
2 covers per pole required
194E-AE250-C1
2 covers per pole required
194E-BF125-C1
2 covers per pole required
194E-BF250-C1
Legend Additional Name Plate and Frame Colour
Gray/Black
10 per package Red/ Yellow
10-28
Legend Size
Use with
19.2 mm x 49 mm 3/4 in. x 1-59/64 in.
88 mm x 88 mm 90 mm x 90 mm 130 mm x 130 mm 135 mm x 135 mm legend frames (Size 8,13)
Legend Marking MAIN SWITCH HAUPTSCHALTER INTERR. PRINCIPALE INTERR. PRINCIPAUX INTERR. PRINCIPAL HUVUDBRYTARE WAHLSCHALTER
Catalogue Number 194L-G3515A 194L-G3515B 194L-G3515C 194L-G3515D 194L-G3515E 194L-G3515F 194L-G3515G
EMERGENCY OFF
194L-G3515H
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Specifications IEC Performance Data for 194E Rated insulation voltage Ui: ➊
[V]
194E-125 1000
194E-160 1000
194E-250 1000
194-315 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
Rated frequency Rated thermal current Ith open
[kV] [kV] [V] [Hz] [A]
8 3.5 1000 50/60 125
8 3.5 1000 50/60 160
8 3.5 1000 50/60 250
8 3.5 1000 50/60 315
Rated thermal current Ithe enclosed
[A]
125
160
250
315
[A]
125
160
250
315
[kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kA] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A]
30 45 37 22 37 30 30 125 2500 800 750 340
30 55 37 30 45 37 30 160 3000 900 850 340
37 90 45 37 55 45 30 250 4600 1600 1380 400
55 110 45 45 75 45 30 315 5800 1800 1650 400
Test voltage 1 min Rated voltage Ue ➊➋
Rated current Ie AC-1 /
Non inductive or slightly induc. load Switching of resistive loads with slight AC-21A overload Rated power Pe AC-23A
Occasional switching of motor and other highly inductive loads
AC-3
Squirrel-cage motors: starting and stopping of running motors
Conditional rated short-circuit current Max. fuse rating of circuit (type g, G) Rated short-time current Icw 1S Rated breaking capacity AC-23A (cos ϕ 0.45)
230V 400V 690V 230V 400V 690V 400/415V
230V 400V 690V
➊ Valid for line with grounded common neutral termination, over voltage category III, pollution degree 3. Other values on request. ➋ Not suitable for load-switching applications (AC-20A) above 690V.
10-29
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Specifications IEC Performance Data for 194E (continued) DC Switching Capacity 194E-125
194E-160
194E-250
194E-315
[A] [A] [A]
125 110 45
160 140 55
250 220 85
315 280 110
[A] [A] [A]
125 80 16
160 100 20
250 150 32
315 200 40
Rated current Ie DC-21A For resistive loads T≤1 ms
Rated voltage [V] 60 110 220 Rated voltage [V] 110 220 440
No. Poles in series 3 3 3 No. Poles in series 4 4 4
Rated voltage [V] 24 48 60 110 220
No. Poles in series 4 4 4 4 4
[kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
3 6 7.5 10 4.5
3.8 7.5 9.5 12.5 5.5
6 12 15 20 8
7.5 15 19 25 10
Rated voltage [V] 24 48 60 110 220
No. Poles in series 4 4 4 4 4
[kW] [kW] [kW] [kW] [kW]
3 6 7.5 8.8 2.5
3.8 7.5 9.5 11 3.5
6 12 15 17.5 5.5
7.5 15 19 22 7
194E-125 600 600 150 150
194E-160 600 600 200 200
194E-250 600 600 250 250
194E-315 600 600 300 300
80 7.5 88 20 78 35 62 35 84 15 8 30 77 60 62 60
100 10 110 25 88 40 70 40 108 20 104 40 77 60 62 60
135 15 136 30 99 45 86 50 160 30 154 60 96 75 77 75
180 20 155 35 108 50 104 60 208 40 192 75 124 100 99 100
Rated power Pe DC-22A, DC-3 For Inductive loads T≤2.5 ms
Rated Power Pe DC-23A, DC-5 For Inductive loads T≤15 ms
UL CSA Performance Data for 194E Rated Insulation Voltage Rated voltage Continuous current Ampere rating for general use Heavy Pilot Duty Standard Duty Motor rating 60Hz
[V] [V] [A] [A] [AC] [DC] 120V, 1 P 240V, 1 P
1-phase (2-poles)
480V, 1 P 600V, 1 P 120V, 3 P 240V, 3 P
3-Phase
480V, 3 P 600V, 3 P
10-30
[FLA] [HP] [FLA] [HP] [FLA] [HP] [FLA] [HP] [FLA] [HP] [FLA] [HP] [FLA] [HP] [FLA] [HP]
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Specifications Mechanical Data 194E-125 IP65 — IP65 IP20 IP20 —
194E-160 IP65 — IP65 IP20 IP20 —
194E-250 IP65 — IP65 IP20 IP20 —
194E-315 IP65 — IP65 IP20 IP20 —
[Million operations]
0.1
0.1
0.075
0.075
No.
— B11 70
— B14 150
— B14 150
Actuators Protection class according to IEC 529 Front side Front unit Box lugs ➊ Bolt-on straight version ➊ bent version Mechanical life Box lugs — max. wire gauges Terminal sizes according to IEC 947-1 Fine strands, 1 conductor
Gauge Max.
mm2
— B11 70
Min.
mm2
16
16
25
25
Rigid wire, 1 conductor
Max.
mm
2
95
95
185
185
Wire gauges according to UL / CSA
Min. Max.
mm2 AWG MCM AWG
10 3/0 — 8
10 3/0 — 8
16 — 350 4
16 — 350 4
Min. ➊ When provided with terminal covers.
Approvals
Catalogue No. or Designation 194E-A125 194E-E125 194E-A160 194E-E160 194E-A250 194E-E250 194E-A315 194E-E315 194E-B125 194E-F125 194E-B160 194E-F160 194E-B250 194E-F250 194E-B315 194E-F315 Aux. switch blocks Ground terminal Neutral terminal
UL-Listed (marked w/UL) A A A A — — — — Z Z Z
UR-Recognized (marked w/UR) — — — — A A A A Z Z Z
UL-Listed for Canada (marked with cUL) A A A A — — — — Z Z Z
UR-Recognized for Canada (marked w/cUR) — — — — A A A A Z Z Z
CE A A A A A A A A Z Z Z
A = approved or test passed Z = accessories are covered by the approval for the switch
10-31
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Front-Installation Box Lugs, 3- and 4-Pole
I
max. E mm 2
A F
H
G
C B
Switch Body 194E-E [A]
A 91 (3-19/32) 91 (3-19/32) 103 (4-3/64) 103 (4-3/64)
125 160 250 315
D
B 112 (4-13/32) 112 (4-13/32) 145 (5-23/32) 145 (5-23/32)
C 36 (1-13/32) 36 (1-13/32) 44 (1-23/32) 44 (1-23/32)
D 38 (1-1/2) 38 (1-1/2) 52.5 (2-1/16) 52.5 (2-1/16)
E 95 (3-23/64) 95 (3-23/64) 185 (7-9/32) 185 (7-9/32)
F 88 (3-7/16) 88 (3-7/16) 88 (3-7/16) 88 (3-7/16)
G 68 (2-5/8) 68 (2-5/8) 68 (2-5/8) 68 (2-5/8)
H 108 (4-1/4) 108 (4-1/4) 120 (4-11/16) 120 (4-11/16)
I M5 (3/16) M5 (3/16) M5 (3/16) M5 (3/16)
Front-Installation Bolt-on Terminals, 3- and 4-Pole F
O
G
P
D A
H
I
N
M
E
L B
Switch Body 194E-F [A] A 91 125 (3-19/32) 91 160 (3-19/32) 103 250 (4-3/64) 103 315 (4-3/64)
10-32
B 112 (4-3/32) 112 (4-3/32) 145 (5-23/32) 145 (5-23/32)
C 38 (1-1/2) 38 (1-1/2) 52.5 (1-22/32) 52.5 (1-22/32)
C
D 65.5 (2-9/16) 65.5 (2-9/16) 60.4 (2-3/8) 60.4 (2-3/8)
E 3 (1/8) 3 (1/8) 4 (5/32) 4 (5/32)
F 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32)
G 36 (1-13/32) 36 (1-13/32) 44 (1-23/32) 52 (2-1/16)
H 88 (3-7/16) 88 (3-7/16) 88 (3-7/16) 88 (3-7/16)
I 68 (2-5/8) 68 (2-5/8) 68 (2-5/8) 68 (2-5/8)
L 10 (13/32) 10 (13/32) 13 (1/2) 13 (1/2)
M 90 (3-17/32) 90 (3-17/32) 100 (3-15/16) 100 (3-15/16)
N 64 (2-17/32) 64 (2-17/32) 70 (2-3/4) 70 (2-3/4)
O M5 (3/16) M5 (3/16) M5 (3/16) M5 (3/16)
P M10 (3/8) M10 (3/8) M12 (15/32) M12 (15/32)
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Base-Mounting Box Lugs, 3- and 4-Pole E
L
max. D mm 2
A H
F
B
C
G
E
Switch Body 194E-A [A] A 91 125 (3-19/32) 91 160 (3-19/32) 98 250 (3-27/32) 98 315 (3-27/32)
I
B 112 (4-13/32) 112 (4-13/32) 145 (5-23/32) 145 (5-23/32)
C 38 (1-1/2) 38 (1-1/2) 52.5 (1-23/32) 52.5 (1-23/32)
D 95 (3-23/64) 95 (3-23/64) 185 (7-9/32) 185 (7-9/32)
E 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32)
F 118 (4-5/8) 118 (4-5/8) 140 (5-1/2) 140 (5-1/2)
G 6.4 (1/4) 6.4 (1/4) 6.4 (1/4) 6.4 (1/4)
H 108 (4-1/4) 108 (4-1/4) 126 (4-15/16) 126 (4-15/16)
I 64 (2-17/32) 64 (2-17/32) 70 (2-3/4) 70 (2-3/4)
L 36 (1-13/32) 36 (1-13/32) 44 (2-1/16) 44 (2-1/16)
Base-Mounting Bolt-on Terminals, 3- and 4-Pole Q
P
O
F
N
G
L M
E A
D
F B
C H
Switch Body 194E-B [A] A B C 91 112 38 125 (3-19/32) (4-13/32) (1-1/2) 91 112 38 160 (3-19/32) (4-13/32) (1-1/2) 98 145 52.5 250 (3-27/64) (5-23/32) (1-23/32) 98 145 52.5 315 (3-27/64) (5-23/32) (1-23/32)
D 36.5 (1-7/16) 36.5 (1-7/16) 38.6 (1-1/2) 38.6 (1-1/2)
E 3 (1/8) 3 (1/8) 4 (5/32) 4 (5/32)
F 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32) 2 (3/32)
G 76 (3) 76 (3) 80 (3-1/8) 80 (3-1/8)
I
H I L M N 36 20 90 64 10 (1-13/32) (3/4) (3-17/32) (2-17/32) (13/32) 36 20 90 64 10 (1-13/32) (3/4) (3-17/32) (2-17/32) (13/32) 44 26 100 70 13 (1-23/32) (1-1/64) (3-15/16) (2-3/4) (1/2) 44 26 100 70 13 (1-23/32) (1-1/64) (3-15/16) (2-3/4) (1/2)
O M10 (3/8) M10 (3/8) M12 (15/32) M12 (15/32)
P 36 (1-13/32) 36 (1-13/32) 44 (1-23/32) 52 (2-1/16)
Q 6.4 (1/4) 6.4 (1/4) 6.4 (1/4) 6.4 (1/4)
10-33
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Box Ground and Neutral Terminal
Switch Body 194E-F [A]
A 37.8 (1-1/2) 37.8 (1-1/2) 52.3 (2-1/16) 52.3 (2-1/16)
125 160 250 315
B 64 (2-17/32) 64 (2-17/32) 71.1 (2-25/32) 71.1 (2-25/32)
C 108 (4-1/4) 108 (4-1/4) 126 (4-15/16) 126 (4-15/16)
D 37.8 (1-1/2) 37.8 (1-1/2) 52.3 (2-1/16) 52.3 (2-1/16)
E 64 (2-17/32) 64 (2-17/32) 80.6 (3-1/8) 80.6 (3-1/8)
F 108 (4-1/4) 108 (4-1/4) 126 (4-15/16) 126 (4-15/16)
Bolt Ground and Neutral Terminal FRONT
BASE L F
D
H
B
A Switch Body 194E-F [A] A 37.8 125 (1-1/2) 37.8 160 (1-1/2) 52.3 250 (2-1/16) 52.3 315 (2-1/16)
N
G C B 64 (2-17/32) 64 (2-17/32) 68 (2-21/32) 68 (2-21/32)
I
E C 10 (13/32) 10 (13/32) 13 (1/2) 13 (1/2)
D M10 (13/32) M10 (13/32) M12 (15/32) M12 (15/32)
E 90 (3-17/32) 90 (3-17/32) 100 (3-15/16) 100 (3-15/16)
F 3 (1/8) 3 (1/8) 4 (5/32) 4 (5/32)
G 37.8 (1-1/2) 37.8 (1-1/2) 52.3 (2-1/16) 52.3 (2-1/16)
H 64 (2-17/32) 64 (2-17/32) 68 (2-21/32) 68 (2-21/32)
M
I 10 (13/32) 10 (13/32) 13 (1/2) 13 (1/2)
Auxiliary Contacts FRONT
14 (9/16)
10-34
BASE
50 (1 31/32)
14 (9/16)
50 (1 31/32)
L M10 (13/32) M10 (13/32) M12 (15/32) M12 (15/32)
M 90 (3-17/32) 90 (3-17/32) 100 (3-15/16) 100 (3-15/16)
N 3 (1/8) 3 (1/8) 4 (5/32) 4 (5/32)
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Terminal Cover
A Switch Body 194E-F A 76.2 125 (3) 76.2 160 (3) 88 250 (3-15/32) 88 315 (3-15/32)
B
B 95 (3-3/4) 95 (3-3/4) 109.5 (4-5/16) 109.5 (4-5/16)
Door Clutches L for Standard Shaft
93…199 mm (3-21/32in…7-27/32in)
Shaft must be cut to length at installation.
fl 27 (1-1/16)
5.4 mm (7/32)
88 (3-15/32)
68 (2-11/16) L
10-35
IEC Load Switches
Bulletin 194E 125 Amps to 315 Amps Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. Actuators (Type 194E-HE-8A-8I-8G-8N) 1-4 mm (1/32-1/8)
1-4 mm (1/32-1/8) 68 (2-11/16) fl 5.3 (7/32) 92 x 92 (1-5/8 x 1-5/8)
88 x 88 (3-15/16 x 3-15/16)
fl 12 (15/32)
45 (1-49/64)
68 (2-11/16)
49 (1-15/16)
Actuators (Type 194E-HE-13A-13I-13G-13N) 1-4 mm (1/32-1/8)
1-4 mm (1/32-1/8) 68 (2-11/16) fl 5.3 (7/32) 130 x 130 (5-1/8 x 5-1/8)
135 x 135 (5-5/16 x 5-5/16)
68 (2-11/16) fl 20 (15/32)
55 (2-5/32)
68 (2-11/16)
Additional Name Plate Frame and legend snaps on to actuator bezel. Fits size 8 and 13 actuators. 84 (3-5/16)
18 (23/32)
G3515
6.7 (9/32)
10-36
Two-Hand Control Devices Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 800Z Heavy Industrial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z General Purpose Specifications Standards
EN574, EN954-1, IEC/EN60947-5-1, IEC/EN60204-1 cULus, C-Tick, and CE marked for all applicable directives
Approvals Power Supply
Description The general purpose Bulletin 800Z Zero-Force Touch Buttons are designed for use by machine control systems requiring the use of two hands. An interlinked sensor surface weaves two capacitive sensors in offset planes for superior product sensitivity. The 800Z touch buttons are ergonomically designed for ease of operation. No force is required to operate the switch; simply touching the surface of the switch will initiate an output. The 800Z can detect the hand though most industrial gloves.
Relay Output Transistor Output Power Consumption Relay Output Transistor Output Outputs Relay Output Transistor Output Output Ratings Relay Output Transistor Output Min. Switched Current/ Voltage (Relay Output) Pollution Degree Operating Temperature Humidity Enclosure Protection
Features • • • •
Zero Force to operate Ergonomic design EMC protection Diagnostic LEDs
1.44W, 19.2VA 100mA at 24V DC = 2.23W (no load) 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. PNP or NPN See Load Life Curves 150mA 8mA/5V DC 2 -25°C to +55°C (-13° to +131°F) 95% RH IP66 (NEMA 4/4X/13), 1200 psi washdown
Material Housing/Guard Valox 357 Gaskets BUNA-N Relay Contacts AgSnO Any position 5 wire (single common) 4 wire (single common)
The contour of the 800Z touch buttons serves two purposes; it easily conforms to the shape of the hand while helping prevent defeatability when two-hand control is needed. Two bi-coloured diagnostic LEDs provide guidance during operation. The power/fault LED blinks at different rates to provide diagnostic information to the user. The 800Z detects the presence of a hand during power-up, noise, and conductive film build-up over time.
10-40V DC, 20-30V AC, or 85-264V AC 10-30V DC
Mounting Cable
Electrical Life EM-Relay inductive load See Load Life Curves Vibration 1.5mm (0.06in) 10-55Hz Shock 100g,11ms half-sine
Load Life Curves for General Purpose Product Line Relay Output—Maximum DC Load Breaking Capacity
Relay Output—Electrical Endurance
300
10 250V AC
200 6
10 Operations
DC Voltage
100 Resistive Load
50 40 30
cosϕ = 1 cosϕ = 0.7 cosϕ = 0.4
5
10
20 10 0.1 0.2 0.5
1
2
DC Current (A)
11-2
5
10
20
104
0
1
2
3
4
5
Switching Current (A)
6
7
8
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z General Purpose Product Selection Mounting Hole Size
Catalogue Number
Input Voltage Range and Output Type
Guard
6ft Cabled—5-Wire
800Z-GF3065 No Guard 800Z-GF3065B Black Guard 30.5 mm Mounting Hole 800Z-GL3065 No Guard 10...40V DC and 20...30V AC Input Relay Output 800Z-GL3065B Black Guard 800Z-GF2065 No Guard 85...264V AC Input Relay Output 800Z-GF2065B Black Guard 22.5 mm Mounting Hole 800Z-GL2065 No Guard 10...40V DC and 20...30V AC Input Relay Output 800Z-GL2065B Black Guard Recommended standard cordset, 2m (6.5ft). See pages 15-12 and 15-10 for additional lengths..
5-Pin Mini QD
5-Pin Micro QD
800Z-GF3Q5 800Z-GF3Q5B 800Z-GL3Q5 800Z-GL3Q5B
85...264V AC Input Relay Output
800Z-GF2Q5 800Z-GF2Q5B 800Z-GL2Q5 800Z-GL2Q5B 889D-F5AC-2
889N-F5AE-6F
Use the configurator below to build an 800Z touch button to suit your application.
800Z – G
L
3
065
B
a
b
c
d
e
a
c
d
Input Voltage and Output Type
Electrical Connection
Guard Option
Code
L
Description Relay Output Input: 10...40V DC and 20...30V AC Output: Relay
Code Q4 064
Description Sinking/Sourcing Output ➊ 4-Pin QD 6 ft (1.8 m) Cabled
F
Input: 85...264V AC Output: Relay
124
12 ft (3.6 m) Cabled
244
N P
Transistor Output 10...30V DC; NPN (Sinking) Output 10...30V DC; PNP (Sourcing) Output
24 ft (7.2 m) Cabled Relay Output ➋
Code
Description
Blank B Y
No Guard Black Guard Yellow Guard
e Kit Option ➌ Code
Description
Q5
5-Pin QD
Blank
No Kit
b
065
1.8m (6ft) Cabled
K1
24V AC/DC Relay Kit
Mounting Hole Size
125 245
3.6m (12ft) Cabled 7.2m (24ft) Cabled
K2 K3
120V AC Relay Kit 240V AC Relay Kit
Code
Description
2 3
22.5mm (0.88in) 30.5mm (1.20in)
➊ These devices are transistor outputs. ➋ These devices have separate N.O. and N.C. output relays with a shared common. ➌ Safety relays should be used in two-hand control applications. Kits not available for solid-state (transistor output) devices. Kits include two identical touch buttons and one MSR125HP safety relay with removeable terminals.
11-3
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z General Purpose Accessories Colour
Catalogue Number
Yellow
800Z-G3AG1
Black
800Z-G3AG2
Mounting Ring Nut for 22.5mm holes. Used on 22.5mm devices.
Plastic
800Z-G2AH1
Mounting Ring Nut for 30.5mm holes. Used on 30.5mm devices.
Plastic
800Z-G3AH1
57mm (2.25in) Extension
60-2681
29mm (1.15in) Extension
60-2439
Shiny Metal
800E-AHA1
Black Metal
800E-AHA2
Description
These guards prevent accidental activation of the touch button surface and protect it from damage. Can be used for both the 22.5mm and 30.5mm mounting products.
Guards
Plastic Mounting Kit
Plastic Mounting Kit
30.5mm Swivel/Tilt Mounting Assembly This bracket allows you to orient the touch button in any position. It can be mounted on any vertical or horizontal surface. Compatible with 30.5mm mounting only.
Swivel Assembly
30.5mm to 22.5mm Hole Size Adaptor This adaptor allows a 22.5mm push button operator to be installed in a panel with existing 30.5mm mounting holes.
Adaptor
11-4
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z General Purpose Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 40.9 (1.61) 48.3 (1.90)
69.9 (2.75)
22mm Version Micro Quick Disconnect
35.1 (1.38)
40.9 (1.61) 30mm Version Mini Quick Disconnect
56.9 (2.24) 129.3 (5.09)
110.3 (4.34)
40.9 (1.61) 22mm Version
39.4 (1.55)
22.4 (0.88)
Cable
129.3 (5.09)
General Purpose with Guards 40.9 (1.61) 30mm Version
22.4 (0.88)
Cable
General Purpose
Typical Wiring Diagram Electrical Connections: 10...40V DC and 20...30V AC Input Voltage (Relay Output); 85...264V AC Input Voltage (Relay Output) Note: Separate N.O. and N.C. output relays with shared common.
Black (N.O.) White (N.C.) Gray (Common)
Brown (+) L1 Blue (-) L2
5 Conductor Cabled (Relay Output) for 800Z-GL_ _ _ Electrical Connections: 10...30V DC Input Voltage (Transistor Output); 150mA max. per circuit output
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
Brown (+) Blue (-) Black (N.O.) Load White (N.C.) Load
Brown (+) Blue (-) Load Black (N.O.) White (N.C.) Load
4 Conductor Cabled Sinking (NPN)
4 Conductor Cabled Sourcing (NPN)
Applications Details LED Blink Rate ** ** ** *** *** ***
Diagnostic Power Up Noise Detection
**** **** ****
Margin Detection
Description Device touched during power-up. Device will resume 10 seconds after removal of hand. Device detected an unacceptable level of noise (>20V/m). Device will resume once noise subsides. A conductive film is building up on the sensing surface. Device will resume once cleared.
11-5
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z Heavy Industrial Specifications Standards Approvals
Description The heavy industrial Bulletin 800Z Zero-Force Touch Buttons are designed for use by machine control systems requiring the use of two hands. An interlinked sensor surface weaves two capacitive sensors in offset planes for superior product sensitivity. The 800Z touch buttons are ergonomically designed to require for ease of operation. No force is required to operate the switch; simply touching the surface of the switch will initiate an output. The 800Z can detect the hand though most industrial gloves.
Power Supply Power Consumption Output Ratings Min. Switched Current/ Voltage Pollution Degree Operating Temperature Humidity Enclosure Protection Material Housing/Guard Gaskets Mounting Conductor Size
EN574, EN954-1, IEC/EN60947-5-1, IEC/EN60204-1 cULus, C-Tick, and CE marked for all applicable directives 10-40V DC, 20-30V AC, or 85-264V AC 1.44W, 19.2VA See Load Life Curves 8mA/5V DC 2 -25°C to +55°C (-13° to +131°F) 95% RH IP66 (NEMA 4/13) Valox 357 3.2mm (1/16in) Cork-BUNA-N Any position
0.5-4mm2 (#12-22AWG) Terminal Protection IP2X Electrical Life EM-Relay inductive load See Load Life Curves Vibration 1.5mm (0.06in) 10-55Hz Shock 100g,11ms half-sine
The contour of the 800Z touch buttons serves two purposes; it easily conforms to the shape of the hand while helping prevent defeatability when two-hand control is needed. Two bi-coloured diagnostic LEDs provide guidance during operation. The power/fault LED blinks at different rates to provide diagnostic information to the user. The 800Z detects the presence of a hand during power-up, noise, and conductive film build-up over time.
Features • • • • •
Zero Force to operate Ergonomic design EMC protection Diagnostic LEDs Replaceable Relays
Load Life Curves for Heavy Industrial Relay Output—Maximum Load Breaking Capacity
Relay Output—Electrical Endurance
AC Resistive Load
10 8 5 3 DC Inductive Load L/R = 7ms
1 0.5 0.3
AC Inductive Load (pf=0.4) DC Resistive Load
0.1 0
3
5
10
30 50 100
300 500 1,000
Rated Operating Voltage (V)
11-6
Service Life (x 103 Operations)
Rated Operating Current (A)
50
5000 3000 1000 500 300
250V AC Resistive Load 30V DC Resistive Load
100 50 25V AC Inductive 30 Load (pf=0.4) 30V DC Inductive Load L/R=7ms 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
Rated Operating Current (A)
9 10 11
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z Heavy Industrial Product Selection Catalogue Number
Input Voltage Range and Output Type
Mounting Style
10...40V DC and 20...30V AC Input Relay Output
Flush Mount
85...264V AC Input Relay Output
Guard
Terminal Block
No Guard Yellow Guard No Guard Yellow Guard
800Z-HL1 800Z-HL1Y 800Z-HF1 800Z-HF1Y
Use the configurator below to build an 800Z touch button to suit your application.
800Z – H
Code
L
1
Y
a
b
c
d
a
b
d
Voltage
Mounting Type/Connection ➊
Kit Option ➋
Description
Code
Description
Code
Description
Input: 10...40V DC and 20...30V AC
1
Flush Mounting/Terminal Block
Blank
No Kit
K1
24V AC/DC Relay Kit
L Output: Relay Input: 85...264V AC
c
K2
120V AC Relay Kit
Output: Relay
Guard Option
K3
240V AC Relay Kit
F Code
Description
Blank
No Guard
Y
Yellow Guard
➊ Heavy industrial devices have an eight-position terminal block connection. See wiring diagrams on page 11-10 for details. ➋ Safety relays should be used in two-hand control applications. Kits include two identical touch buttons and one MSR125HP safety relay with removeable terminals.
11-7
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z Heavy Industrial Accessories Description
Input Voltage
Replacement Relay Must be ordered in multiples of 2.
Catalogue Number
Full Voltage 10...264V AC
800Z-N12
Yellow
800Z-HAG1
Single Hub
800P-B1
Double Hub
800P-B2
Replaceable Output Relay
This guard prevents accidental activation of the touch surface and protects it from damage. Longer mounting screws are included. Guards are required in most two hand safety applications (see applicable standards).
Guard
The heavy industrial line products mount directly on these bases. The conduit hub(s) come with a 3/4 inch opening.
Base These replacement screws are the proper length to mount the heavy industrial touch button with metal guard to an 800P-B1 or 800P-B2 base, or a custom mounting surface. Note: Must be ordered in multiples of 4.
800Z-HAH1
Replacement screws for base mounting. Note: Must be ordered in multiples of 4.
800Z-HAH2
This adaptor is used if mounting touch button onto a 114.3 x 60.3mm (4-1/2in x 2-3/8in) enclosure pattern.
800P-N150
Mounting Screws
Adaptor
11-8
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z Heavy Industrial Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 50 (1.97)
73.2 (2.88)
30.5 (1.20) Replaceable Relay
115.8 (4.56)
115.6 (4.55)
95.7 (3.77)
Terminal Block
Heavy Industrial 54 (2 1/8)
82.6 (3 1/4)
73 (2 7/8)
108.5 (4.27)
47.6 (1 7/8) 4 Holes for #6-32 Screw
Cutout and Mounting Screw Locations for a Flush Mounted Cover
143.4 (5.64)
Heavy Industrial with Guard
Note: Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
11-9
Two-Hand Control Devices
Zero-Force Touch Buttons 800Z Heavy Industrial Typical Wiring Diagram N.C.2
K2
COM2 N.O.2 N.C.1
K1
COM1 N.O.1 (–) L2 (+) L1
Terminal Block
Applications Details LED Blink Rate ** ** ** *** *** ***
Diagnostic Power Up Noise Detection
**** **** ****
Margin Detection
11-10
Description Device touched during power-up. Device will resume 10 seconds after removal of hand. Device detected an unacceptable level of noise (>20V/m). Device will resume once noise subsides. A conductive film is building up on the sensing surface. Device will resume once cleared.
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Non Combination Systems (for North America) . . . 12-4 Non Combination Systems (Outside North America) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Combination Systems with Fusible Disconnect (for North America) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Combination Systems with Fusible Disconnect (Outside North America) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker (for North America) . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker (Outside North America). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Typical Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 Wire Length Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 Ordering Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Overview Status Communication Capability to a Remote PLC • Optional Remote I/O via Flex modules. Communication can be via the DeviceNet communication platform or the Remote I/O communication platform. Available from 23-1200 Amperes.
Specifications Approvals
Standards
The ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System is used in place of a disconnect switch for Lockout and Tagout (LOTO). It uses power contactors and Remote Lockout Stations to accomplish LOTO. Isolating the electrical energy usually involves calling an electrician to turn “Off ” the main disconnecting means. The electrician would then perform LOTO of the disconnecting means operating handle. This same procedure is required to perform cleaning, maintenance, setup, lubrication or adjustment. Machines or processes with multiple access points may require operator/maintenance intervention several times a shift (perhaps as often as 60 times per shift). To perform these activities, the operator/maintenance person may be required to place part of his or her body into an area not accessed during normal operation. This may cause serious or fatal injury if LOTO procedures are not followed.
Estimated Component Life Remote Lockout Station Power Contactors (Isolation & Grounding) Environmental Storage Temperature Operating Temperature Relative Humidity, Non condensing Power Panel Construction
The ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System allows the machine operator to safely and quickly accomplish LOTO with dramatically reduced downtime. Provides Energy Isolation • Power isolation accomplished by means of contactors rather than disconnect switches. • Uses redundant, independent and self-monitoring circuits to detect a system fault. • Prevents accumulation of faults in order to maintain the integrity of the safety system. • Tamper-resistant design. Convenient Remote Lockout Station • Allows remote isolation of the electrical power to the machine or process—machine operator simply turns “Off ” a Remote Lockout Station. • A light on the Remote Lockout Station indicates that the threephase power source to the machine or process has been isolated. No Light Means No Entry. • If a fault occurs in the Safety Isolation System, the “System Isolated” light on the Remote Lockout Stations will not illuminate. • Easy Lockout/Tagout. Certified by TUV to meet requirements of Category 4 • Certified by TUV to meet Category 4, the most stringent safety category defined within International Standard EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1. • Subjected by TUV to rigorous third party testing and verification of the Failure Mode & Effect Analysis (FMEA).
Remote Lockout Station Construction
Expansion Module Construction
Safety Isolation Sys. Inputs Standard Inputs from Optional Inputs from Rockwell Automation Safety Products
System Operational Limits
CULUS
Listed Industrial Control Panel; TUV Rheinland certified; CE marked for all applicable directives IEC/EN 60204-1; IEC/EN 60439-1; Category 4 to International Standard EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1; 98/37/EC Machinery Directive; 89/336/EC EMC Directive; 73/23/EC Low Voltage Directive; Fulfils the function of an energy isolating device in accordance with the conditions set forth in the FedOSHA letter of interpretation pertaining to Section 1910.147(b); Cal/OSHA 3314.
250,000 operations 23A - 85A: 2,000,000 operations 110A-1200A: 1,000,000 operations -10°C...+60°C (14°F...140°F) 0°C...+40°C (32°F...104°F) (Ambient) 90% Relative Humidity Tamper-resistant Control Module 23A-85A systems support up to 4 Remote Lockout Stations without an Expansion Module 110A-1200A systems support up to 6 Remote Lockout Stations without an Expansion Module Control Module with viewing window for visual check of status indicator lights Top and bottom 25.4mm (1.0in) conduit entry (removable plug in bottom conduit hole) Sealing provision for tamper-resistance Operating handle accepts up to 3 padlocks 4 port—supports up to 4 lockout stations • allows the systems to accommodate up to 24 Remote Lockout Stations 10 port—supports up to 10 lockout stations • allows the systems to accommodate up to 60 Remote Lockout Stations Window for viewing status indicator lights; Sealed for tamper-resistance Remote Lockout Stations Safety Mats, ➊ Light Curtains, ➊ E-Stop Stations, ➊ Proximity Switches, ➊ Photo Switches ➊ +10%, -15% of the line voltage
➊ Use of any of these input devices will not meet Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) requirements.
12-2
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Overview Principle of Operation After using the normal stopping method of the machine or process, the machine operator turns a Remote Lockout Station handle from the “On” to “Off ” position. The station signals the isolation contactors (1IC and 2IC) to drop out and isolate the supply voltage from the loads (see Control Circuit).
Power Circuit 1IC
2IC
Incoming 3 Phase Power
To Motor Controllers H1 X1
H2
Control Power
Disconnecting Means/Branch Circuit Protection ➊
Trans. X2
To Loads
GC Voltage Decay Relays (VDR)
Grd
When system residual voltage decays to pre-determined levels, the grounding contactor (GC) is energized, connecting the load to ground (see Power Circuit). The grounding contactor (GC) is electrically and mechanically interlocked with the isolation contactors (1IC and 2IC).
Control Circuit Remote Lockout Station Off On
GC 1IC GC 2IC VDR
1IC
2IC GC
GC
1IC
2IC
Mechanically Interlocked
The “System Isolated” Light will now illuminate on the Remote Lockout Station to indicate the system is isolated. The machine operator then Locks-Out and Tags-Out the station in the “Off ” position.
1IC, 2IC, & GC are mechanically and electrically interlocked
System Isolated (*) (*) = “On” when the Remote Lockout Station switch is “Off”
➊ Available factory installed within the ElectroGuard as an option.
Optional Features • Four (4) or ten (10) port Expansion Modules to permit additional Remote Lockout Stations to be used (see page 12-16 for details). • Pneumatic Isolation Module to isolate pneumatic energy (see page 12-15 for details). • Status communication to a remote PLC (see page 12-17 for details). • Fusible disconnect switch (Bulletin 2032) or thermal-magnetic circuit breaker (Bulletin 2033) to provide branch circuit protection.
Optional Pneumatic Isolation Module
12-3
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Non Combination Systems
+
One or More Remote Lockout Stations (conduit hub not included)
Power Panel
Product Selection: For North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) Catalogue Number ➊
3-Phase Max. Hp Rating (60Hz)
575V
Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure
Type 12 Dust tight Enclosure
Type 12 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure (with bussing)
Type 4 Watertight Painted Steel Enclosure
Type 4X Watertight Stainless Steel Enclosure
15
2031-A0023A⊗
2031-A0023J⊗
2031-!0023J⊗
2031-A0023F⊗
2031-A0023C⊗
30
2031-A0043A⊗
2031-A0043J⊗
2031-!0043J⊗
2031-A0043F⊗
2031-A0043C⊗
60
2031-A0085A⊗
2031-A0085J⊗
2031-!0085J⊗
2031-A0085F⊗
2031-A0085C⊗
75
100
2031-A0110A⊗
2031-A0110J⊗
2031-!0110J⊗
2031-A0110F⊗
2031-A0110C⊗
60
150
150
2031-A0180A⊗
2031-A0180J⊗
2031-!0180J⊗
2031-A0180F⊗
2031-A0180C⊗
60
75
-
200
2031-A0210A⊗
2031-A0210J⊗
2031-!0210J⊗
2031-A0210F⊗
2031-A0210C⊗
300
100
125
250
300
2031-A0300A⊗
2031-A0300J⊗
2031-!0300J⊗
2031-A0300F⊗
2031-A0300C⊗
420
150
175
350
400
2031-A0420A⊗
2031-A0420J⊗
2031-!0420J⊗
2031-A0420F⊗
2031-A0420C⊗
630
200
250
500
600
2031*-A0630A⊗
2031*-A0630J⊗
2031-!0630J⊗
2031*-A0630F⊗
2031*-A0630C⊗
860
250
300
600
700
2031*-A0860A⊗
2031*-A0860J⊗
2031-!0860J⊗
2031*-A0860F⊗
2031*-A0860C⊗
1200
450
450
900
900
2031*-A1200A⊗
2031*-A1200J⊗
2031-!1200J⊗
2031*-A1200F⊗
2031*-A1200C⊗
Ampere Rating (AC-3)
200V
230V
460V
23
5
7.5
15
43
10
15
30
85
25
30
60
110
40
40
180
50
210
To order the Time Delay feature, add the following Catalogue String to the end of the Catalogue Number shown in the table: Factory set 30 second time delay feature:
-1TD
Example: Catalogue Number 2031-A0180A⊗ becomes Catalogue Number 2031-A0180A⊗-1TD to include the time delay feature.
* Input Power Feed Catalogue Number Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Power Feed Code from the table below. Example: Catalogue Number 2031*-A0630J⊗ becomes Catalogue Number 2031T-A0630J⊗ for a “Top Feed” input power requirement. Input Power Feed
Catalogue Number Code
Top Feed
T
Bottom Feed
B
! Bussing Designation The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a Bussing Designation Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2031-!0085J⊗ becomes Catalogue Number 2031-M0085J⊗ for “600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables” bussing designation. Type of Bussing ➋
Catalogue Number Code
600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
M
1200A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
S
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 600A Load Side Outgoing Bus
F
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 1200A Load Side Outgoing Bus
B
⊗ Input Line Voltage Code
The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Line Voltage Code from the table below. Example: Catalogue Number 2031-A0085J⊗ becomes Catalogue Number 2031-A0085JB for a 480V 60Hz Input Line Voltage application. Input Line Voltage Voltage Code for Catalogue Number
208V 60Hz
240V 60Hz
480V 60Hz
600V 60Hz
H
A
B
C
➊ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings. ➋ Bus Type: Copper with tin plating. Consult factory for other types of bussing.
12-4
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Non Combination Systems Product Selection: Remote Lockout Station ➊ “System Isolated” Light Colour White
Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure 2030-RLSAW
Catalogue Number Type 12 Dust tight Type 4 Watertight Painted Enclosure Steel Enclosure 2030-RLSJW 2030-RLSFW
Type 4X Watertight Stainless Steel Enclosure 2030-RLSCW
Product Selection: For Outside of North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. kW Rating (50Hz) Ampere Rating (AC-3) 23 43 85 110 180 210 300 420 630 860 1200
230V 7.5 13 25 32 55 63 90 132 200 250 391
400V 11 22 45 55 90 110 160 220 355 500 710
500V 11 22 45 63 110 150 200 300 450 560 888
600V 11 22 45 100 160 200 300 425 500 600 1043
IP 30 Enclosure
Catalogue Number ➋ IP 54 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure IP 54 Enclosure (w/bussing)
IP 65 Enclosure
2031-C0023P⊗
2031-C0023H⊗
2031-!0023H⊗
2031-C0023W⊗
2031-C0043P⊗
2031-C0043H⊗
2031-!0043H⊗
2031-C0043W⊗
2031-C0085P⊗
2031-C0085H⊗
2031-!0085H⊗
2031-C0085W⊗
2031-C0110P⊗
2031-C0110H⊗
2031-!0110H⊗
2031-C0110W⊗
2031-C0180P⊗
2031-C0180H⊗
2031-!0180H⊗
2031-C0180W⊗
2031-C0210P⊗
2031-C0210H⊗
2031-!0210H⊗
2031-C0210W⊗
2031-C0300P⊗
2031-C0300H⊗
2031-!0300H⊗
2031-C0300W⊗
2031-C0420P⊗
2031-C0420H⊗
2031-!0420H⊗
2031-C0420W⊗
2031*-C0630P⊗
2031*-C0630H⊗
2031-!0630H⊗
2031*-C0630W⊗
2031*-C0860P⊗
2031*-C0860H⊗
2031-!0860H⊗
2031*-C0860W⊗
2031*-C1200P⊗
2031*-C1200H⊗
2031-!1200H⊗
2031*-C1200W⊗
To order the Time Delay feature, add the following Cat. String to the end of the Cat. No. shown in the table: Factory set 30 second time delay feature:
-1TD
Example: Catalogue Number 2031-C0180H⊗becomes Catalogue Number 2031-C0180H⊗-1TD to include the time delay feature.
* Input Power Feed Catalogue Number Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Power Feed Code from the table below. Example: Catalogue Number 2031*-C0630H⊗ becomes Catalogue Number 2031T-C0630H⊗ for a “Top Feed” input power requirement. Input Power Feed Catalogue Number Code Top Feed T Bottom Feed B
! Bussing Designation The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a Bussing Designation Code from the table.
Example: Catalogue Number 2031-!0085H⊗ becomes Catalogue Number 2031-E0085H⊗ for “600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables” bussing designation. Type of Bussing ➌
Catalogue Number Code
600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
E
1200A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
D
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 600A Load Side Outgoing Bus
H
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 1200A Load Side Outgoing Bus
R
⊗ Input Line Voltage Code
The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Line Voltage Code from the table below. Example: Catalogue Number 2031-C0085P⊗ becomes Catalogue Number 2031-C0085PN for a 380V 50Hz Input Line Voltage application. Input Line Voltage 220V 50HZ 380-400V 50Hz 400-415V 50Hz 440V 50Hz 500V 50Hz Voltage Code for Catalogue Number A N G B M
550V 50Hz C
Product Selection: Remote Lockout Station ➊ “System Isolated” Light Colour Green
IP 30 Enclosure 2030-RLSPG
Catalogue Number IP 54 Enclosure 2030-RLSHG
IP 65 Enclosure 2030-RLSWG
➊ Safety Isolation Systems rated up through 85A can support a maximum of four (4) Remote Lockout Stations (RLS). Systems rated from 110A - 1200A can support a maximum of six (6) RLS. If additional RLS are required, order the optional Expansion Module(s) (see page 12-16). ➋ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings. ➌ Bus Type: Copper with tin plating. Consult factory for other types of bussing.
12-5
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Fusible Disconnect Switch Product Selection: For North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. Hp Rating (60Hz) Amp. Rating 200 (AC-3) V 23
43
85
110
180
5
10
25
40
50
230 V
460 V
7.5
15
15
30
40
60
30
60
75
125
15
30
60
100
150
210
60
75
150
200
300
75
125
250
300
420
150
175
350
Catalogue Number ➋
Fuse Clip 575 Rating/ V Type ➊
400
Type 12 Dust tight Enclosure
Type 12 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure (with bussing)
Type 4 Watertight Painted Steel Enclosure
Type 4X Watertight Stainless Steel Enclosure
2032-A0023A⊗-24J
2032-A0023J⊗-24J
2032-!0023J⊗-24J
2032-A0023F⊗-24J
2032-A0023C⊗-24J
60A Class J
2032-A0023A⊗-25J
2032-A0023J⊗-25J
2032-!0023J⊗-25J
2032-A0023F⊗-25J
2032-A0023C⊗-25J
60A Class J
2032-A0043A⊗-25J
2032-A0043J⊗-25J
2032-!0043J⊗-25J
2032-A0043F⊗-25J
2032-A0043C⊗-25J
100A Class J
2032-A0043A⊗-26J
2032-A0043J⊗-26J
2032-!0043J⊗-26J
2032-A0043F⊗-26J
2032-A0043C⊗-26J
100A Class J
2032-A0085A⊗-26J
2032-A0085J⊗-26J
2032-!0085J⊗-26J
2032-A0085F⊗-26J
2032-A0085C⊗-26J
200A Class J
2032-A0085A⊗-27J
2032-A0085J⊗-27J
2032-!0085J⊗-27J
2032-A0085F⊗-27J
2032-A0085C⊗-27J
200A Class J
2032-A0110A⊗-27J
2032-A0110J⊗-27J
2032-!0110J⊗-27J
2032-A0110F⊗-27J
2032-A0110C⊗-27J
400A Class J
2032-A0110A⊗-28J
2032-A0110J⊗-28J
2032-!0110J⊗-28J
2032-A0110F⊗-28J
2032-A0110C⊗-28J
200A Class J
2032-A0180A⊗-27J
2032-A0180J⊗-27J
2032-!0180J⊗-27J
2032-A0180F⊗-27J
2032-A0180C⊗-27J
400A Class J
2032-A0180A⊗-28J
2032-A0180J⊗-28J
2032-!0180J⊗-28J
2032-A0180F⊗-28J
2032-A0180C⊗-28J
400A Class J
2032-A0210A⊗-28J
2032-A0210J⊗-28J
2032-!0210J⊗-28J
2032-A0210F⊗-28J
2032-A0210C⊗-28J
400A Class J
2032-A0300A⊗-28J
2032-A0300J⊗-28J
2032-!0300J⊗-28J
2032-A0300F⊗-28J
2032-A0300C⊗-28J
600A Class J
2032-A0300A⊗-29J
2032-A0300J⊗-29J
2032-!0300J⊗-29J
2032-A0300F⊗-29J
2032-A0300C⊗-29J
600A Class J
2032-A0420A⊗-29J
2032-A0420J⊗-29J
2032-!0420J⊗-29J
2032-A0420F⊗-29J
2032-A0420C⊗-29J
800A 2032-A0420A⊗-30L 2032-A0420J⊗-30L Class L
2032-!0420J⊗-30L
2032-A0420F⊗-30L
2032-A0420C⊗-30L
Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure
30A Class J
800A 2032*-A0630A⊗-30L 2032*-A0630J⊗-30L 2032-!0630J⊗-30L 2032*-A0630F⊗-30L 2032*-A0630C⊗-30L Class L
630
200
250
500
600
860
250
300
600
700
2000A 2032*-A0860A⊗-34L 2032*-A0860J⊗-34L 2032-!0860J⊗-34L 2032*-A0860F⊗-34L 2032*-A0860C⊗-34L Class L
1200
450
450
900
900
2000A 2032*-A1200A⊗-34L 2032*-A1200J⊗-34L 2032-!1200J⊗-34L 2032*-A1200F⊗-34L 2032*-A1200C⊗-34L Class L
2000A 2032*-A0630A⊗-34L 2032*-A0630J⊗-34L 2032-!0630J⊗-34L 2032*-A0630F⊗-34L 2032*-A0630C⊗-34L Class L
To order the Time Delay feature, add the following Catalogue String to the end of the Cat. No. shown in the table: Factory set 30 second time delay feature:
-1TD
Example: Catalogue Number 2032-A0180A⊗-27J becomes Catalogue Number 2032-A0180A⊗-27J-1TD to include the time delay feature.
* Input Power Feed Catalogue Number Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Power Feed Code from the table below. Example: Catalogue Number 2032*-A0630J⊗-30L becomes Catalogue Number 2032T-A0630J⊗-30L for a “Top Feed” input power requirement. Input Power Feed
Catalogue Number Code
Top Feed
T
Bottom Feed
B
➊ Power fuses are not included with the disconnect switch. Select power fuses in accordance with applicable local codes. ➋ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings.
12-6
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Fusible Disconnect Switch ! Bussing Designation The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a Bussing Designation Code from the table below.
Example: Cat. No. 2032-!0085J⊗-26J becomes Cat. No. 2032-M0085J⊗-26J for “600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables” bussing designation. Type of Bussing ➊ Catalogue Number Code 600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables M 1200A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables S Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 600A Load Side Outgoing Bus F Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 1200A Load Side Outgoing Bus B
⊗ Input Line Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Line Voltage Code from the table below. Example: Catalogue Number 2032-A0085J⊗-26J becomes Catalogue Number 2032-A0085JB-26J for a 480V 60Hz Input Line Voltage application. Input Line Voltage 208V 60Hz 240V 60Hz 480V 60Hz 600V 60Hz Voltage Code for Catalogue Number H A B C
Product Selection: Remote Lockout Station ➋ Catalogue Number “System Isolated” Light Colour White
Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure
Type 12 Dust tight Enclosure
2030-RLSAW
2030-RLSJW
Type 4 Watertight Painted Type 4X Watertight Stainless Steel Enclosure Steel Enclosure 2030-RLSFW
2030-RLSCW
➊ Bus Type: Copper with tin plating. Consult factory for other types of bussing. ➋ Safety Isolation Systems rated up through 85A can support a maximum of four (4) Remote Lockout Stations (RLS). Systems rated from 110A - 1200A can support a maximum of six (6) RLS. If additional RLS are required, order the optional Expansion Module(s) (see page 12-16).
12-7
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Fusible Disconnect Switch Product Selection for Outside of North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. kW Rating (50Hz) Amp. Rating (AC-3)
23
43
85
110
180
210
300
420
630
230V 400V 500V 600V
5.5
11
22
32
45
63
90
132
200
11
22
45
55
90
110
160
220
355
11
22
45
63
110
150
200
300
450
11
22
45
100
110
200
257
425
500
Fuse Clip Rating/ Type ➊ 20A BS 88 32A BS 88 63A BS 88 63A DIN 63A BS 88 63A DIN 100A BS 88 100A DIN 100A BS 88 100A DIN 200A BS 88 160A DIN 100A BS88 100A DIN 200A BS 88 160A DIN 250A DIN 200A BS 88 250A DIN 400A BS 88 400A DIN 200A BS 88 250A DIN 400A BS 88 400A DIN 400A BS 88 400A DIN 630A BS 88 630A DIN 400A BS88 400A DIN 630A BS 88 630A DIN 630A BS 88
IP 30 Enclosure
Catalogue Number ➋ IP 54 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure IP 54 Enclosure (with bussing)
IP 65 Enclosure
2032-C0023P⊗-23B
2032-C0023H⊗-23B
2032-!0023H⊗-23B
2032-C0023W⊗-23B
2032-C0023P⊗-24B
2032-C0023H⊗-24B
2032-!0023H⊗-24B
2032-C0023W⊗-24B
2032-C0023P⊗-25B
2032-C0023H⊗-25B
2032-!0023H⊗-25B
2032-C0023W⊗-25B
2032-C0023P⊗-25D
2032-C0023H⊗-25D
2032-!0023H⊗-25D
2032-C0023W⊗-25D
2032-C0043P⊗-25B
2032-C0043H⊗-25B
2032-!0043H⊗-25B
2032-C0043W⊗-25B
2032-C0043P⊗-25D
2032-C0043H⊗-25D
2032-!0043H⊗-25D
2032-C0043W⊗-25D
2032-C0043P⊗-26B
2032-C0043H⊗-26B
2032-!0043H⊗-26B
2032-C0043W⊗-26B
2032-C0043P⊗-26D
2032-C0043H⊗-26D
2032-!0043H⊗-26D
2032-C0043W⊗-26D
2032-C0085P⊗-26B
2032-C0085H⊗-26B
2032-!0085H⊗-26B
2032-C0085W⊗-26B
2032-C0085P⊗-26D
2032-C0085H⊗-26D
2032-!0085H⊗-26D
2032-C0085W⊗-26D
2032-C0085P⊗-27B
2032-C0085H⊗-27B
2032-!0085H⊗-27B
2032-C0085W⊗-27B
2032-C0085P⊗-27D
2032-C0085H⊗-27D
2032-!0085H⊗-27D
2032-C0085W⊗-27D
2032-C0110P⊗-26B
2032-C0110H⊗-26B
2032-!0110H⊗-26B
2032-C0110W⊗-26B
2032-C0110P⊗-26D
2032-C0110H⊗-26D
2032-!0110H⊗-26D
2032-C0110W⊗-26D
2032-C0110P⊗-27B
2032-C0110H⊗-27B
2032-!0110H⊗-27B
2032-C0110W⊗-27B
2032-C0110P⊗-27D
2032-C0110H⊗-27D
2032-!0110H⊗-27D
2032-C0110W⊗-27D
2032-C0110P⊗-28D
2032-C0110H⊗-28D
2032-!0110H⊗-28D
2032-C0110W⊗-28D
2032-C0180P⊗-27B
2032-C0180H⊗-27B
2032-!0180H⊗-27B
2032-C0180W⊗-27B
2032-C0180P⊗-28D
2032-C0180H⊗-28D
2032-!0180H⊗-28D
2032-C0180W⊗-28D
2032-C0180P⊗-29B
2032-C0180H⊗-29B
2032-!0180H⊗-29B
2032-C0180W⊗-29B
2032-C0180P⊗-29D
2032-C0180H⊗-29D
2032-!0180H⊗-29D
2032-C0180W⊗-29D
2032-C0210P⊗-27B
2032-C0210H⊗-27B
2032-!0210H⊗-27B
2032-C0210W⊗-27B
2032-C0210P⊗-28D
2032-C0210H⊗-28D
2032-!0210H⊗-28D
2032-C0210W⊗-28D
2032-C0210P⊗-29B
2032-C0210H⊗-29B
2032-!0210H⊗-29B
2032-C0210W⊗-29B
2032-C0210P⊗-29D
2032-C0210H⊗-29D
2032-!0210H⊗-29D
2032-C0210W⊗-29D
2032-C0300P⊗-29B
2032-C0300H⊗-29B
2032-!0300H⊗-29B
2032-C0300W⊗-29B
2032-C0300P⊗-29D
2032-C0300H⊗-29D
2032-!0300H⊗-29D
2032-C0300W⊗-29D
2032-C0300P⊗-30B 2032-C0300P⊗-30D
2032-C0300H⊗-30B 2032-C0300H⊗-30D
2032-!0300H⊗-30B 2032-!0300H⊗-30D
2032-C0300W⊗-30B 2032-C0300W⊗-30D
2032-C0420P⊗-29B
2032-C0420H⊗-29B
2032-!0420H⊗-29B
2032-C0420W⊗-29B
2032-C0420P⊗-29D
2032-C0420H⊗-29D
2032-!0420H⊗-29D
2032-C0420W⊗-29D
2032-C0420P⊗-30B
2032-C0420H⊗-30B
2032-!0420H⊗-30B
2032-C0420W⊗-30B
2032-C0420P⊗-30D
2032-C0420H⊗-30D
2032-!0420H⊗-30D
2032-C0420W⊗-30D
2032*-C0630P⊗-30B 2032*-C0630H⊗-30B
2032-!0630H⊗-30B
2032*-C0630W⊗-30B
➊ Power fuses are not included with the disconnect switch. Select power fuses in accordance with applicable local codes. ➋ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. See next page for instructions on how to order the optional time delay feature. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings.
12-8
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Fusible Disconnect Switch Product Selection for Outside North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. kW Rating (50Hz)
Catalogue Number ➋
Ampere Fuse Clip Rating Rating/ (AC-3) 230V 400V 500V 600V Type ➊
IP 30 Enclosure 630A DIN 2032*-C0630P⊗-30D
630
860
1200
200
250
391
355
500
710
450
560
888
500
IP 54 Enclosure
IP 54 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure (with bussing)
IP 65 Enclosure
2032*-C0630H⊗-30D
2032-!0630H⊗30D
2032*-C0630W⊗-30D
800A BS 88 2032*-C0630P⊗-31B
2032*-C0630H⊗-31B
2032-!0630H⊗-31B
2032*-C0630W⊗-31B
1600A DIN 2032*-C0630P⊗-31D
2032*-C0630H⊗-31D
2032-!0630H⊗-31D
2032*-C0630W⊗-31D
800A BS 88 2032*-C0860P⊗-31B
2032*-C0860H⊗-31B
2032-!0860H⊗-31B
2032*-C0860W⊗-31B
2032*-C0860P⊗-32B
2032*-C0860H⊗-32B
2032-!0860H⊗-32B
2032*-C0860W⊗-32B
1600A DIN 2032*-C0860P⊗-31D
2032*-C0860H⊗-31D
2032-!0860H⊗-31D
2032*-C0860W⊗-31D
2032*-C1200P⊗-32B
2032*-C1200H⊗-32B
2032-!1200H⊗-32B
2032*-C1200W⊗-32B
1600A DIN 2032*-C1200P⊗-31D
2032*-C1200H⊗-31D
2032-!1200H⊗-31D
2032*-C1200W⊗-31D
1250A BS 88
600
1250A BS 88
1043
To order the Time Delay feature, add the following Cat. String to the end of the Catalogue Number shown in the table: Factory set 30 second time delay feature:
-1TD
Example: Catalogue Number 2032-C0180P⊗-29B becomes Catalogue Number 2032-C0180P⊗-29B-1TD to include the time delay feature.
* Input Power Feed Catalogue Number Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Power Feed Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2032*-C0630P⊗-31B becomes Catalogue Number 2032T-C0630P⊗-31B for a “Top Feed” input power requirement. Input Power Feed
Catalogue Number Code
Top Feed
T
Bottom Feed
B
! Bussing Designation The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a Bussing Designation Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2032-!0085H⊗-27D becomes Catalogue Number 2032-E0085H⊗-27D for “600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables” bussing designation. Type of Bussing ➌
Catalogue Number Code
600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
E
1200A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
D
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 600A Load Side Outgoing Bus
H
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 1200A Load Side Outgoing Bus
R
⊗ Input Line Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Line Voltage Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2032-C0085W⊗-26B becomes Catalogue Number 2032-C0085WN-26B for a 380V 50Hz Input Line Voltage application. Input Line Voltage Voltage Code for Catalogue Number
220V 50Hz
380-400V 50Hz
400-415V 50Hz
440V 50Hz
500V 50Hz
550V 50Hz
A
N
G
B
M
C
Product Selection: Remote Lockout Station ➍ Catalogue Number “System Isolated” Light Colour Green
IP 30 Enclosure
IP 54 Enclosure
IP 65 Enclosure
2030-RLSPG
2030-RLSHG
2030-RLSWG
➊ Power fuses are not included with the disconnect switch. Select power fuses in accordance with applicable local codes. ➋ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings. ➌ Bus Type: Copper with tin plating. Consult factory for other types of bussing. ➍ Safety Isolation Systems rated up through 85A can support a maximum of four (4) Remote Lockout Stations (RLS). Systems rated from 110A - 1200A can support a maximum of six (6) RLS. If additional RLS are required, order the optional Expansion Module(s) (see page 12-16).
12-9
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker Product Selection for North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. Hp Rating (60Hz) Ampere Rating (AC-3) 200V 230V 460V 575V
23
43
85
110
180
210
300
Catalogue Number ➊ Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure
Type 12 Dust tight Enclosure
Type 12 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure (with bussing)
Type 4 Watertight Painted Steel Enclosure
Type 4X Watertight Stainless Steel Enclosure
5
5
5
5
2033-A0023A⊗-39
2033-A0023J⊗-39
2033-!0023J⊗-39
2033-A0023F⊗-39
2033-A0023C⊗-39
-
7.5
7.5
7.5
2033-A0023A⊗-40
2033-A0023J⊗-40
2033-!0023J⊗-40
2033-A0023F⊗-40
2033-A0023C⊗-40
-
-
10
10
2033-A0023A⊗-41
2033-A0023J⊗-41
2033-!0023J⊗-41
2033-A0023F⊗-41
2033-A0023C⊗-41
-
-
15
15
2033-A0023A⊗-42
2033-A0023J⊗-42
2033-!0023J⊗-42
2033-A0023F⊗-42
2033-A0023C⊗-42
7.5
-
-
-
2033-A0043A⊗-40
2033-A0043J⊗-40
2033-!0043J⊗-40
2033-A0043F⊗-40
2033-A0043C⊗-40
10
10
-
-
2033-A0043A⊗-41
2033-A0043J⊗-41
2033-!0043J⊗-41
2033-A0043F⊗-41
2033-A0043C⊗-41
-
15
-
-
2033-A0043A⊗-42
2033-A0043J⊗-42
2033-!0043J⊗-42
2033-A0043F⊗-42
2033-A0043C⊗-42
-
-
20
20
2033-A0043A⊗-43
2033-A0043J⊗-43
2033-!0043J⊗-43
2033-A0043F⊗-43
2033-A0043C⊗-43
-
-
25
25
2033-A0043A⊗-44
2033-A0043J⊗-44
2033-!0043J⊗-44
2033-A0043F⊗-44
2033-A0043C⊗-44
-
-
30
30
2033-A0043A⊗-45
2033-A0043J⊗-45
2033-!0043J⊗-45
2033-A0043F⊗-45
2033-A0043C⊗-45
15
-
-
-
2033-A0085A⊗-42
2033-A0085J⊗-42
2033-!0085J⊗-42
2033-A0085F⊗-42
2033-A0085C⊗-42
20
20
-
-
2033-A0085A⊗-43
2033-A0085J⊗-43
2033-!0085J⊗-43
2033-A0085F⊗-43
2033-A0085C⊗-43
25
25
-
-
2033-A0085A⊗-44
2033-A0085J⊗-44
2033-!0085J⊗-44
2033-A0085F⊗-44
2033-A0085C⊗-44
-
30
-
-
2033-A0085A⊗-45
2033-A0085J⊗-45
2033-!0085J⊗-45
2033-A0085F⊗-45
2033-A0085C⊗-45
-
-
40
40
2033-A0085A⊗-46
2033-A0085J⊗-46
2033-!0085J⊗-46
2033-A0085F⊗-46
2033-A0085C⊗-46
-
-
50
50
2033-A0085A⊗-47
2033-A0085J⊗-47
2033-!0085J⊗-47
2033-A0085F⊗-47
2033-A0085C⊗-47
-
-
60
60
2033-A0085A⊗-48
2033-A0085J⊗-48
2033-!0085J⊗-48
2033-A0085F⊗-48
2033-A0085C⊗-48
30
-
-
-
2033-A0110A⊗-45
2033-A0110J⊗-45
2033-!0110J⊗-45
2033-A0110F⊗-45
2033-A0110C⊗-45
40
40
-
-
2033-A0110A⊗-46
2033-A0110J⊗-46
2033-!0110J⊗-46
2033-A0110F⊗-46
2033-A0110C⊗-46
-
-
75
75
2033-A0110A⊗-49
2033-A0110J⊗-49
2033-!0110J⊗-49
2033-A0110F⊗-49
2033-A0110C⊗-49
-
-
-
100
2033-A0110A⊗-50
2033-A0110J⊗-50
2033-!0110J⊗-50
2033-A0110F⊗-50
2033-A0110C⊗-50
50
50
-
-
2033-A0180A⊗-47
2033-A0180J⊗-47
2033-!0180J⊗-47
2033-A0180F⊗-47
2033-A0180C⊗-47
-
60
-
-
2033-A0180A⊗-48
2033-A0180J⊗-48
2033-!0180J⊗-48
2033-A0180F⊗-48
2033-A0180C⊗-48
-
-
100
-
2033-A0180A⊗-50
2033-A0180J⊗-50
2033-!0180J⊗-50
2033-A0180F⊗-50
2033-A0180C⊗-50
-
-
125
125
2033-A0180A⊗-51
2033-A0180J⊗-51
2033-!0180J⊗-51
2033-A0180F⊗-51
2033-A0180C⊗-51
-
-
150
150
2033-A0180A⊗-52
2033-A0180J⊗-52
2033-!0180J⊗-52
2033-A0180F⊗-52
2033-A0180C⊗-52
60
-
-
-
2033-A0210A⊗-48
2033-A0210J⊗-48
2033-!0210J⊗-48
2033-A0210F⊗-48
2033-A0210C⊗-48
-
75
-
-
2033-A0210A⊗-49
2033-A0210J⊗-49
2033-!0210J⊗-49
2033-A0210F⊗-49
2033-A0210C⊗-49
-
-
-
175
2033-A0210A⊗-53
2033-A0210J⊗-53
2033-!0210J⊗-53
2033-A0210F⊗-53
2033-A0210C⊗-53
-
-
-
200
2033-A0210A⊗-54
2033-A0210J⊗-54
2033-!0210J⊗-54
2033-A0210F⊗-54
2033-A0210C⊗-54
75
-
-
-
2033-A0300A⊗-49
2033-A0300J⊗-49
2033-!0300J⊗-49
2033-A0300F⊗-49
2033-A0300C⊗-49
100
100
-
-
2033-A0300A⊗-50
2033-A0300J⊗-50
2033-!0300J⊗-50
2033-A0300F⊗-50
2033-A0300C⊗-50
-
125
-
-
2033-A0300A⊗-51
2033-A0300J⊗-51
2033-!0300J⊗-51
2033-A0300F⊗-51
2033-A0300C⊗-51
➊ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. See next page for instructions on how to order the optional time delay feature. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings.
12-10
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker Product Selection for North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. Hp Rating (60Hz) Ampere Rating (AC-3) 200V 230V 460V 575V
Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure
Type 12 Dust tight Enclosure
Type 12 Motor Control Centre Type 4 Watertight Type Enclosure Painted Steel (with bussing) Enclosure
Type 4X Watertight Stainless Steel Enclosure
-
-
175
-
2033-A0300A⊗-53
2033-A0300J⊗-53
2033-!0300J⊗-53
2033-A0300F⊗-53
2033-A0300C⊗-53
-
-
200
-
2033-A0300A⊗-54
2033-A0300J⊗-54
2033-!0300J⊗-54
2033-A0300F⊗-54
2033-A0300C⊗-54
-
-
250
250
2033-A0300A⊗-56
2033-A0300J⊗-56
2033-!0300J⊗-56
2033-A0300F⊗-56
2033-A0300C⊗-56
-
-
-
300
2033-A0300A⊗-57
2033-A0300J⊗-57
2033-!0300J⊗-57
2033-A0300F⊗-57
2033-A0300C⊗-57
125
-
-
-
2033-A0420A⊗-51
2033-A0420J⊗-51
2033-!0420J⊗-51
2033-A0420F⊗-51
2033-A0420C⊗-51
150
150
-
-
2033-A0420A⊗-52
2033-A0420J⊗-52
2033-!0420J⊗-52
2033-A0420F⊗-52
2033-A0420C⊗-52
-
175
-
-
2033-A0420A⊗-53
2033-A0420J⊗-53
2033-!0420J⊗-53
2033-A0420F⊗-53
2033-A0420C⊗-53
-
-
300
-
2033-A0420A⊗-57
2033-A0420J⊗-57
2033-!0420J⊗-57
2033-A0420F⊗-57
2033-A0420C⊗-57
-
-
350
350
2033-A0420A⊗-58
2033-A0420J⊗-58
2033-!0420J⊗-58
2033-A0420F⊗-58
2033-A0420C⊗-58
-
-
-
400
2033-A0420A⊗-59
2033-A0420J⊗-59
2033-!0420J⊗-59
2033-A0420F⊗-59
2033-A0420C⊗-59
175
-
-
-
2033*-A0630A⊗-53
2033*-A0630J⊗-53
2033-!0630J⊗-53
2033*-A0630F⊗-53
2033*-A0630C⊗-53
300
420
200
200
-
-
2033*-A0630A⊗-54
2033*-A0630J⊗-54
2033-!0630J⊗-54
2033*-A0630F⊗-54
2033*-A0630C⊗-54
-
250
-
-
2033*-A0630A⊗-56
2033*-A0630J⊗-56
2033-!0630J⊗-56
2033*-A0630F⊗-56
2033*-A0630C⊗-56
-
-
400
-
2033*-A0630A⊗-59
2033*-A0630J⊗-59
2033-!0630J⊗-59
2033*-A0630F⊗-59
2033*-A0630C⊗-59
-
-
450
450
2033*-A0630A⊗-60
2033*-A0630J⊗-60
2033-!0630J⊗-60
2033*-A0630F⊗-60
2033*-A0630C⊗-60
-
-
500
500
2033*-A0630A⊗-61
2033*-A0630J⊗-61
2033-!0630J⊗-61
2033*-A0630F⊗-61
2033*-A0630C⊗-61
-
-
-
600
2033*-A0630A⊗-62
2033*-A0630J⊗-62
2033-!0630J⊗-62
2033*-A0630F⊗-62
2033*-A0630C⊗-62
250
-
-
-
2033*-A0860A⊗-56
2033*-A0860J⊗-56
2033-!0860J⊗-56
2033*-A0860F⊗-56
2033*-A0860C⊗-56
-
300
-
-
2033*-A0860A⊗-57
2033*-A0860J⊗-57
2033-!0860J⊗-57
2033*-A0860F⊗-57
2033*-A0860C⊗-57
-
-
600
-
2033*-A0860A⊗-62
2033*-A0860J⊗-62
2033-!0860J⊗-62
2033*-A0860F⊗-62
2033*-A0860C⊗-62
-
-
-
700
2033*-A0860A⊗-63
2033*-A0860J⊗-63
2033-!0860J⊗-63
2033*-A0860F⊗-63
2033*-A0860C⊗-63
300
-
-
-
2033*-A1200A⊗-57
2033*-A1200J⊗-57
2033-!1200J⊗-57
2033*-A1200F⊗-57
2033*-A1200C⊗-57
350
350
-
-
2033*-A1200A⊗-58
2033*-A1200J⊗-58
2033-!1200J⊗-58
2033*-A1200F⊗-58
2033*-A1200C⊗-58
400
400
-
-
2033*-A1200A⊗-59
2033*-A1200J⊗-59
2033-!1200J⊗-59
2033*-A1200F⊗-59
2033*-A1200C⊗-59
450
450
-
-
2033*-A1200A⊗-60
2033*-A1200J⊗-60
2033-!1200J⊗-60
2033*-A1200F⊗-60
2033*-A1200C⊗-60
-
-
900
900
2033*-A1200A⊗-66
2033*-A1200J⊗-66
2033-!1200J⊗-66
2033*-A1200F⊗-66
2033*-A1200C⊗-66
630
860
1200
Catalogue Number ➊
To order the Time Delay feature, add the following Catalogue String to the end of the Catalogue Number shown in the table: Factory set 30 second time delay feature:
-1TD
Example: Catalogue Number 2033-A0180A⊗-50 becomes Catalogue Number 2033-A0180A⊗-50-1TD to include the time delay feature.
* Input Power Feed Catalogue Number Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Power Feed Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2033*-A0630A⊗-60 becomes Catalogue Number 2033T-A0630A⊗-60 for a “Top Feed” input power requirement. Input Power Feed
Catalogue Number Code
Top Feed
T
Bottom Feed
B
➊ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings.
12-11
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker ! Bussing Designation The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a Bussing Designation Code from the table below.
Example: Cat. No. 2033-!0085J⊗-44 becomes Cat. No. 2033-M0085J⊗-44 for “600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables” bussing designation. Type of Bussing ➊
Catalogue Number Code
600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
M
1200A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
S
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 600A Load Side Outgoing Bus
F
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 1200A Load Side Outgoing Bus
B
⊗ Input Line Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Line Voltage Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2033-A0085J⊗-44 becomes Catalogue Number 2033-A0085JB-44 for a 480V 60Hz Input Line Voltage application. Input Line Voltage
208V 60Hz
240V 60Hz
480V 60Hz
600V 60Hz
H
A
B
C
Voltage Code for Catalogue Number
Product Selection: Remote Lockout Station ➋ Catalogue Number “System Isolated” Light Colour
Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure
Type 12 Dust tight Enclosure
Type 4 Watertight Painted Steel Enclosure
Type 4X Watertight Stainless Steel Enclosure
2030-RLSAW
2030-RLSJW
2030-RLSFW
2030-RLSCW
White
Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker Product Selection for Outside of North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. kW Rating (50Hz) Ampere Rating (AC-3)
23
43
85
110
Catalogue Number ➌
230V
400V
500V
600V
IP 30 Enclosure
IP 54 Enclosure
IP 54 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure (w/bussing)
4
4
4
4
2033-C0023P⊗-39K
2033-C0023H ⊗-39K
2033-!0023H⊗-39K
2033-C0023W⊗-39K
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
2033-C0023P⊗-40K
2033-C0023H ⊗-40K
2033-!0023H⊗-40K
2033-C0023W⊗-40K
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
2033-C0023P⊗-41K
2033-C0023H ⊗-41K
2033-!0023H⊗-41K
2033-C0023W⊗-41K
-
11
11
11
2033-C0023P⊗-42K
2033-C0023H ⊗-42K
2033-!0023H⊗-42K
2033-C0023W⊗-42K
11
-
-
-
2033-C0043P⊗-42K
2033-C0043H ⊗-42K
2033-!0043H⊗-42K
2033-C0043W⊗-42K
13
13
13
13
2033-C0043P⊗-43K
2033-C0043H ⊗-43K
2033-!0043H⊗-43K
2033-C0043W⊗-43K
-
15
15
15
2033-C0043P⊗-44K
2033-C0043H ⊗-44K
2033-!0043H⊗-44K
2033-C0043W⊗-44K
-
18.5
18.5
18.5
2033-C0043P⊗-45K
2033-C0043H ⊗-45K
2033-!0043H⊗-45K
2033-C0043W⊗-45K
-
22
22
22
2033-C0043P⊗-46K
2033-C0043H ⊗-46K
2033-!0043H⊗-46K
2033-C0043W⊗-46K
15
-
-
-
2033-C0085P⊗-44K
2033-C0085H ⊗-44K
2033-!0085H⊗-44K
2033-C0085W⊗-44K
18.5
-
-
-
2033-C0085P⊗-45K
2033-C0085H ⊗-45K
2033-!0085H⊗-45K
2033-C0085W⊗-45K
22
-
-
-
2033-C0085P⊗-46K
2033-C0085H ⊗-46K
2033-!0085H⊗-46K
2033-C0085W⊗-46K
25
25
25
25
2033-C0085P⊗-47K
2033-C0085H ⊗-47K
2033-!0085H⊗-47K
2033-C0085W⊗-47K
-
32
32
32
2033-C0085P⊗-48K
2033-C0085H ⊗-48K
2033-!0085H⊗-48K
2033-C0085W⊗-48K
-
37
37
37
2033-C0085P⊗-49K
2033-C0085H ⊗-49K
2033-!0085H⊗-49K
2033-C0085W⊗-49K
-
45
45
45
2033-C0085P⊗-50K
2033-C0085H ⊗-50K
2033-!0085H⊗-50K
2033-C0085W⊗-50K
32
-
-
-
2033-C0110P⊗-48K
2033-C0110H ⊗-48K
2033-!0110H⊗-48K
2033-C0110W⊗-48K
-
55
55
55
2033-C0110P⊗-51K
2033-C0110H ⊗-51K
2033-!0110H⊗-51K
2033-C0110W⊗-51K
-
-
63
63
2033-C0110P⊗-52K
2033-C0110H ⊗-52K
2033-!0110H⊗-52K
2033-C0110W⊗-52K
IP 65 Enclosure
➊ Bus Type: Copper with tin plating. Consult factory for other types of bussing. ➋ Safety Isolation Systems rated up through 85A can support a maximum of four (4) Remote Lockout Stations (RLS). Systems rated from 110A - 1200A can support a maximum of six (6) RLS. If additional RLS are required, order the optional Expansion Module(s) (see page 12-16). ➌ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. See page 12-14 for instructions on how to order the optional time delay feature. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings.
12-12
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker Product Selection for Outside of North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. kW Rating (50Hz) Ampere Rating (AC-3) 110
180
210
300
420
Catalogue Number ➊
230V
400V
500V
600V
IP 30 Enclosure
IP 54 Enclosure
IP 54 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure (w/bussing)
-
-
-
75
2033-C0110P⊗-53K
2033-C0110H⊗-53K
2033-!0110H⊗-53K
2033-C0110W⊗-53K
IP 65 Enclosure
-
-
-
100
2033-C0110P⊗-55K
2033-C0110H⊗-55K
2033-!0110H⊗-55K
2033-C0110W⊗-55K
37
-
-
-
2033-C0180P⊗-49K
2033-C0180H⊗-49K
2033-!0180H⊗-49K
2033-C0180W⊗-49K
45
-
-
-
2033-C0180P⊗-50K
2033-C0180H⊗-50K
2033-!0180H⊗-50K
2033-C0180W⊗-50K
55
-
-
-
2033-C0180P⊗-51K
2033-C0180H⊗-51K
2033-!0180H⊗-51K
2033-C0180W⊗-51K
-
63
-
-
2033-C0180P⊗-52K
2033-C0180H⊗-52K
2033-!0180H⊗-52K
2033-C0180W⊗-52K
-
75
75
-
2033-C0180P⊗-53K
2033-C0180H⊗-53K
2033-!0180H⊗-53K
2033-C0180W⊗-53K
-
90
90
-
2033-C0180P⊗-54K
2033-C0180H⊗-54K
2033-!0180H⊗-54K
2033-C0180W⊗-54K
-
-
110
110
2033-C0180P⊗-56K
2033-C0180H⊗-56K
2033-!0180H⊗-56K
2033-C0180W⊗-56K
-
-
-
132
2033-C0180P⊗-57K
2033-C0180H⊗-57K
2033-!0180H⊗-57K
2033-C0180W⊗-57K
-
-
-
150
2033-C0180P⊗-58K
2033-C0180H⊗-58K
2033-!0180H⊗-58K
2033-C0180W⊗-58K
-
-
-
160
2033-C0180P⊗-59K
2033-C0180H⊗-59K
2033-!0180H⊗-59K
2033-C0180W⊗-59K
63
-
-
-
2033-C0210P⊗-52K
2033-C0210H⊗-52K
2033-!0210H⊗-52K
2033-C0210W⊗-52K
-
110
-
-
2033-C0210P⊗-56K
2033-C0210H⊗-56K
2033-!0210H⊗-56K
2033-C0210W⊗-56K
-
-
132
-
2033-C0210P⊗-57K
2033-C0210H⊗-57K
2033-!0210H⊗-57K
2033-C0210W⊗-57K
-
-
150
-
2033-C0210P⊗-58K
2033-C0210H⊗-58K
2033-!0210H⊗-58K
2033-C0210W⊗-58K
-
-
-
185
2033-C0210P⊗-60K
2033-C0210H⊗-60K
2033-!0210H⊗-60K
2033-C0210W⊗-60K
-
-
-
200
2033-C0210P⊗-61K
2033-C0210H⊗-61K
2033-!0210H⊗-61K
2033-C0210W⊗-61K
75
-
-
-
2033-C0300P⊗-53K
2033-C0300H⊗-53K
2033-!0300H⊗-53K
2033-C0300W⊗-53K
90
-
-
-
2033-C0300P⊗-54K
2033-C0300H⊗-54K
2033-!0300H⊗-54K
2033-C0300W⊗-54K
-
132
-
-
2033-C0300P⊗-57K
2033-C0300H⊗-57K
2033-!0300H⊗-57K
2033-C0300W⊗-57K
-
150
-
-
2033-C0300P⊗-58K
2033-C0300H⊗-58K
2033-!0300H⊗-58K
2033-C0300W⊗-58K
-
160
160
-
2033-C0300P⊗-59K
2033-C0300H⊗-59K
2033-!0300H⊗-59K
2033-C0300W⊗-59K
-
-
185
-
2033-C0300P⊗-60K
2033-C0300H⊗-60K
2033-!0300H⊗-60K
2033-C0300W⊗-60K
-
-
200
-
2033-C0300P⊗-61K
2033-C0300H⊗-61K
2033-!0300H⊗-61K
2033-C0300W⊗-61K
-
-
-
220
2033-C0300P⊗-62K
2033-C0300H⊗-62K
2033-!0300H⊗-62K
2033-C0300W⊗-62K
-
-
-
250
2033-C0300P⊗-63K
2033-C0300H⊗-63K
2033-!0300H⊗-63K
2033-C0300W⊗-63K
-
-
-
300
2033-C0300P⊗-64K
2033-C0300H⊗-64K
2033-!0300H⊗-64K
2033-C0300W⊗-64K
110
-
-
-
2033-C0420P⊗-56K
2033-C0420H⊗-56K
2033-!0420H⊗-56K
2033-C0420W⊗-56K
132
-
-
-
2033-C0420P⊗-57K
2033-C0420H⊗-57K
2033-!0420H⊗-57K
2033-C0420W⊗-57K
-
185
-
-
2033-C0420P⊗-60K
2033-C0420H⊗-60K
2033-!0420H⊗-60K
2033-C0420W⊗-60K
➊ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. See next page for instructions on how to order the optional time delay feature. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings.
12-13
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker Product Selection for Outside of North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) 3-Phase Max. kW Rating (50Hz) Ampere Rating (AC-3) 230V 400V 500V 600V
420
630
860
1200
Catalogue Number ➊
IP 30 Enclosure
IP 54 Enclosure
IP 54 Motor Control Centre Type Enclosure (w/bussing)
-
2033-C0420P⊗-61K
2033-C0420H⊗-61K
2033-!0420H⊗-61K
2033-C0420W⊗-61K
220
-
2033-C0420P⊗-62K
2033-C0420H⊗-62K
2033-!0420H⊗-62K
2033-C0420W⊗-62K
250
-
2033-C0420P⊗-63K
2033-C0420H⊗-63K
2033-!0420H⊗-63K
2033-C0420W⊗-63K
300
-
2033-C0420P⊗-64K
2033-C0420H⊗-64K
2033-!0420H⊗-64K
2033-C0420W⊗-64K
-
-
355
2033-C0420P⊗-65K
2033-C0420H⊗-65K
2033-!0420H⊗-65K
2033-C0420W⊗-65K
-
-
-
390
2033-C0420P⊗-66K
2033-C0420H⊗-66K
2033-!0420H⊗-66K
2033-C0420W⊗-66K
-
-
-
425
2033-C0420P⊗-67K
2033-C0420H⊗-67K
2033-!0420H⊗-67K
2033-C0420W⊗-67K
150
-
-
-
2033*-C0630P⊗-58K
2033*-C0630H⊗-58K
2033-!0630H⊗-58K
2033*-C0630W⊗-58K
160
-
-
-
2033*-C0630P⊗-59K
2033*-C0630H⊗-59K
2033-!0630H⊗-59K
2033*-C0630W⊗-59K
185
-
-
-
2033*-C0630P⊗-60K
2033*-C0630H⊗-60K
2033-!0630H⊗-60K
2033*-C0630W⊗-60K
200
-
-
-
2033*-C0630P⊗-61K
2033*-C0630H⊗-61K
2033-!0630H⊗-61K
2033*-C0630W⊗-61K
-
250
-
-
2033*-C0630P⊗-63K
2033*-C0630H⊗-63K
2033-!0630H⊗-63K
2033*-C0630W⊗-63K
-
300
-
-
2033*-C0630P⊗-64K
2033*-C0630H⊗-64K
2033-!0630H⊗-64K
2033*-C0630W⊗-64K
-
355
355
-
2033*-C0630P⊗-65K
2033*-C0630H⊗-65K
2033-!0630H⊗-65K
2033*-C0630W⊗-65K
-
-
390
-
2033*-C0630P⊗-66K
2033*-C0630H⊗-66K
2033-!0630H⊗-66K
2033*-C0630W⊗-66K
-
-
450
450
2033*-C0630P⊗-68K
2033*-C0630H⊗-68K
2033-!0630H⊗-68K
2033*-C0630W⊗-68K
-
-
-
500
2033*-C0630P⊗-69K
2033*-C0630H⊗-69K
2033-!0630H⊗-69K
2033*-C0630W⊗-69K
250
-
-
-
2033*-C0860P⊗-63K
2033*-C0860H⊗-63K
2033-!0860H⊗-63K
2033*-C0860W⊗-63K
-
450
-
-
2033*-C0860P⊗-68K
2033*-C0860H⊗-68K
2033-!0860H⊗-68K
2033*-C0860W⊗-68K
-
500
500
-
2033*-C0860P⊗-69K
2033*-C0860H⊗-69K
2033-!0860H⊗-69K
2033*-C0860W⊗-69K
-
-
560
560
2033*-C0860P⊗-70K
2033*-C0860H⊗-70K
2033-!0860H⊗-70K
2033*-C0860W⊗-70K
-
-
-
600
2033*-C0860P⊗-71K
2033*-C0860H⊗-71K
2033-!0860H⊗-71K
2033*-C0860W⊗-71K
300
-
-
-
2033*-C1200P⊗-64K
2033*-C1200H⊗-64K
2033-!1200H⊗-64K
2033*-C1200W⊗-64K
390
-
-
-
2033*-C1200P⊗-66K
2033*-C1200H⊗-66K
2033-!1200H⊗-66K
2033*-C1200W⊗-66K
-
600
600
-
2033*-C1200P⊗-71K
2033*-C1200H⊗-71K
2033-!1200H⊗-71K
2033*-C1200W⊗-71K
-
710
710
710
2033*-C1200P⊗-72K
2033*-C1200H⊗-72K
2033-!1200H⊗-72K
2033*-C1200W⊗-72K
-
-
750
750
2033*-C1200P⊗-73K
2033*-C1200H⊗-73K
2033-!1200H⊗-73K
2033*-C1200W⊗-73K
-
-
850
850
2033*-C1200P⊗-74K
2033*-C1200H⊗-74K
2033-!1200H⊗-74K
2033*-C1200W⊗-74K
-
-
888
888
2033*-C1200P⊗-75K
2033*-C1200H⊗-75K
2033-!1200H⊗-75K
2033*-C1200W⊗-75K
-
-
-
1043
2033*-C1200P⊗-76K
2033*-C1200H⊗-76K
2033-!1200H⊗-76K
2033*-C1200W⊗-76K
-
200
-
220
-
-
-
-
-
-
IP 65 Enclosure
To order the Time Delay feature, add the following Catalogue String to the end of the Cat. No. shown in the table: Factory set 30 second time delay feature:
-1TD
Example: Catalogue Number 2033-C0180P⊗-54K becomes Catalogue Number 2033-C0180P⊗-54K-1TD to include the time delay feature.
* Input Power Feed Catalogue Number Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Power Feed Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2033*-C0630P⊗-58K becomes Catalogue Number 2033T-C0630P⊗-58K for a “Top Feed” input power requirement. Input Power Feed
Catalogue Number Code
Top Feed
T
Bottom Feed
B
➊ Optional Time Delay Feature. The Safety Isolation System may be ordered with a factory set time delay feature (30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop, after the operating handle on a Remote Lockout Station has been moved to the “Off” position. Consult your local Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings.
12-14
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker/Optional Features Product Selection for Outside of North America (see page 12-19 for Ordering Instructions) ! Bussing Designation The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select a Bussing Designation Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2033-!0085H⊗-44K becomes Catalogue Number 2033-E0085H⊗-44K for “600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables” bussing designation. Type of Bussing ➊
Catalogue Number Code
600A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
E
1200A Line Side Incoming Bus and Outgoing Power Cables
D
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 600A Load Side Outgoing Bus
H
Line Side Incoming Power Cables and 1200A Load Side Outgoing Bus
R
⊗ Input Line Voltage Code The Catalogue Number as listed is incomplete. Select an Input Line Voltage Code from the table below.
Example: Catalogue Number 2033-C0085W⊗-48K becomes Catalogue Number 2033-C0085WN-48K for a 380V 50Hz Input Line Voltage application. Input Line Voltage
220V 50Hz
380-400V 50Hz
400-415V 50Hz
440V 50Hz
500V 50Hz
550V 50Hz
Voltage Code for Catalogue Number
A
N
G
B
M
C
Product Selection: Remote Lockout Station ➋ Catalogue Number “System Isolated” Light Colour
IP 30 Enclosure
IP 54 Enclosure
IP 65 Enclosure
2030-RLSPG
2030-RLSHG
2030-RLSWG
Green
Optional Features Pneumatic Isolation Module (Must be ordered with Safety Isolation System): The Safety Isolation System is available with an optional means of isolating the pneumatic energy source for the machine or process. If the machine operator/maintenance personnel initiates isolation of the electrical energy by operating one of the Remote Lockout Stations, a safety valve is simultaneously actuated to bleed pressure from the air line between the valve and the machine. When the air pressure has fallen to a predetermined level, the unit will allow the light on the Remote Lockout Station to illuminate, if electrical isolation has also been achieved. To order the Pneumatic Isolation option: Step 1: Add the following Catalogue String to the Safety Isolation System Catalogue Number: To indicate that the Safety Isolation System should be supplied as “Pneumatic Ready.”
-1PN
e.g. 2031-A0085JB-1PN to indicate an 85A Safety Isolation System that is to be “Pneumatic Ready.” Step 2: Order suitably enclosed Pneumatic Isolation Module as separate item: For North America: Catalogue Number Pressure Range
Valve Port Size
Type 1 General Purpose Enclosure
Type 12 Dust tight Enclosure
1in
2030-PA1201
2030-PJ1201
2030-PF1201
2030-PC1201
3/4in
2030-PA1203
2030-PJ1203
2030-PF1203
2030-PC1203
30-120 psi
Type 4 Watertight Type 4X Watertight Painted Steel Enclosure Stainless Steel Enclosure
For Outside of North America: Catalogue Number Pressure Range 2-7 bar
Valve Port Size
IP 30 Enclosure
IP 54 Enclosure
IP 65 Enclosure
1in
2030-PP0071
2030-PH0071
2030-PW0071
3/4in
2030-PP0073
2030-PH0073
2030-PW0073
➊ Bus Type: Copper with tin plating. Consult factory for other types of bussing. ➋ Safety Isolation Systems rated up through 85A can support a maximum of four (4) Remote Lockout Stations (RLS). Systems rated from 110A - 1200A can support a maximum of six (6) RLS. If additional RLS are required, order the optional Expansion Module(s) (see page 12-16).
12-15
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Optional Features (continued) Expansion Module (Can be ordered separately): For applications requiring more than the maximum allowable Remote Lockout Stations, or total wire lengths longer than those permitted with the Remote Lockout Stations. Expansion Modules are available in 4 or 10 port configurations. Each Expansion Module is wired to a port on the Control Module, and takes the connection port that would normally accommodate a Remote Lockout Station (see page 12-18 to determine if an Expansion Module is required due to wire length considerations). The 23A through 85A systems will accommodate connection of a maximum of 4 Expansion Modules, and the 110A through 1200A systems will accommodate connection of a maximum of 6 Expansion Modules. Certain ampere size Safety Isolation System Power Panels can accommodate either 1 or 2 Expansion Modules installed internally. In all other instances the Expansion Module(s) must be located external to the Safety Isolation System in a suitably rated enclosure. Ampere Size of Safety Isolation System
Internal Provisions to Accommodate Expansion Modules
23A - 85A
None
110A - 420A
Provisions to accept one (1) Expansion Module (Bulletins 2031, 2032 or 2033)
630A - 1200A
Note: The time delay feature affects all input devices wired to the Expansion Module.
For Expansion Module(s) Factory Installed: Add One of the Following Catalogue Number Strings to the Safety Isolation System Catalogue Number: Number of Expansion Modules
Number of Ports per Expansion Module
One (available on Bulletin 2031, 2032, or 2033, 110A– 1200A Systems only) Two (available on 630A – 1200A Bulletin 2032 or 2033 Systems only)
4
-1EUF
4 w/time delay
-1EUFTDA
10
-1EUT
10 w/time delay
-1EUTTDA
4
-2EUF
4 w/time delay
-2EUFTDA
10
-2EUT
10 w/time delay
-2EUTTDA
➊ e.g. Catalogue Number 2032T-A0630JB-30L becomes Catalogue Number 2032T-A0630JB-30L-2EUT to indicate a 630A Safety Isolation System that includes 2 internally installed 10 port Expansion Modules without the time delay feature.
Open Type Expansion Module for Field Addition Open Type ➋ Description
Provisions to accept up to two (2) Expansion Modules in Bulletin 2032 or 2033 combination systems, or one (1) Expansion Module in Bulletin 2031 non combination systems.
Expansion Modules may be ordered with an adjustable time delay feature (1-30 seconds) in order to allow time for the machine operator to shut-down drives or other equipment that requires a controlled stop after a Remote Lockout Station has been switched to the “Off ” position. Consult your Rockwell Automation sales office for other time settings. Enclosed Expansion Modules are available with optional “Flex” modules to provide status communication to a remote PLC. Communication can be via DeviceNet or Remote I/O. Note: The status communication option allows a remote PLC to receive status signals from the Expansion Module. The Expansion Module does not accept input signals from DeviceNet or Remote I/O.
Catalogue Number String ➊
Catalogue Number
4 port
2030-EUNF
4 port w/ time delay
2030-EUNF-1TDA
10 port
2030-EUNT
10 port w/time delay
2030-EUNT-1TDA
➋ Requires user supplied enclosure if not installed in the Safety Isolation System Power Panel. ➌ To order the Status Communication to a remote PLC option installed in an enclosed Expansion Module, add one of the following Catalogue Strings to the Expansion Module Catalogue Number:
Communication Platform
Number of I/O Points
Catalogue Number String ➍
Remote I/O
16 points
-1COM
DeviceNet
16 points
-1DNET
➍ e.g. Catalogue Number 2030-EUJF becomes Catalogue Number 2030-EUJF1COM to indicate a Type 12 enclosed, 4-port expansion module, with 16 points of remote I/O.
To order the optional enclosed Expansion Module for field addition for North America: Catalogue Number ➌ Description 4 port 4 port w/ time delay 10 port 10 port w/time delay
Type 1 Enclosure
Type12
Enclosure
Type 4 Painted Enclosure
Type 4X Stainless Steel Enclosure
2030-EUAF
2030-EUJF
2030-EUFF
2030-EUCF
2030-EUAF-1TDA
2030-EUJF-1TDA
2030-EUFF-1TDA
2030-EUCF-1TDA
2030-EUAT
2030-EUJT
2030-EUFT
2030-EUCT
2030-EUAT-1TDA
2030-EUJT-1TDA
2030-EUFT-1TDA
2030-EUCT-1TDA
To order the optional enclosed Expansion Module for field addition for outside of North America: Catalogue Number ➌ Description 4 port 4 port w/ time delay 10 port 10 port w/time delay
12-16
IP30 Enclosure
IP54 Enclosure
2030-EUPF
2030-EUHF
IP65 Enclosure 2030-EUWF
2030-EUPF-1TDA
2030-EUHF-1TDA
2030-EUWF-1TDA
2030-EUPT
2030-EUHT
2030-EUWT
2030-EUPT-1TDA
2030-EUHT-1TDA
2030-EUWT-1TDA
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Optional Features (continued) Status Communication to a remote PLC (Should be ordered with Safety Isolation System) This option provides Remote I/O via “Flex” modules. Communication can be via: • The DeviceNet communication platform, or • The Remote I/O communication platform. Note: The status communication option allows a remote PLC to receive status signals from the ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System. The ElectroGuard does not accept input signals through these communication platforms.
Status communication capabilities: • • • •
Overall system status, Status of each Remote Lockout Station, Status of the Pneumatic Isolation Module (if used), Status of other optional Safety Input devices.
Note: Each communication module provides sixteen (16) data points. In determining which Catalogue Number String to specify from the table below, please keep the following in mind:
• • • •
Overall system status information requires one (1) data point. The Pneumatic Isolation Module (if used) requires one (1) data point. Each Remote Lockout Station used in the application requires one (1) data point. Each optional Rockwell Automation Safety Input device (i.e. Safety Mat, Light Curtain, E-Stop Station, Proximity Switch, Photo Switch) requires one (1) data point.
To order the Status Communication to a remote PLC option, add one of the following Catalogue Strings to the Safety Isolation System Catalogue Number: Communication Platform
Number of I/O points
Catalogue Number String ➊
16 points
-1COM
Remote I/O
DeviceNet
32 points
-2COM
48 points
-3COM"
64 points
-4COM!
16 points
-1DNET
32 points
-2DNET
48 points
-3DNET"
64 points
-4DNET!
" Maximum available for units from 23A through 85A. ! Only available on units from 110A through 1200A. ➊ e.g. Catalogue Number 2031-A0085JB becomes Catalogue Number 2031-A0085JB-1COM to indicate an 85A Safety Isolation System that includes 16 points of Remote I/O for status communication to a remote PLC.
Cover Mounted Metering (Must be ordered with Safety Isolation System): Cover mounted ammeters and/or voltmeters are available as factory installed options in order to provide visual indication of line side system current and/or voltage. To order metering, add one or more of the following Catalogue Strings to the Safety Isolation System Catalogue Number: Type of Metering Required
Catalogue Number String ➋
Single-phase Ammeter
-1AM
Three-phase Ammeter
-3AM
Single-phase Voltmeter
-1VM
Three-phase Voltmeter
-3VM
➋ e.g. Catalogue Number 2031-A0085JB becomes Catalogue Number 2031-A0085JB-1AM to indicate an 85A Safety Isolation System that includes a cover mounted single-phase Ammeter.
12-17
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Typical Wiring Diagram/Wire Length Considerations Typical Wiring Diagram Safety Isolation System with Optional Fusible Disconnecting Means
Total Wire Length for Expansion Modules For North America Max. Total Wire Gauge Wire Length 14AWG 40,000 feet 16AWG 23,000 feet 18AWG 11,700 feet
GC
1IC 2IC
L1
Sample Calculation: An application for a 630A Safety Isolation System will require 8 Remote Lockout Stations (RLS):
T1 T2 To Motor Starters T3
L2 L3
Designates field connection points
To Loads
Remote Lockout Station(s)
The wire length from RLS # 1 to the Control Module (in the ElectroGuard Power Panel) will be 50ft. The wire length from RLS # 2 to the Control Module will be 200ft. The wire length from RLS # 3 to the Control Module will be 100ft. The wire length from RLS # 4 to the Control Module will be 300ft. The wire length from RLS # 5 to the Control Module will be 500ft. The wire length from RLS # 6 to the Control Module will be 1000ft. The wire length from RLS # 7 to the Control Module will be 850ft. The wire length from RLS # 8 to the Control Module will be 750ft. 14AWG wire will be used to connect the RLS to the Control Module (see illustration below).
Wire Length Considerations ATTENTION: It is important not to exceed the maximum wire length values shown in this section. If the maximum values are exceeded, this may result in an unreliable signal to the Safety Isolation System. Consider using an Expansion Module if wire lengths greater than those shown for the Remote Lockout Stations are needed.
152m (500ft)
RLS #5
1. Determine the distance in feet or meters from each Remote Lockout Station to the Control Module (located inside the Safety Isolation System Power Panel). 2. Sum the distances for all of the Remote Lockout Stations. 3. Double this value. 4. Compare this doubled value with the maximum values for total wire length shown in the table below: Total Wire Length for Remote Lockout Stations For Outside of North America
Wire Gauge
Max. Total Wire Length
Wire Gauge
Max. Total Wire Length
14AWG
4,600 feet
18 Gauge Metric
1,400 meters
16AWG
2,600 feet
14 Gauge Metric
800 meters
18AWG
1,300 feet
If the application requires a total wire length greater than those shown in the table, one or more Expansion Modules should be used. The maximum wire length for the Expansion Modules is shown in the following table:
259m (850ft)
228m (750ft)
RLS #8 Expansion Module
91m (300ft)
RLS #7
30m (100ft) RLS #3
Calculate the total wire length as follows:
12-18
304m (1000ft)
RLS #4
Each Remote Lockout Station is connected to the Control Module in the Power Panel of the Safety Isolation System. The total length of the wire used to connect the Remote Lockout Stations to the Control Module should not exceed the maximum values shown in the following tables.
For North America
For Outside North America Max. Total Wire Gauge Wire Length 18 Gauge Metric 12,200 meters 14 Gauge Metric 7,000 meters
61m (200ft) RLS #2
Control Module
RLS #1
RLS #6
Power Panel 15m (50ft)
Analysis: The Control Module furnished with the 630A Safety Isolation System is capable of supporting a maximum of six (6) RLS. Since this installation will require eight (8) RLS, an optional 4 port Expansion Module will also be used. The Expansion Module will be wired to the Control Module and will take the place of one of the original six RLS. We will, therefore, plan to wire five (5) of the RLS directly to the Control Module and three (3) of the RLS to the Expansion Module. Since the Expansion Module allows greater wire lengths than the Control Module, we will plan to wire the RLS to be installed furthest away from the Power Panel to the Expansion Module. For RLS # 1: wire length = 50ft x 2 = 100ft For RLS # 2: wire length = 200ft x 2 = 400ft For RLS # 3: wire length = 100ft x 2 = 200ft For RLS # 4: wire length = 300ft x 2 = 600ft For RLS # 5: wire length = 500ft x 2 = 1000ft
Safety Isolation System
ElectroGuard Wire Length Considerations/Ordering Instructions The total wire length for the 5 RLS to be wired to the Control Module will be: 100ft + 400ft + 200ft + 600ft + 1,000ft = 2,300ft Per the table entitled Total Wire Length for Remote Lockout Stations on page 12-18, the maximum allowable wire length for 14AWG wire is 4,600ft for the RLS to be wired to the Control Module. This portion of the installation will be within the maximum wire length permitted. Next, we need to check the wire length calculation for the RLS to be wired to the Expansion Module. For RLS # 6: wire length = 1000ft x 2 = 200ft For RLS # 7: wire length = 850ft x 2 = 1700ft For RLS # 8: wire length = 750ft x 2 = 1500ft The total wire length for the 3 RLS to be wired to the Expansion Module will be: 2000ft + 1700ft + 1500ft = 5,200ft Per the table entitled Total Wire Length for Expansion Modules on page 12-18, the maximum allowable wire length for 14AWG wire is 40,000ft for the RLS to be wired to the Expansion Module. This portion of the installation will also be within the maximum wire length permitted.
Ordering Instructions 1. Determine the Catalogue Number of the Safety Isolation System based on the rating of the load(s) to which it will be connected as follows: If the Safety Isolation System is connected to a single motor load, the horsepower or kilowatt rating of the system should be determined as follows: a. Select the Safety Isolation System that meets or exceeds the horsepower or kilowatt rating of the load at the required voltage and frequency. If the Safety Isolation System is connected to two or more motors or one or more motors in combination with other loads, the horsepower or kilowatt rating of the system should be determined as follows: a. Identify the types of loads (i.e. motor, resistive) and the values of the currents of each of the loads (i.e. steady-state current for resistive loads, full-load and locked-rotor currents for motor loads) to be connected to the Safety Isolation System.
2. 3. 4.
5.
b. Sum the full-load currents of all the motor loads to be connected to the Safety Isolation System. To this value add the current values of all resistive loads to be connected to the Safety Isolation System. This value is the “combined load full-load current.” c. Find the horsepower or kilowatt rating of a single motor with a full-load current value greater than or equal to the “combined load full-load current” value determined in Step “b”. d. Select the Safety Isolation System that meets or exceeds this horsepower or kilowatt rating at the required voltage and frequency. e. Sum the locked-rotor currents of all the motor loads to be connected to the Safety Isolation System. To this value add the current values of all resistive loads to be connected to the Safety Isolation System. This value is the “combined load locked-rotor current”. f. Find the horsepower or kilowatt rating of a single motor with a locked-rotor current value greater than or equal to the “combined load locked-rotor current” value determined in Step “e”. g. Select the Safety Isolation System that meets or exceeds this horsepower or kilowatt rating at the required voltage and frequency. h. Compare the ratings of the Safety Isolation Systems selected in Steps “d” and “g”. Select the larger of the two systems for your application. Determine how many Remote Lockout Stations are required for the application. Determine how many Expansion Modules (if any) are required for the application. Pick suitable enclosure type(s) for the Safety Isolation System Power Panel, Remote Lockout Stations and enclosed modules (e.g., Expansion Modules, Pneumatic Isolation Module). Determine what, if any, factory installed options are required for the application (e.g. Pneumatic Isolation, Status Communication to remote PLC, metering).
12-19
Safety Isolation System
Notes
12-20
Applied Safety Solutions
Machine Safety Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Advanced Burner Management Systems. . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Press Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Applied Safety Solutions
Machine Safety Services ■
■ ■
Stop Time Measurements and Safety Distance Calculations • Assure compliancy of light curtain and area guarding device installations. • Help determine ergonomic and operational advantages of safeguarding options. Safety Circuit Design • Including limited and sequential shutdown and applications. Probability of Failure on Demand Calculations • Help assure a system architecture can obtain a desired Safety Integrity Level (SIL) based on IEC 61508.
The implementation of a comprehensive machine safety program will involve many disciplines. Only Rockwell Automation has the entire spectrum covered. From the design and integration of safety critical circuits using the most advanced controls to the implementation of hard guarding. Rockwell Automation has the experience necessary to fulfill all your needs. Typical machine system integration services can include: ■
Risk assessments, risk reduction planning and project services allow companies to plan and implement safety programs for machine safeguarding applications to help reduce costs, improve compliance and enhance plant floor safety. Description Rockwell Automation’s Machine Safety Services include consulting, system integration and long-term support services for machines that must meet standards set forth by OSHA and ANSI in the United States. These services complement Rockwell Automation’s expertise in metalforming and automation projects, including over 15 years of experience in automating mechanical and hydraulic stamping presses. Rockwell Automation’s Machine Safety Services include: ■
■
■
■
Standards Training • Customer training on current standards and industry accepted interpretations. • Standards updates as necessary. Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction Planning • Coach/train client through procedures of risk assessment. • Provide assistance with interpretation of standards and documentation of assessments. • Facilitate an iterative process of mitigating each identified hazard by redesign or additional measures. Technical Specification Development • Assist in the development of a machine safety standard that addresses safety solutions for an entire company, facility or machine. Conformity Audits • Machine audits to verify and document compliance. A complete step-by-step assessment determines which standards are applicable and whether or not they have been satisfied.
13-2
System Integration Services • Project management • System architecture design • Panel design • Material procurement • RA products • Third party products (including hard guarding solutions) • Assembly • Software development • Hardware/software integration testing • Factory acceptance • Start-up assistance
Rockwell Automation’s support and follow through are available at every stage to handle any situations that may arise. Our long term support services include: ■
■
■
On-Site Training • Maintenance and operator training four our installed machine safety solutions Preventive Maintenance Programs • Verify that installed safety systems are operating within defined parameters. Field Service • Field work to be done on a contractual or as needed basis.
Applied Safety Solutions
Advanced Burner Management Systems Our BurnerMaster™ family of burner management systems are designed for single burner (BurnerMaster SB™) or multi-burner applications for boilers, process heaters, furnaces, kilns and any other fuel-burning processes. In addition to our family of burner management systems, Rockwell Automation offers related systems for control of combustion related processing including: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Combustion temperature/pressure control Fuel handling systems Ash handling and emission control systems Soot blowing Water treatment (related to powerhouse)
Description Rockwell Automation advanced burner management systems are pre-engineered to provide ignitor (pilot) and main flame detection, as well as control and monitoring of burner start-up and shutdown sequences including master fuel trip and purge. The systems can help you: ■
■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
Protect against damage to your combustion process equipment and surrounding areas due to explosion or other undesirable event Qualify for lower insurance premiums resulting from compliance with applicable industry standards such as NFPA, IRI and FM Reduce installation times because our systems are fully assembled, completely programmed and thoroughly tested— designed for immediate field installation Simplify unit operation through alarm management and operator displays. Reduce start-up time with advanced diagnostics and operator help messages. Reduce critical troubleshooting time through the use of pinpoint diagnostic messaging Enhance communication and reporting capabilities to other systems in your facility
Keep your combustion process safe and minimize fuel usage on the same platform!
13-3
Applied Safety Solutions
Press Control Systems Description Rockwell Automation offers various systems, bundled packages, and kits for meeting the safety-related control standards for the clutch/ brake of mechanical stamping presses. These solutions are designed to meet the safety requirements of ANSI B11.1, OSHA 1910.217, CAN/CSA Z142-M90, IEC-61508, EN-954 and EN-692. The 6556 Clutch/Brake kits are bundled packages consisting of redundant PLC components with application software, wiring diagrams, relays and documentation. Some packages have TUV certification. Each solution is designed with independent redundant programmable controllers with additional electromechanical components and the application software to provide the necessary monitoring, self testing, security, and verification that make up a control-reliable design. The PLC-5/x6 based kits come with the clutch/brake software secured in program file #16, and the user can add other logic to other files. The PLC-5-based kits are designed for large presses with extensive automation. The fixed SLC and MicroLogix kits are pre-programmed with the ladder program locked in flash memory. Certain features in the fixed kits are configurable. The MicroLogix and SLC 5/02 kits provide only the basic clutch/brake functions. The SLC 5/03-based Omega kit, for example, has a variety of standard features to control ancillary functions such as lube and programmable limit switch that can be configured through optional pre-programmed PanelView screens. The fixed kits are easy to use, require no programming, and are designed for small to medium-size presses retrofitted by the user. The StamProTM system is a complete, ready-to-install, Logix-based press control system that comes with controllers and hardware for controlling a stamping press. Ancillary control functions, which can be purchased from Rockwell Automation or supplied by the user, are integrated into the system hardware and software designs. The StamPro system is designed for end users, OEMs and integrators. The system can be purchased either with pre-programmed optional functions or can be programmed by the user. Some press functions which can be integrated with our solutions include: ■
■
■
Clutch/Brake. The Allen-Bradley controller designed system that controls the dual-valve clutch/brake mechanism as found on all mechanical stamping presses. This system includes dual redundant controllers with application software for monitoring and self-testing to achieve safety regulation compliance. Programmable Limit Switch (PLS). Ladder Logic for switching outputs according to crankshaft position. The PLS is often used to integrate and synchronize other press auxiliary functions such as feeders, grippers, blow-off and ejector valves. This feature requires a resolver position input for accuracy. The PLS is usually pre-programmed and configured by the user for each job or die. Die Monitoring. Logic that monitors a variety of in-die sensors to determine misalignment, double blanks, misfeeds, part positioning, plus other critical conditions. The die monitor function requires a resolver input and is generally preprogrammed and configured for each job or tool.
Modes of Operation The following table lists the modes of operation for each Rockwell Automation press control solution. Press Modes of Operation Off Inch Micro inch Single Continuous Remote & Auto Single
MicroSLC 5/02 Logix (6556- Fixed (6556SCBK2)
(6556-SCBK3)
X X X X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
StamPro System➊ X X X X X X
➊ Contact your local sales office for pricing and order information.
Press Features/Functions The table below summarizes the various press control functions available for each press control solution. (S = Standard, O = Optional, P = User Programmable, Blank table cell = Function not available).
Press Control Features
Clutch/Brake Control Operator Interface E-Stop & MCR Relays Run Sta. Monitored Main Motor Control RCLS Position Capable Resolver Capable Brake Time Monitor Var. Speed Top Stop Production Counters Maintenance Timers Prog. Limit Switch Die Protection Mon. Recipe Storage Var. Speed Comp. Lubrication Control Tonnage Monitoring Auto Counterbalance Shut Height Adjust Var. Speed Drive Interf. Servo Feed Interface Robot Interface Coil Feed Interface Die Cushion Control Die Clamp Control Bolster/Die Cart Cntl. Automation Control Aux. Automation Intrf. Prod. Monitoring/OEE Hydrlc. Overload Cntl. Light Curtain Interface Disconnect/Starters Colour HMI Open Net. Interface Capable ➋ TUV Certification User Prog. Capable Enclosure assembled Complete System
Micro Logix
Compact Press Master
S O S 1 O S O O
SLC Omega
StamPro
S O S 1
S S S 1 S S O S S S S S S 20 S S O O O O
S
S
S O
O S S O
O O
O
O
O
S
O O
S S S
O O
O
S S S 1 S S S S O S S S O
SLC 5/02
S S S 4+ S O/P S S O S S O O 30+ S O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P O/P S O/P O/P S S S
S
O S O O
O
S O O
➋ Ethernet, DeviceNet, Controlnet, RS232
13-4
Compact Press Master➊ X X X X X
SLC Omega
MLCBK)
S S
O O
Applied Safety Solutions
Press Control Systems StamPro—A Logix Based Press Control Engineered Solution
Reduce operating costs and downtime with reliable, flexible programmable press controls.
Standard features include: ■ Stop time monitoring for hands in die ■ Safety Interlocks and Light Curtain interface ■ Main Motor/Pump Control, including a reversing motor starter ■ Lubrication control, including a motor starter ■ Manual Slide Adjust/ Ram Profile Control ■ A 10 inch color operator interface terminal with Alarm Status/ History and Fault/Prompt ■ Clutch/Brake Safety Control ■ Interface for four run stations with anti-tiedown protection ■ Fully assembled and mounted in a NEMA 12 rated industrial enclosure with one set of operator run palm-buttons
The Rockwell Automation StamPro™ System is an advanced programmable controller-based system used for the control and monitoring of mechanical and hydraulic stamping presses. The StamPro control system is for customers who want to reduce cost and risk by purchasing a complete pre-engineered system, ready for installation.
System Description The StamPro System is a flexible, pre-engineered press control system based on standard Rockwell Automation components available locally and supported worldwide. StamPro Systems provide press control, operator interface, and magnetics in an integrated package with a complete set of documentation. The use of fieldproven hardware and software helps users minimize cost, risk, and comply with the necessary ANSI, OSHA and CSA standards.
System Architecture The StamPro System uses the Allen-Bradley Logix family of processors. The safety kernel, executed in dual Logix processors, is based on standard Bulletin 6556 clutch/brake or ram control software, designed by Rockwell Automation to comply with ANSI B11.1/B11.2, OSHA 1910.217, CSAZ142-2002, and EN 954. This safety kernel is coupled with optional application software that provides all other press automation control, monitoring, information and network requirements. The Logix programming environment allows the user to add their own additional custom software into the same processors where the safety kernel resides, to minimize control hardware costs. The standard operator interface is a pre-programmed colour PanelView 1000 (key pad or touch screen). The system is available in a freestanding console or an upright enclosure with a press mounted operator station.
Optional features include: ■ Automatic Slide Adjust Control ■ Die Protection Monitoring ■ Programmable Limit Switch ■ Tonnage Monitoring ■ Die Clamp Control ■ Die Cushion Control ■ Bolster Control ■ Light Curtain with muting ■ Hydraulic Overload Control ■ Recipe Management ■ Automatic Die Change ■ Automatic Counterbalance Air Pressure Control
Results A StamPro System will help provide: ■
■
Features The StamPro System is modular, which allows each system to be configured to the requirements of each specific application, and easily accommodates control expansion for future needs.
■
■
StamPro Architecture Main Control Enclosure ControlNet (included) (Optional I/O)
Die Protection
Field I/O
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Main Operator Station
10 inch PanelView Terminal (included)
Field Devices
(Optional) Die Clamps
Tonnage Monitor
PLS Outputs
(Optional) (0)
Reduced downtime through comprehensive operator diagnostic messages, on-line control system troubleshooting and replaceable modular components available worldwide. Increased flexibility through open integration of press control functions and industry-standard connectivity to other equipment including coil feeds, computers, drives, robots and servo transfer feeds. Improved quality through recipe-based control of process parameters such as shut height, counterbalance air pressure, motor speed, die protection and programmable limit switch. Reduced costs through the use of standard Rockwell Automation industrial control hardware, field-proven application software, and a comprehensive documentation package.
(5)
(6)
(Optional) Slide Adjust
Operator Station I/O (optional)
Press Position with CAMS
Processor “A” (included)
(0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Slide Safety Control Is Standard
DeviceNet (included)
Magnetics I/O
Printer
Lap top (0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Magnetics Enclosure
Plant Wide Network with Equipment (optional)
(4)
Workstation
(4)
Ethernet (optional)
Hub
Network Data Server
(Optional) Main Motor PowerFlex AC Drive (Optional) Bolster Drives
13-5
Applied Safety Solutions
Press Control Systems FeederPro—A Logix Based Press Coil Feed Engineered Solution
Helping stampers improve uncoiling, straightening and feeding to make better parts.
Reliability Is Designed into the Solution The Rockwell Automation FeederPro system provides a reliable solution for press feeders based upon standard, off-the-shelf AllenBradley components. The system provides a press feed controller that uses familiar configuration and troubleshooting tools on the Logix™ family of controllers. Built-in set-up routines and diagnostics make the FeederPro easy for your press room operators and maintenance personnel to run and troubleshoot the system by themselves, maximizing their productivity and reducing the downtime of the feeder system. The FeederPro application software provides the commands to the drives. This enables the system to closely follow the motions of the press for tight control of the manufacturing process.
As manufacturers demand higher quality components from their suppliers, handling of raw material feed stock becomes critical. In the stamping process, that means feeding the coil into the press has to be accomplished with greater emphasis on: ■ ■ ■ ■
Speed Flexibility of coil sizes Faster change over Minimal impact to the material
Rockwell Automation has developed a pre-engineered automated press feed control system to help increase productivity and reduce the high costs of scrap in the stamping room.
Results—A Smooth Operator The FeederPro system uses the Rockwell Automation SmoothProfile™ press feed profile to smoothly accelerate and decelerate the feed rolls. This approach dramatically reduces roll slippage and virtually eliminates material marking. The FeederPro system is available as a pre-engineered bundle of engineering and components or as a completely assembled and tested control system.
Rockwell Automation’s FeederPro is available in a range of configurations, from a pre-engineered bundle of hardware for small press feeds to turnkey systems for the largest flat metal line processing systems.
The open network architecture of the FeederPro System allows for simple connectivity to a StamPro press control, for even better control of your stamping process. Straightener
Unwind
Work Roller
Feed Rolls
Diameter Sensing Empty Loop Photo Switch
Stamping Press
Empty Loop Photo Switch
B
AC
B
AC
R
SM ControlLogix
PowerFlex
1394 Digital Servo Controller
Shunt Resister Flex I/O
Flex I/O
Miscellaneous Machine I/O
13-6
PanelView
Applied Safety Solutions
Press Control Systems STFPro—A Logix Based Servo Transfer Feed Engineered Solution
Make parts faster by replacing mechanically-driven transfer system with press control, feed control and servo transfer control on a common platform.
Servo Transfer Feed Functionality The STFPro application software provides the commands to the drives that enable the system to closely follow the motions of the press machine, for tight control of the manufacturing process.
Proven Solutions Get Results
Global manufacturers are striving to create more flexible and productive manufacturing facilities. In many stamping rooms, this is being accomplished through the use of servo-driven, rather than mechanically driven, inside the press part transfer systems. Servo Transfer Feed (STF) systems-deliver increased flexibility and improved productivity by allowing users to configure the paths of their transfer systems. Rockwell Automation offers a variety of STFPro systems for customers.
Rockwell Automation has applied extensive expertise in Servo Transfer Feed systems to develop the hardware/software products users need to efficiently and reliably operate their complex machines. Routines for building a SmoothProfile™ motion cam are standard with Rockwell Automation’s STFPro software. The result is highly repeatable parts transfer with minimum machine wear. The demonstrated success of this software shortens system development time and reduces the risks associated with developing an application from scratch.
The Logix Solution Manufacturers who use the Logix family of controllers want to run their presses with one neatly integrated system for both their press controls and their STF functions. This split dramatically simplifies the overall system architecture, operation, and maintenance.
The use of standardized, well-documented software also helps make STFPro systems more easily supported in the field, resulting in improved up time and reduced training costs. The well-designed hardware solution ensures that all the electrical design details are documented. Rockwell Automation’s proven STFPro system is available as a hardware/software bundle or included in a complete turnkey system for both OEMs and end users.
The ControlLogix system has a commercial off the shelf architecture, freeing stampers from “black box” controllers that are difficult to maintain and troubleshoot. The STFPro system implements the motion control application using easy to understand software. This open approach enables a wide range of personnel to understand and troubleshoot the system.
The open network architecture of the STFPro System allows for simple connectivity to a StamPro press control, for even better control of your stamping process.
Transfer Axis B530E
Encoders
DNE
Clamp Axis
B530E
DNE
B530E
DNE
Lift Axis
B530E
DNE
B530E
DNE
B530E
DNE
Encoder
Encoder
1394 Digital Servo Controller
1394 Digital Servo Controller
Sercos
Ethernet
6180 Computer
Typical Architecture
13-7
Applied Safety Solutions
Press Control Systems Compact PressMaster—A MicroLogix Based Complete Mechanical Press Control Solution
Reduce operating costs and downtime with reliable and flexible MicroLogix press controls. The Rockwell Automation Compact PressMaster System is a cost competitive, programmable controller-based system used for the control and monitoring of mechanical stamping presses. Reduce cost and risk by purchasing a complete system, pre-wired and tested, ready for installation. The system is designed to modernize your press controls, increase control system reliability, and reduce downtime by providing comprehensive operator diagnostics. Compact PressMaster provides press users, rebuilders, and OEMs a low cost PLC based control system to remain competitive and reduce risk.
System Description The Compact PressMaster System an expandible press control system based on standard Rockwell Automation components available locally and supported worldwide. Compact PressMaster Systems provide press control, operator interface with comprehensive diagnostics, expandability, and motor controls in a single integrated package. The system is provided, ready to install, with a complete set of documentation. The Compact PressMaster System is based on a Bulletin 6556 clutch/brake control with dual processors and software designed by Rockwell Automation to help customers comply with ANSI B11.1, OSHA 1910.217, CSAZ142-2002, and EN 954. Allen-Bradley motor controls and an Allen-Bradley PanelView 3" monochrome operator interface with key pad is included, to complete the system and provide maximum reliability.
Standard Features ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Safety Interlocks and Light Curtain Interface Clutch/Brake Safety Control with Inch, Single Stroke, Continuous, Modes of Operation, including a mode select key switch Main Motor Control, including a 25 Hp reversing motor starter and forward/stop/reverse push-button Lubrication Control, including a 1 Hp motor starter and lube verification 60 Amp/460V Lockable Power Disconnect Press Mountable, NEMA 12 Rated Industrial Enclosure Operator Fault and Prompt Messages, Alarm Status Operator Screen on a 3 inch PanelView Display One Industrial Brushless Absolute Brake Time Monitoring and 90 Degree Stop Test Interface for One Run Station with Anti-Tiedown Protection Press Stroking Anti-Repeat and Top Stop Overrun Protection Clutch/Brake and Counterbalance Air Pressure Monitoring User Immediate and Top Stop Control Interlocks 4 Programmable Limit Switch Outputs Production counters and maintenance timers
Optional Features ■ Manual or automatic slide adjust ■ 8 Channels of Die Protection ■ 8 Programmable Limit Switch Outputs ■ Hydraulic Overload Control ■ Light Curtains with muting ■ OEM packages ■ Automatic counterbalance control ■ Variable speed compensation ■ 6 inch colour operator display terminal
Results A Compact PressMaster System helps provide: ■
■ ■ ■ ■
Reduced downtime through advanced diagnostic messages, helpful operator prompts, and on-line control system troubleshooting. Improved system reliability through the use of standard Rockwell Automation industrial control hardware and software. Increased operational flexibility and expandability, while reducing costs and risk. Compliance with ANSI, OSHA, and CSA regulations. A press control that can grow with your stamping operations.
Ordering Information Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales office or distributor. Catalogue Number Base System Dual Absolute Encoder Option Die Protection Monitoring Option 4 Additional PLS Outputs Option One Operator Run Stand 6 Inch Color Operator Display Option Dual Absolute Encoder Option with Light Curtain Muting
13-8
6556-GCPM 6556-GMRP2 6556-GCDP1 6556-GCPLS1 6556-GTSTAND 6556-GCPV600 6556-GCMUTE
Applied Safety Solutions
Press Control Systems Fixed MicroLogix 1500 Clutch/Brake Control System Requirements ■ ■ ■
Rotary Cam Limit Switch Motion detection device Self-checking valve
Ordering Information The purchase of one kit includes the license to use this control on one stamping press. Network options must be ordered separately. Options include the DeviceNet network (catalogue number 1761-NET-DNI) and the RS–232–C/DH–485 Advanced Interface Converter (catalogue number 1761-NET-AIC). The MMI option, which must be ordered separately from the basic Clutch/Brake package, includes pre loaded software and cables (catalogue numbers 6556-GMPV300).
Description
The 6556 clutch/brake control package also comes in two versions:
A MicroLogix 1500 processor-based Clutch/Brake Package is a bundle of hardware, software, and documentation that controls the basic clutch/brake mechanisms on mechanical stamping presses. This package requires no user programming. It can be interfaced with other controllers such as the ControlLogix system.
Package with 120V AC I/O (catalogue number 6556-MLCBK) ■ ■ ■ ■
The package uses redundant MicroLogix 1500 processors with application software for self testing and verification to help meet the safety requirements of ANSI B11.1, OSHA 1910.217 and CAN/ CSA Z142-M90 press safety regulations for mechanical stamping presses. The DC version has TUV certification for IEC–61508, EN–954, EN–692 and DIN 19250. Each MicroLogix 1500 processor has the basic clutch/brake functionality as well as the basic diagnostics to interface to several display options making it an easyto-use cost-effective solution for small presses. Since you don’t need programmable controller experience; you can just wire and mount the equipment. For other press functions such as programmable limit switch, automation control, brake time monitoring, die protection monitoring, resolver based consider using the Compact PressMaster system. If you require resolvers and break time monitor only, add the 6556GMRP1 option. If you require more automation flexibility or need a custom system, consider using the StamPro system.
Control Features ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
One set of Run buttons monitored One set of Inch buttons monitored AC and DC versions Hard wired cross-checking Open communication for diagnostics Modes of operation: • – Off – Inch – Micro Inch – Single – Continuous (Armed) Brake monitoring Top stop overrun and anti-repeat protection
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
MicroLogix 1500, 1764–LSP (2) Output Module, 1769–OW8I (4) Memory Module, 1764–MMIRTC (2) Terminator cap, 1769–ECR (2) DC base unit, 1764–28BXB (2) Relay, 700CF310D (4) AC Input Module, 1769–IA16 (2) Safety Relay, 700ZBR520AZ1 (1) AC Input Module, 1769–IA8I (4)
Package with 24V DC I/O (catalogue number 6556-MLCBKDC) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
MicroLogix 1500, 1764–LSP (2) Output Module, 1769–OW8I (4) Memory Module, 1764–MMIRTC (2) Terminator cap, 1769–ECR (2) DC base unit, 1764–28BXB (2) Relay, 700CF310ZJ (4) DC Input Module, 1769–IQ16 (6) Safety Relay, 700ZBR520AZ1 (1)
New—Enhanced Options for MicroLogix Clutch/ Brake Controllers Reference # 6556-GM4RUN 6556-GMPV300
Option Description Interface for 4 run stations + software Display-3” LCD PanelView300 Micro+cable+software 6556-GMRP1 1 Encoder and an existing user supplied CAM box with Brake Time Logic + software 6556-GMRP2 2 Encoders and no CAMS needed with Brake Time Logic + software 6556-GMMDS Motion Detect Device and cable 6556-GTSTAND One operator run station on T-Stand with run, top stop, and e-stop push-buttons 6556-GCAM1 6 CAM box with Integral Motion Detect Device 6556-GCAM2 6 CAM box without Integral Motion Detect Device 6556-GCAM6 3 CAM box with Integral Motion Detect Device and ability to mount 6556-GMRP1 inside
13-9
Applied Safety Solutions
Press Control Systems Omega—An SLC500 Based Press Control Solution Description
Features
The Omega™ Configurable Press Control Kit is designed to control basic functions on mechanical stamping presses and to meet the safety requirements of ANSI B11.1, OSHA 1910.217 and CAN/ CSA Z142–M90 press safety regulations for mechanical stamping presses. The system comes as a bundled package consisting of hardware, all application software, and documentation.
Clutch/Brake Control is the standard logic used in all Rockwell Automation Omega series press control systems. Clutch/Brake Control features are:
Configurable features include tonnage monitoring, shut height adjustment, PLS, lubrication, die monitor, automatic counterbalance, and servo feeds. All configurable features require that you add resolver modules to the control system. For instance, you can add a tonnage monitoring module or a resolver from one of our Encompass partners. For more information, refer to the Encompass Program Product Directory, publication 6873.
Functional Design The Omega Press Control System provides basic clutch/brake control as well as press control. No user programming is required.
One set of Run buttons monitored One set of Inch buttons monitored ■ Modes of Operation • Off • Inch • Single • Continuous ■ One Resolver (required, not supplied) ■ One Resolver or Rotary Cam (required, not supplied) for second position device ■ Clutch/brake time monitor Other standard control features include: ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
Mechanical Design
■
The control system includes redundant SLC 5/03 processors with application software for self testing and verification to conform with ANSI and OSHA regulations. Both SLC 5/03 processors are located in separate chassis. They monitor all clutch/brake I/O and exchange information about machine status. They are linked so that if one processor detects a condition different from that detected by the other, its control logic is designed to declare a fault and turn off all outputs to press valves. The other processor is designed to do the same.
■ ■
Production monitor and counters Die monitoring (16 channels) Programmable Limit Switch (8 channels) Recipe Storage (20 die recipes) Maintenance Timers Multi-function lube control Main Motor Control
Ordering Information The purchase of one kit includes the license to use this control on one stamping press. See below for 6556 catalog numbers to order.
The MMI must be ordered separately [PanelView 600 (catalogue number 6556–SPV600) configuration screens are burned in flash.] Resolvers and resolver modules must be ordered separately. Hardware Included
For 6556–SCBK3 (AC version)
For 6556–SCBK3DC (DC version)
Hardware That You Provide
SLC 5/03 Processor (2) Link Coupler (DH–485) (2) Power Supply (2) 7-slot I/O chassis (1) 10-slot I/O chassis (1) Input Module (4) Input Module (1) Output Module (2) Relay Output Module (2) Relays (4)
1747–L532 1747–AIC 1746–P2 1746–A7 1746–A10 1746–IA16 (AC) 1746–ITV16 1746–OA16 1746–OX8 700–P400A1
1747–L532 1747–AIC 1746–P2 1746–A7 1746–A10 1746–IB16 (DC) 1746–ITV16 1746–OB16 1746–OX8 700DC–F310Z24
Input Switches and Run Stations (application dependent) Rotary Cam Limit Switch (1, if used) Resolver (minimum of 1) Resolver Input Module (minimum of 1) Solenoid Valves (4) with internal fault detection Operator Interface (1) colour PanelView 600 (6556–SPV600) Tonnage Module (optional, 2 maximum) Analog I/O Module (1, optional) Sensors for die monitoring
Reference Number 6556-GSRP1 6556-GSRP2 6556-GSMDS 1746-NIO4V 6556-GTSTAND 6556-GCAM3 6556-GCAM5
13-10
Option Description 1 Resolver and an existing user supplied CAM box with Brake Time Logic + software 2 Resolvers and no CAMS needed with Brake Time Logic + software Motion Detect Switch, device and cable Auto Counterbalance Control, Shut Height Position Monitor, Variable Speed Main Drive Control One operator run station on T-Stand with run, top stop, and e-stop push-buttons 3 CAM box with Integral Motion Detect Device 3 CAM box without Integral Motion Detect Device
Accessories
Accessories
440A-A07265...440A-A09197 Item
14-2
Description
Catalogue Number
Blanking Plug, M20 Conduit
440A-A07265
Cable Grip, M16 Conduit Accommodates Cable Diameter 4mm (0.16in) to 7mm (0.27in)
440A-A09004
Security Bit
440A-A09015
Screwdriver Including Security Bit
440A-A09018
Cable Grip, Pg16 Conduit Accommodates Cable Diameter 12mm (0.47in) to 14mm (0.55in)
440A-A09025
Cable Grip, M20 Conduit Accommodates Cable Diameter 7mm (0.27in) to 10.5mm (0.41in)
440A-A09028
Adaptor, Conduit, M20 to 1/2in NPT, Plastic
440A-A09042
Bulb, 240V for Conduit Pilot Light 0.75W T-3¼ Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09054
Bulb, 110V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.6W T-3¼ Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09055
Bulb, 24V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.8W T-3¼ Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09056
Adaptor, Conduit, 1/2in NPT to M16, Brass
440A-A09093
Adaptor, Conduit, M16 to 1/2in NPT, Brass
440A-A09094
Fuse, 250mA Bussmann Catalogue Number ETF-250mA
440A-A09196
Fuse, 2A Bussmann Catalogue Number ETF-2
440A-A09197
Accessories
440A-A17029...440G-A07269 Description
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
Catalogue Number
Screw Pack (16 Security Screws M4 x 20mm & Bit)
—
440A-A17029
Screw Pack (10 Security Screws M5 x 20mm & Bit)
—
440A-A17030
Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot Light—Amber
—
440A-A19001
Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot Light—Red
—
440A-A19002
Indicator, 1/2in NPT Conduit Pilot Light— Amber
—
440A-A19005
Indicator, 1/2in NPT Conduit Pilot Light—Red
—
440A-A19007 3.5 (0.14)
56 (2.2)
4 (0.16)
Atlas Standard Actuator
10.5 (0.41) 30 (1.18)
10 (0.39)
5 (0.2) 5 (0.2)
50 (1.97) 2 Mounting Holes for M5 Screws
18 (0.71)
56 (2.2)
56 (2.2)
12 (0.47)
Atlas Replacement End Cap 5 (0.2)
14 (0.55)
440G-A07136
440G-A07180
52 (2.04) Ctrs M5 10 (0.39)
24 (0.94) 90 (3.54) 77 (3.03)
Atlas Fully Flex Actuator
440G-A07269 9 (0.35) 75 (295)
Item
21 (0.82) 18 (0.70)
M5
14-3
Accessories
440G-A27011...440K-A11094 Description
Catalogue Number
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 18 (0.71)
3.5 (0.14)
4 (0.16)
GD2 Standard Actuator (GD2 model only)
36 (1.42)
Item
440G-A27011
40 (1.57)
14.5 (0.57)
M5 CSK
52 (2.05)
Fully-Flexible Actuator (GD2 model only)
13 (0.51)
2 x M3
50 (1.96)
20
19 (0.74)
18 (0.7) 50
Sliding Bolt Actuator (GD2 model only)
84 (3.3) 25.5 (1.0)
34 (1.33)
440G-A36026
17.5 (0.69)
7.25 (0.29)
52 (2.05) 40 (1.57)
31.2 (1.23) 14.5 (0.57)
14.5 (0.57) 25.5 (1.0)
Catch Retainer
40 (1.57) 5 (0.2) 52 (2.05) 1.5 (0.06) Mounting Holes for M5 CSK Screws
29 (1.14)
T15/Trojan 5/Trojan 6 Catch and Retainer Kit (Standard Model Only)
20.5 (0.8)
—
3.5 (0.14)
52 (2.05)
4 (0.16)
7.25 (0.29)
14.5 (0.57)
18 (0.71)
440K-A11094 25.5 (1.0)
11.2 (0.44)
14-4
440G-A36050
52 (2.05) 40 (1.57)
1.5 (0.06)
Catch Case
440G-A27163
24 (0.94) 2.5 (0.09) 117.5 (4.62)
Spartan/TLS-GD2/ 440G-MT Solenoid Emergency Override
Spartan Replacement Actuator with Catch Retainer and Guide
42 (1.65) Tapped M5 5.5 (0.21)
100 (3.93) 140 (5.51)
40 (1.57)
440G-A27143
19 (0.75)
4 x Ø5.5 (0.22) Ø10 20 (0.39) (0.78)
51 (2.01)
18 (0.71)
Catch Retainer
Accessories
440K-A11095...440K-A17116 Description
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
5 (0.2)
Trojan 5 and Trojan 6 Standard Actuator (Standard Model Only)
440K-A11095
40 (1.57) 52 (2.05)
14.5 (0.57)
Mounting Holes for M5 Screws
3.5 (0.14)
17.5 (0.69)
57 (2.24)
Trojan/440G-MT/TLSGD2/MT-GD2 Flat Actuator
Catalogue Number
17.5 (0.69)
3.5 (0.14)
31.2 (1.23)
Item
440K-A11112
36 25 (0.98) (1.42) 35 29 20.7 52.0 (2.04)
Replacement Alignment Guide
20.7 (0.81)
(Discard the Alignment Guide for GD2)
8.5 (0.33) 20.7 52.0 (2.04)
20.7 (0.81)
46.5 (1.83)
32.7 14 55.5 (2.18) (0.55) 40 (1.57)
17.5 (0.69) 4 (0.16) 31.2 (1.23)
Trojan T15 Standard Actuator (Standard model only) 14.5 (0.57)
440K-A11144
15.5 (0.61) 14 (0.55)
32.7 (1.29)
3.5 (0.14)
440K-A11115
32.7 (1.29)
35 29
Trojan Alignment Guide with Semi-Flexible Actuator
32.7
40 (1.57) 52 (2.05)
8 (0.31)
440K-A11238
M5 CSK
3 (0.11) 17.5 (0.68)
440G-MT/TLS-GD2/ Trojan/MT-GD2 Extended Flat Actuator
32.2 (1.26)
7.0 (0.27) 70 (2.75)
5.2 (0.2) Dia. 2 places 10.8 (0.42)
440K-A17116
20 (0.78) 15 (0.59) 36 (1.41)
14-5
Accessories
440K-A21006...440R-A31562 Description
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
Catalogue Number
29 (1.14)
23 (0.91) 18.25 (0.72) 24 (0.94) 3 (0.12) 8.75 (0.34) 7.5 (0.3)
Elf/Cadet 90° Actuator
8 (0.31) 2 Slots for M4 Screws
440K-A21006 1 (0.04)
12 (0.47)
25 (0.98) 15 (0.59)
3 (0.12)
Elf/Cadet Flat Actuator
12 (0.47)
440K-A21014
8.5 (0.33)
Elf/Cadet GD2 Metal Alignment Guide with Semi-Flexible Actuator
14 (0.55)
55. 5 (2.19) 40 (1.57)
6 (0.24)
40 (1.57)
3 (0.12)
440K-A21030 13 (0.51) 25 (0.98)
M5 6 (0.24)
3 (0.12)
13.5 (0.53)
15.5 (0.61)
Elf/Cadet Alignment Guide
19 (0.75)
19 (0.75)
3 (0.12)
440K-A21069
13.5 (0.53) 13 (0.51) 25 (0.98) 18 (0.71)
TLS-GD2/Trojan/ MT-GD2 Alignment Guide with Fully-Flexible Actuator (Discard the Alignment Guide for GD2)
13 51 (0.51)(2.01)
2 x M3
4 x Ø5.5 (0.22)
35 29
19 (0.75)
440K-A27010
20.7 (0.81) 32.7 (1.29)
25.5 (1.0)
31 (1.22) 40 (1.57) 52 (2.04)
20.7 32.7 52.0 (2.04)
81.5 (3.20)
Mounting Plate
440K-A33624
6 (0.24) 7 (0.28) 40 (1.57)
Fuse, 500mA Bussmann Catalogue Number ETF-500mA
14-6
—
440R-A31562
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 Safety Wired T-Port, DC Micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 Safety Wired Distribution Box, DC Micro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Safety Wired Distribution Box, AC Micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 Safety Wired Shorting Plug, DC Micro & AC Micro . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Cordsets and Patchcords DC Micro Cordset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 AC Micro Cordset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 Mini and Mini-Plus Cordset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12 M23 Cordset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 M23 Patchcord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Field Attachable Connectors DC Micro, Screw Terminal Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 DC Micro, Insulation Displacement Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 M23, Solder Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Receptacles DC Micro, Male. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 AC Micro, Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 M23, Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
For additional Allen-Bradley connection systems products, visit our web site at www.ab.com/sensors.
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Overview Introduction The Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Safety Connection Systems are complete wiring solutions dedicated to machine safety. These quick disconnect-based systems consist of safety wired T-Ports and distribution boxes as well as patchcords and shorting plugs. Specifically intended for use with dry-contact safety switches, Safety Connection Systems provide flexible and reliable connections between safety interlock switches, E-stops, cable pull switches and safety relays. And while this system is ideal for use with these components, it is not suitable for use with light curtains, safety mats or pressure sensitive safety edges. Allen-Bradley Guardmaster Safety Connection Systems are designed to: • • • • • •
Reduce installation cost Ease system expansion Simplify troubleshooting Promote system modularity Provide for Safety PLC input expansion Support systems up to Category 3 (per EN954-1)
Systems without Enunciation As illustrated in the example layout on page 15-3, wiring systems for applications not requiring enunciation use a combination of patchcords, shorting plugs, safety wired distribution boxes and T-ports for series wiring of safety circuits. Distribution boxes for such an application are dual channel models with 2 N.C. or 1 N.C. + 1 N.O. contact configurations. See the wiring diagrams below for connector pin assignments. Dual Channel 2 N.C.
Safety N.C.
Connector Pin 1 (Brown) 3 (Blue) 2 (White) 4 (Black)
Device J11 J12 J21 J22
N.C.
Connector Pin 1 (Brown) 3 (Blue) 2 (White) 4 (Black)
Device J11 J12 J23 J24
N.C.
N.C.
Male Connector (On Switch) Dual Channel 1 N.C./1 N.O.
Safety N.C. Safety N.O.
N.O.
Male Connector (On Switch) Note: Shorting plugs must be used on all unused ports for the system to operate.
Systems with Enunciation As shown at the bottom of page 15-3, system layouts with enunciation require patchcords, shorting plugs and distribution boxes, which allow for series wiring of the safety circuits while providing a separate circuit for enunciation. Distribution boxes are offered for these applications in two contact configurations: dual channel with 2 N.C. or single channel with 1 N.C. Each type also provides a N.O. auxiliary contact that is interfaced with the enunciation device to provide visual or audible alarm indication. In addition, LEDs on the distribution boxes assist in the
15-2
Single Channel 1 N.C./1 N.O.
Safety N.C. Aux N.O.
Connector Pin 1 (Brown) 3 (Blue) 2 (White) 4 (Black)
Device J11 J12 J23 J24
Connector Pin 1 Red/WhtTr 5 Red/BlackTr 2 Red 6 Red/BlueTr 3 Green 4 Red/YellowTr
Device J11 J12 J21 J22 J33 J34
N.C. N.O.
Male Connector (On Switch) Dual Channel 2 N.C./1 N.O.
Safety N.C.
Aux N.O.
Safety Connection Systems layouts are available with or without enunciation capabilities, allowing the user the option of direct feedback for the status of individual switches in the system. Enunciation systems utilize an auxiliary contact as input to tower lights, audible alarms, PLC input cards, etc.
Safety N.C.
troubleshooting of this system. See the wiring diagrams below for the associated connector pin configurations.
N.C. N.C. N.O.
Safety N.C. Male Connector (On Switch) Note: Shorting plugs must be used on all unused ports for the system to operate.
Installation Considerations Some important notes regarding Safety Connection Systems: • To help ensure that only authorized personnel can access the connections, safety distribution boxes should be mounted in the ‘guarded’ area as defined in the risk assessment for the application. • The safety connection system is designed to simplify the installation of safety devices—it does not control the safety circuit. • Since the safety circuits are wired in series, shorting plugs must be installed in all unused distribution box ports in order for the system to operate.
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Overview Example Layout without Enunciation Shorting Plug Safety Wired Splitter/T-Port
Patchcord
Safety Wired Distribution Box
Safety Relay or Safety PLC
Safety Switch with QD
Example Layout with Enunciation Shorting Plug
Safety Wired Distribution Box Safety Relay or Safety PLC
Patchcord
Safety Switch with QD
15-3
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Safety Wired T-Port, Dual-Channel, No Enunciation Specifications Body Connector Insert Receptacle Shell Contacts O–Ring Enclosure Rating Temperature
Red PUR PUR Epoxy coated zinc Brass, gold over nickel plating Viton IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-13°F to +221°F)
Features • T-Port/Splitter designed for use with dual-channel safety devices with 4-pin DC micro connector • PUR body offers good oil and chemical resistance • Ratcheting coupling nut for vibration resistance • For use in category 2 or 3 systems per EN 954-1
Product Selection Face View of Female (2)
Rating
Face View of Male (1)
Configuration
Wiring Female 1
Catalogue Number Female 2
1234
1234 898D-43LY-D4
2 Normally Closed 1234
1
2
4
3
10-30V DC 3A
2
1
3
4
Male 1 Female 1
1234
Female 2
1234
1 Normally Open 1 Normally Closed
898D-43KY-D4 1234 Male 1
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 51 (2.0) 19 (0.75) 35.5 (1.39)
21 (0.82)
M12 x 1
M12 x 1 6.35 (0.25) Dia. 1
2
4 Pole Male
3
4
4
3
17 (0.66)
1 4 Pole Females
Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
15-4
1
2
3
4
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Safety Wired Distribution Box, Dual-Channel N.C., No Enunciation Specifications Body Connector Insert Receptacle Shell Contacts Cable
Red PBT PBT Nickel-plated brass Gold-plated palladium/nickel Oil-resistant yellow PVC jacket, (3) 18AWG, (16) 22AWG conductors 9.8mm (0.39in) IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-13°F to +221°F)
Cable O.D. Enclosure Rating Temperature
Features • • • •
Prewired for dual-channel N.C. safety 4 or 8 safety wired 4-pin DC micro connectors 4-pin male DC micro pigtail main connection For use in category 2 or 3 systems per EN 954-1
Product Selection Face View of Female
Number of Ports
Face View of Male (1)
Rating
No LED
5
10-30V DC
3
4
Cable Length— m (inches)
Catalogue Number 898D-44LT-DM4
4
2
1
Illuminated
8
2
1
3
4
0.2 (8) 898D-48LT-DM4
Shorting Plug for unused ports Patchcord, straight to straight DC Micro, ⊗ = length in meters 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 standard
898D-41LU-DM 889D-F4ACDM-⊗
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 107 (4.21)
2
P2
P4
P2
P2
P4
P2
4
6
P4 P4
P2 P2
3
5
P4
P2
4.5 (0.17)
33 (1.29)
120 (4.72)
P4
P4
P2
7
P4
54 (2.12)
54 (2.12)
4.5 (0.17)
33 (1.29)
101.5 (3.99)
39 (1.53)
22.2 (0.87)
39 (1.53)
1
101.5 (3.99)
8
107 (4.21)
18 (0.7)
152 (5.98)
8-Port
4-Port Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
Wiring Diagrams
Port 4 1 4
5 3
Port 3 1
2 4
5 3
Port 2 1
2 4
5 3
Port 1 1
2 4
5
Pin No. Pin 3 Pin 1
Pin No. Wire Colour Pin 3 Blue Pin 1 Brown
Wire Colour Blue Brown
Port 8 1
2 4
3
Pin 2 Pin 4
White Black
5 3
Port 7 1
2 4
5 3
Port 2 1
2 4
5 3
Port 1 1
2 4
5
2
3
Pin 2 Pin 4
White Black
15-5
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Safety Wired Distribution Box, Dual-Channel N.C./N.O., No Enunciation Specifications Body Connector Insert Receptacle Shell Contacts Cable
Red PBT PBT Nickel-plated brass Gold-plated palladium/nickel Oil-resistant yellow PVC jacket, (3) 18AWG, (16) 22AWG conductors 9.8mm (0.39in) IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-13°F to +221°F)
Cable O.D. Enclosure Rating Temperature
Features • • • •
Prewired for dual-channel (one N.O./one N.C.) safety 4 or 8 safety-wired 4-pin DC micro connectors 4-pin male DC micro pigtail main connection For use in category 2 or 3 systems per EN 954-1
Product Selection Face View of Female
Number of Ports
Face View of Male (1)
Rating
No LED
5
10-30V DC
3
4
Cable Length— m (inches)
Catalogue Number 898D-44KT-DM4
4
2
1
Illuminated
8
2
1
3
4
0.2 (8) 898D-48KT-DM4
Shorting Plug for unused ports Patchcord, straight to straight DC Micro, ⊗ = length in meters 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 standard
898D-41KU-DM 889D-F4ACDM-⊗
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 107 (4.21)
33 (1.29) Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale. 120 (4.72)
4.5 (0.17)
2
P2
P4
P2
P2
P4
P2
4
6
P4
P2 P2
3
5
P4
P4
P2
P4
P4
P2
7
4.5 (0.17)
P4
54 (2.12)
54 (2.12)
33 (1.29)
101.5 (3.99)
39 (1.53)
22.2 (0.87)
39 (1.53)
1
101.5 (3.99)
8
107 (4.21)
18 (0.7)
152 (5.98)
Wiring Diagrams M/M Connector
M/M Connector
Pin 3 Blue Pin 1 Brown
Pin 3 Blue Pin 1 Brown Port 4 1 4
5 3
Port 3 1
2 4
5 3
Port 2 1
2 4
5 3
Port 8
Port 1 1
2 4
1 5
2
4
3
Pin 2 White Pin 4 Black
15-6
5 3
Port 7 1
2 4
5 3
Port 2 1
2 4
5 3
Port 1 1
2 4
5
2
3
Pin 4 Black Pin 2 White
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Safety Wired Distribution Box, Single-Channel N.C. plus Individual N.O. Enunciation Specifications Body Connector Insert Receptacle Shell Contacts Cable
Red PBT PBT Nickel-plated brass Gold-plated palladium/nickel Oil-resistant yellow PVC jacket, (12) 18AWG conductors 9.8mm (0.39in) IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-13°F to +221°F)
Cable O.D. Enclosure Rating Temperature
Features • • • •
Prewired for single-channel (N.C.) safety with enunciation 8 safety-wired 4-pin DC micro connectors Individual enunciation output for each port For use in category 2 or 3 systems per EN 954-1
Product Selection Face View of Female
Number of Ports
Illuminated
Rating
Face View of Male (1)
Cable Length— m (ft)
Catalogue Number
5 (16.4)
898D-P48JT-A5
10 (32.8)
898D-P48JT-A10
2
1
8
5 4
No LED
10-30V DC
Cable
3
Shorting Plug for unused ports Patchcord, straight to straight DC Micro, ⊗ = length in meters 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 standard
898D-41KU-DM 889D-F4ACDM-⊗
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) See 8-port dimensions on page 15-5.
Wiring Diagrams J1
J3
J5
J7
Cable Color Port (Contact) Yellow/Brown Port J1 (1) Brown/Green Port J2 (3)
Green LED Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Cable Color Port (Contact) Blue -V White Port J1(4) Yellow Port J3(4) Pink Port J5(4) Grey/Pink Port J7(4) Red/Blue Port J8(4) Red Port J6(4) Grey Port J4(4) Green Port J2(4) Brown +V
J2
J4
J6
J8
15-7
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Safety Wired Distribution Box, 8-Port, Dual-Channel (2 N.C.) plus Individual N.O. Enunciation Specifications Body Connector Insert Receptacle Shell Contacts Cable
Red PBT PBT Nickel-plated brass Gold-plated palladium/nickel Oil resistant yellow PVC jacket, (14) 18AWG conductors 9.8mm (0.39in) IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-13°F to +221°F)
Cable O.D. Enclosure Rating Temperature
Features • Prewired for dual-channel N.C. safety plus individual N.O. enunciation • Eight 6-pin AC micro connectors • 14-conductor main cable • Individual enunciation outputs or each port • For use in category 2 or 3 systems per EN 954-1
Product Selection Face View of Female (8) 5 4
Number of Ports
Illuminated
Rating
Face View of Male (1)
8
LEDs
10-30V DC
Cable
1 6
2
3
Cable Length— m (ft)
Catalogue Number
5 (16.4)
898R-P68MT-A5
10 (32.8)
898R-P68MT-A10
Shorting Plug for unused ports Patchcord, straight to straight DC Micro, ⊗ = length in meters 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 standard
898R-61MU-RM 889R-F6ECRM-⊗
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) See 8-port dimensions on page 15-5.
Wiring Diagrams J1
J3
J5
J7
Cable Color Port (Contact) Yellow/Brown Port J1 (5) Brown/Green Port J2 (1) White/Green Port J1 (6) White/Yellow Port J2 (6)
Green LED Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Red LED
Cable Color Port (Contact) N/Used Blue -V White Port J1(4) Yellow Port J3(4) Pink Port J5(4) Grey/Pink Port J7(4) Red/Blue Port J8(4) Red Port J6(4) Grey Port J4(4) Green Port J2(4) Brown +V
J2
15-8
J4
J6
J8
Connection Systems
Safety Connection Systems Safety Wired Shorting Plug Specifications Coupling Nut
4-pin: epoxy-coated zinc 6-pin: nickel-plated brass Red PVC PUR Brass, gold over nickel plating Viton IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-13°F to +221°F)
Connector Connector Insert Contacts O–Ring Enclosure Rating Temperature
Features • Shorting plug designed for use with safety-wired distribution boxes • PVC body offers good oil and chemical resistance • Ratcheting coupling nut on 4-pin models for vibration resistance
Product Selection Face View of Male
Rating
Configuration
Wiring
Catalogue Number
Pin 1 Pin 2 2 Normally Closed
Pin 3
898D-41LU-DM
Pin 4 2
1
3
4
Pin 1 1 Normally Closed, 1 Normally Open
10-30V DC 4A
Pin 2
NA 898D-41KU-DM
Pin 3 Pin 4
NA
Pin 1 Pin 2 1
5
2 Normally Closed, 1 Normally Open
2 6 4 3
Pin 3
NA
Pin 4
NA
898R-61MU-RM
Pin 5 Pin 6
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) M12 x 1 Thread (4-pin) 1/2in UNF thread (6-pin)
15 (0.57)
50 (1.97) Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
15-9
Connection Systems
Cordsets and Patchcords DC Micro Quick-Disconnect Cordset Specifications Coupling Nut Connector Contacts Cable O.D.
Epoxy-coated zinc Molded oil resistant PVC or PUR Gold over nickel-plated brass 4/c = 5mm (0.21in) 5/c = 6.5mm (0.25in) 7/c = 7.4mm (0.29in) 8/c = 7.4mm (0.29in) IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-4°F to +221°F): PVC -25°C to +125°C (-13°F to +256°F):TPR -20°C to +85°C (-4°F to +185°F): PUR
Enclosure Rating Temperature
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Features
42 (1.7)
• 4-, 5- or 8-pin configuration • Overmolded connector construction for application durability • Ratcheting coupling nut for vibration resistance
15 (0.57) Straight Female Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
Product Selection Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
1
2
4
3
Connector Style
1 Brown 2 White 3 Blue 4 Black 5 Grey
5 3
4
Straight
1
7 6 5
15-10
2
8 4
3
Wire Rating
Jacket Material
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
Yellow PVC
2 (6.5) 5 (16.4) 10 (32.8) 15 (49.2) 20 (65.6) 30 (98.4) 2 (6.5) 5 (16.4) 10 (32.8) 15 (49.2) 20 (65.6) 30 (98.4)
1 Brown 2 White 3 Blue 4 Black
2
1
Cable Wire Colour
1 Red 2 Blue 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Black 6 White 7 NA 8 Grey 1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Grey 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red
22AWG 300V 3A
Black TPR 24AWG 36V DC/ 30V AC 1.5A Black PUR
2 (6.5)
889D-F4AC-2 889D-F4AC-5 889D-F4AC-10 889D-F4AC-15 889D-F4AC-20 889D-F4AC-30 889D-F5AC-2 889D-F5AC-5 889D-F5AC-10 889D-F5AC-15 889D-F5AC-20 889D-F5AC-30 889D-F8AC-2
5 (16.4)
889D-F8AC-5
10 (32.8)
889D-F8AC-10
15 (49.2)
889D-F8AC-15
20 (65.6)
889D-F8AC-20
30 (98.4)
889D-F8AC-30
2 (6.5)
889D-F8AB-2
5 (16.4)
889D-F8AB-5
10 (32.8)
889D-F8AB-10
15 (49.2)
889D-F8AB-15
20 (65.6)
889D-F8AB-20
30 (98.4)
889D-F8AB-30
Connection Systems
Cordsets and Patchcords AC Micro (Dual Keyway) Style Quick-Disconnect Cordset Specifications Coupling Nut Connector Contacts Cable
Cable O.D. Enclosure Rating Temperature
Nickel-plated brass Molded oil-resistant PVC Gold-plated palladium/nickel Yellow oil-resistant PVC jacket, 22AWG conductors, 300V, UL recognized and CSA certified 7.4mm (0.29in) IP 67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-4°F to +221°F)
Features • UL recognized and CSA certified • Highly visible yellow PVC jacket offers good oil and chemical resistance
Product Selection Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
5 4
1 6 3
2
Cable
Connector Style
Straight
Wire Colour 1 Red/White Tr. 2 Red 3 Green 4 Red/Yellow Tr. 5 Red/Black Tr. 6 Red/Blue Tr.
Wire Rating
22AWG 300V 3A
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
2 (6.5)
889R-F6ACA-2
5 (16.4)
889R-F6ACA-5
10 (32.8)
889R-F6ACA-10
Approximately Dimensions—mm (inches) 42 (1.7)
15 (0.57) Straight Female Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
15-11
Connection Systems
Cordsets and Patchcords Mini and Mini-Plus Style Quick-Disconnect, 4-pin, 5-pin, 7-pin and 8-pin Cordset Specifications Coupling Nut Connector Contacts Approvals Cable Cable O.D.
Temperature
Epoxy-coated zinc Molded oil-resistant PVC Gold-plated palladium/nickel UL recognized and CSA certified Oil-resistant, yellow PVC jacket, 300V 4/c = 7.4mm (0.29in) 5/c = 7.4mm (0.29in) 7/c = 8.0mm (0.32in) 8/c = 9.0mm (0.35in) -20°C to +105°C (-4°F to +221°F)
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 55.8 (2.2)
Features • 4-, 5-, 7- and 8-pin configurations • One-piece molded body design for application durability • Highly visible yellow PVC jacket offers good oil and chemical resistance • Ratcheting coupling nut for vibration resistance
➊
Straight Female ➊ Mini: 25.4 (1.0) Dia. Mini-Plus: 28.4 (1.12) Dia. Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
Product Selection—Mini Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
Connector Style
Cable Body Size
Straight 4
1
3
2
Wire Colour 1 Black 2 Blue 3 Brown 4 White
Right Angle Mini
1 Black 2 Blue 3 Grey 4 Brown 5 White
Straight 1
5
2
4 3
6 5
Right Angle
1 Black 2 White 3 Blue 4 Brown 5 Grey 6 Yellow 7 Green
1 7
4
2 3 Straight
6 5 4
15-12
7 8
1 2 3
Wire Rating
Mini-Plus
1 Red 2 White 3 Blue 4 Brown 5 Grey 6 Yellow 7 Green 8 Pink
18AWG 300V 3A
(5) 18AWG (2) 20AWG 300V 3A
18AWG 300V 3A
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
1.8 (6) 3.7 (12) 6.1 (20) 1.8 (6) 3.7 (12) 6.1 (20) 1.8 (6) 3.7 (12) 6.1 (20) 1.8 (6) 3.7 (12) 6.1 (20) 2 (6.5) 5 (16.4) 10 (32.8) 15 (49.2) 20 (65.6)
889N-F4AE-6F 889N-F4AE-12F 889N-F4AE-20F 889N-R4AE-6F 889N-R4AE-12F 889N-R4AE-20F 889N-F5AE-6F 889N-F5AE-12F 889N-F5AE-20F 889N-R5AE-6F 889N-R5AE-12F 889N-R5AE-20F 889N-F7AG-2 889N-F7AG-5 889N-F7AG-10 889N-F7AG-15 889N-F7AG-20
30 (98.4)
889N-F7AG-30
2 (6.5)
889N-F8AE-2
5 (16.4)
889N-F8AE-5
10 (32.8)
889N-F8AE-10
15 (49.2)
889N-F8AE-15
20 (65.6)
889N-F8AE-20
30 (98.4)
889N-F8AE-30
Connection Systems
Cordsets and Patchcords M23 Style, 12-Pin Cordset Specifications Coupling Nut Connector Contacts Cable Cable Approvals Cable O.D. Enclosure Rating Temperature
Nickel–plated brass Molded oil–resistant PUR Gold–plated palladium/nickel Oil resistant yellow PVC jacket, 18AWG conductors, 60V UL recognized and CSA certified 9/c: 9.3mm (0.37) 12/c: 10mm (0.41in) IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +80°C (-4°F to +176°F)
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 85 (3.35)
Features • 12-pin configuration for SafeShield light curtains and other applications • 12 conductor and 9 conductor versions • Highly visible yellow PVC jacket offers good oil and chemical resistance
Female Connector
9
1 2
10 11
3 4
Connector Style
8 12 7 6 5
26.2 (1.03) Dia. M23 x 1 Internal Threads Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
Product Selection Face View of Female
Length
Straight
Cable Wire Colour 1 Brown 2 Blue 3 Grey 4 Pink 5 Red 6 Yellow 7 White 8 Red/Blue 9 Black 10 Violet 11 Grey/Pink 12 Green 1 Brown 2 NA 3 Blue 4 White 5 NA 6 Green 7 Yellow 8 Grey 9 Pink 10 Red 11 NA 12 Green/Yellow
Wire Rating
18AWG 60V 4A
Length—m (ft)
Catalogue Number
2 (6.5)
889M-F12AH-2
5 (16.4)
889M-F12AH-5
10 (32.8)
889M-F12AH-10
15 (49.2)
889M-F12AH-15
20 (65.6)
889M-F12AH-20
30 (98.4)
889M-F12AH-30
2 (6.5)
889M-F12X9AE-2
5 (16.4)
889M-F12X9AE-5
10 (32.8)
889M-F12X9AE-10
15 (49.2)
889M-F12X9AE-15
20 (65.6)
889M-F12X9AE-20
30 (98.4)
889M-F12X9AE-30
15-13
Connection Systems
Cordsets and Patchcords M23 Style, Male to Female, 12-Pin Patchcord Specifications Coupling Nut Connector Contacts Cable
Nickel-plated brass Molded oil-resistant PUR Gold-plated palladium/nickel Oil resistant yellow PVC jacket, 18AWG conductors, 60V UL recognized and CSA certified 10mm (0.41in) IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +80°C (-4°F to +176°F)
Cable Approvals Cable O.D. Enclosure Rating Temperature
Features • 12-pin configuration for SafeShield light curtains and other applications • Highly visible yellow PVC jacket offers good oil and chemical resistance
Product Selection Female Connector (Sensor End) Face View of Female
Connector Style
Cable Wire Rating
Male Connector
Length—m (ft)
Face View of Male
Connector Style
0.3 (1) 9
1 2
10
8 12 7
11
3 4
Straight
6
18AWG 60V 4A
5
0.6 (2) 1 (3.3) 2 (6.5)
9
8 7
12
1 10 2
11
6 5
889M-F12AHMU-0M6 Straight
3
889M-F12AHMU-3
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Length
85 (3.35)
26.2 (1.03) Dia. Male Plug M23 x 1 Internal Threads Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
15-14
889M-F12AHMU-1 889M-F12AHMU-2
4
3 (9.8)
85 (3.35)
Catalogue Number 889M-F12AHMU-0M3
26.2 (1.03) Dia. Female Plug
Connection Systems
Field Attachable Connectors Screw Terminal Connector, DC Micro Style Specifications Coupling Nut Connector Shell Contacts Maximum Wire Size
Nickel-plated brass Nylon Gold-plated palladium nickel 18AWG (0.75mm2) NEMA 6; IP67 (IEC 529) -40°C to 90°C (-40°F to 194°F)
Enclosure Temperature
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches)
Rear Nut 20 (0.75)
Features • • • • •
Field installable 4- or 5-pin DC micro style Straight or right angle versions Screw terminals provide simple and secure installation Allows easy modification of existing cable installations
9 (0.38)
20.06 (0.79)
20.06 (0.79) 54 (2.1)
Straight Female
51 (2.0)
Straight Male
35 (1.4)
32 (1.3) 20.06 (0.79)
20.06 (0.79)
Right Angle Female
Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
Product Selection Style
Cable Diameter mm (inches)
Face View Rating
Female
Catalogue Number Male
4.0-6.0 (0.16-0.24) Straight 6.0-8.0 (0.24-0.32) Right Angle
4.0-6.0 (0.16-0.24)
Straight
1
2
2
1
4
3
3
4
250V 4A 1
6.0-8.0 (0.24-0.32) Right Angle
Right Angle Male
2
2
3
3
5 4
5
Female
Male
871A-TS4-D
871A-TS4-DM
871A-TS4-D1
871A-TS4-DM1
871A-TR4-D
871A-TR4-DM
871A-TS5-D1
871A-TS5-DM1
871A-TR5-D1
871A-TR5-DM1
1 4
15-15
Connection Systems
Field Attachable Connectors Insulation Displacement Connector, DC Micro Style Specifications Coupling Nut Connector Shell Connector Body Field Contacts Enclosure Operating Temperature Installation Temperature Maximum IDC Installations Wire Outside Diameter Wire Size
Nickel-plated brass Nickel-plated brass Hytrel Htr 8068 Gold-plated palladium nickel NEMA 6; IP67 -25°C to 85°C (-13°F to 185°F) -5°C to 50°C (23°F to 185°F) 10 1.2mm-1.6mm (0.047in-0.063in) 24AWG-20AWG (min. individual strand size = 38AWG)
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Features • • • • •
Field installable with no hand tools required 4-pin DC micro style Straight or right angle, male or female Allows easy modification of existing cable installations Insulation displacement technology for secure and reliable installation
15-20 (0.60-0.75) 51.6 (2.03)
54.8 (2.16)
Straight Female
Straight Male 14.7 (0.58)
36.5 (1.44)
40 (1.57)
39.4 (0.55)
39.4 (0.55)
Right Angle Female
Right Angle Male
Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
Product Selection Style
Cable Diameter— mm (inches)
Face View Rating
Female
Catalogue Number Male
Straight 4.0 to 5.1 (0.16 to 0.20) Right Angle
15-16
32V 4A
1
2
2
1
4
3
3
4
Female
Male
889D-F4DC-H
889D-M4DC-H
889D-R4DC-H
889D-E4DC-H
Connection Systems
Field Attachable Connectors Solder Connector M23 Style Specifications Coupling Nut Connector Shell Contacts Maximum Wire Size
Nickel-plated brass Nickel-plated brass Gold-plated palladium/nickel 18AWG (1.0mm2) IP65 -20°C to +105°C (-4°F to +221°F)
Enclosure Rating Temperature
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inch) 49 (1.93)
48 (1.89)
20 (0.79) 26 (1.02) Dia.
Features • Straight or right angle, male or female • 12-pin M23 style for standard connectivity • Allows modification of existing cable installations and field creation of special cable lengths • Solder connector for secure and reliable installation
20 (0.79) (Across Flats)
56.5 (2.22)
24 (0.94) (Across Flats) 20 (0.79) (Across Flats) 20 (0.79)
Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
Product Selection Connector Style
Cable Diameter— mm (inches)
Face View Rating
Catalogue Number
Female
Male
Straight 10 to 14 (0.39 to 0.55) Right Angle
60V 4A
9
1 2
10
12 7
11
3 4
6 5
9
8
8 7
12 5
Male
889M-F12AH-T
889M-M12AH-T
889M-R12AH-T
889M-E12AH-T
1 10 2
11
6
Female
3 4
15-17
Connection Systems
Receptacles DC Micro Male, 4-Pin, 5-Pin or 8-Pin Specifications Receptacle Shell Connector Insert Contacts
Nickel-plated brass Nylon Machined brass with gold over nickel plating Oil resistant PVC, 22AWG stranded copper, 300V -20°C to +105°C (-4°F to +221°F)
Wire insulation Temperature
Features • Male bulkhead receptacles • 4-, 5- or 8-pin configuration • M16, M20 or 1/2in -14NPT mounting threads
Product Selection Face View of Male
2
1
3
4
2 3
5
1 4
2 1 3 5 4 6 7 8
Wire Colour 1 Brown 2 White 3 Blue 4 Black 1 Brown 2 White 3 Blue 4 Black 5 Grey 1 Red 2 Blue 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Black 6 White 7 N/C 8 Grey
Wire Rating
Length—m (ft)
Panel Mount Threads
Drawing
Catalogue Number
M16 x 1
A
888D-M4AC9-4N
M20 x 1.5
B
888D-M4AC8-4N
1/2in-14NPT
C
888D-M4AC1-1F
M16 x 1
A
888D-M5AC9-4N
M20 x 1.5
B
888D-M5AC8-4N
1/2in-14NPT
C
888D-M5AC1-1F
M16 x 1
A
888D-M8AC9-4N
M20 x 1.5
B
888D-M8AC8-4N
0.1 (0.3) 22AWG 300V 3A
0.3 (1) 0.1 (0.3) 0.3 (1)
24AWG 36V DC/30V AC 1.5A
0.1 (0.3)
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inch)
18 (0.71) 101.6 (4) Ref
11.1 (0.44)
101.6 (4) Ref
19.8 (0.78)
Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
15-18
1/2in NPT threads
O-Ring
12.7 (0.5) 19.5 (0.77)
304.8 (12) Ref
12.7 (0.5) 25.4 (1.0)
23.8 (0.94)
M20 threads
22.2 (0.88)
O-Ring
22.2 (0.88) 23.8 (0.94)
M16 threads
Connection Systems
Receptacles AC Micro Male, 6-Pin Specifications Receptacle Shell Connector Insert Contacts
Nickel-plated brass Nylon Machined brass with gold over nickel plating Oil resistant PVC, 22AWG stranded copper, 300V -20°C to +105°C (-4°F to +221°F)
Wire insulation Temperature
Features • Male bulkhead receptacles • 6-pin configuration • M16, M20 or 1/2in -14NPT mounting threads
Product Selection Face View of Male
1
5
2 6 4 3
Wire Colour 1 Red/White Tr 2 Red 3 Green 4 Red/Yellow Tr 5 Red/Black Tr 6 Red/Blue Tr
Wire Rating
Length—m (ft)
22AWG 300V 3A
0.1 (0.3)
Panel Mount Threads
Drawing
Catalogue Number
M16 x 1
A
888R-M6AC9-4N
M20 x 1.5
B
888R-M6AC8-4N
1/2in-14NPT
C
888R-M6AC1-1F
0.3 (1)
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inch) O-Ring
11.1 (0.44)
22.2 (0.88) 23.8 (0.94)
101.6 (4) Ref
1/2in NPT threads
101.6 (4) Ref
19.8 (0.78)
12.7 (0.5) 19.5 (0.77)
304.8 (12) Ref
23.8 (0.94)
M20 threads
22.2 (0.88)
O-Ring
18 (0.71)
M16 threads
11.1 (0.44) 23.8 (0.94)
Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
15-19
Connection Systems
Receptacles M23 Male, Panel Mount Specifications Receptacle Shell Connector Insert Contacts
Nickel-plated brass Nylon Machine brass with gold over nickel plating Oil resistant PVC, 18AWG stranded copper, 300V UL recognized and CSA certified IP67, NEMA 6P -20°C to +105°C (-4°F to +221°F)
Wire Insulation Cable Approvals Enclosure Rating Temperature
Dimensions—mm (inches) 29.5 (1.16)
Features • • • •
Length
23.5 (0.93)
18AWG conductors for ease of wiring 12-pin configuration provides standard connectivity M20 x 1.5 threads for convenient mounting to safety switches Mounting nut and rubber sealing washer included M23 x 1
M20 x 1.5 Panel Nut and Gasket Included
M20 x 1.5
Dimensions are approximate. Illustrations are not drawn to scale.
Product Selection Cable Face View of Male
9
8 7
12 11
6 5
15-20
1 10 2 3 4
Wire Colour 1 Brown 2 Blue 3 Grey 4 Pink 5 Red 6 Yellow 7 White 8 Red/Blue 9 Black 10 Violet 11 Grey/Pink 12 Green 1 Brown 2 NA 3 Blue 4 White 5 NA 6 Green 7 Yellow 8 Grey 9 Pink 10 Red 11 NA 12 Green/Yellow
Wire Rating
Length—m (ft)
Panel Mount Threads
Catalogue Number
888M-M12AE-0F5
18AWG 60V 4A
0.15 (0.5)
M20 x 1.5
888M-M12X9AE-0F5
Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches Explosion Proof Switches Ex Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Rotary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Galvanic Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Pneumatic Switches Lifeline 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8 Rotacam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches
Explosion Proof Ex Range Specifications
NRTL/C
Description Guardmaster Ex Range The Guardmaster Ex range of safety switches are specifically designed for potentially explosive atmospheres. They retain the safety features and operating principles of the conventional Guardmaster switches. They incorporate a sealed flameproof contact block, making them suitable for use in European Zone 1 and Zone 2 environments. In the US and Canada, these products can be used in areas classified as Class 1, Division 2 in Groups A (acetylene), B (hydrogen), C (ethylene) and D (propane). All the Guardmaster Ex switches conform to the exacting standards required by the European harmonized standards. These switches carry the classification EExd IIC T6 Baseefa. EEx equipment conforms to types of protection standardised by CENELEC (European standards), EN50014 and EN50018 respectively and BS5501 parts 1-V. The d suffix indicates that the contact block in the switch is a flameproof enclosure and is designed to ensure that if an internal explosion occurs it will be contained with the enclosure. The designation II indicates use in surface industries and c refers to the group of gases for which the switches are suitable. The designation T represents the surface temperature classification of the switch. These switches have been tested with an ambient temperature of 60°C as opposed to the normal test limit of only 40°C, allowing them to be used in gases having a low flash point. It should be noted that these groups refer to the explosion-proof qualities of the switches and not corrosion-resistance characteristics. Special precautions may be required to protect the vulnerable parts such as PVC-covered cables against attack by certain corrosive elements and physical damage.
Features • • • •
For use in potentially explosive atmospheres Positive mode action, flameproof contact block Suitable for use in European Zone 1 and 2 environments US and Canada: Class 1, Division 2 in Groups A, B, C and D
All switches excluding Ferrogard GS2 Contact block—electrical specifications Classification EExd IIc T6 Class 1, Div 2, Groups A, B, C and D Contact arrangement 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 2 N.C. Protection P66 Rated voltage 250V AC and 250V DC Rated current 5A AC and 0.25A DC AC ratings 250V 125V Resistive 6A 6A Inductive 2.5A 3A DC ratings 250V 125V 75V 30V Resistive 0.25A 0.5A 1A 7A Inductive 0.1A 0.2A 1A 5A Contact block—technical specifications Operating force 1.6N - 0.4/ - 0.2N Release force 0.4N Pre-travel 0.8mm Over-travel 0.6mm Return travel 1.1mm Differential travel 0.5mm Release travel 0.2mm Positive break travel 0.4mm Repeatability +0.01mm Minimum plunger operating 1 mm/min. speed Maximum switching rate 3000/h Mechanical life 2 x 106 Electrical life Ambient temperature Electrical connection
Dependent on loading -25°C to +70°C (-10°F to 284°F) Potted in leads. Flexible 4 x 0.75mm2, 2m long
Ferrogard GS2 Classification Contact arrangement Protection Rated voltage Rated current Max VA
Safety contact operating distance Close time Drop out time Bounce time Shock tolerance Vibration tolerance Initial resistance Mechanical life Electrical life Ambient temperature Housing Cable
EExd IIC T6 Baseefa Not suitable for Group 1 gases 1N&C IP68 250V AC 2A 100 at 50V 200 at 110V 500 at 250V Make 15mm, break 26mm 3.0ms 2.1ms 0.7ms <50G 7-15G at 10-2000Hz 0.07Ω (excluding cable) 100 x 106 5 x 106 -10°C to +40°C (14°F to 104°F) Brass or stainless steel 3m of Termorad
Note: For all other specifications and dimensions see relevant standard switch.
16-2
Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches
Explosion Proof Ex Range Product Selection Switch
Description
Ex Trojan 5 Explosion proof tongue operated safety interlock switch.
Ex Ferrogard GS2 Explosion proof magnetically actuated, noncontact safety interlock switches.
Ex Lifeline 4 Explosion proof, cable and push button actuated Emergency Stop switch.
Ex Rotacam Explosion proof, hinge actuated safety interlock switch.
Type
Trojan 5-EX
Contacts
Cable m (ft) 2 (6.5) 6 (19.7)
Catalogue Number 440K-H11145 440K-H11160
15 (39.2)
440K-H11161
2 N.C.
Ferrogard GS2-EX (stainless steel) Ferrogard GS2-EX (brass)
3 (9.8) 1 N.C.
Ferrogard GS2-EX (stainless steel)
440N-H02047
5 (32.8)
440N-H02046 440N-H02086
10 (32.8)
440N-H02087
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
440E-H13046
2 N.C.
440E-H13069
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
440H-H03077
2 N.C.
440H-H03100
Lifeline 4-EX
Rotocam-HS-2-EX
2 (6.5) 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Centurion-EX (left hand version) 2 N.C. Ex Centurion 1 N.C. & 1 Explosion proof, manually operated N.O. time delay, bolt interlock switch. Centurion-EX (right hand version) 2 N.C.
Ex Telescopic Explosion proof telescopic (antenna) safety trip switch.
440K-H04035 440K-H04037 440K-H04036 440K-H04038
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
440E-H05004
2 N.C.
440E-H05019
Telescopic CP15-EX
16-3
Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches
Explosion-Proof Rotary Switch Specifications Standards Approvals
Description The explosion proof rotary switches are used for electrical isolation of machinery to enable safe access. This switch can be mounted within the hazardous location.
Features • • • •
Conforms to EExd IIB T6 Zone 1 and 2 hazardous locations 4 N.O. or 2 N.C. + 2 N.O. Direct opening operation
16-4
No & Type of Conduit Entries Rtd. Insulation Voltage (Ui) Rtd. Impulse withstand Voltage (Uimp) Rtd Uninterrupted Current (lu) IEC/EN/VDE/UL/CSA Rtd. Operational Voltage (Ue) IEC/EN/SEV/VDE/UL/CSA Main Switch Isol. Voltage Rtd. Operational Current (le) AC-21A IEC/EN/VDE AC-1 SEV Rtd. Op.Power at 50/ 60 Hz AC-23A IEC/EN/VDE 3 phase 220-240V 3 pole 380-440V 500-690V AC-3A IEC/EN/VDE 3 phase 220-240V 3 pole 380-440V 500-690V DOL-Rating UL/CSA 3 phase 140V 3 pole 240V 480V 600V Rated Breaking Capacity AC-23/AC-3 220-240V Motor Switch 380-440V 500-690V Maximum Fuse Size (Gl) Rated fuse Short Circuit Current Terminal Cross Section Single/Multiple Wire Minimum mm2 Maximum mm2 Fine Strand Wire with Sleeve Minimum mm2 Maximum mm2 American Wire Gauge (AWG) Enclosure IP Rating Weight Electrical Operations Operating Temperature Mechanical Operations Humidity
EN50014 – 018 CE marked for all applicable directives 4 x M20 (2 Plugged) 690 6kv 40A 600V 690V 40A
7.5kw 15kw 15kw 7.5kw 11kw 11kw 3kw 7.5kw 15kw 15kw 7.5kw 15kw 15kw 50A 500A
1 16 1 16 6 IP66 10.5kg (23.2lbs) 100,000 -20°C to +40°C (-4°F to 104°F) 100,000 25% – 95%
Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches
Explosion-Proof Rotary Switch Product Selection Type
Current
Contacts
Catalogue Number
4 N.O.
440T-MERSE10 ➊
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
440T-MERSE12 ➊
24 A
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-7 for code selection.
Accessories Description Key Code Barrel Dust Cap
Page Number 5-33 5-33 5-33
Catalogue Number 440T-AKEYE10⊗ 440T-ASCBE11 ➊ 440T-ASFC10⊗
➊ Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 5-7 for code selection. ⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See page 5-7 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) 195 (7.7)
145 (5.7)
130 (5.1) ctrs
156 (6.1)
178 (7.0) Cable Entry 2 x 20mm (0.78) Conduit
Typical Wiring Diagrams Diagrams shown are key free
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
440T-MERSE10
440T-MERSE10
16-5
Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches
Galvanic Isolator Specifications Standards
APPROVED
Description The galvanic isolators are active protective interface assemblies to isolate intrinsically safe circuits from non intrinsically safe circuits to worldwide standards. Galvanic isolators offer economical solutions for instrumentation and control systems in hazardous locations. Unlike zener diode barriers, galvanic isolators do not require grounding. Allen-Bradley’s galvanic isolators provide 1500 volt isolation between hazardous area and non hazardous area terminals and 500 volt isolation between input/output and external power terminals. DIP switches provide convenient programming for output or diagnostic functions. Multiple LEDs allow easy visual indication of module and circuit status. Wiring for intrinsically safe systems must be identified as such through the use of light blue jacketing and/or through appropriate labels. Such labels are required by NEC Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP-12.6 to be placed at no more than 25 foot intervals. When installing intrinsically safe equipment the user should refer to all relevant national standards and/or those standards set forth by the “authority having jurisdiction” at the installation site.
Features • • • • • •
Galvanic isolation input-to-output Reverse polarity protected 500V isolation between input and output No separate intrinsically safe grounding required 18mm (0.71in) wide housing 35mm Din rail mount
16-6
EN50020-EN50039, FM3610, CSA22.2 No.157, UL913 Approvals FM, CSA, UL, CENELEC (PTB) approved and CE marked for all applicable directives Power Supply 32mA @ 18-35V DC Number of Inputs 2 Signal Range 8V @ 8.2mA Input Switching Current On > 2.1mA Off < 1.2mA Input Resistance 1000 ohms Isolation Protection 1500V Output 2 x SPST Output Contact Rating 2A/250V AC, 2A/120V AC, 2A/24V DC Switching Frequency 15Hz Switch Delay On to Off 15ms Off to On 15ms Indication LEDs Green = Power Yellow = Output Closed Red = Wire Break/Short Operating Temperature -20°C to +65°C (-4°F to +149°F) Humidity 95% RH Housing Material Polyamide 6GF Enclosure Protection IP30 Mounting 35mm Din rail Conductor Size 0.2-2.5mm2 (24-14AWG) Weight Mechanical Contact Life
120g (0.26lbs) 20,000,000 cycles
Entity Table Groups A, B C, D, E,F, G
Voc
Isc
10.6V
29.7mA
Ca 2.5uF 15uF
La 40mH 150mH
Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches
Galvanic Isolator Product Selection Product Galvanic Isolator
External Power 32mA @ 18-35VDC
Output type SPST 2A @ 250V AC
Catalog Number 897H-G231
Approximate Dimensions—mm (inches) Block Diagram + -
18 (0.71)
1
7
114 (4.5)
5 2
9 8
3
80 (3.15)
DIP Switch Settings
1234 1111
Typical Wiring Diagrams Hazardous Location U.S. Class I, II, III, Div 1, 2 European Zone 0, 1, 2, EExia IIB
Non hazardous Location
24V DC K1 (Aux) Start K2 (Aux)
See Entity Parameters for 897H for Groups Stop
Bulletin 800E Latching E-stop
440K Tongue Interlock
Galvanic Isolator 897H-G231 L+
L1 L2 L3 Reset
A1
1
Input
13 23 33
MC
7 9
K1
5 2
Minotaur Dual Channel Safety Relay
8
Open
6.8K Resistors 1492-WD4RA682
Safety Gate
DIP Switch Settings 1234 1 1 1 1 L-
3
K2 A2
Input 14 24 34
K1 K1 Ground
440F MatGuard Pressure Sensitive Safety Mat
MC
M
7 9 8
6.8K Resistor 1492-WD4RA682 440F GuardEdge Pressure Sensitive Sensing Edge
7 9 8
16-7
Hazardous Location & Pneumatic Switches
Pneumatic Lifeline 4 and Rotacam Specifications Standards Pneumatic Rotacam Pneumatic Lifeline 4
Fluid used Pressure range Passage diameter Connection Flow
Description Pneumatic Rotacam Based on the highly successful conventional Rotacam the Pneumatic Rotacam has the same design features except that it gives positive acting isolation of a machine’s compressed air supply instead of an electrical power source. The switch is mounted at the hinge point of the guard door. The bored stainless steel operating shaft is mounted in a sealed bearing which is so robust that it enables the switch itself to be used as the hinge pin if necessary. The pneumatic valve specifications are shown below. The external switch dimensions and operating shaft specifications are the same as the conventional Rotacam. Note: The Pneumatic Rotacam does not have the adjustable cam used with the standard Rotacam.
Pneumatic Lifeline 4 Based on the conventional Lifeline 4 this rope operated pneumatic safety switch can be used for guarding exposed pneumatic machinery and conveyor equipment. The Pneumatic Lifeline 4 is immune to machine vibration thus overcoming the problem of nuisance tripping. The pneumatic valve specifications are shown below. The external switch dimensions are the same as the conventional Lifeline 4.
Features Pneumatic Rotacam • Can be used as a hinge pin with light and medium weight guard doors on pneumatic machinery • Isolates pneumatic power within 5° of guard movement Pneumatic Lifeline 4 • Switches pneumatic power with up to 75 meter span • Lid mounted emergency stop button, designed to EN418 • Switch lockout with indication of rope pulled and rope slack
16-8
Mechanical endurance Temperature
IEC 60947-5-1, ISO 14119, ISOTR 12100, IEC 60204-1 IEC 60947-5-1, ISO 14119, ISOTR 12100, IEC 60204-1, ISO 13850 Compressed air or neutral gas 2 to 8 bars 2.7mm Push in fittings for standard 4mm Ø nylon tube, internal Ø 2.5mm 138 NL/min. (ie., number of liters of air at normal atmospheric pressure obtained with the output open to atmosphere and the supply pressure at 4 bars). >1 x 106 10°C to +60°C (+50°F to 140°C)
Note: For other specifications and dimensions see relevant specifications on standard product
Product Selection Type
Catalog Number
Rotacam Lifeline 4 Note: See standard Lifeline 4 for installation kits, etc.
440H-P03035 440E-P13045
MobileView Guard Terminal Interfaces G750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
MobileView Guard
G750 • Optional hand operators ♦ Lighted push-button, keyswitch and handwheel • Additional hardware support ♦ PCMCIA Type I, II, III ♦ IrDA port for keyboard and/or printer interface
Specifications Processor Operating System Memory Keypad
Description The MobileView Guard Terminal (G750) interface is a portable, industrially hardened, Windows CE Platform. It is designed for realtime machine interface and workplace safety. The mobility, integrated architecture and safety features work to reduce total lower cost of ownership through faster set-up and change-over times. The safety features include on-board emergency stop pushbutton and three-position enable switches that give users the mobility to access applications in gated or safety critical areas.
Operator Input/ Output Options
The G750 uses a high-performance Intel StrongARM processor and provides an Ethernet interface. This terminal is ergonomically designed for either left- or right-handed use. It is constructed with a double shell, designed to survive bumps and drops, and give protection against harsh environments. Functionality is easily expanded using PC cards Type I, II, and III. The G750 easily adapts to specific applications using configurable operating and control elements.
Weight (Approx.) Base Communications Supply Voltage Range Typical Input Current Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Protection Ratings
Features • Mobile ♦ Portable, hand-held device with cable lengths of 5, 10, 15 and 20 meters ♦ Ethernet enabled ♦ Ergonomically designed: Left or right hand operation and cable connections ♦ Light weight: less than 4 lbs ♦ Compact: 11.42in diameter x 5.12in depth ♦ Rugged: Shock resistant twin shell design with IP54 rating • Safety System Compliance ♦ 2-channel, 3-position enable switching per EN60204-1 for safety category 3 per EN 954-1:1996 ♦ Optional 2-channel E-stop per EN4I8 for safety categories 0 or 1 per EN954-1 ♦ Designed to integrate with Rockwell Automation Guard Master products • Multi-functional Windows CE Platform ♦ Thin client architecture support ♦ Custom Windows CE application support ♦ 16MB DRAM/32MB FLASH or 64MB DRAM/64MB FLASH Options • Outstanding Interface into the Process ♦ 7.7in VGA Display with 256 colours ♦ Analog resistive touch screen ♦ Tactile feedback keypad with numeric, function and navigational keys and an on-screen alpha-numeric keyboard
17-2
Display Touch Screen Dimensions
InTel StrongARM-SA1110/206mHz Microsoft Windows CE 16MB DRAM/32MB Flash or 64MB DRAM/64MB Flash (model dependent) Stainless steel dome membrane switches with tactile feedback; F1-F12 function keys, numeric keys, navigation keys, on-screen keyboard Safety 3-position enable switches and E-stop, handwheel, potentiometer, keyswitch, normally-open push-button with LEDs, IrDA keyboard/printer interface, and PC card interface 7.7 inch VGA passive matrix color LCD; 640x480, 256 colors Analog resistive Diameter: 290mm (11.42 in) Depth without handle: 80mm (3.15 in) Depth with handle: 130mm (5.12 in) 1.55 kg (3.4 lbs) w/o options 10Base-T Ethernet 18 to 32V DC (24V DC nominal) 300Ma at 24V DC 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) 5 to 95% non condensing IP54
Portable, Handheld Device Standard and Agency Certifications EN 614-1, EN894-1, -2, -3, EN ISO General 29241-10, CSA C22.2 NO 14, UL 508 Electromagnetic Emission/ EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2 Immunity General Safety EN61131-1, -2, EN 50178 Machining Centers prEN 1921, prEN 12417 Safety of Machinery EN 954-1, EN 292-1, -2, EN 418, EN Standards 60204-1 EN 775, ANSI/RIA, R15.06, R15,02/1, Robot Systems CAN/CSA-Z434-94, ISO 10218
MobileView Guard
G750 Product Selection Description
MobileView Guard G750
Memory/Size 16MB DRAM/32MB Flash 16MB DRAM/32MB Flash
Options 3-position Enable Switch 3-position Enable Switch, E-Stop 3-position Enable Switch, E-Stop, Handwheel, 64MB DRAM/64MB Flash Potentiometer, Keyswitch, 2 Normally-Open Pushbutton with Indicator LEDs, PC Card Slot
MobileView Guard Junction Box Junction Box Cable
2m (6.5ft) 5m (16.4ft) 10m (32.8ft) 15m (49.2ft) 20m (65.6ft)
MobileView Guard Cable MobileView Guard Mounting Bracket MobileView Guard Serial Download Cable
Catalogue Number 2727-G7P20D1P4 2727-G7P20D1P5 2727-G7P20D1Q6 2727-MRJB1 2727-MREX1 2727-MRT5 2727-MRT10 2727-MRT15 2727-MRT20 2727-MRMB1
Connects to Junction Box Connects to Junction Box cable Connects to Junction Box cable Connects to Junction Box cable Connects to Junction Box cable
4m (13.1ft)
2727-MRC1
MobileView System Configuration 24V DC Power MobileView Junction Box
Safety Equipment Connections for MobileView G750 only 5, 10, 15, 20m Mobile Connection Cable Junction Box Cable
G750
Ethernet Connection Local or remote Windows NT or 2000 Server
Connection Example with a Control Relay MobileView (2 enabling switches with 3 positions & 2 circuits each 1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1
1 2 3
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1
ZT1 L
ZT1 R
ZT2 L
ZT2 R
Evaluation electronics Circuit 1 Circuit 2
7
8
9
10
MobileView Connection and Junction Box Cables MobileView Junction Box Connector
+24V DC GND
Enabling contacts for dangerous movements K3 K3
K3
K4
K4 K4
A1
A2 S13 S14 S23 S24
SUPPLY CH1
X1
X2
13
CH2 FEEDBACK
14
23
24
31
32
OUTPUTS
AB GuardMaster Minotaur MSR14T
17-3
MobileView Guard
Notes
17-4
Safeguarding Applications Notes for Use with Application Circuit Examples . . 18-2 Light Curtains POC, 440L-M8200, Bulletin 100S, PLC, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . 18-3 POC, 440L-M8100 (Muting), Dual Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4 POC, Bulletin 800, MSR22LM (Muting), Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5 POC, Bulletin 800, MSR22LM (PSDI), Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6 AAC, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Tongue Interlocks Trojan 5, Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . 18-8 Trojan 5, Bulletin 800, MSR9T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . 18-9 Trojan 5, MSR10RD, Bulletin 100S, PLC, Dual Channel . . . . . . 18-10 Interlocks, Bulletin 800, MSR18T, PLC, Dual Channel. . . . . . . . 18-11
Guardlocking Interlock TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, PLC, Dual Channel . . . . 18-12 TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 18-13 TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, CU1, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel. . . . 18-14 TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, CU2, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel. . . . 18-15 TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, MSR200, Bulletin 100S, Bulletin 160, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16 Atlas 5 (Auto Release), Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17 Atlas 5 (Manual Release), Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18 Atlas 5, Bulletin 800, CU2, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Non Contact Interlocks Ferrogard 6, Bulletin 800, MSR5T, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20 Ferrogard 6, Bulletin 800, MSR8T, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Position (Limit) Interlocks 2 x Imp, Bulletin 800, MSR9T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . 18-22 3 x Imp, Bulletin 800, MSR9R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel. . 18-23 3 x Imp, Bulletin 800, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel. . 18-24
Cable Pull E-Stop Lifeline 4, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25
Two-Hand Control 800Z, MSR18T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-26 Mechanical Buttons, MSR7R, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . 18-27
Safeguarding Applications
Notes for Use with Application Circuit Examples Note 1 In the following circuits the type of Allen-Bradley/Guardmaster device is shown as an example to illustrate the circuit principle. For specific applications the choice of device type should be based on the suitability of its characteristics for its intended use.
Note 2 In most of the following examples showing dual channel applications, one interlock switch is shown switching both channels (one contact set per channel). If it is foreseeable that damage to the guard (e.g., at the actuator mounting point) could allow it to be opened without operating the switch then two separate switches may be required. The electrical principle of the circuit will remain the same.
safety relay (e.g. Guardmaster Minotaur) is used for fault detection it is important to note the following: • All safety critical single faults, except for certain faults over the contact sets at the E-Stop, will be detected at the next opening of the guard. • All safety critical single faults, except for certain faults over the contact sets at the interlock switch, will be detected at the next operation of the E-Stop. • Because the E-Stop device is not likely to be operated frequently, it is recommended that its function is checked (with the guard closed) on a regular basis (start of shift or daily) to enable the Minotaur to detect single faults. If the guard is rarely opened, the interlock switch should be checked in a similar manner.
Note 3 In most cases the circuits are shown with the guard door closed and ready for motor starting by operating the normal start control. It must be possible to start the machine only by voluntary actuation of the control provided for the purpose (see EN 292-2: 3.7.2). For the purposes of these examples the use of a conventional contactor latching circuit has been assumed. If this is not the case, then a restart interlock will be required to prevent an automatic or unintended starting of the motor when the guard is closed. A Minotaur safety relay with a momentary action push button installed in the X1-X2 output monitoring circuit can be used to achieve this. If the guard is designated as a Control Guard (see EN 292-2: 4.2.2.5) these requirements do not apply but the use of control guards is only allowed under certain conditions including: • A control guard can only be used where there is no possibility of an operator or part of his body staying in or reaching into the danger zone whilst the guard is closed. • The control guard must be the only access to the hazard area. • The interlocking system must have the highest possible reliability. It is often advisable to use a solenoid locking switch such as the Guardmaster Atlas or TLS-GD2.
Note 4 Safety monitoring relay units used in dual channel circuits with infrequent operation or with more than one switching device connected. This note applies to all monitoring devices which use the technique of comparing the signal at the change of state of dual channels. Certain faults are only detected at a change of state of the input switching device (interlock switch or E-Stop switch). If there are long periods (e.g. months as opposed to days) between switching actions, it may be possible for multiple faults to accumulate which could lead to a dangerous situation. Therefore a regular check should be performed on the system in order to detect single faults before an accumulation occurs. This check may be manual or initiated by part of the machines control system. If, for example, 3 interlock switches are connected to the monitoring unit, certain faults will only be detected at the switch on the first guard to be opened and the switch on the last guard to be closed. This is because any switching between the first opening/last closing will not change the state of the monitoring unit input circuits. Therefore in some applications it may be necessary to use one monitoring device per switch. Most of the following examples show an interlock switch and an emergency stop switch combined in the circuit. When a monitoring
18-2
Note 5 This symbol indicates that the associated component or device features direct opening (positive opening) operation. In the event of a fault, welded contacts will be forced open by the motion of the safety guard. This symbol denotes mechanically linked contacts; if one contact welds closed, all other dependent (auxiliary) contacts remain in position, i.e. they cannot change state.
Safeguarding Applications
Light Curtains POC, 440L-M8200, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel +24V DC Reset Momentary Push Button
K2
A1 A2 PE
K1
K1
Inputs
T0 PE T13 T14 X11 X12 T21 T22 X21 X22 1.3 2.3 3.1
K2
PLC Logic 440L-M8200
Common Outputs 0
C1 D1 PE C2
D2 PE T3 T4
C3 D3 PE C4
K1 2
1
7
1
2
4
4
3
3 OSSD 2
Sender
2
3
4 ... N
O1
7
OSSD 1 Test
1
D4 1.4 2.4 3.2
Receiver POC Light Curtain
Bulletin 100S or 700S
K2 O2
O3
Ground
Circuit Status The light curtain is not detecting the presence of any objects. The power to the PLC Output common terminal is OFF. The Reset switch on the 440L-8200 must be pressed to apply power to the PLC Output Module.
Operating Principle The momentary reset button must be pressed to apply power to the PLC output module. The PLC controls the operation of the machine. When an object breaks the beam of the light curtain, the outputs from the light curtain receiver turn off. The 440L-M8200 detects the absence of the input signals at T3 and T4 and causes the K1 and K2 Bulletin 100 contactors (or Bulletin 700S relays) to drop out. This disconnects power to the output module of the PLC.
Fault Detection If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON, the PLC output module will be disconnected by the other contactor operating properly. The 440L-M8200 relay will detect the stuck contactor because terminals T21 and T22 will be open. The fault must be corrected and the 440L-M8200 reset in order to apply power to the PLC output module.
Comments The contactors should be selected to meet the load requirements of the PLC output loads. The N.C. auxiliary contact is fed into the PLC input, so the PLC knows when the light curtain has been activated.
18-3
Safeguarding Applications
Light Curtains POC, 440L-M8100 (Muting), Dual Channel +24V DC
POC Receiver
4
6
7
8
11
12
13
7
Blue
White
Black
9 10
2
Green
1
4
Brown
3
Blue
Gray
Yellow
Green
5
5
14
3 4
5 6
No. Conn.
3
6
No. Conn.
2
7
Brown
1
2
White
Black
1
Bulletin 100S or 700S
POC Sender
16
17 18 19 20
15
K1
21
22
23
24
25
26
27 28
29
35 36 37 38
+
+
-
39
40
41
42
43
44 45
46
47
48
49 50
51 52 53 54
55
56
57
58
59
60 61
33
62
63
64
65 66
Muting Lamp
S1
K1 B1
+
32
H1
L1 L2 L3
A1
31
+ - +-
440L-M8100 34
30
K2
Restart Lamp
+
-
K2
A2
B2
Four Muting Sensors PNP Output
Gnd
M
PE
Circuit Status The light curtain is not detecting the presence of any objects. The output contactors, K1 and K2 are de-energized.
Operating Principle With no object in the sensing field, pressing and releasing S1 will cause the outputs to energize. When an object enters the sensing field, the outputs will de-energize and the restart lamp flashes. To start muting, the protection field must be free and the outputs K1 and K2 energized. During the muting period, the mute inputs must stay activated, without interruption, when changing from A1 & A2 to B1 & B2. If an object remains in the protected sensing field after a power interruption, the object can be moved out of the protected field through the actuation of a spring return, key operated switch S2 (not shown). To prevent a steady override, an additional contact of S2 can be integrated into the control system.
Fault Detection If either contactor K1 or K2 sticks ON, the other functioning contactor will turn the load OFF. The outputs of the 440L-M8100 are monitored PNP outputs. A short across S1 will prevent the operation of the output circuits. A fault of the muting sensor will be detected so that new muting is prevented. If the muting lamp is not connected, is defective or is shorted, muting can not be started.
18-4
Safeguarding Applications
Light Curtains POC, Bulletin 800, MSR22LM (Muting), Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel +24V DC
Power Maintained Push Button
K3 (Aux.)
Sender
Test
Machine Start/ Momentary Push Button
Receiver 1
1
MS1
OSSD 2
4
4
3
3
2
2 POC Light Curtain LC2—not muted
MS2
A1 S12 S14 S21 S22 S23 S24 S31 S32 S33 S34 13
Sender
Receiver 1
1 4
4
3
3
OSSD 2 OSSD 1
Test
2
POC Light Curtain LC2—muted
Ground
A2 M1 M2 48
2
3
3
K1
2
2
K2
58 X44 S43 S44 S41
L1
S42 14
23 31
24 32
Momentary Push Button
Start/Restart Required
K4
Contactor Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out Key Switch
K3
K4
Fuses
K3
Start/ Restart Muting Lamp
L2 L3
Machine Stop/ Momentary Push Button
OSSD 1
MSR22LM Manual Start 2-Sensor Mute 30sec Mute
K4 (Aux.)
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
M
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit is shown with the two light curtains and two muting sensors powered. Only Light Curtain 1 is muted. The motor is off.
Operating Principle Press the maintained Power button to apply power to the MSR22LM. The Start/Restart lamps turns on and the amber Run LEDs on the MSR22LM are flashing. Press the Start/Restart button to turn the MSR22LM outputs on. Press the Machine Start to turn the motor on. To get an object through LC1 without turning the motor off, the object must first block (mute) sensor MS1, then sensor MS2. At this point the muting lamp is on and the light curtain output is muted for a maximum of 30 seconds. The object passes through light curtain. Upon exiting the light curtain, the object must unblock (unmute) sensor MS2, then sensor MS1. After passing sensor MS2, the light curtain output becomes active again. The object can also pass through LC1 in the reverse direction. If the object gets stuck in the light curtain and the light curtain module times out, then the spring return, key operated switch can be used to manually override the output of the MSR22LM. LC2 operates in protective mode and will turn the outputs of the MSR22LM off, when that curtain is interrupted. After clearing LC2, the Start/Restart button must be pressed and released to turn the outputs of the MSR22LM on. The Bulletin 800 e-stop can be used at any time to stop the motor. To restart the motor, release the e-stop button, press and release the Start/Restart button, and then press the Machine Start button. Mute Sequence: MS1⇓ MS2⇓ LC1⇓ ⇑ MS2⇑ MS1⇑
Fault Behaviour A single fault will not cause a loss of the safety function. If either contactor K3 or K4 sticks on—the motor will stop on command due to the other contactor, and the MSR22LM cannot be reset due to the monitoring circuit being open. Thus the fault is revealed to the operator. A short across the Start/Restart button will be evident by a flashing Start/Restart required lamp. The muting process must occur in the proper sequence and within specified time or the MSR22LM outputs will turn off. If an open circuit is detected in the light curtain wiring, the MSR22LM will open its output, shutting off the motor. A single fault detected on the MSR22LM safety input circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe (off) state. If Light Curtain 1 is interrupted without first muting the sensors, the motor will turn off. Diagnostic information is provided by a flashing code on the Run LEDs (see MSR22LM installation instructions). Cycle the power to reset the MSR22LM after a lock-out condition.
Comments This type of arrangement is suitable for medium to high risk applications and meets Control Reliability requirements per ANSI B11 standards. The layout design must ensure that access to the hazard can not be reached while the light curtain is muted, e.g., a person passing between the light curtain and the object during muting, design and installation of the light curtains must take into account the safety distance calculation Ds=K(Ts + Tc +Tr) +Dpf. See section 1, Safety Principles, for details.
18-5
Safeguarding Applications
Light Curtains POC, Bulletin 800, MSR22LM (PSDI), Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel Sender +24V DC Receiver 1
4
4 3
3 2
POC Light Curtain 3
Sender
Test
Fuses
L1
L2 L3
OSSD 1 Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
Fuses
Receiver 1
4
4
3
3
POC Light Curtain 1
Sender
OSSD 2
A1 S12 S14 S21 S22 S23 S24 S31 S32 S33 S34 13 23 31
Receiver 1
4
4
3
3
Test POC Light Curtain 2
K3
OSSD 1
2
1
2
OSSD 2
2
1
2
Power Maintained Push Button
OSSD 2
MSR22LM 6 PSDI Break/Start, Short Double Break 2
6
K1
2
K2
A2 M1 M2 48 58 X44 S43 S44 S41
S42 14 24 32
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
Test
1
OSSD 1
K4
Contactor Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
M
2
PSDI
Start/ Restart Momentary Push Button
Ground
Start/Restart Required
K3
K4
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with the three light curtains powered. The MSR22LM is not powered. The motor is off.
Operating Principle Presence Sensing Device Initiation (PSDI) enables automatic restart of a machine after a certain number of accesses into the protected area through a light curtain. Only Light Curtain 1 (LC1) is used for PSDI; the other two light curtains operate in guard only mode. Press the maintained Power button to apply power to the MSR22LM. Break LC1 twice. Then press and release the Start/Restart button to energize the contactors K3 and K4. The machine runs and opens the contact between S41 and S42, which de-energized K3 and K4, and turns the machine off. Reach through LC1 and remove part from the machine. Reach through LC1 a second time to load the next part. Upon removal of the hands from LC1, contactors K3 and K4 will energize and automatically start the machine for the next cycle; no additional actions are required. The Bulletin 800 e-stop can be used at any time to stop the motor. To restart the motor, release the e-stop button and then repeat the start sequence.
Fault Behavior A single fault will not cause a loss of the safety function. If either contactor K3 or K4 sticks on, the motor will stop on command due to the other contactor. Indicators connected to the auxiliary contacts reveal the stuck contactor. A short across the Start/Restart button will be evident by a flashing Start/Restart Required lamp. If an open circuit is detected in the light curtain wiring, the MSR22LM will open its output, shutting off the motor. A single fault detected on the MSR22LM safety input circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe (off) state. Diagnostic information is provided by a flashing code on the Run LEDs (see MSR22LM installation instructions). Cycle the power to reset the MSR22LM after a lockout condition is cleared.
Comments There are four different methods of implementing muting with the MSR22LM. Check the instruction manual for further details. This type of arrangement is suitable for low to medium risk applications and does not meet Control Reliability requirements per ANSI B11 standands, as contactor monitoring is not interlocked to the control system. Design and installation of the light curtains must take into account the safety distance calculation Ds = K (Ts + Tc +Tr) + Dpf. See Section 1, Safety Principles, for details.
18-6
Safeguarding Applications
Light Curtains AAC, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel +24V DC AAC1 Sender
L1
AAC1 Receiver 1
1
4
Test 10
8
11
9
K2 K3 K1
Test
Momentary Switch S1
5 PE 3
3
PE
K1 K2 K3
Contactor Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out K1
Ground PE
K2
K3
M Bulletin 100S or 700S L2
Circuit Status The light beam is off. The motor is off.
Operating Principle Pressing S1 energizes K3, which closes the test inputs to the AAC1 sender. The sender turns on its emitter LED. The AAC1 receiver accepts the emitted beam from the sender and closes its N.O. contacts at terminals 4/5 and 8/9. Contactors K1 and K2 are energized through the K3 contacts and then are self-latched by their own respective N.O. contacts. At the AAC1 sender, the K1 and K2 N.O. contacts maintain the emitter in an ON state. When S1 is released, K3 drops out. The motor is now running.
Fault Behaviour A malfunction of one of the contactors K1 or K2 does not lead to the loss of the safety function. If K3 is continuously activated due to a malfunction, the output circuit remains in an OFF state. A short across either of the AAC2 receiver will cause either K1 or K2 to remain energized and will prevent future energization of K3. If Switch S1 becomes shorted, K3 will always remain energized which will turn the load OFF.
18-7
Safeguarding Applications
Tongue Interlocks Trojan 5, Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC L1
L2 L3
Start Momentary Push Button
K1
Contactor Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Fuse
Guard Closed
Stop Momentary Push Button
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication) 11
21
33
12
22
34
Trojan
M
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
K1 Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle Opening the guard or operating the E-Stop device will cause the contactor to isolate the motor power.
Fault Behaviour The integrity of the circuit depends on the suitability of the components (conformity with standards, tried and tested principles, etc.) and the nature of the wiring installation (use of protective conduit, short wiring runs, no movement of wiring, etc.).
Comments This arrangement is widely used in applications that have low to medium risk and where the wiring can be properly protected. Refer to Notes for use with application circuit examples.
18-8
Safeguarding Applications
Tongue Interlocks Trojan 5, Bulletin 800, MSR9T, Bulletin 100, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC
Start Momentary Push Button
K1 (Aux) K2 (Aux) L1
L2 L3
Stop Momentary Push Button
Trojan Interlock Switch
Guard Closed
11
21
33
A1 S13 S21 31 13 23 X1
K1
Minotaur MSR9T 12 22
34
K2
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
A2 S14 S22 32 14 24 X2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Fuses
M K1
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle This is a dual channel system with monitoring of the contactors. It uses double pole (1 x N.C. & 1 x N.O.) interlock and E-Stop switches and two contactors. Opening the guard or operating the E-Stop device will switch the input circuits (S13-S14 & S21-S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The output circuits (13-14 & 23-24) will cause the contactor to isolate the motor power. A single fault will not cause a loss of safety function.
Fault Detection A single fault detected on the Minotaur safety input circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe state (OFF) at the next operation of the respective input device. If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON - The motor will stop on command due to the other contactor, but the Minotaur cannot be reset (thus the fault is revealed to the operator).
Comments This type of system will also detect simultaneous short circuit faults over both contact sets of the switches. The MSR9T is therefore suitable for applications where short circuit or ground faults are more likely to occur than open circuit faults (this may be due to hot surfaces, chafing, etc.). It is suitable for some medium to high risk applications and where the wiring cannot be fully protected against all potential damage. Note: It should not be possible to remove or lift the guard otherwise the switches can be easily defeated.
18-9
Safeguarding Applications
Tongue Interlocks Trojan 5, MSR10RD, Bulletin 100, PLC, Dual Channel 24V DC L1 L2 L3
Reset
Guard Closed
Momentary Push Button 11
21
12 22
33
34
Trojan Interlock Switch
A1
+ S13 S23 X1 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
91
D13 D21
Minotaur MSR10RD A2
S14 S24 X2 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 92
D14 D22
K1
Outputs D13-D14 & D21-D22 Are Delayed Action
K2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
M
Inputs PLC Outputs
K1
Ground
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed, ready for motor starting (via signals from the PLC).
Operating Principle The Minotaur MSR10RD immediate action outputs at 13-14 are connected to inputs at the PLC and the delayed outputs at D13-D14 are connected to the contactor K1. The relevant PLC outputs are connected to contactor K2. If the guard is opened the Minotaur contacts 13-14 immediately signal the PLC to stop the motor. The PLC then has a pre-set time limit (adjustable at the MSR10RD) to execute its shut down sequence and switch OFF contactor K2. After this time period has elapsed, the delayed action outputs D13-D14 will switch off contactor K1, thus ensuring isolation even if there is a hardware, program or systematic fault in the PLC.
Fault Detection If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON, the motor will stop on command but the Minotaur cannot be reset (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A single fault detected on the Minotaur input and output circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe state (OFF). All safety critical single faults will be detected at the next opening of the guard.
Comment This system has the high integrity of hard wiring and allows a correctly sequenced shut-down which protects the machine and program.
18-10
Safeguarding Applications
Tongue Interlocks Interlocks, Bulletin 800, MSR18T, PLC, Dual Channel + 24V DC
Bulletin 440 Gate Interlocks Fuse
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
CR1 A1 B1 T11 T12
X1
X2 T22 T35 13 23
33
43
53
61
73
Common
Bulletin 700 Control Relay
0
Machine Output 1
Machine Output
K1
MSR18T 440R-ZBR520AZ1 440R-ZBR520AZ2
2
PLC/SLC Output Module
K2
Machine Output 3
K3
A2 B2
T31 T32 T33
T34 X3 IF1 14
24
34
44
54
62
74
Machine Output
Momentary Reset
15
Ground
Circuit Status The gate is closed and output module is ready to be powered through the MSR18T.
Operating Principle This is a dual channel system with monitoring of the output module. When the momentary reset button is pressed, power will be applied to the output module. PLC logic turns on CR1, which is being monitored by the MSR18T. The PLC output module should be controlling non-safety related functions. If the gate is opened or the e-stop is pressed, the safety outputs of the MSR18T safety monitoring relay will open and remove power to the PLC output module. Power will then be removed from the machine outputs controlled by the output module.
18-11
Safeguarding Applications
Guard Locking Interlocks TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100, PLC, Dual Channel 24V DC
L1 L2 L3
Inputs PLC
Guard Closed A1
42
A2
41 12
22
34
11
21
33
Lock Status Indication
Fuse
Guard Open Status
Outputs
K1
54
TLS1-GD2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
53
M Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
K1
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and locked (solenoid not energized), ready for motor starting or lock release (via signals from the PLC).
Operating Principle The guard is locked closed until the solenoid is energized. The solenoid can only be energized when the PLC has given a stop command so that the auxiliary contacts at K1(a) are closed (therefore power contacts at KI are open) and then issues an energization signal. When the locking mechanism is released, monitoring contacts 41-42 are opened. These contacts are in series with the contactor (K1) control circuit and will therefore prevent restart while the TLS-GD2 is in the unlocked mode. If the guard is opened contacts 11-12 are open and will also prevent restart while the guard is open regardless of the lock status.
Fault Behaviour If the PLC gives a spurious solenoid energization signal, the TLS-GD2 will not unlock if K1 is closed. If contactor K1sticks ON - the motor will continue to run but the guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A short circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will initiate a STOP via contacts 42-41 A short circuit fault across terminals 42-11 will not be detected. A short circuit fault across the E-Stop device will not be detected. An open circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will prevent guard opening (other than by the emergency release points on the TLS-GD2).
Comments The guard can only be opened via a command from the PLC, therefore a properly sequenced shut down is ensured and no tool damage or program scrambling will result. Note: Unless the PLC has specific safety provisions, it should NOT be used to provide a timed delay when the machine has overrun characteristics. In these circumstances a CU1 or CU2 will also be required.
18-12
Safeguarding Applications
Guard Locking Interlocks TLS3-GD2, Bulletin 800, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC Lock Release Momentary Push Button
Start
K1(Aux)
Momentary Push Button
K2 (Aux) L1 L2 L3
K1 (Aux)
Stop Momentary Push Button
K2 (Aux)
Reset
Guard Closed A1
42
A2
41 51 12 22
Momentary Push Button
TLS3-GD2
52
A1 S13 S23 41 13 23 33 X1
21
33
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
Minotaur MSR6R/T
K2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Set to D Channel Set to R Mode A2 S14 S24 42 14 24 34 X2
Auxiliary Circuit
11
34
K1
Fuses
M K1
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and locked (solenoid not energized), ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle Press the Reset button to energize the outputs of the MSR6R/T. Press and release the Start button to energize K1 and K2 and latch the motor on. The gate remains locked closed while the motor is running. Press the Stop button to de-energize K1 and K2 and turn the motor off. The mechanically linked normally closed contacts of K1 and K2 complete the circuit to the Lock Release button. Press the Lock Release button to energize the solenoid of the TLS3-GD2 and open the gate. Opening the contacts in the TLS3-GD2 signals the MSR6R/T that the gate is open and prevents the motor from being restarted. To restart the motor, the gate must be closed, the Reset button pressed and released, and the Start button pressed. The Bulletin 800 E-Stop can also be used to stop the motor.
Fault Detection If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON--the motor will stop on command but the guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A single fault which causes solenoid energization will initiate a STOP via contacts 41-42 & 51-52. A single fault within the Minotaur will prevent the closing of its outputs. A single fault on the Minotaur input and output circuits will be detected and will result in the lock-out the system to a safe state (OFF) at the next operation of the respective input device. An open circuit fault across the solenoid energization circuit will prevent guard opening (other than by the emergency release points on the TLS-GD2).
Comments This system provides an interlock function of high integrity and is suitable for many high risk applications. The solenoid is only energized when guard opening is required. Additional safeguards must be provided to ensure that individuals are not locked in the hazard area. Use the safety distance calculation [Ds = K(Ts + Tc +Tr) +Dpf].to ensure that the hazard is not reached before stopping. See Section 1, Safety Principles, for details.
18-13
Safeguarding Applications
Guard Locking Interlocks TLS1-GD2, Bulletin 800, CU1, Bulletin 100, Dual Channel L1 L2 L3
24V AC/DC Fuse Start Momentary Push Button
K1
K2
Lock Release Momentary Push Button
Stop
R2 R1 R3
Momentary CU1 Remote Push Button Indication Unit
Fuses
Guard Closed
Solenoid A1
42
54
A2
41 12 22
53 34
21
33
TLS1-GD2
A1
+ X1 R1
• 13 23 31
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
CU1
A2 11
– X2 R2 R3 14 24 32
M
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop K1
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and locked (solenoid not energized), ready for motor starting (push start button) or lock release (push lock release button).
Operating Principle In this system the guard is locked closed until the solenoid is energized. The solenoid can only be energized when: • The auxiliary contacts at K1 and K2 are closed. Therefore power contacts at KI & K2 are open. • The CU1 control unit has timed out for a pre-set period. At this stage the remote indication unit will show that the guard can now be opened by operating the lock release push button. When the locking mechanism is released, monitoring contacts 41-42 are opened. These contacts are in series with the contactor (K1) control circuit and will therefore prevent restart while the TLS1-GD2 is in the unlocked mode. If the guard is opened, contacts 11-12 and 21-22 are opened and will prevent restart while the guard is open regardless of the lock status.
Fault Detection If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON - the motor will stop but the guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A short circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will initiate a STOP via contacts 41-42. A single fault within the CU1 will prevent the closing of its outputs (preventing solenoid energization). A short circuit fault across either terminals 11-42 or terminals 21-22 will not be detected but the motor cannot be started while the guard is open. A single short circuit fault across the E-Stop device will not be detected but will not prevent emergency stopping. An open circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will prevent guard opening (other than by the emergency release points on the TLS-GD2).
Comments This system is a practical and effective method of providing an interlock function of increased integrity. It is suitable for applications where motion overruns after the stop command and the time taken to run down to a stop is predictable, consistent and less than approx. 30 minutes. The inclusion of the lock release push button means that the solenoid is only energized when guard opening is required. This prevents guard doors from swinging open whenever the control stop button is pressed. It also means that the solenoid is not left energized for long periods which can cause efficiency loss. The solenoids used in the Atlas and TLS-GD2 are continuously rated but, as with any solenoid, their action will be more positive when they are working at maximum possible efficiency.
18-14
Safeguarding Applications
Guard Locking Interlocks TLS1-GD2, Bulletin 800, CU2, Bulletin 100, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC L1 L2 L3
Fuse Start
K1
Momentary Push Button K2
Stop Momentary Push Button
Auxiliary Circuit
(Contact Status Indication)
Fuses
Guard Closed
A1 N P N 13 23 31 Y1
Solenoid A1
42
A2
41 12
11
22
21
54
TLS1-GD2
53
Lock Release Illuminated Momentary Push Button
34
CU2
CU2 NPN Inductive Sensor A2 P N P 14 24 32 Y2
NPN
33
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
K1
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
K2
CU2 NPN Inductive Sensor
M
PNP
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and locked (solenoid not energized), with motor running.
Operating Principle In this system the guard is locked closed until the solenoid is energized. The solenoid can only be energized when: • The control stop button is pressed and the auxiliary contacts at K1(a) and K2(a) are closed. Therefore power contacts at KI & K2 are open. • The CU2 control unit detects no movement and closes its output circuit at terminals 13-14. • The lock release button is pressed. It will illuminate when the guard can be unlocked. When the locking mechanism is released, monitoring contacts 41-42 are opened. These contacts are in series with the contactor (K1) control circuit and will therefore prevent restart while the TLS-GD2 is in the unlocked mode. If the guard is opened, contacts 11-12 and 21-22 are opened and will prevent restart while the guard is open regardless of the lock status.
Fault Detection If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON - the motor will stop but the guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A short circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will initiate a STOP via contacts 41-42. A single fault within the CU2 will prevent the closing of its outputs (preventing solenoid energization). A short circuit fault across either terminals 11-42 or terminals 21-22 will not be detected but the motor cannot be started while the guard is open. A single short circuit fault across the E-Stop device will not be detected but will not prevent emergency stopping. An open circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will prevent guard opening (other than by the emergency release points on the TLS-GD2).
Comments This system is a practicable and effective method of providing an interlock function of increased integrity. It is suitable for applications where motion overruns after the stop command and the time taken to run down to a stop is either unpredictable, inconsistent or very long. The inclusion of the lock release push button means that the solenoid is only energized when guard opening is required. This prevents guard doors from swinging open whenever the control stop button is pressed. It also means that the solenoid is not left energized for long periods which can cause efficiency loss. The solenoids used in the Atlas and TLS-GD2 are continuously rated but, as with any solenoid, their action will be more positive when they are working at maximum possible efficiency.
18-15
Safeguarding Applications
Guard Locking Interlocks TLS3-GD2, Bulletin 800, MSR200, Bulletin 100S, Bulletin 160, Dual Channel L1 L2 L3
24V DC
Fuses
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
Stop 8
Lock Release
Start
6 sec delay shown TLS3-GD2
A1
A2
42
52
41
51
A1 S11 S32 S62 S12 S22 Y31 Y40 Y41 Y42 13 23 31
MSR210
12 22
34
11 21
33
Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 13 23
31
7 6 9 10
R S T
Bulletin 160
U V W
MSR238 K1
A2 S21 S42 S52 Y30 Y32 Y33 S34
Y1 Y2 14 24 32
Reset DC Ground
Y3 Y4 Y7 Y8 14 24 32
K1
Bulletin 100S or 700S
M
Circuit Status The guard door is closed and locked (mechanical lock); the e-stop is released; and the motor is ready to run.
Operating Principle Momentarily press the Reset button. Contacts 13-14 close, which enables the drive to start. K1 energizes and connects the motor to the drive. Start the motor by momentarily pressing the start switch. The motor can be stopped by momentarily pressing the stop switch. The start and stop switches can be replaced by more elaborate control devices (like a PLC). If the E-stop is pressed, the MSR210P opens its immediate output (13-14) and begins the timing sequence in the MSR238. The Bulletin 160 also begins its programmed deceleration as the stop signal is opened. After the MSR238 times out, contacts 13-14 and 23-24 open and deenergizes K1. The motor is disconnected from the drive. Contacts 31-32 close providing power to the release button of the TLS3-GD2. Press and hold the release button to open the gate. Closing the gate or releasing the e-stop will not cause the motor to turn on. Two separate and deliberate actions are needed: 1) momentarily press the reset button to activate the safety relay and then 2) momentarily close the start switch to turn the motor on. In this application, the user must ensure that the time delay of the MSR238P provides sufficient time for the hazards, driven by the motor, to stop. Ramping to stop or dynamic braking are recommended to speed up the braking process. The time delay of the MSR238P should be set longer than the stopping time of the Bulletin 160 or the motor will coast to its final stop. The Bulletin 160 will not be able to start while the K1 contactors are energized. Pressing the E-Stop button is required to open the gate.
Fault Behaviour If the drive output faults to an energized state, the motor can be turned off by pressing the E-stop The programmable contacts 9-10 should remain open and the motor can not be restarted because the feed back loop (Y1-Y2) is open. If K1 welds in an energized state, the motor can be stopped by the drive. The MSR210P will not be able to start due to the feedback loop (Y1-Y2) being open. A short across the interlock or estop will be detected by the MSR210P. The MSR210P will also detect if the reset is held or stuck in the closed position, and will prevent the motor from starting. A short across terminals 7-8 on the Bulletin 160 will not be detected. Pressing the stop switch will not cause the motor to turn off. The motor can be turned off by the e-stop.
Comments The Bulletin 160 drive is considered to be a Cat. B device. It has certain features that can be used to enhance performance in safety related functions. Additional safety components, like safety relays and contactors, can be configured to achieve higher levels of safety integrity. This type of arrangement is suitable for medium to high risk applications. Because the e-stop and safety gate may not be operated frequently, it is recommended that these devices be checked, by operating and resetting, on a regular basis (e.g., start of shift or daily) to verify the functionality of the system. An risk assessment must be performed to help ensure that all hazards are identified and reduced to a tolerable level. This example is intended to demonstrate some of the operating principles of safety components and systems. Additional components may be required to achieve tolerable risk.
18-16
Safeguarding Applications
Guard Locking Interlocks Atlas 5 (Auto Release), Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC Start Momentary Push Button
L1 L2 L3
K1
Fuses Stop Momentary Push Button
Guard Closed A1
5
7
Atlas 5 1
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
2
A2
3
6
8
4
E
M
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop Button
K1
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and locked (solenoid not energized), with motor running.
Operating Principle In this system the guard is locked closed until the solenoid is energized. The solenoid can only be energized when stop button is pressed and the auxiliary contacts at K1(a) are closed. Therefore power contacts at KI are open. When the locking mechanism is released, monitoring contacts 3-9 are opened. These contacts are in series with the contactor (K1) control circuit and will therefore prevent restart while the Atlas is in the unlocked mode. If the guard is opened, contacts 4-10 are opened and will also prevent restart while the guard is open regardless of the lock status. When the guard is closed and start button is pressed, it will de-energize the solenoid and allow K1 to latch-in.
Fault detection If contactor K1 sticks ON the motor will continue to run but the guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A short circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will initiate a STOP via contacts 3-9. A short circuit fault across terminals 3-4 will not be detected. A short circuit fault across the E-Stop device will not be detected.
18-17
Safeguarding Applications
Guard Locking Interlocks Atlas 5 (Manual Release), Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC Start Momentary Push Button
L1
L2 L3
K1
Lock Release Momentary Push Button
Fuses Stop Momentary Push Button
Guard Closed A1
Solenoid 5
1
7
Atlas 5
M
2
A2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
3
6
8
4
E
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
K1
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and locked (solenoid not energized), ready for motor starting (push start button) or lock release (push lock release button).
Operating Principle In this system the guard is locked closed until the solenoid is energized. The solenoid can only be energized when the auxiliary contacts at K1(a) are closed. Therefore power contacts at KI are open and the lock release button is pushed. When the locking mechanism is released, monitoring contacts 3-9 are opened. These contacts are in series with the contactor (K1) control circuit and will therefore prevent restart while the Atlas is in the unlocked mode. If the guard is opened contacts 4-10 are opened and will also prevent restart while the guard is open regardless of the lock status.
Fault Detection If contactor K1 sticks ON the motor will continue to run but the guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A short circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will initiate a STOP via contacts 3-9. A short circuit fault across terminals 3-4 will not be detected. A short circuit fault across the E-Stop device will not be detected. An open circuit fault on the solenoid energization circuit will prevent guard opening (other than by the emergency release points on the Atlas).
Comments This system is a practicable and effective method of providing an interlock function of enhanced integrity. The inclusion of the lock release push button means that the solenoid is only energized when guard opening is required. This prevents guard doors from swinging open whenever the control stop button is pressed. It also means that the solenoid is not left energized for long periods which can cause efficiency loss. The solenoids used in the Atlas and TLS-GD2 are continuously rated but, as with any solenoid, their action will be more positive when they are working at maximum possible efficiency.
18-18
Safeguarding Applications
Guard Locking Interlocks Atlas 5, Bulletin 800, CU2, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC L1 L2 L3
Start Momentary Push Button
Fuses K1
K2
Lock Release Momentary Push Button Guard Closed
Stop Momentary Push Button
A1
5
7
Atlas 5
1 2
A2
3
6
8
4
Minotaur MSR6R/T
A1 S13 S23 41 13 23 33 X1
A1 N P N Y1 13 23 31
Set to D Channel Set to T Mode
CU2 CU2 PNP Inductive Sensor A2 S14 S24 42 14 24 34 X2
A2 P N P Y2 14 24 32
K1
NPN
M
PNP
CU2 NPN Inductive Sensor
Fuses Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Indication Bulb Shows Stopped Motion
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and locked (solenoid not energized), ready for motor starting (push start button) or lock release (push lock release button).
Operating Principle In this system the guard is locked closed until the solenoid is energized. The solenoid can only be energized when: • The auxiliary contacts at K1(a) & K2(a) are closed (therefore power contacts at KI & K2 are open). • The CU2 senses stopped motion and closes its output circuit at terminals 13-14. • The lock release button is pressed. The monitoring contacts 3-9 isolate power to the contactor control circuits when the solenoid is in the unlocked mode. The guard operated contact sets at 4-10 and 21-22 are opened whenever the guard is not fully closed. The output contacts at 13-14 and 23-24 on the Minotaur will only be closed (allowing power to the control circuit) when both input circuits S13-S14 and S23-S24 are closed. Therefore the motor can only be started when the guard is in the closed and locked position.
Fault Detection If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON - The motor will stop on command but the guard cannot be opened (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A single fault which causes solenoid energization circuit will initiate a STOP via contacts 3-9. A single fault within the CU2 will prevent the closing of its outputs (preventing solenoid energization). A single fault detected on the Minotaur input and output circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe state (OFF) at the next operation of the respective input device. An open circuit fault across the solenoid energization circuit will prevent guard opening (other than by the emergency release points on the Atlas).
Comments This system provides an interlock function of high integrity and will be suitable for many high risk applications. It is suitable for applications where motion overruns after the stop command and the time taken to run down to a stop is not predictable, consistent or more than approx. 30 minutes.
18-19
Safeguarding Applications
Non Contact Interlocks Ferrogard 6, Bulletin 800, MSR5T, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel 24V AC/DC K1 (Aux)
Start Momentary Push Button
L1 L2 L3
K2 (Aux)
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
K3 (Aux) Stop Momentary Push Button K1
Fuse A1 13 23 33 41 X1
Ferrogard FRS6 Interlock Switch
K2
Minotaur MSR5T A2 14 24 34 42 X2
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
K3
Fuses
M K1
K2
M
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Guard Closed
M
K3
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle This is a single channel system with monitoring of the contactors. It uses a Minotaur MSR5T monitored safety relay to distribute the signal from the interlock and E-Stop switches to three contactors. Opening the guard or operating the E-Stop device will open the input circuits (A1-A2) to the Minotaur MSR5T. The output circuits (13-14, 2324 & 33-34) will cause the contactors to isolate to power to the respective motors. The Minotaur MSR5T requires a 24 V AC/DC supply.
Fault Behaviour and Detection The integrity of the circuit depends on the suitability of the components (conformity with standards, tried and tested principles, etc.) and the nature of the wiring installation (use of protective conduit, short wiring runs, no movement of wiring, etc.). The Minotaur MSR5T provides an ensured switching action. Contactor monitoring is provided via terminals X1-X2. When more than one contactor is used, if one of the contacts sticks ON, the restarting of the other two will be prevented by the Minotaur. The MSR5T can be configured with two contactors in series to control one motor and if either contactor sticks ON, the motor will stop on command due to the other contactor but the MSR5T will not reset. Safety-critical single faults within the Minotaur MSR5T itself will be detected. It does not detect some faults at its input circuit and therefore it is possible for a single fault to cause a loss of safety function.
Comments This type of system is widely used where an intermediate relay is required between the Interlock switch or E-Stop device and the contactor(s). An ordinary relay would not be suitable for this purpose because of its failure modes. This is typically the case where multiple motors are being switched or a higher current switching capacity is required. It is suitable in applications that have low to medium risk and where the wiring can be properly protected. Where a 24V supply cannot be made available, the Guardmaster Minotaur MSR8T should be used in place of the MSR5T (see next diagram).
18-20
Safeguarding Applications
Non Contact Interlocks Ferrogard 6, Bulletin 800, MSR8T, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC Start Momentary Push Button
K1 (Aux) L1 L2 L3
K2 (Aux)
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Fuses
K3 (Aux) Stop Momentary Push Button Fuse
K1 A1 S13 13 23 33 43
Guard Closed
51 X1
K2
Ferrogard FRS6 Interlock Switch
Brown
Minotaur MSR8T A2 S14 14 24 34 44 52
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
X2
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication) Fuses
M K1
K2
K3
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Blue
M
M
K3
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle This is a single channel system with monitoring of the contactors. It uses a Minotaur MSR8T monitored safety relay to distribute the signal from the interlock and E-Stop switches to three contactors. Opening the guard or operating the E-Stop device will open the input circuits (S13-S14) to the Minotaur MSR8T. The output circuits (13-14, 23-24 & 33-34) will cause the contactors to isolate to power to the respective motors.
Fault Behaviour and Detection The integrity of the circuit depends on the suitability of the components (conformity with standards, tried and tested principles, etc.) and the nature of the wiring installation (use of protective conduit, short wiring runs, no movement of wiring, etc.). The Minotaur MSR8T provides an ensured switching action. Contactor monitoring is provided via terminals X1-X2. When more than one contactor is used, if one of the contactors sticks ON, the restarting of the other two will be prevented by the Minotaur. The MSR8T can be configured with two contactors in series to control one motor and if either contactor sticks ON, the motor will stop on command due to the other contactor but the MSR8T will not reset. Safety critical single faults within the Minotaur MSR8T itself will be detected. It does not detect some faults at its input circuit and therefore it is possible for a single fault to cause a loss of safety function.
Comments This type of system is widely used where an intermediate relay is required between the Interlock switch or E-Stop device and the contactor(s). An ordinary relay would not be suitable for this purpose because of its failure modes. This is typically the case where multiple motors are being switched or a higher current switching capacity is required. It is suitable in applications that have low to medium risk and where the wiring can be properly protected.
18-21
Safeguarding Applications
Position (Limit) Interlocks 2 x Imp, Bulletin 800, MSR9T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC Start Momentary Push Button
K1 (Aux) K2 (Aux) L1 L2 L3
Guard Closed
Stop Momentary Push Button 11
23
12
24
Imp Interlock Switch
A1 S13 S21 31 13 23 X1
K1
Minotaur MSR9T K2 23
12
24
A2 S14 S22 32 14 24 X2
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
11
Imp Interlock Switch
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Fuses
M K1
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard door closed and ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle Opening the guard or operating the E-Stop device will switch the input circuits (S13-S14 & S21-S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The Minotaur output circuits (13-14 & 23-24) will cause the contactor to isolate the motor power.
Fault Detection A single fault will not cause a loss of safety function. If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON - The motor will stop on command due to the other contactor, but the Minotaur cannot be reset. A single fault detected on the Minotaur safety input circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe state (OFF) at the next operation of the respective input device.
Comments This type of system will also detect simultaneous short circuit faults over both contact sets of the switches. The MSR9T is therefore suitable for applications where short circuit or ground faults are more likely to occur than open circuit faults (this may be due to hot surfaces, chafing, etc.). Because this circuit uses two opposite actuation modes it ensures that excessive wear at the guard cam or switch is detected. It is suitable for some medium to high risk applications and where the wiring cannot be fully protected against all potential damage. Note: It should not be possible to remove or lift the guard otherwise the switches can be easily defeated.
18-22
Safeguarding Applications
Position (Limit) Interlocks 3 x Trojan, Bulletin 800, MSR9R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC Guard Closed 11
21
33
Start Momentary Push Button
Trojan Interlock Switch
K1 (Aux) K2 (Aux) L1
12
22
L2 L3
34
Stop Momentary Push Button
11
21
33
12
22
34
Trojan Interlock Switch A1 S13 S21 31 13 23 X1
K1
Minotaur MSR9T
21
33
12
22
34
Trojan Interlock Switch
A2 S14 S22 32 14 24 X2
Bulletin 800 Latching E-Stop
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
11
K2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Fuses
M K1
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard doors closed and ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle Opening any of the guards will switch the input circuits (S13-S14 & S21-S22) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The Minotaur output circuits (13-14 & 23-24) will cause the contactor to isolate the motor power.
Fault Detection A single fault will not cause a loss of safety function. Safety critical single faults, except for those over a contact set of all but the first opened and last closed guard switches, will be detected at the next opening a guard. If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON - the motor will stop on command due to the other contactor, but the Minotaur cannot be reset. A single fault detected on the Minotaur safety input circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe state (OFF) at the next operation of the respective input device.
Comments It is recommended that all guards and E-Stop switches are individually opened and closed on a regular basis to enable the Minotaur to prevent an accumulation of undetected faults. For some high risk applications, especially where the wiring cannot be fully protected against all potential damage, it may be necessary to install a Minotaur for each switch.
18-23
Safeguarding Applications
Position (Limit) Interlocks 3 x Imp, Bulletin 800, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC Guard Closed 11 21
12 22
33
Start Momentary Push Button
Trojan Interlock Switch
K1 (Aux)
K2 (Aux) L1 L2 L3
34
Stop Momentary Push Button 11 21
33
12 22
34
Trojan Interlock Switch
Reset
Momentary Push Button A1 S13 S24 41 13 23 33 X1
K1
Minotaur MSR6R/T
21
33
12
22
34
Trojan Interlock Switch
A2 S14 S23 42 14 24 34 X2
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
11
K2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Fuses
M K1
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with guard doors closed and ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle Opening any of the guards will switch the input circuits (S13-S14 & S23-S24) to the Minotaur monitoring safety relay unit. The Minotaur output circuits (13-14 & 23-24) will cause the contactor to isolate the motor power.
Fault Detection A single fault will not cause a loss of safety function. Safety critical single faults, except for a short circuit over a contact set of all but the first opened and last closed guard switches, will be detected at the next opening a guard. If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON - The motor will stop on command due to the other contactor, but the Minotaur cannot be reset. A single fault detected on the Minotaur safety input circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe state (OFF) at the next operation of the respective input device.
Comments It is recommended that all guards are individually opened and closed on a regular basis (start of shift or daily) to enable the Minotaur to prevent an accumulation of undetected faults. For some high risk applications, especially where the wiring cannot be fully protected against all potential damage, it may be necessary to install a Minotaur for each switch.
18-24
Safeguarding Applications
Cable Pull E-Stop Lifeline 4, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC Start
K1(Aux)
Momentary Push Button
K2 (Aux) L1
L2 L3
Stop Momentary Push Button
Reset
Momentary Push Button
33
21 11
34
22 12
Lifeline 4 Rope Operated E-Stop Switches Rope
A1 S13 S24 41 13 23 33 X1 12
22
34
11
21
33
K1
Minotaur MSR6R/T Set to D Channel Set to R Mode
K2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
Indication for Switch Actuated
Indication for Switch Actuated
Auxiliary Circuit (Alarm or Indication)
A2 S14 S23 42 14 24 34 X2
Fuses
M K1
K2
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status Circuit shown with rope under correct tension (not pulled) and ready for motor starting.
Operating Principle When the rope is pulled it will open the contacts 11-12 & 21-22 on one of the switches. This opens the Minotaur input circuits S13-S14 & S23-S24. The Minotaur output circuits (13-14 & 23-24) will open and cause the contactors to isolate the motor power. After operation, the LIFELINE 4 must be reset. The reset button connected to the Minotaur must be pushed and released before the motor can be restarted.
Fault Behaviour A single fault will not cause a loss of safety function. If either contactor K1or K2 sticks ON - the motor will stop on command due to the other contactor, but the Minotaur cannot be reset (thus the fault is revealed to the operator). A single fault detected on the Minotaur safety input circuits will result in the lock-out of the system to a safe state (OFF) at the next operation of the respective switch.
Comments This type of arrangement is suitable for medium to high risk applications where the wiring cannot be fully protected against all potential damage. Because the E-Stop device is not likely to be operated frequently, it is recommended that its function is checked, by operating and resetting each switch in turn, on a regular basis (start of shift or daily) to enable the Minotaur to detect single faults.
18-25
Safeguarding Applications
Two-Hand Control 800Z, MSR18T, Bulletin 100, Dual Channel + 24V DC Blue Pink
Brown Brown White Pink
Blue White
Grey
Black
Black
Fuse L1
800Z-GL3066
Grey
L2
L3
800Z-GL3066 Fuses A1 B1 T11 T12 X1 X2 T22 T35 13 23 33 43
53
61 73 K4
K1
MSR18T 440R-ZBR520AZ1 440R-ZBR520AZ2
K2 K5 K3
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
A2 B2 T31 T32 T33 T34 X3 IF1 14 24 34 44 54 62 74
M
K4
Ground
K5
Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status The two-hand control buttons are not pressed and the motor is OFF.
Operating Principle This is a dual channel system with monitoring of the contactors. It uses the 800Z Zero-Force Touch Buttons connected in a 6-wire configuration. The motor can only be started when both buttons are touched synchronously (within 0.5 sec.). If either or both buttons are released, the outputs at the Minotaur are opened. The Minotaur also monitors the status of the contactors. If one of the contactors becomes stuck in the closed position, the Minotaur will detect the stuck contactor on the next cycle and will not energize its outputs.
18-26
Safeguarding Applications
Two-Hand Control Mechanical Buttons, MSR7R Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 24V AC/DC, 110V AC, 230V AC
L1 L2 L3 Switch 2 Momentary Push Button
Switch 1 Momentary Push Button
A1 S13 S24 41 13 23 33 X1
K1
Minotaur MSR7R K2
Contact Protection e.g. Thermal Cut Out
A2 S14 S23 42 14 24 34 X2
Fuses
M K1
K2 Bulletin 100S or 700S
Circuit Status The 2 hand control buttons are not pressed and the motor is OFF.
Operating Principle This is a dual channel system with monitoring of the contactors. It uses 2 double pole (N.C. & N.O.) positive mode momentary action push switches. The motor can only be started when both buttons are pushed synchronously (within 0.5 sec.). If either or both buttons are released, the outputs at the Minotaur are opened.
18-27
Safeguarding Applications
Notes
18-28
Catalogue Number Index
Catalogue Number Index 100-DS2-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 100-DS2-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 100-DS2-B11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 100-FMA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22, 9-24 100-FMA2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22, 9-24 100-FMC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22, 9-24 100-FMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22, 9-24 100-FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22, 9-24 100-FSC280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-FSC48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-FSC480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-FSD250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-FSV136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-FSV277 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-FSV55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-FSV575 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-JE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 100-SA10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 100-SA20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 100-SB10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 100-SB20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 100S-C09⊗05C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C09⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C09⊗304C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 100S-C09⊗404C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 100S-C12⊗05C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C12⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C12⊗304C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 100S-C12⊗404C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 100S-C16⊗05C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C16⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C16⊗304C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 100S-C16⊗404C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 100S-C23⊗05C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C23⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C23⊗304C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 100S-C23⊗404C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4, 9-6 100S-C30⊗04C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C30⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C37⊗04C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C37⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C43⊗04C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C43⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C60⊗04C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C60⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C72⊗04C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C72⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C85⊗04C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 100S-C85⊗14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3, 9-5 104S-C09⊗012C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C09⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C12⊗012C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8
19-2
104S-C12⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C16⊗012C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C16⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C23⊗012C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C23⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C30⊗010C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C30⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C37⊗010C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C37⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C43⊗010C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C43⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C60⊗010C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C60⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C72⊗010C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C72⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C85⊗010C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 104S-C85⊗210C . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-8 1754-L28BBB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6, 8-10 1754–PCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 1755-A6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8, 8-10 1755-HSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9, 8-10 1755-IB24XOB16. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9, 8-10 1755-IF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9, 8-10 1755-L1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7, 8-10 1755-N2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 1755-OF8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9, 8-10 1755-PB720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8, 8-10 1755–PCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 1761-NET-AIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 1761-NET-DNI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 1794-PS3. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11, 2-17, 2-29, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 2-70 194-315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 194E-125. . . . . . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30, 10-31 194E-160. . . . . . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30, 10-31 194E-250. . . . . . . . . . . 10-29, 10-30, 10-31 194E-25-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-25-C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-30, 10-31 194E-40-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-40-C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-80-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-80-C4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-A100-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A100-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-A100-1756. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A100-3753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194E-A100-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A100-PE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A100-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-A125-160. . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-28
194E-A125-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-A125-1754. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-A135-160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-A160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-A160-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-A160-1754. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-A250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-A250-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-A250-1754. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-A250-315. . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-28 194E-A25-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A25-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-A25-1753-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-A25-1753-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-A25-1756. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A25-3753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194E-A25-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-A315-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-A315-1754. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-A32-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A32-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-A32-1753-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-A32-1753-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-A32-1756. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A32-3753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194E-A32-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A32-PE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A32-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A40-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A40-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-A40-1756. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A40-3753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194E-A40-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A63-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A63-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-A63-1756. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A63-3753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194E-A63-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A63-PE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A63-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A80-1753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A80-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-A80-1756. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-A80-3753. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194E-A80-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-AA00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA00E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA32E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Catalogue Number Index 194E-AA40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA40E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA63E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AA80E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194E-AB-P21-160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-AB-P21-315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-AE125-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 194E-AE160-PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-AE160-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-AE250-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 194E-AE315-PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-AE315-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-A-P11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A-P22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A-PD10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-A-PL11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-B125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-B125-160 . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-28 194E-B125-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-B125-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-B135-160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-B160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-B160-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-B160-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-B250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-31 194E-B250-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-B250-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-B250-315 . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-28 194E-B315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-31 194E-B315-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-B315-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-BF125-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 194E-BF160-PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-BF160-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-BF250-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 194E-BF250-PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-BF250-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-BF315-PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-BF315-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-C3663 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 194E-CA00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA00E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA32E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA40E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA63E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
194E-CA80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-CA80E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-E100-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E100-1753-6N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-E100-1756 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E100-3753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-E100-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E100-PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E100-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-E125-160 . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-28 194E-E125-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-E125-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-E135-160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-E160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-E160-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-E160-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-E250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-E250-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-E250-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-E250-315 . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-28 194E-E25-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E25-1753-6N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-E25-1756 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E25-3753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-E25-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-E315-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-E315-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-E32-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E32-1753-6N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-E32-1756 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E32-3753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-E32-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E32-PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E32-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E40-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E40-1753-6N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-E40-1756 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E40-3753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-E40-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E63-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E63-1753-6N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-E63-1756 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E63-3753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194E-E63-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E63-PE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E63-TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E80-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E80-1753-6N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-E80-1756 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 194E-E80-3753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
194E-E80-NP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-EF-P21-160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-EF-P21-315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-E-P11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E-P22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E-PD10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-E-PL11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 194E-F125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-F125-160 . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-28 194E-F125-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-F125-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-F135-160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-F160. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 194E-F160-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-F160-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-F250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-31 194E-F250-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-F250-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-F250-315 . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-28 194E-F315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-27, 10-31 194E-F315-1753 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-F315-1754 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 194E-FA00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA00E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA32E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA40E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA63E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-FA80E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-G3660 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-G3661 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-G3662 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 194E-G3663 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10, 10-23 194E-G3664 . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-16, 10-23 194E-G3665 . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-16, 10-23 194E-G3666 . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-16, 10-23 194E-G3675 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194E-G3687 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 194E-G3688 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 194E-G3707 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14, 10-16 194E-HE13A-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-HE13G-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-HE13I-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-HE13N-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-HE8A-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-HE8G-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-HE8I-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
19-3
Catalogue Number Index 194E-HE8N-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 194E-KA00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA00E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA32E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA40E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA63E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-KA80E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 194E-Y100-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y25-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y25-1756-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y32-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y32-1756-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y40-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y40-1756-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y63-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y63-1756-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194E-Y80-1753-6N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 194L-A4-000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-A4-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-A4-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-A6-000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-A6-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-A6-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-A8-000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-A8-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-A8-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G2830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14, 10-21 194L-G2853 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 194L-G2864N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G2864R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G2888N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G2888R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G3154N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G3154R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G3155N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G3155R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G3194 . . . . . . . . 10-14, 10-16, 10-21 194L-G3195 . . . . . . . . 10-14, 10-16, 10-21 194L-G3196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G3197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G3380 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 194L-G3393 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14, 10-21 194L-G3394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-14, 10-21 194L-G3399 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 194L-G3515 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3515A . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-28
19-4
194L-G3515B . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-28 194L-G3515C. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-28 194L-G3515D. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-28 194L-G3515E . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-28 194L-G3515F . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-28 194L-G3515G. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-28 194L-G3515H. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-13, 10-28 194L-G3572 . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-16, 10-23 194L-G3573 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 194L-G3576 . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-16, 10-23 194L-G3577 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 194L-G3653 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194L-G3663 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194L-G3664 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194L-G3667 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3667A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3667B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3667C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3667D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3667E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3667F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3667G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3667H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-G3673 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 194L-HC4A-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 194L-HC4A-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 194L-HC4E-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 194L-HC4E-175I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 194L-HC4I-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 194L-HC4I-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 194L-HC4L-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 194L-HC4L-175I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 194L-HC6G-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194L-HC6N-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194L-HCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 194L-HCB-001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194L-HCDC-001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194L-HCDD-001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194L-HCDG-001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194L-HCDH-001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 194L-HE4A . . . . . . . . . 10-19, 10-20, 10-21 194L-HE4A-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4A-175I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4A-375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194L-HE4E-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4E-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4I. . . . . . . . . . 10-19, 10-20, 10-21 194L-HE4I-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4I-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4L-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4L-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19, 10-20
194L-HE4S-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE4S-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6A . . . . . . . . . 10-19, 10-20, 10-21 194L-HE6A-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6A-175I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6A-375 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 194L-HE6E-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6E-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6G. . . . . . . . . 10-19, 10-20, 10-21 194L-HE6G-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6I. . . . . . . . . . 10-19, 10-20, 10-21 194L-HE6I-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6I-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6L-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6L-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6N. . . . . . . . . 10-19, 10-20, 10-21 194L-HE6N-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19, 10-20 194L-HE6S-175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE6S-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE8A-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE8A-175I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE8G-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE8I-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE8I-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-HE8N-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 194L-I4-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-I4-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-I4-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-I6-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-I6-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-I6-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-I8-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-I8-175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 194L-I8-175I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 2030-EUAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUAF-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUAT-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUCF-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUCT-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUFF-1TDA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUFT-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUHF-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUHT-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUJF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Catalogue Number Index 2030-EUJF-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUJT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUJT-1TDA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUNF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUNF-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUNT-1TDA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUPF-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUPT-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUWF-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-EUWT-1TDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 2030-PA1201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PA1203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PC1201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PC1203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PF1201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PF1203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PH0071 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PH0073 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PJ1201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PJ1203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PP0071 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PP0073 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PW0071 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-PW0073 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 2030-RLSAW . . . . . . . . . 12-5, 12-7, 12-12 2030-RLSCW . . . . . . . . . 12-5, 12-7, 12-12 2030-RLSFW . . . . . . . . . 12-5, 12-7, 12-12 2030-RLSHG . . . . . . . . . 12-5, 12-9, 12-15 2030-RLSJW . . . . . . . . . . 12-5, 12-7, 12-12 2030-RLSPG . . . . . . . . . . 12-5, 12-9, 12-15 2030-RLSWG . . . . . . . . . 12-5, 12-9, 12-15 2031*-A0630A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A0630C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A0630F⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A0630J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A0860A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A0860C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A0860F⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A0860J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A1200A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A1200C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A1200F⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-A1200J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 2031*-C0630H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 2031*-C0630P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 2031*-C0630W⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 2031*-C0860H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
2031*-C0860P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031*-C0860W⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031*-C1200H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031*-C1200P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031*-C1200W⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0023A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0023C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0023F⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0023J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0043A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0043C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0043F⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0043J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0085A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0085C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0085F⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0085J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0110A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0110C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0110F⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0110J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0180A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0180C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0180F⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0180J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0210A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0210C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0210F⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0210J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0300A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0300C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0300F⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0300J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0420A⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0420C⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0420F⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-A0420J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0023H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0023P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0023W⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0043H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0043P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0043W⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0085H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0085P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0085W⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0110H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0110P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0110W⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0180H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0180P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0180W⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-4 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5
2031-C0210H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0210P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0210W⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0300H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0300P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0300W⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0420H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0420P⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-C0420W⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0023H⊗. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0023J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0043H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0043J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0085H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0085J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0110H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0110J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0180H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0180J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0210H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0210J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0300H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0300J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0420H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0420J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0630H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0630J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0860H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!0860J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!1200H⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031-!1200J⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0630A⊗-30L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0630A⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0630C⊗-30L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0630C⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0630F⊗-30L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0630F⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0630J⊗-30L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0630J⊗-34L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0860A⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0860C⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0860F⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A0860J⊗-34L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A1200A⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A1200C⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A1200F⊗-34L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-A1200J⊗-34L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630H⊗-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630H⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630H⊗-31B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630H⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630P⊗-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-5 12-4 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-8 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-8
19-5
Catalogue Number Index 2032*-C0630P⊗-30D. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630P⊗-31B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630P⊗-31D. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630W⊗-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630W⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630W⊗-31B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0630W⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860H⊗-31B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860H⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860H⊗-32B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860P⊗-31B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860P⊗-31D. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860P⊗-32B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860W⊗-31B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860W⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C0860W⊗-32B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C1200H⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C1200H⊗-32B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C1200P⊗-31D. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C1200P⊗-32B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C1200W⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . 2032*-C1200W⊗-32B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0023A⊗-24J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0023A⊗-25J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0023C⊗-24J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0023C⊗-25J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0023F⊗-24J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0023F⊗-25J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0023J⊗-24J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0023J⊗-25J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0043A⊗-25J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0043A⊗-26J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0043C⊗-25J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0043C⊗-26J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0043F⊗-25J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0043F⊗-26J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0043J⊗-25J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0043J⊗-26J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0085A⊗-26J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0085A⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0085C⊗-26J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0085C⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0085F⊗-26J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0085F⊗-27J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0085J⊗-26J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0085J⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0110A⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0110A⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0110C⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0110C⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0110F⊗-27J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0110F⊗-28J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19-6
12-9 12-9 12-9 12-8 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-9 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6
2032-A0110J⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0110J⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0180A⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0180A⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0180C⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0180C⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0180F⊗-27J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0180F⊗-28J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0180J⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0180J⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0210A⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0210C⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0210F⊗-28J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0210J⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0300A⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0300A⊗-29J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0300C⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0300C⊗-29J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0300F⊗-28J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0300F⊗-29J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0300J⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0300J⊗-29J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0420A⊗-29J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0420A⊗-30L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0420C⊗-29J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0420C⊗-30L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0420F⊗-29J. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0420F⊗-30L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0420J⊗-29J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-A0420J⊗-30L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023H⊗-23B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023H⊗-24B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023H⊗-25B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023H⊗-25D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023P⊗-23B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023P⊗-24B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023P⊗-25B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023P⊗-25D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023W⊗-23B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023W⊗-24B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023W⊗-25B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0023W⊗-25D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043H⊗-25B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043H⊗-25D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043H⊗-26B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043H⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043P⊗-25B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043P⊗-25D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043P⊗-26B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043P⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043W⊗-25B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043W⊗-25D . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-6 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8
2032-C0043W⊗-26B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0043W⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085H⊗-26B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085H⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085H⊗-27B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085H⊗-27D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085P⊗-26B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085P⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085P⊗-27B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085P⊗-27D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085W⊗-26B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085W⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085W⊗-27B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0085W⊗-27D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110H⊗-26B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110H⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110H⊗-27B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110H⊗-27D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110H⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110P⊗-26B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110P⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110P⊗-27B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110P⊗-27D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110P⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110W⊗-26B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110W⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110W⊗-27B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110W⊗-27D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0110W⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180H⊗-27B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180H⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180H⊗-29B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180H⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180P⊗-27B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180P⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180P⊗-29B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180P⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180W⊗-27B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180W⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180W⊗-29B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0180W⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210H⊗-27B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210H⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210H⊗-29B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210H⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210P⊗-27B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210P⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210P⊗-29B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210P⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210W⊗-27B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210W⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0210W⊗-29B. . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8
Catalogue Number Index 2032-C0210W⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300H⊗-29B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300H⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300H⊗-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300H⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300P⊗-29B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300P⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300P⊗-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300P⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300W⊗-29B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300W⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300W⊗-30B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0300W⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420H⊗-29B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420H⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420H⊗-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420H⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420P⊗-29B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420P⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420P⊗-30B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420P⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420W⊗-29B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420W⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420W⊗-30B. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-C0420W⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0023H⊗-23B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0023H⊗-24B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0023H⊗-25B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0023H⊗-25D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0023J⊗-24J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0023J⊗-25J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0043H⊗-25B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0043H⊗-25D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0043H⊗-26B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0043H⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0043J⊗-25J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0043J⊗-26J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0085H⊗-26B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0085H⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0085H⊗-27B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0085H⊗-27D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0085J⊗-26J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0085J⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0110H⊗-26B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0110H⊗-26D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0110H⊗-27B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0110H⊗-27D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0110H⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0110J⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0110J⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0180H⊗-27B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2032-!0180H⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-6 12-6 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-6 12-6 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-6 12-6 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-6 12-6 12-8 12-8
2032-!0180H⊗-29B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0180H⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0180J⊗-27J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0180J⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0210H⊗-27B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0210H⊗-28D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0210H⊗-29B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0210H⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0210J⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0300H⊗-29B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0300H⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0300H⊗-30B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0300H⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0300J⊗-28J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0300J⊗-29J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0420H⊗-29B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0420H⊗-29D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0420H⊗-30B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0420H⊗-30D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0420J⊗-29J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0420J⊗-30L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0630H⊗-30B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 2032-!0630H⊗30D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 2032-!0630H⊗-31B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 2032-!0630H⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 2032-!0630J⊗-30L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0630J⊗-34L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!0860H⊗-31B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 2032-!0860H⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 2032-!0860H⊗-32B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 2032-!0860J⊗-34L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2032-!1200H⊗-31D . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 2032-!1200H⊗-32B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 2032-!1200J⊗-34L. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 2033*-A0630A⊗-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630A⊗-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630A⊗-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630A⊗-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630A⊗-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630A⊗-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630AV-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630C⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630C⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630C⊗-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630C⊗-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630C⊗-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630C⊗-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630CV-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630F⊗-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630F⊗-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630F⊗-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033*-A0630F⊗-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
2033*-A0630F⊗-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630F⊗-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630FV-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630J⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630J⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630J⊗-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630J⊗-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630J⊗-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630J⊗-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0630JV-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860A⊗-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860A⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860A⊗-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860AV-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860C⊗-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860C⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860C⊗-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860CV-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860F⊗-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860F⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860F⊗-62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860FV-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860J⊗-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860J⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860J⊗-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A0860JV-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200A⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200A⊗-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200A⊗-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200A⊗-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200A⊗-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200C⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200C⊗-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200C⊗-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200C⊗-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200C⊗-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200F⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200F⊗-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200F⊗-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200F⊗-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200F⊗-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200J⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200J⊗-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200J⊗-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200J⊗-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-A1200J⊗-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . .
12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14
19-7
Catalogue Number Index 2033*-C0630H⊗-65K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-68K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630H⊗-69K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-65K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-68K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630P⊗-69K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-58K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-59K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-60K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-61K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-63K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-64K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-65K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-66K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630W⊗-69K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0630WV-68K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860H⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860H⊗-68K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860H⊗-69K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860H⊗-70K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860H⊗-71K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860P⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860P⊗-68K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860P⊗-69K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860P⊗-70K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860P⊗-71K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860W⊗-63K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860W⊗-68K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860W⊗-69K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860W⊗-70K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C0860W⊗-71K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200H⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200H⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200H⊗-71K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200H⊗-72K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200H⊗-73K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200H⊗-74K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200H⊗-75K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200H⊗-76K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200P⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200P⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200P⊗-71K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200P⊗-72K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200P⊗-73K . . . . . . . . . . . .
19-8
12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14
2033*-C1200P⊗-74K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200P⊗-75K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200P⊗-76K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200W⊗-64K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200W⊗-66K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200W⊗-71K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200W⊗-72K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200W⊗-73K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200W⊗-74K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200W⊗-75K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033*-C1200W⊗-76K. . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023A⊗-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023A⊗-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023A⊗-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023A⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023C⊗-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023C⊗-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023C⊗-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023C⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023F⊗-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023F⊗-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023F⊗-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023F⊗-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023J⊗-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023J⊗-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023J⊗-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0023J⊗-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043A⊗-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043A⊗-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043A⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043A⊗-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043A⊗-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043A⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043C⊗-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043C⊗-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043C⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043C⊗-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043C⊗-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043C⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043F⊗-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043F⊗-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043F⊗-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043F⊗-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043F⊗-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043F⊗-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043J⊗-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043J⊗-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043J⊗-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043J⊗-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043J⊗-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0043J⊗-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085A⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10
2033-A0085A⊗-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085A⊗-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085A⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085A⊗-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085A⊗-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085A⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085C⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085C⊗-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085C⊗-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085C⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085C⊗-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085C⊗-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085C⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085F⊗-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085F⊗-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085F⊗-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085F⊗-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085F⊗-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085F⊗-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085F⊗-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085J⊗-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085J⊗-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085J⊗-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085J⊗-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085J⊗-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085J⊗-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0085J⊗-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110A⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110A⊗-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110A⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110A⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110C⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110C⊗-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110C⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110C⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110F⊗-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110F⊗-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110F⊗-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110F⊗-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110J⊗-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110J⊗-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110J⊗-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0110J⊗-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180A⊗-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180A⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180A⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180A⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180A⊗-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180C⊗-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180C⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180C⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180C⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10
Catalogue Number Index 2033-A0180C⊗-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180F⊗-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180F⊗-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180F⊗-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180F⊗-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180F⊗-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180J⊗-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180J⊗-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180J⊗-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180J⊗-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0180J⊗-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210A⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210A⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210A⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210A⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210C⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210C⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210C⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210C⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210F⊗-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210F⊗-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210F⊗-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210F⊗-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210J⊗-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210J⊗-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210J⊗-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0210J⊗-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300A⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300A⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300A⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300A⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300A⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300A⊗-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300A⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300C⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300C⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300C⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300C⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300C⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300C⊗-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300C⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300F⊗-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300F⊗-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300F⊗-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300F⊗-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300F⊗-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300F⊗-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300F⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300J⊗-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300J⊗-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300J⊗-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300J⊗-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-11
2033-A0300J⊗-54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300J⊗-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0300J⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420A⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420A⊗-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420A⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420A⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420A⊗-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420A⊗-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420C⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420C⊗-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420C⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420C⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420C⊗-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420C⊗-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420F⊗-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420F⊗-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420F⊗-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420F⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420F⊗-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420F⊗-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420J⊗-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420J⊗-52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420J⊗-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420J⊗-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420J⊗-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-A0420J⊗-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023H⊗-39K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023H⊗-40K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023H⊗-41K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023H⊗-42K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023P⊗-39K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023P⊗-40K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023P⊗-41K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023P⊗-42K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023W⊗-39K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023W⊗-40K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023W⊗-41K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0023W⊗-42K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043H⊗-42K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043H⊗-43K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043H⊗-44K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043H⊗-45K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043H⊗-46K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043P⊗-42K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043P⊗-43K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043P⊗-44K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043P⊗-45K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043P⊗-46K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043W⊗-42K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043W⊗-43K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043W⊗-44K . . . . . . . . . . .
12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12
2033-C0043W⊗-45K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0043W⊗-46K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085H⊗-44K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085H⊗-45K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085H⊗-46K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085H⊗-47K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085H⊗-48K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085H⊗-49K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085H⊗-50K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085P⊗-44K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085P⊗-45K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085P⊗-46K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085P⊗-47K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085P⊗-48K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085P⊗-49K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085P⊗-50K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085W⊗-44K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085W⊗-45K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085W⊗-46K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085W⊗-47K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085W⊗-48K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085W⊗-49K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0085W⊗-50K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110H⊗-48K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110H⊗-51K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110H⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110H⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110H⊗-55K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110P⊗-48K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110P⊗-51K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110P⊗-52K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110P⊗-53K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110P⊗-55K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110W⊗-48K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110W⊗-51K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110W⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110W⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0110W⊗-55K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-49K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-50K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-51K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-54K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180H⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-49K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-50K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-51K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-52K. . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-13 12-13 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-13 12-13 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13
19-9
Catalogue Number Index 2033-C0180P⊗-53K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-54K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-56K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-57K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-58K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180P⊗-59K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-49K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-50K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-51K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-54K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0180W⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210H⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210H⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210H⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210H⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210H⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210H⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210P⊗-52K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210P⊗-56K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210P⊗-57K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210P⊗-58K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210P⊗-60K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210P⊗-61K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210W⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210W⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210W⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210W⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210W⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0210W⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-54K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-62K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300H⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-53K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-54K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-57K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-58K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-59K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-60K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-61K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-62K. . . . . . . . . . . . .
19-10
12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13
2033-C0300P⊗-63K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300P⊗-64K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-54K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-62K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0300W⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-62K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-65K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420H⊗-67K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-56K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-57K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-60K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-61K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-62K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-63K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-64K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-65K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-66K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420P⊗-67K. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-62K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-65K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-C0420W⊗-67K . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0023H⊗-39K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0023H⊗-40K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0023H⊗-41K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0023H⊗-42K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0023J⊗-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0023J⊗-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0023J⊗-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0023J⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043H⊗-42K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043H⊗-43K . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-12 12-12
2033-!0043H⊗-44K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043H⊗-45K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043H⊗-46K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043J⊗-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043J⊗-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043J⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043J⊗-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043J⊗-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0043J⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085H⊗-44K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085H⊗-45K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085H⊗-46K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085H⊗-47K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085H⊗-48K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085H⊗-49K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085H⊗-50K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085J⊗-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085J⊗-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085J⊗-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085J⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085J⊗-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085J⊗-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0085J⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110H⊗-48K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110H⊗-51K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110H⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110H⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110H⊗-55K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110J⊗-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110J⊗-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110J⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0110J⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-49K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-50K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-51K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-54K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180H⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180J⊗-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180J⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180J⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180J⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0180J⊗-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210H⊗-52K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210H⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210H⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210H⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210H⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-12 12-12 12-12 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-13 12-13 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13
Catalogue Number Index 2033-!0210H⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210J⊗-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210J⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210J⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0210J⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-53K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-54K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-62K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300H⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300J⊗-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300J⊗-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300J⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300J⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300J⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300J⊗-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0300J⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-56K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-57K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-62K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-65K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420H⊗-67K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420J⊗-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420J⊗-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420J⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420J⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420J⊗-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0420J⊗-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-58K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-59K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-60K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-61K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-65K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-68K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630H⊗-69K . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630J⊗-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630J⊗-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630J⊗-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2033-!0630J⊗-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-13 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-10 12-10 12-10 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-13 12-13 12-13 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11
2033-!0630J⊗-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!0630J⊗-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!0630J⊗-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!0860H⊗-63K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!0860H⊗-68K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!0860H⊗-69K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!0860H⊗-70K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!0860H⊗-71K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!0860J⊗-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!0860J⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!0860J⊗-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!0860J⊗-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!1200H⊗-64K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!1200H⊗-66K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!1200H⊗-71K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!1200H⊗-72K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!1200H⊗-73K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!1200H⊗-74K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!1200H⊗-75K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!1200H⊗-76K . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 2033-!1200J⊗-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!1200J⊗-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!1200J⊗-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!1200J⊗-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2033-!1200J⊗-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 2727-G7P20D1P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-G7P20D1P5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-G7P20D1Q6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-MRC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-MREX1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-MRJB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-MRMB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-MRT10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-MRT15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-MRT20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 2727-MRT5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3 42GRL-9000-QD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 42GRR-9000-QD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 42GRU-9000-QD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 42GRU-9200-QD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 440A-A07265 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 440A-A09004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 440A-A09015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 440A-A09018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 440A-A09025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 440A-A09028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 14-2 440A-A09042 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 14-2 440A-A09054 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 14-2 440A-A09055 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 14-2 440A-A09056 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 14-2 440A-A09093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 440A-A09094 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
440A-A09196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65, 14-2 440A-A09197 . . . . . . . . . 2-105, 3-65, 14-2 440A-A17029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 440A-A17030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 440A-A17094 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 440A-A17101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 6-9 440A-A17102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 6-9 440A-A17122 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 440A-A17123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 440A-A17124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 440A-A17125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 440A-A19001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 14-3 440A-A19002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 14-3 440A-A19005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 14-3 440A-A19007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10, 14-3 440E-A13054 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-A13078 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 6-9 440E-A13079 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A13080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A13081 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A13082 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A13083 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A13084 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A13085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 6-9 440E-A17026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17095 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-A17129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-A17130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-A17140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 440E-D13106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-D13108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-D13112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-D13114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-D13118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-D13120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-D13124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-D13132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-D13136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 440E-H05004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440E-H05019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440E-H13046 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440E-H13069 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440E-L13042. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
19-11
Catalogue Number Index 440E-L13043. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13149. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-L13165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 440E-P13045 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8 440F-A0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A0061S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0071N45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0071N60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0071S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0072N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0072S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0073S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0074N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0074S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0075N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0075S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0076S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A007IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A007IS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A0116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A108433 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80, 2-85 440F-A1181 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A1183 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A1185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A1186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A1301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1302N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1302S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1303N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1303S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1308 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 440F-A1318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
19-12
440F-A17141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 440F-A17142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 440F-A17143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-A2450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A2700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A3084 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 440F-A3230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-C251D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104 440F-C251P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104 440F-C252D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104 440F-C4000P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85 440F-C4000S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85 440F-E0110N05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0110N10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0110N20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0110R05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0110R10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0110R20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0110S05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0110S10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0110S20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0118S05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E0118S10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E0118S20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E0210S05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E0210S10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E0210S20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E0310S05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0310S10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0310S20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0510S05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0510S10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0510S20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0804S05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0804S10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E0804S20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E1111S05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E1111S10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E1111S20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 440F-E1610N05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E1610N10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E1610N20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E1610S05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E1610S10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-E1610S20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 440F-EBGCU03560 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 440F-ECAKV01250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 440F-ECFGD01250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 440F-EDFHV00490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 440F-M1010BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M1030BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M1510BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
440F-M1515BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M1530BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M1836BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M2010BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M2015BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M2020BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M2025BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-M2030BYNN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-R1112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R1212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R1212PB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R1212PR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R1212PY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R1214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R1215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R1216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R1219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R2151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-R2152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 440F-T10105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T102933 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-T102935 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-T10305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T15105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T15155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T15305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T18365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T20105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T20155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T20205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T20253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T20305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 440F-T3012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 440F-T3013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 440F-T3014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 440F-T3015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 440F-T3120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-T3210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 440F-T3211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 440F-T3216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-T3220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-T3310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 440F-T3316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-T3320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 440F-T3411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 440G-A07136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33, 14-3 440G-A07180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33, 14-3 440G-A07269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33, 14-3 440G-A27011 . . . . . 3-11, 3-17, 3-22, 3-30, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37, 5-29, 14-4 440G-A27140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 440G-A27142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Catalogue Number Index 440G-A27143. . . . . . . . . .3-22, 3-30, 3-37, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29, 14-4 440G-A27163. . . . . . . . . .3-12, 3-17, 3-22, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30, 3-37 440G-A27207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 440G-A27208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 440G-A36026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25, 14-4 440G-A36050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25, 14-4 440G-L07247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07298 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07299 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-L07303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 440G-MT47007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47031 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47034 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47036 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47037 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47038 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47042 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47043 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 440G-MT47044 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
440G-MT47045 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47046 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47049 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47069 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47071 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47072 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47073 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47075 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47076 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47077 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47078 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47079 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47081 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47082 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47083 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT47120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36044 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36045 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36046 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36049 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36058 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36059 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36061 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36062 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-S36063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29
440G-T27138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27169 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27174 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27181 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27183 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27184 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27237 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27241 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27243 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27244 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27246 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27247 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27251 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27252 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27253 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27254 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27255 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27256 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27257 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27258 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27259 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-T27262 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22031 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22037 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22038 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440H-E22039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-75 3-75 3-75 3-75 3-75 3-75 3-75 3-75 3-75
19-13
Catalogue Number Index 440H-E22040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22049 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22052 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22053 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22054 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22055 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22056 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22057 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22058 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22059 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22061 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22062 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-E22063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 440H-H03077. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440H-H03100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440H-P03035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8 440H-R03074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 440H-R03078 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 440H-R03079 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 440H-R03088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 440H-R03111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 440H-R03112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77 440H-S34010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34023 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440H-S34030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 440K-A11094 . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-17, 14-4 440K-A11095 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17, 14-5 440K-A11112 . . . . . 3-11, 3-17, 3-22, 3-30, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37, 5-29, 14-5 440K-A11115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 440K-A11144 . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-17, 14-5 440K-A11238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11, 14-5
19-14
440K-A17116 . . . . . . . . . . 3-22, 3-37, 14-5 440K-A21006 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-7, 14-6 440K-A21014 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-7, 14-6 440K-A21030 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-7, 14-6 440K-A21069 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3, 14-6 440K-A27010 . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-17, 14-6 440K-A33624 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3, 14-6 440K-B04025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 440K-B04026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 440K-B04039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 440K-B04040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 440K-B04046 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 440K-B04047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 440K-B04048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 440K-B04049 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 440K-C21048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21052 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21054 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21055 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21057 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21058 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21061 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21062 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21065 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21067 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21089 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21091 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21094 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21095 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21096 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-C21098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 440K-E33014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33031 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33036 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33037 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
440K-E33045 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33046 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33075 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33076 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33077 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33078 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33079 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-E33080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 440K-H04035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440K-H04036 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440K-H04037 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440K-H04038 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440K-H11145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440K-H11160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440K-H11161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 440K-MT55002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55042 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55045 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55052 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55060 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55061 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55062 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55065 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55066 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55070 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55075 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55076 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55077 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55078 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55079 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55080 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55081 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55082 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55083 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55084 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55086 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 440K-MT55087 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Catalogue Number Index 440K-MT55088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55089 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55091 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55093 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55094 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55095 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55096 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-MT55106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11089 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11167 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11174 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11188 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11268 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11273 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11
440K-T11276 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11287 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11288 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11337 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11339 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11363 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11366 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11367 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11368 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11369 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11371 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11372 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11384 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11385 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11386 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11387 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11388 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11389 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11391 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11392 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11393 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11394 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11395 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11396 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11397 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11398 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11399 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11407 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11409 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11412 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16
440K-T11413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11419 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11421 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11423 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11424 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11429 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11431 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11433 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11434 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11435 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11436 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11437 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11438 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11439 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11441 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11445 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11447 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11448 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11449 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11451 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11452 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11453 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11454 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11455 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11456 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11457 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11458 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11459 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11460 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11461 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11462 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11463 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440K-T11465 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-11 3-16
19-15
Catalogue Number Index 440K-T11466 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 440K-T11467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 440K-T11468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 440K-T11469 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 440K-T11470 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 440K-T11471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 440K-T11472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 440L-A2MIRSTND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 440L-A3MIRSTND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 440L-AF6101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 440L-AF6102 . . . . . 2-17, 2-29, 2-37, 2-43 440L-AF6103 . . . . . . . . . . 2-29, 2-37, 2-43 440L-AF6104 . . . . . . . . . . 2-29, 2-37, 2-43 440L-AF6105 . . . . . . . . . . 2-17, 2-29, 2-37 440L-AF6108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 440L-ALAT. . . . . . . 2-17, 2-29, 2-37, 2-48 440L-ALBRK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29, 2-37 440L-ALBRK1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 440L-AM1200300. . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1200450. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1200600. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1200750. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1200900. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1201050. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1201200. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1201350. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1201500. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM1201650. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 440L-AM1201800. . . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-29 440L-AM120BRK . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-21, 2-29 440L-AMBRK1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48, 2-50 440L-AMBRK4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 440L-AMIRR1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48, 2-50 440L-AMIRR2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48, 2-50 440L-AMIRR3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 440L-AMIRSTDZ500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-AMKIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 440L-AMSTD . . . . . 2-11, 2-17, 2-21, 2-29 440L-AMTSTND2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 440L-AMTSTND3B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 440L-AMUTLP10M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 440L-AMUTLP2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 440L-AMUTSTDLP2B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 440L-AMUTSTDLP3B . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 440L-ASHIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 440L-B4B0150-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4B0300-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4B0450-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4B0600-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4B0750-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4B0900-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4D0150-N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
19-16
440L-B4D0300-N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4D0450-N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4D0600-N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4D0750-N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-B4D0900-N. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4B0900-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4B1050-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4B1200-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4B1350-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4B1500-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4D0900-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4D1050-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4D1200-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4D1350-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-C4D1500-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 440L-M8100 . . . . . . 2-28, 2-38, 2-61, 2-64 440L-M8200 . .2-16, 2-28, 2-36, 2-47, 2-59 440L-M8400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 440L-M8500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 440L-P40480KYD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4B0300-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B0450-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B0600-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B0750-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B0900-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B1050-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B1200-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B1350-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B1500-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B1650-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4B1800-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D0300-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D0450-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D0600-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D0750-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D0900-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D1050-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D1200-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D1350-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D1500-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D1650-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4D1800-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 440L-P4G1500M-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-P4G1500-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-P4G2502-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 440L-P4H2500M-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-P4H2500-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-P4H3220M-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-P4H3220-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-P4H3400M-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-P4H3400-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 440L-P4H4120-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
440L-P4J0320YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J0480YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J0640YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J0800YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J0960YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J1120YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J1280YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J1440YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J1600YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4J1760YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K0320YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K0640YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K0800YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K0960YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K1120YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K1280YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K1440YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K1600YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-P4K1760YD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 440L-R4F0018-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 440L-R4F0070-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 440L-R4F90018-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 440L-R4F90070-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 440L-T4F0018-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 440L-T4F0070-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 440L-T4F90018-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 440L-T4F90070-Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 440N-A02005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43, 3-47 440N-A02025. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 440N-A02056. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 440N-A02057. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 440N-A02071. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 440N-A02128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 440N-A15005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 440N-A32019. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-A32020. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-A32025. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-A32041. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-C02067. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 440N-C02068. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 440N-C02070. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 440N-C02076. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 440N-C02078. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 440N-C02079. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69 440N-G02001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 440N-G02002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 440N-G02003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 440N-G02004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 440N-G02008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 440N-G02009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 440N-G02013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 440N-G02014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Catalogue Number Index 440N-G02015 440N-G02019 440N-G02022 440N-G02023 440N-G02028 440N-G02032 440N-G02033 440N-G02038 440N-G02040 440N-G02041 440N-G02043 440N-G02044 440N-G02045 440N-G02048 440N-G02049 440N-G02055 440N-G02058 440N-G02059 440N-G02060 440N-G02061 440N-G02075 440N-G02077 440N-G02082 440N-G02083 440N-G02085 440N-G02088 440N-G02089 440N-G02090 440N-G02092 440N-G02093 440N-G02094 440N-G02095 440N-G02096 440N-G02097 440N-G02098 440N-G02099 440N-G02112 440N-G02113 440N-G02117 440N-G02118 440N-G02119 440N-G02123 440N-H02046 440N-H02047 440N-H02086 440N-H02087 440N-N15013 440N-N15015 440N-N15017 440N-N15021 440N-N15023 440N-N15024
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53, 16-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53, 16-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
440N-N15027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 440N-N15028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 440N-N15040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 440N-N15041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65 440N-S32013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 440N-S32014 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32016 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 440N-S32022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32023 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32036 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32037 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32038 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32046 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61 440N-S32052 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 440P-CALB03B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALB03E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALB03R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALB12B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALB12E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALB12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALM12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALM12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALM12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALS11D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CALS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CDPB03B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPB03E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPB03R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPB12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPB12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPB12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPM12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPM12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPM12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPS11B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPS11D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CDPS11E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CHLB03B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CHLB03E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CHLB03R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CHLB12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CHLB12E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 440P-CHLB12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
440P-CHLM12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CHLM12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CHLM12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CHLS11B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CHLS11D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CHLS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHB03B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHB03E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHB03R6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHB12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHB12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHB12R6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHM12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHM12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHM12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHS11D4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-COHS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPB03B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPB03E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPB03R6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPB12B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPB12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPB12R6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPM12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPM12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPM12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPS11D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRPS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRB03B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRB03E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRB03R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRB12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRB12E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRB12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRM12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRM12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRM12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRS11B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRS11D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CRRS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLB03B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLB03E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLB03R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLB12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLB12E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLB12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLM12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLM12E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLM12R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440P-CSLS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4
19-17
Catalogue Number Index 440P-CSLS11D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-CSLS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 440P-M18001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 440P-M18002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 440P-MALB04B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALB04E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALB04M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALB13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALB13E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALB13M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALB22B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALB22E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALB22M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALS11B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALS11E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MALS11N5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB04B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB04E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB04M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB13E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB13M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB22B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB22E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARB22M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MARS11N5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 440P-MDPB04B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPB04E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPB04M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPB13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPB13E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPB13M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPB22B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPB22E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPB22M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MDPS11N5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB04B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB04E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB04M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB13E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB13M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB22B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB22E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPB22M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPS11B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MRPS11N5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
19-18
440P-MSLB04B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLB04E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLB04M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLB13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLB13E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLB13M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLB22B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLB22E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLB22M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSLS11N5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 440P-MSRB04B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRB04E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRB04M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRB13B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRB13E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRB13M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRB22B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRB22E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRB22M9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MSRS11N5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB04B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB04E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB04M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB13E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB13M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB22B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB22E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAB22M9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAS11B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAS11E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440P-MTAS11N5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 440R-A07138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 440R-A31562 . . . . 2-85, 2-105, 3-57, 3-69, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11, 4-13, 4-15, 4-17, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43, 4-45, 4-51, 4-63, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67, 4-71, 5-17, 14-6 440R-A32003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-11 440R-B23020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 440R-C23017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 440R-C23018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 440R-C23019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 440R-C23136 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 2-85, 4-41 440R-C23137 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 2-85, 4-41 440R-C23139 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 2-85, 4-41
440R-D23021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 440R-D23022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 440R-D23023 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 440R-D23024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 440R-D23025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 440R-D23026 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 440R-D23163 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 440R-D23164 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 440R-D23166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 440R-D23168 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 440R-D23169 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 440R-D23171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 440R-D23201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 440R-D23202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 440R-E21356 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 440R-E21357 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 440R-E21358 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 440R-E23030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 440R-E23031 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 440R-E23097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23192 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23193 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-E23195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 440R-F23027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 440R-F23028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 440R-F23199 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 440R-F23200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 440R-G23029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 440R-G23067 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 440R-G23068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 440R-G23107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 440R-G23108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 440R-G23110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 440R-H23176 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 440R-H23177 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 440R-H23178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 440R-H23179 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 440R-H23180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 440R-H23181 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 440R-H23182 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 440R-H23183 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 440R-H23184 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 440R-H23185 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 440R-H23196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 440R-J23099 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85, 4-31
Catalogue Number Index 440R-J23100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85, 4-31 440R-J23102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85, 4-31 440R-J23103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 440R-J23104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 440R-J23106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 440R-M23048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 440R-M23057 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 440R-M23081 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23082 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23084 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23086 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23088 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23089 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23092 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 440R-M23203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 440R-M23204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 440R-N23112 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-37 440R-N23113 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-37 440R-N23114 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-37 440R-N23115 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47, 4-37 440R-N23116 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47, 4-37 440R-N23117 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47, 4-37 440R-N23118 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-37 440R-N23119 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-37 440R-N23120 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-37 440R-N23121 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47, 4-37 440R-N23122 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47, 4-37 440R-N23123 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47, 4-37 440R-N23124 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
440R-N23125 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 440R-N23126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 440R-N23127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 440R-N23128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 440R-N23129 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 440R-N23130 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-39 440R-N23131 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-39 440R-N23132 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-39 440R-N23133 . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-16, 2-28, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36, 2-47, 2-70, 4-39 440R-N23134 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-39 440R-N23135 . . . . . 2-10, 2-16, 2-28, 2-36, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47, 2-70, 4-39 440R-N23197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 440R-N23198 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 440R-P23071 . . . . . 2-10, 2-29, 2-37, 4-21 440R-P23073 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85, 4-25 440R-P23074 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85, 4-25 440R-S07139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 440R-S07140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 440R-S07279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 440R-S07280 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 440R-S07281 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 440R-S07282 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 440R-S07283 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 440R-S07284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 440R-S23173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 440R-S23174 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 440R-S23175 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 440R-S35001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 440R-S35002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 440R-S35003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 440R-T07114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 440R-ZBE820AZ1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 440R-ZBE820AZ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 440R-ZBR520AZ1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 440R-ZBR520AZ2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 440T-AACA10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-AACA11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-ACAD10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 440T-ACHA10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 440T-AIPB10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-AIPB20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15, 5-17 440T-AIPB22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-AIPB23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15, 5-17 440T-AIPB24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 440T-AIPB30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
440T-AIPB33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 440T-AIPB34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 440T-AIPB35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 440T-AIPB40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 440T-AIPB44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 440T-AIPB45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 440T-AKEYE10 . . . . 5-9, 5-13, 5-15, 5-17, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19, 5-21, 5-23, 5-29, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30, 5-31, 5-32, 5-33 440T-AKEYE100A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 440T-ASCBE11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9, 5-33 440T-ASCBE14. . . . . 5-9, 5-13, 5-15, 5-17, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19, 5-21, 5-23, 5-29, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30, 5-31, 5-32, 5-33 440T-ASFC10. . . . . . 5-9, 5-13, 5-15, 5-17, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19, 5-21, 5-23, 5-29, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30, 5-31, 5-33 440T-ASFC11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32, 5-33 440T-MDALE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 440T-MDALE100B0C . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 440T-MDALE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 440T-MDBLE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MDBLE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MDBLE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MDBLE13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MDBLE14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MDBLE15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MDBLE16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MDBLE17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MDCLE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 440T-MDCLE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 440T-MDMSE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MDMSE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MDMSE20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MDMSE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MDMSE30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MDMSE33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MDSLE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MDSLE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MDSLE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MDSLE20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MDSLE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MDSLE23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MDSSE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MDSSE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MDSSE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MDSSE20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MDSSE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MDSSE23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MDTUE10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MDTUE11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MDTUE20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
19-19
Catalogue Number Index 440T-MDTUE22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MDTUE30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MDTUE33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MERSE10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5 440T-MERSE12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5 440T-MKEXE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE110A0B0B . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 440T-MKEXE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MKEXE39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 440T-MRKSE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRKSE100C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 440T-MRKSE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRKSE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRKSE13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRKSE14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRKSE16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRPSE10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRPSE11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRPSE12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRPSE13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRPSE14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRPSE16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MRPSE20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 440T-MSALE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 440T-MSBLE10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MSBLE100B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 440T-MSBLE11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MSBLE12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
19-20
440T-MSBLE13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 440T-MSCLE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 440T-MSGAU10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 440T-MSGAU11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 440T-MSGAU12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 440T-MSGAU13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 440T-MSGAU14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 440T-MSGAU17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 440T-MSGAU18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 440T-MSMSE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MSMSE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MSMSE20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MSMSE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MSMSE30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MSMSE33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 440T-MSRUE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSRUE46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 440T-MSSLE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MSSLE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MSSLE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 440T-MSSSE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MSSSE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MSSSE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MSSSE20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MSSSE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MSSSE23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 440T-MSTUE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MSTUE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MSTUE110A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 440T-MSTUE20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MSTUE22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MSTUE30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-MSTUE33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 440T-VMVLE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 440T-VMVLE11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 440T-VMVLE12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 440T-VMVLE13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 440T-VMVLE14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 440T-VMVLE15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 440T-VMVLE18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 440T-VMVLE19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 440T-VPVLE10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
442L-AF6106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-19 442L-AF6107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17, 2-19 442L-ALBK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 442L-MDNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-53 442L-PA40314CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40314DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40330CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40330DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40414CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40414DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40430CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40430DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40614CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40614DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40630CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40630DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40714CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40714DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40730CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40730DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40914CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40914DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA40930CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA40930DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41014CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41014DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41030CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41030DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41214CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41214DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41230CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41230DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41314CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41314DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41330CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41330DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41514CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41514DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41530CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41530DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41614CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41614DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41630CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41630DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41814CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41814DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-PA41830CBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 442L-PA41830DBCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 442L-SCCFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 442L-SCPWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 442L-SSFZN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 60-2439. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Catalogue Number Index 60-2681. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 6556-GMPV300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 6556–MLCBK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 6556-MLCBKDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 700S-CF440⊗C . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18, 9-19 700S-CF530⊗C . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18, 9-19 700S-CF620⊗C . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18, 9-19 700S-DCP1020Z24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-DCP220Z24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-DCP310Z24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-DCP350Z24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-DCP440Z24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-DCP530Z24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-DCP620Z24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-DCP710Z24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-P1020⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-P220⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-P310⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-P350⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-P440⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-P530⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-P620⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 700S-P710⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 800E-15YE112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 800E-16YE112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 800E-19AE100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 800E-1PY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 800E-2DL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-2DL3R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-2DL5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-2DL5R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-2LX01L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800E-2LX01LS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800E-2LX11L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800E-2PY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 800E-2TL5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-2TL5R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-2TL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-2TL7R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-2X01L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-3DL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-3DL3R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-3DL5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-3DL5R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-3LX01L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800E-3LX01S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800E-3LX11L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800E-3PY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 800E-3TL5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-3TL5R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-3TL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-3TL7R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
800E-3X01L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800E-5PY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 800E-AHA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 800E-AHA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 800E-AW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 800EM-LMJP24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800EM-LMP24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800EM-MP24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800EM-MT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800EM-MTS44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800E-N157A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 800E-N157R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 800E-N169A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 800E-N169R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 800EP-MKR44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800EP-MKR64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800EP-MKZ44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800EP-MKZ64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800EP-MT4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800EP-MTS44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800ES-LMJP24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800ES-LMP24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 800ES-MP24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 800HC-FRXT6A1S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800HC-FRXT6A5S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800HC-FRXT6D4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800H-FRXT6A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800H-FRXT6A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800H-FRXT6D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800H-FRXTP16RA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800H-FRXTP26RA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800H-FRXTPH16RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800H-FRXTPH26RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800H-FRXTQ10RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800H-FRXTQ24RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800H-FRXTQH10RA1. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800H-FRXTQH24RA1. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800H-W690 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 800P-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 800P-B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 800P-N150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 800TC-FX6A1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800TC-FX6A5S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800TC-FX6D4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800TC-FXT6A1S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800TC-FXT6A5S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800TC-FXT6D4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800T-FX6A1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800T-FX6A5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800T-FX6D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 800T-FXP16RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 800T-FXP26RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
800T-FXPH16RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXPH26RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXQ10RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXQ24RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXQH10RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXQH24RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXT6A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXT6A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXT6D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXTP16RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXTP26RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXTPH16RA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXTPH26RA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXTQ10RA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXTQ24RA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXTQH10RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-FXTQH24RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-X646 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800T-X646EM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-G2AH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-G3AG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-G3AG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-G3AH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GF2065 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GF2065B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GF2Q5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GF2Q5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GF3065 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GF3065B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GF3Q5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GF3Q5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GL2065 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GL2065B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GL2Q5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GL2Q5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GL3065 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GL3065B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GL3Q5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-GL3Q5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-HAG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-HAH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-HAH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-HF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-HF1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-HL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-HL1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800Z-N11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802M-NX10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802T-APD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802T-ATPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802T-DPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802T-DTPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-18 6-18 6-18 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-20 6-20 11-4 11-4 11-4 11-4 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-3 11-8 11-8 11-8 11-7 11-7 11-7 11-7 11-8 2-38 7-15 7-15 7-15 7-15
19-21
Catalogue Number Index 802T-K1PD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 802T-K1TPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 802T-KPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 802T-KTPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 802T-W1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 802T-W1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 802T-W1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 802T-W1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 871A-TR4-D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TR4-DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TR5-D1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TR5-DM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TS4-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TS4-D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TS4-DM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TS4-DM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TS5-D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 871A-TS5-DM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 872C-D10NN30-E2 . . . . . . . . . .4-67, 5-17 872C-D10NP30-E2 . . . . . . . . . .4-67, 5-17 872C-D3NN12-E2 . . . . . . . . . . .4-67, 5-17 872C-D3NP12-E2 . . . . . . . . . . .4-67, 5-17 872C-D5NN18-E2 . . . . . . . . . . .4-67, 5-17 872C-D5NP18-E2 . . . . . . . . . . .4-67, 5-17 888D-M4AC1-1F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 888D-M4AC8-4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 888D-M4AC9-4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 888D-M5AC1-1F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 888D-M5AC8-4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 888D-M5AC9-4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 888D-M8AC8-4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 888D-M8AC9-4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 888M-M12AE-0F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20 888M-M12X9AE-0F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20 888R-M6AC1-1F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 888R-M6AC8-4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 888R-M6AC9-4N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 889D-E4DC-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 889D-F4AC-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F4AC-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F4AC-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F4AC-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F4AC-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F4AC-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F4ACDM-⊗ . . . . . . 15-5, 15-6, 15-7 889D-F4DC-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 889D-F5AC-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F5AC-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F5AC-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F5AC-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F5AC-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F5AC-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
19-22
889D-F8AB-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 15-10 889D-F8AB-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 15-10 889D-F8AB-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 15-10 889D-F8AB-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 15-10 889D-F8AB-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 15-10 889D-F8AB-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9, 15-10 889D-F8AC-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F8AC-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F8AC-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F8AC-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F8AC-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-F8AC-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 889D-M4DC-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 889D-R4DC-H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 889D-R8AB-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 889D-R8AB-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 889D-R8AB-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 889D-R8AB-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 889D-R8AB-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 889D-R8AB-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 889M-E12AH-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 889M-F12AH-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12AH-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12AH-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12AH-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12AH-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12AH-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12AHMU-0M3 . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14 889M-F12AHMU-0M6 . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14 889M-F12AHMU-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14 889M-F12AHMU-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14 889M-F12AHMU-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14 889M-F12AH-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 889M-F12X9AE-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12X9AE-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12X9AE-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12X9AE-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12X9AE-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-F12X9AE-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 889M-M12AH-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 889M-R12AH-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 889R-F6ACA-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 889R-F6ACA-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 889R-F6ACA-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 889R-F6ECRM-⊗ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 897H-G231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7 898D-41KU-DM. . . . . . . . 15-6, 15-7, 15-9 898D-41LU-DM . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-5, 15-9 898D-43KY-D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 898D-43LY-D4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 898D-44KT-DM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6 898D-44LT-DM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
898D-48KT-DM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6 898D-48LT-DM4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 898D-P48JT-A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 898D-P48JT-A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 898R-61MU-RM . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8, 15-9 898R-P68MT-A10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 898R-P68MT-A5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 92-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Comprehensive Product Index
Comprehensive Product Index
Applied Safety Solutions/Presence Sensing Safety Devices Applied Safety Solutions
IEC Load Switches
Machine Safety Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Advanced Burner Management Systems . . . . 13-3 Press Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Bulletin 194E
Connection Systems Safety Connection Systems • • • • •
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 Safety Wired T-Port, DC Micro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 Safety Wired Distribution Box, DC Micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Safety Wired Distribution Box, AC Micro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8 Safety Wired Shorting Plug, DC Micro & AC Micro . . . . . . 15-9
Cordsets and Patchcords • • • • •
DC Micro Cordset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 AC Micro Cordset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11 Mini and Mini-Plus Cordset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12 M23 Cordset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13 M23 Patchcord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Field Attachable Connectors • DC Micro, Screw Terminal Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15 • DC Micro, Insulation Displacement Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16 • M23, Solder Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Receptacles • DC Micro, Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18 • AC Micro, Male. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19 • M23, Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
• 25 Amps to 100 Amps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 • 125 Amps to 315 Amps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Interlock Switches Tongue Switches • • • • •
Elf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cadet 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Trojan T15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Trojan 5 & 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 MT-GD2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Guard Locking Switches • • • • •
Spartan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TLS-GD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Atlas 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440G-MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centurion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24 3-28 3-32 3-36 3-40
Non contact Switches • • • • • • • • •
Ferrogard 1, 2, 20 & 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferrogard 3, 4 & 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferrogard 6, 9 & 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferrogard GD2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferrogard GS1 & GS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sipha Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sipha Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sentinel 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferrocode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-42 3-46 3-48 3-50 3-52 3-56 3-60 3-64 3-68
Contactors & Control Relays
Hinge Switches
Safety Contactors
• Sprite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72 • Ensign 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74 • Rotacam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
• • • •
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 100S-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 104S-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 100S-D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Safety Control Relays • 700S-CF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 • 700S-P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Emergency Stop Devices Cable (Rope) Pull Switches • Lifeline Rope Tensioner System (LRTS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 • Lifeline 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 • Lifeline 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Push Buttons • 800 E-Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Hazardous Location Explosion Proof Switches • Ex Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 • Rotary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Galvanic Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Pneumatic Switches • Lifeline 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8 • Rotacam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
20-2
MobileView Guard Terminal Interfaces G750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Position (Limit) Switch Safety Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 • • • •
Small Plastic Senator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Large Metal Senator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 802T Direct Opening Action NEMA-Style Switches . . . . . 7-14 Imp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Presence Sensing Safety Devices Safety Light Curtains • • • • • •
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 GuardShield Light Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 SafeShield Light Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Point of Operation Control (POC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Perimeter Access Control (PAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Area Access Control (AAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Safety Light Curtain Interfaces • • • •
SafeShield DeviceNet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120V AC Power Supply and Safety Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52 2-54 2-58 2-60
Comprehensive Product Index
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches/Safety Isolation System Safety Laser Scanner • Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 • SafeZone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Safety Mats • • • •
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 MatGuard Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 MatGuard Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84 MatGuard Mat Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Safety Edges • Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 • Safedge Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 • Safedge Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Prosafe Trapped Key Interlock Switches Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Rotary Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Solenoid Release Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Electronic Timed-Delay Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Stopped Motion Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Exchange Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Bolt Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Access/Chain Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Slamlock Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Slamlock Electrical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Valve Lock, 3 Port Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Miniature Valve Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Switchgear Adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Safeguarding Applications Notes for Use with Application Circuit Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Light Curtains • POC, 440L-M8200, Bulletin 100S, PLC, Dual Channel . . . . 18-3 • POC, 440L-M8100 (Muting), Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4 • POC, Bulletin 800, MSR22LM (Muting), Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5 • POC, Bulletin 800, MSR22LM (PSDI), Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6 • AAC, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Tongue Interlocks • Trojan 5, Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel . . . . . 18-8 • Trojan 5, Bulletin 800, MSR9T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9 • Trojan 5, MSR10RD, Bulletin 100S, PLC, Dual Channel . . 18-10 • Interlocks, Bulletin 800, MSR18T, PLC, Dual Channel . . . 18-11
Guardlocking Interlock
Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, CU2, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, MSR200, Bulletin 100S, Bulletin 160, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Atlas 5 (Auto Release), Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Atlas 5 (Manual Release), Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Atlas 5, Bulletin 800, CU2, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18-14 18-15 18-16 18-17 18-18 18-19
Non Contact Interlocks • Ferrogard 6, Bulletin 800, MSR5T, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20 • Ferrogard 6, Bulletin 800, MSR8T, Bulletin 100S, Single Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Position (Limit) Interlocks • 2 x Imp, Bulletin 800, MSR9T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22 • 3 x Imp, Bulletin 800, MSR9R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23 • 3 x Imp, Bulletin 800, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
Cable Pull E-Stop • Lifeline 4, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . 18-25
Two-Hand Control • 800Z, MSR18T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . 18-26 • Mechanical Buttons, MSR7R, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel 18-27
Safety Isolation System ElectroGuard Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Non Combination Systems (for North America). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Non Combination Systems (Outside North America) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Combination Systems with Fusible Disconnect (for North America). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Combination Systems with Fusible Disconnect (Outside North America) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker (for North America) . . . . . . 12-10 Combination Systems with Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker (Outside North America) . 12-12 Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Typical Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 Wire Length Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 Ordering Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
• TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, Bulletin 100S, PLC, Dual Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12 • TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, MSR6R/T, Bulletin 100S, Dual Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13 • TLS-GD2, Bulletin 800, CU1, Bulletin 100S,
20-3
Comprehensive Product Index
Safety Relays/Two-Hand Control Devices Safety PLCs
Modular Monitoring Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
GuardPLC System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 GuardPLC 1200 Packaged Safety Controller . . . 8-6 GuardPLC 2000 Safety System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
• • • • • • • •
Safety Relays Why Use a Minotaur? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Quick Guide to Safety System Architectures . . 4-3 Minotaur Safety Relay Selection Navigator . . . . 4-4 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Monitoring Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Minotaur MSR5T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Minotaur MSR6R/T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Minotaur MSR8T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Minotaur MSR9T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Minotaur MSR18T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Minotaur MSR22LM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Minotaur MSR23M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Minotaur MSR30RT/RTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Minotaur MSR33RT/RTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Minotaur MSR121RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Minotaur MSR123RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Minotaur MSR124RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Minotaur MSR126RT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Minotaur MSR127RP/TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Minotaur MSR131RTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Monitoring Safety Relays w/Delayed Outputs . 4-42 • • • •
Minotaur MSR10D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Minotaur MSR15D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Minotaur MSR38D/DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Minotaur MSR138DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Two Hand Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 • Minotaur MSR7R & MSR7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 • Minotaur MSR35H/HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 • Minotaur MSR125H/HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Expansion Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 • Minotaur MSR19E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 • Minotaur MSR122E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 • Minotaur MSR132E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Timing Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 • CU1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 • CU4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Stop Motion Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 • CU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 • CU2 Sensor Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Back EMF Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 • CU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
20-4
Minotaur MSR210P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minotaur MSR211P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minotaur MSR220P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minotaur MSR221P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minotaur MSR230P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minotaur MSR238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minotaur MSR240P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minotaur MSR245P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-72 4-74 4-76 4-78 4-80 4-82 4-84 4-86
Two-Hand Control Devices Zero-Force Touch Buttons • 800Z General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 • 800Z Heavy Industrial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Sales Offices
Worldwide(non US). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2 United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Sales Offices
Worldwide Worldwide Australia Adelaide, SA . . . . . . . . . . (61) 8 8365 1002 Brisbane, QLD . . . . . . . . (61) 7 3849 8844 Melbourne, VIC . . . . . . . (61) 3 9896 0300 Perth, WA . . . . . . . . . . . (61) 8 9315 9244 Sydney, NSW . . . . . . . . . (61) 2 9428 2622
Austria Linz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (43) 732-389-090
Argentina Buenos Aires . . . . . . . . (54) 11-4779-4000
Bahrain Manama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (973) 593-318
Bangladesh Uttar Pradesh . . . . . . . . . . (91) 575-77-113
Belgium Brussels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (32) 2-661-4620
Brazil Bahia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (55) 71-341-0888 Belo Horizonte. . . . . . . (55) 31-3227-4099 Campinas . . . . . . . . . . . (55) 19-3255-6162 Rio de Janeiro. . . . . . . . (55) 21-1084-1044 Rio Grande do Sul . . . . . (55) 51-592-7133 São Paulo . . . . . . . . . . . (55) 11-3168-8912 Volta Redonda . . . . . . . . (55) 24-348-1788
Czech Republic Prague . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (420) 2-6710-7413
Denmark Dominican Republic Santo Domingo. . . . . . . . (1) 809-549-2851
France Germany
Colombia Bogota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (57) 1-422-3822
Costa Rica, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Peru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 414-382-2738
21-2
Poland Portugal Porto Salvo . . . . . . . . . . (351) 21-422-5500
Haan-Gruiten . . . . . . . . . . (49) 2104-9600
Puerto Rico San Juan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 809-753-2674
Ghana Accra North . . . . . . . . . . (233) 21-302-728
Hong Kong Hong Kong . . . . . . . . . . . (852) 2887-4788
India
Singapore Singapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (65) 356-9077
South Africa Midrand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (27) 11-654-9700
Vadodara . . . . . . . . . . . (91) 265-2290-315
Spain
Jakarta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (62) 21-573-5680
Barcelona . . . . . . . . . . . . (34) 93-295-9000 Madrid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (34) 91-481-0808
Ireland
Sweden
Dublin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (353) 1-408-9600
Gothenburg . . . . . . . . . . . (46) 8-477-4000 Lund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (46) 8-477-4000
Indonesia
Italy Mazzo di Rho . . . . . . . . . . (39) 02-939-721 Paderno Dugnano. . . . . . . (39) 02-990-611 Tokyo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (81) 3-3206-2781
Hong Kong . . . . . . . . . . . (852) 2887-4788
Manila . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (63) 2-893-9712 Warsaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . (48) 22-639-3511
Calgary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 403-253-0878 Cambridge . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 519-623-1810 Dartmouth . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 902-468-2454 Edmonton . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 780-444-1101 Kitchener . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 519-740-4100 Mississauga . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 905-677-7514 Montreal . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 514-636-6220 Nanaimo . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 250-741-8226 Prince George . . . . . . . . (1) 250-564-6422 Saskatoon . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 306-242-2100 St. Thomas . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 709-773-0036 Sudbury. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 705-522-5121 Thunder Bay . . . . . . . . . . (1) 807-622-2202 Windsor . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 519-944-2611 Winnipeg . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 204-786-3047
China, PRC
Philippines
Vélizy-Villacoublay . . . . . (33) 1-3067-7200
Japan
Santiago . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (56) 2-290-0700
Pakistan Singapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (65) 356-9077
Albertslund . . . . . . . . . . . . (45) 43-466-000
Canada
Chile
Bay of Plenty. . . . . . . . . . . (64) 21-360-290
Aarau . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (41) 62-837-2121 Mägenwil. . . . . . . . . . . . . (41) 62-889-7777
Taiwan Taipei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (886) 2-2586-0933
Korea Seoul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (82) 2-2188-4400
Thailand Chatuchak Bangkok . . . . . (66) 2-936-1500
Malaysia Kuala Lumpar . . . . . . . . . (60) 3-899-61688
Tunisia Ben Arous. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (216) 383-183
Mexico Guadalajara . . . . . . . . . . . . (52) 3-673-2987 Mexico City . . . . . . . . . . . (52) 5-246-2000 Monterrey . . . . . . . . . . . . (52) 8-125-2300 Queretaro . . . . . . . . . . . . (52) 4-212-2577
Morocco Casablanca . . . . . . . . . . . (212) 2-48-56-00
Myanmar Singapore
Switzerland
. . . . . . . . . . . (65) 356-9077
The Netherlands Uithoorn. . . . . . . . . . . . . (31) 297-543-500
New Zealand Christchurch. . . . . . . . . . . (64) 3-379-1052 Otago . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (64) 3-477-4032 Waikato . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (64) 21-827588 Wellington . . . . . . . . . . . . (64) 4-566-6120 Hawkes Bay . . . . . . . . . . . (64) 6-870-3020 New Plymouth . . . . . . . . . (64) 6-758-5715
Turkey Istanbul . . . . . . . . . . . . (90) 216-469-06-00
United Arab Emirates Dubai . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (971) 4-3211-814
United Kingdom Milton Keynes. . . . . . . . (44) 1908-371-144 Telford/Shropshire . . . . (44) 1952-677-033
Venezuela Caracas . . . . . . . . . . . . . (58) 212-943-2311 Maracaibo . . . . . . . . . . . (58) 261-798-0828 Puerto La Cruz. . . . . . . (58) 281-281-8152
Vietnam Singapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (65) 356-9077 0
Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Sales Offices
United States United States Alabama Birmingham . . . . . . . . . . (1) 205-988-4280 Huntsville . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 256-772-1747 Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 256-342-1944
Alaska
Indiana
Nevada
Evansville. . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 812-422-6248 Fort Wayne . . . . . . . . . . (1) 260-482-1896 Gary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 219-769-7770 Indianapolis . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 317-334-9592
Phoenix, AZ . . . . . . . . . (1) 602-944-3303 Sacramento, CA . . . . . . . (1) 916-355-1242 Salt Lake City, UT . . . . . (1) 801-269-8102
Iowa
Portland, ME. . . . . . . . . . (1) 207-879-6041
Arizona
Cedar Rapids . . . . . . . . . (1) 319-386-6000 Davenport . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 563-386-6000 Des Moines. . . . . . . . . . . (1) 319-386-6000 Sumner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 563-578-8124
Phoenix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 602-944-3303
Kansas
Arkansas Little Rock . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 501-376-1771
Kansas City. . . . . . . . . . . (1) 913-894-9666 Wichita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 316-636-2330
California
Kentucky
Anaheim . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 714-758-8050 Fresno. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 559-447-5309 Los Angeles . . . . . . . . . . (1) 714-761-4600 Sacramento. . . . . . . . . . . (1) 916-355-1242 San Diego . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 858-292-4016 San Francisco . . . . . . . . . (1) 925-227-0240
Louisiana
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 907-563-5229 Seattle, WA . . . . . . . . . . (1) 425-746-2840
Lexington . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 859-224-2322 Louisville . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 502-254-8755
Denver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 303-279-6444
Baton Rouge . . . . . . . . . . (1) 225-755-6367 New Orleans . . . . . . . . . (1) 504-888-2281 Shreveport . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 318-636-7777 Shreveport . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 318-222-9431 Sulphur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 337-625-7700
Connecticut
Maine
Boston, MA . . . . . . . . . . (1) 508-485-4447 Branford . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 203-483-8727 Enfield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 860-253-5374
Portland . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 207-879-6041
Maryland
Delaware
Massachusetts
Colorado
Philadelphia, PA . . . . . . . (1) 610-650-6840
Florida Jacksonville . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 904-296-6229 Miami . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 954-888-9193 Orlando . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 407-872-0355 Tampa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 813-289-5320
Georgia Atlanta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 770-754-4442 Dublin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 478-274-2600 Lawrenceville . . . . . . . . . (1) 770-277-0277 Savannah . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 912-727-3382
Hawaii Honolulu. . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 808-845-7471
Idaho Portland, OR . . . . . . . . . (1) 503-670-6540 Salt Lake City, UT . . . . . (1) 801-269-8102 Seattle, WA . . . . . . . . . . (1) 425-746-2840
Illinois Bloomington . . . . . . . . . . (1) 630-325-6750 Champaign . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 217-373-0800 Chicago. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 630-325-6750 Rockford. . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 815-229-0920
Baltimore . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 410-953-0391 Boston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 508-485-4447
Michigan Ann Arbor . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 734-998-5380 Detroit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 248-280-7000 Flint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 810-733-3560 Gladstone . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 906-428-9923 Grand Haven . . . . . . . . . (1) 616-842-6501 Kalamazoo . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 269-792-8940 Lansing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 517-327-8400
Minnesota Minneapolis. . . . . . . . . . . (1) 651-633-8015
Missouri Springfield . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 417-890-8004
Montana Billings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 406-245-0765 Denver, CO . . . . . . . . . . (1) 303-279-6444 Minneapolis, MN . . . . . . (1) 651-633-8015 Seattle, WA . . . . . . . . . . (1) 425-746-2840
Nebraska
New Hampshire New Jersey Parsippany(New York). . (1) 973-263-4600
New Mexico Albuquerque, NM. . . . . . (1) 505-797-5765 Phoenix, AZ . . . . . . . . . . (1) 602-944-3303
New York Albany. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 518-238-1297 New York. . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 973-263-4600 Rochester . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 585-244-3000 Syracuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 315-682-2202
North Carolina Charlotte . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 704-525-1205 Raleigh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 919-380-9340
North Dakota Fargo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 701-239-4187
Ohio Cincinnati . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 513-831-2400 Cleveland . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 440-746-4792 Columbus . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 614-898-7900 Toledo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 419-861-3190
Oklahoma Oklahoma City . . . . . . . . (1) 405-879-0072 Tulsa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 918-663-5120
Oregon Eugene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 541-345-9644 Portland . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 503-670-6540
Pennsylvania Bloomsburg . . . . . . . . . . (1) 570-387-1300 Erie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 814-838-9452 Philadelphia . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 610-650-6840 Pittsburgh . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 724-873-7787 York . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 717-767-5477
Rhode Island Boston, MA. . . . . . . . . . . (1) 508-485-4447
South Carolina Columbia . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 803-256-0388 Greenville . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 864-288-4472
South Dakota Minneapolis, MN . . . . . . (1) 651-633-8015
Omaha . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 402-339-8373
21-3
Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Sales Offices
United States United States Tennessee Chattanooga . . . . . . . . . . (1) 423-899-3881 Kingsport . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 423-349-2313 Knoxville. . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 865-588-0591 Memphis . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 901-362-1616 Nashville . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 615-503-2340
Texas Austin . . . (Round Rock)(1) 512-246-8087 Beaumont . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 409-835-4007 Dallas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 972-417-5400 El Paso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 915-587-0169 Houston . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 281-367-5525 Lubbock . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 806-745-9785 San Antonio . . . . . . . . . . (1) 210-829-7016 Tyler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 903-593-7540
21-4
Utah
West Virginia
Salt Lake City . . . . . . . . . (1) 801-269-8102
Charleston . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 304-760-1021
Vermont
Wisconsin
Enfield, CT . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 860-253-5374
Appleton. . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 920-731-3202 Milwaukee. . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 414-359-9700 Wausau. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 715-848-0850
Virginia Richmond . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 804-330-7000 Roanoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 540-591-2000 Virginia Beach . . . . . . . . . (1) 757-428-4743
Washington Seattle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 425-746-2840 Spokane . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1) 509-325-8126
Washington, D.C. Washington, D.C.. . . . . . (1) 703-516-8227 Baltimore, MD . . . . . . . . (1) 410-953-0391
Wyoming Denver, CO . . . . . . . . . . (1) 303-279-6444 Salt Lake City, UT . . . . . (1) 801-269-8102
